ahvary  of  Che  ti\eolo0(cal  Seminary 

PRINCETON  •  NEW  JERSEY 


•(I^^ 


PRESENTED  BY 

Rufus  K.  LeFevre 


JUL  16  1952 


DISCIPLINES^*%^U^ 


/ 


NITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST 


PART  I. 
IN  ENGLISH,  1814-1841. 

PART  II. 
IN  GERMAN,  1814-1819,  1841. 


TRANSLATED  AND  REPRINTED  FROM  THE  ORIGINALS. 


EDITED   BY 

Prof.  A.  W.  Drury,  D.D. 


DAYTON,  OHIO: 

United  Beethren  Publishing  Hoxtse, 

W.  J.  Shuey,  Publisher. 

1895. 


Copyright,  1895, 
By  W.  J.  SHtTEY,  Publisher. 


CONTENTS. 


Introduction,  ---- '.....v 

PART  I. 

DISCIPLINES  IN  ENGLISH. 

Discipline  Prior  to  1815.  Translated  by  Prof.  A.  W.  Drury,  D.D.,  -  -  3 
Discipline  of  1815.  Translated  by  Prof.  A.  W.  Drury,  D.D.,  ...  7 
Discipline  of  1817.    Translated  by  Rev.  E.  Light,  D.D.,         -       -       -       -    23 

Discipline  of  1817— Edition  of  1819, 43 

Discipline  of  1821, 67 

Discipline  of  1825,       -------- 93 

Discipline  of  1829, - 117 

Discipline  of  1833,       -       -       -       - I37 

Discipline  of  1837, 163 

Discipline  of  1841,       - 199 

Certification, 232 

PART  II. 

DISCIPLINES  IN  GERMAN. 

Discipline  Prior  to  1815, -....3 

Discipline  of  1815, 7 

Discipline  of  1817, 25 

Discipline  of  1817— Edition  of  1819, ....47 

Discipline  of  1841,       ---..........73 

Certification, I09 


Hi 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  republication  of  the  early  Disciplines  of  the  Church  of 
the  United  Brethren  in  Christ  has  long  been  regarded  not  only 
as  desirable,  but  as  necessary.  Of  the  edition  of  the  Discipline 
issued  after  the  first  General  Conference,  convened  in  1815,  but 
a  single  copy  is  known  to  be  extant.  An  earlier  Discipline, 
assigned  to  the  year  18 14,  is  extant  in  a  single  manuscript  copy. 
Other  Disciplines  are  getting  to  be  almost  equally  rare.  For- 
tunately, with  the  exception  of  a  few  mutilated  phages  in  the 
Discipline  of  1815  and  the  absence  of  a  number  of  the  pages 
of  the  Discipline  of  1829,  the  entire  list  of  Disciplines  is  yet 
preserved  intact  at  the  Publishing  House.  The  Historical 
Society,  founded  in  1885,  has  awakened  a  new  and  special  inter- 
est in  the  early  archives  of  the  Church.  The  fit  thing  would 
have  been  for  the  Historical  Societj'  to  have  begun  a  series 
of  Historical  Society  publications.  But  in  the  absence  of  special 
funds  for  this  purpose,  the  most  that  the  Historical  Society 
could  do  was  to  enlist  itself  on  the  editorial  side  of  the  work 
and  leave  the  publishing  to  the  Publishing  House,  trusting 
that  the  interest  in  the  volumes  published  will  lead  to  the  reim- 
bursing of  the  House  for  all  money  expended.  A  second  volume, 
consisting  of  the  General  and  Annual  Conference  minutes  up 
to  1830  or  1833,  has  already  been  arranged  for.  Other  volumes 
should  follow  later. 

The  present  volume  is  not  a  history  of  the  Disciplines,  but  a 
publication  of  the  Disciplines  themselves  down  to  the  year  1841. 
As  the  Church  began  among  the  Germans  and  then  passed  over 
prevailingly  to  the  English  side,  the  German  form  in  the  earlier 
Disciplines  requires  special  attention,  while  in  the  later  Dis- 
ciplines the  English  form  holds  the  more  important  place.  At 
a  session  of  the  Board  of  Managers  of  the  Historical  Society 
the  writer  was  asked  to  take  editorial  charge  of  the  two  volumes 
proposed,  and  to  call  to  his  assistance  what  help  might  be 
necessary.     He  accordingly  has  translated  the  Disciplines  of 


VI  INTRODUCTION 

1814  and  1815,  and  Rev.  E.  Light,  English  and  German  chaplain 
of  the  Central  National  Soldiers'  Home,  has  furnished  the  trans- 
lation for  the  Discipline  of  181 7.  The  edition  of  the  Discipline 
bearing  date  "  1819  "  and  all  others  immediately  following  were  at 
the  time  translated  from  the  German  to  the  English  under  the 
authority  of  the  General  Conference.  Since  1S37  the  English 
form  has  been  the  standard.  The  Disciplines  are  here  reproduced 
as  found,  no  effort  being  made  to  correct  errors,  typographical 
or  otherwise. 

As  the  present  plan  contemplates  giving  the  Disciplines  rather 
than  a  comment  on  their  contents,  after  a  few  explanations 
included  in  this  preface,  the  Disciplines  will  follow  without 
note  or  comment. 

The  Discipline  occupying  the  first  place  in  the  following  pages, 
namely,  the  manuscript  Discipline  assigned  to  1814,  preserved,  no 
one  knows  how  long,  at  the  Publishing  House,  belongs,  beyond 
all  doubt,  to  the  relative  position  indicated.  The  first  germs  of 
Discipline  were  taken  from  the  rules  adopted  in  1785  for  Otter- 
bein's  church  in  Baltimore.  In  allusion  to  the  part  performed  by 
the  Conference  of  1789,  Mr.  Spayth  iises  the  following  language: 
"The disciplinary  rules  which  governed  the  Church  from  the  first 
conference  held  in  Baltimore,  1789,  up  to  1815,  the  reader  will  not 
be  displeased  to  find  here  in  chief,  although  noticed  before, 
comprising  the  Confession  of  Faith,  same  as  in  Discipline,  and 
the  following  rules."  Especially  with  reference  to  the  Confession 
of  Faith  the  above  statement  seems  to  be  in  the  main  correct. 

The  rules  of  Discipline  cited  by  Mr.  Spayth  are  more  closely  in 
accord  with  the  rules  adopted  by  the  Baltimore  congregation  in 
1785  than  with  the  special  rules  handed  down  in  definite  form. 
These  rules  seem  to  have  been  given  special  definiteness,  begin- 
ning with  1809,  and  by  1813  and  1814  to  have  attained  that  pre- 
cision with  which  they  appear  in  the  manuscript  Discipline  and 
entered  into  the  Discipline  of  1815  under  the  head  of  duties  of 
"Members  in  General." 

As  bearing  on  the  date  of  the  manuscript  Discipline,  no  one 
can  fail  to  see  that  it  is  the  basis  of  the  Discipline  of  1815.  That 
a  definite  Discipline  was  in  existence  in  1813  is  clearly  shown 
by  the  following  extract  from  the  minutes  of  that  year  of  the 
Eastern  Conference:  "Resolved,  That  the  Confession  of  Faith  and 
the  Christian  Discipline  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ  be 
printed."     In  1814,  at  the  session  of  the  Conference  in  the  East, 


INTRODUCTION  vii 

according  to  Mr.  Spayth,  "two  manuscript  copies  of  [a  Disci- 
pline] were  laid  on  the  table,  one  by  Bro.  Christopher  Grosh  and 
the  other  b}''  Bro.  C.  Newcomer."  The  first  error  in  the  statement 
is  in  affirming  that  two  Disciplines  were  presented,  instead  of  one 
Discipline  signed  b}^  both  of  the  persons  named,  due  in  part 
perhaps  to  the  fact  that  in  1812  Mr.  Grosh  had  presented  to  the 
Conference  an  elaborate  confession  over  his  own  name.  The 
second  error  is  in  the  implication  that  what  was  presented  was 
simply  offered  and  not  adopted.  A  point  indicating  the  adoption 
of  the  Discipline  is  that  Newcomer,  who  had  been  previousl}' 
elected  bishop  for  one  year,  was  in  1814  elected  bishop  for  three 
years,  according  to  the  article  on  that  subject  in  the  manuscript 
Discipline.  Another  testimony  is  a  paragraph  in  the  Miami 
Conference  minutes  of  1814,  which  recites  that  the  Discipline  of 
the  Church,  evidently  that  adopted  earlier  in  the  year  by  the 
Conference  in  the  East,  was  protested  against.  The  article  in 
the  manuscript  Discipline  on  temperance,  really  in  advance  of 
the  times  and  the  existing  sentiment  of  the  Church,  will  awaken 
special  interest. 

Miami  Conference,  after  the  action  just  referred  to,  took  the 
initiative  in  convening  the  first  General  Conference,  in  1815, 
which  revised  the  previous  Discipline  and  provided  for  its  print- 
ing, as  shown  in  the  following  extract  from  the  minutes:  "The 
Confession  of  Faith  and  the  Discipline  were  considered;  some- 
what enlarged,  some  things  omitted;  on  the  whole  improved  and 
ordered  printed." 

Though  generally,  and  properly,  called  the  "Discipline  of 
1815,"  the  date  on  the  printed  Discipline  was  "1816,"  doubtless 
due  to  the  fact  that  the  printing  was  delayed  till  that  year. 
This  Discipline  was  exclusively  in  the  German  language.  It 
may  be  proper  to  say  that  the  word  "church,"  either  the  English 
word  or  the  German  equivalent,  except  in  composition,  does  not 
occur  in  any  of  the  early  disciplines;  yet  in  translation  the  word 
* '  church ' '  has  in  some  cases  been  used  where  clearness  seemed 
to  require  it.  In  early  usage  the  term  ''society''  was  used  for  a 
local  church,  and  also  for  the  church  at  large.  In  the  latter 
sense,  however,  sometimes  the  expression  was  the  "whole 
society."  In  the  German  the  term  for  circuit,  presiding  elder's 
district,  and  conference  district,  and  for  some  other  uses  as  well, 
was  the  same.  The  more  common  English  term  in  each  of  these 
cases  has  been  used  in  the  translation. 


Vlll  INTRODUCTION 

The  second  General  Conference  met  after  an  interval  of  two 
years,  in  1817,  though  from  the  first  it  was  intended  that  the 
regular  interval  should  be  four  j'ears.  After  the  fuller  and 
printed  Discipline  had  been  resolved  upon  in  1815,  there  were 
misgivings  among  the  members  of  the  General  Conference  as  to 
whether  too  miich  of  form,  after  the  manner  of  some  of  the  old 
and  lifeless  churches,  had  not  been  introduced,  and  so  the  next 
General  Conference  was  ordered  to  be  held  in  two  years.  Other 
reasons  also  ma}'  have  contributed  to  this. 

The  Discipline  bearing  date  "1819"  has  been  an  enigma  to 
many,  as  no  General  Conference  was  held  betw-een  181 7  and 
1821.  The  explanation  is  this:  The  General  Conference  of  1817 
had  ordered  the  Discipline  printed  in  English  as  well  as  in  Ger- 
man. The  Discipline  bearing  date  "1817"  was  in  German 
exclusivel)'.  In  1819,  in  order  to  comply  with  the  order  of  the 
General  Conference,  a  new  edition  was  printed  having  the 
German  text  and  the  English  translation  on  opposite  pages.  A 
slight  difiiculty  is  occasioned  b}'  the  fact  that  the  German  text 
of  1819  varies  somewhat  from  the  German  text  of  1817.  It  is 
doubtless  the  case  that  the  form  in  which  things  should  appear 
was  left  largely  with  the  editor  of  the  Discipline,  who  was 
usually  the  secretar}^  of  the  General  Conference.  In  18 17  Rev. 
H.  G.  Spayth  was  the  secretary-,  and  he  doubtless  prepared  the 
Discipline  of  1817  and  no  doubt  also  the  German  text  and  trans- 
lation of  1819.  That  the  variations  in  the  edition  of  1819  were 
not  due  simply  to  liberty  taken  by  the  editor  of  the  Discipline 
is  evident  b}'  the  fact  that  subsequent  General  Conferences 
retained  in  the  main  the  changes  made.  The  method  followed 
was  the  regular  method  for  the  time.  Yet  the  differences  in 
the  body  of  the  two  editions  were,  for  the  most  part,  purely 
verbal.  A  greater  difference  appears  in  the  appendix,  which 
may  or  may  not  have  been  regarded  as  part  of  the  Discipline 
proper.  In  the  appendix  the  forms  for  "Ordinations"  and  the 
"  IMarriage  Ceremony"  were  varied  somewhat  and  consider- 
ably extended,  and  an  entirely  new  article  was  added  on  the 
"Necessity  of  Union  Among  Ourselves."  The  most  n;.tural 
explanation  for  the  appearance  of  the  new  article  is  that  it  was 
adopted  in  181 7,  but  for  some  cause  had  not  been  incor])orated 
in  the  Discipline  published  that  year.  The  Di.scipline  of  1817, 
in  the  section  on  the  origin  of  the  Church,  inserted  for  the 
first  time  a  list  of  the  preachers  present  at  the  Conference  of 


INTRODUCTION  IX 

1800.  The  list  was  in  part  incorrect.  The  edition  of  1819  gave 
the  list  correctly,  with  the  exception  that  the  name  of  Jacob 
Baulus  should  probably  be  added.  In  addition  to  giving  this 
correction,  the  edition  of  1819  inserted  a  short  account  of  the 
conferences  of  1789  and  1791.  The  edition  of  1819  has  special 
importance,  in  that  it  established,  through  the  English  transla- 
tion then  made,  what  continued  to  be  the  basis  of  the  English  Dis- 
cipline. From  this  time  on  the  changes  in  the  German  editions 
of  the  Discipline  are  sufficiently  indicated  by  the  English  text. 
Beginning  with  1837  the  German  text  was  a  translation  of  the 
English  text. 

The  Discipline  of  182 1  will  awaken  special  interest  because 
of  its  references  to  slavery  and  intoxicating  drinks.  The  Dis- 
cipline of  1825  gives  an  important  addition  to  the  Confession 
of  Faith,  which  new  feature  was  itself  modified  in  1841,  and 
again  in  1857.  For  the  manifold  changes  made  from  time  to 
time,  the  reader  is  referred  to  the  republished  Disciplines  them- 
selves. The  Discipline  of  1829  gives  the  first  law  on  Free- 
masonry. The  Discipline  of  1833  shows  a  disposition  to  guard 
more  carefully  the  Confession  of  Faith.  The  Discipline  of  1837 
gives  the  new  Constitution  adopted  that  year,  which  was  valid 
from  the  first,  but  was  to  be  made  binding  under  the  terms 
of  the  final  article  by  action  of  the  General  Conference  four 
years  later.  The  Discipline  of  1841  gives  the  "  new  constitution  " 
adopted  that  year  by  the  General'  Conference.  The  conception 
and  action  of  the  General  Conference  of  1841  were  doubtless 
foreshadowed  by  the  following  editorial  expression  in  the  Relig- 
ious Telescope  of  November  25,  1840:  "Any  act  of  the  General 
Conference  is  the  act  of  the  whole  Church  through  their  repre- 
sentatives thus  assembled."  Rev.  A.  Biddle,  a  surviving  mem- 
ber of  the  Conference  of  1841,  states  that  the  amendment  clause 
of  the  Constitution  then  adopted  was  understood  at  the  time 
as  meaning  that  the  action  of  the  General  Conference  through 
the  required  majority  was  the  action  of  the  whole  Church.  An 
item  of  interest,  furnished  also  by  Mr.  Biddle,  is  that  the  draft 
of  the  Constitution,  as  submitted  to  the  General  Conference, 
was  drawn  up  by  Mr.  Spayth. 

On  some  accounts  it  is  believed  to  be  of  sufficient  interest  and 
importance  to  give  the  German  text  of  the  Discipline  for  1841. 
This  will  accordingly  be  found  following  the  German  text  of 
1819. 


X  INTRODUCTION 

It  is  sincerely  hoped  that  this  volume  will  prove  but  the 
beginning  in  making  easily  accessible  the  early  documents  and 
publications  of  the  Church,  and  that  through  the  materials  thus 
furnished  a  more  intelligent  interest  will  be  awakened  in  the 
history  and  work  of  the  Church. 

A.  W.  Drury. 

Dayton,  Ohio,  August  15,  1895. 


PART  I. 

Disciplines  in  English, 
1814-1841. 


THE   DOCTRINE  OF  THE   UNITED   BRETHREN   IN 
CHRIST. 

Article  i.  In  the  name  of  God  we  confess  before  all  men, 
that  we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  Father,  Son,  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one;  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  Holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence  with  both; 
that  this  God  created  heaven  and  earth  and  all  that  in  them 
is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and  sustains,  governs,  protects, 
and  supports  the  same. 

Art.  2.  We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ;  that  he  is  very  God  and 
man,  Saviour  and  Redeemer  of  the  whole  world;  that  all  men 
through  him  may  be  saved  if  they  will;  that  this  Jesus  suffered 
for  us;  that  he  died  and  was  buried,  rose  on  the  third  day, 
ascended  into  heaven,  and  that  he  will  come  again,  at  the  last 
day,  to  judge  the  living  and  the  dead. 

Art.  3.  We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost;  that  he  proceeds  from 
the  Father  and  the  Son;  that  we  through  him  must  be  sanctified 
and  receive  faith,  thereby  being  cleansed  from  all  filthiness  of  the 
flesh  and  spirit. 

Art.  4.  We  believe  that  the  Bible  is  the  word  of  God;  that 
it  contains  the  true  way  to  our  sotils'  well-being  and  salvation ; 
that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge  and  receive  it, 
with  the  influences  of  the  Spirit  of  God,  as  his  only  rule  and 
guide;  and  that  without  repentance,  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  for- 
giveness of  sins,  and  following  after  Jesus  Christ,  no  one  can  be 
a  true  Christian. 

Art.  5.  We  believe  that  the  doctrine  which  the  Holy  Scrip- 
tures contain,  namely,  the  fall  in  Adam  and  salvation  through 
Jesus  Christ,  shall  be  preached  and  proclaimed  throughout  the 
whole  world. 

We  recommend  that  the  outward  signs  and  ordinances,  namely, 
baptism  and  the  remembrance  of  the  Lord  in  the  distribution  of 
the  bread  and  wine,  be  observed;  also  the  washing  of  feet,  where 
the  same  is  desired. 


4  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

NOW   [FOLLOW]   THE  RULES   OF  THE   UNITED 
BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

Article  i.  Only  such  brethren  shall  be  acknowledged  as 
preachers  by  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ,  who  have  been  pro- 
posed at  the  conference  or  a  great  meeting  and  by  the  same  have 
been  regularly  examined  and  have  answered  the  following  ques- 
tions: whether  he  believes  in  Christ,  whether  he  has  received  the 
forgiveness  of  his  sins,  whether  he  follows  after  peace  and  holi- 
ness, whether  the  salvation  of  his  soul,  along  with  the  salvation  of 
his  fellow-men,  lies  on  his  heart,  whether  he  will  submit  him- 
self to  the  counsel  of  his  brethren.  Such  persons  shall  receive 
a  written  permission. 

Art.  2.  Such  preachers  shall,  at  the  conference,  every  three 
years,  elect  bishops  by  a  majority  of  votes. 

Art.  3.  W/ial  are  the  duties  of  a  bishop  ?  ( i )  To  preside  at 
the  conference.  (2)  He  shall  have  the  right,  with  the  consent 
of  the  conference,  to  act.  (3)  By  the  consent  of  the  conference 
he  has  the  liberty  to  choose  elders. 

Art.  4.  To  whom  are  the  bishops,  elders,  and  preachers  answer- 
able for  immoral  conduct"?  To  the  general  \^allgemeine'\  confer- 
ence. But  where  the  conduct  is  contrary  to  the  Bible  and  the 
evidence  is  sufficient,  the  one  to  whom  the  case  is  known  shall 
take  other  preachers  with  him  and  investigate  the  case.  If  it  is 
found  to  be  contrary  to  the  Bible,  then  shall  the  accused  remain 
silent  till  the  conference. 

Art.  5.  Every  preacher  shall  use  diligence  to  build  up  the 
Church,  as  far  as  possible,  by  doctrine  and  life,  by  prayer  and  a 
godly  walk.  He  shall  seek  to  become  acquainted  with  all  the 
members  of  his  society,  so  that  he  can  call  the  same  by  name, 
and  when  it  is  possible,  to  talk  with  them  about  the  salvation  of 
their  souls. 

Art.  6.  In  each  society  leaders  shall  be  chosen,  whose  duty  it 
shall  be  to  open  and  close  the  prayer- meetings  and  private  meet- 
ings; also  to  visit  the  sick,  and  to  exhort  and  keep  in  love  every 
member  of  the  society,  and  to  keep  a  watch  upon  themselves. 

Art.  7.  Every  member  of  the  Church  shall  confess  that  he 
receives  the  Bible  as  the  word  of  God;  that  from  now  on  he  will 
strive  from  his  heart  to  .seek  his  welfare  in  Christ,  and  to  work 
out  his  salvation  with  fear  and  trembling,  and  flee  the  eternal 
wrath  of  God. 


DISCIPLINE  PRIOR  TO   1815.  5 

Art.  8.  Every  member  shall  endeavor  to  lead  a  strict  and 
godly  life,  to  be  diligent  in  prayer,  especially  in  private,  and 
whenever  possible,  to  be  present  at  all  meetings,  both  public 
services  and  prayer-meetings,  for  his  own  edification. 

Art.  9.  Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pray  with 
their  families  morning  and  evening  and  to  set  them  a  good 
example  in  all  Christian  virtues. 

Art.  10.  Every  member  shall  endeavor  to  walk  circumspectly 
as  in  the  presence  of  God,  to  habituate  himself  to  communion 
with  God  in  his  business  occupations,  to  practice  love  toward 
friend  and  foe,  to  do  good  to  the  poor,  and  seek  to  be  a  follower 
of  Jesus  Christ  indeed. 

Art.  II.  Every  member  shall  abstain  from  strong  drink,  and 
use  it  only  on  necessity  as  medicine. 

Art.  12.  Every  member  shall  abstain  from  ordinary  occupa- 
tions on  Sunday,  buying  or  selling,  but  spend  the  time  in  devo- 
tion, in  singing  spiritual  songs  to  the  [honor]  and  glory  of  God. 

Art.  13.  Every  member  of  this  Church  shall  contribute 
quarterly,  with  a  free  will,  as  much  as  his  circumstances  will 
allow  for  the  support  of  the  traveling  preachers. 

Art.  1*4.  It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  of  this  Church  to 
live  a  peaceable,  quiet,  and  godly  life  in  his  intercourse  with  all 
men,  as  it  behooves  a  Christian  to  live  in  peace;  especially  shall 
each  one  be  obedient  to  the  government  and  the  laws  of  the  land, 
for  government  is  ordained  of  God. 

Art.  15.  If  disputes  should  arise  between  two  or  more  breth- 
ren of  the  Church  concerning  debts,  or  any  other  cause,  and  the 
disputing  parties  cannot  come  to  an  agreement,  then  the  preacher 
who  has  the  oversight  of  the  society  shall  investigate  the  matter, 
and  shall  recommend  to  the  disputing  parties  a  reference  to  a 
committee,  which  shall  consist  of  three  members  of  the  society, 
of  whom  the  plaintiff  shall  choose  one,  the  defendant  another, 
[and  these  two  a  third,]  and  these  three  shall  settle  the  difiiculties. 
In  case,  however,  one  of  the  contending  parties  should  be  dis- 
satisfied with  the  decision,  he  may  appeal  to  the  next  great 
ipeeting,  by  making  this  known  to  the  preachers,  to  have  a  second 
settlement.  If  the  preachers  find  sufiicient  reason  therefor,  a 
second  settlement  shall  be  allowed,  in  which  case  each  of  the 
parties  shall  choose  two  members  of  the  Church,  and  these  four  a 
fifth,  who  shall  decide  the  difficulties  fully.  If  one  of  the  persons 
should  still  not  be  satisfied  with  this  decision,  he  thereby  excludes 


6  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

himself  from  the  Church.  If  a  member  of  the  Church  should 
refuse,  in  case  of  debts  or  other  difficulties,  to  allow  the  matter 
to  be  settled,  after  this  has  been  recommended  to  him  bj'  the 
preachers  who  have  oversight  of  the  society,  or  should  a  member 
of  the  Church  begin  suit  before  the  civil  court  before  the  fore- 
going regulations  have  been  followed,  he  shall  be  expelled  from 
the  Church,  unless  the  difficulties  are  of  such  a  kind  that  thej' 
demand  and  justify  a  legal  decision. 

Christopher  Grosh  and  Christian  Newcomer. 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE 


United  Brethren  in  Christ. 


HAGERSTOWN  : 

Printed  by  John  F.  Koch. 

1816. 


OF  THE  ORIGIN   OF  THE   UNITED   BRETHREN 
IN   CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  Lord  our  God  to 
awaken  persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  to  raise  up  anew 
a  fallen  Christianity  and  preach  the  doctrine  of  Christ  crucified 
in  its  purity. 

At  the  same  time  he  remembered  also  the  Germans  in  America, 
who  lived  here  and  there  in  this  extended  country,  and  had 
therefore  but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  preaching  of  the 
gospel  of  the  cross  for  their  edification,  and  but  seldom  in  their 
mother  tongue,  and  in  many  places  not  declared  with  the  purit}' 
and  earnestness  demanded. 

Among  others  he  awakened  an  Otterbein,  a  Boehm,  and  a 
Geeting,  and  armed  them  with  his  spirit,  grace,  and  power,  to 
labor  in  his  neglected  vineyard,  that  he  might  call  also,  among  the 
Germans  in  America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men  obeyed 
the  call  of  their  Lord  and  Master,  saw  the  divine  blessing  on 
their  labors,  and  established  in  various  places  excellent  societies, 
and  led  to  Chri>st  many  precious  souls.  Their  sphere  of  action  at 
length  extended  itself  more  and  more,  so  that  they  were  com- 
pelled to  look  about  for  more  laborers  in  the  vine3'ard;  for  the 
harvest  was  so  great,  and  the  laborers  but  few.  God  awakened 
othej-s,  whom  he  also  made  willing  to  consecrate  their  powers  to 
the  Lord.  Such  persons  were  accepted  by  one  or  another  of  the 
preachers  and  by  them  designated  to  the  preacher's  ofiice. 

The  number  of  members  in  the  different  parts  of  the  Church 
increased  from  time  to  time,  and  extended  through  the  States  of 
Pennsylvania,  Maryland,  and  Virginia.  At  the  same  time,  at 
great  meetings,  Otterbein  held  at  times  conferences  with  the 
preachers  who  were  present.  He  placed  before  them  the  impor- 
tance of  the  preacher's  office,  how  necessary  it  was  to  use  all 
earnestness  in  the  work  of  saving  souls.  They  took,  therefore, 
counsel  as  to  how  the\'  might  be  most  useful,  and  received  such 
persons  as  fellow-laborers  of  whom  the3'  had  reason  to  believe 
that  they  had  experienced  religion  in  their  hearts,  were  faithful, 

9 


lO  UNITED    BRETHREX    DISCIPLINES. 

and  had  qualified  minds.  These  persons  they  armed  for  the 
work  of  the  Lord.  The  number  of  members  continued  to  in- 
crease more  and  more.  In  order  now  to  Uibor  in  a  truly  useful 
and  church-like  waj-,  the  preachers  saw  themselves  obliged  to 
appoint  a  conference  where  they  might  come  together  to  unite 
themselves  properly;  because  some  were  Reformed,  others  Luth- 
erans, others  INIennonites,  etc.  They  therefore  appointed  the 
25th  of  September,  1800,  at  the  house  of  Frederick  Kemp,  in 
Frederick  Count}-,  Maryland,  for  the  conference.  There  came 
together  thirteen  preachers,  who  united  themselves  into  a  society 
which  bears  the  name,  "The  United  Brethren  in  Christ."  The}' 
elected  William  Otterbein  and  ]SIartin  Boehm  as  superintendents 
or  bishops.  Each  one  was  allowed  liberty  to  baptize  accord- 
ing to  his  own  view. 

From  this  time  forth  the  societ}'-  increased  more  and  more. 
Preachers  were  appointed  who  traveled  continuall}'  (because  the 
preaching  places  could  not  otherwise  be  supplied).  The  work 
extended  itself  into  the  States  of  Ohio  and  Kentuck}-.  It  became 
now  necessary  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  State  of  Ohio,  be- 
cause it  was  too  difiicult  to  go  annually  so  far  to  the  conference. 

Meantime,  Brother  Boehm  died  and  Brother  Otterbein  desired 
that  a  bishop  should  be  elected  (because  he  was  himself  no 
longer  able  to  superintend)  who  should  take  charge  of  the 
work  and  thereby  preserve  discipline  and  order,  because  it  was 
determined  at  the  first  conference  that  if  one  of  the  bishops 
should  die  another  should  be  elected.  Therefore,  Brother 
Christian  Newcomer  was  elected  bishop  for  a  certain  time  to  take 
the  oversight  of  the  Church.  • 

For  a  long  time  the  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  Church  had 
been  deeply  felt,  and  already  at  different  times  something  thereat 
had  been  done.  Finally,  it  was  resolved  at  the  co'iference  in  the 
State  of  Ohio,  that  a  head  or  general  conference  snould  be  held 
which  should  undertake  the  work  of  making  the  discipline 
in  some  respects  more  perfect,  as  might  seem  best  for  the  Church. 

The  members  of  this  conference  were  to  be  elected  from  the 
preachers  in  the  various  parts  of  the  Church  by  the  members 
of  the  Church  through  a  majorit)'  vote.  There  were  present  at 
the  conference  the  following  preachers,  namely:  Christian  New- 
comer, Abraham  Hiestand,  Andrew  Zeller,  Daniel  Troyer, 
George  Beneduni,  Abraham  Troxel,  Christian  Berger,  Abraham 
Mayer,  John    Snyder,   Henry    Kumler,    Henry    Spayth,    Isaac 


DISCIPLINE    OP   1815.  II 

Niswander,  Christian  Krum,  and  Jacob  Baulus.  These  met 
June  6,  1815,  near  Mount  Pleasant,  Westmoreland  County,  Penn- 
sylvania, where  they,  after  mature  deliberation,  approved  as 
proper  and  useful  the  following  doctrine  and  rules,  and  delivered 
the  same  in  love  and  humility  to  the  Church,  with  the  sincere 
wish  that  this  doctrine  and  these  rules,  along  with  the  Word 
of  God,  might  be  observed.  For  God  is  a  God  of  order,  and 
where  no  order  or  discipline  is,  there  love  and  fellowship  are  lost. 
Therefore,  let  vis  follow  the  counsel  of  the  Lord,  who  taught  us 
that  we,  through  humility,  should  esteem  one  another  better 
than  ourselves,  and  seek  to  have  the  same  mind  as  Jesus  Christ, 
who  took  upon  him  the  form  of  a  servant  and  became  obedient 
even  unto  the  death  of  the  cross,  that  he  might  obtain  for  us 
grace  and  strength,  that  we,  out  of  love  and  humility,  might 
submit  one  to  another.  Whoever  cannot  submit  himself  lacks 
grace,  love,  and  humility.  Therefore  said  Jesus,  "Whoever 
among  you  desires  to  be  the  greatest,  let  the  same  be  the  servant 
of  others."  Thus  must  we  love  one  another.  Therefore  said 
Jesus,  "Thus  shall  all  men  know  that  3^ou  are  mj-  true  disciples, 
if  you  love  one  another;  and  whoever  has  not  love  abides  in 
death."  Thits  let  us  practice  love,  that  we  may  obtain  the  glory 
which  Jesus  besought  from  his  Fathet  for  his  disciples,  that  we 
may  be  one  even  as  he  and  the  Father  are  one.  Therefore, 
beloved  brethren,  let  us  seek  to  be  like-minded,  in  unison,  helpful, 
no  one  thinking  or  speaking  evil  of  another,  but  imploring  the 
Lord  that  he  will  grant  us  his  Spirit  and  earnestness,  that  we  may 
live  a  true  Christian  life,  to  his  glory  and  to  our  eternal  welfare. 
Amen. 

SECTION  FIRST. 

THE  CONFESSION   OF   FAITH   OF   THE   UNITED   BRETHREN   IN 
CHRIST, 

In  the  name  of  God  we  confess  before  all  men,  that  we  believe 
in  the  only  true  God,  Father,  Son,  and  Holy  Ghost;  that  these 
three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son  in  the  Father,  and 
the  H0I3'  Ghost  equal  in  essence  with  both;  that  this  triune  God 
created  heaven  and  earth,  and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well 
as  invisible,  sustains,  governs,  protects,  and  supports  the  same. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ;  that  he  is  very  God  and  man;  that 


12  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

he,  by  the  Holy  Ghost,  assumed  his  human  nature  in  Mary,  and 
was  born  of  her;  that  he  is  the  Saviour  and  Redeemer  of  the 
M'hole  human  race,  if  they  with  faith  in  him  accept  the  grace 
proffered  in  Jesus;  that  this  Jesus  suffered  and  died  on  the  cross 
for  us,  was  buried,  rose  again  on  the  third  day,  ascended  into 
heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right  hand  of  God  to  intercede  for  us; 
and  that  he  shall  come  again  at  the  last  day,  to  judge  the  living 
and  the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost;  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  Father  and  the  Son ;  that  he  proceeds  from  both ;  that  we  are 
through  him  enlightened;  through  faith  justified  and  sanctified. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  church,  communion  of  saints,  resurrec- 
tion of  the  flesh,  and  a  life  everlasting. 

We  believe  that  the  Bible,  Old  and  New  Testament,  is  the 
word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  true  way  to  our  salvation; 
that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  receive  it  with  the  influ- 
ences of  the  Spirit  of  God,  as  his  only  rule,  and  that  without 
faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  true  penitence,  forgiveness  of  sins,  and 
following  after  Christ,  no  one  can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  believe  that  the  doctrine  which  the  Holy  Scriptures  con- 
tain, namely,  the  fall  in  Adam  and  the  redemption  through 
Jesus  Christ,  shall  be  preached  throughout  the  whole  world. 

We  believe  that  the  outward  means  of  grace  are  to  be  in  use 
in  all  Christian  societies,  namely:  that  baptism  and  the  remem- 
brance of  the  death  of  the  Lord  in  the  distribution  of  the  bread 
and  wine  are  to  be  in  use  among  his  children,  according  to  the 
command  of  the  Lord  Jesus;  the  mode  and  manner,  however, 
shall  be  left  to  the  judgment  of  every  one.  Also,  the  example 
of  feet-washing  remains  free  to  every  one. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

OF  THE  GENERAL  AND  ANNUAL  CONFERENCES. 

In  what  manner  and  order  shall  the  transactions  of  the  con- 
ferences be  conducted  ? 

It  is  desired  that  on  these  occasions  all  things  be  done  as  in 
the  presence  of  God;  that  whoever  has  anything  to  say,  rise  and 
speak  freely  whatever  he  has  in  his  heart. 

How  and  after  what  manner  shall  the  members  of  the  General 
Conference  be  chosen  ? 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1815.  13 

In  every  district  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  such  are  present 
(if  such  are  not  present,  then  the  local  preachers  residing  on 
the  district),  shall  advise  the  societies  that  they  elect  two  elders 
from  their  district.  But  all  of  the  elders  of  the  district  who  are 
capable  of  going  to  the  Conference  shall  be  put  in  nomination 
and  the  same  made  known  some  time  beforehand,  and  those  two 
who  shall  have  a  majority  of  votes  shall  be  the  members  of  the 
General  Conference.  The  votes  taken  aX  each  place  shall  be 
recorded  in  writing  and  be  attested  by  a  preacher  present  or  a 
leader.  The  presiding  elder  of  the  district  shall  examine  the 
statement,  and  should  any  two  have  a  like  number  of  votes,  he 
shall  decide  which  of  them  is  elected.  , 

How  often  shall  the  General  Conference  be  held  ? 

Every  four  years. 

Has  the  General  Conference  any  power  which  the  annual  con- 
ference has  not  ? 

Yes;  it  alone  has  the  power  to  elect  a  bishop  from  the  presid- 
ing elders  every  four  years,  and  to  alter  or  amend  the  discipline 
or  rules  as  it  may  find  proper,  under  the  conditions  and  with 
the  exception  that  no  article  shall  be  established  which  shall 
abolish  or  do  away  the  itinerant  plan.  The  General  Conference 
shall  also  determine  the  districts  where  the  annual  conferences 
shall  be  held. 

Who  are  the  members  of  the  annual  conference? 

All  of  the  elders  and  preachers  who  have  received  a  written 
permission  and  are  in  the  district  of  such  conference  or  shall  be 
received  by  the  same. 

In  what  manner  and  order  shall  the  transactions  be  con- 
ducted ? 

1.  There  shall  first  be  read  a  chapter  from  the  Bible,  and 
brief  remarks  made  thereon;  also  singing  and  prayer  as  often  as 
the  conference  convenes,  with  singing  and  prayer  again  at  the 
close. 

2.  The  conference  shall  elect  a  presiding  elder  and  a  secre- 
tary to  act  with  the  bishop. 

3.  The  preachers  shall  be  examined  as  to  their  conduct 
toward  God,  toward  one  another,  and  toward  their  fellow-men; 
whether  their  conduct  is  blameless;  whether  they  employ  as 
much  time  as  possible  in  extending  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  What  preachers  are  to  be  admitted  on  trial  ? 

5.  What  preachers  must  continue  longer  on  trial  ? 


14  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

6.  Are  any  to  be  elected  elders  ? 

7.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died  ? 

8.  Who  are  the  presiding  elders  ? 

9.  Who  offers  himself  to  travel  ? 

10.  What  has  been  collected  to  meet  contingent  expenses,  and 
what  to  make  up  the  allowance  of  the  traveling  preachers  ?  Has 
reckoning  been  made  with  them  ?  Have  they  received  their 
dues  ? 

11.  When  and  where  shall  the  next  conference  be  held ? 

12.  Have  the  elders  been  ordained  ? 

13.  On  what  circuits  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year.? 

14.  Is  there  anything  more  to  do  ? 

15.  Has  the  conference  appointed  the  districts  within  its 
bounds  for  the  election  of  members  of  the  General  Conference  ? 

16.  Has  all  that  has  been  done  been  entered  upon  the  protocol  ? 


SECTION  THIRD. 

OF  THE  ELECTION  AND  ORDINATION  OF  A  BISHOP,  AND  OF  HIS 
OFFICE  AND  DUTY. 

How  is  a  bishop  constituted  .-* 

The  General  Conference  shall  elect  him  bj-  a  majority  of  votes, 
from  the  presiding  elders  who  have  been  elected  to  the  General 
Conference;  but  the  conference  is  at  liberty  to  retain  a  bishop 
yet  another  four  years.  A  bishop  or  a  bishop-elect  must  be 
capable  of  traveling  the  different  districts  and  conferences; 
otherwise  he  cannot  be  elected.  A  bishop  thus  elected  shall  be 
ordained  by  the  laying  on  of  hands  b)'  a  bishop  and  a  presiding 
elder.  vShould  no  bishop  be  present,  two  presiding  elders  are 
authorized  to  act. 

What  are  the  duties  of  a  bishop? 

1.  To  preside  at  our  conferences,  along  with  a  presiding  elder 
chosen  for  this  purpose. 

2.  He  shall,  along  with  two  presiding  elders  whom  he  may 
choose,  appoint  the  traveling  preachers  to  their  various  circuits; 
provided,  however,  that  no  preacher  shall  remain  longer  than 
three  consecutive  years  at  the  same  place,  unless  on  account  of 
family  circumstances,  and  with  the  consent  of  the  conference, 
no  limits  as  to  the  time  should  be  set. 


DISCIPLINE    OP   1815.  15 

3.  The  bishops  shall  designate  the  districts  to  be  traveled  by 
the  presiding  elders. 

4.  In  the  intervals  of  the  conferences,  he  has  power,  along 
with  the  presiding  elders  in  his  district,  to  change  traveling 
preachers  where  they  think  it  best ;  also  to  receive  or  to  suspend 
preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  He  shall  travel  throughout  the  bounds  of  the  various  con- 
ferences, and  shall  have  in  spiritual  things  the  oversight  of  all 
the  societies. 

6.  To  him  it  belongs  to  perform  the  rite  of  ordination. 

7.  If  a  bishop  ceases  to  serve  the  various  conferences  in  the 
Church  and  to  travel  the  districts,  can  he  still  exercise  his  epis- 
copal office  among  us?  No;  unless  he  should  be  sick,  or  there 
should  be  other  like  circumstances. 

8.  If  at  any  time  it  should  so  occur  that  our  Church,  by  reason 
of  death,  suspension,  or  other  cause,  should  have  no  bishop,  what 
course  shall  be  taken  ?  Each  annual  conference  shall  choose  a 
president  from  the  presiding  elders,  who  shall  serve  in  the 
bishop's  place  during  the  session  of  the  conference.  The  presi- 
dent thus  chosen  shall  also  attend  the  other  conference.  He 
shall  take  his  seat  along  with  the  president  there  chosen,  that  he 
may  act  with  him  in  the  conference,  and  the  president  there 
chosen  shall  in  like  manner  attend  the  other  conference;  so  that 
each  conference  may  know  the  state  of  affairs  in  the  other  con- 
ference, and  that  love  and  communion  may  be  maintained,  etc., 
until  the  General  Conference,  which  shall  again  elect  a  bishop. 


SECTION  FOURTH. 

OF  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS :  THEIR  ELECTION,  OFFICE,  AND 
DUTIES. 

How  shall  the  presiding  elders  be  elected? 

The  bishop  shall  propose  to  the  conference  some  of  the  elders 
who  have  finished  their  probation,  and,  with  the  consent  of  the 
conference,  elect  them  for  two  years. 

What  are  the  duties  of  a  presiding  elder? 

1.  To  travel  the  district  assigned  him,  and  to  preach  as  often 
as  he  can. 

2.  He  shall  have  oversight  of  the  traveling  and  local  preach- 


l6  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

ers  on  his  district,  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  agree- 
ably to  the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
possible  conduct  them,  administer  the  Lord's  Supper,  hold 
quarterly  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters,  and  leaders 
present,  examine  whether  the  traveling  and  local  preachers  do 
their  duty, — especially  whether  the  local  preachers,  where  pos- 
sible, preach  ever}^  Sunday,  and  where  there  are  several  change 
them  at  times,  so  that  the  most  good  ma}-  result, — and  exhort 
them  that  they  maintain  discipline,  order,  love,  and  earnestness 
in  the  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  exchange  the  traveling  preachers  on  his 
district,  but  he  must  first  consult  the  bishop.  He  can  also 
receive  or  suspend  preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  He  .shall  give  the  bishop  a  report  of  the  condition  of  his  dis- 
trict, and  have  a  reckoning  with  the  traveling  preachers,  that  he 
may  lay  the  same  before  the  conference.  He  shall  allow  a  single 
man  eighty  dollars,  and  a  married  man  and  his  wife  twice  that 
amount.  Only  traveling  preachers  who  travel  a  circuit  are  to  be 
reckoned  with.  Local  preachers  shall  receive  nothing,  unless  for 
a  time  the}'  serve  a  circuit,  in  which  case  they  shall  receive  an 
allowance  for  the  time.  Where  a  preacher  is  stationed  in  a  city, 
the  society  there  must  support  him. 

6.  How  long  may  a  bishop  place  a  presiding  elder  over  a 
given  district  ?     As  long  as  is  believed  useful  and  proper. 

7.  Should  it  so  happen  that  there  should  be  a  time  when 
there  is  no  bishop,  each  presiding  elder  shall  exercise  special 
care  over  the  societies  in  his  district,  that  ever3'tliing  maN'  be 
preserved  in  love  and  earnestness,  and  that  they  each  give  the 
other  imformation  as  to  the  condition  of  his  district.  Should  it 
so  happen  that  one  or  the  other  district  should  be  without  a 
presiding  elder,  what  course  should  be  taken?  Information 
thereof  should  be  given  to  the  bishop,  who  should,  from  the 
elders  of  the  district,  make  an  appointment  thereto'  [to  act  till 
the  conference,  where  it  is  possible.  In  case  there  should  be  no 
bishop,  then  the  nearest  presiding  elder  shall  appoint  one  in 
case  he  cannot  himself  take  charge  of  the  work. 

'  Here  the  page  is  mutilated.  The  corresponding  passage  in  the  Discipline  of 
1817  is  given  in  brackets,  extending  to  "Section  Fifth,"  on  the  follomag  page. 


BISCIPLINE   OF    1815.  17 

[SECTION  FIFTH.] 

OF  THE  ELDERS  :   THEIR  ELECTION,  OFFICE  AND  DUTY,  AND 

ORDINATION. 

How  is  an  elder  constituted  ? 

After  a  probation  of  two  years  he  may  be  accepted  by  the 
annual  conference;  may,  by  the  bishop  and^  [[a  presiding 
elder]  with  the  laying  on  of  their  hands,  be  ordained;  on  this 
condition,  however:  that  the  conference  is  convinced  that  the 
requirements  of  verses  6-9  of  the  first  chapter  of  Paul's  Epistle 
to  Titus  are  fulfilled  in  him.  This  Scripture  shall  be  read  to 
each  one  at  his  ordination. 

[What  is  an  elder's  office  and  duty? 

[  I.  To  preach  as  often  and  as  much  as]  he  can,  and  to  baptize, 
to  solemnize  marriage,  to  assist  the  presiding  elders  in  adminis- 
tering the  Lord's  Supper,  and  when  the  presiding  elder  cannot 
be  present  one  or  two  elders  shall  perform  this  office ;  he  shall 
also  conduct  all  parts  of  public  divine  worship,  establish  class- 
meetings  where  it  is  practicable,  and  hold  the  same,  and  help  in 
the  election  of  leaders. 

2.  To  take  quarterly  a  voluntary  collection  for  the  traveling 
preachers  and  for  the  poor,  to  take  a  statement  thereof  at  every 
place  and  by  the*  [leader  attested,  and  if  there  is  no  leader 
present,  then  it  shall  be  signed  by  a  member,  enabling  him  thus 
to  make  settlement  with  the  presiding  elder,  that  everything 
may  be  done  in  order.] 

3.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher  preaches  at  a  place  where  no 
traveling  preacher  comes,  he  shall  take  a  collection  and  take  a 
statement  of  the  same  and  send  it  to  the  presiding  elder,  or  bring 
or  send  it  to  the  conference. 

4.  Should  a  traveling  preacher  or  elder  desire  to  leave  the 
circuit  assigned  him,  he  shall  first  notify  the  presiding  elder. 
Should  any  one  leave  or  neglect  his  charge  unless  through  sick- 
ness or  other  unavoidable  circumstances,  he  shall  be  answerable 
therefor  to  the  next  conference. 

'The  break  here  may  be  supplied  from  the  Discipline  of  1817,  as  in  brackets, 
extending  to  "as  much  as." 

'Here  a  torn  page  must  be  restored  from  the  Discipline  of  181 7,  as  in  brackets. 


l8  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLII'mS. 

SECTION  SIXTH. 

OF  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING   PREACHERS,  AND  THEIR  OFFICE 
AND  DUTIES. 

How  shall  a  preacher  be  received  b}'  the  annual  conference? 

1.  In  the  time  between  conferences,  by  the  bishop  or  the  pre- 
siding elder  of  the  district,  or  an  elder  who  supplies  the  place  of 
the  presiding  elder  at  an  annual  or  great  meeting,  till  the  next 
session  of  the  conference.  No  one  will  be  received  otherwise 
than  on  probation.  One  who  is  on  probation  may  be  admitted 
or  rejected  without  any  injustice  being  done  him.  Otherwise 
there  would  be  no  probation. 

2.  Every  person  proposed  as  a  preacher  shall  be  examined  by 
the  conference,  and  the  following  questions  shall  be  asked: 

Has  he  known  God  in  Christ  as  a  sin-pardoning  God  ? 

Has  he  received  the  forgiveness  of  his  sins  ? 

Is  the  love  of  God  through  the  Holy  Ghost  shed  abroad  in 
your  heart  ? 

Has  he  received  the  peace  of  God? 

Does  he  follow  after  holiness  ? 

Has  he  a  right  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justifica- 
tion, and  sanctification,  and  redemption  ? 

3.  Does  the  salvation  of  his  own  soul  and  the  salvation  of  his 
fellow-men  lie  nearer  his  heart  than  all  else  in  the  world  beside? 

Can  he  subject  himself  to  the  counsel  of  his  brethren  ? 

Will  he  be  obedient,  speaking  or  remaining  silent  as  the  breth- 
ren may  think  best? 

Is  he  willing,  as  far  as  he  is  able,  to  uphold  the  itinerant  plan 
(or  traveling  the  circuit),  and  to  support  the  same  as  much  as 
possible  ? 

4.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  preacher? 

To  preach  Christ  crucified  wherever  he  can  find  hearers;  to 
establish  class-meetings  where  it  is  practicable;  to  converse  with 
the  members  on  the  condition  of  their  souls;  to  seek  to  direct 
aright  the  tempted,  to  seek  to  stimulate  the  slothful,  and  to  seek 
to  build  up  all  as  far  as  possible  in  faith,  in  the  grace  and  knowl- 
edge of  Jesus  Chri.st;  never  to  fail  to  visit  the  sick;  to  seek  to 
confirm  the  word  which  he  preaches  by  his  life  and  walk. 

5.  What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher? 

That  he  be  diligent,  never  trifle  away  his  time  in  unnecessarj' 


DISCIPLINE  OF  1815.  19 

things  at  any  place,  always  be  serious;  that  his  motto  be,  "Holi- 
ness unto  the  Lord";  that  he  avoid  all  lightness  and  jesting; 
that  he  speak  with  moderation,  and  conduct  himself  discreetly 
with  women,  and  demean  himself  as  a  true  Christian. 

6.  He  shall  ever  be  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports,  unless 
with  sufficient  evidence,  and  always,  as  far  as  is  consistent  with 
truth,  put  the  most  favorable  construction  on  all  things.  He 
shall  speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatever  may  be  his  thought,  he 
should  keep  it  to  himself  until  he  can  declare  it  to  the  person 
concerned. 

7.  Let  his  business  be  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible;  to 
this  employment  he  shall  give  himself  up.  He  should  visit 
those  in  need;  in  all  things  act  not  according  to  his  own  will, 
but  as  a  son  in  the  gospel.  As  such,  it  becomes  him  to  emplo3' 
his  time  in  the  manner  before  described, —  in  preaching,  in 
visiting  from  house  to  house,  in  teaching,  and  prayer,  and  medi- 
tating on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  to  be  occupied  till  the 
Lord  shall  come. 


SECTION  SEVENTH. 

OF  THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS,  AND  HOW  THEY  ARE 
TO  BE  DEALT  WITH. 

What  shall  be  done  if  a  bishop,  or  presiding  elder,  or  elder,  or 
preacher  is  reported  guilty  of  an  offense  which  in  the  Word  of 
God  is  made  an  act  requiring  expulsion  ? 

I.  If  a  bishop  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  how  shall  he  be 
dealt  with  J  Where  such  accusation  prejudicial  to  the  gospel 
may  occur,  it  shall  be  made  known  to  a  presiding  elder  and  to 
an  elder,  who  shall  make  an  examination  whether  there  is  just 
cause  of  complaint.  But,  as  the  apostle  says,  they  should  not 
receive  an  accusation  without  two  or  three  witnesses.  Should 
it  now  appear  that  he  is  justly  accused,  they  shall  make  a 
written  statement  of  the  case  and  send  a  copy  to  the  bishop, 
and  appoint  a  time  when  they  may  come  together,  when  the 
accuser  and  the  bishop  may  be  present.  An  investigation  shall 
be  made  by  two  presiding  elders  and  three  elders.  If  he  is 
found  guilty,  he  shall  remain  silent  till  the  annual  conference. 
There  the  presiding  elders  and  the  elders  shall  again  make  an 


20  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

investigation.     If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  be  suspended  from 
his  office. 

2.  If  a  presiding  elder  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  what 
shall  be  done  ?  Where  such  accusations  prejudicial  to  the  gospel 
may  occur,  the  nearest  elder  and  a  preacher  shall  investigate. 
Should  it  appear  that  he  is  guilt}',  the}-  shall  make  a  written 
statement  of  the  case  and  send  a  copy  to  the  presiding  elder,  and 
appoint  a  time  when  they  shall  come  together,  when  the  accuser 
and  the  presiding  elder  may  be  present.  *In  the  absence  of  the 
bishop  another  presiding  elder  and  two  elders  shall  be  sum- 
moned, who  shall  make  an  investigation.  If  he  is  found  guilty, 
he  shall  remain  silent  till  the  conference;  there  shall  he  be 
answerable. 

3.  If  an  elder,  or  preacher,  or  exhorter  shall  be  accused  of 
immoral  conduct,  what  shall  be  done  ?  The  preacher  in  the 
vicinity,  to  whom  the  matter  is  known,  shall  take  with  him  an- 
other preacher,  or  an  exhorter,  or  a  leader  and  make  an  investiga- 
tion. Should  it  appear  that  he  is  guilty,  notice  thereof  shall  be 
given  him  and  a  time  appointed  when  they  and  the  accuser  and 
the  accused  may  be  present.  In  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or 
presiding  elder  three  elders  or  preachers  shall  make  an  investiga- 
tion. If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  be  silent  till  conference, 
where  he  shall  be  answerable. 


SECTION  EIGHTH. 

OF  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Every  member  of  the  Church  shall  confess  that  he  receives  the 
Bible  as  the  word  of  God;  that  he  will  strive  from  his  heart  to 
seek  his  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  to  work  out  his  salvation 
with  fear  and  trembling,  that  he  may  flee  the  eternal  wrath  to 
come. 

Every  member  shall  endeavor  to  lead  a  strict  and  godly  life, 
to  be  diligent  in  prayer,  especially  in  private,  and  whenever 
possible,  to  be  present  at  all  meetings,  both  public  services  and 
prayer-meetings,  for  his  own  edification. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pra\'  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  to  set  them  a  good  example  in  all 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  shall  endeavor  to  walk  circumspectly,  as  in  the 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1815.  21 

presence  of  God,  to  habituate  himself  to  communion  with  God 
in  his  business  occupations,  never  to  speak  evil  of  his  fellow- 
men,  to  practice  love  toward  friend  and  foe,  to  do  good  to  the 
poor,  and  seek  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  indeed. 

Every  member  shall  refrain  from  all  unnecessary  work  on 
Sunday;  neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  time  in  devotion,  in 
reading  and  hearing  the  Word  of  God,  and  in  singing  spiritual 
hymns,  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  God. 

Every  member  of  this  Church  shall  contribute  quarterly,  with 
a  free  will,  as  much  as  his  circumstances  will  allow,  for  the  sup- 
port of  the  traveling  preachers. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  peaceable,  quiet,  and 
godly  life  in  his  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Chris- 
tian to  live  in  peace.  Especially  shall  each  one  be  subject  to  the 
government,  as  the  Word  of  God  requires. 

Among  such  members  of  the  Church  the  preachers  shall 
establish  one  or  more  class-meetings,  where  it  is  practicable. 
The  members  shall,  where  it  is  possible,  assemble  themselves 
once  in  each  week  at  an  appointed  place  to  hold  pra3'er-nieetings 
among  themselves,  that  they  may  be  built  up  in  the  presence 
of  God  and  in  love  for  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  class,  leaders  shall  be  elected  in  the  presence  of  the 
preacher,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  appoint  prayer-meetings;  to 
open  and  close  them;  also  to  hold  class-meetings  at  times;  to 
exhort  and  preserve  in  love  every  member,  and  to  keep  watch 
upon  himself. 

If  members  trespass  against  each  other  as  brethren  or  sisters, 
correct  the  fault  first  between  thee  and  him  alone.  If  he  hear 
thee,  thou  hast  won  him.  If  he  hear  thee  not,  take  with  thee 
one  or  two  more  in  order  that  in  the  mouth  of  two  or  three 
witnesses  the  whole  matter  may  be  established.  If  he  will  not 
hear  them,  tell  the  matter  to  the  church.  If  he  will  not  hear  the 
church,  let  him  be  to  thee  as  a  heathen  and  publican. 

If  disputes  should  arise  between  two  or  more  members  of  the 
Church  concerning  debts  or  any  other  cause,  and  the  disputing 
parties  cannot  come  to  an  agreement,  the  preacher  who  has  the 
oversight  of  the  society,  or  the  preacher  who  resides  in  the 
vicinity,  shall  investigate  the  matter  and  shall  recommend  to 
the  disputing  parties  a  reference  to  a  committee,  which  shall 
consist  of  three  members  of  the  society;  of  whom  the  plaintiflF 
shall  choose  one,  the  defendant  another,  and  these  two  a  third. 


22  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

These  three  shall  settle  the  difficulties.  In  case,  however,  one 
of  the  contending  persons  should  be  dissatisfied  with  the  deci- 
sion, he  may  appeal  to  the  next  quarterl}-  or  great  meeting,  by 
making  this  known  to  the  presiding  elder  or  elders,  to  have  a 
second  settlement.  If  the  preachers  find  sufficient  reason  there- 
for, a  second  settlement  shall  be  allowed;  in  which  case  each  of 
the  parties  shall  choose  two  members  of  the  Church,  and  these 
four  a  fifth,  who  shall  decide  the  difficulties  full}-.  If  one  of  the 
persons  should  still  not  be  satisfied  with  this  decision,  he  thereby 
excludes  himself  from  the  Church.  If  a  member  of  the  Church 
should  refuse,  in  case  of  debts  or  other  difficulties,  to  allow  the 
matter  to  be  settled,  after  this  has  been  recommended  to  him  b}' 
a  preacher  or  leader  who  has  the  oversight;  or  a  member  of  the 
Church  should  begin  suit  at  law,  before  the  foregoing  regula- 
tions have  been  followed,  he  shall  be  expelled  from  this  Church, 
unless  the  difficulties  are  of  such  a  kind  that  the}-  demand  and 
justify  a  legal  decision,  as  in  the  case  of  executors  or  adminis- 
trators. 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE 


UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 


PRINTED   BY   ORDER  OF   A   GENERAL  CONFERENCE   HELD  ON   THE 
SECOND  DAY  OF  JUNE,  IN  THE  YEAR  OF  OUR  LORD, 
1817,   IN   MOUNT   PLEASANT,  WESTMORE- 
LAND COUNTY,  PENNSYLVANIA. 


GREENSBURG,  PENN.: 

PRINTED   BY   JOHN   ARMBRUST  &  CO- 

1817.  23 


CONCERNING  THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  UNITED 
BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  Lord  our  God  to  raise 
up  men  in  the  different  parts  of  the  world  who  should  restore 
again  the  decayed  Christianity,  and  preach  the  doctrine  of  the 
cross  in  its  purity. 

He  remembered  at  the  same  time  the  Germans  in  America, 
who  resided  widely  scattered  over  this  extensive  land;  who, 
therefore,  had  seldom  opportunity  to  hear  the  preaching  of  the 
cross  for  their  edification,  and  rarely  in  their  mother  tongue, 
and  in  many  places  not  in  that  purity  and  earnestness  of  presen- 
tation as  it  should  have  been. 

Among  others  he  raised  up  also  an  Otterbein,  a  Boehm,  and  a 
Geeting,  and  equipped  them  with  spirit,  grace,  and  power  to 
labor  in  his  so  sadly  neglected  vineyard,  that  he  might  also  call 
sinners  to  repentance  among  the  Germans  in  America.  These 
obeyed  the  call  oi'  their  Lord  and  Master,  were  blessed  in  their 
labor,  and  so  raised  up  here  and  yonder  prosperous  societies,  and 
led  many  precious  souls  to  Christ.  Graduallj-  the  circle  of  their 
labors  widened  so  that  they  felt  constrained  to  look  about  for 
fellow-laborers  in  the  vineyard,  for  the  harvest  was  great  and  the 
laborers  but  few.  God  awakened  others,  who  also  became  will- 
ing to  consecrate  their  powers  to  the  Lord.  These  were  then 
received  by  one  or  another  as  fellow-laborers. 

The  number  of  Chitrch  members  in  the  different  portions  of 
the  land  grew  from  time  to  time,  and  spread  themselves  in  the 
States  of  Maryland,  [Pennsylvania,  and  Virginia,]  for  which  reason 
Otterbein  would  sometimes  hold  conference  with  the  preachers 
who  were  present  at  the  great  meetings.  He  represented  to  them 
the  solemnity  of  the  ministerial  office  —  how  necessarj-  it  was  to 
put  forth  earnest  endeavors  to  save  souls.  They  likewise  coun- 
seled how  they  might  be  most  useful,  and  received  such  as 
colaborers  of  whom  they  had  reason  to  believe  that  they  had 
experienced  Christianity  at  heart.  The  number  of  members 
increased  constantly  more  and  more.    That  they  might  now  labor 

25 


26  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

quite  advantageously  together,  the  preachers  saw  themselves 
obliged  to  appoint  a  conference,  where  thej'  might  meet  to  unite 
themselves  thoroughh-,  for  some  were  Reformed,  others  Lutheran, 
others  Mennonites,  etc.  Therefore,  they  determined  to  meet  on 
the  25th  of  September,  1800,  in  the  house  of  Frederick  Kemp, 
in  Frederick  County,  Maryland.  There  met  of  their  number 
thirteen,  namel}^  W.  Otterbein,  J.  Boehm,  J.  Geeting,  C.  New- 
comer, P.  Lehman,  G.  Pfrimmer,  F.  Kemp,  C.  Grosh,  D. 
Strickler,  C.  Krum,  H.  Krum,  A.  Herschej'.  They  united  them- 
selves into  a  societj'  bearing  the  name,  "The  United  Brethren  in 
Christ."  They  chose  William  Otterbein  and  Martin  Boehm  as 
superintendents  or  bishops.  They  agreed  to  grant  each  one  liberty 
to  baptize  in  conformity  with  his  own  views. 

Henceforth  the  societj'  spread  more  and  more.  They  received 
preachers  who  traveled  constantly  (inasmuch  as  the  appoint- 
ments could  not  be  served  otherwise).  The  work  spread  into 
the  States  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky.  It  was  now  necessary  to 
hold  a  conference  in  the  State  of  Ohio,  as  it  was  too  burdensome 
for  those  preachers  to  travel  annually  so  far  to  conference. 

Brother  Boehm  died  meanwhile,  and  Brother  Otterbein  desired 
that  a  bishop  should  be  elected  (because  he  himself  could  no 
longer  superintend)  who  should  take  upon  himself  the  work  of 
maintaining  discipline  and  order,  for  it  was  decided  upon  at  the 
first  conference  that  if  one  of  the  bishops  died  another  should  be 
chosen.  Then  Brother  Christian  Newcomer  was  chosen  bishop 
for  a  time,  who  should  assume  the  superintendence  of  the  society'. 

The  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  society  had  been  felt  for  a  long 
time,  and  several  attempts  toward  this  end  had  been  made. 
Finally,  it  was  resolved  in  the  conference  in  Ohio  that  a  principal 
or  general  conference  should  be  held,  which  should  undertake  to 
make  the  discipline  in  some  respects  more  perfectly  to  accord 
with  the  Word  of  God. 

The  members  of  this  General  Conference  should  be  chosen  from 
the  preachers  in  the  different  portions  by  a  mr.jorit}^  vote  of  the 
members  of  the  society;  and  the  following  preachers  were  pres- 
ent at  the  Conference,  namely:  Christian  Newcomer,  Abraham 
Hiestand,  Andrew  Zeller,  Daniel  Troj-er,  George  Benedum,  Abra- 
ham Troxel,  Christian  Berger,  Abraham  Mayer,  John  Snj-der, 
Henry  Kumler,  Henr}'  Spaj^th,  Lsaac  Niswander,  Christian 
Krum,  and  Jacob  Baulus.  These  met  on  the  6th  of  June,  1815, 
near  Mount  Pleasant,  in  Westmoreland  Count}-,  Pennsylvania, 


DISCIPLINE    OF    I«I7.  27 

where,  after  due  consideration,  they  found  the  following  doctrine 
and  rules  as  proper  and  profitable  for  recommendation  to  the 
society,  in  love  and  humility,  with  the  sincere  wish  that  this 
doctrine  and  these  rules,  in  connection  with  the  Word  of  God, 
may  be  observed.  For  God  is  a  God  of  order,  and  where  there  is 
no  discipline  there  all  love  and  union  decline.  Therefore,  let  us 
follow  the  counsel  of  the  Lord,  which  teaches  that  we  humbly 
seek  in  honor  to  prefer  one  another  and  seek  the  mind  that  was  in 
Jesus  Christ,  who  took  the  form  of  a  servant  and  became  obedient 
unto  death  upon  the  cross,  that  he  might  secure  us  grace  and 
power  to  submit  ourselves  one  to  another  in  love  and  humility. 
Whoever  is  not  able  to  submit  himself  is  yet  in  lack  of  grace, 
love,  and  humility.  Wherefore,  Jesus  says,  "  Whosoever  among 
3'ou  would  be  the  greatest  shall  be  the  servant  of  the  others. ' '  Thus 
we  must  love  one  another.  Jesus  says,  "Thus  shall  all  men 
know  that  ye  are  my  true  disciples,  when  ye  have  love  one  to 
another;  and  he  that  doth  not  love  abideth  in  death."  Therefore, 
let  us  practice  love,  that  we  may  obtain  the  glory  for  which 
Jesus  pra3'ed  the  Father  in  behalf  of  his  disciples,  that  we 
might  be  one  even  as  he  and  the  Father  are  one.  Therefore,  ye 
beloved  brethren,  let  us  seek  to  be  of  one  mind,  abiding  in  unity 
and  harmony.  Let  no  one  speak  or  think  evil  of  another,  but  pray 
the  Lord  that  he  may  give  us  his  spirit  and  zeal,  that  we  may 
promote  Christianity  thoroughly,  to  his  glory  and  our  eternal 
welfare.     Amen. 


SECTION  FIRST. 

THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN 
CHRIST. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  confess  before  all  men,  that  we  believe 
in  the  one  true  God,  Father,  Son,  and  Holy  Ghost;  that  these 
three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  and  the  Son  in  the  Father, 
and  the  Holy  Ghost  of  like  being  with  both;  that  this  triune 
God  has  created,  sustains,  governs,  protects,  and  preserves 
heaven  and  earth,  and  all  that  therein  is,  both  visible  and  invis- 
ible. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ;  that  he  is  truly  God  and  man; 
that  he  assumed  his  humanity  through  the  Holy  Spirit  in  Mary, 


28  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

and  that  he  was  born  of  her;  that  he  is  the  Saviour  and  Redeemer 
of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  accept  the  proftered  grace  of 
Jesus  b}'  faith  in  him;  that  this  Jesus  suffered  for  us;  that  he 
died  on  the  cross,  was  buried,  rose  again  on  the  third  da}', 
ascended  to  heaven,  is  at  the  right  hand  of  God  and  intercedes  for 
us,  and  will  come  again  at  the  last  day  to  judge  the  living  and 
the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost;  that  he  is  of  like  being  with 
the  Father  and  Son;  that  he  comforts  the  believers,  and  guides 
them  into  all  truth. 

"We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  church,  the  fellowship  of  the 
saints,  resurrection  of  the  flesh,  and  an  eternal  life. 

We  believe  that  the  Bible,  Old  and  New  Testament,  is  God's 
word;  that  it  contains  the  true  waj'  to  our  salvation;  that  every 
true  Christian  shall  accept  it  under  the  influence  of  God's  Spirit 
as  his  onl}'  guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  genu- 
ine repentance,  forgiveness  of  sins,  and  following  Christ,  no  one 
can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  believe  that  what  the  Hoi 3^  Scriptures  contain,  namely, 
the  fall  in  Adam  and  the  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ,  should 
be  preached  to  all  the  world. 

We  believe  that  the  external  means  should  be  practiced  in 
Christian  societies,  namely,  baptism  and  the  remembrance  of  the 
death  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  among  his  children.  The  mode  and 
manner  shall,  however,  be  left  to  the  judgment  of  the  individual. 
Also,  the  example  of  feet-washing  is  left  to  the  judgment  of  the 
individual. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

CONCERNING  THE  GENERAL  AND  ANNUAL  CONFERENCES. 

Question.  According  to  what  manner  and  order  shall  the  pro- 
ceedings of  the  conferences  be  conducted? 

Answer.  It  is  desired  that  whatever  ma}-  be  done  upon  such 
an  occasion  shall  be  done  as  in  the  presence  of  God;  whoever 
has  anything  to  say,  shall  rise  and  speak  freely,  as  it  is  in  his 
heart. 

Ques.  How  and  in  what  manner  shall  the  members  of  a  Gen- 
eral Conference  be  elected? 

Ans.     In  each  district  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  there  be  any 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1817.  29 

such  (if  not,  then  the  local  preachers  who  live  in  the  circuit), 
shall  represent  to  the  societies  that  they  elect  two  elders  from 
their  district.  They  shall  not  fail  to  put  all  the  elders  on  the 
district  who  can  go  to  the  Conference  in  nomination,  and  make 
it  known  some  time  in  advance;  and  the  two  who  obtain  the 
majority  of  votes  shall  be  the  members  of  the  General  Confer- 
ence. The  votes  shall,  however,  be  recorded  at  each  place  and 
subscribed  by  a  preacher  who  was  present,  or  by  a  leader.  The 
presiding  elder  of  the  district  shall  examine  it,  and  should  two 
of  them  have  an  equal  number  of  votes,  he  shall  decide  which 
of  the  two  is  elected. 

Ques.     How  often  shall  the  General  Conference  be  held? 

Ans.     Every  four  years. 

Ques.  Has  the  General  Conference  any  power  which  the 
annual  conference  does  not  have  ? 

Ans.  Yes;  it  alone  has  the  power  to  choose  quadrennially 
two  bishops  from  among  the  elders,  and  to  change  or  improve 
the  discipline  or  rules  according  as  it  sees  fit,  under  the  condi- 
tion and  exception  that  no  clause  be  enacted  which  should 
suspend  or  put  away  the  traveling  of  circuits  [the  itineracy]. 
The  General  Conference  shall  also  determine  the  districts  where 
the  annual  conferences  shall  be  held. 

Qties.     Who  are  the  members  of  the  annual  conference  ? 

Ans.  All  the  elders  and  preachers  who  have  received  a  writ- 
ten license  and  reside  within  the  bounds  of  such  conference  or 
are  received  into  it. 

Ques.  After  what  manner  and  order  shall  the  proceedings  be 
undertaken? 

Ans.  I.  A  chapter  from  the  Bible  shall  be  read  and  brief 
remarks  made  upon  it;  then  there  shall  be  singing  and  prayer, 
and  this  as  often  as  the  conference  sits,  also  closing  it  with  sing- 
ing and  praj^er. 

>  2.  The  conference  shall  elect  a  secretary,  and  should  one  of 
the  bishops  be  absent,  elect  also  one  of  the  presiding  elders  to 
assist  in  presiding. 

3.  The  preachers  are  to  be  examined  as  to  their  conduct 
toward  their  neighbors;  whether  their  conduct  is  blameless; 
whether  they  devote  as  much  time  as  possible  to  the  spreading 
of  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  What  preachers  are  to  be  received  on  probation  ? 

5.  What  preachers  are  to  be  continued  on  probation? 


30  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

6.  Are  there  any  to  be  elected  to  elders'  orders? 

7.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died? 

8.  Who  are  the  presiding  elders? 

9.  Who  is  willing  to  travel  ? 

10.  What  has  been  collected  to  defray  contingent  expenses 
and  to  raise  the  salary  of  the  itinerant  preachers  ?  Has  settle- 
ment been  made  with  them  ?  Have  they  received  what  is  due 
them? 

11.  When  and  where  shall  the  next  conference  be  held? 

12.  Have  the  elders  been  ordained  ? 

13.  On  what  circuits  have  the  preachers  this  year  been  ap- 
pointed ? 

14.  Is  there  anj'thing  more  to  be  done  ? 

15.  Has  the  conference  determined  the  districts  in  its  bounds 
for  the  purpose  of  electing  the  members  of  the  General  Confer- 
ence? 

16.  Have  all  the  proceedings  been  recorded  ? 

SECTION  THIRD. 

CONCERNING   THE    ELECTION   AND   ORDINATION   OF    THE 

BISHOPS,  AND    MATTERS    PERTAINING    TO 

THEIR  OFFICE  AND  DUTY. 

Ques.     How  shall  the  bishops  be  constituted  ? 

Ans.  The  General  Conference  shall  elect  them  by  a  majority 
of  the  votes  ot  the  elders  constituting  the  General  Conference. 
The  Conference  is  also  at  liberty  to  reelect  the  bishops  for  other 
four  years.  The  bishops  must,  however,  be  able  to  travel  over 
the  different  circuits  and  conferences;  otherwise  they  cannot  be 
elected.  Those  who  are  chosen  shall  be  ordained  through  the 
laying  on  of  hands  by  a  bishop  and  one  elder;  but  should  there 
be  no  bishop  present,  the  ordination  ma^^  be  performed  by  two 
elders. 

Qjtes.    What  are  the  duties  of  the  bishops  ? 

Ans.  I.     To  preside  at  our  conferences. 

2.  They  shall,  with  the  assistance  of  an  elder,  whom  they 
choose,  appoint  the  itinerant  preachers  to  their  respective  circuits, 
with  the  limitation  that  no  itinerant  preacher  shall  remain 
longer  than  three  successive  years  at  the  same  place,  except  in 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1817.  31 

view  of  special    circumstances  and  with    the  consent  of  the 
bishops. 

3.  The  bishops  shall  assign  the  presiding  elders  to  the  dis- 
tricts which  they  shall  travel. 

4.  During  the  interim  between  the  conferences,  they  have 
power,  along  with  the  presiding  elders,  to  change  the  itinerant 
preachers  where  they  shall  deem  it  better;  also  to  receive  or 
suspend  preachers  until  the  time  of  conference. 

5.  They  shall  travel  over  the  different  conferences,  as  far  as 
their  boundaries  extend,  and  have  the  spiritual  supervision  over 
all  the  societies. 

6.  It  is  their  duty  to  conduct  the  ordination  service. 

7.  If  a  bishop  ceases  to  serve  the  different  conferences  in  the 
Church,  and  to  travel  over  the  different  districts,  can  he  never- 
theless perform  the  functions  of  his  ofi&ce  among  us  ?  No;  unless 
he  should  be  sick,  or  hindered  by  other  circumstances  of  like 
character. 

8.  Should  it  occur  that  our  Church  should  at  any  time  be 
without  a  bishop,  because  of  death,  or  suspension,  or  on  what- 
ever account,  what  shall  be  the  advice  in  such  case  ?  The  elder 
who  shall  be  chosen  in  the  absence  of  a  bishop  to  preside  at  the 
conference  shall  serve  in  the  place  of  the  bishop  as  long  as  the 
conference  continues.  This  thus  elected  chairman  shall  also  serve 
the  other  conference.  He  shall  preside  with  the  chairman  chosen 
by  the  other  conference  concurrently,  and  the  latterly  chosen 
chairman  shall  in  like  manner  serve  the  other  conference,  so  that 
each  conference  may  know  the  state  of  affairs  in  the  other  con- 
ference; so  that  love  and  fellowship,  etc.,  may  be  maintained 
until  the  General  Conference,  which  again  elects  bishops. 

9.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  bishops  to  provide  for  a  suitable 
sermon  to  the  preachers  present  at  the  close  of  each  conference. 

SECTION  FOURTH. 

CONCERNING  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS:   THEIR  ELECTION, 
OFFICE,  AND  DUTIES. 

Ques.     How  shall  the  presiding  elders  be  chosen  ? 

Ans.  The  bishops  shall  nominate  several  of  the  elders  who 
have  stood  their,  probation,  and,  with  the  consent  of  the  con- 
ference, choose'them  for  four  years. 


32  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

Qiies.     What  are  the  duties  of  the  presiding  elder? 
Ans.     I.     To  travel  the  district  to  which  he  was  appointed  by 
the  bishops,  and  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.  He  has  the  supervision  of  the  itinerant  and  local  preachers 
in  his  district,  to  the  end  that  they  conduct  themselves  in  con- 
formity with  the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
]iossible  conduct  them,  administer  the  Lord's  Supper,  hold 
quarterly  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters,  and  leaders 
present,  and  inquire  whether  the  traveling  and  local  preachers 
perform  their  duties,— especially  whether  the  local  preachers 
preach,  as  far  as  possible,  every  Sunday,  and  where  there  are  a 
num1)er  of  them  cause  them  to  exchange  sometimes,  as  may 
result  in  the  accomplishment  of  most  good, — and  exhort  them  to 
maintain  discipline,  and  order,  and  love,  and  zeal  in  the  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  exchange  the  itinerant  preachers  in  his  dis- 
trict (he  shall,  however,  advise  with  a  bishop);  he  can  also 
receive  preachers  or  suspend  them  until  conference. 

5.  He  shall  inform  the  bishop  of  the  condition  of  his  district, 
and  see  to  it  that  the  itinerant  preachers  receive  quarterly  a 
proportionate  support,  inasmuch  as  their  salary  is  taken  from 
the  money  they  collect  upon  their  circuits.  A  single  preacher 
shall,  however,  not  receive  over  eighty  dollars,  and  a  married 
one  shall  be  allowed  one  hundred  and  sixt}-  dollars.  Should  the 
amount  collected  on  one  or  the  other  circuit,  however,  not  suffice, 
then  it  shall  be  put  into  the  hands  of  a  committee  of  the  confer- 
ence, which  shall  take  off  from  other  money  collected  and  add  to 
that  which  is  deficient,  according  to  their  judgment.  In  the  ca.se 
of  a  preacher  stationed  in  a  city,  the  congregation  must  care  for 
him. 

6.  Should  it  occur  at  any  time  that  there  should  be  no  bishop, 
the  presiding  elders  shall,  each  in  his  own  district  especially, 
care  for  the  .societies,  that  all  things  may  be  conserved  in  love 
and  zeal;  and  information  as  to  the  condition  of  circuits  shall  be 
mutually  exchanged  between  the  elders.  Should  it  occur,  how- 
ever, that  there  should  be  no  presiding  elder  in  one  or  the  other 
district,  what  shall  be  advised?  The  bishop  shall  be  informed 
thereof.  He  shall  appoint  one  from  among  the  elders  in  the  dis- 
trict until  conference.  Should  there  be  no  bishop,  however,  then 
the  adjoining  presiding  elder  shall  choose  one  if  he  cannot  do 
the  work  himself 


I5ISCIPI.I^'^  OF  1817.  33 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

CONCERNING   THE    ELECTION,    OFFICIAL    DUTY,   AND 
ORDINATION    OF    ELDERS. 

Ques.     How  shall  an  elder  be  chosen  ? 

Ans.  After  a  probation  of  two  years  he  may  be  presented 
to  the  annual  conference  for  ordination  by  the  bishops  with  the 
laying  on  of  hands,  on  this  condition,  however:  that  the  confer- 
ence is  convinced  that  the  requirements  of  verses  6,  7,  8,  and  9  of 
the  second  chapter  of  Paul's  Epistle  to  Titus  are  fulfilled  in  him. 
This  shall  be  read  to  each  candidate  at  the  time  of  his  ordination. 

1.  What  is  an  elder's  ofS.ce  and  duty?  To  preach  as  often 
and  much  as  he  can,  and  baptize,  solemnize  marriages,  assist  the 
presiding  elder  at  communion,  and  when  the  presiding  elder 
cannot  be  present  one  or  two  of  the  elders  shall  administer  in  his 
stead.  He  shall  take  part  in  all  the  public  services  of  God,  seek 
to  establish  class-meetings,  where  the  majorit}^  of  the  members 
regard  it  advisable,  conduct  the  same,  and  help  to  elect  leaders. 

2.  To  take  quarterly  a  free-will  contribution  for  the  itinerant 
preachers  and  the  poor,  keep  a  record  of  the  same  at  each  place, 
attested  by  the  subscription  of  the  leader,  and  if  there  is  no 
leader  present,  then  it  shall  be  signed  by  a  member,  enabling 
him  thus  to  make  settlement  with  the  presiding  elder  and  have 
everything  done  in  proper  order. 

3.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher,  who  is  not  in  need  of  sup- 
port, preaches  at  a  place  where  no  itinerant  preacher  serves,  he 
shall  take  a  collection  and  keep  an  account  of  the  same  and  send 
it  to  the  presiding  elder  or  to  the  conference,  or  take  it  there,  for 
the  support  of  the  needy  local  preachers  who  are  poor  and  preach 
among  the  poor. 

4.  Should  an  itinerant  preacher  or  elder  wish  to  leave  the 
circuit  assigned  him,  then  he  shall  first  give  the  presiding  elder 
written  notice.  Should  any  one  leave  or  neglect  [his  charge], 
except  on  account  of  sickness  or  other  unavoidable  circumstan- 
ces, he  shall  be  accountable  for  it  to  the  next  conference. 

5.  Where  there  are  local  preachers  who  are  poor  and  needy, 
of  whom  it  is  desired  that  they  preach,  it  is  proper  that  the 
elders  take  collections  in  the  societies  to  support  such  preachers 
according  to  the  time  they  serve,  yet  not  above  that  to  which  the 
itinerant  preacher  is  limited. 

3 


34  UNITED   BRETHREN^  DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION  SIXTH. 

CONCERNING  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS,  AND  THEIR 
OFFICE  AND  DUTIES. 

Qites.  How  shall  a  preacher  be  received  through  the  annual 
conference.-" 

1.  In  the  time  between  the  conferences,  by  the  bishop,  or  the 
presiding  elder  of  the  circuit,  or  an  elder  who  represents  the  office 
of  a  presiding  elder  at  an  annual  or  great  meeting,  until  the 
next  ensuing  session  of  conference.  No  one  will  be  received 
otherwise  than  upon  probation.  One  who  has  been  received  on 
probation  may  be  accepted  or  rejected  without  any  injury  to 
him.     Otherwise  there  would  be  no  probation. 

2.  Each  person  proposed  for  the  ministr}-  shall  be  examined 
by  the  conference  on  the  following  questions  : 

Qucs.  Has  he  learned  to  know  God  in  Christ  as  a  sin-pardon- 
ing God  ? 

Has  he  obtained  the  pardon  of  his  sins  ? 

Has  the  love  of  God  been  shed  abroad  in  your  heart  through 
the  Holy  Spirit  ? 

Has  he  obtained  the  peace  of  God? 

Does  he  follow  after  holiness.? 

Has  he  a  correct  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justifi- 
cation, sanctification,  and  redemption? 

3.  Has  he  more  concern  for  his  and  his  neighbor's  salvation 
than  for  all  else  in  the  world? 

Can  he  submit  to  the  advice  of  his  brethren  ? 

Will  he  l)e  obedient  to  speak  or  hold  his  peace  as  the  brethren 
VL\s.y  deem  best  ? 

Is  he  willing  to  aid  in  sustaining  the  itinerant  plan  (or  to 
travel  the  circuit)  to  the  extent  of  his  ability,  and  to  support  the 
same  as  much  as  possible? 

4.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  preacher? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  the  crucified  one  wherever  hearers  are 
found;  to  establish  class-meetings  where  it  is  profitable;  to  speak 
with  the  people  concerning  their  souls'  condition;  lo  guide 
the  tempted,  to  stir  up  the  l.ikewarm,  and  to  edify  all  in  the 
faith,  grace,  and  knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ  as  much  as  possi- 
ble; never  to  neglect  visiting  the  sick,  and  with  his  life  and  con- 
duct to  enforce  the  word  he  preaches. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1817.  35 

5.  What  counsel  shall  be  given  a  preacher? 

A}is.  He  shall  be  industrious,  never  squander  time  in  un- 
necessary things  at  any  place,  be  always  grave;  his  motto  be, 
"Holiness  unto  the  Lord."  He  shall  avoid  all  frivolity  and  jest- 
ing, speak  modestly,  and  exercise  discretion  in  his  association 
with  the  female  sex,  and  deport  himself  like  a  true  Christian, 

6.  He  shall  always  decline  to  believe  accusations,  unless  they 
are  sufficiently  evident;  he  shall  construe  everything  favorably 
as  far  as  it  can  be  made  to  agree  with  the  truth.  He  shall  speak 
evil  of  no  one;  whatever  he  may  think  of  one,  he  shall  keep  it 
to  himself  until  he  can  tell  the  one  himself  whom  it  concerns. 

7.  Let  his  employment  be  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible;  to 
this  employment  he  shall  consecrate  himself  entirely.  He  shall 
visit  the  needy.  In  all  things  he  shall  act  not  in  view  of  self, 
but  as  a  son  of  the  gospel.  As  such  it  becomes  him  to  use  his 
time  as  prescribed, — in  preaching,  visiting  from  house  to  house, 
teaching  and  praying,  and  the  stud}'-  of  the  Word  of  God;  thus 
he  shall  employ  himself  till  the  Lord  comes. 

SECTION   SEVENTH. 

CONCERNING  THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS :    HOW 
TO  DEAL  WITH  THEM. 

Ques.  What  shall  be  done  in  case  a  bishop,  or  presiding  elder, 
or  preacher  is  reported  to  have  been  guilty  of  an  offense  for  which 
the  Word  of  God  requires  expulsion.? 

Ans.  If  a  bishop  be  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  how  shall 
he  be  dealt  with.-*  If  accusation  occurs  which  would  be  prejudi- 
cial to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  made  known  to  a  presiding  elder 
and  an  elder,  who  shall  examine  whether  there  is  anything  in 
the  case;  but  they  shall  accept  no  complaint  unattested  by  two 
or  three  witnesses,  as  the  apostle  says.  Does  it  appear  that  he 
is  justly  accused,  they  shall  put  the  case  in  writing  and  send 
the  bishop  a  copy  of  it,  and  appoint  a  time  to  meet  when  the 
accuser  and  the  bishop  can  be  present,  and  the  case  shall  be 
examined  by  two  presiding  elders  and  three  elders.  If  he  is 
found  guilty,  he  shall  be  silenced  until  the  annual  conference, 
where  the  presiding  elders  and  elders  shall  examine  the  case 
again.  If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  be  suspended  from  his 
office. 


36  UNITED  BRETHREN   DlSCirUNES. 

Qiies.  2.  If  a  presiding  elder  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct, 
what  shall  be  done? 

Ans.  In  case  of  accusations  detrimental  to  the  gospel,  the 
case  shall  be  examined  bj-  the  nearest  elder  and  a  preacher. 
Does  it  appear  as  if  he  were  guilt3^  they  shall  make  a  written 
statement  of  the  case  and  send  the  presiding  elder  a  copy  of  it, 
and  appoint  a  time  when  they  shall  meet,  when  the  accusers  and 
the  presiding  elder  can  be  present.  In  the  absence  of  the  bishop 
another  presiding  elder  and  two  elders  shall  be  called.  These 
shall  examine  the  case.  If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  be 
silenced  till  conference,  where  he  shall  be  accountable. 

07ies.  3.  If  an  elder,  or  preacher,  or  exhorter  be  accused  of 
immoral  conduct,  what  shall  be  done  ? 

Avs.  The  preacher  in  the  vicinity,  to  whom  it  is  known,  shall 
take  with  him  another  preacher,  or  exhorter,  or  leader  and  exam- 
ine the  case.  Should  it  appear  that  he  is  guilty,  he  shall  be 
notified,  and  a  time  shall  be  appointed  when  the  accusers  and 
the  accused  shall  be  present.  In  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or 
presiding  elder  three  elders  or  preachers  shall  examine  the  case. 
If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  be  silenced  until  conference,  where 
he  shall  be  answerable. 


SECTION    EIGHTH. 

CONCERNING  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Each  member  of  the  Church  should  confess  that  he  believes 
the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God;  that  he  will  henceforth  endeavor 
to  seek  his  salvation  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  to  work  out  his  salva- 
tion with  fear  and  trembling,  that  he  may  escape  the  impending 
eternal  wrath. 

Each  member  shall  endeavor  to  lead  a  strictly  godly  life;  to 
be  diligent  in  prayer,  especially  in  secret  prayer,  and  attend, 
if  possible,  all  the  meetings,  both  public  divine  services  and 
praj-er-meetings,  for  his  edification. 

Heads  of  families  shall  never  neglect  to  have  family  prayers 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  a  good  example  in  all  Christian 
virtues. 

Every  one  shall  endeavor  to  walk  strictly  as  in  the  presence 
of  God;  to  accustom  himself  in  his  business  to  a  close  fellowship 
with  God;  never  to  speak  evil  of  his  neighbor,  to  manifest  love 


DISCIPLINE   OF   I»I7.  37 

toward  friend  and  enemy,  do  good  to  the  poor,  and  seek  in  very 
deed  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath,  as  required  b}'  the  Word 
of  God;  not  to  bu}'  or  sell,  btit  to  vSpend  the  same  in  meditation, 
with  reading  and  hearing  the  Word  of  God,  and  singing  spirit- 
ual hymns  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  God. 

Every  member  in  this  society  should  freely  contribute  every 
three  months  as  much  as  his  circumstances  will  allow  to  support 
the  itinerant  preachers. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  peaceable,  quiet,  and 
godly  life;  in  his  association  with  all  people  to  live  in  peace  as 
becometh  a  Christian.  Especially  shall  every  one  be  subject  to 
the  government,  as  the  Word  of  God  requires. 

Where  the  majority  of  the  members  regard  it  as  profitable,  the 
preacher  shall  establish  one  or  more  class-meetings,  where  the 
members,  as  man}'-  as  can,  shall  meet  once  a  week  to  hold  prayer- 
meetings  together  for  mutual  edification  in  the  presence  of  God, 
and  in  love  for  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  each  class,  leaders  should  be  elected  in  the  presence  of  the 
preacher,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  appoint  prayer-meetings,  to 
open  and  close  them,  and  sometimes  to  hold  class-meetings;  to 
exhort  each  member,  and  conserve  them  in  love,  and  to  keep 
watch  upon  himself. 

When  members  offend  against  each  other  as  brethren  or  sisters, 
rebuke  first  between  thee  and  him  alone.  If  he  hears  thee,  then 
thou  hast  won  him.  If  he  hears  thee  not,  then  take  one  or  two 
with  thee,  so  that  everything  ma}'  be  attested  by  the  mouths  of 
two  or  three  witnesses.  If  he  refuses  to  hear  them,  tell  it  to  the 
church.  If  he  refuses  to  hear  the  church,  regard  him  as  a  heathen 
and  publican. 

If  a  dispute  should  arise  between  two  or  more  members  of  the 
Church,  because  of  debts  or  any  other  cause,  and  the  contending 
parties  cannot  come  to  an  agreement,  then  the  preacher  who 
has  charge  of  the  society,  or  the  preacher  who  resides  in  the 
vicinit}-,  shall  examine  the  matter,  and  shall  propose  to  the 
disputing  parties  a  reference  to  a  committee,  which  shall  consist 
of  three  members  of  the  Church,  of  whom  the  accuser  shall 
choose  one,  the  accused  another,  and  these  two  the  third,  and 
these  three  shall  adjust  the  dissension.  In  case  one  of  the 
contending  parties  .should  be  dissatisfied  with  the  decision, 
he  may  appeal  to  the  next  quarterly  or  great  meeting  by  making 


38  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

it  known  to  the  presiding  elder,  or  an  elder,  and  apply  for  a 
second  endeavor  to  make  peace.  And  if  the  preachers  see  a  suflB- 
cient  reason  in  this  appeal,  they  shall  grant  it;  in  which  case  each 
party  shall  choose  two  members  from  the  congregation  and  these 
four  shall  choose  a  fifth  one;  these  shall  determine  the  question  in 
dispute  finally.  Should  either  of  the  persons,  however,  still  be 
dissatisfied  with  the  decision  rendered,  he  shall  thereby  exclude 
himself  from  the  Church.  And  if  a  member  of  the  Church  should 
refuse  to  submit  a  case  of  indebtedness  or  dispute,  after  it  was 
recommended  to  him  by  a  preacher  or  leader  who  had  charge,  or 
if  a  member  of  the  Church  enters  suit  at  law,  before  the  meas- 
ures aforesaid  have  been  adopted,  then  such  member  shall  be 
expelled  from  this  Church,  unless  the  matter  in  dispute  had  been 
of  a  nature  to  require  or  justify  a  legal  decision,  as  in  the  case 
of  executors  or  administrators. 

SUPPLEMENT. 

CONCERNING    VISITATIONS    FROM    HOUSt    TO    HOUSE    AND    THE 
ENFORCEMENT  OF  A  PRACTICAL  CHRISTIANITY. 

Qiies.  How  can  we  further  assist  those  who  submit  them- 
selves to  our  supervision? 

Ans.  In  this:  that  we  impart  to  them  instruction  in  their 
homes,  which  is  very  necessary  to  foster  faith  in  and  communion 
with  God;  further,  bj^  avoiding  a  worldly  disposition  and  culti- 
vating a  heavenly  one;  in  that  we  foster  brotherl}-  love,  so  that 
there  may  exist  no  evil  thinking  or  judging  in  one  against  the 
other,  and  that  we  do  as  we  wish  to  be  done  by. 

2.  Each  preacher  must  consider  it  his  dutj'  to  visit  the  people 
in  their  houses,  and  exhort  them  to  abound  to  ever}'  good  work. 
Until  this  is  done,  and  that  seriously  and  zealously,  we  shall, 
upon  the  whole,  be  little  benefited,  and  our  godliness  will  not 
have  a  sufficiently  deep  foundation.  Consequently,  wherever  we 
may  be,  we  should  not  indulge  in  vain  conversation. 

These  visitations  from  house  to  house  and  special  exhortations 
are,  no  doubt,  founded  upon  the  solemn  words  of  the  apostle, 
"  I  charge  thee  therefore  before  God,  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
who  shall  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead  at  his  appearing.  Preach 
the  word;  be  instant  in  season,  out  of  season;  reprove,  rebuke, 
exhort,  with  all  longsuffering." 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1817.  39 

CONCERNING  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  YOUTH. 

Ques.     What  shall  be  done  in  behalf  of  the  rising  generation? 

A?is.  Whosoever  has  any  zeal  for  God  and  the  welfare  of 
souls,  let  him  begin  the  work  without  delay.  Where  there  are 
children  whose  parents  belong  to  the  Church,  let  him  gather 
them  as  often  as  practicable  and  profitable;  converse  with,  in- 
struct, and  exhort  them  in  and  to  that  which  is  good;  pray  with 
them  earnestly,  but  simply,  that  they  may  learn  to  know  their 
Creator  and  Redeemer  in  their  youth. 

MANNER  AND  METHOD  OF  ORDAINING  PREACHERS. 

On  the  day  appointed  for  the  purpose  a  sermon  and  exhorta- 
tion shall  be  delivered,  in  which  the  office  of  the  ministry  and  its 
duties  shall  be  explained. 

Thereafter  the  bishop  shall  speak  to  the  brethren  present  as 
follows:  "Is  there  any  among  you  to  whom  any  trespass  or  other 
hindrance  is  known  why  one  or  the  other  of  these  persons 
should  not  be  ordained  to  the  office  of  an  evangelical  preacher, 
let  him  come  forward  in  the  name  of  God  and  make  said  transgres- 
sion known." 

If  any  violation  or  hindrance  is  discovered,  the  bishop  shall 
defer  the  ordination  of  such  person  until  the  accused  is  found 
innocent. 

Then  shall  one  of  the  elders  read  impressively  the  sixth, 
seventh,  eighth,  and  ninth  verses  of  the  first  chapter  of  Paul  to 
Titus.  Thereafter  the  bishop  shall  proceed  with  the  following 
examination  of  him  who  is  to  be  ordained : 

Ques.  Have  you  assurance  that  you  are  inwardly  moved 
through  the  Holy  Spirit  to  take  upon  you  the  office  of  a 
preacher,  to  serve  God  therein  to  his  name's  glory  and  the 
edification  of  his  church? 

A?is.     I  trust  I  am. 

Ques.  Do  you  believe  without  reserve  all  the  canonical  books 
of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  ? 

A71S.     I  do  believe  them. 

Ques.  Will  you  use  diligence  to  order  your  walk  according  to 
the  doctrine  of  Christ,  and  as  much  as  in  you  lieth  present 
yourself  to  the  flock  of  Christ  as  an  example  of  Christian  living? 

A?is,     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Ques.     Will  you  reverently  obey  those  to  whom  the  oversight 


40  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

over  3-ou  is  entrusted,  and  follow  their  good  exhortations  with  a 
willing  and  peaceable  heart  ? 

Ahs.     I  will  strive  to  do  so  b}-  the  grace  of  God. 

The  bishops  (or  a  bishop  and  an  elder)  will  now  place  their 
hands  upon  the  head  of  each  one  severall}-,  and  the  bishop 
shall  saj': 

' '  Take  thou  herewith  authority  to  execute  the  office  of  an  evan- 
gelical preacher  in  the  church  of  God,  in  the  name  of  God,  the 
Father,  the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost." 

The  bishop  shall  then  present  to  each  one  the  Bible  and  say: 

"Take  thou  herewith  authorit}'  to  preach  and  interpret  the 
Word  of  God  in  the  church  of  Christ." 

MANNER  AND  METHOD  OF  ORDAINING  A  BISHOP. 

After  prayer,  the  twentieth  chapter  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles 
may  be  read  from  the  seventeenth  verse  to  the  close. 

Then  shall  the  bishop  ss-y  to  the  one  that  is  to  be  ordained: 

"Brother,  inasmuch  as  the  Holy  Scriptures  command  us  not  to 
la}'  hands  hastily  upon  anj'  one  to  rule  in  the  church  of  Christ, 
you  will  answer  the  following  questions:" 

Qites.  Are  j'ou  convinced  that  the  Word  of  God  contains  all 
that  is  necessary  to  our  salvation  through  Christ,  and  are  j^ou 
determined  to  teach  the  people  from  out  of  it  ? 

Atis.     Yes. 

Ques.  Will  you  be  faithful  in  ordaining  others  by  laying  on  of 
hands  and  sending  them  out  ? 

Atis.     Yes. 

Then  shall  the  bishop  and  one  or  two  elders  lay  their  hands 
upon  the  chosen  person  kneeling  before  them,  and  the  bishop 
shall  saj': 

"  Receive  thou  the  grace  of  God  to  the  office  and  ser\'ice  of  a 
bishop  in  the  church  of  God,  which  is  herewith,  by  the  laying  on 
of  our  hands,  committed  unto  }ou  in  the  name  of  the  Father, 
the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost.     Amen." 

Then  shall  the  bishop  present  the  Bible,  saying: 

"Give  heed  unto  reading,  doctrine,  and  exhortation.  Consider 
well  the  things  contained  in  this  book;  be  a  shepherd  of  the 
flock  of  Jesus  Christ,  feeding  them;  assist  the  weak;  seek  the 
lost;  be  compassionate,  that  thou  niayest  receive  the  unfading 
crown  of  eternal  life  when  the  Chief  Shepherd  of  the  sheep  shall 
appear.     Amen." 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1817.  41 

ADDRESS  TO  CANDIDATES  FOR  MARRIAGE. 

"  Much  Beloved:  We  are  here  gathered  in  the  sight  of  God 
and  in  the  presence  of  these  witnesses,  for  the  purpose  of  unit- 
ing these  two  persons  in  wedlock  as  man  and  wife. 

"/.  Taber:  Will  you  take  this  woman  to  be  your  wedded  wife, 
to  live  with  her  in  wedlock,  to  love,  comfort,  and  honor  her,  to 
support  and  cherish  her  in  sickness  and  in  health,  and  forsaking 
all  others  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  and  -that  as  long  as  God  shall 
spare  thy  life.?     If  this  is  j^our  purpose,  then  answer,  '  Yes.'  " 

Then  the  preacher  shall  address  the  woman: 

''B.  Cathar :  Will  you  take  this  man  to  be  3'our  husband,  to 
live  with  him  in  wedlock  after  the  ordinance  of  God;  will  you 
render  him  obedience,  helpfulness,  love,  and  honor;  in  health 
and  sickness  cherish  him,  and  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee 
only  unto  him  as  long  as  God  .shall  spare  thy  life  ?  If  this  is 
your  purpose,  then  answer,  '  Yes.' 

"Extend  to  each  other  the  right  hand." 

The  preacher  \\\\\  take  their  two  hands  together  and  say: 
"  '  What  God  hath  joined  together  let  no  man  put  asunder.'  And 
so  I  pronounce  you  man  and  wife,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  the 
Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost.  God  the  Father,  Son,  and  Hoh-  Ghost 
bless  you  and  keep  you  in  the  Lord,  look  upon  3'ou  in  mere}-,  and 
endow  5-ou  with  his  spiritual  gifts  and  grace,  that  ye  ma)'  so  live 
together  in  this  world  that  in  the  future  world  ye  may  have 
eternal  life.     Amen." 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE 


United  Brethren  in  Christ. 


Hagers-Town  : 
PRINTED  BY  GRUBER  &  MAY. 

1819.  43 


OF  THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN 
IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  Lord  our  God,  to  awaken 
persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  who  should  raise  up  the 
Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach  the  gospel  of 
Christ  crucified  in  its  purity. 

At  this  time  the  Lord  in  mercy  remembered  the  Germans  in 
America,  who,  living  scattered  in  this  extensive  country,  had 
but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  gospel  of  a  crucified 
Saviour  preached  to  them  in  their  native  language. 

Amongst  others  he  raised  up  an  Otterbem,  a  Boslwt,  and  a 
Gucthing,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and  strength,  to  labour 
in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  call,  also,  amongst  the  Germans  in 
America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men  obeyed  the  call  of 
their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labours  were  blessed ;  they  established 
in  many  places  excellent  societies,  and  led  many  a  precious  soul 
to  Jesus  Christ.  There  sphere  of  action  spread  itself  more  and 
more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary  to  look  about  for  more 
fellow  labourers  in  the  vineyard;  for  the  harvest  was  great,  and 
the  labourers  but  few.  The  Lord  called  others,  who  also  were 
willing  to  devote  their  strength  to  his  service;  such,  then,  were 
accepted  by  one  or  the  other  of  the  preachers  as  fellow  labourers. 

The  number  of  members  of  the  society,  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  country,  continued  from  time  to  time  to  increase,  and  the 
gracious  work  spread  itself  through  the  states  of  Pennsylvania, 
Maryland  and  Virginia.  Great  meetings  were  appointed  and 
held  annually  several  times;  when,  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present;  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and  the 
necessity  of  their  utmost  endeavours  to  save  souls.  At  one  of 
these  conversations,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  of  all 
the  preachers,  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how,  and  in 
what  manner  they  might  be  most  useful.  ,, 

The  first  conference  was  accordingly  held  in  Baltimore,  in  the 
year  1789.     There  were  present: 

45 


46  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

William  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Bcehm,  John  Ernst, 

George  Adam  Guething,  Henry  Weidener. 

Christian  Newcomer, 
The  second  conference  was  held  in  York  count}',  in  Paradise 
township,  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year  1791, 
where  there  were  present  the  following  persons,  viz. 
William  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  G.  Pfrimmer, 

George  Adam  Guething,  John  Neidig, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander, 

Adam  Lehman, 
And  after   mature   deliberation,  how   the}-   might   labour  most 
usefully  in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord,  the}^  again  appointed  such 
as  fellotv'  labourers,  of  whom  they  had  cause  to  believe  that  they 
had  experienced  true  religion  in  their  own  souls. 

In  the  mean  time  the  number  of  members  continued  to  in- 
crease more  and  more;  the  preachers  therefore  were  obliged  to 
appoint  an  annual  conference,  in  order  to  unite  themselves  more 
closelv,  and  labour  most  usefully  to  one  common  end;  for  some 
were  Presbyterians,  or  church  Reformed,  some  were  Lutherans, 
others  Mennonites,  and  3'et  others  were  Methodists.  The}-, 
therefore,  appointed  a  conference  to  be  held  the  25th  of  Septem- 
ber 1800,  in  Frederick  countv,  ISIaryland,  at  the  house  of  brother 
Frederick  Kemp.  There  were  present  as  follows: 
William  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Boehm,  Henry  Krum, 

George  Adam  Guething,  John  Hershey, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henry  Bcehm, 

Abraham  Dracksel,  Dietrick  Aurauf 

John  George  Pfrimmer, 
They  there  united  themselves  into  a  society,  which  bears  the 
name  of  "  The  United  Brethren  in  Christ;''  and  elected  William 
Otterbein  and  Martin  Boehm,  as  superintendants  or  bishops,  and 
agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty  to  baptise  in  such 
manner,  as  should  best  accord  with  his  conviction. 

From  this  time  forth  the  society  increased  still  more;  preachers 
were  appointed,  who  travelled  continually  f  because  the  number 
of  preaching  places  could  in  no  other  wise  be  attended),  and  the 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1817  —  EDITION  OF   1819.  47 

work  spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky.  It 
became  necessary  therefore  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  state 
of  Ohio,  because  it  was  conceived  too  labourious  for  the  preachers, 
who  laboured  in  those  states,  to  travel  such  a  distance  annually  to 
the  conference. 

In  the  mean  time  brothers  Boehm  and  Guething  died,  and 
brother  Otterbein  desired,  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected 
(because  infirmity  and  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer),  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society,  and  preserve 
discipline  and  order;  for  at  a  conference  formerly  held,  it  was 
resolved,  that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  die,  another  should  be 
elected  in  his  place — Therefore  brother  Christian  Newcomer  was 
then  elected  as  bishop,  to  take  charge  of  the  superintendance  of 
the  society. 

The  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  society  has  long  since  been 
deeply  felt;  and  partial  attempts  thereto  having  at  different  times 
been  made,  it  was  at  length  resolved  at  the  conference  in  the 
state  of  Ohio,  that  a  general  conference  should  be  held,  who 
should  take  upon  themselves  to  complete  the  same,  so  as  to 
accord  with  the  word  of  God.  The  members  of  this  conference 
were  to  be  elected  from  amongst  the  preachers  in  the  different 
parts  of  the  countrj^  by  a  majority  of  the  votes  of  the  members 
of  the  society;  and  there  were  present  at  the  conference,  that  were 
duly  elected,  the  following  preachers,  namely:  Christian  New- 
comer, Abraham  Hiestand,  Andrew  Zeller,  Daniel  Treyer,  George 
Benedum,  Abraham  Tracksel,  Christian  Berger,  Abraham  Meyer, 
John  Schneider,  Henry  Kumler,  Henry  Spade,  Isaac  Nigh- 
swander.  Christian  Krum,  and  Jacob  Baulus. 

These  met  on  the  6th  of  June,  1815,  near  Mountpleasant, 
Westmoreland  county,  Penn.  where  they,  after  mature  deliber- 
ation, found  it  to  be  necessary,  good  and  beneficial  to  de- 
liver the  following  Doctrines  and  Rules  of  discipline  to  the 
society  in  love  and  humility,  with  the  sincere  desire,  that  these 
doctrines  and  rules  together  with  the  Word  of  God  might  be 
attended  to  and  strictly  observed.  For  God  is  a  God  of  order, 
and  where  there  is  no  order  and  discipline,  there  all  love  and 
communion  will  be  lost.  Therefore,  let  us  attend  to  the  counsel 
of  our  Lord,  who  taught  us:  That  in  lowliness  of  mind,  we 
should  esteem  each  other  better  than  ourselves.  Seek  to  be 
minded  as  Jesus  Christ  also  was!  Who  took  upon  him  the  form 
of  a  servant,  and  became  obedient  even  unto  the  death  of  the 


48  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

cross,  to  obtain  for  us  grace  and  strength,  that  we,  from  motives 
of  love  and  humility,  might  submit  one  to  the  other.  He  who 
cannot  submit  himself,  the  same  lacketh  grace,  love  and  humil- 
ity; hence  Jesus  saith:  Whoso  amongst  you  shall  desire  to  be 
the  greatest,  shall  be  the  other's  servant.  If  then  we  are  to  be 
the  servants  of  each  other,  we  must  love  one  another.  Jesus 
saith:  Thus  shall  all  men  know  that  ye  are  mj^  true  disciples, 
if  3'e  have  love  to  one  another;  and  whoso  hath  not  love,  the 
same  continueth  in  death.  Then  let  us  practise  love,  that 
we  maj'  enjoy  the  glory  and  felicit)-,  which  Jesus  obtained  by 
prayer  for  his  disciples,  of  his  heavenly  father,  that  we  may  be 
one  even  as  he  and  the  father  are  one.  Therefore,  beloved 
brethren,  let  us  strive  to  be  likeminded,  unanimous  and  con- 
cordant; and  no  one  speak  or  think  evil  of  the  other  :  but  implore 
the  Lord,  that  he  would  graciously  grant  us  his  spirit  and  an 
earnest  desire  to  lead  a  truh'  Christian  life,  to  the  honour  and 
glory  of  his  holy  name,  and  to  our  own  eternal  welfare.     Amen. 

SECTION  FIRST. 
THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men,  that 
we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence  or  being  with 
both.  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the  earth, 
and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and  further- 
more sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 

"We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  he  is  very  God  and  man,  that 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost  in  the 
virgin  Mary,  and  was  born  of  her;  that  he  is  the  saviour  and 
mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in 
him,  accept  the  grace  proffered  in  Jesus.  That  this  Jesus  suffered 
and  died  on  the  cro.ss  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again  on  the 
third  day,  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right  hand 
of  God  to  intercede  for  us;  and,  that  he  shall  come  again  at  the 
lavSt  day  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Hoh*  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  father  and  the  son,  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 


DISCIPLINE    OF    IS17  —  EDITION    OF    1819.  49 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  body,  and  life  everlasting. 

We  believe,  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  testaments,  is  the 
word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our  salvation; 
that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge  and  receive  it 
with  the  influence  of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  their  only  rule  and 
guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  as  also  true 
penitence,  forgiveness  of  sins  and  following  after  Christ,  no  one 
can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  holy  scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam  and  the  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  further  think,  that  the  outward  means,  namely:  baptism 
and  the  remembrance  of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our  Lord 
Jesus,  are  to  be  in  use  and  practised  in  all  Christian  societies; 
and  that  it  is  incumbent  on  his  children  particularly  to  practise 
them:  But  the  manner  in  which,  ought  always  to  be  left  to  the 
judgment  and  understanding  of  each.  So  also  the  practice  or 
example  of  washing  the  feet  must  remain  free  to  the  judgment 
of  every  one. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

OF  THE  GENERAL  AND   YEARLY  CONFERENCES. 

Question.  After  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions  of 
the  conferences  to  be  considered  ? 

Answer.  It  is  desired,  that  all  things  be  considered  on  these  oc- 
casions, as  in  the  immediate  presence  of  God:  That  every  person 
rise  and  speak  freely  whatever  is  in  his  heart. 

Qst.  How  and  after  what  manner  are  the  members  of  a 
General  conference  to  be  chosen  ? 

Ans.  In  every  district  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  such  are 
present,  if  not,  the  stationed  or  local  preachers,  who  live  in  the 
district,  shall  advise  the  members  of  the  society,  that  they  elect 
two  elders  from  out  of  their  district;  but  all  the  elders  in  the 
district,  who  are  capable  of  going  to  the  conference,  shall  be  put 
in  nomination,  and  the  same  made  known  some  time  previous  to 
the  election;  and  those  two,  who  shall  have  a  majority  of  votes, 
shall  be  considered  as  members  of  the  General  conference.  The 
votes  taken   at  each   place,  shall  be  couched  in   writing,   and 


50  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

attested  by  one  of  the  preachers  or  leaders  then  and  there 
present.  The  presiding  elder  of  the  district  shall  examine  the 
statement,  and  should  any  two  or  more  have  an  equal  number 
of  votes,  he  shall  determine  by  lot,  who  or  which  of  them  are 
elected. 

Ost.     How  often  are  the  General  conferences  to  be  held? 

Ans.     Every  four  years. 

Quest.  Has  the  General  conference  any  other  powers,  which 
the  Annual  conference  has  not? 

A?is.  Yes,  the  members  of  the  General  conference  alone  have 
the  power  to  elect  two  bishops  from  amongst  the  elders  for  four 
years;  as  also  to  alter  and  amend  the  discipline  according  as  they 
may  find  it  necessary  and  expedient:  provided  they  do  not  estab- 
lish any  article,  which  may  tend  to  abolish,  undo  or  put  aside  the 
itinerant  plan.  The  general  conference  has  further  to  fix  upon 
or  determine  the  districts,  where  the  j-earh'  conferences  are  to  be 
held. 

Quest.     Which  are  the  members  of  the  yearly  conference? 

Afis.  All  the  elders  and  preachers,  who  have  obtained  a 
written  permit,  and  are,  for  the  time  being,  in  the  district  where 
the  conference  is  held,  or  who  may  be  taken  up  and  acknowledged 
in  the  same. 

Quest.  In  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions  of  a 
conference  to  be  conducted  ? 

Ans.  I.  There  will  be  read  a  chapter  in  the  Bible,  and  brief 
remarks  made  on  the  contents;  there  will  be  sung  and  prayer 
performed,  and  that  as  often  as  the  conference  sits;  and  the  sit- 
ting closed  with  singing  and  prayer. 

2.  The  conference  elects  a  secretary,  and  in  case  one  of  the 
bishops  be  absent,  also  one  of  the  presiding  elders,  to  act  in  con- 
junction with  the  bi.shop. 

3.  The  preachers  will  be  examined,  what  their  deportment 
towards  their  fellow  beings  is;  whether  their  conduct  in  life  be 
blameless  and  whether  they  employ  as  much  time  as  possible  to 
promote  or  spread  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  What  preachers  are  to  be  admitted  on  trial  ? 


What  preachers  are  yet  to  continue  on  trial? 
Are  any  to  be  elected  as  elders  ? 
Have  any  of  the  preachers  died? 
Who  are  the  presiding  elders  ? 
Who  gives  himself  up  to  travel  ? 


DISCIPLINE  OF    1S17  —  EDITION   OF   1819.  5I 

10.  What  has  been  collected,  partly  for  contingent  expences, 
and  partly  for  making  up  the  allowances  of  the  travelling  preach- 
ers? Has  reckoning  been  made  with  them?  Have  they  received 
their  dues? 

11.  When  and  where  shall  our  next  conference  be  held? 

12.  Are  the  elders  ordained  ? 

13.  In  what  circuits  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year? 

14.  Is  there  any  thing  more  to  do? 

15.  Has  the  conference  appointed  the  districts  in  their  circuit, 
for  the  purpose  of  holding  the  election  for  the  members  of  the 
General  conference? 

16.  Is  all  that  has  been  transacted,  entered  in  the  protocol? 


SECTION  THIRD. 

OF  THE   ELECTION  AND  CONSECRATION  OF  THE  BISHOPS  AND 
THEIR   DUTY. 

Qst.     How  are  the  bishops  to  be  constituted  ? 

Ans.  The  General  conference  shall  elect  them  by  the 
majority  of  the  votes  of  the  elders,  who  were  elected  to  the 
General  conference:  But  the  conference  may  still  be  at  liberty 
to  retain  the  bishops  yet  other  four  years.  The  newly  elected, 
however,  as  well  as  the  bishops  retained,  must  be  capable  of 
travelling  the  different  circuits  and  of  attending  to  the  confer- 
ences, otherwise  they  cannot  be  elected.  The  persons  thus 
elected  shall  be  ordained  by  the  laying  on  of  the  hands  of  our 
bishops  and  one  or  more  elders,  but  if  no  bishop  be  present,  then 
two  elders  shall  perform  the  rite. 

Quest.     What  are  the  duties  of  the  bishops? 

Ans.   I.     To  preside  in  our  conferences. 

2.  They  have,  in  conjunction  with  an  elder,  whom  they  select, 
to  fix  the  appointments  of  the  itinerant  preachers  for  the  several 
circuits,  provided  they  shall  not  allow  any  itinerant  preacher  to 
remain  in  the  same  station  more  than  three  years  sucessively, 
unless  particular  circumstances  require  it,  and  then  only  with 
consent  of  all  the  bishops. 

3.  The  bishops  point  out  the  circuits,  which  are  to  be  travelled 
by  the  presiding  elders. 

4.  They  have  also,  in  connexion  with  the  presiding  elders, 


52  UNITED    BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

power,  in  the  intervals  of  the  conferences,  to  change  the  itiner- 
ant preachers,  where  they  conceive  it  necessar}',  and  also  to 
receive  and  suspend  preachers,  as  necessity  may  require,  until  the 
conference. 

5.  They  have  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large,  attend 
to  the  conferences,  and  oversee  the  spiritual  concerns  of  the 
societies. 

6.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rites  of  ordination. 

7.  When  a  bishop  ceases  to  attend  to  the  several  conferences, 
and  neglects  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large,  can  he 
still  exercise  his  episcopal  ofl&ce  among  us?  No,  unless  it  be 
that  he  were  sick,  and  what  the  like  circumstances  more 
might  be. 

8.  If,  at  au)^  time,  it  should  so  happen,  that  bj-  reason  of 
death,  suspension  or  other  cause,  our  communion  should  be  with- 
out a  bishop ;  how  is  this  want  to  be  relieved  ?  The  elder,  who 
shall  have  been  elected  to  preside  at  the  conference,  in  the  ab- 
sence of  a  bishop,  shall  perform  the  duties  of  a  bishop  during  the 
sitting  of  the  conference;  he  shall  also  attend  the  other  confer- 
ence, and  take  his  seat  with  the  president  there  elected,  to  act 
in  conjunction  with  him  at  the  conference  then  sitting;  and  the 
president  there  elected  shall  also  in  turn,  and  in  like  manner 
attend  to  the  other  conference:  so  that  each  conference  may  know 
and  be  acquainted  with  the  proceedings  of  the  others,  and  the 
love  and  communion  be  maintained  &c.  unto  the  next  general 
conference,  who  are  then  to  elect  bishops  anew. 

9.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present  at  the  close  of 
every  conference. 

SECTION  FOURTH. 
OF  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

Quest.     How  are  the  presiding  elders  to  be  elected? 

Ans.  The  bishops  shall  propose  to  the  conference  some  of 
the  elders,  who  have  finished  their  time  of  probation ;  and  with 
the  consent  of  the  conference,  elect  them  for  four  years. 

Quest.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  presiding  elder  ? 

Ans.  I .  To  travel  through  the  district  appointed  him  of  the 
bishops,  and  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1817  —  EDITION  OF   1819.  53 

2.  He  has  to  take  charge  of  the  travelling  and  local  preachers 
in  his  district,  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  agreeably 
to  the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
possible  attend  them;  he  shall  administer  the  Lord's  supper,  and 
hold  quarterly  meeting  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters 
and  leaders;  he  shall  further  inquire  into,  and  examine  whether 
the  travelling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty,  particularly 
whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable,  preach  every 
Sunday;  and  where  there  are  more  of  them,  to  change  them  at 
times,  where  the  most  benefit  is  likely  to  result,  and  to  exhort 
them,  that  they  maintain  discipline  and  order  and  love  and  ser- 
iousness in  their  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  change  the  travelling  preachers  in  his  district, 
but  he  must  first  consult  a  bishop;  he  can  further  receive  or  sus- 
pend preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  He  shall  give  the  bishop  notice  of  the  condition  of  his 
district;  and  see  that  the  travelling  preachers  obtain  a  propor- 
tioned part  of  their  support  quarterly,  by  giving  them  their 
allowance  out  of  the  money  they  may  have  collected  in  their 
districts;  a  single  man,  however,  shall  not  be  allowed  more  than 
eighty  dollars,  and  a  married  man  one  hundred  and  sixty  dol- 
lars: should  the  collection  of  one  or  the  other  district  be  insuffi- 
cient, then  it  shall  be  left  to  a  committee,  appointed  by  the 
conference,  who,  in  their  discretion,  shall  make  up  the  deficiency 
out  of  other  collections  made.  But  a  preacher  stationed  in  a 
town  must  be  supported  by  the  congregation  he  attends. 

6.  Should  it  so  happen,  that  the  society  at  a  time  should  be 
without  a  bishop,  then  the  presiding  elders  shall,  each  of  them, 
have  special  charge  of  the  societies  in  their  respective  districts, 
that  all  may  be  kept  in  love  and  earnest  together,  and  that  they 
give  each  other  all  necessary  information  of  the  state  of  their 
districts.  And  should  it  also  happen,  that  one  or  the  other 
district  should  be  without  a  presiding  elder,  what  shall  then  be 
done?  Information  thereof  shall  immediately  be  given  to  the 
bishop,  who  shall  appoint  one  of  the  elders  in  the  district,  where 
it  can  be  done,  to  act  till  the  conference.  And  in  case  there 
should  be  no  bishop,  then  the  next  or  nearest  presiding  elder 
shall  appoint  one,  if  he  himself  cannot  take  charge  of  the 
district. 


54  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

OF  THE  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION,  ORDINATION  AND  DUTY. 

Quest.     How  is  an  elder  constituted? 

A71S.  After  a  probation  of  two  years,  he  may  be  presented 
before  the  j'earlj'  conference  and  ordained  of  the  bishops  b}-  lay- 
ing on  of  their  hands:  provided  the  conference  be  convinced  and 
fully  satisfied,  that  the  contents  of  the  6,  7,  8  and  9th  verses  of 
St.  Paul  to  Titus  in  his  first  chapter,  are  founded  to  be  inherent 
in  and  with  him.  These  verses  shall  be  read  to  every  one,  who 
is  ordained,  at  his  ordination. 

1.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  elder?  To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can  and  to  baptise;  to  perform  the  office  of  matrimon}-,  and  assist 
the  presiding  elder  to  administer  the  Lord's  supper,  but  when 
the  presiding  elder  cannot  attend,  then  one  or  two  elders  shall 
perform  this  duty;  he  shall  also  perform  all  parts  of  divine 
worship,  endeavour  to  establish  and  hold  class-meetings,  where  a 
majority  of  the  members  conceive  it  necessar}-,  and  assist  in 
electing  the  leaders. 

2.  To  make  a  collection,  freely  contributed,  quarterly,  for  the 
travelling  preachers  and  for  the  poor;  to  take  specification  or 
catalogue  thereof,  signed  by  the  leader,  at  each  place,  and  when 
there  is  no  leader  present,  to  have  it  signed  by  some  other  mem- 
ber, in  order  to  account  with  the  presiding  elder,  so  that  all 
things  be  done  in  an  orderlj'  manner. 

3.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  want 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  travelling  preacher  comes 
to,  he  shall  make  the  collection  and  in  like  manner  take  a  cata- 
logue thereof,  and  bring  or  send  it  to  the  presiding  elder  or  to 
the  conference,  for  the  support  of  needy  preachers,  who  are  poor 
and  who  preach  amongst  poor  people- 

4.  Should  a  travelling  preacher  or  elder  desire  to  leave  the 
di.strict  assigned  him,  he  must  first  acquaint  the  presiding  elder 
of  his  intention  by  writing;  and  should  any  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstance,  he  shall  be  accountable  therefor  to  the  next  con- 
ference. 

5.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,   and  yet  required  to  preach,   it  is  ■ 
reasonable  and  just  that  the  elders  should  provide  for  their  sup- 
port in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  be  employed,  by  making 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1S17— EDITION   OF    1819.  55 

a  collection  for  their  benefit  amongst  the  societies  in  their 
district,  though  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  allotted  to 
travelling  preachers. 


SECTION  SIXTH. 

OF  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS,  AND  OF  THEIR 

DUTY. 

Quest.     How  is  a  preacher  to  be  received  ? 
A71S.  I.     By  the  yearly  conference. 

2.  In  the  interval  of  the  conference,  by  the  bishop,  or  the 
presiding  elder  of  the  district,  or  an  elder,  who  supplies  the 
place  of  a  presiding  elder  at  a  yearly  or  great  meeting,  until 
the  next  sitting  of  the  conference.  No  one  will  be  admitted 
otherwise,  than  on  trial;  and  one  who  is  taken  on  trial,  ma}^ 
either  be  admitted  or  rejected,  without  doing  him  any  wrong, 
otherwise  it  would  be  no  trial  at  all. 

3.  Every  person  proposed  as  preacher  shall  be  examined  by 
the  conference,  and  the  following  questions  put  to  him,  viz. 

Have  you  known  God  as  a  pardoning  God  in  Christ  ? 

Have  you  obtained  forgiveness  of  j'our  sins? 

Is  the  love  of  God,  through  Christ,  shed  abroad  in  your  heart? 

Have  you  obtained  peace  with  God  ? 

Do  you  follow  after  holiness? 

Have  you  a  correct  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justifi- 
cation, holiness  and  redemption  ? 

Does  5'our  own  salvation,  and  the  salvation  of  j'our  fellow 
mortals  lie  nearer  to  j-our  heart,  than  all  other  things  in  the 
world  ? 

Can  you  subject  3-ourself  to  the  counsel  of  j-our  brethren? 

Will  you  be  obedient  and  ready  to  speak  or  hold  3'our  peace, 
as  the  brethren  ma}'  think  fit  and  expedient  ? 

Are  you  willing,  as  much  as  in  you  lies,  to  assist  in  upholding 
the  itinerary  plan  (or  travelling  the  circuit)  and  to  support  the 
same  as  much  as  possible  ? 

Qst.  2.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  preacher  ? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get  hearers, 
and  establish  class  meetings  where  they  may  be  found  useful ;  to 
converse  with  the  members  on  the  situation  or  condition  of  their 


56  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

souls,  and  seek  to  administer  relief,  strengthen  and  direct  those 
who  are  afflicted  and  labour  under  temptations;  to  animate  the 
indolent  or  slothful,  and  endeavour  as  much  as  possible  to  edifj'' 
and  instruct  all  in  faith,  in  grace,  and  in  the  knowledge  of  Jesus 
Christ;  nev'er  to  omit  to  visit  the  sick,  but  on  all  occasions  to 
strive  to  enforce  and  confirm  the  doctrines  he  delivers  b}'  a  well 
ordered  exemplary  life. 

Quest.  3.     What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher? 

Afis.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  awa}-  3-our  time  with  unneces- 
sary things,  at  any  place.  Be  always  serious.  Let  3'our  motto 
be  Holiness  to  the  Lord.  Avoid  all  lightness  and  jesting.  Con- 
verse sparingly,  and  conduct  yourself  prudently  with  women; 
demean  3-ourself  in  all  respects  as  a  true  Christian. 

2.  Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  believe  evil 
of  no  one  without  good  evidence;  and  ahva3-s  put  the  most 
favourable  construction  on  such  matters,  as  the  nature  of  the 
subject,  consistent  with  truth,  will  bear. 

Speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatever  ma3^  be  3'our  thoughts,  keep 
them  within  your  own  breast,  till  3^ou  can  tell  the  person  con- 
cerned, what  3'ou  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 

3.  Let  3'our  business  be  to  save  as  man3'  souls  as  possible;  to 
this  emplo3'ment  give  yourself  up  wlioll3-.  Visit  those  who  need 
it,  and  act  in  all  things  not  according  to  your  own  will,  but  as  a 
Son  in  the  Gospel.  As  such  it  becomes  3^our  duty  to  emplo3^  3'our 
time  in  the  manner  here  prescribed:  in  preaching,  and  visiting 
from  house  to  house;  in  instructing  and  pra3'er,  and  in  meditating 
on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until  our  Lord  cometh. 

SECTION  SEVENTH. 

OF    THE   IMMORAL  CONDUCT    OF    PREACHERS,   AND    HOW    THEY 
ARE  TO  BE  DISPOSED  OF. 

Qsf.  I.  What  shall  be  done,  when  a  Bishop,  a  presiding 
elder  or  a  preacher  is  under  report  of  being  guilt3'  of  so)ne  crime 
forbidden  in  the  word  of  God,  as  an  unchristian  practise,  suffi- 
cient for  excommunication? 

Arts.  When  a  l)ish()])  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  how  .shall 
he  be  dealt  with  ?  _  When  charges  happen  to  be  made,  which  are 
prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the  dutv  of  a  presiding  elder 
and  an  elder,  after  being  duly  notified  thereof,  to  inquire  into  and 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1817  —  EDITION   OF   1819.  57 

examine  whether  they  are  founded  in  truth;  but,  as  the  Apostle 
says,  they  shall  not  receive  an  accusation  without  two  or  three 
witnesses.  If  it  then  appears  that  he  is  justly  accused,  they  shall 
take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing,  and  send  a  copy  thereof 
to  the  bishop  accused,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the 
accusers  and  accused  shall  be  present  to  each  other,  when  the  cause 
shall  be  tried  b}^  two  presiding  elders  and  three  elders.  If  he  is 
found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  yearly  conference, 
where  the  presiding  elders  and  elders  shall  again  examine  and  trj- 
the  same;  and  if  found  guilty  again,  he  shall  be  suspended  from 
ofiSce. 

Quest.  2.  When  a  presiding  elder  is  charged  with  immoral 
conduct,  what  shall  be  done  ? 

Aiis.  Where  charges  happen  to  be  brought  against  a  presid- 
ing elder,  which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the 
duty  of  the  next  or  nearest  elder  and  a  preacher  to  inquire  into 
and  examine  them,  and  if  the  accused  appear  to  be  guilty,  the}' 
shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing  and  send  him,  the 
accused,  a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the 
accusers  with  the  accused  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each 
other.  And  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop,  another  presiding 
elder  and  two  elders  shall  be  called,  who  shall  examine  the 
charges,  and  if  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till 
the  conference,  where  he  shall  be  accountable. 

Quest.  3.  When  an  elder,  a  preacher  or  an  exhorter  is  charged 
with  immoral  conduct,  what  shall  be  done? 

Ans.  The  preacher  thereabout,  to  whom  it  shall  be  known, 
shall  take  with  him  another  preacher  or  exhorter  or  a  leader  and 
examine  into  the  charge;  should  he  appear  guilty,  then  notice 
thereof  shall  be  given  him,  and  a  time  appointed,  where  they,  the 
accusers  and  the  accused  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each  other. 
And,  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or  presiding  elders,  three  elders 
or  preachers  shall  try  and  determine  his  case,  and  if  he  be  con- 
victed, he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where  he  shall 
be  accountable. 

SECTION  EIGHTH. 

OF  THE  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  acknowledge  and  confess 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  Holy  Word  of 


58  UNITED   BRETHREX   DISCIPLINES. 

God;  that  he  will  henceforth  strive  with  all  his  heart  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus;  and  work  out  his  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling  to  the  end  that  he  may  be  enabled  \.o  flee  from 
the  eternal  wrath  to  come. 

Every  member  should  endeavour  to  walk  closeh*  and  lead  a 
godl}-  life;  be  diligent  in  prayer,  particularly-  in  private;  and,  for 
his  own  edification,  to  be  present  and  attend,  when  practicable, 
at  all  meetings,  both  public  worship  and  private  prayer  meetings. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to-pra}'  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  v^^alk  closelj-,  as  in  the  presence  of 
God;  also  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communion  with  God  in 
all  his  employments,  and  never  speak  evil  of  his  fellow  being, 
but  practise  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  do  good  to  the  poor,  and 
endeavour  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  in  deed. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  hoi}',  as  required  in 
the  word  of  God.  Neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 
exercises  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God, 
and  with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honour  and  glor}'  of  God. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  contribute  something 
quarterly  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  his 
circumstances  will  admit  of  it,  willingly  and  freely. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet,  peaceable  and 
godl)'  life  in  the  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Chris- 
tian to  live  in  peace — particularlj'  to  the  higher  or  ruling  powers, 
every  one  shall  be  subject,  as  the  word  of  God  requires. 

Amongst  the  members  of  the  societ}-  the  preachers  shall 
establish  one  or  more  class-meetings,  w-here  a  majority  of  the 
members  may  conceive  it  necessar}';  and  the  members,  when 
practicable,  shall  assemble  at  the  place  appointed,  to  hold  prayer 
meetings,  in  order  to  edify  themselves  in  the  presence  of  God, 
and  promote  the  love  to  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  class  the  leaders  should  be  elected  in  the  presence  of 
the  preacher,  and  their  duty  shall  be  to  appoint  prayer-meetings, 
and  to  commence  and  conclude  them;  it  shall  also  be  their  duty 
to  hold  class  meetings  at  times,  to  exhort  the  members  and 
preserve  them  in  love,  and  to  look  well  to  their  own  conduct. 

When  members  trespass  against  each  other,  as  brethern  or 
sisters,  correct  the  fault  first  between  thee  and  him  alone:  If  he 
hear  thee,  thou  hast  gained  thy  brother.     But  if  he  will  not  hear 


DISCIPWNE  OF  1817  —  EDITION   OP   1819.  59 

thee,  then  take  with  thee  one  or  two  more,  that  in  the  mouth  of 
two  or  three  witnesses  every  word  ma}'  be  established.  And  if 
he  shall  neglect  to  hear  them,  tell  it  unto  the  church;  but  if  he 
neglect  to  hear  the  church,  let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a  Heathen  man 
and  a  Publican. 

On  any  dispute  between  two  or  more  of  the  members  of  our 
society,  concerning  the  payment  of  debts  or  other  cause,  which 
cannot  be  settled  b}^  the  parties  concerned,  the  preacher  who  has 
the  oversight  of  the  societ}',  or  the  preacher  residing  thereabouts, 
shall  inquire  into  the  circumstances  of  the  case;  and  shall  recom- 
mend to  the  contending  parties  a  reference,  consisting  of  one 
arbiter  chosen  by  the  plaintiff,  and  another  chosen  by  the  defend- 
ant; which  two  arbiters  so  chosen,  shall  choose  the  third:  the 
three  arbiters  are  then  to  deside  the  dispute. 

But  if  one  of  the  parties  be  dissatisfied  with  the  judgment 
given,  such  party  may  refer  to  the  next  quarterly  or  great  meet- 
ing, and  apply  to  the  presiding  elder  for  a  second  arbitration, 
and  if  the  preachers  find  suflB.cient  cause,  they  shall  grant  a 
second  arbitration,  in  which  case  each  party  shall  choose  two 
arbiters,  and  the  four  arbiters  shall  choose  a  fifth,  the  judgment 
of  the  majority  of  whom  shall  be  .final;  and  an}'  person  refusing 
to  abide  by  such  judgment,  shall  be  excluded  the  society.  And 
if  any  member  of  the  society  shall  refuse  in  cases  of  debt  or 
other  disputes,  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration,  when  recom- 
mended to  him  by  a  preacher  or  leader,  who  has  the  charge  of 
the  society;  or  shall  enter  into  a  law  suit  with  another  member, 
before  these  measures  are  taken,  he  shall  be  expelled,  excepting 
the  case  be  of  such  a  nature  as  to  require  and  justify  a  process 
at  law,  as:  executors  or  administrators. 


APPENDIX. 

OF  THE  NECESSITY  OF  UNION  AMONG  OURSELVES. 

Let  us  be  deeply  sensible  (from  what  we  have  known)  of  the 
evil  of  a  division  in  principle,  spirit,  or  practice,  and  the  dread- 
ful consequences  to  ourselves  and  others.  If  we  are  united, 
what  can  stand  before  us.?  If  we  divide,  we  shall  destroy 
ourselves — the  work  of  God,  and  the  souls  of  our  people. 

Quest.  What  can  be  done  in  order  to  a  closer  union  with 
each  other? 


6o  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

A?is.  I.  Let  us  be  deepl}'  convinced  of  the  absolute  neces- 
sit}'  of  it. 

2.  Pray  earnestl}'  for,  and  speak  truly  and  freel}-  to  each  other. 

3.  When  we  meet,  let  us  never  part  without  pra3er. 

4.  Take  great  care  not  to  despise  each  other's  gifts. 

5.  Never  speak  lightl}'  of  each  other. 

6.  Let  us  defend  each  other's  character  in  every  thing,  so  far 
as  is  consistent  with  truth. 

7.  Labour,  in  honour,  each  to  prefer  the  other  before  himself. 

8.  We  recommend  a  serious  examination  of  //le  muses,  evils 
a7id  cures  of  heart,  a?id  cJnirch  divisions. 

OF  VISITING  FROM  HOUSE  TO  HOUSE   AND  ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL  RELIGION. 

Qriest.     How  can  we  further  assist  those  under  our  care  ? 

A?is.  I.  By  instructing  them  at  their  own  houses;  which  is 
of  unspeakable  necessity,  in  order  to  promote  confidence  and 
communion  with  God  among  us;  further  to  wean  us  of  the  love 
of  the  world,  and  inure  us  to  a  life  of  heavenly  mindedness; 
also  to  encourage  us  to  strive  after  and  practise  brotherly  love, 
that  no  evil  tlti?iking  or  jiidging  of  one  another  be  found 
amongst  us;  and  lastl}^  that  we  may  learn  to  do  as  we  would 
wish  to  be  done  by. 

2.  Every  preacher  must  make  it  his  duty  to  instruct  the 
people  from  house  to  house,  and  exhort  them  to  be  apt  in  all 
good.  Till  this  be  done,  and  that  in  good  earnest,  we  shall,  upon 
the  whole,  be  but  little  better,  and  our  godliness  will  not  be 
deeply  enough  founded;  therefore,  wherever  we  may  be,  we 
should  guard  against  useless  or  loose  talking. 

Undoubtedly  this  private  application  of  visiting  from  house  to 
house  and  exhorting  the  people,  is  founded  or  implied  in  those 
solemn  words  of  the  Apostle: 

''I charge  thee  before  God  and  the  Lord  fesus  Christ,  zvho  shall 
judge  the  quick  and  dead  at  his  appeanng,  preach  the  JVord;  be 
ifistatit  in  season,  ojit  of  season:  Reprove,  rebtike,  exhort,  with 
all  lo7ig  suffering:' 

OF  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN. 

Quest.     What  shall  be  done  to  benefit  the  rising  generation  ? 
A71S.     Let  him,  who  is  in  any  wise  zealous  for  God  and  the 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1817 — EDITION  OF    1819.  61 

souls  of  men,  begin  the  work  without  delay.  Where  children 
are  found,  whose  parents  are  in  societj',  meet  them  as  often  as 
possible;  speak  freely  with  them,  and  instruct  them  diligently; 
exhort  them  to  be  good,  and  pray  with  them  earnestly,  yet  simply 
and  plain,  that  they  may  learn  to  know  their  Creator  and 
Redeemer  in  the  days  of  their  youth. 

THE  FORM  AND  MANNER  OF  ORDAINING   PREACHERS. 

1.  On  the  day  appointed,  there  shall  be  a  suitable  sermon  or 
exhortation  delivered. 

2.  After  their  names  have  been  read  aloud,  the  bishop  shall 
say  unto  the  people  present: 

3.  Beloved  Brethren  in  Christ!  Is  there  any  amongst  you, 
who  knoweth  any  impediment  or  crime  in  any  of  those  persons 
to  be  ordained  elders  (or  deacons  as  the  case  may  be),  for  which 
he  ought  not  to  be  admitted  to  that  office,  let  him  come  forth  in 
the  name  of  God  and  shew  what  the  crime  or  impediment  is. 

4.  If  any  crime  or  impediment  be  objected,  the  bishop  shall 
surcease  from  ordaining  that  person,  until  such  time  as  the  party 
accused  shall  be  found  clear  of  the  crime. 

Then  shall  be  read  i  Tim.  3.8 — 13. 

Likewise  must  the  deacons  be  grave,  not  double  tongued,  not 
given  to  much  wine,  not  greedy  of  filthy  lucre;  holding  the 
mystery  of  the  faith  in  a  pure  conscience.  And  let  these  also 
first  be  proved,  then  let  them  use  the  office  of  a  deacon,  being 
found  blameless.  Even  so  must  their  wives  be  grave,  not  slan- 
derers; sober,  faithful  in  all  things.  Let  the  deacons  be  the 
husbands  oi  one  wife,  ruling  their  children  and  their  own  houses 
well.  For  they  that  have  used  the  office  of  a  deacon  well,  pur- 
chase to  themselves  a  good  degree,  and  great  boldness  in  the 
faith  which  is  in  Christ  Jesus. 

Quest.  Do  you  trust  that  you  are  inwardly  moved  by  the  holy 
Ghost,  to  take  upon  you  the  office  of  the  ministry  to  serve  God 
in  the  church  of  Christ,  to  the  honour  and  glory  of  his  holy 
name.'' 

Ans.     I  trust,  with  the  help  of  God. 

Quest.  Do  you  believe  the  Holy  Scriptures  old  and  new  testa- 
ment? 

Ans.     I  do  believe  them. 

Quest.     Will  you  apply  all  your  diligence  to  frame  and  fashion 


62  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

your  own  life  according  to  the  doctrine  of  Christ;  and  to  make 
yourself  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  a  wholsome  example  of  the 
flock  of  Christ  ? 

Ans.     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Quest.  Will  you  reverently  obey  them,  to  whom  the  charge 
and  government  over  you  is  committed,  following  with  a  glad 
mind  and  will  their  godly  admonitions  ? 

A71S.     I  will  endeavour,  through  the  grace  of  God,  so  to  do. 
Then  pra3'er  is  made. 

After  prayer,  the  bishops  (or  bishop  and  elders)  shall  lay  their 
hands  upon  the  heads  of  every  one  of  them,  and  say: 

"Take  thou  authority  to  execute  the  office  of  an  elder  (or 
minister)  in  the  church  of  God.  In  the  name  of  the  Father, 
and  of  the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost,"  Amen. 

Hereupon  the  bishop  shall  deliver  to  every  one  of  them  the 
Holy  Bible,  saying: 

"Take  thou  authority  to  read  and  preach  the  word  of  God  in 
the  church  of  Christ." 

Then  the  bishop  shall  read  from  the  12th  chapter  of  St.  Luke 

V.  35—38: 

Let  your  loins  be  girded  about  and  your  lights  burning,  and 
ye  yourselves  like  unto  men  that  wait  for  their  Lord,  when  he  will 
return  from  the  wedding,  that  when  he  cometh  and  knocketh, 
they  may  open  unto  him  immediately.  Blessed  are  those  ser- 
vants, whom  the  Lord  when  he  cometh  shall  find  watching. 
Verily  I  say  unto  you,  that  he  shall  gird  himself,  and  make 
them  sit  down  to  meat,  and  will  come  forth  to  serve  them.  And 
if  he  shall  come  in  the  second  watch,  or  come  in  the  third 
watch,  and  find  them  so,  blessed  are  those  servants. 

Then  the  bishop,  or  one  whom  he  appoints,  shall  pray.  After 
which  the  following-benediction  is  pronounced  bj^  the  bishop: 

The  Peace  of  God  keep  your  hearts  and  minds  in  the  knowledge 
of  Jesus  Christ  otir  Lord,  Amen. 

THE  FORM  AND  MANNER  OF  ORDAINING  A  BISHOP. 

After  prayer  the  bishop  reads  as  follows: 
Hear  ye  the  Word  of  the  Lord! 

Matth  28.  V.  18—20.  And  Jesus  came  and  spake  unto  them, 
saying:  All  power  is  given  unto  me  in  Heaven  and  in  Earth. 
Go  ye  therefore,  and  teach  all  7iations,  baptizing  them  in  the  name 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1817  —  EDITION  OF    1819.  63 

of  the  Father,  afid  of  the  Sou,  and  of  the  Holy  Ghost;  teaching 
them  to  observe  all  things,  whatever  I  have  commanded  yozi:  and, 
lo,  I  am  with  you  alway,  even  unto  the  end  of  the  ivorld. 

Acts  20.  V.  27 — 32.  For  I  have  not  shunned  to  declare  unto  you 
all  the  counsel  of  God.  Take  heed  therefore,  unto  yourselves, 
and  to  all  the  flock,  over  which  the  Holy  Ghost  hath  made  you 
overseers,  to  feed  the  church  of  God,  which  he  hath  purchased 
with  his  own  blood.  For  I  know  this,  that  after  my  departing 
shall  grievous  wolves  enter  in  among  you,  not  sparing  the  flock. 
Also  of  your  own-selves  shall  men  arise,  speaking  perverse 
things,  to  draw  away  disciples  after  them.  Therefore  watch,  and 
remember,  that  by  the  space  of  three  years  I  ceased  not  to  warn 
every  one  night  and  day  with  tears.  And  now,  brethren,  I  com- 
mand you  to  God,  and  to  the  word  of  his  grace,  which  is  able  to 
build  you  up,  and  to  give  you  an  inheritance  among  all  them, 
which  are  sanctified. 

I  Tim.  3.  V.  I — 7.  This  is  a  true  saying.  If  a  man  desire  the 
office  of  a  bishop,  he  desireth  a  good  work. — A  bishop  then  must 
be  blameless,  the  husband  of  one  wife,  vigilant,  sober,  of  good 
behaviour,  given  to  hospitality,  apt  to  teach;  not  given  to  wine, 
no  striker,  not  greedy  of  filthy  lucre;  but  patient,  not  a  brawler, 
not  covetous;  one  that  ruleth  well  his  own  house,  having  his 
children  in  subjection  with  all  gravity;  (for  if  a  man  know  not 
how  to  rule  his  own  house,  how  shall  he  take  care  of  the  church 
of  God.'*)  not  a  novice,  lest  being  lifted  up  with  pride,  he  fall 
into  the  condemnation  of  the  Devil.  Moreover  he  must  have  a 
good  report  of  them,  which  are  without;  lest  he  fall  into  re- 
proach, and  the  snare  of  the  Devil. 

When  the  gospel  and  epistles  are  read,  and  the  discourse  there- 
after following  ended,  the  bishop  requires  the  person  elected  to 
step  forth,  moves  the  congregation  to  prayer,  and  then  addresses 
him,  who  is  to  be  ordained,  as  follows: 

Brother!  For  as  much  as  the  holy  scriptures  command,  that 
we  should  not  be  hasty  in  laying  on  hands,  and  admitting  any 
person  to  government  in  the  church  of  Christ,  which  he  hath 
purchased  with  no  less  price  than  the  effusion  of  his  own  blood; 
therefore,  before  I  admit  you  to  this  administration,  I  will  ques- 
tion you  on  some  certain  points  relative  thereto. 

The  Bishop.  Are  you  persuaded,  that  the  old  and  new  testa- 
ments contain  sufficiently  all  doctrine  required  of  necessity  for 
eternal  salvation,  through  faith  in  Jesus  Christ?     and  are  you 


64  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

determined  out  of  the  same  hoi}'-  scriptures  to  instruct  the 
people  committed  to  your  charge,  according  to  the  abilitj',  Avliich 
God  shall  grant  you,  and  to  teach  or  maintain  nothing,  but  what 
may  be  concluded  and  proven  b}'  the  same  ? 

Ans.  Yes,  I  am  persuaded,  and  will,  with  the  help  of  God,  do 
according  thereto. 

77/1?  Bishop.  Are  you  willing  to  exercise  j'ourself  faithfull}-  in 
the  same  holy  scriptures,  and  to  call  upon  God  b}'  praj'er  for  the 
true  understanding  of  them,  so  that  you  may  be  able  to  teach 
wholesome  doctrine  ? 

A71S.     I  am  willing  with  the  help  of  God  so  to  do. 

The  Bishop.  Will  you,  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  maintain  and 
set  forth  a  kind  and  peaceable  disposition  towards  ever}"  one,  and 
endeavour  to  promote  the  like  good  will  amongst  others,  accord- 
ing to  the  authority  vested  in  j-ou  by  the  word  of  God  ? 

Ans.     I  will  so  do,  the  Lord  being  ni}'  helper. 

The  Bishop.  Will  you,  in  ordaining,  sending  abroad  and  laying 
hands  upon  others,  act  faithfully  and  with  a  good  conscience.'* 

Ans.     I  will  so  do  b}^  the  help  of  God. 
Then  the  bishop  shall  sa}^ 

Almighty  God,  our  heavenl}'  father,  grant  unto  you  strength 
and  power  to  perform  all  these  things,  that  yo\x  maj'  be  found  to 
be  a  true  and  faithful  minister  at  the  day  of  account,  through 
Jesus  Christ  our  Lord,  Amen. 

The  Bishop.     Let  us  pray. 

After  prayer  the  bishop  and  elders  present,  shall  lay  their 
hands  upon  the  head  of  the  elected  person  kneeling  before  them 
upon  his  knees,  the  bishop  saying: 

Receive  the  Holy  Ghost  for  the  office  and  work  of  a  bishop  in 
the  church  of  God,  now  committed  unto  thee  by  the  imposition 
of  our  hands,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of 
the  H0I3'  Ghost,  Amen. 

Then  the  bishop  shall  deliver  him  the  Bible,  saj-ing: 

Give  heed  unto  reading,  exhortation  and  doctrine.  Think 
upon  the  things  contained  in  this  holy  Book.  Be  diligent  to 
practise  them.  Take  heed  unto  thyself,  and  to  thy  doctrine. 
Feed  the  flock  of  Christ.  Hold  up  the  weak.  Be  compassionate, 
and  administer  discipline  with  mercy,  that  3^011  may  receive  the 
crown  of  glory,  through  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord,  Amen. 

Then  the  bishop,  or  one  whom  he  appoints,  shall  conclude  with 
prayer. 


DISCIPLINE   OF   I«I7  —  EDITION  OE    1S19.  65 

THE  FORM  OF  SOLEMNIZATION  OF  MATRIMONY. 
ADDRESS. 

Dear  Beloved! 

We  are  gathered  together  here,  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  in  the 
presence  of  these  witnesses,  to  join  together  these  two  persons, 
namely  N.  and  N.  as  man  and  wife  in  the  holy  estate  of  Matri- 
mon}-:  which  is  an  honourable  estate,  instituted  of  God  in  the 
time  of  man's  innocency. 

Quest.  Is  there  any  one  here  present,  who  can  shew  any  just 
cause  why  these  two  persons  ma}'  not  lawfully  be  joined  together, 
let  him  now  speak,  or  else  hereafter  for  ever  hold  his  peace. 

If  no  impediment  be  alledged,  then  shall  the  minister  say  unto 
the  man: 

N.  N.  Avilt  thou  have  this  woman  (N.  N.)  to  thy  wedded  wife, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance.  Wilt  thou  love  her,  com- 
fort her,  honour  and  keep  her,  in  sickness  and  in  health;  and 
forsaking  all  other,  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  so  long  as  ye  both 
shall  live?     If  so,  then  answer:    I  will. 

Then  shall  the  minister  say  unto  the  woman: 

N.  N.  wilt  thou  have  this  man  (N.  N.)  to  thy  wedded  husband, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance?  Wilt  thou  obey  him, 
serve  him,  love,  honour,  and  keep  him  in  sickness  and  in  health ; 
and  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  him,  so  long  as  ye 
both  shall  live?     If  so,  then  answer:  I  will. 

Then  the  minister  shall  require  them  to  join  their  right  hands 
together,  and  the  minister  shall  say: 

Those,  whom  God  hath  joined  together,  let  no  man  put 
asunder. 

For  as  much  as  N.  and  N.  have  consented  together  in  wedlock, 
and  have  witnessed  the  same  before  God  and  these  witnesses 
present,  I  pronounce  that  they  are  man  and  wife  together,  in  the 
name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  the  Hoi}'-  Ghost. 
The  God  of  Abraham,  of  Isaac,  and  of  Jacob  bless  this  man  and 
this  woman,  and  sow  into  their  hearts  the  seeds  of  eternal  life, 
Amen. 

Let  us  pray. 

THE  END. 


DOCTRINE 


AKD 


DISCIPLINE 


United  Brethren  in  Christ. 


HAGERS-TOWN: 

PRINTED  BY  J.  GRUBER  and  D.  MAY. 

1822.  67 


OF  THE  ORIGIN   OF   THE   UNITED   BRETHERN 
IN   CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  Lord,  our  God,  to 
awaken  persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  who  should 
raise  up  the  Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach 
the  gospel  of  Christ  crucified  in  its  purity. 

At  this  time  the  Lord  in  mercy  remembered  the  Germans  in 
America,  who,  living  scattered  in  this  extensive  countr}',  had 
but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  gospel  of  a  crucified 
Saviour  preached  to  them  in  their  native  language. 

Amongst  others  he  raised  up  an  Otterbei?i,  a  Bcchni^  and  a 
Guething,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and  strength,  to  labour 
in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  call,  also,  amongst  the  Germans 
in  America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men  obeyed  the  call 
of  their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labours  were  blessed;  they  estab- 
lished in  many  places  excellent  societies,  and  led  many  a 
precious  soul  to  Jesus  Christ.  There  sphere  of  action  spread 
itself  more  and  more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary  to  look 
about  for  more  fellow  labourers  in  the  vineyard ;  for  the  harvest 
was  great,  and  the  labourers  but  few.  The  Lord  called  others, 
who  also  were  willing  to  devote  their  strength  to  his  service; 
such,  then,  were  accepted  by  one  or  the  other  of  the  preachers, 
as  fellow  labourers. 

The  number  of  members  of  the  society,  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  country,  continued  from  time  to  time  to  increase,  and  the 
gracious  work  spread  itself  through  the  states  of  Pennsylvania, 
Maryland  and  Virginia.  Great  meetings  were  appointed  and 
held  annually  several  times;  when,  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present;  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and 
the  necessity  of  their  utmost  endeavours  to  save  souls.  At  one 
of  these  conversations,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  of 
all  the  preachers,  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how,  and 
in  what  manner  they  might  be  most  useful. 

6q  \ 


70  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

The  first  conference  was  accordingly  held  in  Baltimore,  in  the 
j^ear  1789.     There  were  present: 

William  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Bcehm,  John  Krnst, 

George  Adam  Guething,  Henry  Weidener. 

Christian  Newcomer, 
The  second  conference  was  held  in  York  county,  in  Paradise 
township,  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year  1791, 
where  there  were  present  the  following  persons,  viz. 
William  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  G.  Pfrimmer, 

George  Adam  Guething,  John  Xeidig, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander, 

Adam  Lehman, 
And   after  mature  deliberation,  how  the}^  might  labour  most 
usefully  in  the  vineyard  of  the  I^ord,  the}'  again  appointed  such 
as  fellow  labourers,  of  whom  thej'  had  cause  to  believe  that  they 
had  experienced  true  religion  in  their  own  souls. 

In  the  mean  time  the  number  of  members  continued  to  increase 
more  and  more;  the  preachers  therefore  were  obliged  to  appoint 
an  annual  conference,  in  order  to  unite  themselves  more  closel}-, 
and  labour  most  usefull}'  to  one  common  end;  for  some  were 
Presbyterians,  or  church  Reformed,  some  were  Lutherans,  others 
Mennonites,  and  yet  others  were  Methodists.  The}-  therefore 
appointed  a  conference  to  be  held  the  25th  of  September,  1800,  in 
Frederick  county,  Maryland,  at  the  house  of  brother  Frederick 
Kemp.     There  were  present  as  follows: 

William  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Bcehm,  Henry  Krum, 

George  Adam  Guething,  John  Ilershey, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henrj-  Boehm, 

Abraham  Dracksel,  Dietrick  Aurauf. 

John  George  Pfrimmer, 
They  there  united  themselves  into  a  societ}-,  which  bears  the 
name  of  "'The  United  Brethren  in  Christ-"  and  elected  William 
Otterbein  and  Martin  Bcehm,  as  superintendants  or  bishops,  and 
agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty  to  baptize  in  such 
manner,  as  should  best  accord  with  his  conviction. 

From  this  time  forth  the  society  increased  still  more;  preachers 


DISCIPLINE   OF   182I.  71 

were  appointed,  who  travelled  continually  (because  the  number 
of  preaching  places  could  in  no  other  wise  be  attended),  and  the 
work  spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky.  It 
became  necessary,  therefore,  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  state 
of  Ohio,  because  it  was  conceived  too  laborious  for  the  preachers, 
who  laboured  in  those  states,  to  travel  such  a  distance  annually 
to  the  conference. 

In  the  mean  time  brothers  Boehm  and  Guething  died,  and 
brother  Otterbein  desired,  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected 
(because  infirmity  and  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer,)  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society,  and  preserve 
discipline  and  order;  for  at  a  conference  formerly  held,  it  was 
resolved,  that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  die,  another  should  be 
elected  in  his  place — Therefore  brother  Christian  Newcomer  was 
then  elected  as  bishop,  to  take  charge  of  the  superintendance  of 
the  society. 

The  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  society  has  long  since  been 
deeply  felt;  and  partial  attempts  thereto  having  at  different  times 
been  made,  it  was  at  length  resolved  at  the  conference  in  the 
state  of  Ohio,  that  a  general  conference  should  be  held,  who 
should  take  upon  themselves  to  complete  the  same,  so  as  to 
accord  with  the  word  of  God.  The  members  of  this  conference 
were  to  be  elected  from  amongst  the  preachers  in  the  different 
parts  of  the  country,  by  a  majority  of  the  votes  of  the  members 
of  the  society;  and  there  were  present  at  the  conference,  that 
were  duly  elected,  the  following  preachers,  namely:  Christian 
Newcomer,  Abraham  Hiestand,  Andrew  Zeller,  Daniel  Treyer, 
George  Benedum,  Abraham  Tracksel,  Christian  Berger,  Abraham 
Meyer,  John  Schneider,  Henry  Kumler,  Henry  Spade,  Isaac 
Nighswander,  Christian  Krum,  and  Jacob  Baulus. 

These  met  on  the  6th  of  June,  1815,  near  Mountpleasant,  West- 
moreland county,  Penn.  where  they,  after  mature  deliberation, 
found  it  to  be  necessary,  good  and  beneficial  to  deliver  the  fol- 
lowing Doctrines  and  Rules  of  discipline  to  the  society  in  love 
and  humility,  with  the  sincere  desire,  that  these  doctrines  and 
rules,  together  with  the  Word  of  God,  might  be  attended  to  and 
strictly  observed.  For  God  is  a  God  of  order,  and  where  there  is 
no  order  and  discipline,  there  all  love  and  communion  will  be 
lost.  Therefore,  let  us  attend  to  the  counsel  of  our  Lord,  who 
taught  us:  That  in  lowliness  of  mind,  we  should  esteem  each 
other  better  than  ourselves.    Seek  to  be  minded,  as  Jesus  Christ 


72  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

also  was!  AVho  took  upon  him  the  form  of  a  ser\'ant,  and  became 
obedient  even  unto  the  death  of  the  cross,  to  obtain  for  us  grace 
and  strength,  that  we,  from  motives  of  love  and  humility,  might 
submit  one  to  the  other.  lie  who  cannot  submit  himself,  the 
same  lacketh  grace,  love  and  humilit}';  hence  Jesus  saith:  Whoso 
amongst  j-ou  shall  desipe  to  be  the  greatest,  shall  be  the  other's 
servant.  If  then  we  are  to  be  the  servants  of  each  other,  we  must 
love  one  another.  Jesus  saith:  Thus  shall  all  men  know  that 
ye  are  my  true  disciples,  if  ye  have  love  to  one  another;  and 
whoso  hath  not  love,  the  same  continueth  in  death.  Then  let  us 
practise  love,  that  we  may  enjoy  the  glorj'  and  felicity,  which 
Jesus  obtained  b\'  prayer  for  his  disciples  of  his  heavenl}'  father, 
that  we  may  be  ojie  even  as  he  and  the  father  are  one.  There- 
fore, beloved  brethren,  let  us  strive  to  be  likeminded,  unanimous 
and  concordant;  and  no  one  speak  or  think  evil  of  the  other: 
but  implore  the  Lord,  that  he  would  graciously  grant  us  his 
spirit  and  an  earnest  desire  to  lead  a  trulj'  christian  life,  to 
the  honour  and  glory  of  his  holy  name,  and  our  own  eternal 
welfare.     Amen. 


SECTION  FIRST. 

THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men, 
that  we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence  or  being  with 
both.  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the  earth, 
and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and  further- 
more sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  he  is  very  God  and  man,  that 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost  in  the 
virgin  Mary,  and  was  born  of  her:  that  he  is  the  saviour  and 
mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in 
him,  accept  the  grace  proffered  in  Jesus.  That  this  Jesus  suf- 
fered and  died  on  the  cross  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again  on  the 
third  da}',  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right  hand 
of  God  to  intercede  for  us;  and,  that  he  shall  come  again  at  the 
last  day  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 


DISCIPLINE  OP   1 82 1.  73 

the  father  and  the  son,  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  bod}',  and  life  everlasting. 

We  believe,  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  testaments,  is 
the  word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our  salva- 
tion; that  every  true  Christian  is  boutid  to  acknowledge  and 
receive  it  with  the  influence  of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  their  only 
rule  and  guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  as  also 
true  penitence,  forgiveness  of  sins  and  following  after  Christ,  no 
one  can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  holy  scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam  and  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  further  think,  that  the  outward  means,  namely:  baptism 
and  the  remembrance  of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our  Lord 
Jesus,  are  to  be  in  use  and  practised  in  all  Christian  societies; 
and  that  it  is  incumbent  on  his  children  particularly  to  practise 
them:  But  the  manner  in  which,  ought  always  to  be  left  to  the 
judgment  and  understanding  of  each.  So  also  the  practice  or 
example  of  washing  the  feet  must  remain  free  to  the  judgment 
of  every  one. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

OF  THE  GENERAL  AND  YEARLY  CONFERENCES. 

Qtiestio7i.  After  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions 
of  the  conferences  to  be  considered  ? 

Answer.  It  is  desired,  that  all  things  be  considered  on  these 
occasions,  as  in  the  immediate  presence  of  God:  That  every  per- 
son rise  and  speak  freely  whatever  is  in  his  heart. 

(Jst.  '  How  and  after  what  manner  are  the  members  of  a  Gen- 
eral conference  to  be  chosen  ? 

A71S.  In  every  district  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  such  are 
present,  if  not,  the  stationed  or  local  preachers,  who  live  in  the 
district,  shall  advise  the  members  of  the  society,  that  they  elect 
two  elders  from  out  of  their  district;  but  all  the  elders  in  the 
district,  who  are  capable  of  going  to  the  conference,  shall  be  put 
in  nomination,  and  the  same  made  known  some  time  previous  to 
the  election;  and  those  two,  who  shall  have.a  majority  of  votes. 


74  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

shall  be  considered  as  members  of  the  General  conference.  The 
votes  taken  at  each  place,  shall  be  couched  in  writing,  and 
attested  by  one  of  the  preachers  or  leaders  then  and  there  pres- 
ent. The  presiding  elder  of  the  district  shall  examine  the  state- 
ment, and  should  an}'  two  or  more  have  an  equal  number  of 
votes,  he  shall  determine  by  lot,  who  or  which  of  them  are 
elected. 

QsL     How  often  are  the  General  conferences  to  be  held  ? 

Afis.     Every  four  years. 

QsL  Has  the  General  conference  any  other  powers,  which  the 
Annual  conference  has  not? 

Afis.  Yes,  the  members  of  the  General  conference  alone  have 
the  power  to  elect  two  bishops  from  amongst  the  elders  for  four 
years;  as  also  to  alter  and  amend  the  discipline  according  as 
they  may  find  it  necessary  and  expedient:  provided  they  do  not 
establish  any  article,  which  may  tend  to  abolish,  undo  or  put 
aside  the  itinerant  plan.  The  general  conference  has  further  to 
fix  upon  or  determine  the  districts,  where  the  j-early  conferences 
are  to  be  held. 

Quest.     Which  are  the  members  of  the  yearly  conference? 

A?is.  All  the  elders  and  preachers,  who  have  obtained  a 
written  permit,  and  are,  for  the  time  being,  in  the  district  where 
the  conference  is  held,  or  who  ma}'  be  taken  up  and  acknowledged 
in  the  same. 

Quest.  In  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions  of  a 
conference  to  be  conducted? 

A71S.  I.  There  will  be  read  a  chapter  in  the  Bible,  and  brief 
remarks  made  on  the  contents;  there  will  be  sung  and  pra5'er 
performed,  and  that  as  often  as  the  conference  sits;  and  the 
sitting  closed  with  singing  and  praj^er, 

2.  The  conference  elects  a  secretary,  and  in  case  one  of  the 
bishops  be  absent,  also  one  of  the  presiding  elders,  to  act  in  con- 
junction with  the  bishop.  * 

3.  The  preachers  will  be  examined,  what  their  deportment 
towards  their  fellow  beings  is;  whether  their  conduct  in  life  be 
blameless  and  whether  they  emplo}'  as  much  time  as  possible  to 
promote  or  spread  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  What  preachers  are  to  be  admitted  on  trial  ? 

5.  What  preachers  are  yet  to  continue  on  trial  ? 

6.  Are  any  to  be  .sleeted  as  elders  ? 

7.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died  ? 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1821.  75 

8.  Who  are  the  presiding  elders  ? 

9.  Who  gives  himself  up  to  travel? 

10.  What  has  been  collected,  partly  for  contingent  expences, 
and  partly  for  making  up  the  allowances  of  the  travelling 
preachers  ?  Has  reckoning  been  made  with  them  ?  Have  they 
received  their  dues  ? 

11.  When  and  where  shall  our  next  conference  be  held? 

12.  Are  the  elders  ordained? 

13.  In  what  circuits  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year? 

14.  Is  there  any  thing  more  to  do  ? 

15.  Has  the  conference  appointed  the  districts  in  their  circuit, 
for  the  purpose  of  holding  the  election  for  the  members  of  the 
General  conference? 

16.  Is  all  that  has  been  transacted,  entered  in  the  protocol  ? 

SECTION  THIRD. 

OF  THE  ELECTION  AND  CONSECRATION  OF  THE  BISHOPS  AND 
THEIR  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  are  the  bishops  to  be  constituted  ? 

Ans.  The  General  conference  shall  elect  them  by  the  majority 
of  the  votes  of  the  elders,  who  were  elected  to  the  General  con- 
ference: But  the  conference  may  still  be  at  liberty  to  retain  the 
bishops  yet  other  four  years.  The  newly  elected,  however,  as 
well  as  the  bishops  retained,  must  be  capable  of  travelling  the 
different  circuits  and  of  attending  to  the  conferences,  otherwise 
they  cannot  be  elected.  The  persons  thus  elected  shall  be 
ordained  by  the  laying  on  of  the  hands  of  our  bishops  and  one 
or  more  elders,  but  if  no  bishop  be  present,  then  two  elders 
shall  perform  the  rite. 

Quest.     What  are  the  duties  of  the  bishops  ? 

Ans.  1.     To  preside  in  our  conferences. 

2.  They  have,  in  conjunction  with  an  elder,  whom  they 
select,  to  fix  the  appointments  of  the  itinerant  preachers  for  the 
several  circuits,  provided  they  shall  not  allow  any  itinerant 
preacher  to  remain  in  the  same  station  more  than  three  years 
successive!}',  unless  particular  circumstances  require  it,  and  then 
only  with  consent  of  all  the  bishops. 

3.  The  bishops  point  out  the  circuits,  which  are  to  be  trav- 
elled bj'  the  presiding  elders. 


76  VNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES.      . 

4.  Thej'  have  also,  in  connexion  with  the  presiding  elders, 
power,  in  the  intervals  of  the  conferences,  to  change  the  itiner- 
ant preachers,  where  they  conceive  it  necessary,  and  also  to 
receive  and  suspend  preachers,  as  necessity  maj^  require,  until 
the  conference. 

5.  The}'  have  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large,  attend 
to  the  conferences,  and  oversee  the  spiritual  concerns  of  the 
societies. 

6.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rites  of  ordina- 
tion. 

7.  When  a  bishop  ceases  to  attend  to  the  several  confer- 
ences, and  neglects  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large, 
can  he  still  exercise  his  episcopal  ofRce  among  us?  No,  unless 
it  be  that  he  were  sick,  and  what  the  like  circumstances  more 
might  be. 

8.  If,  ai  any  time,  it  should  so  happen,  that  by  reason  of 
death,  suspension  or  other  cause,  our  communion  should  be 
without  a  bishop;  how  is  this  want  to  be  relieved?  The  elder, 
who  shall  have  been  elected  to  preside  at  the  conference,  in  the 
absence  of  the  bi.shop,  shall  perform  the  duties  of  a  bishop  dur- 
ing the  sitting  of  the  conference;  he  shall  akso  attend  the  other 
conference,  and  take  his  seat  with  the  president  there  elected,  to 
act  in  conjunction  with  him  at  the  conference  then  sitting;  and 
the  president  there  elected  shall  also  in  turn,  and  in  like  manner 
attend  to  the  other  conference:  so  that  each  conference  ma)'  know 
and  be  acquainted  with  the  proceedings  of  the  others,  and  that 
love  and  communion  be  maintained  &c.  unto  the  next  general 
conference,  who  are  then  to  elect  bishops  anew. 

9.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present  at  the  close  of  every 
conference. 


SECTION  FOURTH. 

OF  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

Quest.     How  arc  the  presiding  elders  to  be  elected  ? 

A71S.  The  bishops  shall  propose  to  the  conference  some  of  the 
elders,  who  have  finished  their  time  of  probation ;  and  with  the 
consent  of  the  conference,  elect  them  for  four  years. 

Quest.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  presiding  elder? 


DISCIPLINE  OP   I«2I  '^'j 

Ans.  I.  To  travel  through  the  district  appointed  him  of  the 
bishops,  and  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.  He  has  to  take  charge  of  the  travelling  and  local  preachers 
in  his  district,  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  agreeably  to 
the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
possible  attend  them;  he  shall  administer  the  Lord's  supper,  and 
hold  quarterly  meeting  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters 
and  leaders;  he  shall  further  inquire  into,  and  examine  whether 
the  travelling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty,  particularly 
whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable,  preach  every 
Sunday ;  and  where  there  are  more  of  them,  to  change  them  at 
times,  where  the  most  benefit  is  likelj^  to  result,  and  to  exhort 
them,  that  they  maintain  discipline  and  order  and  love  and 
seriousness  in  their  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  change  the  travelling  preachers  in  his  district, 
but  he  must  first  consult  a  bishop;  he  can  further  receive  or 
suspend  preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  He  shall  give  the  bishop  notice  of  the  condition  of  his  dis- 
trict; and  see  that  the  travelling  preachers  obtain  a  proportioned 
part  of  their  support  quarterly,  by  giving  them  their  allowance 
out  of  the  money  they  may  have  collected  in  their  districts;  a 
single  man  however,  shall  not  be  allowed  more  than  eighty  dollars, 
and  a  married  man  one  hundred  and  sixty  dollars,  annually. 
Should  the  collection  of  one  or  the  other  district  be  insuflScient, 
then  it  shall  be  left  to  a  committee,  appointed  by  the  conference, 
who,  in  their  discretion,  shall  make  up  the  deficiency  out  of 
other  collections  made.  But  a  preacher  stationed  in  a  town 
must  be  supported  by  the  congregation  he  attends. 

6.  Should  it  so  happen,  that  the  society  at  a  time  should  be 
without  a  bishop,  then  the  presiding  elders  shall,  each  of  them, 
have  special  charge  of  the  societies  in  their  respective  districts, 
that  all  may  be  kept  in  love  and  earnest  together,  and  that  they 
give  each  other  all  necessary  information  of  the  state  of  their 
districts.  And  should  it  also  happen,  that  one  or  the  other 
district  should  be  without  a  presiding  elder,  what  shall  then  be 
done?  Information  thereof  shall  immediately  be  given  to  the 
bishop,  who  shall  appoint  one  of  the  elders  in  the  district,  where 
it  can  be  done,  to  act  till  the  conference.  And  in  case  there  should 
be  no  bishop,  then  the  next  or  nearest  presiding  elder  shall  appoint 
one,  if  he  himself  cannot  take  charge  of  the  district. 


78  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

OF  THE  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION,  ORDINATION  AND  DUTY. 

Quest.     How  is  an  elder  constituted? 

A?is.  After  a  probation  of  two  years,  he  may  be  presented 
before  the  yearly  conference  and  ordained  of  the  bishops  by 
laying  on  of  their  hands:  provided  the  conference  be  convinced 
and  fully  satisfied,  that  the  contents  of  the  6,  7,  8  and  9th  verses 
of  St.  Paul  to  Titus  in  the  first  chapter,  are  found  to  be  inherent 
in  and  with  him.  These  verses  shall  be  read  to  every  one,  who 
is  ordained,  at  his  ordination. 

1.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  elder?  To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can  and  to  baptize;  to  perform  the  office  of  matrimony,  and  assist 
the  presiding  elder  to  administer  the  Lord's  supper;  but  when 
the  presiding  elder  cannot  attend,  then  one  or  two  elders  shall 
perform  this  duty;  he  shall  also  perform  all  parts  of  divine 
worship;  endeavour  to  establish  and  hold  class-meetings,  where 
a  majority  of  the  members  conceive  it  necessary,  and  assist  in 
electing  the  leaders. 

2.  To  make  a  collection,  freely  contributed,  quarterly  for  the 
travelling  preachers  and  for  the  poor;  to  take  {specification  or 
catalogue  thereof,  signed  by  the  leader,  at  each  place,  and  when 
there  is  no  leader  present,  to  have  it  signed  b}'  some  other  mem- 
ber, in  order  to  account  with  the  presiding  elder,  so  that  all 
things  be  done  in  an  orderly  manner. 

3.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  w^ant 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  travelling  preacher  comes 
to,  he  shall  make  the  collection  and  in  like  manner  take  a  cata- 
logue thereof,  and  bring  or  send  it  to  the  presiding  elder  or  to 
the  conference,  for  the  support  of  needy  preachers,  who  are  poor 
and  who  preach  amongst  poor  people. 

4.  Should  a  travelling  preacher  or  elder  desire  to  leave  the 
di.strict  assigned  him,  he  mu.st  first  acquaint  the  presiding  elder 
of  his  intention  by  writing;  and  should  any  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstance,  he  shall  be  accountable  therefor  to  the  next  con- 
ference. 

5.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,  and  yet  required  to  preach,  it  is  rea- 
sonable and  just  that  the  elders  should  provide  for  their  support 
in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  be  employed,  by  making  a 


DISCIPLINE    OF   1821.  79 

collection  for  their  benefit  amongst  the  societies  in  their  district, 
though  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  allotted  to  travelling 
preachers. 

SECTION  SIXTH. 

OF  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS,  AND  OF  THEIR  DUTY. 

Quest,     How  is  a  preacher  to  be  received  ? 
A71S.  I.     By  the  yearly  conference. 

2.  In  the  interval  of  the  conference,  by  the  bishop,  or  the 
presiding  elder  of  the  district,  or  an  elder,  who  supplies  the 
place  of  a  presiding  elder  at  a  yearly  or  great  meeting,  until 
the  next  sitting  of  the  conference.  No  one  will  be  admitted 
otherwise,  than  on  trial;  aud  one  who  is  taken  on  trial,  may 
either  be  admitted  or  rejected,  without  doing  him  any  wrong, 
otherwise  it  would  be  no  trial  at  all. 

3.  Every  person  proposed  as  preacher  shall  be  examined  by 
the  conference,  and  the  following  questions  put  to  him,  viz. 

Have  you  known  God  as  a  pardoning  God  iu  Christ? 

Have  you  obtained  forgivenesss  of  your  sins  ? 

Is  the  love  of  God,  through  Christ,  shed  abroad  in  your  heart.? 

Have  you  obtained  peace  with  God? 

Do  you  follow  after  holiness  ? 

Have  you  a  correct  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justi- 
fication, holiness  and  redemption? 

Does  your  own  salvation,  and  the  salvation  of  your  fellow 
mortals  lie  nearer  to  your  heart,  than  all  other  things  in  the 
world  ? 

Can  you  subject  yourself  to  the  counsel  of  your  brethern? 

Will  you  be  obedient  and  ready  to  speak  or  hold  your  peace,  as 
the  brethren  may  think  fit  and  expedient? 

Are  you  willing,  as  much  as  in  you  lies,  to  assist  in  upholding 
the  itinerary  plan  ( or  travelling  the  circuit )  and  to  support  the 
same  as  much  as  possible  ? 

Qst.  2.     "What  are  the  duties  of  a  preacher? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get  hearers, 
and  establish  class  meetings  where  they  may  be  found  useful; 
to  converse  with  the  members  on  the  situation  or  condition  of 
their  souls,  and  seek  to  administer  relief,  strengthen  and  direct 
those  who  are  afflicted  and  labour  under  temptations,  to  animate 


8o  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

the  indolent  or  slothful,  and  endeavour  as  much  as  possible  to 
edify  and  instruct  all  in  faith,  in  grace,  and  in  the  knowledge 
of  Jesus  Christ;  never  to  omit  to  visit  the  sick,  but  on  all  occa- 
sions to  strive  to  enforce  and  confirm  the  doctrines  he  delivers  by 
a  well  ordered  exemplar^'  life. 

Qst.  3.     What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher? 

Ans.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  away  5'our  time  with  unneces- 
sary things,  at  any  place.  Be  always  serious.  Let  30ur  motto 
be  Holiness  to  the  Lord.  Avoid  all  lightness  and  jesting.  Con- 
verse sparingly,  and  conduct  \ourself  prudentlj^  with  women; 
demean  yourself  in  all  respects  as  a  true  Christian. 

2.  Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  believe  evil 
of  no  one  without  good  evidence;  and  alwaj-s  put  the  most 
favourable  construction  on  such  matters,  as  the  nature  of  the 
subject,  consistent  with  truth,  will  bear. 

Speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatever  ma}'  Ije  your  thoughts,  keep 
them  within  your  own  breast,  till  j'ou  can  tell  the  person  con- 
cerned, what  you  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 

3.  Let  your  business  be  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible;  to 
this  employment  give  yourself  up  wholly.  Visit  those  who  need 
it,  and  act  in  all  things  not  according  to  j^our  own  will,  but  as  a 
Son  in  the  Gospel.  As  such  it  becomes  your  duty  to  emplo}- 
your  time  in  the  manner  here  prescribed:  in  preaching,  and 
visiting  from  house  to  house;  in  instructing  and  pra5'er,  and  in 
meditating  on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until 
our  Lord  cometh. 


SECTION  SEVENTH. 

OF  THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS,  AND  HOW 
THEY  ARE  TO  BE  DISPOSED  OF. 

Qst.  1.  What  shall  be  done,  when  a  Bishop,  a  presiding 
elder  or  preacher  is  under  report  of  being  guilty  of  some  crime 
forbidden  in  the  word  of  God,  as  an  unchristian  practice,  suffi- 
cient for  excommtinication? 

A71S.  When  a  bishop  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  how 
shall  he  be  dealt  with.''  When  charges  happen  to  be  made, 
which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  .shall  be  the  dut}-  of  a 
presiding  elder  and  an  elder,  after  being  duly  notified  thereof,  to 
inquire  into  and  examine  whether  the}''  are  founded  in  truth;  but, 


DISCIPLINE   OP    1 82 1.  81 

as  the  Apostle  says,  they  shall  not  receive  an  accusation  without 
two  or  three  witnesses.  If  it  then  appears  that  he  is  justly 
accused,  they  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing,  and 
send  a  copy  thereof  to  the  bishop  accused,  and  appoint  a  time 
and  place  where  the  accusers  and  accused  shall  be  present  to  each 
other,  when  the  cause  shall  be  tried  by  two  presiding  elders  and 
three  elders.  If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till 
the  yearly  conference,  where  the  presiding  elders  and  elders 
shall  again  examine  and  try  the  same;  and  if  found  guilty  again, 
he  shall  be  suspended  from  oflSce. 

Quest.  2.  When  a  presiding  elder  is  charged  with  immoral 
conduct,  what  shall  be  done .? 

A71S.  Where  charges  happen  to  be  brought  against  a  presid- 
ing elder,  which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the 
duty  of  the  next  or  nearest  elder  and  a  preacher  to  inquire  into 
and  examine  them,  and  if  the  accused  appear  to  be  guilty,  they 
shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing  and  send  him,  the 
accused,  a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the 
accusers  with  the  accused  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each  other. 
And  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop,  another  presiding  elder  and 
two  elders  shall  be  called,  who  shall  examine  the  charges,  and 
if  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference, 
where  he  shall  be  accountable. 

Quest.  3.  When  an  elder,  a  preacher  or  an  exhorter  is  charged 
with  immoral  conduct,  what  shall  be  done? 

A71S.  The  preacher  thereabout,  to  whom  it  shall  be  known, 
shall  take  with  him  another  preacher  or  exhorter  or  a  leader  and 
examine  into  the  charge;  should  he  appear  guilty,  then  notice 
thereof  shall  be  given  him,  and  a  time  appointed,  where  they, 
the  accusers  and  the  accused,  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each 
other.  And,  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or  presiding  elders, 
three  elders  or  preachers  shall  try  and  determine  his  case,  and 
if  he  be  convicted,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference, 
where  he  shall  be  accountable. 


SECTION    EIGHTH. 

OF  THE  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  acknowledge  and  confess, 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  Holy  Word  of 


82  UNITED    BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

God;  that  he  will  henceforth  strive  with  all  his  heart  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  work  out  his  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling  to  the  end,  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  Jicc 
from  the  eternal  wrath  to  come. 

Every  member  should  endeavour  to  walk  closely  and  lead  a  godly 
life;  be  diligent  in  praj'er,  particularly  in  private;  and,  for  his 
own  edification,  to  be  present  and  attend,  when  practicable,  at 
all  meetings,  both  public  worship  and  private  praj'-er  meetings. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  praj^  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  walk  closely,  as  in  the  presence 
of  God;  also  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communioi'i  with  God 
in  all  his  employments,  and  never  speak  evil  of  his  fellow  being, 
but  practise  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  do  good  to  the  poor,  and 
endeavour  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  m  deed. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  holy,  as  required  in 
the  word  of  God.  Neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 
exercises  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God,  and 
with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  God. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  contribute  something 
quarterly  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  his 
circumstances  will  admit  of  it,  willingly  and  freely. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet,  peaceable  and 
godly  life  in  the  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Chris- 
tian to  live  in  peace — particularly  to  the  higher  or  ruling  powers, 
every  one  shall  be  subject,  as  the  word  of  God  requires. 

Amongst  the  members  of  the  society  the  preachers  shall  estab- 
lish one  or  more  class-meetings,  where  a  majority  of  the  members 
may  conceive  it  necessarj';  and  the  members,  when  practicable, 
shall  assemble  at  the  place  appointed,  to  hold  prayer  meetings, 
in  order  to  edify  themselves  in  the  presence  of  God,  and  promote 
the  love  to  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  class  the  leaders  should  be  elected  in  the  presence 
of  the  preacher,  and  their  dut}'^  shall  be  to  appoint  pra5'er-meet- 
ings,  and  to  commence  and  conclude  them;  it  shall  also  be  their 
duty  to  hold  class-meetings  at  times,  to  exhort  the  members  and 
preserve  them  in  love,  and  to  look  well  to  their  own  conduct. 

When  members  trespass  against  each  other,  as  brethren  or 
sisters,  correct  the  fault  first  between  thee  and  him  alone:  If  he 
hear  thee,  thou  hast  gained  thy  brother.     But  if  he  will  not  hear 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1 82 1.  83 

thee,  then  take  with  thee  one  or  two  more,  that  in  the  mouth 
of  two  or  three  witnesses  every  word  may  be  established.  And 
if  he  shall  neglect  to  hear  them,  tell  it  unto  the  church:  but 
if  he  neglect  to  hear  the  church,  let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a 
Heathen  man  and  a  Publican. 

On  any  dispute  between  two  or  more  of  the  members  of  our 
society,  concerning  the  payment  of  debts  or  other  cause,  which 
cannot  be  settled  by  the  parties  concerned,  the  preacher  who  has 
the  oversight  of  the  society,  or  the  preacher  residing  thereabouts, 
shall  inquire  into  the  circumstances  of  the  case;  and  shall  recom- 
mend to  the  contending  parties  a  reference,  consisting  of  one 
arbiter  chosen  by  the  plaintiff,  and  another  chosen  by  the  defend- 
ant; which  two  arbiters  so  chosen,  shall  choose  the  third:  the 
three  arbiters  are  then  to  deside  the  dispute. 

But  if  one  of  the  parties  be  dissatisfied  with  the  judgment 
given,  such  party  may  refer  to  the  next  quarterly  or  great  meet- 
ing, and  apply  to  the  presiding  elder  for  a  second  arbitration,  and 
if  the  preachers  find  sufiicient  cause,  they  shall  grant  a  second 
arbitration;  in  which  case  each  party  shall  choose  two  arbiters, 
and  the  four  arbiters  shall  choose  a  fifth,  the  judgment  of  the 
majority  of  whom  shall  be  final;  and  any  person  refusing  to 
abide  by  such  judgment,  shall  be  excluded  the  society.  And 
if  any  member  of  the  society  shall  refuse  in  cases  of  debt  or 
other  disputes,  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration,  when  recom- 
mended to  him  by  a  preacher  or  leader,  who  has  the  charge 
of  the  society;  or  shall  enter  into  a  law-suit  with  another  mem- 
ber, before  these  measures  are  taken,  he  shall  be  expelled,  except- 
ing the  case  be  of  such  a  nature  as  to  require  and  justify  a  proc- 
ess at  law,  as:  executors  or  administrators. 

APPENDIX. 
OF  THE  NECESSITY  OF  UNION  AMONG  OURSELVES. 

Let  us  be  deeply  sensible  (from  what  we  have  known)  of  the 
evil  of  a  division  in  principle,  spirit,  or  practice,  and  the  dreadful 
consequences  to  ourselves  and  others.  If  we  are  united,  what 
can  stand  before  us  ?  If  we  divide,  we  shall  destroy  ourselves, 
the  work  of  God,  and  the  souls  of  our  people. 

Quest.  What  can  be  done  in  order  to  a  closer  union  with  each 
other  ? 


84  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

A  US.  I.  Let  us  be  deeply  convinced  of  the  absolute  necessity 
of  it. 

2.  Pray  earnestly  for,  and  speak  trul}'  and  freeh'  to  each  other. 

3.  When  we  meet,  let  us  never  part  without  prayer. 

4.  Take  great  care  not  to  despise  each  other's  gifts. 

5.  Never  speak  lightly  of  each  other. 

6.  Let  us  defend  each  other's  character  in  everj*  thing,  so  far 
as  is  consistent  with  truth. 

7.  Labour,  in  honour,  each  to  pefer  the  other  before  himself. 

8.  We  recommend  a  serious  examination  of  i/ie  causes,  evils 
a?id  cures  of  heart,  and  church  divisions. 

OF  VISITING  FROM  HOUSE  TO  HOUSE  AND  ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL  RELIGION. 

Qjiest.     How  can  we  further  assist  those  under  our  care .'' 

A71S.  I.  By  instructing  them  at  their  own  houses;  which  is 
of  unspeakable  necessity,  in  order  to  promote  confidence  and 
communion  with  God  among  us;  further  to  wean  us  of  the  love 
of  the  world,  and  inure  us  to  a  life  of  heavenly  mindedness;  also 
to  encourage  us  to  strive  after  and  practise  brotherly  love,  that 
no  evil  thinking  or  judging  of  one  another  be  found  amongst 
us;  and  lastly  that  we  may  learn  to  do  as  we  would  wish  to  be 
done  by. 

2.  Every  preacher  must  make  it  his  duty  to  instruct  the  peo- 
ple from  house  to  house,  and  exhort  them  to  be  apt  in  all  good. 
Till  this  be  done,  and  that  in  good  earnest,  we  shall,  upon  the 
whole,  be  but  little  better,  and  our  godliness  will  not  be  deeph' 
enough  founded;  therefore,  wherever  we  may  be,  we  should 
guard  against  useless  or  loose  talking. 

Undoubtedly  this  private  application  of  visiting  from  house  to 
house  and  exhorting  the  people,  is  founded  or  implied  in  those 
solemn  words  of  the  Apostle: 

"/  charge  thee  before  God  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  ivho  shall 
judge  the  quick  and  dead  at  his  appearing ,  preach  the  Word;  be 
instant  in  season,  out  of  seasofi:  Reprove,  rebuke,  exhort,  with 
all  long  suffering. ' ' 

OF  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN. 

Q?icst.     What  shall  be  done  to  benefit  the  rising  generation  ? 
Ans.     Let  him,  who  is  in  any  wise  zealous  for  God  and  the 


DISCIPLINE   OF    182I.  85 

souls  of  men,  begin  the  work  without  delay.  Where  children  are 
found,  whose  parents  are  in  society,  meet  them  as  often  as  possi- 
ble; speak  freel}^  with  them,  and  instruct  them  diligently;  exhort 
them  to  be  good,  and  praj^  with  them  earnestly,  yet  simply  and 
plain,  that  they  may  learn  to  know  their  Creator  and  Redeemer 
in  the  days  of  their  j'outh. 

THE  FORM  AND  MANNER  OF  ORDAINING  PREACHERS. 

1.  On  the  day  appointed,  there  shall  be  a  suitable  sermon  or 
exhortation  delivered. 

2.  After  their  names  have  been  read  aloud,  the  bishop  shall 
say  unto  the  people  present: 

3.  Beloved  Brethren  in  Christ!  Is  there  any  amongst  you, 
who  knoweth  any  impediment  or  crime  in  any  of  those  persons 
to  be  ordained  elders  (or  deacons  as  the  case  may  be),  for  which 
he  ought  not  to  be  admitted  to  that  oflSce,  let  him  come  forth  in 
the  name  of  God  and  shew  what  the  crime  or  impediment  is. 

4.  If  any  crime  or  impediment  be  objected,  the  bishop  shall 
surcease  from  ordaining  that  person,  until  such  time  as  the  party 
accused  shall  be  found  clear  of  the  crime. 

Then  shall  be  read  i  Tim.  3,  8 — 13. 

Likewise  must  the  deacons  be  grave,  not  double  tongued,  not 
given  to  much  wine,  not  greedy  of  filthy  lucre;  holding  the 
mystery  of  the  faith  in  a  pure  conscience.  And  let  these  also 
first  be  proved,  then  let  them  use  the  office  of  a  deacon,  being 
found  blameless.  Even  so  must  their  wives  be  grave,  not  slan- 
derers; sober,  faithful  in  all  things.  Let  the  deacons  be  the 
husbands  of  one  wife,  ruling  their  children  and  their  own  houses 
well.  For  they  that  have  used  the  office  of  a  deacon  well,  pur- 
chase to  themselves  a  good  degree,  and  great  boldness  in  the 
faith  which  is  in  Christ  Jesus. 

Quest.  Do  you  trust  that  you  are  inwardlj^  moved  by  the  holy 
Ghost,  to  take  upon  you  the  office  of  the  ministry  to  serve  God 
in  the  church  of  Christ,  to  the  honour  and  glory  of  his  holy 
name? 

A71S.     I  trust,  with  the  help  of  God. 

Quest.  Do  you  believe  the  Holy  Scriptures  old  and  new  testa- 
ment? 

Ans.     I  do  believe  them. 

Quest.     Will  you  apply  all  your  diligence  to  frame  and  fashion 


86  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

3'our  own  life  according  to  the  doctrine  of  Christ;  and  to  make 
yourself  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  a  wholesome  example  of  the 
flock  of  Christ? 

A?is.     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Qiiest.  Will  5'ou  reverently  obey  them,  to  whom  the  charge 
and  government  over  you  is  committed,  following  with  a  glad 
mind  and  will  their  godly  admonitions; 

A71S.     I  will  endeavour,  through  the  grace  of  God,  so  to  do. 
Then  prayer  is  made. 

After  prayer,  the  bishops  (or  bishop  and  elders)  shall  lay 
their  hands  upon  the  heads  of  ever}'  one  of  them,  and  sa}'. 

"Take  thou  authority  to  execute  the  ofilce  of  an  elder  (or  min- 
ister) in  the  church  of  God.  In  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of 
the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost."     Amen. 

Hereupon  the  bishop  shall  deliver  to  every  one  of  them  the 
Holy  Bible,  saying: 

' '  Take  thou  authority  to  read  and  preach  the  word  of  God  in 
the  church  of  Christ." 

Then  the  bishop  shall  read  from  the  12th  chapter  of  St.  Luke, 

V.  35—38: 

Let  your  loins  be  girded  about  and  your  lights  burning,  and 
ye  yourselves  like  unto  men  that  wait  for  their  Lord,  when  he 
"will  return  from  the  wedding,  that  when  he  cometh  and  knock- 
eth,  they  may  open  unto  him  immediately.  Blessed  are  those 
servants,  whom  the  Lord  when  he  cometh  shall  find  watching. 
Verily  I  say  unto  you,  that  he  shall  gird  himself,  and  make  them 
sit  down  to  meat,  and  will  come  forth  to  serve  them.  And  if  he 
shall  come  in  the  second  watch,  or  come  in  the  third  watch,  and 
find  them  so,  blessed  are  those  servants. 

Then  the  bishop,  or  one  whom  he  appoints,  shall  pray.  After 
which  the  following  benediction  is  pronounced  by  the  bishop: 

The  Peace  of  God  keep  your  hearts  and  minds  in  the  knowledge 
of  J esiis  Christ  02ir  Lord.     Amen. 

THE  FORM  AND  MANNER  OF  ORDAINING  A  BISHOP. 

After  prayer  the  bishop  reads  as  follows: 
Hear  ye  the  Word  of  the  Lord! 

Matth  28.  V.  18 — 20.  And  Jesus  came  and  spake  unto  them, 
saying:  All  power  is  given  unto  vie  in  Heaven  and  in  Earth. 
Go  ye  therefore,  and  teach  all  ?iations,  baptizing  them  in  the  Jiame 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1 82 1.  87 

of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  the  Holy  Ghost;  teaching 
them  to  observe  all  tJmigs,  whatever  I  have  commanded  yo7i:  a?id, 
lo,  I  ayn  with  yozi  alway,  even  unto  the  end  of  the  world. 

Acts  20.  V.  27 — 32.  For  I  have  not  shunned  to  declare  unto 
you  all  the  counsel  of  God.  Take  heed  therefore,  unto  your- 
selves, and  to  all  the  flock,  over  which  the  Holy  Ghost  hath 
made  you  overseers,  to  feed  the  church  of  God,  which  he  hath 
purchased  with  his  own  blood.  For  I  know  this,  that  after  my 
departing  shall  grievous  wolves  enter  in  among  you,  not  sparing 
the  flock.  Also  of  your  ownselves  shall  men  arise,  speaking 
perverse  things,  to  draw  away  disciples  after  them.  Therefore 
watch,  and  remember,  that  by  the  space  of  three  years  I  ceased 
not  to  warn  every  one  night  and  day  with  tears.  And  now, 
brethren,  I  command  you  to  God,  and  to  the  word  of  his  grace, 
which  is  able  to  build  you  up,  and  to  give  you  an  inheritance 
among  all  them,  which  are  sanctified. 

I  Tim.  3,  V.  I — 7.  This  is  a  true  saying:  If  a  man  desire  the 
office  of  a  bishop,  he  desireth  a  good  work. — A  bishop  then  must 
be  blameless,  the  husband  of  one  wife,  vigilant,  sober,  of  good 
behaviour,  given  to  hospitality,  apt  to  teach;  not  given  to  wine, 
no  striker,  not  greedy  of  filthy  lucre,  but  patient,  not  a  brawler, 
not  covetous;  one  that  ruleth  well  his  own  house,  having  his 
children  in  subjection  with  all  gravity;  (for  if  a  man  know  not 
how  to  rule  his  own  house,  how  shall  he  take  care  of  the  church 
of  God?)  not  a  novice,  lest  being  lifted  up  with  pride,  he  fall 
into  the  condemnation  of  the  Devil.  Moreover  he  must  have  a 
good  report  of  them  which  are  without,  lest  he  fall  into  reproach, 
and  the  snare  of  the  Devil. 

When  the  gospel  and  epistles  are  read,  and  the  discourse  there- 
after following  ended,  the  bishop  requires  the  person  elected  to 
step  forth,  moves  the  congregation  to  prayer,  and  then  addresses 
him,  who  is  to  be  ordained,  as  follows; 

Brother!  For  as  much  as  the  holy  scriptures  command  that 
we  should  not  be  hasty  in  laying  on  hands,  and  admitting  any 
person  to  government  in  the  church  of  Christ,  which  he  hath 
purchased  with  no  less  price  than  the  effusion  of  his  own  blood; 
therefore,  before  I  admit  you  to  this  administration,  I  will  ques- 
tion you  on  some  certain  points  relative  thereto. 

The  Bishop.  Are  you  persuaded,  that  the  old  and  new  testa- 
ments contain  sufficiently  all  doctrine  required  of  necessity  for 
eternal  salvation,  through  faith  in  Jesus  Christ?    And  are  you 


88  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

determined  out  of  the  same  holy  scriptures  to  instruct  the  people 
committed  to  your  charge,  according  to  the  abilitj',  which  God 
shall  grant  j'ou,  and  to  teach  or  maintain  nothing,  but  what  may 
be  concluded  and  proven  by  the  same? 

Ans.  Yes,  I  am  persuaded,  and  will  with  the  help  of  God,  do 
according  thereto. 

The  Bishop.  Are  you  willing  to  excercise  yourself  faithfull}'  in 
the  same  holy  scriptures,  and  to  call  upon  God  by  praj-er  for  the 
true  understanding  of  them,  so  that  }ou  ma}-  be  able  to  teach 
wholesome  doctrine? 

Ans.     I  am  willing  with  the  help  of  God  so  to  do. 

The  Bishop.  Will  you,  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  maintain  and 
set  forth  a  kind  and  peaceable  disposition  towards  ever}-  one, 
and  endeavour  to  promote  the  like  good  will  amongst  others, 
according  to  the  authorit^^  vested  in  5'ou  by  the  word  of  God  ? 

A71S.     I  will  so  do,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

The  Bishop.  Will  j'ou,  in  ordaining,  sending  abroad  and  lay- 
ing hands  upon  others,  act  faithfully'  and  with  a  good  conscience? 

Ans.     I  will  so  do  by  the  help  of  God. 
Then  the  Bishop  shall  sa}': 

Almighty  God,  our  heavenly  father,  grant  unto  a'ou  strength 
and  power  to  perform  all  these  things,  that  you  may  be  found  to 
be  a  true  and  faithful  minister  at  the  day  of  account,  through 
Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.     Amen. 

The  Bishop.     Let  us  pray. 

After  prayer  the  bishop  and  elders  present,  shall  lay  their 
hands  upon  the  head  of  the  elected  person  kneeling  before  them 
upon  his  knees,  the  bishop  saying: 

Receive  the  Holy  Ghost  for  the  office  and  work  of  a  bishop  in 
the  church  of  God,  now  committed  unto  thee  by  the  imposition 
of  our  hands,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of 
the  Holy  Ghost.     Amen. 

Then  the  bishop  shall  deliver  him  the  Bible,  saying: 

Give  heed  unto  reading,  exhortation  and  doctrine.  Think 
upon  the  things  contained  in  this  holy  Book.  Be  diligent  to 
practise  them.  Take  heed  unto  thyself,  and  to  thy  doctrine. 
Feed  the  flock  of  Christ.  Hold  up  the  weak.  Be  compassionate, 
and  administer  discipline  with  mercy,  that  you  may  receive  the 
crown  of  glorj',  through  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.     Amen. 

Then  the  bishop,  or  one  whom  he  appoints,  shall  conclude  with 
prayer. 


discipline;  of  1821.  89 

THE  FORM  OF  SOLEMNIZATION  OF  MATRIMONY. 

ADDRESS. 

Dear  Beloved/ 

We  are  gathered  together  here,  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  in  the 
presence  of  these  witnesses,  to  join  together  these  two  persons, 
namely,  N.  and  N.  as  man  and  wife  in  the  holy  estate  of  Matri- 
mony; which  is  an  honorable  estate,  instituted  of  God  in  the 
time  of  man's  innocency. 

Quest.  Is  there  any  one  here  present,  who  can  shew  any  just 
cause  why  these  two  persons  may  not  lawfully  be  joined  together, 
let  him  now  speak,  or  else  hereafter  forever  hold  his  peace. 

If  no  impediment  be  alleged,  then  shall  the  minister  say  unto 
the  man: 

N.  N.  wilt  thou  have  this  woman  (N.  N.)  to  thy  wedded  wife, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance.  Wilt  thou  love  her,  com- 
fort her,  honour  and  keep  her  in  sickness  and  in  health ;  and 
forsaking  all  other,  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  so  long  as  ye  both 
shall  live?     If  so,  then  answer:    I  will. 

Then  shall  the  minister  say  unto  the  woman: 

N.  N.  wilt  thou  have  this  man  (N.N.)  to  thy  wedded  husband, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance.?  Wilt  thou  obey  him,  serve 
him,  love,  lionoi:r  and  keep  him  in  sickness  and  in  health;  and 
forsaking  all  othei-s,  keep  thee  onlj'  unto  him,  so  long  as  j-e  both 
shall  live?     If  so,  then  answer:     I  will. 

Then  the  minister  shall  require  them  to  join  their  right  hands 
together,  and  the  minister  shall  say: 

Those,  whom  God  hath  joined  together,  let  no  man  put 
asunder. 

For  as  much  as  N.  and  N  have  consented  together  in  wedlock, 
and  have  witnessed  the  same  before  God  and  these  witnesses 
present,  I  pronounce  that  the}'^  are  man  and  wife  together,  in  the 
name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 
The  God  of  Abraham,  of  Isaac,  and  of  Jacob  bless  this  man  and 
this  woman,  and  sow  into  their  hearts  the  seeds  of  eternal 
life.     Amen. 

Let  us  pray. 


90  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

FURTHER  APPENDIX 

OF  THE  GENERAL  CONFERENCE,  HELD  THE  15th  DAY  OF  MAY, 
1821,  AT  THE  HOUSE  OF  DEWALD  MECHLING,  IN  FAIR- 
FIELD COUNTY,  IN  THE  STATE  OF  OHIO. 

1.  Resolved,  that  the  preachers  in  towns  or  cities,  who  stand 
under  the  direction  of  the  conference  with  the  itinerant  preachers, 
shall  also  account  at  the  annual  conference,  and  limit  their  sala- 
ries according  to  their  support  and  necessary  expences;  and  should 
a  surplus  of  their  salary  remain,  to  make  a  return  of  the  same  to 
the  General  conference,  to  be  expended  for  the  support  of  the 
itinerant  preachers. 

2.  Resolved,  that  the  presiding  elder  and  preachers  of  each 
district  appoint  a  Stewart,  and  in  each  class  an  assistant  Stewart, 
to  make  quarterly  collections  in  money  or  produce,  which  pro- 
duce to  be  valued  what  it  may  be  worth  between  man  and  man, 
and  an  account  kept  thereof,  and  to  be  proportionably  distributed 
among  the  travelling  preachers.  All  assistant  Stewarts  to  sub- 
mit their  accounts  to  the  Stewart  of  the  district  and  settle  with 
him  quarter  yearly;  the  district  stewarts  to  submit  their  accounts 
to  the  presiding  elder  at  the  quarterly  meetings,  and  the  presid- 
ing elder  to  submit  the  same  to  the  Annual  conference,  in  order  to 
show  what  each  travelling  minister  has  received,  and  that  order 
and  equality  be  observed. 

3.  Resolved,  that  the  presiding  elders  hold  a  conference  at  all 
quarterly  meetings  with  the  preachers  and  classleaders ;  and 
where  a  person  is  recommended  as  a  preacher  or  exhorter,  the 
presiding  elder  is  to  examine  him  in  the  presence  of  the  preach- 
ers; and  should  he  be  found  competent  in  his  standing  and 
abilities,  he  may  permit  such  brother  to  preach  or  exhort;  and 
he  shall  transmit  his  testimony  and  examination  in  writing  to 
the  Annual  conference,  to  be  by  them  approved  or  disapproved, 
according  as  they  may  conceive  the  same  consonant  with  the 
honor  and  glory  of  the  Supreme  Being.  And  the  presiding 
elder  and  preacher  shall  have  power  to  silence  an  admitted 
brother  for  unchristian  like  behaviour  before  the  Annual  confer- 
ence, if  they  think  proper. 

4.  Resolved,  That  all  slavery,  in  every  sense  of  the  word,  be 
totally  prohibited  and  in  no  way  tolerated  in  our  community. 
Should  some  be  found  therein,  or  others  apply  to  be  admitted  as 


DISCIPWNE   OF    1 82 1.  91 

members,  who  hold  slaves,  they  can  neither  remain  to  be  mem- 
bers or  be  admitted  as  such,  provided  they  do  not  personally 
manumit  or  set  free  such  slave,  wherever  the  laws  of  the  state 
shall  permit  it,  or  submit  the  case  to  the  quarterly  conference,  to 
be  by  them  specified,  what  length  of  time  such  slave  shall  serve 
his  master  or  other  person,  until  the  amount  given  for  him,  or 
for  raising  him,  be  compensated  to  his  master.  But  in  no  case 
shall  a  member  of  our  society  be  permitted  to  sell  a  slave. 

5.  Resolved,  That  if  any  member  of  this  society  shall  pub- 
licly transgress  as  aforesaid,  such  member  shall  likewise  be 
publicly  reprimanded,  and  in  case  such  member  shall  not  hum- 
ble, the  same  shall  be  publicly  excluded  from  the  congregation. 

the;  end. 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE 


United  Brethren  in  Christ. 


BALTIMORE: 
PRINTED  BY  JOHN  T.  HANZSHE, 

1826  93 


OF  THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN 
•IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  lyord,  our  God,  to  awaken 
persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world  who  should  raise  up  the 
Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach  the  gospel  of 
Christ  crucified  in  its  purity. 

At  this  time  the  Lord  in  mercy  remembered  the  Germans  in 
America,  who,  living  scattered  in  this  extensive  country,  had 
but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  gospel  of  a  crucified 
Saviour  preached  to  them  in  their  native  language. 

Amongst  others  he  raised  up  an  Ottcrbem,  a  Boehm,  and  a 
Giicthing,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and  strength,  to  labour 
in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  call,  also,  amongst  the  Germans 
in  America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men  obeyed  the  call 
of  their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labours  were  blessed;  they  estab- 
lished in  many  places  excellent  societies,  und  led  many  a  precious 
soul  to  Jesus  Christ.  Their  sphere  of  action  spread  itself  more 
and  more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary  to  look  about  for 
more  fellow  labourers  in  the  vineyard;  for  the  harvest  was  great, 
and  the  labourers  but  few.  The  Lord  called  others,  who  also 
were  willing  to  devote  their  strength  to  his  service;  such,  then, 
were  accepted  by  one  or  the  other  of  the  preachers,  as  fellow 
labourers. 

The  number  of  members  of  the  society,  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  country,  continued  from  time  to  time  to  increase,  and  the 
gracious  work  spread  itself  through  the  states  of  Pennsylvania, 
Maryland  and  Virginia.  Great  meetings  were  appointed  and 
held  annually  several  times;  when,  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present;  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and 
the  necessity  of  their  utmost  endeavours  to  save  souls.  At  one 
of  these  conversations,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  of 
all  the  preachers,  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how;  and 
in  what  manner  they  might  be  most  useful. 

95 


96  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

The  first  conference  was  accordingly  held  in  Baltimore,  in  the 
year  1789.     There  were  present: 

William  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  Ernst, 

George  Adam  Guething,  Henry  Weidener, 
Christian  Newcomer. 

The  second  conference  was  held  in  York  county,  in  Paradise 
township,  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year  1791, 
where  there  were  present  the  following  persons,  viz. 

William  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  G.  Pfrimmer, 

George  A.  Guething,  John  Neidig, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander, 
Adam  Lehman, 

And  after  mature  deliberation,  how  they  might  labour  most 
usefully  in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord,  they  again  appointed  such 
as  fellow  labourers,  of  whom  they  had  cause  to  believe  that  they 
had  experienced  true  religion  in  their  own  souls. 

In  the  mean  time  the  number  of  members  continued  to  in- 
crease more  and  more;  the  preachers  therefore  were  obliged  to 
appoint  an  annual  conference,  in  order  to  unite  themselves  more 
closely,  and  labour  most  usefully  to  one  common  end;  for  some 
were  Presbyterians,  or  church  Reformed,  some  were  Lutherans, 
others  Mennonites,  and  yet  others  were  Methodists.  The)-  there- 
fore appointed  a  conference  to  be  held  the  25th  of  September, 
1800,  in  Frederick  county,  Marj'land,  at  the  house  of  brother 
Frederick  Kemp.     There  were  present  as  follows: 

William  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Boehm,  Henry  Krum, 

George  Adam  Guething,  John  Hershey, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henry  Boehm, 

Abraham  Dracksel,  Dietrick  Aurauf, 
John  George  Pfrimmer. 

They  there  united  themselves  into  a  societ^^  which  bears  the 
name  of  "  The  United  Brethren  in  Christ]'''  and  elected  William 
Otterbein  and  Martin  Boehm,  as  superintendants  or  bishops  and 
agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty  to  baptize  in  such 
manner,  as  should  best  accord  with  his  conviction. 


discipline;  of  1825.  97 

From  this  time  forth  the  society  increased  still  more;  preachers 
were  appointed,  who  travelled  continually  (because  the  number 
of  preaching  places  could  in  no  other  wise  be  attended),  and  the 
work  spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky.  It 
became  necessary,  therefore,  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  state 
of  Ohio,  because  it  was  conceived  too  laborious  for  the  preachers, 
who  laboured  in  those  states,  to  travel  such  a  distance  annually 
to  the  conference. 

In  the  mean  time  brothers  Boehm  and  Guething  died,  und 
brother  Otterbein  desired,  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected 
(because  infirmity  and  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer, )  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society  and  preserve 
discipline  and  order;  for  at  a  conference  formerly  held,  it  was 
resolved,  that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  die,  another  should 
be  elected  in  his  place — Therefore  brother  Christian  Newcomer 
was  then  elected  as  bishop,  to  take  charge  of  the  superintendance 
of  the  society. 

The  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  society  has  long  since  been 
deeply  felt;  and  partial  attempts  thereto  having  at  different  times 
been  made,  it  was  at  length  resolved  at  the  conference  in  the 
state  of  Ohio,  that  a  general  conference  should  be  held,  who 
should  take  upon  themselves  to  complete  the  same,  so  as  to 
accord  with  the  word  of  God.  The  members  of  this  conference 
were  to  be  elected  from  amongst  the  preachers  in  the  different 
parts  of  the  country,  by  a  majority  of  the  votes  of  the  members 
of  the  society;  and  there  were  present  at  the  conference,  that 
were  duly  elected,  the  following  preachers,  namely:  Christian 
Newcomer,  Abraham  Hiestand,  Andrew  Zeller,  Daniel  Treyer, 
George  Benedum,  Abraham  Tracksel,  Christian  Berger,  Abraham 
Meyer,  John  Schneider,  Henry  Kumler,  Henry  Spade,  Isaac 
Nighswander,  Christian  Krum,  and  Jacob  Baulus. 

These  met  on  the  6th  of  June,  1815,  near  Mountpleasant,  West- 
moreland County,  Penn.  where  they,  after  mature  deliberation, 
found  it  to  be  necessary,  good  and  beneficial  to  deliver  the 
following  Doctrines  and  Rules  of  discipline  to  the  society  in 
love  and  humility,  with  the  sincere  desire,  that  these  doctrines 
and  rules,  together  with  the  Word  of  God,  might  be  attended  to 
and  strictly  observed.  For  God  is  a  God  of  order,  and  where 
there  is  no  order  and  discipline,  there  all  love  and  communion 
will  be  lost.  Therefore,  let  us  attend  to  the  counsel  of  our  Lord, 
who  taught  us:    That  in  lowliness  of  mind,  we  should  esteem 


98  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

each  other  better  than  ourselves.  Seek  to  be  minded,  as  Jesus 
Christ  also  was!  Who  took  upon  him  the  form  of  a  servant,  and 
became  obedient  even  unto  the  death  of  the  cross,  to  obtain  for 
us  grace  and  strength,  that  we,  from  motives  of  love  and  humil- 
ity, might  submit  one  to  the  other.  He  who  cannot  submit 
himself,  the  same  lacketh  grace,  love  and  humilit}-;  htnce  Jesus 
saith:  Whoso  amongst  you  shall  desire  to  be  the  greatest,  shall 
be  the  other's  servant.  If  then  we  are  to  be  the  servants  of  each 
other,  we  must  love  one  another.  Jesus  saith:  Thus  shall  all 
men  know  that  ye  are  my  true  disciples,  if  ye  have  love  to  one 
another;  and  whoso  hath  not  love,  the  same  continueth  in  death. 
Then  let  us  practise  love,  that  we  may  enjoy  the  glorj^  and 
felicity,  which  Jesus  obtained  by  prayer  for  his  disciples  of  his 
heavenly  father,  that  we  may  be  one  even  as  he  and  the  father 
are  one.  Therefore,  beloved  brethren,  let  us  strive  to  be  like- 
minded,  unanimous  and  concordant  and  no  one  speak  or  think 
evil  of  the  other  but  implore  the  Lord,  that  he  would  graciously 
grant  us  his  spirit  and  an  earnest  desire  to  lead  a  truly  christian 
life,  to  the  honour  and  glory  of  his  holy  name,  and  our  own 
eternal  welfare.     Amen. 

SECTION  FIRST. 

THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men,  that 
we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  hol}^  Ghost  equal  in  essence  or  being  with 
both.  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the  earth, 
and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and  further- 
more sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  he  is  very  God  and  man,  that 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  holy  Ghost  in  the 
virgin  Mar}',  and  was  born  of  her:  that  he  is  the  saviour  and 
mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in  him, 
accept  the  grace  profferred  in  Jesus.  That  this  Jesus  siiffered  and 
(lied  on  the  cross  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again  on  the  third  da}', 
ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right  hand  of  God  to 
intercede  for  us;  and,  that  he  shall  come  again  at  the  last  day  to 
judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 


discipline;  of  1S25.  99 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  father  and  the  son,  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  Church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  bod}^  and  life  everlasting. 

We  believe,  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  testaments,  is  the 
word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our  salvation; 
that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge  and  receive  it 
with  the  influence  of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  their  only  rule  and 
guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  as  also  true  peni- 
tence, forgiveness  of  sins  and  following  after  Christ,  no  one  can 
be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  holy  scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam  and  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  are  convinced  that  the  outward  means  of  grace,  namely: 
baptism  &  the  remembrance  of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ,  are  to  be  in  use  and  practised  by  all  Christian 
societies:  and  that  it  is  incumbent  on  all  the  children  of  God, 
particularly  to  practise  them;  but  the  manner  in  which  ought 
always  to  be  left  to  the  judgment  and  understanding  of, every 
individual.  So  also  the  exemple  of  washing  the  feet  is  left  to 
the  judgment  of  every  one  to  practise  or  not:  but  it  is  not  becom- 
ing any  of  our  preachers  to  traduce  any  of  his  brethren  whose 
judgment  and  understanding  in  this  respect  are  different  from 
his  own,  either  in  public  or  in  private;  whosoever  shall  make 
himself  guilty  in  this  respect  shall  be  accounted  a  traducer  of 
his  brethren  and  shall  therefore  be  answerable  to  the  annual  con- 
ference. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

OF  THE  GENERAL  AND  YEARLY  CONFERENCES. 

Question.  After  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions 
of  the  conferences  to  be  considered  1 

Answer.  It  is  desired,  that  all  things  be  considered  on  these 
occasions,  as  in  the  immediate  presence  of  God.-  That  every 
person  rise  and  speak  freely  whatever  is  in  his  heart. 

Ost.  How  and  after  what  manner  are  the  members  of  a 
General  conference  to  be  chosen  ? 


lOO  UNITED   BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

Ans.  In  ever}-  district  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  such  are 
present,  if  not,  the  stationed  or  local  preachers,  who  live  in  the 
district,  shall  advise  the  members  of  the  society,  that  they  elect 
two  elders  from  out  of  their  district;  but  all  the  elders  in  the 
district,  who  are  capable  of  going  to  the  conference,  shall  be 
put  in  nomination,  and  the  same  made  known  some  time  pre- 
vious to  the  election;  and  those  two,  who  shall  have  a  majority 
of  votes,  shall  be  considered  as  members  of  the  General  confer- 
ence. The  votes  taken  at  each  place,  shall  be  couched  in  writing, 
and  attested  by  one  of  the  preachers  or  leaders  then  and  there 
present.  The  presiding  elder  of  the  district  shall  examine  the 
statement,  and  should  any  two  or  more  have  an  equal  number 
of  votes,  he  shall  determine  by  lot,  who  or  which  of  them  are 
elected. 

N.  B.  The  votes  shall  be  taken  b}-  an  exhorter,  leader,  or 
Stewart. 

QsL     How  often  are  the  General  conferences  to  be  held? 

Ans.     Every  four  years. 

QsL  Has  the  the  General  conference  an}-  other  powers,  which 
the  Annual  conference  has  not? 

Afts'-.  Yes,  the  members  of  the  General  conference  alone  have 
the  power  to  elect  two  bishops  from  amongst  the  elders  for  four 
years;  as  also  to  alter  and  amend  the  discipline  according  as 
they  may  find  it  necessary  and  expedient:  provided  they  do  not 
establi.sh  any  article,  which  maj'  tend  to  abolish,  undo  or  put 
aside  the  itinerant  plan.  The  General  conference  has  further  to 
fix  upon  or  determine  the  districts,  where  the  yearly  conferences 
are  to  be  held. 

OsL     Which  are  the  members  of  the  yearlj'  conference? 

Ans.  All  the  elders  and  preachers,  who  have  obtained  a 
written  permit,  and  are,  for  the  time  being,  in  the  district  where 
the  conference  is  held,  or  who  may  be  taken  up  and  acknowl- 
edo-ed  in  the  same.  But  none  then  ordained  preachers  shall  have 
a  vote  in  the  conference. 

OsL  In  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions  of  a  con- 
ference to  be  conducted? 

Afis.  I.  Tliere  will  be  read  a  chapter  in  the  Bible,  and  brief 
remarks  made  on  the  contents;  there  will  be  sung  and  prayer 
performed,  and  that  as  often  as  the  conference  sits;  and  the  sit- 
ting closed  with  singing  and  prayer. 

2.     The  conference  elects  a  secretary,  and  in  case  one  of  the 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1825.  lOI 

bishops  be  absent,  also  one  of  the  presiding  elders,  to  act  in 
conjunction  with  the  bishop. 

N.  B.  Wherever  it  is  necessary  two  secretaries  shall  be  elected, 
andthe  records  of  the  proceedings  of  the  conference  shall  be 
kept,  both  in  the  English  and  German  languages. 

3.  The  preachers  will  be  examined,  what  their  deportment 
towards  their  fellow  beings  is;  whether  their  conduct  in  life  be 
blameless  and  whether  they  employ  as  much  time  as  possible  to 
promote  or  spread  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  What  preachers  are  to  be  admitted  on  trial .? 

5.  What  preachers  are  yet  to  continue  on  trial  ? 

6.  Are  any  to  be  elected  as  elders  ? 

7.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died? 

8.  Who  are  the  presiding  elders  ? 

9.  Who  gives  himself  up  to  travel  ? 

10.  What  has  been  collected,  partly  for  contingent  expenses, 
and  partly  for  making  up  the  allowances  of  the  travelling  preach- 
ers ?  Has  reckoning  been  made  with  them  ?  have  they  received 
their  dues  ? 

1 1 .  When  and  where  shall  our  next  conference  be  held  ? 

12.  Are  the  elders  ordained  ? 

13.  In  what  circuits  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year? 

14.  Is  there  any  thing  more  to  do? 

15.  Has  the  conference  appointed  the  districts  in  their  circuit, 
for  the  purpose  of  holding  the  election  for  the  members  of  the 
General  conference? 

16.  Is  all  that  has  been  transacted,  entered  in  the  protocol? 

SECTION  THIRD. 
OF  THE  ELECTION  OF  THE  BISHOPS  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  are  the  bishops  to  be  constituted  ? 

Ans.  The  General  conference  shall  elect  them  by  the  majority 
of  the  votes  of  the  elders,  who  were  elected  to  the  General  con- 
ference: But  the  conference  may  still  be  at  liberty  to  retain  the 
bishops  yet  other  four  years.  The  newly  elected,  however,  as 
well  as  the  bishops  retained,  must  be  capable  of  travelling  the 
different  circuits  and  of  attending  to  the  conferences,  otherwise 
they  cannot  be  elected. 

Qst.    What  are  the  duties  ol  the  bishops  ? 


I02  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

Aus.   I.     To  preside  in  our  conferences. 

2.  The3'  have,  in  conjunction  with  the  presiding  elder,  that 
may  be  present  at  the  conference,  to  fix  the  appointments  of  the 
travelling  preachers  for  the  several  circuits,  provided  the^-  shall 
not  allow  any  itinerant  preacher  to  remain  in  the  same  station 
more  than  three  years  successively,  unless  particular  circum- 
stances require  it,  and  then  only  with  consent  of  all  the 
bishops. 

3.  The  bishops  point  out  the  circuits,  which  are  to  be  travelled 
by  the  presiding  elders. 

4.  They  have  also,  in  connection  with  the  presiding  elders, 
power,  in  the  intervals  of  the  conferences,  to  change  the  itinerant 
preachers,  where  the}-  conceive  it  necessar}',  and  also  to  receive 
and  suspend  preachers,  as  necessity  may  require,  vmtil  the  con- 
ference. 

5.  The3^  have  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large,  attend 
to  the  conferences,  and  oversee  the  spiritual  concerns  of  the 
societies. 

6.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rites  of  ordina- 
tion. 

7.  When  a  bishop  ceases  to  attend  to  the  several  conferences, 
and  neglects  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large,  can  he 
still  exercise  his  episcopal  ofiB.ce  among  us?  No,  unless  it  be 
that  he  were  sick,  and  what  the  like  circumstances  more 
might  be. 

8.  If  at  any  time,  it  should  so  happen,  that  by  reason  of 
death,  suspension  or  other  cause,  our  communion  should  be  with- 
out a  bishop;  how  is  this  want  to  be  relieved?  The  elder,  who 
shall  have  been  elected  to  preside  at  the  conference,  in  the  absence 
of  the  bishop,  shall  perform  the  duties  of  a  bishop  during  the 
sitting  of  the  conference;  he  shall  also  attend  the  other  confer- 
ence, and  take  his  seat  with  the  president  there  elected,  to  act  in 
conjunction  with  him  at  the  conference  then  sitting;  and  the 
president  there  elected  shall  also  in  turn,  and  in  like  manner 
attend  to  the  other  conference:  so  that  "each  conference  ma}-  know 
and  be  acquainted  with  the  proceedings  of  the  others,  and  that 
love  and  communion  be  maintained  &;c.  unto  the  next  General 
conference,  who  are  then  to  elect  bishops  anew. 

g.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present  at  the  close  of  every 
conference. 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1825.  103 

SECTION  FOURTH. 
OF  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  are  the  presiding  elders  to  be  elected? 

Ans.  The  bishops  shall  propose  to  the  conference  some  of  the 
elders,  who  have  finished  their  time  of  probation;  and  with  the 
consent  of  the  conference,  elect  them  for  four  years. 

Qst.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  presiding  elder  ? 

Ans.  I.  To  travel  through  the  district  appointed  him  of  the 
bishops,  and  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.  He  has  to  take  charge  of  the  travelling  and  local  preachers 
in  his  district,  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  agreeabl}^  to 
the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
possible  attend  them ;  he  shall  administer  the  Lords  supper,  and 
hold  quarterly  meeting  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters 
and  leaders;  he  shall  further  inquire  into,  and  examine  whether 
the  travelling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty,  particularly 
whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable,  preach  every  Sun- 
da^';  and  where  there  are  more  of  them,  to  change  them  at  times, 
where  the  most  benefit  is  likely  to  result,  &  to  exhort  them,  that 
they  maintain  discipline  and  order  and  love  and  seriousness  in 
their  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  change  the  travelling  preacher  in  his  district, 
but  he  must  first  consult  a  bishop;  he  can  further  receive  or  sus- 
pend preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  He  shall  give  the  bishop  notice  of  the  condition  of  his  dis- 
trict; and  see  that  the  travelling  preachers  obtain  a  proportioned 
part  of  their  support  quarterl}^  by  giving  them  their  allowance 
out  of  the  money  they  may  have  collected  in  their  districts;  a 
single  man  however,  shall  not  be  allowed  more  than  eighty  dol- 
lars, and  a  married  man  one  hundred  and  sixty  dollars,  annually. 
Should  the  collection  of  one  or  the  other  district  be  insufiicient, 
then  it  shall  be  left  to  a  committee,  appointed  by  the  conference, 
who,  in  their  discretion,  shall  make  up  the  deficiency  out  of  other 
collections  made.  But  a  preacher  stationed  in  a  town  must  be 
supported  by  the  congregation  he  attends. 

6.  Should  it  so  happen,  that  the  society  at  a  time  should  be 
without  a  bishop,  then  the  presiding  elders  shall,  each  of  them, 
have  special  charge  of  the  societies  in  their  respective  districts, 


I04  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

that  all  may  be  kept  in  love  and  earnest  together,  and  that  they 
give  each  other  all  necessary  information  of  the  state  of  their 
di.stricts.  And  should  it  also  happen,  that  one  or  the  other  dis- 
trict should  be  without  a  presiding  elder,  what  shall  then  be 
done?  Information  thereof  shall  immediately  be  given  to  the 
bishop,  who  shall  appoint  one  of  the  elders  in  the  district,  where 
it  can  be  done,  to  act  till  the  conference.  And  in  case  there 
should  be  no  bishop,  then  the  next  or  nearest  presiding  elder 
shall  appoint  one,  if  he  himself  cannot  take  charge  of  the  district. 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

OF  THE  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION,  ORDINATION  AND  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  is  an  elder  constituted  ? 

Ans.  After  a  probation  of  two  years,  he  may  be  presented 
before  the  yearly  conference  and  ordained  of  the  bishops  by  lay- 
ing on  of  their  hands:  provided  the  conference  be  convinced  and 
fully  satisfied,  that  the  contents  of  the  6,  7,  8  &  9th  verses  of 
St.  Paul  to  Titus  in  the  first  chapter,  are  found  to  be  in  and  with 
him.  These  verses  shall  be  read  to  every  one,  who  is  ordained, 
at  his  ordination. 

1.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  elder.?  To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can  and  to  baptize;  to  perform  the  office  of  matrimon}^  and  assist 
the  presiding  elder  to  administer  the  Lord's  supper;  but  when 
the  presiding  elder  cannot  attend,  then  one  or  tw'o  elders  shall 
perform  this  duty ;  he  shall  also  perform  all  parts  of  divine  wor- 
ship; endeavour  to  establish  and  hold  classmeetings,  and  assist 
in  electing  the  leaders. 

2.  To  make  a  collection,  freely  contributed,  quarterly  for  the 
travelling  preachers  and  for  the  poor.-  to  take  specification  or 
catalogue  thereof,  signed  by  the  leader,  at  each  place,  and  when 
there  is  no  leader  present,  to  have  it  signed  by  some  other  mem- 
ber, in  order  to  account  with  the  presiding  elder,  so  that  all 
things  be  done  in  an  orderly  manner. 

3.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  want 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  travelling  preacher  comes 
to,  he  shall  make  the  collection  and  in  like  manner  take  a  cata- 
logue thereof,  and  bring  or  send  it  to  the  presiding  elder  or  to  the 
conference,  for  the  support  of  needy  preachers,  who  are  poor  and 
who  preach  amongst  poor  people. 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1825.  105 

4.  Should  a  travelling  preacher  or  elder  desire  to  leave  the 
district  assigned  him,  he  must  first  acquaint  the  presiding  elder 
of  his  intention  by  writing;  and  should  any  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstances,  he  shall  be  accountable  therefor  to  the  next  con- 
ference, and  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  salary  from  the  time  he 
may  have  travelled  during  the  year. 

5.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,  and  yet  required  to  preach,  it  is 
reasonable  and  just  that  the  elders  should  provide  for  their  sup- 
port in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  be  employed,  by  making 
a  collection  for  their  benefit  amongst  the  societies  in  their  district 
thoiigh  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  allotted  to  travelling 
preachers. 

SECTION  SIXTH. 

OF  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS  AND  OF  THEIR 

DUTY. 

Qst.     How  is  a  preacher  to  be  received  ? 

Ans.   I.     By  the  yearly  conference. 

2.  In  the  interval  of  the  conference,  by  the  bishop,  or  the  pre- 
siding elder  of  the  district,  or  an  elder,  who  supplies  the  place 
of  a  presiding  elder  at  a  yearly  or  great  meeting,  until  the  next 
sitting  of  the  conference.  No  one  will  be  admitted  otherwise, 
than  on  trial;  and  one  who  is  taken  on  trial,  may  either  be 
admitted  or  rejected,  without  doing  him  any  wrong,  otherwise 
it  would  be  no  trial  at  all. 

No  preacher  of  any  other  society  can  be  taken  up  as  a  preacher 
in  our  society,  without  being  able  to  produce  a  recommendation 
of  his  standing  and  behaviour  from  his  own  society,  or  of  some 
trustworth}'  persons,  who  are  known  as  such  to  the  conference 
or  to  the  presiding  elder.  In  such  case  the  conference  may  take 
him  on  trial  for  one  year,  or  in  the  intermediate  time  of  the  con- 
ference, the  bishop  or  presiding  elder  may  give  him  licence  to 
preach  until  the  next  annual  conference  in  his  district. 

4.  Every  person  proposed  as  preacher  shall  be  examined  by 
the  conference  and  the  following  questions  put  to  him: 

Have  you  known  God  in  Christ  Jesus  as  a  sin  pardoning  God, 
and  have  you  obtained  forgiveness  of  your  sins? 


Io6  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

Have  j-ou  now  peace  with  God,  and  is  the  love  of  God  shed 
abroad  in  your  soul  by  the  liol}-  spirit  ? 

Do  you  follow  after  holiness? 

Do  you  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God,  and  that 
therein  only  is  contained  the  true  wa}-  to  our  soul's  salvation  ? 

What  foundation  have  j-ou  for  such  belief? 

What  is  your  motive  that  you  desire  permission  to  preach  the 
gospel  ? 

What  is  5-our  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justifica- 
tion, sanctification,  and  redemption? 

Does  3'our  own  salvation,  &  the  salvation  of  your  fellow 
mortals  lie  nearer  to  your  heart  then  all  other  things  in  the 
world  ? 

Can  3-ou  subject  j'ourself  to  the  counsel  of  3-our  brethren? 

Will  3'()U  be  obedient  and  read3-  to  speak  or  hold  3-our  peace  as 
the  brethren  ma3'  think  it  lit  or  expedient. 

Are  3'ou  willing  as  much  as  in  3'our  power  to  assist  in  uphold- 
ing the  itinerant  plan  and  support  the  same  as  much  as  possible. 

Qst.  2.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  preacher? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get  hearers, 
and  establish  class  meetings;  to  Gonverse  with  the  members  on 
the  situation  or  condition  of  their  souls,  and  seek  to  administer 
relief,  strengthen  and  direct  those  who  are  afiiicted  and  labour 
under  temptations,  to  animate  the  indolent  or  slothful,  and 
endeavour  as  much  as  possible  to  edif3'  and  instruct  all  in  faith, 
in  grace,  and  in  the  knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ;  never  to  omit  to 
visit  the  sick,  but  on  all  occasions  to  strive  to  enforce  and  con- 
firm the  doctrines  he  delivers  b3'  a  well  ordered  exemplar3-  life. 

Qst.  3.     What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher? 

Ans.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  awa3'  3-our  time  with  unneces- 
sar3^  things,  at  an3'  place.  Be  alwa3'S  serious.  Let  your  motto 
be  Holiness  to  the  Lord.  Avoid  all  lightness  and  jesting.  Con- 
verse sparingly,  &  conduct  50urself  prudently  with  women; 
demean  3'ourself  in  all  respects  as  a  true  Christian. 

2.  Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  l)elieve  evil 
of  no  one  without  good  evidence;  and  always  put  the  most 
favourable  construction  on  such  matters,  as  the  nature  of  the 
subject,  consistent  with  truth,  will  bear. 

vSpeak  evil  of  no  one;  whatever  ma3'  be  3'Our  thoughts,  keep 
them  within  3'our  own  breast,  till  3-ou  can  tell  the  person  con- 
cerned, what  you  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 


DISCIPLIXE    OF   1825.  107 

3.  Let  3'our  business  be  to  save  as  man}'  souls  as  possible;  to 
this  emplo3-ment  give  yourself  up  wholly.  A'isit  those  who  need 
it,  and  act  in  all  things  not  according  to  j'our  own  will,  but  as  a 
son  in  the  gospel.-  As  such  it  becomes  your  duty  to  employ 
your  time  in  the  manner  here  prescribed;  in  preaching,  and 
visiting  from  house  to  house;  in  instructing  and  prayer,  and  in 
meditating  on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until  our 
Lord  Cometh. 


SECTION    SEVENTH. 

OF  THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS,  AND  HOW  THEY 
ARE  TO  BE  DISPOSED  OF. 

Qst.  I.  What  shall  be  done,  when  a  bishop,  a  presiding  elder 
or  preacher  is  under  report  of  being  guilt}^  of  some  crime  for- 
bidden in  the  woi'd  of  God,  as  an  unchristian  practice,  sufficient 
for  excommunication  ? 

Ans.  When  a  bishop  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  how 
shall  he  be  dealt  with?  When  charges  hapjDen  to  be  made, 
which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  a  pre- 
siding elder  and  an  elder,  after  being  duly  notified  thereof,  to 
inquire  into  and  examine  whether  they  are  founded  in  truth; 
but,  as  the  Apostle  sa3-s,  the}'  shall  not  receive  an  accusation 
without  two  or  three  witnesses.  If  it  then  appears  that  he  is 
justly  accused,  they  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writ- 
ing, and  send  a  copy  thereof  to  the  bishop  accused,  and  appoint 
a  time  and  place  where  the  accusers  and  accused  shall  be  present 
to  each  other,  when  the  cause  shall  be  tried  by  two  presiding 
elders  and  three  elders.  If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his 
peace  till  the  yearly  conference,  where  the  presiding  elder  and 
elders  shall  again  examine  and  tr}-  the  same;  and  if  found  guilty 
again,  he  shall  be  suspended  from  ofi&ce. 

Qst.  2.  When  a  presiding  elder  is  charged  with  immoral  con- 
duct, what  shall  be  done  ? 

Ans.  Where  charges  happen  to  be  brought  against  a  presiding 
elder,  which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the 
next  or  nearest  elder  and  a  preacher  to  inquire  into  and  examine 
them,  and  if  the  accused  appear  to  be  guilty,  they  shall  take 
down  their  proceedings  in  writing  and  send  him,  the  accused, 
a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the  accusers 


I08  UNITED   BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

with,  the  accused  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each  other.  And 
in  the  absence  of  the  bishop,  another  presiding  elder  and  two 
elders  shall  be  called,  who  shall  examine  the  charges,  and  if  he 
is  found  guilt}',  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where 
he  shall  be  accountable. 

Qst.  3.  When  an  elder,  a  preacher  or  an  exhorter  is  charged 
with  immoral  conduct,  what  shall  be  done .? 

Ans.  The  preacher  thereabout,  to  whom  it  shall  be  known, 
shall  take  with  him  another  preacher  or  exhorter  or  a  leader  and 
examine  into  the  charge;  should  he  appear  guilty,  then  notice 
thereof  shall  be  given  him,  and  a  time  appointed,  where  they, 
the  accusers  and  the  accused,  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each 
other.  And,  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or  presiding  elders, 
three  elders  or  preachers  shall  try  and  determine  his  case,  and  if 
he  be  convicted,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where 
he  shall  be  accountable. 

SECTION  EIGHTH. 

OF  THE  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Qst.     How  shall  members  be  taken  into  our  societj' .'' 

Ans.  When  at  any  meeting  a  person  makes  known  his  desire 
to  become  a  member  of  our  society',  then  the  preacher  present 
shall  put  to  him  the  following  question : 

Have  you  experienced  pardon  of  your  sins  and  are  j'ou  now 
determined  by  the  grace  of  God  to  save  3'our  soul  ? 

If  the  person  answers  this  question  in  the  afl&rmative,  and  no 
objection  by  any  person  on  account  of  his  moral  conduct,  then 
the  preacher  shall  give  him  the  hand,  and  he  shall  henceforth  be 
esteemed  a  full  member  of  our  society ;  but  so  long  as  he  is  not 
able  truly  to  answer  the  above  question  in  the  afl&rmative,  shall 
he  not  be  considered  a  full  member,  but  only  a  seeker,  and  as 
long  as  he  remains  a  seeker  he  has  no  vote  in  the  society. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  acknowledge  and  confess, 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  holy  word  of 
God;  that  he  will  henceforth  strive  with  all  his  heart  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  work  out  his  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling  to  the  end,  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  Jlee 
from  the  etertial  wrath  to  come. 

Every  member  should  endeavour  to  walk  closely  and  lead  a 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1825.  109 

good  life;  be  diligent  in  prayer,  particularly  in  private;  and,  for 
his  own  edification,  to  be  present  and  attend,  when  practicable, 
at  all  meetings,  both  public  worship  &  private  prayer  meetings. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pray  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  walk  closely,  as  in  the  presence  of 
God;  also  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communication  with  God 
in  all  his  employments,  and  never  speak  evil  of  his  fellow 
being,  but  practise  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  do  good  to  the 
poor,  and  endeavour  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  i7i  deed. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  holy,  as  required  in 
the  word  of  God.  Neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 
exercises  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God, 
and  with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honor  and  glorj'  of  God. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  contribute  something 
quarterly  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  his 
circumstances  will  admit  of  it,  willingly  and  freely. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet,  peaceable  and 
godly  life  in  the  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Chris- 
tian to  live  in  peace — particularly  to  the  higher  or  ruling  powers, 
every  one  shall  be  subject,  as  the  word  of  God  requires. 

Amongst  the  members  of  the  society  the  preachers  shall  estab- 
lish one  or  more  classmeetings,  where  a  niajoritj^  of  the  members 
may  conceive  it  necessary' ;  and  the  members,  when  practicable, 
shall  assemble  at  the  place  appointed,  to  hold  prayer  meetings, 
in  order  to  edify  themselves  in  the  presence  of  God,  and  promote 
the  love  to  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  class  the  leaders  should  be  elected  in  the  presence  of 
the  preacher,  and  their  duty  shall  be  to  appoint  pra3'er-meet- 
ings,  and  to  commence  and  conclude  them;  it  shall  also  be  their 
duty  to  hold  class-meetings  at  all  times,  to  exhort  the  members 
and  preserve  them  in  love,  and  to  look  well  to  their  own  conduct. 

When  members  trespass  against  each  other,  as  brethren  or  sis- 
ters, correct  the  faults  first  between  thee  and  him  alone;  If  he  hear 
thee,  thou  hast  gained  thy  brother.  But  if  he  will  not  hear  thee, 
then  take  with  thee  one  or  two  more,  that  in  the  mouth  of  two  or 
three  witnesses  every  word  may  be  established.  And  if  he  shall 
neglect  to  hear  them,  tell  it  unto  the  church:  but  if  he  neglect  to 
hear  the  church,  let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a  Heathen  man  and  a 
Publican. 


no  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

On  any  dispute  between  two  or  more  of  the  society,  concerning 
the  payment  of  debts  or  other  cause,  which  cannot  be  settled  by 
the  parties  concerned,  the  preacher  who  has  the  oversight  of  the 
society,  or  the  preacher  residing  thereabouts,  shall  inquire  into 
the  circumstances  of  the  case;  and  shall  recommend  to  the  con- 
tending parties  a  reference,  consisting  of  one  arbiter  chosen  by 
the  plaintif,  and  another  chosen  by  the  defendant;  which  two 
arbiters  so  chosen  shall  choose  the  third:  the  three  arbiters  are 
then  to  decide  the  dispute. 

But  if  one  of  the  parties  be  dissatisfied  with  the  judgment 
given,  such  party  may  refer  to  the  next  quarterly  or  great  meet- 
ing, and  apply  to  the  presiding  elder  for  a  second  arbitration,  and 
if  the  preachers  find  suflacient  cause,  they  shall  grant  a  second 
arbitration;  in  which  case  each  party  shall  choose  two  arbiters, 
and  the  four  arbiters  shall  choose  a  fifth,  the  judgment  of  the 
majority  of  whom  shall  be  final;  and  any  person  refusing  to 
abide  by  such  judgment,  shall  be  excluded  the  society'.  And  if 
any  member  of  the  society  shall  refuse  in  cases  of  debt  or  other 
disputes  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration,  when  recommended  to 
him  by  a  preacher  or  leader,  who  has  the  charge  of  the  societj^;  or 
shall  enter  into  a  law-suit  with  another  member,  before  these 
measures  are  taken,  he  shall  be  expelled,  excepting  the  case  be  of 
such  a  nature  as  to  require  and  justify  a  process  at  law,  as  exec- 
utors or  administrators. 

If  any  member  of  this  society  shall  publicly  transgress,  such 
member  shall  likewise  be  publicly  reprimanded,  and  in  case 
such  member  shall  not  humble,  the  same  shall  be  publicl}'  ex- 
cluded from  the  congregation. 

SECTION  NINTH. 

IN    RESPECT  TO  SLAVERY. 

Resolved,  that  all  slavery  in  every  sense  of  the  word  be  totally 
prohibited  and  in  no  way  tolerated  in  our  community. 

Should  some  be  found  in  our  societ}',  or  others  desire  to  be 
admitted  as  members,  who  hold  slaves,  they  can  neither  continue 
to  be  members,  or  be  admitted  as  such,  without  they  do  person- 
ally mannumit  or  set  free  such  slaves  wherever  the  law  of  the 
state  shall  permit  it,  or  submit  the  case  to  the  quarterly  confer- 
ence, to  be  by  them  specified,  what  length  of  time  such  slave 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1S25.  Ill 

serve  his  master  or  other  person,  until  the  amount  paid  for  him, 
or  for  raising  him,  be  compensated  to  his  master.  But  in  no  case 
shall  a  member  of  our  society  be  permitted  to  sell  a  slave. 

SECTION  TENTH. 

Qst.  I.  How  and  in  what  manner  shall  the  bishops  and 
preachers  be  provided  for  and  how  shall  the  necessary  means  be 
collected  ? 

Ans.  A  collection  shall  annually  be  liftted  for  the  bishops, 
at  every  preaching  place  throughout  our  whole  society,  the 
preachers  shall  pay  over  this  collection  to  their  respective  pre- 
siding elders  at  the  annual  conference  and  the  presiding  elders 
shall  give  an  account  thereof  to  their  respective  annual  confer- 
ences, out  of  this  collection  the  bishops  shall  receive  their  salary; 
provided,  that  one  who  has  a  family  does  not  receive  more  than 
$160  and  his  travelling  expenses,  and  if  without  a  family,  |8o  and 
his  travelling  expenses. 

2d.  The  preachers  in  towns  or  cities,  who  stand  under  the 
direction  of  the  conference  with  the  itinerant  preachers,  receive 
their  salary  from  the  respective  societies  whom  they  serve;  but 
it  is  their  dut^^  to  give  an  account  to  the  annual  conference,  and 
limit  their  salary  to  the  usual  salary  and  necessary  expenses,  and 
if  there  should  be  a  surplus,  to  pay  the  same  over  to  the  annual 
conference,  to  be  applied  for  the  benefit  of  the  travelling 
preachers. 

3d.  For  the  support  of  the  travelling  preachers  the  presiding 
elder  and  preachers  shall  appoint  on  each  circuit  a  Stewart,  and  in 
each  class  an  assistant  Stewart,  to  make  quarterly  collections  in 
money  or  produce,  which  produce  to  be  valued  what  it  may  be 
worth  between  man  and  man,  and  an  account  kept  thereof,  and 
to  be  proportionably  distributed  among  the  travelling  preachers. 
All  assistant  Stewarts  will  submit  their  accounts  to  the  Stewart 
of  the  circuit  and  settle  with  him  quarterly;  the  circuit  Stewarts 
will  submit  their  accounts  to  the  presiding  elder  at  the  quarterly 
meeting  and  the  presiding  elder  will  submit  his  account  to  the 
annual  conference,  in  order  to  show  what  each  travelling  preacher 
has  received,  that  order  and  equality  be  observed.  The  annual 
salary  of  a  travelling  preacher  or  travelling  presiding  elder  is 
also  limitted  like  the  salary  of  the  bishops  to  $160,  if  with  a 
family,  or  |8o  if  without  family  and  travelling  expenses. 


112  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

APPENDIX. 

OF  THE  NECESSITY  OF  UNION  AMONG  OURSELVES. 

Let  us  be  deeply  sensible  ( from  what  we  have  known )  of  the 
evil  of  a  division  in  principle,  spirit,  or  practice,  and  the  dreadful 
consequences  to  ourselves  and  others.  If  we  are  united,  what 
can  stand  before  us  ?  If  we  divide,  we  shall  destroy  ourselves, 
the  work  of  God,  and  the  souls  of  our  people. 

Quest.  What  can  be  done  in  order  to  a  closer  union  with  each 
other? 

Ans.  I.  Let  us  be  deeply  convinced  of  the  absolute  necessity 
of  it. 

2.  Pray  earnestly  for,  and  speak  truly  and  freely  to  each  other. 

3.  When  we  meet,  let  us  never  part  without  prayer. 

4.  Take  great  care  not  to  despise  each  other's  gifts. 

5.  Never  speak  lightly  of  each  other. 

6.  Let  us  defend  each  other's  character  in  every  thing,  so  far 
as  is  consistent  with  truth. 

7.  Labour,  in  honour,  each  to  prefere  the  other,  before  himself. 

8.  We  recommend  a  serious  examination  of  the  caiises,  evils 
a?id  cures  of  heart  a?id  church  divisions. 

OF  VISITING  FROM  HOUSE  TO  HOUSE  AND  ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL  RELIGION. 

Quest.     How  can  we  further  assist  those  under  our  care? 

Ans.  I.  By  instructing  them  at  their  own  houses;  which  is 
of  unspeakable  necessity',  in  order  to  promote  confidence  and 
communion  with  God  among  us;  further  to  wean  us  of  the  love 
of  the  world,  and  inure  us  to  a  life  of  heavenly  mindedness; 
also  to  encourage  us  to  strive  after  and  practise  brotherly  love, 
that  no  evil  thinking  or  judging  oi  on^  another  be  found  amongst 
us;  and  lastly  that  we  may  learn  to  do  as  we  would  wish  to  be 
done  by. 

2.  Every  preacher  must  make  it  his  duty  to  instruct  the 
people  from  house  to  house,  and  exhort  them  to  be  apt  in  all 
good.  Till  this  be  done,  and  that  in  good  earnest,  we  shall, 
upon  the  whole,  be  but  little  better,  and  our  godliness  will  not 
be  deeply  enough  founded;  therefore,  wherever  we  maybe,  we 
should  guard  against  useless  or  loose  talking. 

Undoubtedly  this  private  application  of  visiting  from  house 


discipline;  of  1825.  113 

to  house  and  exhorting  the  people,  is  founded  or  implied  in 
those  solemn  words  of  the  apostle: 

''I charge  thee  before  God  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  who  shall 
judge  the  quick  a7id  dead  at  his  appearing,  preach  the  Word;  be 
instant  in  season,  out  of  season:  Reprove,  rebuke,  exhort,  with 
all  lofig  sujferi?ig." 

OF  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN. 

Qst.     What  shall  be  done  to  benefit  the  rising  generation  ? 

Ans.  Let  him,  who  is  in  any  wise  zealous  for  God  and  the 
souls  of  men,  begin  the  work  without  delay.  Where  children 
are  found,  meet  them  as  often  as  possible;  speak  freely  with 
them,  and  instruct  them  diligently;  exhort  them  to  be  good, 
and  pray  with  them  earnestly,  yet  simply  and  plain,  that  they 
may  learn  to  know  their  Creator  and  redeemer  in  the  days 
of  their  youth. 

THE  FORM  AND  MANNER   OF  ORDAINING  PREACHERS. 

1.  On  the  day  appointed,  there  shall  be  a  suitable  sermon  or 
exhortation  delivered. 

2.  After  their  names  have  been  read  aloud,  the  bishop  shall 
say  unto  the  people  present: 

3.  Beloved  Brethre?i  itt  Christ  \  Is  there  any  amongst  you, 
who  knoweth  any  impediment  or  crime  in  any  of  those  persons 
to  be  ordained  elders,  for  which  he  ought  not  to  be  admitted  to 
that  ofiice,  let  him  come  forth  in  the  name  of  God  and  shew  what 
the  crime  or  impediment  is. 

4.  If  any  crime  or  impediment  be  objected,  the  bishop  shall 
surcease  from  ordaining  that  person,  until  such  time  as  the  party 
accused  shall  be  found  clear  of  the  crime. 

Then  shall  read  Titum  i,  5 — 9: 

"For  this  cause  left  I  thee  in  Crete,  that  thou  shouldest  set  in 
order  the  things  that  are  wanting  and  ordain  elders  in  every  city, 
as  I  have  appointed  thee. 

"If  any  be  blameless,  the  husband  of  one  wife,  having  faith- 
full  children,  not  accused  of  riot  or  unruly. 

"  For,  a  Bishop  must  be  blameless,  as  the  Stewart  of  God,  not 
selfwilled,  not  soon  angry,  not  given  to  wine,  not  striker,  not 
given  to  filthy  lucre. 


114  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

"But  a  lover  of  hospitality,  a  lover  of  good  men,  sober,  just, 
holy,  temperate; 

"  Holding  fast  the  faithfull  word  as  he  had  been  taught,  that  he 
ma}^  be  able  by  sound  doctrine,  both  to  exhort  and  to  convince 
the  gainsayers, 

Qst.  Do  you  trust  that  you  are  inwardly  moved  by  the  holy 
Ghost,  to  take  upon  you  the  office  of  the  ministry  to  serve  God  in 
the  church  of  Christ,  to  the  honour  and  glory  of  his  holy  name? 

Ans.     I  trust  with  the  help  of  God. 

Qst.  Do  you  believe  the  Holy  Scriptures  old  and  new  testa- 
ment? 

Ans.     I  do  believe  them. 

Qst.  Will  you  appl}^  all  your  diligence  to  frame  and  fashion 
your  own  life  according  to  the  doctrine  of  Christ ;  and  to  make 
yourself  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  a  wholesome  example  of  the 
flock  of  Christ? 

Ans.     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Qst.  Will  you  reverentl}'  obey  them,  to  whom  the  charge  and 
government  over  you  is  committed,  following  with  a  glad  mind 
and  will  their  godly  admonitions? 

Ans.     I  will  endeavour,  through  the  grace  of  God,  so  to  do. 

Then  pra5'er  is  made. 

After  prayer,  the  bishops  (or  bishop  and  elders)  shall  lay  their 
hands  upon  the  heads  of  every  one  of  them,  and  sa}': 

"Take  thou  authority  to  execute  the  office  of  an  elder  in  the 
church  of  God.  In  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and 
the  Holy  Ghost."     Amen. 

Hereupon  the  bisbop  shall  deliver  to  every  one  of  them  the 
Holy  Bible,  saying: 

"Take  thou  authority  to  read  and  preach  the  word  of  God  in 
the  church  of  Christ." 

Then  the  bishop  shall  read  from  the  12th  chapter  of  St.  Luke, 

V.  35—38: 

Let  your  loins  be  girded  about  and  your  lights  burning,  and 
ye  yourselves  like  unto  men  that  wait  for  their  Lord,  when  he 
will  return  from  the  wedding,  that  when  hecommeth  and  knock- 
eth,  they  may  open  unto  him  immediatel}'.  Blessed  are  those  serv- 
ants, whom  the  Lord  when  he  cometh  shall  find  watching. 
Verily  I  say  unto  you,  that  he  shall  gird  himself,  and  make 
them  sit  down  to  meat,  and  will  come  forth  to  serve  them. 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1825.  115 

And  if  he  shall  come  in  the  second  watch,  or  come  in  the  third 
watch,  and  find  them  so,  blessed  are  those  servants. 

Then  the  bishop,  or  one  whom  he  appoints,  shall  pray.  After 
which  the  following  benediction  is  pronounced  by  the  bishop: 

The  Peace  of  God  keep  your  hearts  and  mi?ids  in  the  knowledge 
0/  Jesus  Christ  02cr  Lord.     Amen. 

THE  FORAl  OF  SOLEMNIZATION  OF  MATRIMONY. 

ADDRESS. 

Dear  Beloved ! 

We  are  gathered  together  here,  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  in  the 
presence  of  these  witnesses,  to  join  together  these  two  persons, 
namely  N".  and  N.  as  man  and  wife  in  the  holy  estate  of  Matri- 
mony; which  is  an  honorable  estate,  instituted  of  God  in  time 
of  man's  innocency. 

Qst.  Is  there  any  one  here  present,  who  can  shew  any  just 
cause  why  these  two  persons  may  not  lawfully  be  joined  together, 
let  him  now  speak,  or  else  hereafter  forever  hold  his  peace. 

If  no  impediment  be  alleged,  then  shall  the  minister  say  unto 
the  man: 

N.  N.  wilt  thou  have  this  woman:  (N.  N.)  to  thy  wedded  wife, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance.?  Wilt  thou  love  her,  com- 
fort her,  honour  and  keep  her  in  sickness  and  in  health;  and  for- 
saking all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  so  long  as  ye  both 
shall  live?     If  so,  then  answer:  I  will. 

Then  shall  the  minister  say  unto  the  woman: 

N.  N.  wilt  thou  have  this  man  { N.  N.  )  to  thy  wedded  husband, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance?  Wilt  thou  obey  him, 
serve  him,  love,  honour  and  keep  him  in  sickness  and  in 
health;  and  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  him,  so 
long  as  ye  both  shall  live  ?     If  so,  then  answer:  /  will. 

Then  the  minister  shall  require  them  to  join  their  right  hands 
together,  and  the  minister  shall  say: 

Those,  whom  God  hath  joined  together,  let  no  man  put  asunder. 

For  asmuch  as  N.  and  N.  have  consented  together  in  wedlock, 
and  have  witnessed  the  same  before  God  and  these  witnesses 
present,  I  pronounce  that  they  are  man  and  wife  together,  in  the 
name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost.  The 
God  of  Abraham,  of  Isaac,  and  of  Jacob  bless  this  man  and  this 
woman,  and  sow  into  their  hearts  the  seeds  of  eternal  life.  Amen. 
IvCt  us  pray. 

THE  END. 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE 


United  Brethren  in  Christ 


PUBLISHED   BY   JACOB  ANTRIM 
GERMANTOWN. 


CINCINNATI : 
PRINTED   BY   JOHN   M'CALLA 

1829.  117 


OF  THE  ORIGIN   OF  THE  UNITED   BRETHREN 
IN   CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  Lord,  our  God,  to 
awaken  persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world  who  should  raise 
up  the  Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach  the 
gospel  of  Christ  crucified  in  its  purity. 

At  this  time  the  Lord  in  mercy  remembered  the  Germans  in 
America,  who,  living  scattered  in  this  extensive  country,  had 
but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  gospel  of  a  crucified 
Saviour  preached  to  them  in  their  native  language. 

Amongst  others  he  raised  up  an  Otterbein,  a  Boehm,  and  a 
Guethmg,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and  strength,  to  labour 
in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  call,  also,  amongst  the  Germans 
in  America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men  obeyed  the  call 
of  their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labours  were  blessed;  thej'  estab- 
lished in  many  places  excellent  societies,  and  led  many  a  precious 
soul  to  Jesus  Christ.  Their  sphere  of  action  spread  itself 
more  and  more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary  to  look  about 
for  more  fellow  labourers  in  the  vineyard;  for  the  harvest  was 
great,  and  the  labourers  but  few.  The  Lord  called  others,  who 
also  were  willing  to  devote  their  strength  to  his  service;  such, 
then,  were  accepted  by  one  or  the  other  of  the  preachers,  as  fel- 
low labourers. 

The  number  of  members  of  the  society,  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  country,  continued  from  time  to  time  to  increase,  and  the 
gracious  work  spread  itself  thro'  the  states  of  Pennsylvania, 
Maryland,  and  Virginia.  Great  meetings  were  appointed  and 
held  annually  several  times;  when,  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present;  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and 
the  necessity  of  their  iitmost  endeavors  to  save  souls.  At  one 
of  those  conversations,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  of  all 
the  preachers,  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how,  and  in 
what  manner  they  might  be  most  useful. 

1^9 


T20  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

The  first  conference  was  accordingly  held  in  Baltimore,  in  the 
vear  1789.     There  were  present: 

William  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  Ernst, 

George  A.  Guething,  Henry  Weidener, 
Christian  Newcomer, 

The  second  conference  was  held  in  York  count}',  in  Paradise 
township,  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year  1791, 
where  there  were  present  the  following  persons,  viz: 

William  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  G.  Pfrimmer, 

Geo.  A.  Guething,  John  Neidig, 

Chris' n  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander, 
Adam  Lehman, 

And  after  mature  deliberation,  how  they  might  labour  most 
usefully  in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord,  they  again  appointed  such 
as  fellow  labourers,  of  whom  they  had  cause  to  b&lieve  that  they 
had  experienced  true  religion  in  their  souls. 

In  the  mean  time  the  number  of  members  continued  to  increase 
more  and  more;  the  preachers  therefore  were  obliged  to  appoint 
an  annual  conference,  in  order  to  unite  themselves  more  closely, 
and  labour  most  usefully  to  one  common  end;  for  some  were 
Presbyterians,  or  church  reformed,  some  were  Lutherians,  others 
Menonites,  and  yet  others  were  Methodists.  They  therefore 
appointed  a  conference  to  be  held  the  25th  of  September,  1800,  in 
Frederick  coiinty,  Maryland,  at  the  house  of  brother  Frederick 
Kemp.     There  were  present  as  follows: 

William  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Boehm,  Henry  Krum, 

George  A.  Guething,  John  Hershey, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henry  Boehm, 

Abraham  Dracksel,  Dietrick  Aurauf, 
John  George  Pfrimmer. 

They  there  united  themselves  into  a  societ3%  which  bears  the 
name  of  ''The  Utiited  Brethre?i  hi  Christ;"  and  elected  William 
Otterbein  and  Martin  Boehm,  as  superintendants  or  bishops,  and 
agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty  to  baptize  in  such 
manner,  as  should  best  accord  with  his  conviction. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1829.  121 

From  this  time  forth  the  society  increased  still  more;  preachers 
were  appointed,  who  travelled  continually  (because  the  number  of 
preaching  places  could  in  no  wise  be  attended,)  and  the  work 
spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky.  It  became 
necessary,  therefore,  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  state  of  Ohio, 
because  it  was  conceived  too  laborious  for  the  preachers  who 
laboured  in  those  states,  to  travel  such  a  distance  annually  to  the 
conference. 

In  the  mean  time  brothers  Boehm  and  Guething  died,  and 
brother  Otterbein  desired,  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected 
(because  infirmity  and  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer,)  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society  and  preserve 
discipline  and  order;  for  at  a  conference  formerly  held,  it  was  re- 
solved, that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  die,  another  should  be 
elected  in  his  place. — Therefore  brother  Christian  Newcomer  was 
then  elected  as  bishop,  to  take  charge  of  the  superintendance  of 
the  society. 

The  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  society  has  long  since  been 
deeply  felt;  and  partial  attempts  thereto  having  at  different  times 
been  made,  it  was  at  length  resolved  at  the  conference  in  the 
state  of  Ohio,  that  a  general  conference  should  be  held,  who 
should  take  upon  themselves  to  complete  the  same,  so  as  to  ac- 
cord with  the  word  of  God.  The  members  of  this  conference 
were  to  be  elected  from  amongst  the  preachers  in  the  different 
parts  of  the  country,  by  a  majority  of  the  votes  of  the  mem- 
bers of  the  society;  and  there  present  at  the  conference,  that 
were  duly  elected,  the  following  preachers,  namely:  Christian 
Newcomer,  Abraham  Hiestand,  Andrew  Zellar,  Daniel  Treyer, 
Abraham  Tracksel,  Christian  Berger,  George  Benedum,  Abraham 
Meyer,  John  Schneider,  Henry  Kumler,  Henry  Spade,  Isaac 
Nighswander,  Jacob  Baulus,  and  Christian  Krum. 

These  met  on  the  6th  of  June,  1815,  near  Mountpleasant, 
Westmoreland  county,  Pennsylvania,  where  they,  after  mature 
deliberation,  found  it  to  be  necessary,  good  and  beneficial,  to 
deliver  the  following  Doctrines  and  Rules  of  discipline  to  the 
society  in  love  and  hitmility,  with  the  sincere  desire,  that  these 
doctrines  and  rules,  together  with  the  Word  of  God,  might  be 
attended  to,  and  strictly  observed.  For  God  is  a  God  of  order, 
and  where  there  is  no  order  and  discipline,  there  all  love  and 
communion  will  be  lost.  Therefore,  let  us  attend  to  the  counsel 
of  our  Lord,   who  taught  us:  That  in  lowness  of  mind,  we 


122  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

should  esteem  each  other  better  than  ourselves.  Seek  to  be 
minded,  as  Jesus  Christ  also  was!  Who  took  upon  him  the  form 
of  a  servant,  and  became  obedient  even  unto  the  death  of  the 
cross,  to  obtain  for  us  grace  and  strength,  that  we,  from  motives 
of  love  and  humility,  might  submit  one  to  the  other.  He  who 
cannot  submit  himself,  the  same  lacketh  grace,  love  and 
humility;  hence  Jesus  saith:  Whoso  amongst  you  shall  desire 
to  be  the  greatest,  shall  be  the  other's  servant.  If  then  we  are 
to  be  the  servants  of  each  other,  we  must  love  one  another. 
Jesus  saith:  Thus  shall  all  men  know  that  ye  are  my  true 
disciples,  if  ye  have  love  to  one  another;  and  whoso  hath  not 
love,  the  same  continueth  in  death.  Then  let  us  practise  love, 
that  we  may  enjoy  the  glory  and  felicitj',  which  Jesus  obtained 
by  prayer  for  his  disciples  of  his  Heavenly  Father,  that  we 
may  be  07ie  even  as  he  and  the  father  are  one.  Therefore, 
beloved  brethren,  let  us  strive  to  be  like-minded,  unanimous 
and  concordant  and  no  one  speak  or  think  evil  of  the  other, 
but  implore  the  Lord,  that  he  would  graciously  grant  us  his 
spirit,  and  an  earnest  desire  to  lead  a  truly  christian  life,  to 
the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy  name  and  our  eternal  welfare. 

SECTION  FIRST. 
THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men, 
that  we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  Holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence,  or  being 
with  both.  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth,  and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and 
furthermore  sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  he  is  very  God  and  man,  that 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  holy  Ghost  in  the 
Virgin  M-Zxy,  and  was  born  of  her;  that  he  is  the  saviour  and 
mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in 
him,  accept  the  grace  proffered  in  Jesus.  That  this  Jesus 
suffered  and  died  on  the  cross  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again 
on  the  third  day,  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right 
hand  of  God  to  intercede  for  us;  and,  that  he  shall  come  again 
at  the  last  day  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1829.  123 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  father  and  the  son,  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  bod}^  and  life  everlasting. 

We  believe,  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  testaments,  is 
the  word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our 
salvation;  that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge 
and  receive  it  with  the  influence  of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  their 
only  rule  and  guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  as 
also  true  penitence,  forgiveness  of  sins  and  following  after 
Christ,  no  one  can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  holy  scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam  and  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  are  convinced  that  the  outward  means  of  grace,  namely: 
baptism  and  the  remembrance  of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ,  are  to  be  in  use  and  practised  by  all  Christian 
societies;  and  that  it  is  incumbent  on  all  the  children  of  God, 
particularly  to  practise  them;  but  the  manner  in  which  ought 
always  to  be  left  to  the  judgment  and  understanding  of  every 
individual.  So  also  the  example  of  washing  the  feet  is  left  to 
the  judgment  of  every  one  to  practise  or  not;  but  it  is  not  becom- 
ing any  of  our  preachers  to  traduce  any  of  his  brethren  whose 
judgment  and  understanding  in  this  respect  are  different  from 
his  own,  either  in  public  or  in  private;  whosoever  shall  make 
himself  guilty  in  this  respect  shall  be  accounted  a  traducer  of  his 
brethren  and  shall  therefore  be  answerable  to  the  annual  confer- 


SECTION  SECOND. 

OF  THE  GENERAL  AND   YEARLY  CONFERENCES. 

Question.  After  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions 
of  the  conferences  to  be  considered.? 

Answer.  It  is  desired,  that  all  things  be  considered  on  these 
occasions,  as  in  the  immediate  presence  of  God:  That  every  per- 
son rise  and  speak  freely  whatever  is  in  his  heart. 

Question.  How  and  after  what  manner  are  the  members  of  a 
General  conference  to  be  chosen  ? 

Answer.     In  every  district  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  such  are 


124  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

present,  if  not,  the  stationed  or  local  preachers,  who  live  in  the 
district,  shall  advise  the  members  of  the  society,  that  they  elect 
two  elders  from  out  of  their  district;  but  all  the  elders  in  the 
district,  who  are  capable  of  going  to  the  conference,  shall  be  put 
in  nomination,  and  the  same  made  known  some  time  previous 
to  the  election;  and  those  two,  who  shall  have  a  majority  of 
votes,  shall  be  considered  as  members  of  the  General  conference. 
The  votes  taken  at  each  place,  shall  be  couched  in  writing,  and 
attested  by  one  of  the  leaders  or  preachers  then  and  there  pres- 
ent. The  presiding  elder  of  the  district  shall  examine  the 
statement,  and  should  any  two  or  more  have  an  equal  number  of 
votes,  he  shall  determine  by  lot,  who  or  which  of  them  are 
elected. 

N.  B.    The  votes  shall  be  taken  by  an  exhorter,  leader,  or  Stewart. 

Question.     How  often  are  the  General  conferences  to  be  held  ? 

Answer.     Every  four  years. 

Question.  Has  the  General  conference  any  other  powers, 
which  the  annual  conference  has  not  ? 

Ans.  Yes,  the  members  of  the  General  conference  alone  have 
the  power  to  elect  two  bishops  from  amongst  the  elders  for  four 
years;  as  also  to  alter  and  amend  the  discipline  according  as  they 
maj'  find  it  necessary  and  expedient:  provided  the}-  do  not  estab- 
ish  any  article,  which  may  tend  to  abolish,  undo  or  put  aside  the 
itinerant  plan.  The  general  conference  has  further  to  fix  upon  or 
determine  the  districts,  where  the  yearly  conferences  are  to  be 
held. 

QsT.     Which  are  the  members  of  the  3'early  conference  ? 

Ans.  All  the  elders  and  preachers,  who  have  obtained  a  writ- 
ten permit,  and  are,  for  the  time  being,  in  the  district  where  the 
conference  is  held,  or  who  maj^  be  taken  up  and  acknowledged  in 
the  same.  But  none  then  ordained  preachers  shall  have  a  vote  in 
the  conference. 

QsT.  In  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions  of  a  con- 
ference to  be  conducted  ? 

Ans.  There  will  be  read  a  chapter  in  the  Bible,  and  brief  re- 
marks made  on  the  contents;  there  will  be  sung  and  prayer  per- 
formed, and  that  as  often  as  the  conference  sits;  and  the  sitting 
closed  with  singing  and  prayer. 

2.  The  Conference  elects  a  secretary,  and  in  case  one  of  the 
bishops  be  absent,  also  one  of  the  presiding  elders,  to  act  iu  con- 
junction with  the  bishop. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1829.  125 

N.  B.  Wherever  it  is  necessary  two  secretaries  shall  be  elected, 
and  the  records  of  the  proceedings  of  the  conference  shall  be 
kept,  both  in  the  English  and  German  languages. 

3.  The  preachers  will  be  examined,  what  their  deportment 
towards  their  fellow  beings  is;  whether  their  conduct  in  life  be 
blameless,  and  whether  they  employ  as  much  time  as  possible  to 
promote  or  spread  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  What  preachers  are  to  be  admitted  on  trial  ? 

5.  What  preachers  are  to  continue  on  trial  ? 

6.  Are  any  to  be  elected  as  elders  ? 

7.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died? 

8.  Who  are  the  presiding  elders? 

9.  Who  gives  himself  up  to  travel? 

10.  What  has  been  collected,  partly  for  contingent  expenses, 
and  partly  for  making  up  the  allowances  of  the  travelling  preach- 
ers? Has  reckoning  been  made  wath  them  ?  Have  they  received 
their  dues  ? 

11.  When  and  where  shall  our  next  conference  he  held? 

12.  Are  the  elders  ordained  ? 

13.  In  what  circuits  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year? 

14.  Is  there  any  thing  more  to  do? 

15.  Has  the  conference  appointed  the  districts  in  their  circuit, 
for  the  purpose  of  holding  the  election  for  the  members  of  the 
General  conference  ?  - 

16.  Is  all  that  has  been  transacted,  entered  in  the  protocol? 

SECTION  THIRD. 

OF  THE  ELECTION  OF  THE  BISHOPS  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

QsT.     How  are  the  bishops  to  be  constituted? 

Ans.  The  General  conference  shall  elect  them  by  the  majority 
of  the  votes  of  the  elders,  who  were  elected  to  the  General  con- 
ference: But  the  conference  may  still  be  at  liberty  to  retain  the 
bishops  yet  other  four  years.  The  newly  elected,  however,  as 
well  as  the  bishops  retained,  must  be  capable  of  travelling  the 
different  circuits  and  of  attending  to  the  conferences,  otherwise 
they  cannot  be  elected. 

QsT.     What  are  the  duties  of  the  bishops  ? 

Ans.  I.     To  preside  in  our  conferences. 

2,     They  have,  in  conjunction  with  the  presiding  elder,  that 


126  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

may  be  present  at  the  conference,  to  fix  the  appointments  of  the 
travelling  preachers  for  the  several  circuits,  provided  they  shall 
not  allow  any  itinerant  preacher  to  remain  in  the  same  station 
more  than  three  years  successiveh-,  unless  particular  circum- 
stances require  it,  and  then  only  with  consent  of  all  the 
bishops. 

3.  The  bishops  point  ovit  the  circuits,  which  are  to  be  travelled 
by  the  presiding  elders. 

4.  They  have  also,  in  connexion  with  the  presiding  elders, 
power,  in  the  intervals  of  the  conferences,  to  change  the  itiner- 
ant preachers,  where  they  conceive  it  necessary-,  and  also  to 
receive  and  suspend  preachers,  as  necessity  may  require,  until 
the  conference. 

5.  They  have  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large, 
attend  to  the  conferences,  and  oversee  the  spiritual  concerns 
of  the  societies. 

6.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rights  of  ordi- 
nation. 

7.  When  a  bishop  ceases  to  attend  to  the  several  conferences, 
and  neglects  to  travel  through  the  connexion  at  large,  can  he 
still  exercise  his  episcopal  oflSce  among  us?  No,  unless  it  be 
that  he  were  sick,  and  what  the  like  circumstances  more  might 
be. 

8.  If  at  any  time,  it  should  so  happen,  that  b}'  reason  of 
death,  suspension  or  other  cause,  our  communion  should  be 
without  a  bishop;  how  is  this  want  to  be  relieved?  The  elder, 
who  shall  have  been  elected  to  preside  at  the  conference,  in 
the  absence  of  the  bishops,  shall  perform  the  duties  of  a  bishop 
during  the  sitting  of  the  conference;  he  shall  also  attend  the 
other  conference,  and  take  his  seat  with  the  president  there 
elected,  to  act  in  conjunction  with  him  at  the  conference  then 
sitting;  and  the  president  there  elected,  shall  also  in  turn,  and 
in  like  manner  attend  to  the  other  conference:  so  that  each 
conference  may  know,  and  be  acquainted  with  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  other,  and  that  love  and  communion  be  maintained 
&c.  until  the  next  General  conference,  who  are  then  to  elect 
bishops  anew. 

9.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present  at  the  close  of 
every  conference. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1829.  127 

SECTION   FOURTH. 

OF  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

QsT.     How  are  the  presiding  elders  to  be  elected  ? 

Ans.  The  bishops  shall  propose  to  the  conference  some  of  the 
elders,  who  have  finished  their  time  of  probation;  and  with 
the  consent  of  the  conference,  elect  them  for  four  years. 

QsT.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  presiding  elder  ? 

Ans.  I.  To  travel  through  the  district  appointed  him  of  the 
bishops,  and  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.  He  has  to  take  charge  of  the  travelling  and  local  preachers 
in  his  district,  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  agreeably 
to  the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
possible  attend  them;  he  shall  administer  the  Lord's  supper,  and 
hold  quarterl}^  meeting  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters 
and  leaders;  he  shall  further  inquire  into,  and  examine  whether 
the  travelling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty,  particularly 
whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable,  preach  every  Sun- 
day; and  where  there  are  more  of  them,  to  change  them  at  times, 
where  the  most  benefit  is  likely  to  result,  and  to  exhort  them, 
that  they  maintain  discipline  and  order  and  love  and  seriousness 
in  their  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  change  the  travelling  preacher  in  his  district, 
but  he  must  first  consult  a  bishop;  he  can  further  receive  or 
suspend  preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  He  shall  give  the  bishop  notice  of  the  condition  of  his  dis- 
trict; and  see  that  the  travelling  preachers  obtain  a  proportioned 
part  of  their  support  quarterly,  by  giving  them  their  allowance 
out  of  the  money  they  may  have  collected  in  their  districts;  a 
single  man,  however,  shall  not  be  allowed  more  than  eighty 
dollars,  and  a  married  man  one  hundred  and  sixty  dollars,  annu- 
ally. Should  the  collection  of  one  or  the  other  district  be  insuf- 
ficient, then  it  shall  be  left  to  a  committee,  appointed  by  the 
conference,  who,  in  their  discretion,  shall  make  up  the  deficiency 
out  of  other  collections  made.  But  a  preacher  stationed  in  a 
town  must  be  supported  by  the  congregation  he  attends. 

6.  Should  it  so  happen,  that  the  socity  at  a  time  should  be 
without  a  bishop,  then  the  presiding  elders  shall,  each  of  them, 
have  special  charge  of  the  societies  in  their  respective  districts, 


128  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

that  all  may  be  kept  in  love  and  earnest  together,  and  that  they 
give  each  other  all  necessary  infomiation  of  the  state  of  their 
districts.  And  should  it  also  happen,  that  one  or  the  other  dis- 
trict should  be  without  a  presiding  elder,  what  shall  then  be 
done?  Information  thereof  shall  immediately  be  given  to  the 
bishop,  who  shall  appoint  one  of  the  elders  in  the  district,  where 
it  can  be  done,  to  act  till  the  conference.  And  in  case  there 
should  be  no  bishop,  then  the  next  or  nearest  presiding  elder 
shall  appoint  one,  if  he  himself  cannot  take  charge  of  the  district. 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

OF  THE  ELDERS,  THEIR   ELECTION,  ORDINATION,  AND  DUTY. 

QsT.     How  is  an  elder  constituted  ? 

Ans.  After  a  probation  of  two  years,  he  may  be  presented 
before  the  yearly  conference  and  ordained  of  the  bishops  by  lay- 
ing on  of  their  hands:  provided  the  conference  be  convinced  and 
fully  satisfied,  that  the  contents  of  the  6,  7,  8  &  9th  verses  of 
St.  Paul  to  Titus  in  the  first  chapter,  are  fohnd  to  be  in  and  with 
him.  These  verses  shall  be  read  to  every  one,  who  is  ordained, 
at  his  ordination. 

1.  "What  are  the  duties  of  an  elder?  To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can  and  to  babtize;  to  perform  the  ofiice  of  niatrimon}^  and  assist 
the  presiding  elder  to  administer  the  Lord's  supper;  but  when 
the  presiding  elder  cannot  attend,  then  one  or  two  elders  shall 
perform  this  dut}';  he  shall  also  perform  all  parts  of  divine  wor- 
ship; endeavor  to  establish  and  hold  classmeetings,  and  assist  in 
electing  the  leaders. 

2.  To  make  a  collection,  freely  contributed,  quarterly  for  the 
travelling  preachers  and  for  the  poor;  to  take  specification  or 
catalogue  thereof,  signed  by  the  leader,  at  each  place,  and  when 
there  is  no  leader  present,  to  have  it  signed  by  some  other  mem- 
ber, in  order  to  account  with  thf  presiding  elder,  so  that  all 
things  be  done  in  an  orderly  manner. 

3.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  want 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  travelling  preacher  conies 
to,  he  shall  make  the  collection  and  in  like  manner  take  a  cata- 
logue thereof,  and  bring  or  send  it  to  the  presiding  elder  or  to 
the  conference,  for  the  support  of  needy  preachers,  who  are  poor 
and  who  preach  amongst  poor  people. 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1829.  129 

4.  Should  a  travelling  preacher  or  elder  desire  to  leave  the 
district  assigned  him,  he  must  first  acquaint  the  presiding  elder 
of  his  intention  by  writing;  and  should  any  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstances,  he  shall  be  accountable  therefor  to  the  next  con- 
ference, and  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  salary  from  the  time  he 
may  have  travelled  during  the  year. 

5.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,  and  yet  required  to  preach,  it  is  rea- 
sonable and  just  that  the  elders  should  provide  for  their  support 
in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  be  employed,  by  making  a 
collection  for  their  benefit  amongst  the  societies  in  their  district 
though  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  allotted  to  travelling 
preachers. 

•    SECTION  SIXTH. 
OF  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS,  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

QsT.     How  is  a  preacher  to  be  received? 

Ans.  I.     By  the  yearly  conference. 

2.  In  the  interval  of  the  conference,  by  the  bishop,  or  the 
presiding  elder  of  the  district,  or  an  elder,  who  supplies  the 
place  of  a  presiding  elder  at  a  yearly  or  great  meeting,  until 
the  next  sitting  of  the  conference.  No  one  will  be  admitted 
otherwise,  than  on  trial;  and  one  who  is  taken  on  trial,  may 
either  be  admitted  or  rejected,  without  doing  him  any  wrong, 
otherwise  it  would  be  no  trial  at  all. 

No  preacher  of  any  other  society  can  be  taken  up  as  a  preacher 
in  our  society,  without  being  able  to  produce  a  recommendation 
of  his  standing  and  behaviour  from  his  own  society,  or  of 
some  trustworthy  persons,  who  are  known  as  such  to  the  con- 
ference, or  to  the  presiding  elder.  In  such  case  the  conference 
may  take  him  on  trial  for  one  year,  or  in  the  intermediate  time 
of  the  conference,  the  bishop  or  presiding  elder  may  give  him 
license  to  preach  until  the  next  annual  conference  in  his  dis- 
trict. 

4.  Every  person  proposed  as  a  preacher  shall  be  examined 
by  the  conference  and  the  following  questions  put  to  him: 

Have  you  known  God  in  Christ  Jesus  as  a  sin  pardoning  God, 
and  have  you  obtained  forgiveness  of  your  sins  .■* 
9 


130  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

Have  you  now  peace  with  God,  and  is  the  love  of  God  shed 
abroad  in  your  soul  by  the  holy  spirit? 

Do  you  follow  after  holiness  ? 

Do  you  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God,  and  that 
therein  only  is  contained  the  true  way  to  our  soul's  salvation? 

What  foundation  have  you  for  such  belief? 

What  is  your  motive  that  you  desire  permission  to  preach  the 
gospel  ? 

What  is  3'our  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justification, 
sanctification  and  redemption  ? 

Does  your  own  salvation,  and  the  salvation  of  your  fellow 
mortals  lie  nearer  to  your  heart  than  all  other  things  in  the 
world? 

Can  you  subject  yourself  to  the  counsel  of  your  bretheren? 

Will  3-ou  be  obedient  and  ready  to  speak  or  hold  your  peace,  as 
the  brethren  may  think  it  fit  or  expedient? 

Are  you  willing  as  much  as  in  your  power,  to  assist  in  uphold- 
ing the  itinerant  plan,  and  support  the  same  as  much  as  possible? 

QsT.  2.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  preacher? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get  hearers, 
and  establish  class  meetings;  to  converse  with  the  members  on 
the  situation  or  condition  of  their  souls,  and  seek  to  administer 
relief,  strengthen  and  direct  those  who  are  afflicted  and  labour 
under  temptations,  to  animate  the  indolent  or  slothful,  and  en- 
deavor as  much  as  possible  to  edify  and  instruct  all  in  faith,  in 
grace,  and  in  the  knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ;  never  to  omit  to 
visit  the  sick,  but  on  all  occasions  to  strive  to  enforce  and  con- 
firm the  doctrines  he  delivers  b}'  a  well  ordered  exemplary  life. 

QsT.  3.     What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher? 

Ans.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  away  your  time  with  unneces- 
sary things,  at  any  place.  Be  always  serious.  Let  your  motto 
be  Holiness  to  the  Lord.  Avoid  all  lightness  and  jesting.  Con- 
verse sparingly,  and  conduct  yourself  prudently  with  women; 
demean  yourself  in  all  respects  as  a  true  Christian. 

2.  Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  believe  evil 
of  no  one  without  good  evidence;  and  always  put  the  most  favor- 
able construction  on  such  matters,  as  the  nature  of  the  subject, 
consistent  with  truth,  will  bear. 

Speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatever  may  be  your  thoughts,  keep 
them  within  your  own  breast,  till  you  can  tell  the  person  con- 
cerned, what  you  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 


discipline;  of  1829.  131 

3.  Let  your  business  be  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible; 
to  this  employment  give  yourself  up  wholly.  Visit  those  who 
need  it,  and  act  in  all  things  not  according  to  your  own  will,  but 
as  a  son  in  the  gospel.  As  such  it  becomes  your  duty  to  employ 
your  time  in  the  manner  here  prescribed:  in  preaching,  and 
visiting  from  house  to  house;  in  instritcting  and  prayer,  and  in 
meditating  on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until 
our  Lord  cometh. 

SECTION  SEVENTH. 

OF  THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS,  AND  HOW  THEY 
ARE  TO  BE  DISPOSED  OF. 

Qst.  I.  What  shall  be  done,  when  a  bishop,  a  presiding  elder 
or  preacher  is  under  report  of  being  guilty  of  soine  crime  for- 
bidden in  the  word  of  God,  as  an  unchristian  practice,  suflScient 
for  excommunication  ? 

Ans.  When  a  bishop  is  accused  of  immoral  conduct,  how 
shall  he  be  dealt  with  ?  When  charges  happen  to  be  made, 
which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  a 
presiding  elder  and  an  elder,  after  being  duly  notified  thereof, 
to  enquire  into  and  examine  whether  they  are  founded  in  truth; 
but,  as  the  Apostle  says,  they  shall  not  receive  an  accusation 
without  two  or  three  witnesses.  If  it  then  appears  that  he  is 
justly  accused  they  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing, 
and  send  a  copy  thereof  to  the  bishop  accused,  and  appoint  a 
time  and  place  where  the  accusers  and  the  accused  shall  be 
present  to  each  other,  when  the  cause  shall  be  tried  by  two 
presiding  elders  and  three  elders.  If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall 
hold  his  peace  till  the  yearly  conference,  where  the  presiding 
elder  and  elders  shall  again  examine  and  try  the  same;  and 
if  found  guilty  again,  he  shall  be  suspended  from  office. 

Qst.  2.  When  a  presiding  elder  is  charged  with  immoral 
conduct,  what  shall  be  done? 

Ans.  Where  charges  happen  to  be  brought  against  a  presiding 
elder,  which  are  prejudicial  to  the  gospel,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of 
the  next  or  nearest  elder  and  a  preacher  to  inquire  into  and 
examine  them,  and  if  the  accused  appear  to  be  guilty,  they  shall 
take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing  and  send  him,  the  accused, 
a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the  accusers 


132  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

with  the  accused  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each  other.  And 
in  the  absence  of  the  bishop,  another  presiding  elder  and  two 
elders  shall  be  called,  who  shall  examine  the  charges,  and  if  he 
is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where 
he  shall  be  accountable. 

Qst.  3.  When  an  elder,  a  preacher  or  an  exhorter  is  charged 
with  immoral  conduct,  what  shall  be  done  ? 

Ans.  The  preachet  thereabout,  to  whom  it  shall  be  known, 
shall  take  with  him  another  preacher  or  exhorter  or  leader  and 
examine  into  the  charge;  should  he  appear  guilty,  then  notice 
thereof  shall  be  given  him,  and  a  time  appointed,  where  the}', 
the  accusers  and  the  accused,  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each 
other.  And,  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or  presiding  elders, 
three  elders  or  preachers  shall  try  and  determine  his  case,  and  if 
he  be  convicted,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where 
he  shall  be  accountable. 

SECTION    EIGHTH. 

OF  THE  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Qst.     How  shall  members  be  taken  into  our  society  ? 

Ans.  When  at  any  meeting  a  person  makes  known  his  desire 
to  become  a  member  of  our  society,  then  the  preacher  present 
shall  put  to  him  the  following  question: 

Have  you  experienced  pardon  of  3'our  sins  and  are  j^ou  now 
determined  by  the  grace  of  God  to  save  3'our  soul  ? 

If  the  person  answers  this  question  in  the  affirmative,  and  no 
objection  by  any  person  on  account  of  his  moral  conduct,  then 
the  preacher  shall  give  him  the  hand,  and  he  shall  henceforth 
be  esteemed  a  full  member  of  our  society' ;  but  so  long  as  he  is 
not  able  truly  to  answer  the  above  question  in  the  affirmative, 
shall  he  not  be  considered  a  full  member,  but  only  a  seeker,  and 
as  long  as  he  remains  a  seeker,  he  has  no  vote  in  the  society. 

Every  member  of  this  societ}'  should  acknowledge  and  confess 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  hoi}'  word  of 
God;  that  he  will  henceforth  strive  with  all  his  heart  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  work  out  his  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling  to  the  end,  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  flee 
from  the  eternal  UTafh  to  come. 

Every  member  shouM  endeavour  to  walk  closely  and  lead  a  good 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1829.  133 

life;  be  diligent  in  prayer,  particularly  in  private;  and,  for  his 
own  edification,  to  be  present  and  attend,  when  practicable,  at 
at  all  meetings,  both  public  worship  and  private  prayer  meet- 
ings. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pray  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  walk  closely,  as  in  the  presence  of 
God;  also  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communication  with  God  in 
all  his  employments,  and  never  speak  evil  of  his  fellow  being, 
but  practice  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  do  good  to  the  poor,  and 
endeavor  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  iyi  deed. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  holy,  as  required  in 
the  wordof  God.  Neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 
exercises  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God, 
and  with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  God. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  contribute  something 
quarterly  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  his 
circumstances  will  admit  of  it,  willingly  and  freely. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet,  peaceable  and 
godly  life  in  the  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a 
Christian  to  live  in  peace— particularly  to  the  higher  or  ruling 
powers,  every  one  shall  be  subject,  as  the  word  of  God  requires. 

Amongst  the  members  of  the  society  the  preachers  shall 
establish  one  or  more  classmeetings,  where  a  majority  of  the 
members  may  conceive  it  necessary;  and  the  members,  when 
practicable,  shall  assemble  at  the  place  appointed,  to  hold 
prayer  meetings,  in  order  to  edify  themselves  in  the  presence 
of  God,  and  promote  the  love  to  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  class  the  leaders  should  be  elected  in  the  presence 
of  the  preacher,  and  their  duty  shall  be  to  appoint  prayer 
meetings,  and  to  commence  and  conclude  them;  it  shall  also 
be  their  duty  to  hold  classmeetings  at  all  times,  to  exhort  the 
members  and  preserve  them  in  love,  and  to  look  well  to  their 
own  conduct. 

When  members  trespass  against  each  other,  as  brethren  or 
sisters,  correct  the  faults  first  between  thee  and  him  alone:  If  he 
hear  thee,  thou  hast  gained  thy  brother.  But  if  he  will  not  hear 
thee,  then  take  with  thee  one  or  two  more,  that  in  the  mouth  of 
two  or  three  witnesses  every  word  may  be  established.  And 
if  he  shall  neglect  to  hear  them,  tell  it  unto  the  church:  but 


134  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

if  he  neglect  to  hear  the  church,  let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a 
heathen  man  and  a  publican. 

On  any  dispute  between  two  or  more  of  the  society,  concern- 
ing the  payment  of  debts  or  other  causes,  which  cannot  be 
settled  by  the  parties  concerned,  the  preacher  who  has  the 
oversight  of  the  society,  or  the  preacher  residing  thereabouts, 
shall  inquire  into  the  circumstances  of  the  case;  and  shall 
recommend  to  the  contending  parties  a  reference,  consisting 
of  one  arbiter  to  be  chosen  by  the  plaintiff,  and  another  chosen 
by  the  defendant;  which  two  arbiters  so  chosen,  shall  choose  the 
third:  the  three  arbiters  are  then  to  decide  the  dispute. 

But  if  one  of  the  parties  be  dissatisfied  with  the  judgment 
given,  such  party  ma}^  refer  to  the  next  quarterl}^  or  great  meet- 
ing, and  apply  to  the  presidiag  elder  for  a  secotid  arbitration,  and 
if  the  preachers  find  suflBcient  cause,  they  shall  grant  a  second 
arbitration ;  in  which  case  each  part}^  shall  choose  two  arbiters, 
and  the  four  arbiters  shall  choose  a  fifth,  the  judgment  of  the 
majority  of  whom  shall  be  final;  and  any  person  refusing  to 
abide  by  such  judgment,  shall  be  excluded  from  the  society. 
And  if  any  member  of  the  society  shall  refuse  in  cases  of  debt 
or  other  disputes  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration,  when  recom- 
mended to  him  by  a  preacher  or  leader,  who  has  the  charge  of 
the  society;  or  shall  enter  into  a  law-suit  with  another  member, 
before  these  measures  are  taken,  he  shall  be  expelled,  excepting 
the  case  be  of  such  a  nature  as  to  require  and  justify  a  process  at 
law,  as  executors  or  administrators. 

If  any  member  of  this  society  shall  publicly  transgress,  such 
member  shall  likewise  be  publicly  reprimanded,  and  in  case 
such  member  shall  not  humble,  the  same  shall  be  publicly 
excluded  from  the  congregation. 

SECION  NINTH. 

IN  RESPECT  TO   SLAVERY. 

Resolved,  that  all  slavery  in  every  sense  of  the  word  be  totally 
prohibited  and  in  no  way  tolerated  in  our  community. 

Should  some  be  found  in  our  societ}-,  or  others  desire  to  be 
admitted  as  members,  who  hold  slaves,  they  can  neither  continue 
to  be  members,  or  be  admitted  as  such,  without  they  do  person- 
ally manumit  or  set  free  such  slaves  wherever  the  law  of  the 


discipline;  of  1829.  135 

state  shall  permit  it,  or  submit  the  case  to  the  quarterly  confer- 
ence, to  be  by  them  specified,  what  length  of  time  such  slave 
shall  serve  his  master  or  other  person,  until  the  amount  paid  for 
him,  or  for  raising  him,  be  compensated  to  his  master.  But  in 
no  case  shall  a  member  of  our  society  be  permitted  to  sell  a  slave. 

SETCION  TENTH. 

Qst.  I.  How  and  in  what  manner  shall  the  bishops  and 
preachers  be  provided  for,  and  how  shall  the  necessary  means  be 
collected  ? 

Ans.  A  collection  .shall  annually  be  lifted  for  the  bishops,  at 
every  preaching  place  throughout  our  whole  society,  the  preach- 
ers shall  pay  over  this  collection  to  their  respective  presiding 
elders  at  the  annual  conference  and  the  presiding  elders  shall 
give  an  account  thereof  to  their  respective  annual  conferences, 
out  of  this  collection  the  bishops  shall  receive  their  salary;  pro- 
vided, that  one  who  has  a  family  does  not  receive  more  than  |i6o 
and  his  travelling  expenses,  and  if  without  a  family,  |8o  and  his 
travelling  expenses. 

2d.  The  preachers  in  towns  or  cities  who  stand  under  the 
direction  of  the  conference  with  the  itinerant  preachers,  receive 
their  salary  from  the  respective  societies  whom  they  serve;  but 
it  is  their  duty  to  give  an  account  to  the  annual  conference,  and 
limit  their  salary  to  the  usual  salary  and  necessary  expenses, 
and  if  there  should  be  a  surplus,  to  pay  the  same  over  to  the 
annual  conference,  to  be  applied  for  the  benefit  of  the  travelling 
preachers. 

3d.  For  the  support  of  the  travelling  preachers  the  presiding 
elder  and  preachers  shall  appoint  on  each  circuit  a  Stewart,  and 
in  each  class  an  assistant  Stewart,  to  make  quarterly  collections 
in  money  or  produce,  which  produce  to  be  valued  what  it  may 
be  worth  between  man  and  man,  and  an  account  kept  thereof,  and 
to  be  proportionably  distributed  among  the  travelling  preachers. 
All  assistant  Stewarts  will  submit  their  accounts  to  the  Stewart 
of  the  circuit  and  settle  with  him  quarterly;  the  circuit  Stewarts 
will  submit  their  accounts  to  the  presiding  elder  at  the  quarterly 
meeting  and  the  presiding  elder  will  submit  his  account  to  the 
annual  conference,  in  order  to  show  what  each  travelling  preacher 
has  received,  that  order  and  equality  be  observed.  The  annual 
salary  of  a  travel- 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE 


OF  THE 


United  Brethren  in  Christ. 


HARRISBURG,  PA. 

PRINTED  BY  J.  &  F.  WYETH. 

1833.  137 


ORIGIN  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past  it  pleased  the  Lord,  our  God,  to 
awaken  persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world  who  should  raise 
up  the  Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach  the 
gospel  of  Christ  crucified  in  its  purity. 

At  this  time  the  Lord  in  mercy  remembered  the  Germans  of 
America,  who,  living  scattered  in  this  extensive  country,  had 
but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  gospel  of  a  crucified 
Saviour  preached  to  them  in  their  native  language.  ' 

Amongst  others  he  raised  up  an  Otter-bein,  a  Boehtn,  and  a 
GuetJmig,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and  strength,  to  labor 
in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  call,  amongst  the  Germans  in 
America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men  obeyed  the  call 
of  their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labours  were  blessed;  they  estab- 
lished in  many  places  excellent  societies,  and  led  many  a  precious 
soul  to  Jesus  Christ.  Their  sphere  of  action  spread  itself 
more  and  more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary  to  look  about 
for  more  fellow  labourers  in  the  vineyard;  for  the  harvest  was 
great,  and  the  labourers  but  few.  The  Lord  called  others,  who 
were  willing  to  devote  their  strength  to  his  service;  such,  then, 
were  accepted  by  one  or  the  other  of  the  preachers,  as  fellow 
labourers. 

The  number  of  members  of  the  society,  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  country,  continued  from  time  to  time  to  increase,  and  the 
gracious  work  spread  itself  through  the  states  of  Pennsylvania, 
Maryland  and  Virginia.  Great  meetings  were  appointed  and 
held  annually  several  times;  when,  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present,  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and 
the  necessity  of  their  utmost  endeavours  to  save  souls.  At  one 
of  these  conversations,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  of  all 
the  preachers  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how,  and  in 
what  manner  they  might  be  most  useful. 

The  first  conference  was  accordingly  held  in  Baltimore,  in  the 
year  1789. — There  were  present: 

139 


I40  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

William  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  Ernst, 

George  A.  Guething,  Henry  Weidener, 
Christian  Newcomer. 

The  second  conference  was  held  in  York  county,  in  Paradise 
township,  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year  1791, 
where  there  were  present  the  following  persons,  viz. 

William  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  G.  Pfrimmer 

George  A.  Guething,  John  Neidig, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander, 
Adam  Lehman. 

And  after  mature  deliberation,  how  they  might  labour  most 
usefully  in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord,  they  again  appointed  such 
as  fellow  labourers,  of  whom  they  had  cause  to  believe  that  they 
had  experienced  true  religion  in  their  own  souls. 

In  the  mean  time  the  number  of  members  continued  to  increase 
and  the  preachers  were  obliged  to  appoint  an  annual  conference, 
in  order  to  unite  themselves  more  closely,  and  labour  more  use- 
fully to  one  common  good  :  for  some  were  Presbyterians,  or 
church  Reformed,  some  were  Lutherians,  others  Mennonites,  and 
yet  others  were  Methodists.  They  therefore  appointed  a  confer- 
ence to  be  held  the  25th  of  September,  1800,  in  Frederick  county, 
Maryland,  at  the  house  of  brother  Frederick  Kemp.  There  were 
present  as  follows: 

William  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Boehm,  Henry  Krum, 

George  A.  Guething,  John  Hershey, 

Christian  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henry  Boehm, 

Abraham  Dracksel,  Dietrick  Aurauf, 
John  G.  Pfrimmer. 

There  they  united  themselves  into  a  society,  which  bears  the 
name  of  ''The  United  Brethreti  in  Christ;''  and  elected  William 
Otterbein  &  Martin  Boehm,  as  superintendants  or  bishops  and 
agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty  to  baptize  in  such 
manner,  as  should  best  accord  with  his  conviction. 

From  this  time  the  society  increasing  still  more,  preachers 
were  appointed  who  traveled  continually  (because  the  number  of 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1833.  141 

preaching  places  could  in  no  other  wise  be  attended  to;)  and 
the  work  spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky. 
It  became  necessary  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  state  of  Ohio, 
because  it  was  conceived  too  laborious  for  the  preachers,  who 
laboured  in  those  states,  to  travel  such  a  distance  annually  to  the 
conference. 

In  the  mean  time  brothers  Boehm  and  Guething  died,  and 
brother  Otterbein  desired,  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected 
(because  infirmity  and  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer,)  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society  and  preserve 
discipline  and  order;  for  at  a  conference  formlj'  held,  it  was  re- 
solved that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  die,  another  should  be 
elected  in  his  place — Therefore  brother  Christian  Newcomer  was 
elected  as  bishop,  to  take  charge  of  the  superintendance  of  the 
society. 

The  want  of  a  discipline  in  the  society  has  long  since  been 
deeply  felt;  and  partial  attempts  thereto  having  at  different  times 
been  made,  it  was  resolved  at  the  conference  held  in  the  state  of 
Ohio,  that  a  general  conference  should  be  held,  who  should  take 
upon  themselves  to  complete  the  same,  so  as  to  accord  with  the 
word  of  God.  The  members  of  this  conference  were  to  be  elected 
from  amongst  the  preachers  in  the  different  parts  of  the  country, 
by  a  majority  of  the  votes  of  the  members  of  the  society;  and 
there  were  present  at  the  conference,  that  were  duly  elected,  the 
following  preachers,  namely;  Christian  Newcomer,  Abraham 
Hiestand,  Andrew  Zeller,  Daniel  Treyer,  George  Benedum,  Abra- 
ham Tracksel,  Christian  Berger,  Abraham  Meyer,  John  Schneider, 
Henry  Kumler,  Henry  G.  Spayth,  Isaac  Nighswander,  Christian 
Krum  and  Jacob  Baulus. 

These  met  on  the  6th  of  June  1815,  near  Mount  Pleasant, 
Westmoreland  count}'-,  Pennsylvania.  Where  they  after  mature 
deliberation,  presented  to  their  brethren,  the  following  doctrine 
and  discipline  with  the  sincere  desire  that  these  doctrines  and 
rules,  with  the  ivoi-d  of  God,  should  be  observed.  God  is  a  God 
of  order,  but  where  there  is  no  order  nor  church  discipline  the 
spirit  of  love  and  charity  will  soon  be  lost. 

Therefore,  brethren,  we  beseech  you  follow  the  example  of  our 
Lord.  As  it  is  written,  be  kindly  affectionate  one  to  another 
with  brotherly  love,  in  honor  preferring  one  another.  Let  the 
mind  be  in  you  which  was  in  Christ,  who  took  upon  him 
the  form  of  a- servant,  humbled  himself  &  became  obedient  unto 


142  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

death,  even  the  death  of  the  cross,  that  by  his  grace  we  may  sub- 
mit ourselves  one  to  another  in  the  fear  of  God.  He  who  will 
not  submit,  is  in  want  of  humble  love;  Jesus  said,  whosoever 
will  be  chief  among  you,  let  him  be  your  servant.  By  this  shall 
all  men  know  that  ye  are  mj'  disciples,  if  you  have  love  one  to 
another,  and  whoso  loveth  not,  abideth  in  death.  Let  us  walk 
in  newness  of  life,  that  the  prayer  of  our  Lord  may  be  answered 
in  us;  that  we  may  be  one  in  him,  and  that  he  may  give  us  the 
glory,  which  he  gave  to  his  disciples,  that  we  may  be  one  even 
as  he  and  the  Father.  Therefore  beloved  brethren,  let  us  strive 
to  be  like-minded,  having  the  same  love,  being  of  one  accord,  of 
one  mind,  let  no  one  speak  or  think  evil  of  his  brother,  but  pray 
God  that  he  may  grant  us  his  spirit,  and  an  earnest  desire  to  lead 
a  truly  devoted  life,  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy  name. 
Amen. 

SECTION  FIRST. 

THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men, 
that  we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence  or  being 
with  both.  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth,  and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  & 
furthermore  sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  he  is  very  God  and  man,  that 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  holy  Ghost  in  the 
virgin  Mary,  and  was  born  of  her:  that  he  is  the  saviour  and 
mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in 
him,  accept  the  grace  proffered  in  Jesus.  That  this  Jesus 
suffered  and  died  on  the  cross  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again 
on  the  third  day,  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right 
hand  of  God  to  intercede  for  us;  and  that  he  shall  come  again 
at  the  last  day  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  father  and  the  son,  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  Church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  body,  and  life  everlasting. 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1833.  143 

We  believe,  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  Testaments,  is 
the  word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our 
salvation;  that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge 
and  receive  it  with  the  influence  of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  their 
only  rule  and  guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ, 
true  repentance,  forgiveness  of  sins  and  following  after  Christ, 
no  one  can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  holy  scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam  and  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  believe  that  the  ordinances,  namely:  baptism  and  the  re- 
membrance of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
are  to  be  in  use  and  practised  by  all  Christian  societies:  and  that 
it  is  incumbent  on  all  the  children  of  God,  particularly,  to 
practice  them;  but  the  manner  in  which  ought  always  to  be 
left  to  the  judgment  and  understanding  of  every  individual. 
So  also  the  example  of  washing  the  feet  is  left  to  the  judgment 
of  every  one  to  practice  or  not;  but  it  is  not  becoming  any  of  our 
preachers  to  traduce  any  of  his  brethren  whose  judgment  and 
understanding  in  this  respect  are  different  from  his  own,  either 
in  public  or  in  private;  whosoever  shall  make  himself  guilty 
in  this  respect  shall  be  accounted  a  traducer  of  his  brethren  and 
shall  therefor  be  answerable  to  the  annual  conference. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

OF  THE  GENERAL  AND  YEARLY  CONFERENCES. 

Question.  After  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions 
of  the  conferences  to  be  considered.? 

Answer.  It  is  desired,  that  all  things  be  considered  on  these 
occasions,  as  in  the  immediate  presence  of  God:  That  every  per- 
son rise  and  speak  freely  whatever  is  in  his  heart. 

Qst.  How  and  in  what  manner  are  the  members  of  the 
general  Conference  elected.? 

Ans.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  each  annual  conference,  preceding 
the  general  conference,  to  nominate  not  less  than  four  elders, 
(who  have  stood  in  that  capacity  for  a  period  of  two  years  at 
least,)  as  candidates;  two  of  which  number  shall  be  elected  by 
the  brethren  within  the  bounds  of  each  conference.  And  for  the 
better  regulation,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  said  conferences  ( at 


144  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

the  same  time )  to  nominate  and  elect  two  individuals,  to  whom 
the  several  election  accounts,  as  taken  in  each  society,  shall  be 
sent  by  the  class  leaders,  or  preachers,  whose  duty  it  shall  be 
immediately  after  the  annual  conference,  to  hand  each  class  a 
list  of  the  candidates  thus  nominated  for  election;  moreover, 
when  all  the  returns  are  received  bj'  the  individuals  thus 
appointed,  it  shall  be  their  duty  in  the  presence  of  a  third  indi- 
vidual, to  open  and  count  all  the  votes,  after  which  the  two  candi- 
dates who  may  have  the  majority,  shall  receive  immediate 
information  of  their  election,  in  writing,  from  the  individuals  as 
above  appointed.  Should  anj^  two  or  more  of  the  candidates 
have  an  equal  number  of  votes,  the  individuals  thus  appointed, 
shall  determine  by  lot  who  or  which  of  them  is  elected. 

N.  B.    The  votes  shall  betakenby  anexhorter,  leader,  orsteward. 

Qst.     How  often  are  the  General  conferences  to  be  held. 

Ans.     Every  four  years. 

Qst.  Has  the  General  conference  any  other  power,  which 
the  Annual  conference  has  not  ? 

Atis.  The  General  conference  has  the  power  alone  to  elect  one 
or  more  Bishops,  from  among  the  elders  for  a  period  of  four 
years,  furthermore  to  adopt  such  rules  as  may  be  necessary  for 
the  better  interest  of  the  society  in  general.  Yet,  nothing  shall 
be  done  by  the  said  conference,  which  would  in  anj^  wise  affect 
or  change  the  article  of  faith,  neither  the  spirit,  intent,  or  mean- 
ing of  the  rules  or  discipline  as  they  now  stand.  The  General 
conference  has  to  determine  the  districts  and  bounds  of  the  yearly 
conferences. 

Qst.     Who  are  the  members  of  the  j-early  conference  ? 

Ans.  All  the  elders  and  licentiate  preachers,  who  are  for  the 
time  being  in  the  district  where  the  conference  is  held;  but  when 
such  licentiate  preachers  are  proposed  for  ordination,  the  elders 
only  shall  determine  the  same  by  their  vote. 

Qst.  In  what  manner  and  order  are  the  transactions  of  a  con- 
ference to  be  conducted  ? 

Ans.  I.  A  portion  of  scripture  shall  be  read  at  the  opening  of 
the  conference,  also  singing  and  prayer,  the  latter  of  which  shall 
be  performed  during  the  sitting  and  adjournment  of  the  same. 

2.  The  conference  also  elect  two  secretaries,  one  for  the  ger- 
man  and  one  for  the  english  records,  wherever  it  may  be  con- 
sidered necessary'. 

3.  The  preachers  will  be  examined,  what  their  deportment 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1833.  145 

towards  their  fellow  beings  is,  whether  their  conduct  in  life  be 
blameless,  and  whether  they  employ  as  much  time  as  possible  to 
promote  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died  in  the  last  year? 

5.  Who  are  the  candidates  for  the  Ministery  ? 

6.  What  preachers  are  yet  to  continue  on  trial. 

7.  Are  any  to  be  ordained  to  the  office  of  an  elder  ? 

8.  Who  is  willing  to  travel  the  ensuing  year  without  reserve  ? 

9.  Who  are  the  presiding  elders .? 

10.  What  has  been  collected,  partly  for  contingent  expenses, 
and  partly  for  making  up  the  allowances  of  the  traveling  preach- 
ers ?  Has  reckoning  been  made  with  them  ?  have  they  received 
their  dues  ? 

11.  When  and  where  shall  our  next  conference  he  held  ? 

12.  In  what  circuits  are  the  different  preachers  placed? 

13.  Is  there  any  thing  more  to  do? 

14.  Is  all  that  has  been  transacted  entered  upon  record? 

SECTION  THIRD. 

OF  THE  ELECTION  OF  THE  BISHOPS  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

Qsf.     How  are  the  Bishops  to  be  elected? 

Ans.  The  General  conference  shall  elect  them  by  a  majority 
of  votes,  yet  the  conference  may  at  their  option  retain  the  former 
Bishop  or  Bishops,  yet  other  four  years.  The  newly  elected, 
however,  as  those  retained,  must  be  capable  of  attending  the 
conferences  appointed  them,  otherwise  they  cannot  be  elected. 

Qst.     What  are  the  duties  of  the  Bishops  ? 

Ans.  I.     To  preside  in  our  conferences- 

2.  They  have,  in  conjunction  with  the  presiding  elder  that 
may  be  present  at  the  conference,  to  fix  the  appointments  of  the 
traveling  preachers  for  the  several  circuits,  provided  they  shall 
not  allow  any  itinerant  preachers  to  remain  in  the  same  station 
more  than  three  years  successively,  unless  particular  circum- 
stances require  it,  and  then  only  with  the  consent  of  the  con- 
ference. 

3.  The  bishops  point  out  the  circuits  which  are  to  be  traveled 
by  the  presiding  elders. 

4.  They  have  also,  in  connection  with  the  presiding  elders, 

power,  in  the  intervals  of  the  conferences,  to  change  the  itiner- 

10 


146  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

ant  preachers  where  they  conceive  it  necessary,  and  also  receive 
and  suspend  preachers  as  necessity  may  require,  until  the  ensu- 
ing conference. 

5.  They  have  to  attend  the  conferences,  and  oversee  the  spirit- 
ual concerns  of  the  societies. 

6.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rites  of  ordi- 
nation. 

7.  When  a  Bishop  ceases  or  neglects  to  attend  the  several  con- 
ferences committed  to  his  charge,  can  he  be  suffered  to  retain  his 
office?  No,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  some  other  unavoid- 
able circumstance. 

8.  If  at  any  time,  it  should  so  happen,  that  by  reason  of 
death,  suspension  or  other  cause,  our  society  should  be  with- 
out a  bishop;  how  is  this  want  to  be  relieved?  The  elder, 
who  shall  have  been  elected  to  preside  at  the  conference,  in 
the  absence  of  the  bishop,  shall  perform  the  duties  of  a  bishop 
during  the  sitting  of  the  conference;  he  shall  also  attend  the 
other  conference,  and  take  his  seat  with  the  president  there 
elected,  to  act  in  conjunction  with  him  at  the  conference  then 
sitting;  and  the  president  there  elected  shall  also  in  turn  and 
in  like  manner  attend  to  the  other  conference:  so  that  each 
conference  may  know  and  be  acquainted  with  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  others,  and  that  love  and  communion  be  maintained 
&c.  until  the  next  general  conference  when  and  where,  one  or 
more  Bishops  shall  be  elected. 

9.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present  at  the  close  of 
every  conference. 

SECTION   FOURTH. 

OF  THE  PRESIDING  ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

Ost.     How  are  the  presiding  elders  elected? 

Ans.  The  bishops  shall  propose  to  the  conference  some  of  the 
elders,  who  have  finished  their  time  of  probation;  and  with 
the  consent  of  the  conference,  elect  them  for  one  year. 

Qst.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  presiding  elder. 

Ans.  I.  To  travel  through  the  district  appointed  him  by  the 
bishops,  and  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.     He  has  to  take  charge  of  the  traveling  and  local  preachers 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1833,  147 

in  his  district  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  agreeably 
to  the  gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  great  meetings,  and  if 
possible  attend  them;  he  shall  administer  the  Lords  supper,  and 
hold  quarterly  meeting  conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters 
and  leaders;  he  shall  further  inquire  into,  and  examine  whether 
the  traveling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty,  particularly 
whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable,  preach  every  Sun- 
day: and  where  there  are  more  of  them,  to  change  them  at  times, 
where  the  most  benefit  is  likely  to  result,  and  to  exhort  them, 
that  they  maintain  discipline  and  order  and  love  and  seriousness 
in  the  societies. 

4.  He  can  also  change  the  traveling  preacher  in  his  district, 
he  can  further  receive  and  suspend  preachers  till  the  conference. 

5.  And  should  it  so  happen  that  a  district  should  be  without 
a  presiding  elder,  information  thereof  shall  immediately  be  given 
to  the  Bishop,  who  will  appoint  an  elder  in  the  district,  to  act  as 
presiding  elder  till  conference,  and  in  the  absence  of  the  presid- 
ing elder,  at  any  quarterly  meeting,  or  conference,  an  elder 
present  shall  perform  the  duty  of  the  presiding  elder. 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

OF  THE  ELDERS,  THEIR   ELECTION,  ORDINATION  AND  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  is  an  elder  constituted  f 

Ans.  I.  After  a  probation  of  three  years,  a  preacher  ma}'  be 
presented  to  the  yearly  conference,  for  consideration,  and  if  on 
examination  by  the  conference,  he  should  be  chosen  to  be  an 
elder,  he  may,  by  the  imposition  of  hands,  be  ordained  by  a 
Bishop  and  two  elders. 

2.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  elder? — To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can  and  to  baptize;  and  assist  the  presiding  elder  to  administer 
the  Lord's  supper;  but  when  the  presiding  elder  cannot  attend, 
then  one  or  two  elders  shall  perform  this  duty;  he  shall  also 
perform  all  parts  of  divine  worship;  endeavour  to  establish  and 
hold  class  meetings,  and  assist  in  electing  the  leaders. 

3.  To  make  a  collection,  freely  contributed,  quarterly,  for  the 
traveling  preachers  and  for  the  poor;  to  take  specification 
thereof,  signed  by  the  leader,  at  each  place,  and  when  there 
is  no  leader  present,  to  have  it  signed  by  some  other  mem- 


148  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

ber,  in  order  to  account  with  the  presiding  elder,  so  that  all 
things  be  done  in  an  orderly  manner. 

4.  Where  a  local  elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  want 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  traveling  preacher  comes 
to,  he  shall  make  a  collection  and  in  like  manner  take  a  cata- 
logue thereof,  and  bring  or  send  it  to  the  presiding  elder  or  to 
the  conference,  for  the  support  of  needy  preachers  who  preach 
amongst  poor  people. 

5.  ijhould  a  traveling  preacher  or  elder  desire  to  leave  the 
district  assigned  him,  he  must  first  acquaint  the  presiding  elder 
of  his  intention  by  writing;  and  should  an}'  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstances,  he  shall  be  accountable  therefor  to  the  next  con- 
ference, and  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  salary  for  the  time  he 
may  have  traveled  during  the  year. 

6.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,  and  yet  required  to  preach,  it  is  rea- 
sonable and  just  that  the  elders  should  provide  for  their  support 
in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  be  employed,  and  by  making 
a  collection  for  their  benefit  amongst  the  societies  in  their  district, 
though  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  allotted  to  traveling 
preachers. 

SECTION  SIXTH. 

OF  THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  is  a  preacher  to  be  received? 
Ans.  I.     By  the  yearly  conference. 

2.  In  the  interval  of  the  conference,  by  the  bishop,  or  the 
presiding  elder  of  the  district,  or  an  elder,  who  supplies  the 
place  of  a  presiding  elder  at  a  great  meeting,  until  the  next  sit- 
ting of  the  conference.  No  one  will  be  admitted  otherwise,  than 
on  trial;  and  one  who  is  taken  on  trial,  may  either  be  admitted 
or  rejected,  without  doing  him  any  wrong,  otherwise  it  would  be 
no  trial. 

3.  No  preacherof  any  other  society  can  be  taken  up  as  a  preacher 
in  our  society,  without  being  able  to  produce  a  recommendation 
of  his  standing  and  behaviour  from  his  own  society,  or  of 
some  trust-worthy  persons,  who  are  known  as  such  to  the  con- 
ference or  to  the  presiding  elder.     In  such  case  the  conference 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1833.  149 

may  take  him  on  trial  for  one  year,  or  in  the  intermediate  time 
of  the  conference,  the  bishop  or  presiding  elder  may  give  him 
licence  to  preach  until  the  next  annual  conference  in  his  dis- 
trict. 

4.  Every  person  proposed  as  a  preacher  shall  be  examined 
by  the  conference  and  the  following  questions  put  to  him: 

Have  you  known  God  in  Christ  Jesus  as  a  sin  pardoning  God, 
and  have  you  obtained  forgiveness  of  your  sins  ? 

Have  you  now  peace  with  God,  and  is  the  love  of  God  shed 
abroad  in  your  soul  by  the  holy  spirit? 

-Do  you  follow  after  holiness  ? 

Do  you  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God,  and  that 
therein  only  is  contained  the  true  way  to  our  soul's  salvation? 

What  foundation  have  you  for  such  belief? 

What  is  your  motive  that  you  desire  permission  to  preach  the 
gospel?  What  is  your  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  jus- 
tification, sanctification,  and  redemption? 

Does  your  own  salvation,  and  the  salvation  of  j'our  fellow 
mortals  lie  nearer  to  your  heart  than  all  other  things  in  the 
world  ? 

Can  you  subject  yourself  to  the  counsel  of  your  brethren? 

Will  3'OU  be  obedient  and  ready  to  speak  or  hold  your  peace  as 
the  brethren  may  think  it  expedient. 

Are  you  willing  as  much  as  in  your  power  to  assist  in  uphold- 
ing the  itinerant  plan  and  support  the  same  as  much  as  possible. 

Qst.  2.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  preacher. 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get  hearers, 
and  establish  class  meetings;  to  converse  with  the  members  on 
the  situation  or  condition  of  their,  souls,  and  seek  to  administer 
relief,  strengthen  and  direct  those  that  are  afflicted  and  labour 
under  temptations,  to  animate  the  indolent,  and  endeavor  as 
much  as  possible  to  edify  and  instruct  all  in  faith,  in  grace,  and 
in  the  knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ;  never  omit  to  visit  the  sick, 
but  on  all  occasions  to  strive  to  enforce  and  confirm  the  doctrines 
he  delivers  by  a  well  ordered  and  exemplary  life. 

Qsi.  3.     What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher. 

Atis.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  away  your  time  with  unneces- 
sary things,  at  any  place.  Be  always  serious.  Let  your  motto 
be.  Holiness  to  the  Lord. — Avoid  all  lightness  and  jesting.  Con- 
verse sparing!}',  and  conduct  yourself  prudently  with  women; 
demean  yourself  in  all  respects  as  a  true  Cl^ristian. 


150  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

2.  Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  believe  evil 
of  no  one  without  good  evidence;  and  always  put  the  most  favour- 
able construction  on  such  matters,  as  the  nature  of  the  subject, 
consistent  with  truth,  will  admit. 

Speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatsoever  may  be  your  thoughts,  keep 
them  within  your  own  breast,  till  you  can  tell  the  person  con- 
cerned, what  you  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 

3.  Let  your  business  be  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible; 
to  this  employment  give  yourself  up  wholly.  Visit  those  who 
need  it,  and  act  in  all  things  not  according  to  j'our  own  will,  but 
as  a  son  in  the  gospel.  As  such  it  becomes  j'our  duty  to  employ 
your  time  in  the  manner  here  prescribed:  in  preaching,  and 
visiting  from  house  to  house;  in  instruction  and  prayer,  and  in 
meditating  on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until 
our  Lord  cometh. 

SECTION  SEVENTH. 

OF  THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS,  AND  HOW  THEY 
ARE  TO  BE   DISPOSED  OF. 

Qst.  I.  What  shall  be  done,  when  a  bishop,  presiding  elder, 
or  preacher  is  reported  of  being  guilty  of  some  crime  forbidden 
in  the  word  of  God. 

Ans.  When  a  bishop  is  thus  accused,  it  shall  be  the  dut}-  of  a 
presiding  elder  and  an  elder,  after  being  duly  notified  thereof, 
to  inquire  into  and  examine  whether  they  are  found  in  truth; 
but,  as  the  Apostle  says,  thej^  shall  not  receive  an  accusation 
without  two  or  three  witnesses.  If  it  then  appears  that  he  is 
justly  accu.sed,  the\'  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing, 
and  send  a  cop}'  thereof  to  the  l)ishop  accused,  and  appoint  a 
time  and  place  where  the  accusers  and  accused  shall  be  {^resent 
to  each  other,  when  the  cause  shall  be  tried  by  two  presiding  elders 
and  three  elders. — If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace 
till  the  yearly  conference,  where  the  presiding  elder  and  elders 
shall  again  examine  and  try  the  same;  and  if  found  guilty  again, 
he  .shall  be  suspended  from  office. 

Qst.  2.     When  a  presiding  elder  is  thus  accused. 

Ans.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  next  or  nearest  elder  and  a 
preacher  to  inquire  into  and  examine  them,  and  if  the  accused 
appear  to  be  guilty,  they  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in 


DISCIPLINE  OF    1833,  151 

writing-  and  send  him,  the  accused,  a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a 
time  and  place  where  the  accusers  with  the  accused  shall  meet 
and  be  present  to  each  other.  And  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop, 
another  presiding  elder  and  two  elders  shall  be  called  who  shall 
examine  the  charges,  and  if  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his 
peace  till  the  conference,  where  he  shall  be  accountable. 

Qst.  3.  When  an  elder  or  preacher  is  charged  with  immoral 
conduct,  what  shall  be  done  ? 

Ans.  The  preacher  thereabout,  to  whom  it  shall  be  known, 
shall  take  with  him  another  preacher  or  exhorter  or  a  leader  and 
examine  into  the  charge;  should  he  appear  guilty,  then  notice 
thereof  shall  be  given  him,  and  a  time  appointed,  where  they, 
the  accusers  and  the  accused,  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each 
other.  And,  in  the  absence  of  the  bishop  or  presiding  elder, 
three  elders  or  preachers  shall  try  and  determine  his  case,  and  if 
he  be  convicted,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where 
he  shall  be  accountable. 

SECTION   EIGHTH. 

OF  THE  MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Qst.     How  shall  members  be  taken  into  our  society  ? 

Aris.  When  at  any  meeting  a  person  makes  known  his  desire 
to  become  a  member  of  our  society,  then  the  preacher  present 
shall  put  to  him  the  following  question; 

Have  you  experienced  the  pardon  of  your  sins  and  are  you 
now  determined  by  the  grace  of  God  to  save  your  soul  ? 

If  the  person  answers  the  question  in  the  afl&rniative,  and  no 
objection  made  by  any  member,  on  account  of  his,  or  her,  moral 
conduct,  then  the  preacher  will  give  his  right  hand  to  such,  as 
members  of  our  society,  and  with  consent  of  the  person,  the 
preacher  will  record  his  or  her  name  on  the  class  book,  but  so  long 
as  any  member  can  not  answer  the  above  question  in  the  affirma- 
tive, such  will  have  no  vote  in  the  society. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  acknowledge  and  confess 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  holy  word  of 
God;  that  he  will  henceforth  strive  with  all  his  heart  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  work  out  his  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling,  to  the  end  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  flee 
from  the  wrath  to  come. 


152  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

Every  member  should  endeavour  to  lead  a  good  life;  be  diligent 
in  prayer,  particularl}-  in  private;  and,  for  liis  own  edification, 
to  be  present  and  attend,  when  practicable,  at  all  meetings, 
both  public  worship  and  pra3-er  meetings. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pra}'  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  walk  as  in  the  presence  of  God; 
also  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communication  with  God  in 
all  his  employments,  and  never  speak  evil  of  his  fellow  beings, 
but  practise  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  do  good  to  the  poor,  and 
endeavor  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  in  deed. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  lioh',  as  required  in 
the  word  of  God.  Neither  bu}'  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 
exercises  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God, 
and  with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honor  and  glory  of 
God. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  contribute  something 
quarterly  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  his 
circumstances  will  admit  of  it,  willinglj^  and  freely. 

It  is  the  dut}^  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet,  peaceable  and 
godly  life  in  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Christian 
to  live  in  peace — particularly  to  the  higher  or  ruling  powers, 
every  one  shall  be  subject,  as  the  word  of  God  requires. 

Amongst  the  members  of  the  society  the  preachers  shall 
establish  one  or  more  class-meetings,  and  the  members,  when 
practicable,  shall  assemble  at  the  place  appointed,  to  hold 
prayer  meetings,  in  order  to  edify  themselves  in  the  presence 
of  God,  and  promote  the  love  of  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  class  the  leader  should  be  elected  in  presence 
of  the  preacher,  and  it  is  his  duty  to  appoint  prayer  and  class 
meetings,  to  commence  and  conclude  the  same;  the  freedom  of 
our  prayer  and  class  meetings  shall  extend  to  any  sincere  and 
well  disposed  person  or  persons,  who  may  desire  to  attend  them, 
although  such  persons  be  not  members  of  our  society. 

When  members  trespass  against  each  other,  as  brethren  or 
sisters,  correct  the  faults  first  between  thee  and  him  alone  :  If  he 
hear  thee,  thou  hast  gained  thy  brother.  But  if  he  will  not  hear 
thee,  then  take  with  thee  one  or  two  more,  that  in  the  mouth  of 
two  or  three  witnesses  every  word  may  l)e  established.  And 
if  he  shall  neglect  to  hear  them,  tell  it  unto  the  church;  but 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1833.  153 

if  he  neglect  to  hear  the  church;  let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a 
Heathen  man  and  a  Publican. 

On  any  dispute  between  two  or  more  of  the  society,  concern- 
ing the  payment  of  debts  or  other  cause,  which  cannot  be 
settled  by  the  parties  concerned,  the  preacher  who  has  the 
oversight  of  the  society,  or  the  preacher  residing  thereabouts, 
shall  inquire  into  the  circumstances  of  the  case;  and  shall 
recommend  to  the  contending  parties  a  reference,  consisting 
of  one  arbiter  chosen  by  the  plaintiff,  and  another  chosen 
by  the  defendant;  which  two  arbiters  so  chosen,  shall  choose  the 
third ;  the  three  arbiters  are  then  to  decide  the  dispute. 

But  if  one  of  the  parties  be  dissatisfied  with  the  judgment 
given,  such  party  may  refer  to  the  next  quarterly  or  great  meet- 
ing, and  apply  to  the  presiding  elder  for  a  seco7id  arbitration,  and 
if  the  preachers  find  sufficient  cause,  they  shall  grant  a  second 
arbitration ;  in  which  case  each  party  shall  choose  two  arbiters, 
and  the  four  arbiters  shall  choose  a  fifth,  the  judgment  of  the 
majority  of  whom  shall  be  final;  and  any  person  refusing  to 
abide  by  such  judgment,  shall  be  excluded  from  the  society. 
And  if  any  member  of  the  society  shall  refuse  in  cases  of  debt 
or  other  disputes  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration,  when  recom- 
mended to  him  by  a  preacher  or  leader,  who  has  the  charge  of 
thesociet}-;  or  shall  enter  into  a  law-suit  with  another  member, 
before  these  measures  are  taken,  he  shall  be  expelled,  except  the 
case  be  of  such  a  nature  as  to  require  and  justify  a  process  at  law, 
as  executors  or  administrators,  or  when  a  member  is  in  danger 
of  suffering  an  unexpected  loss  of  property,  which  will  allow 
him  immediate  legal  process. 

If  any  member  of  this  society  shall  publicly  transgress,  such 
member  shall  likewise  be  publicly  reprimanded,  and  in  case 
such  member  shall  not  humble,  the  same  shall  be  publicly 
excluded  from  the  congregation. 

SECTION   NINTH. 

IN  RESPECT  TO  SLAVERY. 

Resolved,  that  all  slavery  in  every  sense  of  the  word  be  totally 
prohibited  and  in  no  way  tolerated  in  our  community. 

Should  some  be  found  in  our  society,  or  others  desire  to  be 
admitted  as  members,  who  hold  slaves,  they  can  neither  continue 


154  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

to  be  members,  or  be  admitted  as  such,  without  they  do  person- 
ally manumit  or  set  free  such  slaves  wherever  the  law  of  the 
state  shall  permit  it,  or  submit  the  case  to  the  quarterly  confer- 
ence, to  be  by  them  specified  what  length  of  time  such  slave 
shall  serve  his  master  or  other  person,  until  the  amount  paid  for 
him,  or  for  raising  him,  be  compensated  to  his  master.  But  in  no 
case  shall  a  member  of  our  society  be  permitted  to  sell  a  slave. 

SECTION  TENTH. 

Qst.  I.  How  and  in  what  manner  shall  the  bishops  and 
preachers  be  provided  for  and  how  shall  the  necessary  means  be 
collected  ? 

Ans.  A  collection  shall  annually  be  lifted  for  the  bishops, 
at  every  preaching  place  throughout  our  whole  society,  the 
preachers  shall  pay  over  this  collection  to  their  respective  pre- 
siding elders  at  the  annual  conference,  and  the  presiding  elders 
shall  give  an  account  thereof  to  their  respective  annual  confer- 
ences; out  of  this  collection  the  bishops  shall  receive  their  salary; 
provided,  that  one  who  has  a  family  does  not  receive  more  than 
|i6o  and  his  traveling  expenses,  and  if  without  a  family,  $80  and 
his  traveling  expenses. 

2d.  The  preachers  in  towns  or  cities,  who  stand  under  the 
direction  of  the  conference  with  the  itinerant  preachers,  receive 
their  salary  from  the  respective  societies  whom  they  serve;  but 
it  is  their  duty  to  give  an  account  to  the  annual  conference,  and 
limit  their  salarj'  to  the  usual  salary  and  necessary  expenses, 
and  if  their  should  be  a  surplus,  to  pay  the  same  over  to  the 
annual  conference,  to  be  applied  for  the  benefit  of  the  traveling 
preachers. 

3d.  For  the  support  of  the  traveling  preachers  the  presiding 
elder  and  preachers  shall  appoint  in  each  class  a  Stewart,  to 
make  quarterly  collections  in  money  or  produce,  which  produce 
to  be  valued  what  it  may  be  worth  between  man  and  man,  and  an 
account  kept  thereof,  and  proportionably  distributed  among  the 
traveling  preachers.  All  stevVards  will  submit  their  accounts 
to  the  presiding  elder  at  the  quarterly  meeting,  and  the  presiding 
elder  will  submit  his  account  to  the  annual  conference,  in  order 
to  show  what  each  traveling  preacher  has  received,  that  order 
and  equality  be  observed.  The  annual  salary  of  a  traveling 
preacher  or  traveling  presiding  elder  is  also  limited  like  the 


DISCIPLINE   OP   1833.  155 

salary  of  the  bishops  to  $160,  if  with  a  family,  or  ^o,  if  without 
family,  and  traveling  expenses. 

4.  Yet  when  a  traveling  preacher  has  a  family  of  children,  the 
yearly  conference  of  which  he  is  a  member,  will  in  that  case  grant 
him  such  an  allowance  in  addition  to  that  above  stated,  as  in  their 
judgment  will  accord  with  the  wants  of  said  preacher's  family. 

5.  Should  the  collection  of  any  one  d  strict  be  insufficient, 
then  it  shall  be  left  to  a  committee  appointed  by  the  conference, 
who  will  as  they  may  find  it  advisable,  make  up  such  deficiency, 
out  of  other  collections  made. 

6.  Resolved,  that  the  presiding  elders  shall  receive  pay  only 
in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  actually  have  traveled. 

APPENDIX. 

OF  THE  NECESSITY  OF  UNION  AMONG  OURSELVES. 

Let  us  be  deeply  sensible  ( from  what  we  have  known )  of  the 
evil  of  a  division  in  principle,  spirit,  or  practice,  and  the  dreadful 
consequences  to  ourselves  and  others.  If  we  are  united,  what  can 
stand  before  us  ?  If  we  divide,  we  shall  destroy  ourselves,  the 
work  of  God,  and  the  souls  of  our  people. 

Qst.     What  can  be  done  inordertoacloserunionwitheachother? 

Ans.  I.  Let  us  be  deeply  convinced  of  the  absolute  necessity 
of  it. 

2.  Pray  earnestly  for,  and  speak  truly  and  freely  to  each  other. 

3.  When  we  meet,  let  us  never  part  without  prayer. 

4.  Take  great  care  not  to  despise  each  other's  gifts. 

5.  Never  speak  lightly  of  each  other. 

6.  Let  us  defend  each  other's  character  in  every  thing,  so  far 
as  is  consistent  with  truth. 

7.  Labour,  in  honour,  each  to  prefer  the  other,  before  himself. 

8.  We  recommend  a  serious  examination  of  the  causes,  evils 
and  aires  0/  heart  aiid  church  divisions. 

OF  VISITING  FROM  HOUSE  TO  HOUSE  AND  ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL  RELIGION. 

Qst.     How  can  we  further  assist  those  under  our  care  ? 
Ans.  I.     By  instructing  them  at  their  own  houses;  which  is 
necessary  in  order  to  promote  confidence  and  communion  with 


156  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

God  among  us;  further  to  wean  us  from  the  love  of  the  world, 
and  inure  us  to  a  life  of  heavenly  mindedness;  also  to  encourage 
us  to  strive  after  and  practice  brotherl}^  love,  that  no  evil  think- 
ing or  judging  of  one  another  be  found  among  us;  and  lastly 
that  we  may  learn  to  do  as  we  would  wish  to  be  done  by. 

2.  Every  preacher  should  make  it  his  duty  to  instruct  the 
people  on  every  occasion,  both  public  and  private,  and  exhort 
them  to  be  diligent  in  all  good  works  and  doctrine.  Until  this  be 
done,  and  that  in  sincerity,  we  shall  iipon  the  whole,  be  of  little 
use,  and  our  good  shall  be  evil  spoken  of,  therefore  wherever  we 
ma}^  be,  we  should  guard  against  useless  and  idle  conversation. 

Undoubtedly  this  private  application  of  visiting  from  house  to 
house,  and  exhorting  the  people,  is  found  or  implied  in  these 
solemn  words  of  the  apostle: 

"  I  charge  thee  before  God  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  iL'ho  shall 
judge  the  quick  and  the  dead  at  his  appearing,  preach  the  Word; 
be  instayit  in  season,  and  out  of  season;  Reprove,  rebuke,  exhort, 
with  all  long  sujfering.'" 

OF  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN. 

Qst.     What  shall  be  done  to  benefit  the  rising  generation? 

Ans.  Let  him,  who  is  in  anj-  wise  zealous  for  God  and  the 
souls  of  men,  begin  the  work  without  dela}-.  Where  children  are 
found,  meet  them  as  often  as  possible;  speak  freeh' with  them, 
and  instruct  them  diligently;  exhort  them  to  be  good,  and  pray 
with  them  earnestly,  yet  simply  and  plainly,  that  the}'-  may  learn 
to  know  their  Creator  &  Redeemer  in  the  days  of  their  j^outh. 

THE  FORM  AND  MANNER  OF  ORDAINING  PREACHERS. 

1.  On  the  day  appointed,  there  shall  be  a  suitable  sermon  or 
exhortation  delivered. 

2.  After  their  names  have  been  read  aloud,  the  bishop  or  elder 
shall  say  unto  the  people  present: 

3.  Beloved  Brethren  ifi  Christ !  Is  there  an}''  among  you,  who 
know  any  impediment  or  crime  in  any  of  those  persons  to  be 
ordained  elders,  for  which  he  ought  not  to  be  admitted  to  that 
oflfice,  let  him  come  forth  in  the  name  of  God  and  show  what  the 
crime  or  impediment  may  be. 

4.  If  any  crime  or  impediment  be  alleged,  the  bishop  shall 
cease  from  ordaining  that  person,  until  such  time  as  the  party 
accused  shall  1)e  found  clear  of  said  crime. 


discipline;  of  1833.  157 

5.  If  no  accusation  be  alleged,  the  Bishop,  or  elder,  .shall  read 
the  following  articles,  to  any  and  all  who  may  be  chosen  for 
ordination. 

"For  an  elder  must  be  blameless,  as  the  Stewart  of  God,  not 
self  willed,  not  soon  angry,  not  given  to  wine,  no  striker,  not 
given  to  filthy  lucre. 

"But  a  lover  of  hospitality,  a  lover  of  good  men,  sober,  just, 
holy,  temperate: 

"Holding  fast  the  faithful  word  as  he  had  been  taught,  that  he 
may  be  able  by  sound  doctrine,  both  to  exhort  and  to  convince 
the  gainsay ers." 

Qst.  Do  you  trust  that  you  are  inwardly  moved  by  the  holy 
Ghost,  to  take  upon  you  the  office  of  the  ministry,  to  serve  God  in 
the  church  of  Christ,  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy  name? 

Ans.     I  trust  with  the  help  of  God. 

Qst.  Do  you  believe  the  Holy  Scriptvires,  old  and  new  testa- 
ment? 

A71S.     I  do  believe  them: 

Qst.     Will  you  apply  all  your  diligence  to  frame  and  fashion 
your  own  life  according  to  the  doctrine  of  Christ;  and  to  make 
yourself,  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  a  wholesome  example  of  th 
flock  of  Christ? 

Ans.     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Qst.  Will  you  obey  them  to  whom  the  charge  and  govern- 
ment over  you  is  committed,  following  with  a  glad  mind  and 
■will  their  godly  admonitions? 

Ans.     I  will  endeavor,  through  the  grace  of  God,  so  to  do. 
Then  prayer  is  made. 

After  prayer  the  bishop  and  elder  shall  lay  their  hands  upon 
the  heads  of  every  one  of  them,  and  say: 

' '  Take  authority  to  execute  the  office  of  an  elder  in  the  church 
of  God.  In  the  name  of  the  Father,  the  Son  and  the  Holy 
Ghost."     Amen. 

Hereupon  the  bishop  or  elder  shall  deliver  to  everj'  one  of 
them  the  Holy  Bible,  saying: 

' '  Take  authority  to  read  and  preach  the  word  of  God  in  the 
church  of  Christ " 

Then  the  Bishop  or  elder  shall  read  from  the  12th  chapter  of 
St.  Luke,  35-38: 

Let  your  loins  be  girded  about  and  your  lights  burning,  and 
ye  yourselves  like  unto  men  that  wait  for  the  Lord,  when  he 


158  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

will  return  from  the  wedding,  that  when  he  cometh  and  knock- 
eth,  they  may  open  unto  him  immediately.  Blessed  are  those 
servants  whom  the  Lord  when  he  cometh  shall  find  watch- 
ing. Verily  I  say  unto  you,  that  he  shall  gird  himself,  and 
make  them  sit  down  to  meat,  and  will  come  forth  to  serve 
them. 

And  if  he  shall  come  in  the  second  watch,  or  come  in  the  third 
watch,  and  find  them  so,  blessed  are  those  servants. 

Then  the  bishop,  or  elder  shall  pray.  After  which  the  follow- 
ing benediction  is  pronounced. 

The  Peace  of  God  keep  your  hearts  and  minds  i?i  the  knowledge 
of  Jesus  Christ  onr  Lord. — Amen. 

THE  FORM  TO  SOLEMNIZE  MARRIAGE. 

ADDRESS. 

We  are  gathered  together  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  in  the 
presence  of  these  witnesses,  to  join  together  N.  and  M.  as  man 
and  wife.  If  any  person  present  know  any  just  cause  or  impedi- 
ment why  these  two  persons  should  not  be  joined  in  marriage 
they  will  now  speak  or  for  ever  hereafter  hold  their  peace. 

If  no  impediment  be  alleged,  then  shall  the  minister  say  unto 
the  man. 

N.  N.  Wilt  thou  have  this  woman  M.  ]\I.  to  thy  wedded  wife, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance.  Wilt  thou  love,  honor 
and  comfort  her,  in  sickness  and  in  health,  in  prosperity  and  ad- 
versit}^  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  so  long 
as  ye  both  shall  live  ;  If  so,  then  answer  yes. 

Then  shall  the  Minister  sa}^  unto  the  woman. 

M.  M.  Wilt  thou  have  this  man  N.  N.  to  thj^  wedded  husband, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance,  wilt  thou  love,  honor 
and  obey  him,  in  sickness  and  in  health,  in  prosperity  and  in  ad- 
versity, forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  him  so  long  as 
ye  both  shall  live;  If  so,  then  answer  yes. 

Then  the  Minister  shall  require  them  to  join  their  right  hands 
together  and  say. 

Those  whom  God  hath  joined  together  let  no  man  put  asunder. 
In  as  much  as  N.  and  M.  have  consented  together  in  marriage 
and  have  witnessed  the  same  before  God  and  these  witnesses, 
I  pronounce  them  man  and  wife,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  Son 
and  Holy  Ghost. — Amen. 


DISCIPWNE   OF   1833.  159 

OATH  OF  PURGATION. 

We,  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ,  Do  believe,  that  the  prac- 
tise of  swearing,  either  by  the  Bible,  or  in  the  name  of  Almighty 
God,  is,  in  our  opinion,  contrary  to  the  word  of  our  Lord  Christ 
Jesus,  who  says,  "  swear  not  at  all,"  and  that  the  mode  of  testi- 
fying to  the  Truth,  when  thereto  required  so  to  do  in  a  legal  form, 
by  way  of  affirmation,  is  on  us  solemnly,  conscienciously  and 
fully  binding  before  God  and  man  to  tell  the  truth,  the  whole 
truth  &  nothing  but  the  truth. 

HOW  TO  RECEIVE  AN  EXHORTER. 

Any  Brother  desiring  license  to  exhort,  will  first  make  it  known 
to  the  class  leader,  and  the  class  leader  will  procure  a  recommen- 
dation from  the  class  of  which  the  applicant  is  a  member  at  the 
time,  upon  which  the  presiding  elder  with  the  advice  of  the 
quarterly  conference  will  license  the  brother. 

RESPECTING  BOOK  PRINTING. 

Resolved,  that  none  of  our  members,  either  preachers  or  lay- 
men, shall  be  permitted  to  become  the  author  of  a  Doctrinal  Book, 
or  Pamphlet,  in  a  printed  form,  without  the  approbation  of  the 
annual  conference  or  a  select  committee  by  them  chosen. 

THE  VENDING  AND  DISTILLATION  OF  ARDENT  SPIRITS 

Should  any  Exhorter,  Preacher,  or  Elder,  from  and  after  the 
next  annual  conferences  in  1834,  be  engaged  in  the  distillation  or 
vending  of  ardent  spirits,  he  shall  for  the  first  and  second  offence  be 
accountable  to  the  quarterly  or  yearly  conference,  of  which  he  is  a 
member;  said  conferences  will  in  meekness  admonish  the  offending 
brother  to  desist  from  the  distillation  or  vending  of  ardent  spirits, 
as  the  case  may  be;  should  these  friendly  admonitions  fail,  and  the 
party  continue  to  act  in  the  same  and  it  be  proven  tothesatisfaction 
of  the  yearly  conference,  if  a  preacher  or  elder,  and  if  an  exhorter 
proven  before  a  quarterly  conference,  such  preacher,  elder  or  ex- 
horter, will  for  the  time  not  be  considered  a  member  of  this 
church. 

FORMING  AND  MEETING  CLASSES. 

Whereas  it  is  made  the  duty  of  elders  and  preachers  to  form 
and  hold  class  meetings,  which  should  always  be  done  in  great 
moderation  and  meekness,  no  member  will  be  allowed  to  use  any 


l6o  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

means  or  measure  to  hinder  or  prevent  an  elder  or  preacher  in  the 
discharge  of  this  their  duty,  a  member  acting  to  the  contrary 
must  be  accountable  to  the  next  quarterly  conference. 

RESPECTING  FREE-MASONRY. 

Resolved,  that  Free-Masonry  in  every  sense  of  the  word,  be 
totally  discountenanced,  and  in  no  wise  tolerated  in  our  society, 
should  any  of  our  members  continue  to  attend  their  lodges,  or 
join  as  a  member  of  Free-Masonry  in  any  of  their  processions, 
or  otherwise  join  the  fraternity,  he  will  by  so  doing  be  no  longer 
a  member  of  this  church. 

RESPECTING  PRESENTS. 

Every  traveling  preacher  in  our  society  shall  yearly  account 
to  the  conference  for  all  presents  he  may  have  received  on  his 
circuit,  to  the  amount  of  one  dollar  or  more,  for  the  use  of  him- 
self or  family.  And  if  the  conference  be  convinced  that  any  one 
circuit  has  given  presents  instead  of  collections,  or  that  the 
preacher  endeavoured  to  get  such  in  the  place  of  collections,  in 
such  case  presents  shall  be  considered  as  collections  by  the  con- 
ference. But  if  on  examination  it  should  not  so  appear,  then  those 
preachers  receiving  presents  shall  hold  them  as  their  own,  and 
in  addition  receive  all  the  discipline  allows  them. 

THE  END. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1833.  161 


INDEX. 

page. 

Origin  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ 139 

The  Confession  of  Faith 142 

Of  the  General  and  Yearly  Conferences 143 

Of  the  election  of  the  Bishops  and  their  Duty 145 

Of  the  Presiding  Elders,  their  election  and  Duty 146 

Of  the  Elders,  their  election.  Ordination  and  Duty 147 

Of  the  method  of  receiving  Preachers  and  their  Duty 148 

Of  the  immoral  conduct  of  Preachers,  and  how  they  are  to  be  disposed  of.  150 

Of  the  members  in  general 151 

In  respect  to  Slavery 153 

Of  the  support  of  traveling  Preachers 154 

Of  the  necessity  of  Union  among  ourselves 155 

Of  Visiting  from  House  to  House 155 

Of  the  instruction  of  Children ^ 15G 

The  form  and  manner  of  Ordaining  Preachers 156 

The  form  to  solemnize  Marrriage 158 

Oath  of  Purgation 159 

How  to  receive  an  Exhorter 159 

Respecting  Book  Printing 159 

The  vending  and  distillation  of  ardent  Spirits 159 

Forming  and  Meeting  Classes 15!) 

Respecting  Free-Masonry 160 

Respecting  Presents 160 


1 62 


UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 


GENERAL  CONFERENCE  HELD  JUNE,  I4TH.  1833,  AT  GEO.  & 
JONATHAN  DRESBACH'S,  PICKAWAY  COUNTY  OHIO. 

MEMBERS  PRESENT. 
Henry  Kumler,  Bishop. 


William  Brown, 
Ezekiel  Boring, 
Jacob  Snider, 

John  Dorcas, 

G.  H.  Spayth, 
Adam  Hetzel, 
S.  C.  Briggs. 

Jacob  Bauhis, 
Samuel  Hiestand, 
John  Coonts, 
William  Hastings. 

Henry  Kumler,  Jr. 
John  Federhof, 
S.  Hofner, 
J.  Sweaningen. 

John  Denham, 
John  McNamer, 
James  Griffith. 


Pennsylvania  Conference. 
Jacob  Erb, 
James  Niman, 
Frederick  Gilbert. 

Virginia  Conference 

W.  R.  Rhinehart. 

Muskingum  Conference 

Christian  Knegey, 
John  Echard, 

Sciota  Conference. 

George  Benedum, 
Daniel  Davis, 
John  Russel, 

Miami  Co?ifere?tce. 

Fred.  Bonebrach, 
A.  S.  Decker, 
Daniel  Kiser, 

Indiana   Confcre?ice. 

Josiah  Davis, 
Aaron  Former, 


ORIGIN, 


CONSTITUTION, 


DOCTRINE 


DISCIPLINE, 


United  Brethren  in  Christ 


CIRCLEVILLE,  OHIO: 
PRINTED  AT  THE  CONFERENCE  OFFICE. 

1837.  163 


ORIGIN  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  century  last  past,  it  pleased  the  Lord  our  God,  to 
awaken  persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  who  should  raise 
up  the  Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach  the 
gospel  of  Christ  crucified,  in  its  purity. 

At  this  time  the  Lord  in  mercy  remembered  the  Germans  of 
America,  who,  living  scattered  in  this  extensive  country,  had 
but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear  the  gospel  of  a  crucified 
Saviour  preached  to  them  in  their  native  language. 

Amongst  others  he  raised  up  an  Otterbein,  a  Boehm,  and  a 
Geetmg,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and  strength,  to  labor 
in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  call,  among  the  Germans  in 
America,  sinners  to  repentance. — These  men  obe3'ed  the  call  of 
their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labors  were  blessed;  they  established 
in  many  places,  excellent  societies  and  led  many  precious  souls 
to  Jesus  Christ.  Their  sphere  of  action  spread  itself  more  and 
more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary  to  look  about  for  more 
fellow  laborers,  to  engage  in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord;  for  the 
harvest  was  great,  and  the  laborers  but  few.  The  Lord  called 
others,  who  were  willing  to  devote  their  strength  to  his  service; 
such,  then,  were  accepted  by  one  or  the  other  of  the  preachers, 
as  fellow  laborers. 

The  number  of  members  in  the  society,  in  different  parts  of 
the  country,  continued  to  increase  from  time  to  time;  and  the 
gracious  work  of  reformation,  spread  through  the  states  of  Penn- 
sylvania, Maryland  and  Virginia.  Several  great  meetings  were 
appointed,  and  held  annually;  when,  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present;  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and 
the  necessity  of  their  utmost  endeavors  to  save  souls.  At  one  of 
these  meetings,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  with  all  the 
preachers,  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how,  and  in  what 
manner  they  might  be  most  useful. 

The  first  Conference  was  held  in  the  City  of  Baltimore,  Md. ; 
in  the  year  of  our  Lord,  1789.  The  following  preachers  were 
present : — 

165 


l66  united  brethren  disciplines. 

Wm.  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  Ernst, 

Geo.  a.  Geeting,  Henry  Weidner. 
Chr.  Newcomer, 

The  second  Conference  was  held  in  York  count5',Pa.,  in  Para- 
dise township;  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year 
of  our  Lord  1791: — The  following  preachers  were  present: — 

Wm.  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  Pfremmer, 

Geo.  a.  Geeting,  John  Neidig, 

Chr.  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander. 
Adam  Lehman, 

After  a  mature  deliberation,  how  they  might  labor  most  use- 
fully in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord;  they  again  appointed  such 
as  fellow  laborers,  of  whom  they  had  cause  to  believe  had  experi- 
enced true  religion  in  their  own  souls. 

In  the  mean  time,  the  number  of  members  continued  to  increase, 
and  the  preachers  were  obliged  to  appoint  an  annual  Conference, 
in  order  to  unite  themselves  more  closely,  and  labor  more  success- 
fully in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord:  for  some  were  Presbyterians,  or 
church  Reformed;  some  were  Lvitherians,  others  Mennonites,  and 
some  few  Methodists.  They  accordingly  appointed  a  Conference, 
to  be  held  the  25th  of  September,  1800,  in  Frederick  county, 
Maryland;  at  the  house  of  brother  Frederick  Kemp.  —  The 
following  preachers  were  present: — 

Wm.  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Boehm,  Henry  Krum, 

Geo.  A.  Geeting,  John  Hrrshey, 

Chr.  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henry  Boehm, 

Abr'm  Dracksel,  Diet'k  Auraup. 
John  Pfremmer, 

There  they  united  themselves  into  a  society,  which  bears  the 
name  of  "UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST;"  and  elected 
William  Otterbein  and  Martin  Boehm,  as  superintendants  or 
bishops,  and  agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty,  as 
to  the  mode  and  manner  of  baptism,  and  to  perform  it  according 
to  their  own  convictions. 

From  this  time,  the  society  increasing  still  more  and  more. 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1837.  167 

preachers  were  appointed  to  travel  regularly,  inasmuch  as 
the  number  of  preaching  places  could  not  otherwise  be  attended  to; 
and  the  work  spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky: 
It  then  became  necessary  to  appoint  a  Conference  in  the  state  of 
Ohio,  because  it  was  conceived  too  laborious  for  the  preachers, 
who  labored  in  those  states,  to  travel,  annually,  such  a  great 
distance,  to  the  Conference. 

In  the  mean  time,  brothers  Boehni  and  Geeting  died,  and 
brother  Otterbein  desired,  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected, 
because  infirmity  and  old  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer,  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society  and  preserve 
Discipline  and  order.  It  was  resolved  at  a  former  Conference, 
that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  died,  another  should  be  elected 
in  his  place ; — accordingly,  brother  Christia7i  Newcomer  was  elected 
bishop,  to  take  charge  and  superintend  the  concerns  of  the  society. 

The  want  of  a  Discipline  in  the  society,  had  long  been  deeply  felt; 
and  partial  attempts  having  been  made  at  different  times ;  it  was 
resolved  at  the  Conference  held  in  the  State  of  Ohio,  that  a  General 
Conference  be  held,  in  order  to  accomplish  the  same,  in  a  manner, 
not  derogatory  to  the  word  of  God.  The  members  of  this  Confer- 
ence were  to  be  elected  from  among  the  preachers,  in  the  different 
parts  of  the  country;  by  a  vote  of  the  members  throughout  the 
society  in  general.     The  following  brethren  were  duly  elected: 

Chr.  Newcomer,  Daniel  Treyer, 

■  Ab'rm.  Hiestand,  Geo.  Benedum, 

Andrew  ZellER,  Ab'rm.  Tracksel, 

Christian  Berger,  Henry  G.  Spayth, 

Abraham  Meyer,  I.  Nighsw anger, 

John  Schneider,  Christian  Krum, 

Henry  Kumler,  &  Jacob  Bowles. 

The  Conference  convened  on  the  6th  of  June  1835,  near  Mount 
Pleasant,  Westmoreland  county,  Pennsylvania.  After  a  mature 
deliberation,  they  presented  to  their  brethren,  a  Discipline,  con- 
taining the  doctrine  and  rules  of  the  church;  desiring  that  they, 
together  with  the  word  of  God,  should  be  strictly  observed. 

God  is  a  God  ol  order,  but  where  there  is  no  order  nor  church 
Discipline,  the  spirit  of  love  and  charity  will  soon  be  lost. 

Therefore,  brethren,  we  beseech  you  to  follow  the  example  of 
our  Lord.  As  it  is  written,  be  kindly  affectionate  one  to  another 
with  brotherly  love,  in  honor  preferring  one  another.      Let  the 


l68  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

mind  be  in  you  which  was  in  Christ,  who  took  upon  himself  the 
form  of  a  servant,  humbled  himself  and  became  obedient  unto 
death,  even  the  death  of  the  cross,  that  by  his  grace  we  may  submit 
ourselves  one  to  another  in  the  fear  of  God. — He  who  will  not 
submit,  is  in  want  of  humble  love;  Jesus  said,  whosoever  will  be 
chief  among  you,  let  him  be  3'our  servant.  B3'  this  shall  all  men 
know  that  ye  are  m\'  disciples,  if  ye  have  love  one  to  another,  and 
whoso  loveth  not,  abideth  in  death.  Let  us  walk  in  newness  of  life, 
that  the  prayer  of  our  Lord  may  be  answered  in  us;  that  we  may 
be  one  in  him,  and  that  he  may  give  us  the  glory,  which  he  gave 
to  his  disciples,  that  we  may  be  one,  even  as  he  and  the  Father  are 
one. — Therefore,  beloved  brethren,  let  us  strive  to  be  like-minded, 
having  the  same  love,  being  of  one  accord,  of  one  mind ;  let  no  one 
speak  or  think  evil  of  his  brother,  but  pra}'  God  that  he  ma}-  grant 
us  his  spirit,  and  an  earnest  desire  to  lead  a  truly  devoted  life,  to 
the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy  name.     Amen. 

CONSTITUTION  OF  THE  CHURCH. 

WE  as  members  of  the  Church  of  the  UNITED  BRETHREN 
IN  CHRIST,  in  order  to  retain  a  perfect  union, — accomplish  the 
ends  oi  justice  and  eqjiity , — insure  ecclesiastical,  as  well  as  domestic 
tranqiiility ;  provide  for  the  common  interest  of  the  Church, — 
promote  the  general  ivelfare  of  society,  and  to  secure  the  blessings 
of  the  gospel  to  ourselves,  our  posterity,  and  our  fellow  men  in 
general ;  do  ordain  and  establish  the  following  CONSTITUTION, 
for  the  Church  aforesaid. 

ARTICLE  I. 

Sec.  I. — All  ecclesiastical  power  herein  granted,  to  make  or 
reppeal  any  rule  of  Discipline,  shall  be  vested  in  a  General  Con- 
ference, which  shall  consist  of  ministers  chosen  and  elected  by 
the  members,  in  every  Conference  district,  throughout  the 
society.  Nevertheless,  nothing  shall  be  done,  so  as  to  change 
the  article  of  faith,  or  in  anywise  destroy  the  itinerant  plan. 

Sec.  2. —  No  minister  .shall  be  considered  eligible  for  election, 
until  he  has  stood  in  the  capacity  as  Elder,  for  the  term  of  three 
years;  having  maintained  a  good  moral  character,  during  that 
time.  Any  Elder,  receiving  a  transfer,  from  one  Conference 
to  another,  shall  not  be  considered  eligible  for  election,  undei  a 
tenn  of  two  years;  and  not  then,  without  a  sufficient  reconmien- 
dation  from  the  Conference,  of  which  he  had  been  a  member. 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1837.  169 

Sec.  3. — The  number  of  delegates  from  each  Conference  Dis- 
trict, shall  not  exceed  one,  for  every  five  hundred  members.  But 
should  it  so  happen,  that  a  Conference  would  be  formed  in  a 
territory,  not  having  five  hundred  members  within  its  District; 
that  Conference,  shall  nevertheless,  have  one  delegate  to  repre- 
sent its  members  in  General  Conference. 

Sec.  4. — If  any  vacancies  should  occur,  through  sickness  or 
otherwise,  after  the  election  of  delegates;  it  shall  be  the  duty  of 
the  Presiding  Elder  or  Elders,  immediately,  to  notify  the  next 
highest  on  the  list  of  votes,  that  he  is  now  a  member,  to  repre- 
sent that  District,  in  the  ensuing  General  Conference. 

Sec.  5. — The  Bishops  shall  upon  all  occasions,  be  considered 
members  of  the  General  Conference,  to  preside  as  the  organs  of 
that  body,  as  in  annual  Conferences.  Bishops  shall  be  elected 
every  four  j^ears,  during  the  sitting  of  the  General  Conference, 
by  the  members  of  that  bod}^  from  among  the  Elders  throughout 
the  Church;  who  may  have  stood  in  that  capacity  for  a  term,  not 
less  than  six  years. 

Sec.  6. — The  General  Conference  shall  be  held  once,  every 
four  years.  At  the  adjournment  of  which,  it  shall  be  the  duty 
of  the  same,  to  publish  or  cause  to  be  published,  (excepting  such 
parts  as  may  not  be  considered  expedient,)  all  their  proceedings, 
for  the  benefit  of  society  in  general. 

ARTICLE  II. 

Sec.  I. — The  members  in  each  Conference  District,  shall  solely 
have  the  privilege  of  choosing  and  electing  the  delegates  for 
General  Conference;  which  shall  invariably  de  done,  at  least, 
three  months  previous  to  the  sitting  of  the  same. 

Sec.  2. — In  the  election  of  delegates  for  General  Conference;  it 
shall  be  the  dut}' of  each  annual  Conference,  to  appoint  a  committee 
of  three,  in  their  several  Conference  Districts,  to  receive  and  count 
the  votes,  and  immediately  apprize  those  who  may  have  been 
elected. 

Sec.  3. — It  shall  also  be  the  duty  of  the  annual  Conference,  to 
furnish  the  Presiding  Elders,  with  a  list  of  all  the  Elders,  eligi- 
ble for  election:  The  Presiding  Elders  shall  furnish  each  circuit 
preacher  in  charge;  whose  duty  it  shall  be,  to  furnish  each  class- 
leader  or  steward  throughout  the  circuit,  with  a  copy  of  the  same. 

Sec.  4. — It  shall  be  the  duty  of  each  classleader  or  steward,  to 
appoint  a  meeting  of  the  members  of  each  class ;  for  the  purpose  of 


IJO  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

electing,  by  ballot  or  otherwise,  one  or  more  delegates  to  repre- 
sent them  in  General  Conference. 

Sec.  5. — It  shall  also  be  the  duty  of  each  classleader  or  steward, 
to  sign,  enclose  and  seal,  each  bill  of  election — hand  it  over  to 
the  preacher  in  charge;  he  again,  to  the  Presiding  Elder;  whose 
duty  it  shall  be,  to  transmit  the  same,  to  the  committee  appointed 
by  the  annual  Conference. 

Sec.  6. — The  committee  appointed  to  receive  and  count  the 
votes,  shall  make  a  list  of  all  the  persons  voted  for,  and  the  num- 
ber of  votes  for  each.  Should  anj'  two  or  more  of  the  candidates, 
have  an  equal  number  of  votes,  the  individuals  thus  appointed, 
shall  determine  by  lot,  who,  or  which  of  them  are  elected.  They 
shall  also  forward  the  names  of  those  elected,  to  the  Conference 
Printing  Establishment,  for  publication. 

ARTICLE  III. 

Sec.  I. — Each  annual  Conference  shall  come  fully  under  the 
jurisdiction  of  the  General  Conference;  except,  under  such  regu- 
lations as  the  General  Conference  may  deem  expedient,  in  relation 
to  local  matters,  so  as  not  to  prove  prejudicial  to  the  interest  of 
the  whole  societ}'. 

Sec.  2. — The  business  of  each  annual  Conference,  shall  strictly 
be  done  according  to  Discipline. 

Sec.  3. — Any  annual  Conference.actingin  violation  of  the  doings 
of  General  Conference,  shall  b}' impeachment,  be  tried  bj^  the  same. 

Sec.  4.-  No  annual  Conference,  shall  have  the  exclusive  right, 
to  form  or  admit  any  new  Conference  within  the  bounds  of 
societ5^  wdthout  the  consent  of  the  General  Conference. 

Sec.  5. — All  officers,  whether  Bishops,  Presiding  Elders,  &c.; 
shall,  on  impeachment,  be  dealt  with  according  to  Discipline,  as 
other  members,  expelled  or  retained,  as  the  case  may  require. 

ARTICLE  IV.     . 

Sec.  I. — If  at  any  time,  after  the  passing  of  this  Constitution, 
it  should  be  contemplated  either  to  alter  or  amend  the  same:  It 
shall  be  the  privilege  of  any  member  in  societ)^  to  publish  or 
cause  to  be  published,  such  contemplation,  at  least  three  months, 
before  the  election  of  delegates  to  the  General  Conference. 

Sec.  2. — No  General  Conference,  shall  have  the  power  to  alter 
or  amend,  the  foregoing  Constitution,  except  it  be,  by  a  vote  of 
two  thirds  of  that  body. 


DISCIPUNE   OF   1837.  171 

RESOLUTIONS. 

Inasmuch,  as  it  is  the  indefeasible  right  of  every  man,  to  think 
and  act  for  himself,  in  matters  of  faith  and  morality.  This  right 
not  only  being  granted  by  the  charter  of  his  creation,  but  also,  by 
the  Discipline  adopted  for  the  better  government  of  the  Church 
of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ;  be  it  resolved  there- fore: — 

ist.  That  no  rule  be  adopted  by  General  Conference,  so  as  to 
infringe  upon  the  rights  of  any,  as  it  relates  to  the  mode  and 
manner  of  baptism,  the  sacrament  of  the  Lord's  supper,  or  the 
washing  of  feet,  &c. 

2d.  Resolved,  No  rule  or  ordinance  shall  be  passed  in  Gen- 
eral Conference,  so  as  to  deprive  the  local  preachers  of  the 
eligibility  of  election,  as  delegates  to  the  same.  Nor  yet,  to 
deprive  them  of  their  legal  vote  in  the  annual  Conferences,  to 
which  they  severally  belong. 

3d.  Resolved,  that  the  foregoing  resolutions,  shall  neither  be 
altered  or  appealed,  vpithout  the  unanimous  consent  of  the  whole 
Conference. 

Done  in  General  Conference,  by  the  unanimous  consent  of  that 
body,  this  nth  day  of  May,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord,  one  thou- 
sand eight  hundred  and  thirty-seven.  In  witness  whereof,  we 
have  hereunto  set  our  names. 

HENRY  KUMLER,  It,.,.. 

\  Bish'ps 
SAMUEI.  HIESTAND,       ) 

JACOB   ERB, 

JACOB  WINTER, 

JACOB   RHINEHART, 

JACOB  J,    GLOSSBRENNER, 

ADAM    HETZLER, 

DAVID  WEIMER, 

JOHN   DORCAS, 

GEORGE   HISKEY, 

JOHN  COONS, 

WILLIAM   HANBY, 

JNO   PETHERHOFF, 

WILLIAM  STUBBS, 

FRANCIS  WHITCOM, 

JOHN  LOPP, 

FREDERICK   KENOYER, 

WILLIAM   DAVIS. 


172  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

CIRCULAR. 

To  the  members  of  the  Church  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christy 
throughout  these  United  States. 

Dear  brethren,  by  whose  authorit}^  we  as  a  General  Confer- 
ence, have  been  authorized  to  legislate,  on  matters  pertaining  to 
the  government  of  our  Church;  and  having  long  since  been 
convinced,  of  the  great  necessity  of  a  constitution,  for  the  better 
regulation  thereof;  have  by  unanimous  consent,  framed  and 
established  the  foregoing.  We  are  well  aware  that  we  have  tran- 
scended the  bounds  given  us  by  our  Discipline,  which  will  be 
found  in  the  Constitution;  Article  fourth,  Section  second:  Declar- 
ing that  the  said  Constitution,  can  neither  be  altered  or  amended, 
without  a  majority  of  two-thirds  of  a  General  Conference.  If 
there  had  been  a  general  notice  given  to  the  Church,  previous  to 
the  election  of  delegates,  that  there  would  be  a  memorial  offered 
to  General  Conference,  praying  them  to  adopt  a  constitution,  and 
to  ratify  it,  agreeable  to  Article  fourth;  Section  second:  then  the 
General  Conference  would  have  had  full  power,  to  have  done  so. 
The  object  of  this  circular  is,  (feeling  that  the  government  of 
our  Church  is  not  as  firm  as  it  ought  to  be,)  to  give  notice  to  our 
Church  throughout  the  union,  that  we  intend  to  present  a  mem- 
orial to  the  next  General  Conference,  praying  them  to  ratify  the 
constitution  now  adopted,  according  to  Article  fourth;  Section 
second:  In  testimon}'  of  our  ardent  desire  for  the  welfare  of  our 
Church,  and  the  general  spread  of  the  gospel. 

Written  by  order  of  General  Conference,  Germantown,  Ohio; 
May  12th  1837. 

Signed  in  behalf  of  the  same,  b}^ 

William  R.  Rhinehart,  Sefry. 

SECTION  FIRST. 

THE  CONFESSION  OF  FAITH. 

In  the  name  of  God  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men, 
that  we  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  Son  and  Holy 
Ghost;  that  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  Holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence  or  being 
with  both.  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth,  and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and 
furthermore,  sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1837.  173 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  he  is  very  God  and  man,  that 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost  in  the 
Virgin  Mary,  and  was  born  of  her:  that  he  is  the  Saviour  and 
Mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in 
him,  accept  the  grace  proffered  in  Jesus.  That  this  Jesus 
suffered  and  died  on  the  cross  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again 
on  the  third  day,  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right 
hand  of  God,  to  intercede  for  us,  and  that  he  shall  come  again 
at  the  last  day  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  Father  and  the  Son,  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  Church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  body,  and  life  everlasting. 

We  believe,  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  Testament,  is 
the  word  of  God;  that  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our 
salvation;  that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge 
and  receive  it  with  the  influence  of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  their 
only  rule  and  guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ, 
true  repentance,  forgiveness  of  sins  and  following  after  Christ, 
no  one  can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  holy  scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam  and  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  believe  that  the  ordinances,  namely:  baptism  and  the  re- 
memberance  of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
are  to  be  in  use  and  practiced  by  all  Christian  societies:  and  that 
it  is  incumbent  on  all  the  children  of  God,  particularly,  to 
practice  them;  but  the  manner  in  which,  ought  always  be 
left  to  the  judgment  and  understanding  of  every  individual. 
Also,  the  example  of  washing  feet,  is  left  to  the  judgment  of 
every  one  to  practice  or  not;  but  it  is  not  becoming,  for  any  of  our 
preachers  to  traduce  any  of  his  brethren,  whose  judgment  and 
understanding,  in  this  respect,  are  different  from  his  own,  either 
in  public  or  in  private;  whosoever  shall  make  himself  guilty 
in  this  respect,  shall  be  considered  a  traducer  of  his  brethren,  and 
shall  be  answerable  for  the  same,  to  the  annual  Conference. 


174  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

GENERAL  AND  YEARLY  CONFERENCES. 

Questio7i.  After  what  manner,  are  the  transactions  of  the  Con- 
ferences to  be  considered  ? 

Answer.  It  is  desired,  that  all  things  be  considered  on  these 
occasions,  as  in  the  immediate  presence  of  God:  That  every  per- 
son rise  and  speak  freely  whatever  is  in  his  heart. 

Qst.  How,  and  in  what  manner  are  the  members  of  General 
Conference  elected  ? — i^^Scc  Constihdion. — 

Qst.     How  often  are  the  General  Conferences  to  be  held. 

Ans.     Every  four  years. 

Qst.  Has  the  General  Conference  any  other  power,  which 
the  annual  Conference  has  not  ? 

Ans.  The  General  Conference  has  the  power  alone  to  elect  one 
or  more  Bishops  from  among  the  Elders,  for  a  period  of  four 
years;  furthermore,  to  adopt  such  rules  as  may  be  necessary  for 
the  better  interest  of  the  society  in  general.  Yet,  nothing  shall 
be  done  by  the  said  Conference,  which  would  in  any  wise  afifect 
or  change  the  article  of  faith;  neither  the  spirit,  intent,  or  mean- 
ing of  the  rules  or  Discipline  as  they  now  stand.  The  General 
Conference  has  to  determine  the  districts  and  bounds  of  the  yearly 
Conferences. 

Qst.     Who  are  the  members  of  the  yearly  Conference  ? 

Ans.  All  the  Elders  &  licentiate  preachers,  who  are  for  the 
time  being  in  the  Di.strict  where  the  Conference  is  held;  but  when 
such  licentiate  preachers  are  proposed  for  ordination,  the  Elders 
only  shall  determine  the  same  by  vote. 

Qst.  In  what  manner  are  the  transactions  of  a  Conference  to 
be  conducted  ? 

Ans.  A  portion  of  scripture  will  be  read;  also  singing  and 
prayer  each  day,  at  the  opening  of  Conference; — singing  and 
prayer  at  the  close. 

2.  The  Conference  shall  also  elect  two  Secretaries,  one  German 
and  one  English,  wherever  it  may  be  necessary. 

3.  The  preachers  will  be  examined,  respecting  their  deport- 
ment towards  their  fellow  beings;  whether  their  conduct  in  life 
be  blameless  and  whether  they  employ  as  much  time  as  possible 
to  promote  the  kingdom  of  God. 

4.  Have  any  of  the  preachers  died  during  the  last  year? 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1837.  175 

5.  Who  are  the  candidates  for  the  Ministry? 

6.  Are  any  to  be  ordained  to  the  oflSce  of  Eldership  ? 

7.  Who  is  willing  to  travel  the  ensuing  year,  without  reserve  ? 

8.  Who  are  the  Presiding  Elders  ? 

9.  What  has  been  collected  for  contingent  expenses,  and  the 
salary  of  travelling  preachers? 

10.  Has  reckoning  been  made  with  the  travelling  preachers  ? 

1 1 .  Have  they  received  their  dues  ? 

12.  Where  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year? 

13.  When  and  where  shall  our  next  Conference  he  held? 

14.  Is  there  any  thing  more  to  do  ? 

15.  Is  all  that  has  been  done  entered  upon  record? 

SECTION  THIRD. 
ELECTION  OF  BISHOPS  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

QsL     How  ar  e  the  Bishops  to  be  elected  ? 

A?is.  The  General  Conference  shall  elect  them  by  a  majority 
of  votes,  nevertheless,  the  Conference  may,  at  their  option,  retain 
the  former  Bishop  or  Bishops,  yet  other  four  years.  The  newly 
elected,  however,  as  well  as  those  retained,  must  be  capable  of 
attending  the  Conferences  appointed  them,  otherwise  they  cannot 
be  elected. 

QsL     What  are  the  duties  of  the  Bishops  ? 

Ans.  I.     To  preside  in  our  Conferences. 

2.  They  have  in  conjunction  with  the  Presiding  Elders,  of  the 
past  and  present  year,  to  fix  the  appointments  of  the  travelling 
preachers  for  the  several  circuits,  provided,  they  shall  not  allow 
any  itinerant  preachers  to  remain  in  the  same  station,  more  than 
three  years  successively;  unless  particular  circumstances  require 
it,  and  only  then,  with  the  consent  of  the  Conference. 

3.  The  Bishops,  in  conjunction  with  two  Elders  appointed  by 
Conference;  shall  point  out  the  Districts  which  are  to  be  travelled 
by  the  Presiding  Elders. 

4.  They  have  to  attend  the  Conferences,  and  oversee  the  spirit- 
ual concerns  of  the  Church. 

5.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rites  of  ordi- 
nation. 

6.  When  a  Bishop  ceases  or  neglects  to  attend  the  several  Con- 
ferences committed  to  his  charge,  he  cannot  be  suffered  to  retain 


176  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

his  ofl&ce;  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  some  other  unavoidable 
circumstance. 

7.  If  our  Church  should  at  any  time,  be  destitute  of  a  Bishop, 
in  consequence  of  death,  suspension  or  otherwise;  a  chairman 
shall  be  elected  from  among  the  Elders,  at  each  annual  Confer- 
ence,— each  chairman  shall  attend  the  next  succeeding  Confer- 
ence, in  conjunction  with  the  chairman  there  elected;  that  a  reg- 
ular correspondence  be  maintained,  until  the  ensuing  General 
Conference,  where  one  or  more  Bishops  shall  be  elected. 

8.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present,  during  the  sitting 
of  every  annual  Conference. 

SECTION   FOURTH. 
PRESIDING  ELDERS,  ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  are  the  Presiding  elders  elected. 

Ans.  The  Bishops  shall  propose  to  the  Conference  some  of 
the  Elders,  who  have  stood  their  time  of  probation,  and  with 
the  consent  of  the  Conference,  elect  them  for  one  year. 

Qst.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  Presiding  Elder. 

Atis.  I.  To  travel  through  the  District  appointed  him,  and 
preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.  He  has  to  take  charge  of  the  travelling  and  local  preachers 
in  his  District,  and  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  as  becometh 
the  gospel  of  Christ. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  camp-meetings,  and  if 
possible  attend  them;  he  shall  administer  the  Lord's  Supper,  and 
hold  quarterly-meeting  Conferences  with  the  preachers,  exhorters, 
leaders  and  stewards;  he  shall  further  enquire  into,  and  examine 
whether  the  travelling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty,  particu- 
larly, whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable,  preach  every 
Sunday:  and  where  there  are  more  than  one,  to  change  them  at 
times,  where  the  most  benefit  is  likely  to  result ;  and  to  exhort  them, 
that  they  maintain  discipline  and  order,  love  and  seriousness  in 
the  societies. 

4.  He  can  also,  in  conjunction  with  two  Elders,  preachers,  ex- 
horters or  leaders,  (one  from  each  circuit,)  change  the  preachers 
on  his  District.  Should  any  circuit  be  found  without  a  travelling 
preacher,  it  shall  be  his  duty  to  employ  a  preacher  to  travel  on 
that  circuit,  until  the  next  annual  Conference. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1837.  177 

5.  And  should  it  so  happen,  that  a  District  should  be  without 
a  Presiding  Elder,  information  thereof  shall  immediately  be  given 
to  a  Bishop,  who  shall  appoint  an  Elder  in  the  district,  to  act  as 
Presiding  Elder  until  the  ensuing  annual  Conference. 

SECTION  FIFTH. 

DUTY  OF  CIRCUIT  PREACHERS  AND  HOW  RECEIVED. 

Qst.    What  are  the  duties  of  a  circuit  preacher  ? 
Ans.    To  submit  peaceably  to  the  station  appointed  him  by 
Conference. 

2.  He  shall  attend  the  appointments  on  his  circuit  regularly, 
preach  to  the  people,  and  hold  society  meetings  with  the  mem- 
bers, wherever  it  is  acceptable  with  the  class. 

3.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  preacher  in  charge,  to  see  that 
there  are  suitable  persons  appointed  in  each  class,  as  steward, 
leader  or  leaders. 

4.  He  shall  read  three  sections  of  our  Discipline,  every  six 
months,  in  each  class;  namely, — the  Article  of  Faith,  the  Duty  of 
Members,  and  the  Diity  of  Leaders  a7id  Stewards. 

5.  He  shall  sit  as  president  on  the  trial  of  members,  and  keep 
a  correct  account  of  the  same. 

6.  He  shall  render  a  strict  account  of  the  condition  of  his 
circuit,  to  the  Presiding  Elder,  at  each  quarterly  Conference. 

7.  He  shall  give  charge  to  all  sub-agents  of  the  Religious 
Telescope,  to  keep  an  account  of  all  its  subscribers,  in  their  re- 
spective neighborhoods. 

8  He  shall  also  make  settlement  with  the  sub-agents  once  a 
year,  and  render  an  account  thereof  to  the  district  agent. 

9.  He  shall  furthermore  make  out  a  list  of  all  the  appoint- 
ments on  his  circuit,  and  present  them  to  the  Presiding  Elder,  at 
each  annual  Conference,  for  the  benefit  of  the  next  who  may 
travel  that  circuit. 

SECTION  SIXTH. 

ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION,  ORDINATION  AND  t»UTY. 

Qst.     How  is  an  Elder  constituted  ? 

Ans.     After  a  probation  of  three  years,  a  preacher  may  be 

presented  to  the  yearly  Conference,  for  consideration;  and  if  on 
12 


178  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

examination  by  the  Conference,  he  should  be  chosen  as  an  Elder, 
he  may,  by  the  imposition  of  hands,  be  ordained  by  a  Bishop 
and  two  Elders.  It  shall,  however,  be  the  privilege  of  an  Annual 
Conference,  to  grant  a  permit  to  licentiates,  to  perform  the  ordi- 
nance of  baptism,  and  administer  the  sacrament  where  circum- 
stances make  it  necessary. 

2.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  Elder? — To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can  and  to  baptize;  and  assist  the  Presiding  Elder  to  administer 
the  Lord's  supper;  but  when  the  Presiding  Elder  cannot  attend, 
then  one  or  two  Elders  shall  perform  this  dut3';  he  shall  also 
perform  all  parts  of  divine  worship;  endeavor  to  establish  and 
hold  class-meetings,  and  assist  in  the  election  of  leaders  and 
stewards. 

3.  To  make  a  collection,  freely  contributed,  quarterly,  for  the 
traveling  preachers  and  for  the  poor;  to  take  specification  thereof, 
signed  by  the  leader,  at  each  place,  and  when  there  is  no  leader 
present,  to  have  it  signed  by  some  other  member,  in  order  to 
account  with  the  Presiding  Elder,  so  that  all  things  be  done  in  a 
regular  manner. 

4.  Where  a  local  Elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  want 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  traveling  preacher  comes 
to,  he  shall  make  a  collection  and  in  like  manner  take  a  cata- 
logue thereof,  and  bring  or  send  it  to  the  Presiding  Elder  or  to 
the  Conference,  for  the  support  of  needy  preachers  who  preach 
among  poor  people. 

5.  Should  a  traveling  Preacher  or  Elder  desire  to  leave  the 
district  assigned  him,  he  must  first  acquaint  the  Presiding  Elder 
of  his  intention  bj^  writing;  and  should  any  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  unless  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstances,  he  .shall  be  accountable  to  the  next  annual  Con- 
ference, and  shall  not  be  entitled  to' any  salary  for  the  time  he 
may  have  traveled  during  the  year. 

6.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,  and  3'et  required  to  preach,  it  is  rea- 
sonable and  just  that  the  Elders  should  provide  for  their  support 
in  proportion  to  the  time  they  may  be  employed,  and  bj'  making 
a  collection  for  their  benefit  among  the  societies  in  their  District; 
though  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  allotted  to  the  travelling 
preachers. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1837.  179 

SECTION  SEVENTH. 

THE  METHOD  OF  RECEIVING  PREACHERS,  AND  THEIR  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  is  a  preacher  to  be  received  ? 

Ans.  Any  person  desiring  license  to  preach  among  iis,  must 
obtain  a  recommendation  from  the  class  to  which  he  belongs,  or 
one  or  more  trustworthy  persons,  and  present  it  to  a  Quarterly 
Conference,  where  he  may  be,  (if  in  their  judgment,  expedient,) 
licensed,  until  the  setting  of  the  next  Annual  Conference,  whose 
duty  it  shall  be  to  examine  said  applicant  agreeable  to  Discipline, 
and  act  accordingl3\  No  one,  however,  can  be  admitted  other- 
wise than  on  trial,  and  one  who  is  taken  on  trial,  may  either  be 
admitted  or  rejected  without  doing  him  any  harm,  otherwise  it 
would  be  no  trial 

2.  No  preacher  of  anj^  other  society  can  be  taken  up  as  a  preacher 
in  our  society,  without  being  able  to  produce  a  recommendation 
of  his  standing  and  behavior  from  his  own  society,  or  of 
some  trust-worthy  persons  who  are  known  as  such  to  the  Con- 
ference or  to  the  Presiding  Elder.  In  such  case,  the  quarterly 
or  annual  Conference  may  take  him  on  trial  for  one  year,  after 
which,  if  his  conduct  prove  to  be  in  accordance  with  the  Gospel 
of  Christ;  he  shall  be  considered  as  standing  in  the  same  capacity 
among  us,  as  he  did  in  the  society  from  which  he  came. 

3.  Every  person  proposed  as  a  preacher,  shall  be  examined  by 
the  conference  and  the  following  questions  put  to  him: — 

Have  3^ou  known  God  in  Christ  Jesus  as  a  sin  pardoning  God, 
and  have  you  obtained  forgiveness  of  your  sins  ? 

Have  you  now  peace  with  God,  and  is  the  love  of  God  shed 
abroad  in  your  heart  by  the  holy  spirit  ? 

Do  you  follow  after  holiness  ? 

Do  you  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God,  and  that 
therein  only  is  contained  the  true  way  to  our  soul's  salvation  ? 

What  foundation  have  you  for  such  belief? 

What  is  your  motive  that  you  desire  permission  to  preach  the 
gospel  ? 

What  is  your  knowledge  of  faith,  of  repentance,  of  justifica- 
tion, sanctification,  and  redemption? 

Does  your  own  salvation,  and  the  salvation  of  your  fellow 
mortals  lie  nearer  to  your  heart  than  all  other  things  in  the 
world? 


l8o  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPI.INES. 

Can  you  subject  yourself  to  the  counsel  of  your  brethren? 

Will  you  be  obedient  and  ready  to  speak  or  hold  your  peace  as 
the  brethren  may  think  it  expedient  ? 

Are  you  willing  as  much  as  is  in  your  power,  to  assist  in  up- 
holding the  itinerant  plan,  and  support  the  same  as  much  as 
possible? 

Ost.  2.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  preacher  ? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get 
hearers,  and  establish  class-meetings;  to  converse  with  the 
members  on  the  situation  or  condition  of  their  souls,  and  seek 
to  administer  relief,  strengthen  and  direct  those  that  are  afflicted 
and  labor  under  temptations,  to  animate  the  indolent,  and 
endeavor  as  much  as  possible  to  edify  and  instruct  all  in 
faith,  in  grace,  and  in  the  knowledge  of  'Jesus  Christ;  never 
omit  to  visit  the  sick,  but  on  all  occasions  to  strive  to  enforce 
and  confirm  the  doctrines  he  delivers  by  a  well-ordered  and  ex- 
emplary life. 

Qst.  3.     What  are  the  directions  given  to  a  preacher  ? 

Ans.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  away  your  time  with  un- 
necessary things,  at  any  place.  Be  always  serious.  Let 
your  motto  be,  Holijiess  to  the  Lord.  Avoid  all  lightness 
and  jesting.  Converse  sparingly,  and  conduct  yourself  pru- 
dently with  women;  demean  3^ourself  in  all  respects  as  a  true 
Christian. 

2.  Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  believe  evil 
of  no  one  without  good  evidence;  and  always  put  the  most  favor- 
able construction  on  such  matters,  as  the  nature  of  the  subject, 
consistent  with  truth,  will  admit. 

Speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatsoever  may  be  your  thoughts,  keep 
them  within  j'our  own  breast,  till  you  can  tell  the  person  con- 
cerned, what  you  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 

3.  Let  your  business  be,  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible; 
to  this  employment  give  yourself  up  wholly.  \'isit  those  who 
need  it,  and  act  in  all  things  not  according  to  your  own  will,  but 
as  a  son  in  the  gospel.  As  such  it  becomes  your  duty  to  employ 
your  time  in  the  manner  here  prescribed:  in  preaching  and 
visiting  from  house  to  house;  in  instruction  and  prayer,  and  in 
meditating  on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until  our 
Lord  Cometh. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1837.  181 

SECTION   EIGHTH. 

THE  IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS,  AND  HOW  THEY 
ARE  TO  BE   DISPOSED  OF. 

Qst.  I.  What  shall  be  done,  when  a  Bishop,  Presiding  Elder, 
or  preacher  is  reported  of  being  guilty  of  some  crime  forbidden 
in  the  word  of  God  ? 

Ans.  When  a  Bishop  is  thus  accused,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  a 
Presiding  Elder  and  an  elder,  after  being  duly  notified  thereof, 
to  inquire  into  and  examine  whether  they  are  founded  in  truth; 
but,  as  the  Apostle  says,  they  shall  not  receive  an  accusation 
without  two  or  three  witnesses.  If  it  then  appear  that  he  is 
justly  accused,  they  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing, 
and  send  a  copy  thereof  to  the  Bishop  accused;  and  appoint  a 
time  and  place  where  the  accusers  and  accused  shall  be  present 
to  each  other,  when  the  cause  shall  be  tried  by  two  Presiding  Elders 
and  three  Elders.  If  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace 
till  the  yearly  Conference,  where  the  Presiding  Elder  and  Elders 
shall  again  examine  and  try  the  same;  and  if  found  guilty  again, 
he  shall  be  suspended  or  expelled  as  the  case  may  require. 

Qst.  2.     When  a  Presiding  Elder  is  thus  accused. 

Ans.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  next  or  nearest  Elder  and  a 
preacher  to  inquire  into  and  examine  them,  and  if  the  accused 
appear  to  be  guilty,  they  shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in 
writing  and  send  him,  the  accused,  a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a 
time  and  place  where  the  accusers  with  the  accused  shall  meet 
and  be  present  to  each  other.  And  in  the  absence  of  the  Bishop, 
another  Presiding  Elder  and  two  Elders  shall  be  called,  who  shall 
examine  the  charges,  and  if  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his 
peace  till  the  Conference,  where  he  shall  be  accountable. 

Qst.  3.  When  an  Elder  or  preacher  is  charged  with  immoral 
conduct,  what  shall  be  done  ? 

Ans.  The  preacher  thereabout,  to  whom  it  shall  be  known, 
shall  take  with  him  another  preacher  or  exhorter,  or  leader,  and 
examine  into  the  charge;  should  he  appear  guiltj^  then  notice 
thereof  shall  be  given  him,  and  a  time  appointed,  where  they, 
the  accusers  and  the  accused,  shall  meet  and  be  present  to  each 
other.  Three  Elders  or  preachers  shall  try  and  determine  his  case, 
which  are  to  be  appointed  by  the  parties  concerned,  each  party 
appointing  one,  and  the  two  a  third;  and  if  he  be  convic^d,  he 


l82  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

shall  hold  his  peace  till  the  conference,  where  he  shall  be  ac- 
countable. 

But  should  sufl&cient  satisfaction  be  given  in  either  of  the  fore- 
going cases,  by  an  expression  of  repentance  or  otherwise,  they 
may  be  retained  if  considered  expedient. 

SECTION   NINTH. 

MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Qst.     How  shall  members  be  taken  into  our  society  ? 

Ans.  When  at  any  meeting  a  person  makes  known  his  desire 
to  become  a  member  of  our  society,  then  the  preacher  present 
shall  put  to  him  the  following  question: 

Have  you  experienced  the  pardon  of  your  sins,  and  are  you 
now  determined  by  the  grace  of  God  to  save  your  soul  ? 

If  the  person  answers  the  question  in  the  affirmative,  and  no 
objection  be  made  by  any  member,  on  account  of  his,  or  her  moral 
conduct,  then  the  preacher  will  give  his  right  hand  to  such,  as 
members  of  our  societj-,  and  with  consent  of  the  person,  the 
preacher  will  record  his  or  her  name  on  the  class  book,  but  so  long 
as  an}'  member  cannot  answer  the  above  question  in  the  affirma- 
tive, such  will  have  no  vote  in  the  societ}-. 

Every  member  of  this  societ}'  should  acknowledge  and  confess, 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  holy  Word  of 
God;  that  he  will  henceforth  strive  with  all  his  heart  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  work  out  his  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling,  to  the  end  that  he  may  be  enabled  \.o  flee 
fro7n  the  zvratJi  to  come. 

Every  member  should  endeavor  to  lead  a  good  life;  be  diligent 
in  praj-er,  particularly  in  private;  and,  for  his  own  edification, 
to  be  present  and  attend,  when  practicable,  at  all  meetings, 
both  public  worship  and  prayer  meetings. 

Heads  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pray  with  their  families 
morning  and  evening,  and  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  walk  as  in  the  presence  of  God; 
also  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communion  with  God  in 
all  his  employments,  and  never  speak  evil  of  his  fellow  beings, 
but  practise  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  do  good  to  the  poor,  and 
endeavor  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  in  deed. 

Every  member  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  holy,  as  required  in 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1837.  183 

the  word  of  God.  Neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 
exercise  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God, 
and  with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honor  and  glory  of 
God. 

Every  member  of  this  society  should  contribute  something 
quarterly  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant  preachers,  if  his 
circumstances  will  admit  of  it,  willingly  and  freely. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet,  peaceable  and 
godly  life  in  the  intercourse  with  all  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Chris- 
tian to  live  in  peace,  particularly  to  the  higher  or  ruling 
powers,  every  one  shall  be  subject,  as  the  word  of  God  requires. 

Among  members  of  the  society,  the  preachers  shall  establish 
one  or  more  class-meetings,  and  the  members  when  practicable, 
shall  assemble  at  the  place  appointed,  to  hold  prayer-meetings, 
in  order  to  edify  themselves  in  the  presence  of  God,  and  pro- 
mote the  love  of  good  works  in  Christ  Jesus. 

In  every  Class,  the  leader  should  be  elected  in  presence  of 
the  preacher,  whose  duty  it  is  to  appoint  prayer  and  class 
meetings,  to  commence  and  conclude  the  same;  the  freedom  of 
our  prayer  and  class-meetings  shall  extend  to  any  sincere  and 
well-disposed  person  or  persons,  who  may  desire  to  attend  them, 
although  such  persons  be  not  members  of  our  society. 

When  members  trespass  against  each  other,  as  brethren  or 
sisters,  correct  the  faults  ' '  first  between  thee  and  him  alone  :  If  he 
hear  thee,  thou  hast  gained  thy  brother.  But  if  he  will  not  hear 
thee,  then  take  with  thee  one  or  two  more,  that  in  the  mouth  of 
two  or  three  witnesses,  every  word  may  be  established.  And 
if  he  shall  neglect  to  hear  them,  tell  it  unto  the  church;  but 
if  he  neglect  to  hear  the  church,  let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a 
Heathen  man  and  a  Publican. 

On  any  dispute  between  two  or  more  of  the  society,  concern- 
ing the  payment  of  debts  or  other  cause,  which  cannot  be 
settled  by  the  parties  concerned,  the  preacher  who  has  the 
oversight  of  the  society,  or  the  preacher  residing  thereabouts, 
shall  inquire  into  the  circumstances  of  the  case;  and  shall 
recommend  to  the  contending  parties  a  reference,  consisting 
of  one  arbiter  chosen  by  the  plaintiff,  and  another  chosen 
by  the  defendant;  which  two  arbiters  so  chosen,  shall  choose  the 
third;  the  three  arbiters  are  then  to  decide  the  dispute. 

But  if  one  of  the  parties  be  dissatisfied  with  the  judgment 
given,  such  party  may  refer  to  the  next  quarterly  or  great  meet- 


l84  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

ing,  and  apply  to  the  presiding  Elder  for  a  second  arbitration,  and 
if  the  preachers  find  sufl&cient  cause,  they  shall  grant  a  second 
arbitration;  in  which  case  each  party  shall  choose  two  arbiters, 
and  the  four  arbiters  shall  choose  a  fifth,  the  judgment  of  the 
majority  of  whom  shall  be  final;  and  any  person  refusing  to 
abide  by  such  judgment,  shall  be  excluded  from  the  society. 
And  if  any  member  of  the  society  shall  refuse  in  cases  of  debt 
or  other  disputes,  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration,  when  recom- 
mended to  him  by  a  preacher  or  leader,  who  has  the  charge  of 
the  society;  or  shall  enter  into  a  law-suit  with  another  member, 
before  these  measures  are  taken,  he  shall  be  expelled,  except  the 
case  be  of  such  a  nature  as  to  require  and  justify  a  process  at  law, 
as  executors  or  administrators,  or  when  a  member  is  in  danger 
of  suffering  an  unexpected  loss  of  propertj-,  which  will  allow 
him  immediate  legal  process. 

If  any  member  of  this  society  shall  publicly  transgress,  such 
member  shall  likewise  be  publicly  reprimanded,  and  in  case 
such  member  shall  not  humble  himself,  the  same  shall  be 
publicly  excluded  from  the  church. 

SECTION  TENTH. 

SALARY  OF  PREACHERS. 

Qst.  I.  How  and  in  what  manner  shall  the  Bishops  and 
preachers  be  provided  for,  and  how  shall  the  necessar}'  means  be 
collected  ? 

Ans.  A  collection  shall  annualh'  be  lifted  for  the  Bishops, 
at  ever}'  preaching  place  throughout  our  whole  society,  the 
preachers  shall  pay  over  this  collection  to  their  respective  Pre- 
siding Elders  at  the  annual  Conference,  and  the  Presiding  Elders 
shall  give  an  account  thereof  to  their  respective  annual  Confer- 
ences; out  of  this  collection  the  Bishops  shall  receive  their  salary; 
provided,  that  one  who  has  a  famih-  does  not  receive  more  than 
|i6o  and  his  travelling  expenses;  and  if  without  a  family,  $80  and 
his  traveling  expeuvses. 

2nd.  The  preachers  in  towns  or  cities,  who  stand  .under  the 
direction  of  the  Conference  with  the  itinerant  preachers,  receive 
their  salary  from  the  respective  societies  whom  they  serve;  but 
it  is  their  duty  to  give  an  account  to  the  annual  Conference,  and 
limit  their  salary  to  the  usual  salarj'  and  necessary  expenses, 
and  if  there  should  be  a  surplus,  to  pay  the  same  over  to  the 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1837.  185 

annual  Conference,  to  be  applied  for  the  benefit  of  the  traveling 
preachers. 

3rd.  For  the  support  of  the  traveling  preachers,  the  Presiding 
Elder  and  preachers  shall  appoint  in  each  class  a  steward,  to 
make  quarterly  collections  in  money  or  produce,  which  produce 
to  be  valued  what  it  may  be  worth  between  man  and  man,  and  an 
account  kept  thereof,  and  proportionably  distributed  among  the 
traveling  preachers.  All  stewards  will  submit  their  accounts 
to  the  Presiding  Elder  at  the  quarterly  meeting,  and  the  Presiding 
Elder  will  submit  his  accounts  to  the  annual  Conference,  in  order 
to  show  what  each  traveling  preacher  has  received,  that  equal- 
ity be  observed.  The  annual  salary  of  a  traveling  preacher, 
or  traveling  Presiding  Elder  is  also  limited,  like  the  salary  of  the 
Bishops  to  $160,  if  with  a  family;  or  $80,  if  without  a  family,  and 
traveling  expenses. 

4.  Yet  when  a  traveling  preacher  has  a  family  of  children,  the 
yearly  Conference  of  which  he  is  a  member,  will  in  that  case  grant 
him  such  an  allowance  in  addition  to  that  above  stated,  as  in  their 
judgment  will  accord  with  the  wants  of  said  preacher's  family. 

5.  Should  the  collection  of  any  one  District  be  insuflScient, 
then  it  shall  be  left  to  a  committee  appointed  by  the  Conference, 
who  will  as  they  may  find  it  advisable,  make  up  such  deficiency, 
out  of  other  collections  made. 

6.  Resolved,  that  the  Bishops,  Presiding  Elders,  and  Circuit 
Preachers,  shall  receive  pay  only  in  proportion  to  the  time  they 
may  actually  have  traveled. 

Provided  however,  that  they  shall  not  be  docked  for  any  provi- 
dential interventions,  such  as  sickness,  &c.  &c. 

APPENDIX. 

OF  THE  NECESSITY  OF  UNION  AMONG  OURSELVES. 

Let  us  be  deeply  sensibly  ( from  what  we  have  known )  of  the 
evil  of  a  division  in  principle,  spirit,  or  practice,  and  the  dreadful 
consequences  to  ourselves  and  others.  If  we  are  united,  what  can 
stand  before  us  ?  If  we  divide,  we  shall  destroy  ourselves,  the 
work  of  God,  and  the  souls  of  our  people. 

Qst.     What  can  be  done  in  order  to  a  closer  union  with  each  other  ? 

Ans.  I.  lyCt  us  be  deeply  convinced  of  the  absolute  necessity 
of  it. 


l86  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

2.  Pray  earnestly  for,  and  speak  truly  and  freely  to  each  other. 

3.  When  we  meet,  let  us  never  part  without  prayer. 

4.  Take  great  care  not  to  despise  each  other's  gifts. 

5.  Never  speak  lightly  of  each  other. 

6.  Let  us  defend  each  other's  character  in  every  thing,  so  far 
as  is  consistent  with  truth. 

7.  Labor,  in  honor,  each  to  prefer  the  other,  before  himself. 

8.  We  recommend  a  serious  examination  of  the  causes,  evils 
and  cures  of  heart  and  cJmrch  divisiojis. 

VISITING  FROM  HOUSE  TO  HOUSE,  AND  ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL  RELIGION. 

Qst.     How  can  we  further  assist  those  under  our  care  ? 

Ans.  I.  By  instructing  them  at  their  own  houses;  which  is 
necessar}'  in  order  to  promote  confidence  and  communion  with 
God  among  us;  further  to  wean  us  from  the  love  of  the  world, 
and  inure  us  to  a  life  of  heavenly  mindedness;  also  to  encourage 
us  to  strive  after  and  practice  brotherly  love,  that  no  evil  think- 
tng  or  jicdging  of  one  another  be  found  among  us;  and  lastly, 
that  we  may  learn  to  do  as  we  would  wish  to  be  done  by. 

2.  Every  preacher  should  make  it  his  duty  to  instruct  the 
people  on  every  occasion;  both  public  and  private,  and  exhort 
them  to  be  diligent  in  all  good  works  and  doctrine.  Until  this  be 
done,  and  that  in  sincerity,  we  shall,  upon  the  whole,  be  of  little 
use,  and  our  good  shall  be  evil  spoken  of,  therefore  wherever  we 
may  be,  we  should  guard  against  useless  and  idle  conversation. 

Undoubtedly  this  private  application  of  visiting  from  hou.se  to 
house,  and  exhorting  the  people,  is  found  or  implied  in  these 
solemn  words  of  the  apostle: 

''  I  charge  thee  before  God  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  ivho  shall 
judge  the  quick  and  the  dead  at  his  appearing ,  preach  the  Word; 
be  instant  in  seaso?i,  and  out  of  season;  Reprove,  rebuke,  exhort, 
with  all  long  sufferi7ig. ' ' 

THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN. 

Qst.     What  shall  be  done  to  benefit  the  rising  generation  ? 

Ans.  Let  him,  who  is  in  any  wise  zealous  for  God,  and  the 
souls  of  men,  begin  the  work  without  delay.  Where  children  are 
found,  meet  them  as  often  as  possible;  speak  freel)'  with  them, 
and  instruct  them  diligently;  exhort  them  to  be  good,  and  pray 


DISCIPLINE   OP    1837.  187 

with  them  earnestly,  yet  simply  and  plainly,  that  they  may  learn 
to  know  their  Creator  and  Redeemer  in  the  days  of  their  youth. 

FORM  AND  MANNER  OF  ORDAINING  PREACHERS. 

1.  On  the  day  appointed,  there  shall  be  a  suitable  sermon  or 
exhortation  delivered. 

2.  After  their  names  have  been  read  aloud,  the  Bishop  or  Elder 
shall  say  unto  the  people  present: — 

3.  Beloved  Brethren  in  Christ !  Is  there  any  among  you,  who 
know  any  impediment  or  crime  in  any  of  those  persons  to  be 
ordained  Elders,  for  which  he  ought  not  to  be  admitted  to  that 
office,  let  him  come  forth  in  the  name  of  God,  and  show  what  the 
crime  or  impediment  may  be. 

4.  If  any  crime  or  impediment  be  alleged,  the  Bishop  shall 
cease  from  ordaining  that  person,  until  such  time  as  the  party 
accused  shall  be  found  clear  of  said  crime. 

5.  If  no  accusation  be  alleged,  the  Bishop,  or  Elder,  shall  read 
the  following  articles  to  any  and  all  who  may  be  chosen  for 
ordination. 

' '  For  an  Elder  must  be  blameless,  as  the  steward  of  God,  not 
self-willed,  not  soon  angry,  not  given  to  wine,  no  striker,  not 
given  to  filthy  lucre. 

"But  a  lover  of  hospitality,  a  lover  of  good  men,  sober,  just, 
holy,  temperate: 

"Holding  fast  the  faithful  word  as  he  had  been  taught,  that  he 
may  be  able  by  sound  doctrine,  both  to  exhort  and  to  convince 
th^,  gainsa3'ers. ' ' 

Qst.  Do  you  trust  that  you  are  inwardly  moved  by  the  Holy 
Ghost,  to  take  upon  you  the  office  of  the  ministry,  to  serve  God 
in  the  church  of  Christ,  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy 
name  ? 

Ans.     I  trust  with  the  help  of  God. 

Qst.  Do  you  believe  the  Holy  Scriptures;  old  and  new  Testa- 
ment ? 

Ans.     I  do  believe  them. 

Qst.  Will  you  apply  all  your  diligence  to  frame  and  fashion 
your  life  according  to  the  doctrine  of  Christ;  and  to  make 
yourself,  as  much  as  in  you  lietli,  a  wholesome  example  of  the 
flock  of  Christ? 

Ans.     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Qst.     Will  you   obey  them  to  whom  the  charge  and  govern- 


l88  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

ment  over  you  is  committed,  following  with  a  glad  mind  and 
will,  their  godl\-  admonitions? 

Ans.     I  will  endeavor,  through  the  grace  of  God,  so  to  do. 

[Then  prayer  is  made.] 

After  pra3'er,  the  Bishop  and  Elder  shall  lay  their  liands  upon 
the  heads  of  every  one  of  them,  and  sa^-: 

"Take  thou  authority  to  execute  the  office  of  an  Elder  in  the 
Church  of  God.  In  the  name  of  the  Father,  the  Son,  and  the 
Holy  Ghost."     Amen. 

Hereupon  the  Bishop  or  Elder,  shall  deliver  to  every  one  of 
them  the  Hoi}-  Bible,  saying: 

"Take  thou  authoritj'  to  read  and  preach  the  Word  of  God  in 
the  church  of  Chri.st." 

Then  the  Bishop  or  Elder  shall  read  from  the  12th  chapter  of 
St.  Luke,  35—38: 

Let  3'our  loins  be  girded  about  and  your  lights  burning,  and 
ye  3'ourselves  like  unto  men  that  wait  for  the  Lord,  when  he 
will  return  from  the  wedding,  that  when  he  cometh  and  knock- 
eth,  they  may  open  unto  him  immediately.  Blessed  are  those 
servants  whom  the  Lord  when  he  cometh  shall  find  watching. 
Verily  I  say  unto  3'ou,  that  he  shall  gird  himself,  and  make  them 
sit  down  to  meat,  and  vvill  come  forth  to  serve  them. 

And  if  he  shall  come  in  the  second  watch,  or  come  in  the  third 
watch,  and  find  them  so,  blessed  are  those  servants. 

Then  the  Bishop  or  Elder  shall  pray.— After  which  the  follow- 
ing benediction  is  pronounced. 

The  peace  of  God  keep  your  hearts  and  minds  hi  the  knowledge 
of  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.     Amen. 

THE  FORM  TO  SOLEMNIZE  MARRIAGE. 
ADDRESS. 

We  are  gathered  together  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  in  the 
presence  of  these  witnesses,  to  join  together  N.  and  M.  as  man 
and  wife,  if  any  person  present  know  any  just  cause  or  impedi- 
ment wh^-  these  two  persons  should  not  be  joined  in  marriage, 
they  will  now  speak  or  for  ever  hereafter  hold  their  peace. 

If  no  impediment  be  alleged,  then  shall  the  minister  say  unto 
the  man. 

N.  N.  Wilt  thou  have  this  woman  M.  M.  to  thy  wedded  wife, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance.     Wilt  thou  love,  honor 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1837.  189 

and  comfort  her,  in  sickness  and  in  health,  in  prosperity  and  in 
adversity,  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  so  long 
as  ye  both  shall  live  : — If  so,  then  answer  yes. 

Then  shall  the  Minister  say  unto  the  woman. 

M.  M.  Wilt  thou  have  this  man  N.  N.  to  thy  wedded  husband, 
to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance;  wilt  thou  love,  honor, 
and  obey  him,  in  sickness  and  in  health,  in  prosperity  and  in  ad- 
versity, forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  him  so  long  as 
ye  both  shall  live; — If  so,  then  answer  yes. 

Then  the  Minister  shall  require  them  to  join  their  right  hands 
together  and  say. 

Those  whom  God  had  joined  together  let  no  man  put  asunder. 
In  as  much  as  N.  and  M.  have  consented  together  in  marriage, 
and  have  witnessed  the  same  before  God  and  these  witnesses, 
I  pronounce  them  man  and  wife,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  Son, 
and  Holy  Ghost.     Amen. 

HOW  TO  RECEIVE  AN  EXHORTER. 

Any  Brother  desiring  license  to  exhort,  will  first  make  it  known 
to  the  class-leader,  and  the  class-leader  will  procure  a  recommen- 
dation from  the  class  of  which  the  applicant  is  a  member  at  the 
time,  upon  which  the  Presiding  Elder  with  the  advice  of  the 
Quarterly  Conference,  will  license  the  brother. 

FORMING  AND  MEETING  CLASSES. 

Whereas  it  is  made  the  duty  of  Elders  and  Preachers  to  form 
and  hold  class-meetings,  which  should  always  be  done  in  great 
moderation  and  meekness,  no  member  will  be  allowed  to  use  any 
means  or  measures  to  hinder  or  prevent  an  Elder  or  Preacher  in  the 
discharge  of  this  their  duty,  a  member  acting  to  the  contrary 
shall  be  accountable  to  the  next  quarterly  Conference. 

BOOK  PRINTING. 

Resolved,  that  none  of  our  members,  either  preachers  or  lay- 
men, shall  be  permited  to  become  the  author  of  a  Doctrinal 
Book  or  Pamphlet,  in  a  printed  form,  without  the  approbation  of 
the  Annual  Conference,  or  a  select  committee  by  them  chosen. 

FREE-MASONRY. 

Resolved,  that  Free-Masonry  in  every  sense  of  the  word,  be 
totally  discountenanced,  and  in  no  wise  tolerated  in  our  society, 


190  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

should  any  of  our  members  continue  to  attend  their  lodges,  or 
join  as  a  member  of  Free-]Masonr\'  in  any  of  their  processions, 
or  otherwise  join  thefraternit}-,  he  will  bj'  so  doing  exclude  him- 
self as  a  member  of  our  church. 

PRESENTS. 

Every  traveling  preacher  in  our  society,  shall  yearly  account 
to  the  Conference,  for  all  presents  he  may  have  received  on  his 
circuit,  to  the  amount  of  one  dollar  or  more,  for  the  use  of  him- 
self or  family.  And  if  the  Conference  be  convinced  that  any  one 
circuit  has  given  presents  instead  of  collections,  or  that  the 
preacher  endeavored  to  get  such  in  the  place  of  collections,  in 
such  case  presents  shall  be  considered  as  collections  b}-  the  Con- 
ference. But  if  on  examination  it  should  not  so  appear,  then  those 
preachers  receiving  presents  shall  hold  them  as  their  own,  and 
in  addition  receive  all  the  Discipline  allows  them. 

SLAVERY. 

Resolved,  That  all  slavery,  in  every  sense  of  the  word,  be 
totally  prohibited,  and  in  no  way  tolerated  in  our  church. — Should 
any  be  found  in  our  .society,  who  hold  slaves,  the}'  cannot  con- 
tinue as  members,  without  they  do  personally  manumit,  or  set 
free  such  slaves. 

OATHS. 

We,  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ,  Do  believe,  that  the  prac- 
tice of  swearing,  either  by  the  Bible,  or  in  the  name  of  Almighty 
God,  is,  in  our  opinion,  contrary  to  the  word  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ,  who  says,  "  swear  not  at  all,"  and  that  the  mode  of  testi- 
fying to  the  Truth,  when  thereto  required  so  to  do  in  a  legal  form, 
by  way  of  affirmation,  is  on  us  solemnly,  conscientiously  and 
fully  binding  before  God  and  man  to  tell  the  truth,  the  whole 
truth,  and  nothing  but  the  truth. 

VENDING  AND  DISTILLATION  OF  ARDENT  SPIRITS. 

Should  anj'  Exhorter,  Preacher,  or  Elder,  from  and  after  the 
next  annual  conference  in  1834,  be  engaged  in  the  distillation  or 
vending  of  ardent  spirits,  he  shall  for  the  first  and  second  offence  be 
accountable  to  the  quarterly  or  yearly  conference,  of  which  he  is  a 
member;  the  said  conference  shall  in  meekness  admonish  the 
offending  brother  to  desist;  should  those  friendly  admonitions  fail, 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1837.  191 

and  the  party  continue  to  act  in  the  same,  and  it  be  proven  to  the 
satisfaction  of  the  yearly  conference,  such  Preacher,  Elder  or  Ex- 
horter,  shall  for  the  time  being,  not  be  considered  a  member 
of  our  church, 

CIRCULAR. 

TO  THE   MEMBERS  OF  THE   CHURCH   OF   THE  "UNITEDBRETHREN 
IN  CHRIST." 

Dearly  beloved  Brethren  iji  the  Lord: — 

We,  as  your  humble  servants  in  the  Gospel  yoke,  feeling  as 
much  as  ever  convinced  of  the  great  evil  existing  in  our  world, 
in  consequence  of  the  inordinate  use  of  ardent  spirits,  do  hereby 
express  our  entire  disapprobation  to  the  rage  of  that  great  mon- 
ster, in  our  land.  We  would  therefore,  in  the  most  affectionate 
terms  beseech  you  all  by  the  mercies  of  him,  who,  in  this  lower 
world,  went  about  doing  good;  and  by  whose  authority  it  is  said 
that  no  drunkard  shall  inherit  eternal  life;  to  withhold  your 
influence  from  the  inordinate  use  of  the  hydra  monster, 
which  has  done  so  much  evil  in  this  christian  land.  And  we 
would  now  ask  our  brethren,  have  any  of  you  Distilleries  in 
operation?  And  do  you  sell  to  the  Tavern  keeper,  or  to  him 
who  keeps  a  grocery,  or  to  any  of  your  neighbors,  for  the 
purpose  of  occasional  drinking  or  public  gatherings  ?  If  j-ou 
do.  Brethren !  It  is  to  be  feared,  that  there  are  heavy  respon- 
sibilities resting  upon  you.  Take  care  that  in  the  great  day 
of  eternity,  you  do  not  suffer  loss,  and  some  of  your  works  be 
burned.  We  would  also  say,  that  if  any  of  our  brethren  are 
engaged  in  selling  or  retailing  this  disgraceful  trafiic;  they 
are  in  our  opinion,  under  equal  responsibilities — for  to  say  the 
least  of  it;  it  is  demoralizing  in  its  tendency;  and  feeling  dis- 
posed, as  a  General  Conference,  to  advise,  rather  than  legislate 
on  this  subject;  we  do  say,  that  if  our  brethren  regard  us  as 
those  who  are  watching  over  their  souls  for  good,  the}'  will 
at  once  desist  from  every  kind  of  traffic  mentioned  in  this 
article  as  a  drink.  And,  in  conclusion,  we  would  say,  that 
whatever  the  sacrifice  may  be  on  the  part  of  our  brethren  in 
consequence  of  our  humble  request,  they  will  have  a  conscious- 
ness of  having  complied  with  the  request  of  those  who  wish 
them  well;  and  we  trust,  a  conscience  void  of  offence  towards 
God  and  man. 


192  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

May  the  great  head  of  the  church,  bless  us  with  the  mind  that 
was  in  Jesus  Christ.     Amen. 

Written  and  passed  in  General  Conference,  Germantown, 
Montgomery  Co.,  Ohio,  Ma}'  i6th,  1837. 

\V.  R.  Rhinehart,  Secy. 

PREAMBLE. 

At  a  meeting  of  a  General  Conference  held  by  the  United 
Brethren  in  Christ,  in  Germantown,  Ohio,  May  loth  1837,  it  was 
resolved  that  a  constitution  should  be  formed,  for  the  better 
government  of  a  Printing  Establishment,  now  in  operat  ion  in 
the  town  of  Circleville,  Ohio,  belonging  to  said  Church. 

CONSTITUTION. 

ARTICLE  L 

Sec.  I.  Resolved,  That  the  above  Printing  Establishment  be 
known  by  the  name  of  the  Conference  Printing  Establishment, 
of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ. 

Sec.  2.  Resolved,  That  all  legislative  authority  herein  granted, 
shall  be  vested  in  the  General  Conference  of  said  Church;  whose 
duty  it  is,  to  make  or  amend  any  rules  which  in  their  judgment, 
may  seem  expedient. 

Sec.  3.  Resolved.  That  it  be  the  duty  of  the  General  Confer- 
ence, to  appoint  or  elect  three  Trustees  every  four  years;  and 
also,  to  employ  an  Editor  and  Treasurer. 

Sec.  4.  Resolved,  If  a  vacancy  should  occur  in  the  Editorial 
or  Treasury  department,  by  sickness,  death,  or  otherwise,  that,  it 
shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Trustees  to  employ  some  other  suitable 
person  or  persons  to  fill  said  vacancy,  until  the  sitting  of  the 
next  General  Conference. 

Sec.  5.  Resolved,  Also,  that  in  case  a  vacancy  should  occur 
with  the  Trustees  either  by  death  or  otherwise,  it  shall  be  the 
duty  of  the  remaining  two,  to  make  choice  of  a  third  person  to 
fill  said  vacancy,  until  the  sitting  of  the  next  General  Conference. 

vSec.  6.  Resolved,  That  the  proceeds  of  said  establishment, 
over  and  above  contingent  expenses,  shall  l)e  applied  to  the 
traveling  and  worn  out  preachers  and  their  widows  and  orphans; 
to  be  divided  among  the  different  annual  conferences,  as  the 
General  Conference  may  direct. 


DISCIPUNE  OF  1837.  193 

ARTICLE  II. 

Sec.  I.  Resolved,  That  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Trustees  to 
make  settlement  with  the  Treasurer  and  Editor  every  six 
months,  and  cause  the  Treasurer  to  make  out  and  report  to  each 
annual  Conference  of  the  Scioto  district,  and  also  to  make  a 
Special  report  to  each  General  Conference. 

Sec.  2.  Resolved,  That  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Scioto 
annual  Conference,  in  the  interval  of  a  General  Conference,  to 
see  that  the  Editor,  Treasurer  and  Trustees,  discharge  their 
ofl&cial  duties  as  required  in  this  constitution. 

Sec.  3.  Resolved,  That  on  impeachment  of  any  of  the  above 
named  officers,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  above  named  annual 
Conference,  to  examine  into  said  impeachment,  and  if  guilty  in 
their  opinion,  to  dismiss  them,  and  supply  the  vacancy  until  the 
sitting  of  the  next  Conference. 

ARTICLE  III. 

Sec.  I.  Resolved,  That  it  be  the  duty  of  the  Editor  to  pay  strict 
attention  to  all  'communications  sent  for  insertion,  to  revise 
them  if  necessary,  and  insert  them;  nevertheless,  if  he  should 
receive  any,  which,  in  his  opinion  are  inconsistent  with  the 
doctrine  and  rules  of  our  Church,  he  shall  present  them  to  the 
Treasurer,  or  one  or  more  of  the  Trustees,  and  if  rejected  by 
them  shall  be  withheld,  otherwise  inserted. 

Sec.  2.  Resolved,  That  it  be  the  duty  of  the  Editor  to  write 
editorial  for  each  paper,  and  attend  strictly  to  the  reading  of 
proof-sheet;  making  selections,  &c. ;  and  when  not  employed  in 
either,  to  put  in  his  time  in  labor  in  the  office  as  other  hands. 

Sec.  3.  Resolved,  Also,  that  it  be  the  duty  of  the  Editor  to 
keep  a  general  oversight  over  the  hands  in  the  office,  and  see 
that  they  do  not  spend  their  time  in  idleness. 

Sec.  4.  Resolved,  That  the  Trustees  shall  have  a  general  over- 
sight over  the  Editor  and  Treasurer,  and  see  that  they  discharge 
their  duties,  and  if  they  do  not,  may  be  suspended  from  office, 
until  the  setting  of  the  next  annual  Conference,  who  shall  deter- 
mine the  case;  in  which  case  said  Trustees  shall  supply  the 
vacan(?y,  for  the  time  being. 

ARTICLE  IV. 

Sec.  I.  Resolved,  That  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Treasurer  to 
take  charge  of  all  temporary  concerns  of  the  office,  keep  all  the 

13 


194  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

books  pertaining  thereunto,  furnish  b}^  the  direction  of  Trustees, 
such  materials  as  may  be  needed  at  all  times,  and  to  act  as  a 
general  Book-agent  under  the  instruction  of  said  Trustees. 

Sec.  2.  Resolved,  That  the  Treasurer,  when  not  employed  in 
his  ojQBcial  duties,  shall  work  in  the  office  as  another  hand. 

Sec.  3.  Resolved,  Finally,  that  the  Trustees  shall  have  a  right 
to  make  any  by-laws  that  to  them  may  seem  expedient,  for  the 
better  regulation  of  the  minor  concerns  of  the  office.  Provided, 
they  do  not  violate  any  of  the  provisions  of  this  constitution. 

Signed  in  behalf  of  the  Conference  on  the  day  and  date  above 

written. 

HENRY  KUMLER,    |  ^^•^,  .g 

SAM'Iv   HEISTAND. )         ^  " 

W.  R.  Rhinehart,  Se(fy. 

BUILDING   MEETING   HOUSES,  AND  THE   ORDER  TO  BE  OBSERVED. 

Q.  Is  any  thing  advisable  in  regard  to  building  meeting 
houses. 

A.  Let  all  our  meeting  houses  be  built  plain  and  decent  with 
free  seats,  and  not  more  expensive  than  necessary. 

Q.  To  whom  are  our  meeting  houses  and  the  premises  belong- 
ing to  them,  to  be  deeded? 

A.  To  a  Board  of  Trustees  and  their  successors  in  office,  in 
trust  as  the  property  of  the  church  of  the  United  Brethren  in 
Christ. 

Q.     How  is  a  Board  of  Trustees  constituted  ? 

A.  Whenever  it  is  contemplated  by  a  society  to  build  or  pur- 
chase a  meeting  house,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  a  leader  or  steward 
of  such  society,  to  make  it  known  to  the  Quarterly  Conference 
of  the  circuit  or  station  to  which  they  belong,  whose  duty  it  shall 
be  to  appoint  a  judicious  Board  of  Trustees,  of  not  less  than 
three  in  xwwwhitx ,— Provided,  however,  that  none  be  required  to 
serve  more  than  four  years  unless  indispensably  necessary. 

No  person  shall  be  considered  eligible  as  a  Trustee  for  any  of 
of  our  meeting  houses,  who  is  not  a  regular  member  of  our 
church. 

Q.  How  are  the  Trustees  to  proceed  in  building  a  meeting 
house  ? 

A.  They  .shall  form  an  estimate  of  the  amount  necessary  to 
procure  a  lot  of  ground,  to  build  and  make  such  other  improve- 
ments as  may  be  conceived  necessary:  however,  they  shall  not 


DISCIPLINE   OF   1837.  195 

commence  building,  until  two-thirds  of  the  money  according  to 
such  estimate  shall  be  secured,  or  subscribed;  and  also,  a  lawful 
title  for  the  lot  upon  which  they  intend  to  build. 

To  hold  annual  meetings,  and  keep  a  fair  and  regular  record  of 
all  the  transactions  of  their  board,  in  a  book  provided  for  that 
purpose,  which  shall  at  all  times  be  open  for  inspection,  by  the 
Quarterl}^  Conferences  of  said  circuit,  or  station. 

To  take  care  of  the  meeting-house  property,  furniture,  prem- 
ises, burial  ground,  &c. 

Q.  What  shall  be  done  when  a  vacancy  or  vacancies  occur  in 
the  Board  of  Trustees,  by  ceasing  to  be  a  member,  by  suspensation, 
death  or  otherwise. 

A.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Quarteny  Conference,  to  ap- 
point a  suitable  person  or  persons,  to  fill  such  vacancy  or  vacan- 
cies. 

Q.     What  shall  be  done  when  any  of  our  houses  are  vacant  ? 

A.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  a  Quarterly  Conference  of  the 
nearest  circuit,  to  appoint  not  less  than  than  three  suitable  per- 
sons for  Trustees,  who  shall  have  the  power  when  authorized  by 
two-thirds  of  the  members  of  that  Conference,  to  lease,  rent,  or 
sell  such  meeting  house  and  the  appurtenances  belonging  to  it, 
and  appropriate  the  money  arising  from  such  lease,  rent  or  sale; 
to  what  it  may  direct. 

Note. — The  Trustees  will  be  careful  in  all  cases  to  have  deeds 
of  conveyance  legally  executed  and  recorded  in  the  county 
records  where  the  property  is,  that  is,  to  have  the  deed  made  to 
them  and  to  their  successors  in  office,  in  trust  for  the  Church  of 
the  United  Brethren  in  Christ,  and  that  they  will  erect  and  biiild, 
or  cause  to  be  built,  a  house  of  worship,  for  the  use  of  the  mem- 
bers of  the  said  church,  according  to  the  rules  of  Discipline, 
which  may  from  time  to  time  be  adopted  by  the  church. 

BOOK-AGENTS. 

1.  Resolved — That  there  shall  be  a  Book  Agent  appointed  in 
each  Annual  Conference  District,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  take 
charge  of  all  books,  &c.  sent  him  by  the  Treasurer  of,  and  ap- 
pertaining to  the  Conference  printing  establishment,  in  Circle- 
ville. 

2.  Resolved,  That  he,  (the  said  agent)  shall  be  accountable  to 
the  Treasurer  of  the  Conference  printing  establishment,  in  Circle- 
ville,  Ohio. 


196  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

3.  Resolved — That  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Book  Agent,  so 
far  as  may  be  safe  or  expedient,  to  distribute  all  the  Books  sent 
him  by  the  Treasurer,  to  the  circuit  preachers,  for  the  use  of  the 
church. 

4.  Resolved,  That  the  Agent  keep  an  accurate  account  o  f  all 
the  distributions  and  collections  for,  and  in  behalf  of  the  said 
Conference  printing  establishment.  If  books  are  wanted  in  his 
District,  he  is  to  notify  the  Treasurer  by  letter. 

5.  Resolved — That  the  Agent  shall  make  settlement  with  the 
Treasurer,  by  letter  or  otherwise,  every  six  months. 

ERRATA. 

Eighth  page— 2d  line;  read  1815,  instead  of  1835.— This  error  was  noi  discovered 
until  some  ■were  struck  off. 


DISCIPWNE  OF  1837.  197 


INDEX. 

Page. 

Book  Printing 189 

Book-agents 195 

Building  meeting  houses,  and  the  order  to  be  observed         -       -       -       -  194 

Constitution  of  Printing  Establishment 192 

Constitution  of  the  Church 168 

Circular,  to  the  members  of  the  Church 191 

Duty  of  Circuit  Preachers,  and  how  received     ----..-  177 

Election  of  Bishops  and  their  duty 175 

Elders,  their  Election,  ordination  and  duty        -------  177 

Forming  and  Meeting  Classes  -------.---  189 

Form  and  manner  of  Ordaining  Preachers -  187 

Free-Masonry         -------.-...-.  lyg 

General  and  yearly  Conferences -       -       -       .       -  174 

How  to  receive  an  Exhorter, 189 

Members  in  general .----  182 

Of  the  Necessity  of  Union  among  ourselves       -------  135 

Oaths         -       -       - 190 

Origin  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ -  165 

Presents 190 

Preachers         ------ 187 

Presiding  Elders,  election  and  Duty 176 

Slavery 190 

Salary  of  Preachers 184 

The  method  of  receiving  Preachers  and  their  duty         -       .       -       .       .  179 

The  Instruction  of  Children -       -       -  186 

The  form  to  Solemnize  Marriage -  188 

The  Immoral  Conduct  of  Preachers,  and  how  they  are  to  be  disposed  of  181 

The  Confession  of  Faith - 172 

Vending  &  distillation  of  ardent  spirits        -       - 190 

Visiting  from  house  to  house,  and  enforcing  Practical  Religion  -       -       -  186 


ORIGIN, 


DOCTRINE, 


CONSTITUTION 


DISCIPLINE, 


United  Brethren  in  Christ. 


CIRCLEVILLE,  OHIO. 
PRINTED  AT  THE  CONFERENCE  OFFICE. 

1841.  199 


ORIGIN  OF  THE  UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST. 

In  the  eighteenth  century,  it  pleased  the  Lord  our  God,  to 
awaken  persons  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  who  should  raise 
up  the  Christian  religion  from  its  fallen  state,  and  preach  the 
Gospel  of  Christ  crucified  in  its  purity. 

About  the  middle  of  the  said  century  the  Lord,  in  mercy, 
remembered  the  Germans  of  America,  who,  living  scattered  in 
this  extensive  countr}',  had  but  seldom  an  opportunity  to  hear 
the  Gospel  of  a  crucified  Saviour  preached  to  them,  in  their 
native  language. 

Amongst  others,  he  raised  up  William  Otterbein  and  Martin 
Boehm  in  the  State  of  Pennsylvania,  and  George  A.  Geeting  in 
the  State  of  Maryland,  armed  them  with  spirit,  grace  and 
strength,  to  labor  in  his  neglected  vineyard,  and  to  call,  among 
the  Germans  in  America,  sinners  to  repentance.  These  men 
obeyed  the  call  of  their  Lord  and  Master;  their  labors  were 
blessed;  they  established,  in  many  places,  excellent  societies, 
and  led  many  precious  souls  to  Jesus  Christ.  Their  sphere  of 
action  spread  more  and  more,  so  that  they  found  it  necessary 
to  look  about  for  more  fellow-laborers,  to  engage  in  the  vine- 
yard of  the  Lord;  for  the  harvest  was  great,  and  the  laborers 
but  few.  The  Lord  called  others,  who  were  willing  to  devote 
their  strength  to  his  service;  such,  then,  were  accepted  by  one 
or  the  other  of  the  preachers,  as  fellow-laborers. 

The  number  of  members  in  the  society,  in  different  parts  of 
the  country,  continued  to  increase  from  time  to  time;  and  the 
gracious  work  of  reformation  spread  through  the  States  of  Penn- 
sylvania, Maryland  and  Virginia.  Several  great  meetings  were 
appointed,  and  held  annually;  when  on  such  occasions,  Otterbein 
would  hold  particular  conversations  with  the  preachers  then 
present,  represent  to  them  the  importance  of  the  ministry,  and 
the  necessity  of  their  utmost  endeavors  to  save  souls.  At  one  of 
these  meetings,  it  was  resolved  to  hold  a  conference  with  all  the 
preachers,  in  order  to  take  into  consideration,  how,  and  in  what 
manner  they  might  be  most  useful. 

The   first  conference  was  held  in  the  city  of  Baltimore,  Md. ; 


202  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

in  the  year  of  our  Lord,  1789.     The  following  preachers  were 
present,  viz: — 

Wm.  Otterbein,  Adam  Lehman, 

Martin  Boehm,  John  Ernst, 

Geo.  a.  Geeting,  Henry  Weidner, 
Chn.  Newcomer. 

The  second  conference  was  held  in  Paradise  Township,  York 
Co.  Pa.,  at  the  house  of  brother  Spangler,  in  the  year  of  our 
Lord  1 79 1.     The  following  preachers  were  present,  viz: — 

Wm.  Otterbein,  John  Ernst, 

Martin  Boehm,  J.  G.  Pfremmer, 

Geo.  a.  Geeting,  John  Neidig, 

Chn.  Newcomer,  Benedict  Sander. 
Adam  Lehman, 

After  mature  deliberation,  how  they  might  labor  most  use- 
fully in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord,  they  again  appointed  such, 
as  fellow  laborers,  of  whom  they  had  cause  to  believe,  that  they 
had  experienced  true  religion  in  their  own  souls. 

In  the  mean  time,  the  number  of  members  continued  to  increase, 
and  the  preachers  were  obliged  to  appoint  an  Annual  Conference, 
in  order  to  unite  themselves  more  closely,  and  to  labor  more  suc- 
cessfully in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord;  for,  some  had  been  Presby- 
terians or  German  Reformed,  some  Lutherans,  and  others  Meno- 
nists. — They  accordingly  appointed  a  conference,  to  be  held  on 
the  25th  of  Sept.  1800,  in  Frederick  Co.  Md.,  at  the  house 
of  brother  Frederick  Kemp.  The  following  preachers  were 
present,  viz : — 

Wm.  Otterbein,  Christian  Krum, 

Martin  Boehm,  Henry  Krum, 

Geo.  a  Geeting,  John  Hershey, 

Chn.  Newcomer,  Jacob  Geisinger, 

Adam  Lehman,  Henry  Boehm, 

Abr'm  Dracksel,  Diet'k  Aurauf. 
J.  G.  Pfremmer, 

There  they  united  themselves  into  a  society  which  bears  the 
name,  "UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST,"  and  elected 
Wm.  Otterbein  and  Martiii  Boehm,  as  superintendents  or  bishops, 
and  agreed  that  each  of  them  should  be  at  liberty,  as  to  the 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1841.  203 

mode  and  manner  of  baptism,  to  perform  it  according  to  their 
own  convictions. 

From  this  time,  the  society  increasing  still  more  and  more, 
preachers  were  appointed  to  travel  regularly,  in  as  much  as 
the  number  of  preaching  places  could  not  otherwise  be  attended  to; 
and  the  work  spread  itself  into  the  states  of  Ohio  and  Kentucky. 
It  then  became  necessary  to  appoint  a  conference  in  the  State  of 
Ohio;  because  it  was  conceived  too  laborious  for  the  preachers 
who  labored  in  those  States,  to  travel,  annually,  such  a  great 
distance,  to  the  Conference. 

In  the  mean  time,  brothers  Boehni  and  Geeting  died,  and 
brother  Otterbeiyi  desired  that  another  bishop  should  be  elected, 
(because  infirmity  and  old  age  would  not  permit  him  to  superintend 
any  longer,)  who  should  take  charge  of  the  society,  and  preserve 
discipline  and  order.  It  was  resolved,  at  a  former  Conference, 
that  whenever  one  of  the  bishops  died,  another  should  be  elected 
in  his  place:  accordingly,  brother  Christia?i  Newcomer  v^as  elected 
bishop,  to  take  charge  of  and  superintend  the  concerns  of  the 
society 

The  want  of  a  Disc  ipline  in  the  society,  had  long  been  deeply 
felt,  and  partial  attempts  having  been  made  at  different  times, 
it  was  resolved  at  the  Conference  held  in  the  State  of  Ohio,  that 
a  General  Conference  should  be  held,  in  order  to  accomplish 
the  same,  in  a  manner,  not  derogatory  to  the  word  of  God. 
The  members  of  this  Conference  were  to  be  elected  from  among 
the  preachers,  in  the  different  parts  of  the  country,  by  a  vote 
of  the  society  in  general.  The  following  brethren  were  duly 
elected,  viz: — 

Chn.  Newcomer,  Daniel  Treyer, 

Abr'M  HiESTAND,  GEO.  BenEDUM, 

Andrew  Zeller,  Abr'm  Tracksel, 

Christian  Berger,  Henry  G.  Spayth, 

Abraham  Meyer,  I.  Nighswanger, 

John  Schneider,  Christian  Krum, 

Henry  Kumler,  &  Jacob  Bowles. 

The  Conference  convened  on  the  sixth  day  of  June,  1815,  near 
Mount  Pleasant,  Westmoreland  Co.  Pa.  After  a  mature  delib- 
eration, they  presented  to  their  brethren  a  Discipline,  containing 
the  doctrine  and  rules  of  the  church,  desiring  that  they,  together 
with  the  word  of  God,  should  be  strictly  observed. 


204  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

God  is  a  God  of  order,  but  where  there  is  no  order,  nor  Church 
Discipline  the  spirit  of  love  and  charity  will  be  lost. 

Therefore,  brethren,  we  beseech  ^-ou  to  follow  the  example  of 
our  Lord;  as  it  is  written.  Be  kindly  affectionate  one  to  another 
with  brotherly  love,  in  honor  preferring  one  another.  Let  the 
mind  be  in  you  which  was  in  Christ,  who  took  upon  himself  the 
form  of  a  servant,  humbled  himself  and  became  obedient  unto 
death,  even  the  death  of  the  cross,  that  bj-  his  grace  we  may  submit 
ourselves  one  to  another  in  the  fear  of  God.  He  who  will  not 
submit  is  in  want  of  humble  love. — Jesus  said:  Whosoever  will  be 
chief  among  you,  let  him  be  your  servant.  By  this  shall  all  men 
know  that  ye  are  my  disciples,  if  ye  have  love  one  to  another;  and 
whoso  loveth  not  his  brother,  abideth  in  death.  Let  us  walk  in 
newness  of  life,  that  the  prayer  of  our  Lord  may  be  answered  in 
us;  that  we  may  be  one  in  him;  and  that  he  may  give  us  the  glor}', 
which  he  gave  to  his  disciples,  that  we  may  be  one  even  as  he  and 
the  Father  are  one.  Therefore,  beloved  brethren,  let  us  strive  to 
be  like  minded,  having  the  same  love,  being  of  one  accord,  of  one 
mind;  let  no  one  speak  or  think  evil  of  his  brother,  but  pray  God, 
that  he  may  grant  us  his  Spirit,  and  an  earnest  desire  to  lead  a 
truly  devoted  life,  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy  name: 
Amen. 

SECTION  FIRST. 

CONFESSION  OF  FAITH. 

In  the  name  of  God,  we  declare  and  confess  before  all  men, 
that.  We  believe  in  the  only  true  God,  the  Father,  the  Son,  and  Holy 
Ghost;  That  these  three  are  one,  the  Father  in  the  Son,  the  Son 
in  the  Father,  and  the  Holy  Ghost  equal  in  essence  or  being 
with  both:  That  this  triune  God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth,  and  all  that  in  them  is,  visible  as  well  as  invisible,  and 
furthermore,  sustains,  governs,  protects  and  supports  the  same. 

We  believe  in  Jesus  Christ:  That  he  is  very  God  and  man:  That 
he  became  incarnate  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  in  the 
virgin  Mary,  and  was  born  of  her:  That  he  is  the  Saviour  and 
Mediator  of  the  whole  human  race,  if  they  with  full  faith  in 
him,  accept  the  grace  profferred  in  Jesus;  That  this  Jesus 
suffered  and  died  on  the  cross  for  us,  was  buried,  arose  again 
on  the  third  day,  ascended  into  heaven,  and  sitteth  on  the  right 


DISCIPLINE  OF    1841.  205 

hand  of  God,  to  intercede  for  us;  and  that  he  shall  come  again 
at  the  last  day,  to  judge  the  quick  and  the  dead. 

We  believe  in  the  Holy  Ghost,  that  he  is  equal  in  being  with 
the  Father  and  the  Son;  and  that  he  comforts  the  faithful,  and 
guides  them  into  all  truth. 

We  believe  in  a  holy  Christian  Church,  the  communion  of 
saints,  the  resurrection  of  the  body  and  life  everlasting. 

We  believe  that  the  Holy  Bible,  old  and  new  Testaments,  is 
the  word  of  God;  That  it  contains  the  only  true  way  to  our 
salvation:  that  every  true  Christian  is  bound  to  acknowledge 
and  receive  it  with  the  influence  of  the  Spirit  of  God,  as  the 
only  rule  and  guide;  and  that  without  faith  in  Jesus  Christ, 
true  repentance,  forgiveness  of  sins,  and  following  after  Christ, 
no  one  can  be  a  true  Christian. 

We  also  believe,  that  what  is  contained  in  the  Holy  Scriptures, 
to  wit:  the  fall  in  Adam,  and  redemption  through  Jesus  Christ, 
shall  be  preached  throughout  the  world. 

We  believe  that  the  ordinances,  namely,  baptism  and  the  re- 
membrance of  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
are  to  be  in  use,  and  practised  by  all  Christian  societies:  And  that 
it  is  incumbent  on  all  the  children  of  God,  particularly,  to 
practise  them;  But  the  manner  in  which,  ought  always  be 
left  to  the  judgment  and  understanding  of  every  individual: 
Also,  the  example  of  washing  feet,  is  left  to  the  judgment  of 
every  one,  to  practise  or  not;  but  it  is  not  becoming,  for  any  of 
our  preachers  or  members  to  traduce  any  of  his  brethren  whose 
judgment  and  understanding,  in  this  respect,  are  different  from 
his  own,  either  in  public  or  private.  Whosoever  shall  make 
himself  guilty  in  this  respect,  shall  be  considered  a  traducer  of 
his  brethren ;  and  shall  be  answerable  for  the  same. 

SECTION  SECOND. 

CONSTITUTION. 

WE,  the  members  of  the  Church  of  the  UNITED  BRETHREN 
IN  CHRIST,  in  the  name  of  God,  do,  for  the  perfecting  of  the 
saints,  for  the  work  of  the  ministry,  for  the  edifying  of  the  body 
of  Christ,  as  well  as  to  produce  and  secure  a  uniform  mode  of 
action,  in  faith  and  practice,  as  also  to  define  the  powers  and  the 
business  of   Quarterly,   Annual  and    General   Conferences,   as 


2o6  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

recognized  by  this   Churcli,   ordain    the  following  articles  of 
CONSTITUTION. 

ARTICLE  I. 

Sec.  I. — All  ecclesiastical  power  herein  granted,  to  make,  or 
repeal  any  rule  of  Discipline,  is  vested  in  a  General  Conference; 
which  shall  consist  of  Elders  elected  by  the  members  in  every 
conference  district,  throughout  the  Society:  Provided,  however, 
such  Elders  shall  have  stood  in  that  capacity  three  years,  in  the 
conference  district  to  which  they  belong. 

Sec.  2. — General  Conference  is  to  be  held  every  four  years; 
The  Bishops  to  be  considered  members  and  presiding  officers. 

Sec.  3  — Each  Annual  Conference  shall  place  before  the  society 
the  names  of  all  the  Elders  eligible  to  membership  in  the  General 
Conference. 

ARTICLE  II. 

Sec.  I. — The  General  Conference  shall  define  the  boundaries 
of  the  Annual  Conferences. 

Sec  2  — The  General  Conference  shall,  at  every  session,  elect 
Bishops  from  among  the  elders  throughout  the  church,  who 
have  stood  in  that  capacity,  six  years. 

Sec.  3  — The  business  of  each  Annual  Conference  shall  be 
done  strictly  according  to  Discipline;  and  any  Annual  Confer- 
ence, acting  contrar}^  thereunto,  shall,  by  impeachment,  be  tried 
by  the  General  Conference. 

Sec.  4  — No  rule  or  ordinance  vshall  at  any  time  be  passed,  to 
change  or  do  away  the  Confession  of  Faith  as  it  now  stands;  nor 
to  destroy  the  itinerant  plan. 

Sec.  5. — There  shall  be  no  rule  adopted  that  will  infringe  upon 
the  rights  of  any,  as  it  relates  to  the  mode  of  Baptism,  the  Sac- 
rament of  the  Lord's  Supper,  or  the  the  washing  of  feet. 

Sec.  6. — There  shall  be  no  rule  made  that  will  deprive  local 
preachers  of  their  votes  in  the  Annual  Conferences  to  which  they 
severally  belong. 

Sec.  7. — There  shall  be  no  connection  with  secret  combinations, 
nor  shall  involuntary  servitude  be  tolerated,  in  any  way. 

ARTICLE  III. 

The  right,  title,  interest,  and  claim,  of  all  property,  whether 
consisting  in  lots  of  ground,  meeting  houses,  legacies,  bequests, 
or  donations  of  any  kind,  obtained  by  purchase  or  otherwise,  by 


DISCIPLINE    OF   1 841.  207 

any  person  or  persons  for  the  use,  benefit,  and  behoof  of  the 
Church  of  the  United  Bretnren  in  Christ,  is  hereby  fully  recog- 
nized and  held  to  be  the  property  of  the  Church  aforesaid. 

ARTICLE  IV. 

There  shall  be  no  alteration  of  the  foregoing  constitution,  un- 
less by  request  of  two  thirds  of  the  whole  society. 
May  19.     1841. 

SECTION  THIRD. 

GENERAL  CONFERENCE. 

Qjiestion  ist.     Who  are  the  members  of  the  General  Conference  ? 

'^^See  Constitution. — 

Qst.  2.     How  are  they  to  be  elected  ? 

Ans.  I.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  each  Annual  Conference,  to 
appoiiit  a  committee  of  three,  in  their  several  Conference  Dis- 
tricts, to  receive  and  count  the  votes,  and  immediately  apprize 
those  who  may  have  been  elected;  also,  to  Jumish  the  Presiding 
Elders  with  a  list  of  all  the  Elders  eligible 

2.  The  Preriding  Elders  shall  furnish  each  preacher  in  charge, 
whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  furnish  each  class-leader  or  steward, 
throughout  the  circuits,  with  a  cop^^  of  the  same,  at  least  six 
months  before  the  sitting  of  General  Conference. 

3.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  each  class  leader  or  steward,  to  ap- 
point a  meeting  of  the  members  of  each  class,  for  the  purpose  of 
electing  by  ballot  or  otherwise,  one  or  more  delegates  to  represent 
them  in  General  Conference. 

4.  It  shall  also  be  the  duty  of  each  class-leader  or  steward,  to 
sign,  enclose,  and  seal,  each  bill  of  election,  hand  it  over  to  the 
preacher  in  charge,  who  shall  deliver  it  to  the  Presiding  Elder, 
whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  transmit  it  to  the  committee  appointed 
by  the  Annual  Conference,  as  aforesaid. 

5.  Said  committee  shall  make  a  list  of  all  the  persons  voted 
for,  and  of  the  number  of  votes  for  each.  And  should  any  two 
or  more  of  the  candidates  have  an  equal  number  of  votes,  the 
committee  shall  determine  b}^  lot,  who,  or  which  of  them,  are 
elected.  They  shall  also  forward  the  names  of  those  elected,  to 
the  Conference  Printing  Establishment  for  publication. 

Qst.  3.  What  shall  be  the  number  of  delegates  to  General 
Conference? 


2o8  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

Ans.    Three  from  each  Annual  Conference  district. 

QsL  4.  How  shall  the  expenses  of  the  delegates  to  the  General 
Conference  be  defrayed  ? 

Afis.  When  the  class-leader,  or  steward,  takes  the  vote  for 
delegates  to  General  Conference,  he  shall  lift  a  collection  for  that 
purpose,  which  he  shall  remit  to  the  committee  which  are  to 
count  the  votes,  and  the  committee  shall  pay  it  over  to  the  dele- 
gates elected. 

SECTION   FOURTH. 

ANNUAL  CONFERENCE. 

QsL  I.    Who  are  the  members  of  this  Conference? 

Afis.  All  the  Elders,  and  the  licentiate  preachers,  who  are,  for 
the  time  being,  in  the  district  where  the  Conference  is  held:  but, 
when  such  licentiate  preachers  are  proposed  for  ordination,  the 
Elders  only  shall  determine  the  same  by  vote. 

Qst  2.  In  what  manner  are  the  transactions  of  a  conference 
to  be  conducted  ? 

Ans  I.  A  portion  of  Scripture  is  to  be  read;  There  is  also  to 
be  singing  and  prayer,  each  day,  at  the  opening,  and  at  the 
closing  of  Conference. 

2.  The  conference  shall  elect  two  secretaries,  one  German; 
and  one  English,  wherever  it  may  be  necessary.  And  when  but 
one  Bishop  is  present,  the  Conference  shall  elect  a  chairman  to 
act  in  conjunction  with  the  Bishop. 

3.  The  preachers  shall  be  examined  respecting  their  deport- 
ment towards  their  fellow  beings,  whether  their  conduct  in  life 
be  blameless,  and  whether  they  employ  as  much  time  as  possible 
to  promote  the  kingdom  of  God. 

The  following  questions  shall  then  be  asked: 

I.     Have  any  of  the  preachers  died  during-  the  last  year? 

2      Who  are  the  candidates  for  the  ministry'  ? 

3.  Are  any  to  be  ordained  to  the  office  of  Elder? 

4.  What  has  been  collected  for  contingent  expenses  and  the 
salary  of  travelling  preachers? 

5      Has  reckoning  been  made  with  the  travelling  preachers? 

6.  Have  they  received  their  dues  ? 

7.  Who  are  willing  to  travel  the  ensuing  year,  without 
reserve? 


DISCIPLINE  OF   184I.  209 

8.  Who  are  the  Presiding  Elders  ? 

9.  Where  are  the  preachers  stationed  this  year  ? 

10.  When  and  where  shall  our  next  Conference  he  held  ? 

11.  Is  there  any  thing  else  to  be  done? 

12.  Is  all  that  "has  been  done,  entered  upon  record? 

SECTION  FIFTH. 
RECEPTION  OF  PREACHERS. 

Qst     How  are  preachers  received? 

Ans.  Every  person  proposed  as  a  preacher,  shall  be  examined 
by  the  Conference,  or  a  select  committee;  and  the  following 
questions  shall  be  put  to  him,  viz: 

Have  you  known  God  in  Christ  Jesus  to  be  a  sin  pardoning 
God,  and  have  you  obtained  the  forgiveness  of  your  sins  ? 

Have  you  now  peace  with  God,  and  is  the  love  of  God  shed 
abroad  in  your  heart  by  the  Holy  Spirit  ? 

Do  you  follow  after  holiness  ? 

Do  you  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  Word  of  God;  and  that 
therein  is  contained  the  true  way  to  our  salvation  ? 

What  foundation  have  you  for  that  belief? 

What  is  your  motive  that  you  desire  permission  to  preach  the 
Gospel  ? 

What  is  your  knowledge  of  faith,  of  depravity,  of  repentance, 
justification,  sanctification,  and  redemption? 

Does  your  own  salvation  and  the  salvation  of  your  fellow- 
mortals,  lie  nearer  to  your  heart  than  all  other  things  in  the 
world  ? 

Can  you  subject  yourself  to  the  counsel  of  your  brethren? 

Are  you  satisfied  with  our  church  government? 

Will  you  be  obedient  and  ready  to  speak  or  hold  your  peace,  as 
your  brethren  may  think  expedient? 
Are  you  willing,  as  much  as  is  in  your  power,  to  assist  in  up- 
holding the  itinerant  plan,  and  supporting  the  same  as  much  as 
possible  ? 

]f  None,  however,  can  he  admitted  otherwise,  than  on  trial:  and 
may  be  admitted,  or  rejected  without  doing  him  any  harm;  other- 
wise it  would  be  no  trial. 

14 


2IO  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION    SIXTH. 

QUARTERLY   CONFERENCE. 

Qsf.  I.     Who  are  the  members  of  the  quarterly  Conference  ? 

Ans.  All  the  preachers,  exhorters,  leaders,  and  stewards,  who 
reside  within  the  bounds  of  the  circuit  or  station. 

Qsi    2.     What  is  the  business  of  the  quarterly  conference  ? 

A?is.  I.  To  elect  a  secretary  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  keep  a 
correct  record  of  all  their  proceedings,  in  a  book  provided  for 
that  purpose,  in  which  the  names  of  all  the  members  composing 
the  said  conference,  shall  be  entered 

2.  To  make  a  general,  or,  if  necessary,  a  particular  enquiry 
into  the  moral  deportment  o  f  all  its  members. 

3.  To  receive  and  try  all  appeals,  references,  and  complaints, 
that  may  come  regularly  before  them. 

4.  To  make  settlement  with  the  stewards  and  travelling 
preachers. 

5.  To  grant  license  to  exhort,  or  preach,  to  such  person  or 
persons,  as  may  have  been  recommended  by,  at  least  two  thirds 
of  the  class  of  which  he  or  they  are  members:  Provided,  how- 
ever, that  none  shall  receive  license,  who  cannot  give  satisfactory 
evidence  of  his  or  their  call,  experience,  soundness  in  doctrine, 
and  attachment  to  our  church  and  government. 

Qsf.  3.     How  are  preachers  from  other  societies  received  .■* 

Ans.  If  they  come  to  us  with  certificates  of  good  standing 
in  the  society  in  which  they  have  had  membership;  and  give 
satisfaction  to  the  Quarterly  Conference,  of  their  willingness 
to  conform  to  our  Church  Government,  and  usages,  then  the 
Quarterly  Conference  may  license  them  till  the  next  Annual 
Conference  ensuing;  after  which  if  their  conduct  is  in  accord- 
ance with  the  Gospel  of  Christ,  they  shall  be  considered 
as  preachers  or  elders,  who  stand  under  a  similar  license 
among  us. 

QsL  4.     What  directions  are  necessary  in  case  of  appeals  ? 

Ans.  Any  Exhorter,  or  Preacher,  dissatisfied  with  the  decision 
of  a  Quarterly  Conference,  shall,  within  thirty  days  after  the 
Quarterly  Conference,  notify  the  Secretary'  in  writing,  of  his  in- 
tention to  appeal,  together  with  his  reasons  for  so  doing;  and  it 
shall  be  the  duty  of  the  vSecretary  to  take  or  send  a  certified  copy 
of  the  proceedings,  the  notifications  and  reasons  assigned,  to  the 
Annual  Conference. 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1841.  211 

It  shall  also  be  the  duty  of  the  quarterly  Conference  to  open 
and  close  by  singing  and  prayer. 

SECTION   SEVENTH. 

MEMBERS  IN  GENERAL. 

Qst.     How  shall  members  be  taken  into  our  society  ? 

Ans.  When,  at  any  meeting,  a  person  makes  known  a  desire 
to  become  a  member  of  our  society,  then  the  preacher  present 
shall  put  to  him  the  following  question: 

Have  you  experienced  the  pardon  of  your  sins,  and,  are  you 
determined  by  the  grace  of  God,  to  save  your  soul  ? 

If  the  person  answers  the  question  in  the  any  affirmative,  and  no 
objection  be  made  by  any  member,  on  account  of  his  or  her  immoral 
conduct,  then  the  preacher  will  give  his  right  hand  to  such,  as 
a  member  of  our  society,  and  with  consent  of  the  person,  the 
preacher  will  record  his  or  her  name  on  the  class  book ;  but  so  long 
as  any  person  cannot  answer  the  above  question  in  the  affirma- 
tive, such  person  shall  not  be  considered  in  full  membership,  and 
shall  have  no  vote  in  the  society. 

Every  member  of  this  society  shall  acknowledge  and  confess 
that  he  believes  the  Bible  to  be  and  contain  the  holy  Word  of 
God:  that  he  will  henceforth  strive,  with  all  his  heart,  to  seek  his 
eternal  welfare  in  Christ  Jesus,  and  work  out  his  salvation  with' 
fear  and  trembling,  to  the  end  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  Jlee 
from  the  wrath  to  come. 

Every  member  shall  endeavor  to  lead  a  good  life,  be  dilligent 
in  pra5'er,  particularly  in  private,  and,  for  his  own  edification, 
to  be  present  at  and  attend  to,  when  practicable,  all  meetings 
for  worship. 

Head?  of  families  should  never  omit  to  pray  with  their  families, 
morning  and  evening,  and  to  set  them  a  good  example  in  all  the 
Christian  virtues. 

Every  one  should  strive  to  walk  as  in  the  presence  of  God; 
also,  to  accustom  himself  to  a  close  communion  with  God,  in 
all  his  employments,  and  never  to  speak  evil  of  his  fellow  beings; 
but  to  practise  love  towards  friend  and  foe,  to  do  good  to  the  poor, 
and  and  to  endeavor  to  be  a  follower  of  Jesus  Christ  indeed. 

Every  one  shall  keep  the  Sabbath  day  holy,  as  required  in 
the  word  of  God. — Neither  buy  nor  sell,  but  spend  the  same  in 


212  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

exercises  of  devotion,  in  reading  and  hearing  the  word  of  God, 
and  with  singing  spiritual  hymns  to  the  honor  and  glory  of 
God. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  member  to  lead  a  quiet  peaceable  and 
godly  life  among  men,  as  it  becomes  a  Christian  to  live  in  peace; 
and  to  be  subject  to  the  higher  or  ruling  powers,  as  the  word 
of  God  requires. 

Every  member  of  our  society  should  willingly  and  freely 
contribute  something  quarterly,  "as  the  Lord  has  prospered 
him,"  I  Cor.  XVI,  2,  towards  the  support  of  the  itinerant 
preachers. 

The  foregoing  rules  are  drawn  up  for  the  better  regulation  of 
our  society;  and  we  believe  they  are  founded  in  the  word  of  God, 
and  incumbent  on  all  who  are  members  of  our  Church  to  observe. 
Should  any  habitually  neglect  them,  they  shall  be  admonished, 
and  if  they  do  not  reform  they  cannot  continue  among  us. 

SECTION   EIGHTH. 

FORMING  AND  MEETING  CLASSES. 

Whereas  it  is  made  the  duty  of  elders  and  preachers  to  form 
and  hold  class-meetings,  which  should  always  be  done  in  great 
moderation  and  meekness,  no  member  will  be  allowed  to  use  any 
means  to  prevent  an  elder  or  preacher  in  the  discharge  of  his  duty. 
A  member  doing  so,  shall  be  accountable  to  the  next  Quarterly 
Conference. 

SECTION  NINTH. 

CLASSES. 

I.  A  class  shall  consist  of  three  or  more  members,  who  shall 
annually  elect  one  member  from  their  own  or  some  other  class, 
who  shall  be  called  their  leader. 

Ost.     What  is  the  duty  of  a  leader. 

Ans.  It  shall  be  his  duty  to  meet  his  class  in  praj'er-meeting 
or  class-meeting,  at  least  once  a  week;  to  speak  to  them  concern- 
ing the  spiritual  welfare  of  their  souls,  and  to  exhort  them  to 
unity  and  love.  And  he  shall  extend  the  freedom  of  our  prayer 
and  class-meetings  to  all  sincere  and  well  disposed  persons  who 
may  desire  to  attend  them. 


DISCIPLINE  OF  1 84 1.  213 

II.  Every  class  shall  annually  elect  one  who  shall  be  called 
class  steward. 

Qst.     What  is  the  duty  of  a  steward  ? 

Ans.  I.  He  shall  collect  quarterly  contributions  for  the  sup- 
port of  the  traveling  preachers ;  keep  an  accurate  account  thereof, 
and  return  the  same  to  each  Quarterly  Conference. 

2.  He  shall  be  accountable  to  the  Quarterly  Conference,  for 
the  faithful  discharge  of  his  duties  as  steward  of  his  class. 

Qsi.     What  shall  be  done  in  case  of  immoral  conduct? 

Ans.  The  member  or  members  complained  of,  or  charged  with 
immorality,  shall  be  tried  by  the  class  to  which  they  belong,  or  a 
select  number  thereof  chosen  by  the  parties  concerned,  with  the 
preacher  in  charge  of  the  circuit  or  station,  who  shall  be  chair- 
man; and,  if  found  guilty,  the  accused  shall  be  expelled,  unless 
satisfaction  be  given  by  an  expression  of  repentance  or  other- 
wise. But,  should  any  member  be  dissatisfied  with  the  decision, 
an  appeal  may  be  had  to  the  quarterly  conference,  by  giving 
notice  thereof  to  the  preacher  in  charge.  In  such  case,  however, 
the  same  persons  shall  not  sit  in  judgment,  on  the  same  case. 

Qst.  What  shall  be  done  when  members  trespass  against  each 
other .'' 

A?is.  If  thy  brother  shall  trespass  against  thee,  go  and  tell 
him  his  fault  between  thee  and  him  alone;  if  he  shall  hear  thee, 
thou  hast  gained  thy  brother;  but,  if  he  will  not  hear  thee,  then 
take  with  thee  one  or  two  more;  and  if  he  shall  neglect  to  hear 
them,  tell  it  unto  the  church;  but  if  he  neglect  to  hear  the  church, 
let  him  be  unto  thee  as  a  heathen  man  and  a  publican. 

Qst.  What  shall  be  done,  in  casse  of  disputes  between  mem- 
bers or  preachers  ? 

Ans.  The  preacher  to  whom  it  shall  be  known,  shall  inquire 
into  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  and  shall  recommend  to  the 
contending  parties  a  reference  consisting  of  one  arbiter  chosen 
by  the  plaintiff  and  another  by  the  defendant,  and  a  third  by 
those  two;  then  these  three  are  to  decide. 

But,  if  either  be  dissatisfied  with  the  decision ;  such  may  have 
a  right  to  an  appeal  to  the  next  quarterly  Conference,  for  a 
second  arbitration ;  where  each  party  shall  choose  two  arbiters, 
and  the  four  shall  choose  a  fifth;  a  decision  of  a  majority  of 
whom  shall  be  final.  Any  person  refusing  to  abide  by  this 
decision;  and  every  member  refusing,  in  cases  of  debt  or  other 
disputes,  to  refer  the  matter  to  arbitration  when  recommended  to 


214  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

him  by  a  preacher  or  leader;  or  who  shall  enter  into  a  law  suit 
with  another  mem"Ber  before  these  measures  are  taken,  shall  be 
expelled;  except  when  the  case  is  of  such  a  nature,  as  to  require 
and  justify  a  process  at  law,  as  executors  or  administrators,  or 
when  a  member  is  in  danger  of  suflFering  an  unexpected  loss  of 
property. 

Every  class-leader  shall  keep  a  record  of  the  proceedings  of 
Church  trials,  deaths,  expulsions  aud  removals,  in  a  book  pro- 
vided for  that  purpose;  and  it  shall  be  his  duty,  in  case  of  an 
appeal,  to  send  said  record  to  the  Quarterly  Conference. 

Any  person  wishing  to  obtain  license  to  exhort  or  preach,  must 
obtain,  from  the  class  of  which  he  is  a  member,  by  a  vote  of  two 
thirds  of  the  members,  a  recommendation  in  writing  signed  by 
the  leader,  to  the  Quarterly  Conference,  of  his  circuit  or  station. 

SECTION  TENTH. 

PREACHERS'  DUTIES. 

Qst.    What  are  the  duties  of  preachers  ? 

Ans.  To  preach  Christ  crucified,  whenever  he  can  get  hearers; 
to  form  classes;  to  converse  with  the  luembers  on  the  spiritual 
condition  of  their  souls;  to  seek  to  administer  relief;  to  strengthen 
and  direct  those  that  are  aflQicted  and  labor  under  temptations; 
to  animate  the  indolent;  to  endeavor  as  much  as  possible  to 
edify  and  instruct  all  in  faith,  in  grace,  and  in  the  knowledge  of 
Jesus  Christ;  to  visit  the  sick  on  all  occasions;  to  strive  to  enforce 
and  confirm  the  doctrines  he  delivers,  by  a  well  ordered  and 
exemplary  life. 

Qst.    What  are  the  directions  given  to  our  preachers  ? 

Ans.  Be  diligent.  Never  trifle  away  j^our  time  unnecessarily; 
always  be  serious;  let  your  motto  be,  holiness  to  the  Lord.  Avoid 
all  lightness  and  jesting;  converse  sparingly;  conduct  yourself 
prudently  with  women;  and  demean  yourself,  in  all  respects,  as 
a  true  Christian. 

Be  at  all  times  averse  to  crediting  evil  reports;  believe  evil  of 
no  one,  without  good  evidence;  put  the  best  construction  on 
every  thing. 

2.  Speak  evil  of  no  one;  whatever  may  be  your  own  thoughts, 
keep  them  within  your  own  breast,  till  you  can  tell  the  person 
concerned  what  you  think  wrong  in  his  conduct. 

.^d.     Let  your  business  be  to  save  as  many  souls  as  possible. 


DISCIPLINE  OF   1841.  215 

To  this  employment  give  yourself  up  wholly.  Visit  those  who 
need  it;  and  act  in  all  things,  not  according  to  your  own  will, 
but  as  a  son  in  the  gospel.  For  as  such  it  becomes  your  duty, 
to  employ  your  time  in  the  manner  prescribed,  in  preaching  and 
visiting  from  house  to  house,  in  instruction  and  prayer,  and  in 
meditating  on  the  word  of  God;  with  these  be  occupied  until  our 
I,ord  Cometh. 

SECTION  ELEVENTH. 

CIRCUIT  PREACHERS'  DUTIES. 

Qst.    What  are  the  duties  of  a  circuit  preacher .? 
Ans.  I.    To  take  the  circuit  assigned  him,  willingly. 

2.  To  attend  the  appointments  on  his  circuit,  regularly; 
preach  to  the  people;  and  hold  society -meetings,  wherever  it  is 
acceptable  with  the  people. 

3.  The  preacher  in  charge  is  to  see  that  there  are  suitable 
persons  appointed  in  each  class,  as  stewards,  leader  or  leaders. 

4.  To  read  the  following  three  sections  of  our  discipline, 
every  six  months,  in  each  class,  viz: —  The  Confession  of  Faith; 
The  Duty  of  Members;  and  the  Duty  of  Leaders  a?id  Stewards. 

5.  To  sit  as  president  on  the  trial  of  members,  and  see  that  a 
correct  account  of  the  same  is  kept. 

6.  To  render  a  strict  account  of  the  condition  of  his  circuit, 
to  the  Presiding  Elder,  at  each  Quarterly  Conference,  where  he 
is  to  be  held  accountable  for  the  neglect  of  any  regular  appoint- 
ments on  his  circuit. 

7.  To  give  charge  to  all  local  agents  of  the  Religious  Tele- 
scope, to  keep  an  account  of  all  its  subscribers  in  their  respective 
neighborhoods. 

8.  To  make  settlement  with  the  local  agents,  every  six 
months,  and  render  an  account  thereof  to  the  district  agent. 

8.  To  make  out  a  list  of  all  the  appointments  on  his  circuit, 
and  present  it  to  the  Presiding  Elder  at  each  Annual  Conference, 
for  the  convenience  of  his  successor. 

SECTION  TWELFTH. 

ORDINATION  OF  ELDERS. 

I.  On  the  day  appointed  there  shall  be  a  suitable  sermon  or 
exhortation  delivered. 


2l6  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

II.  After  their  names  have  been  read  aloud,  the  Bishop  or  Elder 
shall  read  the  following  articles  to  all  who  may  be  chosen  for 
ordination : 

An  Elder  must  be  blameless,  as  the  steward  of  God,  not  self 
willed,  not  soon  angry;  not  given  to  wine,  no  striker  not  given 
to  filthy  lucre.  But  a  lover  of  hospitality,  a  lover  of  good  men, 
sober,  just,  holy,  temperate;  holding  fast  the  faithful  word  as  he 
hath  been  taught,  that  he  may  be  able  by  sound  doctrine  both 
to  exhort  and  convince  the  gainsayers.     Ti.  i ;  7—9. 

Qst.  Do  you  trust  that  you  are  inwardly  moved  by  the  Holy 
Ghost,  to  take  upon  you  the  ofl&ce  of  the  ministry,  to  serve  God 
in  the  Church  of  Christ,  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  his  holy 
name? 

A7ts.     I  trust  I  am. 

Qst.  Do  you  believe  the  Holy  Scriptures;  old  and  new  Testa- 
ment? 

Ans.     I  do  believe  them. 

Qst.  Will  you  apply  all  your  diligence  to  frame  and  fashion 
your  life  according  to  the  doctrines  of  Christ;  and  to  make 
yourself,  as  much  as  in  you  lieth,  a  wholesome  example  of  the 
flock  of  Christ? 

Ans.     I  will,  the  Lord  being  my  helper. 

Qst.  Will  you  obey  them  to  whom  the  charge  and  govern- 
ment over  you  is  committed,  and  follow  their  godly  admoni- 
tions with  a  willing  and  read}^  mind. 

Ans.     I  will  endeavor,  through  the  grace  of  God,  so  to  do. 

Then  prayer  is  to  be  offered. 

(After  prayer  the  Bishop  and  Elders  shall  lay  their  hands  upon 
the  heads  of  every  one  of  them,  and  say:) 

"Take  thou  authority  to  execute  the  office  of  an  Elder  in  the 
Church  of  God,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  the  Son,  and  the 
Holy  Ghost:    Amen." 

( Hereupon  the  Bis  hop  or  Elder  shall  deliver  to  every  one  of 
them  the  Holy  Bible,  saying:) 

"Take  thou  authority  to  read  and  preach  the  word  of  God  in 
the  Church  of  Christ." 

Then  the  Bishop  or  Elder  shall  pray.— And  after  prayer  he 
shall  read  from  Luke,  12  C.  35  to  38,  v  : )  Let  your  loins  be  girded 
about,  and  your  lights  burning,  and  ye  yourselves  like  unto 
men  that  wait  for  their  Lord,  when  he  shall  return  from  the  wed- 
ding; that  when  he  cometh  and  knocketh,  they  may  open  unto 


DISCIPLINE  OF  '184 1.  217 

him  immediately. — Blessed  are  those  servants,  whom  the  Lord, 
when  he  cometh,  shall  find  watching.  Verily  I  say  unto  you, 
that  he  shall  gird  himself,  and  make  them  sit  down  to  meat,  and 
will  come  forth  and  serve  them.  And  if  he  shall  come  in  the 
second  watch,  or  come  in  the  third  watch,  and  find  them  so, 
blessed  are  those  servants." 

(After  this  the  following  benediction  is  to  be  pronounced:) 
The  peace  of  God  keep  your  hearts  and  mi?ids  i?i  the  knowledge 
of  fesus  Christ  our  Lord:    A  tnen . 

SECTION  THIRTEENTH. 
ELDERS,  THEIR  ELECTION,  ORDINATION  AND  DUTY. 

Qst.     How  is  an  Elder  constituted  ? 

Ans.  After  a  probation  of  three  years,  a  preacher  may  be 
presented  to  the  yearly  Conference,  for  consideration ;  and  if  on 
examination  by  the  Conference,  he  should  be  chosen  as  an  Elder, 
he  may,  by  the  imposition  of  hands,  be  ordained  by  a  Bishop 
and  two  Elders.  It  shall,  however,  be  the  privilege  of  and  Annual 
Conference,  to  grant  a  permit  to  licentiates,  to  perform  the  ordi- 
nance of  baptism,  and  administer  the  sacrament  where  circum- 
stances make  it  necessary. 

2.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  Elder? — To  preach  as  often  as  he 
can,  and  to  baptise;  and  assist  the  Presiding  Elder  to  administer 
the  Lord's  supper;  but  when  the  Presiding  Elder  cannot  attend, 
then  one  or  two  Elders  shall  perform  this  duty;  he  shall  also 
perform  all  parts  of  divine  worship;  endeavor  to  establish  and 
hold  class-meetings,  and  assist  in  the  election  of  leaders  and 
stewards. 

3.  Where  a  local  Elder  or  preacher,  who  does  not  suffer  want 
himself,  preaches  at  a  place,  where  no  travelling  preacher  comes 
to,  he  shall  make  collections — take  a  catalogue  thereof,  and 
bring  or  send  it  to  the  Presiding  Elder  or  to  the  Conference,  for 
the  support  of  needy  preachers  who  preach  among  poor  people. 

4.  Should  a  traveling  Preachers  or  Elder  desire  to  leave  the 
district  assigned  him,  he  must  first  acquaint  the  Presiding  Elder 
of  his  intention  by  writing;  and  should  any  one  leave  or  neglect 
his  station,  except  it  be  through  sickness  or  other  unavoidable 
circumstances,  he  shall  be  accountable  to  the  next  annual  Con- 
ference, and  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  salary  for  the  time  he 
may  have  traveled  during  the  year. 


2l8  UNITED    BRETHREN    DISCIPLINES. 

6.  Where  there  are  preachers  found  to  be  settled  at  a  place, 
who  are  poor  and  indigent,  and  yet  required  to  preach,  it  is 
reasonable  and  just  that  the  Elders  should  provide  for  their 
support  in  proportion  to  the  time  thej'  may  be  employed,  and 
by  making  a  collection  for  their  benefit  among  the  societies  in 
their  District;  though  not  to  exceed  the  sum  fixed  and  alloted 
to  the  traveling  preachers. 


SECTION   EOURTEENTH 

PRESIDING  ELDERS— ELECTION  AND  DUTY. 

Qsi.     How  are  the  Presiding  Elders  to  be  elected  ? 

Ans.  They  shall  be  elected  by  the  Annual  Conferences,  from 
among  the  elders,  for  one  year. 

Qst.     What  are  the  duties  of  a  Presiding  Elder  ? 

Ans.  I.  To  travel  through  the  District  apppointed  him;  and 
to  preach  as  often  as  he  can. 

2.  He  is  to  take  charge  of  the  traveling  and  local  preachers 
in  his  district;  and  to  see  that  they  conduct  themselves  as  becometh 
the  Gospel. 

3.  He  shall  appoint  the  quarterly  and  camp  meetings;  and, 
if  possible,  attend  them:  he  shall  hold  Quarterly  Conferences 
with  the  preachers,  exhorters,  leaders  and  stewards,  and  admin- 
ister the  ordinances  of  God's  house:  he  shall  enquire  and 
examine  whether  the  traveling  and  local  preachers  do  their  duty; 
and  particularly,  whether  the  local  preachers,  when  practicable, 
preach  every  Sabbath.  And  where  there  are  several,  he  is  at 
times,  to  change  them  as  may  seem  most  beneficial,  and  to 
exhort  them  to  maintain  discipline  and  order,  love  and  serious- 
ness in  the  society. 

4.  He  can  also,  in  conjunction  with  two  elders,  preachers,  ex- 
horters, or  leaders,  (one  from  each  circuit,)  change  the  preachers 
in  his  district.  Should  any  circuit  be  found  without  a  traveling 
preacher,  it  shall  be  his  duty  to  employ  a  preacher  to  travel  on 
that  circuit  until  the  next  Annual  Conference. 

5.  And  should  any  district  happen  to  be  without  a  Presiding 
Elder,  information  shall  immediately  be  given  to  a  Bishop,  who 
shall  appoint  an  elder  to  preside  in  said  district,  until  the  ensu- 
ing Annual  Conference. 


discipline;  of  1841.  219 

SECTION  FIFTEENTH. 
BISHOPS— ELECTION     AND  DUTIES. 

Qst.     How  are  the  Bishops  to  be  elected? 

A?is.  The  General  Conference  shall  elect  them  by  a  majority 
of  votes;  yet,  the  Conference  may,  at  their  option  retain  the 
former  Bishops  four  years  longer.  The  newly  elected,  how- 
ever, as  well  as  those  retained,  must  be  capable  of  attending 
the  conferences  appointed  them;  otherwise  they  cannot  be 
elected. 

Qst.    What  are  the  duties  of  Bishops  ? 

Ans.  I.  To  preside  over  the  Annual  and  General  Confer- 
ences. 

2.  In  conjunction  with  the  Presiding  Elders,  of  the  past  and 
present  years,  they  are  to  fix  the  appointments  of  the  traveling 
preachers  for  the  several  circuits:  Provided,  that  they  do  not 
allow  any  itinerant  preacher  to  remain  in  the  same  station  or 
circuit  more  than  three  consecutive  years;  unless  particular  cir- 
cumstances require  it;  and  then  only,  with  the  consent  of  the 
Conference. 

3.  The  Bishops  in  conjunction  with  two  elders  appointed  by 
Conference,  shall  point  out  the  districts  which  are  to  be  traveled 
by  the  Presiding  Elders. 

4.  They  are  to  attend  to  and  oversee  the  spiritual  concerns  of 
the  Church. 

5.  It  is  incumbent  on  them  to  perform  the  rites  of  ordina- 
tion. 

6.  When  a  Bishop  ceases  or  neglects  to  attend  the  several 
Conferences  committed  to  his*  charge,  he  cannot  be  suffered  to 
retain  his  office;  unless  prevented  by  sickness  or  other  unavoid- 
able circumstances. 

7.  If  our  Church  should,  at  anytime,  be  destitute  of  a  Bishop, 
a  Chairman  shall  be  elected  from  among  the  elders  at  each  An- 
nual Conference.  Each  Chairman  shall  attend  the  next  succeed- 
ing Conference,  in  conjunction  with  the  Chairman  there  elected; 
that  a  regular  correspondence  be  maintained  until  the  ensuing 
General  Conference. 

8.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Bishops  to  see  that  a  suitable 
sermon  be  delivered  to  the  preachers  present  at  each  Annual 
Conference. 


220  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION  SIXTEENTH. 

IMMORAL  CONDUCT  OF  PREACHERS. 

Qst.  What  shall  be  done  when  a  Bishop,  Presiding  Elder, 
or  preacher,  is  reported  of  being  guilty  of  immorality? 

Ans.  When  a  Bishop  is  thus  accused,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  a 
Presiding  Elder  and  an  Elder  after  being  duly  notified,  to 
enquire  into  and  examine  whether  it  is  founded  in  truth. 
But  as  the  apostle  says:  "Receive  not  an  accusation  against 
an  Elder,  but  before  two  or  three  witnesses,"  i.  Tim.  V.  19., 
they  shall  not  arraign  him  on  mere  vague  reports;  but  if  it 
appears  that  he  is  justly  accused,  they  shall  arraign  him;  take 
down  their  proceedings  in  writing,  and  send  a  cop3^  thereof  to 
the  Bishop  accused,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the 
accusers  and  the  accused  shall  meet;  where  the  case  shall  be 
tried  by  two  Presiding  Elders  and  three  Elders:  and  if  he  is  found 
guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace  until  the  sitting  of  the  Annual 
Conference  next  ensuing,  who  shall  again  examine  and  try  the 
said  case.  And  if  again  found  guilty,  he  shall  be  suspended  or 
expelled,  as  the  case  may  require. 

2.  When  a  Presiding  Elder  is  thus  accused,  it  shall  be  the 
duty  of  the  nearest  Elder  and  a  preacher,  to  enquire  into  and 
examine  the  same;  and  if  the  accused  be  found  guilt}^  they 
shall  take  down  their  proceedings  in  writing  and  send  the 
accused  a  copy  thereof,  and  appoint  a  time  and  place  where  the 
accusers  and  the  accused  .shall  meet;  and  in  the  absence  of  the 
Bishop,  another  Presiding  Elder  and  two  Elders,  shall  examine 
the  charge;  and  if  he  is  found  guilty,  he  shall  hold  his  peace, 
until  the  next  Annual  Conference;  where  he  shall  be  accountable. 

3.  When  an  elder  or  preacher  is  charged  with  immoral  con- 
duct, the  preacher  to  whom  it  is  known,  shall  take  with  him 
another  preacher  exhorter,  or  leader,  and  examine  into  the 
charge:  Should  he  be  found  guilt}',  notice  thereof  shall  be 
given  him,  and  a  time  and  place  appointed  where  the  accusers 
and  the  accused  shall  meet.  Then  three  elders  or  preachers 
shall  try  his  case,  who  are  to  be  appointed  by  the  parties  con- 
cerned, each  party  appointing  one,  and  the  two  a  third;  and  if 
he  be  convicted,  he  shall  hold  his  peace,  till  the  Annual  Confer- 
ence, where  he  shall  be  accountable.  But  should  sufiicient 
satisfaction  be  given,  in  either  of  the  foregoing  cases,  by  an 


DISCIPLINE  OF   184I.  221 

expression  of  repentance,  or  otherwise,  they  may  be  retained,  if 
considered  expedient.  But  should  the  accused  Preacher,  Elder 
or  Bishop  refuse  to  attend,  after  having  been  notified  of  the  time 
and  place  of  trial,  he  shall  be  suspended;  and  the  committee 
shall  notify  him  to  appear  at  the  next  quarterly  or  Annual  Con- 
ference, to  answer  to  the  charges  preferred  against  him ;  and  if  he 
fails  to  attend,  (sickness  or  unavoidable  circumstances  excepted,) 
he  shall  be  suspended  or  expelled,  as  conference  may  think 
proper. 

SECTION  SEVENTEENTH. 

PREACHERS'  SALARIES. 

1.  The  annual  allowance  of  a  traveling  Bishop,  or  Preacher, 
if  he  has  no  family,  shall  be  one  hundred  dollars,  and  his 
traveling  expenses,  if  he  has  a  family,  it  shall  be  two  hundred 
dollars,  his  traveling  expenses,  and  house  rent  not  exceeding 
forty  dollars. 

2.  "When  a  traveling  preacher  has  a  family  of  children,  the 
Quarterly  Conference  of  his  Circuit,  is,  in  that  case,  to  grant 
him  such  an  allowance  in  addition  to  that  above  stated,  as  in 
their  judgdment,  will  supply  the  wants  of  his  family. 

Qst.  What  shall  be  done  for  the  needy,  superannuated  or  worn 
out,  traveling  preachers,  and  for  their  widows  and  orphans? 

Ans.  The  dividend  falling  to  the  different  Conferences  from 
the  benevolent  fund,  shall  be  appropriated  to  their  support. — 
Provided  it  be  strictly  observed  that  the  Benevolent  Fund  money 
shall  not  be  appropriated  to  any  other  purpose. 

If  there  are  no  such  claimants  as  the  above  specified,  it  shall 
be  retained  by  the  Conference  from  year  to  year,  until  such  cases 
do  occur.  And  in  case  the  Annual  Conference  shall,  upon 
evidence  received,  be  satisfied  that  there  are  such  claimants,  it 
shall  be  the  duty  of  Conference  to  appoint  a  committee,  one  of 
whom  shall  be  a  Bishop,  to  divide  said  fund.  Provided,  however, 
that  a  superannuated  preacher  shall  be  allowed  no  more  annually, 
than  one  hundred  and  fifty  dollars,  if  married,  and  no  more  than 
seventy-five  dollars,  if  unmarried:  widows,  no  more,  annually, 
than  seventy-five  dollars:  and  an  orphan,  no  more  than  twenty, 
while  under  twelve  years  of  age. 

Preachers'  Presents. — Every  traveling  preacher  in  our  society 
shall  3^earl5^  account  to  the  Conference  for  all  the  presents  he  may 


222  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

have  received  on  his  circuit  to  the  amount  of  one  dollar  or  more, 
for  the  use  of  himself  or  family.  And  if  the  Conference  be 
satisfied  that  any  circuit  has  given  presents  instead  of  col- 
lections, or  that  the  preacher  endeavored  to  get  such,  in  place 
of  collections,  in  such  case,  presents  shall  be  considered  col- 
lections, by  the  Conference.  But,  if  on  examination,  this 
should  not  appear,  then  those  preachers  having  received  presents 
shall  hold  them  as  their  own;  and  in  addition,  receive  all  the 
discipline  allows  them. 

SECTION  EIGHTEENTH. 

MARRIAGE  CEREMONY. 
ADDRESS. 

We  are  gathered  together  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  in  the 
presence  of  these  witnesses,  to  join  together  N.  and  M.  as  husband 
and  wife,  if  anj'  persons  present  know  any  just  cause  or  impedi- 
ment why  these  persons  should  not  be  joined  in  marriage, 
let  the  same  now  speak,  or  for  ever  hereafter  keep  silent. 

( If  no  impediment  be  alleged,  then  shall  the  minister  say  unto 
the  man:) 

N.  Wilt  thou  have  this  woman  to  thy  wedded  wife,  to  live 
together  after  God's  ordinance.  Wilt  thou  love,  honor,  and 
comfort  her,  in  sickness  and  in  health,  in  prosperity  and  ad- 
versity; and  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto  her,  so  long 
as  ye  both  shall  live.  If  so  then  answer,  Yes.  ( Then  shall  the 
Minister  say  to  the  woman:)  M.  wilt  thou  have  this  man,  to 
thy  wedded  husband,  to  live  together  after  God's  ordinance. 
Wilt  thou  love,  honor  and  obey  him,  in  sickness  and  in  health, 
in  prosperity  and  adversity;  and  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee 
only  unto  him  so  long  as  ye  both  shall  live.  If  so,  then 
answer.  Yes. 

(Then  the  Minister  shall  require  them  to  join  their  right  hands 
together,  and  say:) 

Those  whom  God  hath  joined  together,  let  not  man  put 
asunder. 

In  as  much  as  N.  and  M.  have  consented  together  in  marriage; 
and  have  witnessed  the  same  before  God  and  these  witnesses, 
I  pronounce  them  husband  and  wife,  in  the  name  of  the  Father, 
the  Son,  and  Holy  Ghost:    Amen. 


DISCIPLINE  OP   184I.  223 

SECTION  NINETEETH. 

NECESSITY  OF  UNION  AMONG  OURSELVES. 

IvCt  us  be  deeply  sensible  (from  what  we  have  known,)  of  the 
evil  of  a  division  in  principle  spirit  or  practice;  and  of  the  dreadful 
consequences  to  ourselves  and  others.  If  we  are  united,  what  can 
stand  before  us  ?  If  we  are  divided,  we  shall  injure  ourselves,  the 
work  of  God,  and  the  souls  of  our  people. 

What  can  be  done  in  order  to  a  closer  union  with  each  other? 

1.  Let  us  be  deeply  convinced  of  the  absolute  necessity  of  it. 

2.  Pray  earnestly  for,  and  speak  truly  and  freely  to  each 
other. 

3.  When  we  meet  let  us  never  part  without  prayer. 

4.  Take  great  care  not  to  despise  each  others  gifts. 

5.  Never  speak  lightly  of  each  other. 

6.  Let  us  defend  each  other's  characters,  in  every  thing,  so  far 
as  is  consistent  with  truth. 

7.  Labor,  in  honor,  each,  to  prefer  another  before  himself. 

8.  We  recommend  a  serious  examination  of  the  causes,  evils 
and  cures  of  heart  and  church  divisions. 

SECTION  TWENTIETH. 

VISITING  FROM  HOUSE  TO  HOUSE,  AND  ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL  RELIGION. 

Qst.     How  can  we  further  assist  those  under  our  care  ? 

Ans.  I.  By  instructing  them  at  their  own  houses;  which  is 
necessary  to  promote  confidence  and  communion  with  God 
among  us,  to  wean  us  from  the  love  of  the  world,  and  to  inure 
us  to  a  life  of  heavenly  mindedness;  also,  to  encourage 
us  to  strive  after  and  practise  brotherly  love,  that  no  evil  think- 
ing or  judging  of  one  another  be  found  among  us;  and  lastly 
that  we  may  learn  to  do,  as  we  would  wish  to  be  done  unto. 

2.  Every  preacher  should  make  it  his  duty  to  instruct  the 
people  on  every  occasion,  both  public  and  private;  and  exhort 
them  to  be  dilligent  in  all  good  works  and  doctrine.  Until  this 
be  done  and  that  in  sincerity,  we  shall,  upon  the  whole,  be  of 
but  little  use,  and  our  good  shall  be  evil  spoken  of;  therefore, 
wherever  we  may  be  we  should  guard  against  useless  and  idle 
conversation. 


224  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

Undoubtedly  this  private  application  of  visiting  from  house  to 
house,  and  exhorting  the  people,  is  found  or  implied  in  these 
solemn  words  of  the  Apostle: 

I  charge  thee  therefore  before  God,  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ 
who  shall  judge  the  quick  and  dead  at  his  appearing  and  his 
kingdom;  preach  the  word;  be  instant  in  season  and  out  of 
season;  reprove,  rebuke,  exhort,  with  all  long  suffering  and  doc- 
trine.    2.  Tim.  IV.  I.  2. 

SECTION  TWENTY-FIRST. 

INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN. 

What  shall  be  done  to  benefit  the  rising  generation  ? 

Let  him  who  is  in  any  way  zealous  for  God  and  the  souls 
of  men,  begin  the  work  without  delay.  Wherever  children  are 
found,  meet  them  as  often  as  possible;  speak  freely  with  them, 
and  instruct  them  diligentlj';  exhort  them  to  be  good,  and 
pray  with  them,  earnestly  yet  simplj^  and  plainl3\  that  they 
may  learn  to  know  their  Creator  and  Redeemer  in  the  days 
of  their  youth. 

SECTION   TWENTY-SECOND. 

DOCTRINAL   PUBLICATIONS. 

No  one  of  our  preachers  or  laymen,  shall  become  the  author 
of  any  Doctrinal  Book  or  pamphlet,  in  a  printed  form  without 
the  approbation  of  the  Annual  Conference,  orof  a  committee  chosen 
by  the  same.  And  if  any  preacher  or  layman  violates  this  rule, 
he  shall  be  accountable  to  the  class,  or  to  the  Quarterly  or 
Annual  Conference,  as  the  case  may  be. 

SECTION    TWENTY-THIRD. 

OATHS. 

We  believe  that  the  mode  of  testifying  to  the  truth,  when 
required  so  to  do,  in  a  legal  form,  by  way  of  affirmation,  is  on 
us  solemnly,  conscientiously,  and  fully  binding  before  God  to  tell 
the  truth,  the  whole  truth,  and  nothing  but  the  truth. 


DISCIPLINE   OF    1841.  225 

SECTION  TWENTY-FOURTH. 

ARDENT  SPIRITS. 

The  distilling  and  vending  of  ardent  spirits  shall  hereafter  be 
forbidden  throughout  our  whole  society.  Should  any  preacher, 
exhorter,  leader,  or  layman,  from  and  after  the  next  Annual 
Conference  in  1842,  be  engaged  in  distilling  or  vending  ardent 
spirits,  he  shall  be  accountable  to  the  class,  the  Quarterly  or 
Annual  Conference  to  which  he  belongs,  as  the  case  may  be.  If 
the  offending  brother  be  an  exhorter,  leader,  or  layman,  it  shall 
be  the  duty  of  the  preacher  in  charge,  to  admonish  him  in 
meekness;  if  he  be  a  preacher,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Presid- 
ing Officer  of  a  Quarterly  or  Annual  Conference  to  admonish 
him  to  desist  from  his  unholy  employment;  and  if  all  friendly 
admonitions  fail,  such  oflfending  person  or  persons  shall  no  more 
be  considered  as  members  of  our  church,  but  be  expelled  from 
the  same. — Provided,  however,  that  this  rule  shall  not  be  so 
construed,  as  to  prevent  druggists  and  others  from  vending  for 
medicinal  or  mechanical  purposes. 

SECTION  TWENTY-FIFTH. 

FREE  MASONRY. 

Free  Masonry,  in  every  sense  of  the  word,  shall  be  totally 
prohibited,  and  in  no  wise  tolerated  in  our  society.  And 
should  any  of  our  members  continue  to  attend  their  lodges, 
or  join  as  a  member,  in  any  Masonic  procession,  or  otherwise 
join  a  Masonic  fraternity,  he  shall,  for  so  doing,  be  excluded 
from  our  church. 

SECTION  TWENTY-SIXTH. 

SLAVERY. 

All  slaver^',  in  everj-  sense  of  the  word,  is  totally  prohibited, 
and  shall  in  no  wa)%  be  tolerated  in  our  church.  Should  any  be 
found  in  our  society,  who  hold  slaves,  they  cannot  continue  as 
members,  unless  they  do  personally  manumit  or  set  free  such 

slaves. 

15 


226  UNITED  BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

SECTION  TWENTY-SEVENTH. 

RULES  AND  REGULATIONS,  OF  OUR  PRINTING  ESTABLISHMENT 
IN  CIRCLEVILLE,  OHIO. 

RULE  I. 

ist.  The  above  establishment  shall  be  called  the  Conference 
Printing  Establishment  of  the  United  Brethren  In  Christ. 

2d.  The  legislative  authority,  herein  granted,  is  vested  in 
the  General  Conference  of  said  Church;  whose  duty  it  is,  to 
make  or  amend  any  rules,  as  in  their  judgment,  may  seem 
expedient. 

3d.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  General  Conference,  to  appoint  or 
elect  three  Trustees,  every  four  years;  and  also,  to  employ  an 
Editor  and  Treasurer. 

4th.  If  a  vac  ancy  should  occur  in  the  Editorial  or  Treasury 
Department,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Trustees  to  employ  some 
other  suitable  person  or  persons,  to  fill  said  vacancy,  until  the 
sitting  of  the  next  General  Conference. 

5th.  In  case  a  vacancy  in  the  Board  of  Trustees  should  occur, 
it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  remaining  two,  to  appoint  a  third 
person,  to  fill  the  vacancy,  until  the  sitting  of  the  next  General 
Conference. 

6th.  The  proceeds  of  said  establishment,  over  and  above  con- 
tingent expenses,  shall  be  applied  to  the  traveling  and  worn  out 
preachers,  and  their  widows  and  orphans,  to  be  equally  divided 
annually,  among  the  different  Annual  Conferences. 

RULE  II. 

ist.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Trustees,  to  make  settlement 
with  the  Treasurer  and  Editor,  every  six  months;  and  cause  the 
Treasurer  to  make  out  a  report  to  each  Annual  Conference,  of 
the  Scioto  District;  and  also,  to  make  a  special  report  to  each 
General  Conference. 

2d.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Scioto  Annual  Conference,  in 
the  interval  of  the  sessions  of  the  General  Conference,  to  see 
that  the  Editor,  Treasurer  and  Trustees  discharge  their  ofl&cial 
duties  as  required. 

3rd.  On  impeachment  of  an}'  of  the  above  named  officers  it 
shall  be  the  duty  of  the  above  named  Annual  Conference,  to 
examine  into  said  impeachment;  and  if  guilty,  in  their  opinion, 


DISCIPLINE  OF   184I.  227 

to  dismiss  them  and  supply  the  vacancy,  until  the  sitting  of  the 
next  General  Conference. 

RULE  III. 

I  St.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Editor,  to  pay  strict  attention  to 
all  communications  sent  for  insertion;  to  revise  them,  if  neces- 
sary, and  then  insert  them.  But,  if  he  should  receive  any, 
which,  in  his  opinion,  are  repugnant  to  the  doctrine  and  rules 
of  our  church,  he  shall  present  them  to  the  Treasurer,  or  to  one 
or  more  of  the  trustees;  and  if  rejected  by  them,  they  shall 
be  withheld;  otherwise,  inserted. 

2nd.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Editor,  to  write  editorial  for 
each  number  of  the  paper;  and  to  attend  strictly  to  the  reading 
of  proof-sheet,  making  selections,  &c. 

3d.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Editor  to  keep  a  general  over- 
sight over  the  hands  in  the  ofl&ce;  and  to  see  that  they  do  not 
spend  their  time  in  idleness. 

4th.  The  Trustees  shall  have  a  general  oversight  over  the 
Editor  and  Treasurer,  and  see  that  they  discharge  their  duty; 
and  if  they  do  not  they  may  be  suspended,  until  the  sitting  of 
the  next  Annual  Conference,  which  shall  determine  the  matter; 
in  which  case  said  Trustees  shall  supply  the  vacancy  for  the  time 
being. 

RULE  IV. 

ist.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Treasurer  to  take  charge  of  the 
temporal  concerns  of  the  office;  to  keep  all  the  books  pertaining 
thereunto;  to  furnish,  at  the  direction  of  the  Trustees,  such  ma- 
terials as  may  be  needed  at  all  times;  and  to  act  as  general 
book-agent  under  the  instruction  of  said  Trustees. 

2d.  The  Treasurer,  when  not  employed  in  his  official  duties, 
shall  work  in  the  office  as  a  hand. 

3d.  The  Trustees  shall  have  privilege  to  make  any  by-laws, 
that  may  seem  expedient  to  them,  for  the  better  regulation  of 
the  minor  concerns  of  the  office:  provided,  they  do  not  violate 
anj'^  part  of  the  above  rules. 

SECTION   TWENTY-EIGHTH. 

BOOK  AGENCY 

ist.  There  shall  be  a  Book  Agent  appointed  in  each  Annual 
Conference  district,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  take  charge  of  all 


228  UNITED   BRETHREN   DISCIPLINES. 

books  sent  to  him  by  the  Treasurer  of,  and  appertaining  to,  the 
Conference  Printing  Establishment  in  Circleville  Ohio. 

2d.  Said  Agent  shall  be  accountable  to  the  Treasurer  of  said 
establishment. 

3d.  It  shall  be  his  duty,  so  far  as  may  be  safe  or  expedient, 
to  distribute  to  the  circuit  preachers,  for  the  use  of  the  church, 
all  the  books  that  may  be  sent  to  him  by  the  Treasurer. 

4th.  Said  Agent  shall  keep  an  accurate  account  of  all  the 
distributions  of  'books,  and  collections  of  money,  for  and  in 
behalf  of,  said  establishment.  If  books  are  wanted  in  his  dis- 
trict, he  is  to  notify  the  Treasurer  by  letter. 

5th.  Said  Agent  shall  make  settlement  with  the  Treasurer, 
by  letter  or  otherwise,  every  six  months. 

SECTION  TWENTY-NINTH. 

ORDER  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  BUILDING  MEETING  HOUSES. 

Qst.  Is  any  thing  advisable  in  regard  to  the  building  of 
Meeting  Houses? 

A71S.  Let  all  our  meeting  houses  be  built  plainly  and  neatly 
with  free  seats,  and  not  more  expensive  than  necessary. 

Qst  To  whom  are  our  meeting  houses,  and  the  premises  be- 
longing to  them,  to  be  deeded  ? 

Ans.  To  a  board  of  Trustees,  and  their  successors  in  office, 
in  trust,  as  the  property  of  the  Church  of  the  United  Brethren 
in  Christ. 

Qst.     How  is  a  board  of  Trustees  constituted .? 

Ans.  Whenever  it  is  contemplated,  by  a  society,  to  purchase 
or  to  build  a  Meeting  House,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  a  leader  or 
steward  of  such  society,  to  make  it  known  to  the  Quarterly 
Conference  of  the  Circuit  or  station  to  which  he  belongs,  whose 
duty  it  shall  be  to  appoint  a  judicious  board  of  Trustees,  of  not 
less  than  three  in  number.  Provided  however,  that  none  be 
required  to  serve  more  than  four  years,  unless  indispensably 
necessary.  No  person  shall  be  considered  eligible  as  a  Trustee 
for  any  of  our  Meeting  Houses,  who  is  not  a  regular  member 
of  our  Church. 

Qst.     How  are  the  Trustees  to  proceed  in  building  a  house  ? 

Ans.  They  shall  form  an  estimate  of  the  amount  necessary 
to  procure  a  lot,  to  build,  and  to  make  such  other  improvements 


DISCIPLINE  OF   184I.  229 

as  may  be  conceived  necessary.  However,  they  shall  not  com- 
mence building,  until  two  thirds  of  the  money  according  to  such 
est  imate  shall  have  been  secured  or  subscribed  and  also  a  lawful 
title  for  the  lot  upon  which  they  intend  to  build. 

To  hold  annual  meetings  and  keep  a  fair  and  regular  record  of 
the  transactions  of  their  Board,  in  a  book  provided  for  that  pur- 
pose, which  shall  at  all  times  be  open  for  inspection  by  the 
Quarterly  Conference  of  said  circuit  or  station. 

To  take  care  of  the  meeting  house  property,  furniture,  prem- 
ises, burial  ground,  &c. 

Qst.  What  shall  be  done  when  a  vacancy  or  vacancies  occur 
in  the  Board  of  Trustees  ? 

A7ts.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Quarterly  Conference  to  ap- 
point a  suitable  person  or  persons,  to  fill  such  vacancies. 

Qst.  What  shall  be  done  when  any  of  our  houses  are 
vacant  ? 

Ans.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  a  Quarterly  Conferance  of  the 
nearest  circuit  to  appoint,  not  less  than  three  suitable  persons 
for  Trustees,  who  shall  have  the  power,  when  authorized  by  two 
thirds  of  the  members  of  that  Conference,  to  lease,  rent  or  sell, 
such  meeting  house,  and  the  appurtenances  belonging  to  it; 
and  to  appropriate  the  money  arising  from  such  lease,  rent,  or 
sale,  to  what  said  Conference  may  direct. 

Note. — The  trustees  should  be  careful,  in  all  cases,  to  have 
deeds  of  conveyance  legally  executed,  and  recorded  in  the 
county  records  where  the  property  is:  that  is;  to  have  the  deed 
made  to  them  and  to  their  successors  in  ofiice,  in  trust  for,  the 
Church  of  the  United  Brethren  In  Christ  and,  to  erect  and 
build  or  cause  to  be  built,  a  house  of  worship  for  the  use  of  the 
members  of  said  Church. 


SECTION  THIRTIETH. 

CERTIFICATES. 

Members  of  our  society  moving  to  other  places  and  seeking 
admission  there,  shall  procure  such  a  certificate  as  this;  signed 
by  a  leader  or  preacher.  "This  is  to  certify  that  A.  B.  is  a  mem- 
ber of  good  standing,  in  the  church  of  the  United  Brethren  In 
Christ,  at 

(Date,  &c.) 


230  UNITED  BRETHREN  DISCIPLINES. 

Preachers  removing'  from  one  Conference  district  to  another, 
shall  when  they  apply  to  another  Conference  for  admission,  pro- 
duce a  transfer  from  the  Conference  to  which  he  formerly 
belonged. 

CORRECTION. 

In  the  second  article  of  Constitution,  page  14,  read — 
"Sec.  8. — The  right  of  appeal  shall  be  inviolate." 
[This  section  appears  to  have  been  overlooked  by  the  Secre- 
taries.] 


DISCIPLINE  OF  184I.  231 


INDEX. 

Page. 

Annual  Conference 208 

Ardent  Spirits 225 

Building  Meeting  Houses,  &c.  --- 228 

Booli  Agency > 227 

Bishops— Election  and  Duties          .......---  219 

Confession  of  Faith 204 

Constitution 205 

Classes -- 212 

Circuit  Preachers'  Duties 215 

Certificates       -       -       -       - 229 

Doctrinal  Publications 224 

Elders'  Election,  Ordination,  «fec.     ----- 217 

Forming  and  meeting  Classes  -----------  212 

Free  Masonry        --- -.-.-225 

General  Conference .-207 

Immoral  Conduct  of  Preachers 220 

Instruction  of  Children -..  224 

Members  in  General    -------------  211 

Marriage  Ceremony 222 

Necessity  of  Union,  &c. 223 

Origin  of  the  Church 201 

Ordination  of  Elders -  215 

Oaths 224 

Preachers'  Duties --.  214 

Presiding  Elders'  Election  and  Duties   - 218 

Preachers'  Salaries        .--...-..-...  221 

Printing  Establishment 226 

Quarterly  Conference  ---- 210 

Reception  of  Preachers       --..-.-.--..  209 

Slavery 225 

Visiting  from  House  to  House         ...--.<....  223 


CERTIFICATION. 


I  HEREBY  certify  that  the  English  form  of  the  Discipline  prior 

to  1815  and  of  the  Disciplines  of  1815  and  1817,  as  contained  in 

this  volume,  is  a  correct  translation  of  the  original  German  text. 

A.  W.  Drury. 
Dayton,,  Ohio,  August  26,  1895. 


I  hereby  certify  that  the  English  Disciplines  from  1819  to  1841 

inclusive,  as  contained  in  this  volume,  are  a  faithful  reproduction 

of  the  originals,  including  errors  of  orthography,  punctuation, 

capitalization,  and  typography.  ,,,     .     ^ 

W.  A.  Shuey. 

Dayton,  Ouio,  August  26,  1895. 


232 


PART  II. 

Disciplines  in  German, 

1814-1819,  1841. 


^ic  Se|rc  bcr  Screiuigtcn  Sriiber  in  K^rifta. 


SCrtilel  1.  ^m  ^amen  ©otte§  Befennen rair  wor  ^ebermann,  bajj loir 
Qlanben  an  ben  ®inigen  roa^ren  ©ott,  3Sater,  (Sof;tt  unb  fjeitigen  ©eift,  ba^ 
biefe  brep  (Sing  finb,  ber  SSnter  tm  ©oFjn,  ber  ©or;n  im  S5ater,  xmb  bet  l^eilige 
©eift  gleicf)eg  2Be[en,  mit  fieiben,  ba§  biefer  ©ott,  §tmmel  unb  Srben,  unb  allee 
wa^  bartnnen  ift,  foroo^I  fid)t5ar  alg  unfid^tbar,  erfd^affen  §at,  unb  aHeg  tra-- 
get,  regiret,  frf)i^et  unb  erf)alt. 

2trt.  2.  3Cir  glauben  an  ^efunt  ©l^riftum,  ba^  er  raal^rer  ©ott  unb 
SSKenfd),  ^jeilanb  unb  33erfo^ner,  ber  ganjen  SOSelt  ift,  iia^  aEe  inenfd^en  burd^ 
if^n  feelig  roerben  fonnen,  raenn  fie  mollen,  ba§  biefer  '^e\u§,  fiir  \m§  gelitten, 
geftorben  unb  begraben,  am  briten  tage  raieber  auferftanben,  gen  §innnel  ge= 
fafiren,  unb  am  jiingften  tage,  raieber  lommen  raivb,  ju  rid^ten  bie  lebenbtgen 
unb  bie  toben. 

21  r  t.  3.  2Ctr  glauficn  an  ben  l^eiligen  ©eift,  ba§  er  Dom  SSater  unb  ©ol^n 
augge^e,  ba^  rair  burd^  if)n  mitffen  ge^eiligtraevben,  unb  ben  ©lauben  erlangen, 
roetdE)er  un5  reiniget  oon  Sltler  Bef[etfung  beg  fIeifcE)eg  unb  be§  geifteg. 

21 V  t.  4.  2Bir  glauben  ba§  bie  Sibel  ©otte§  raort  ift,  baft  fie  ben  rool^ren 
roeg  ju  unferm  feelen[}eil  unb  feelig!eit  ent^alte,  ba§  ein  jeber  raa^rer  ©l^rift, 
biefelbe,  mit  ben  einfliffen  be§  getfte§=@ott,  (Smjig  unb  alein  ju  feiner  ricl^t= 
fdEinur  nel^men  miiffe,  unb  ta^  ol^ne  Bufe  unb  glauben,  an  ^efuw  Sl^riftuni 
cergebung  ber  fiinben,  unb  nad^folge  ^efu  (S^rifti,  niemanb  ein  rcal^rer  Sl^rift 
fei;n  !ann, 

21  rt.  5.  2Bir  glauBen  \)a§  bie  Sel^re,  raeld^e  bie  l^eilige  fd^rift  entpit, 
namlic^  ber  faU  in  2lbam,  unb  bie  errettung  burtf)  '^e^mn  G^riftum  ber  gan?en 
SBelt  geprebiget  unb  werfimbiget  rcerben  folte.  2Ieu^ere  ^e\d)Qn,  unb  cerorb^ 
nungen  ndntlidE)  bie  taufe,  unb  bag  gebad^tnig  be§  §errn,  in  auSt^eilung  beg 
brobg  unb  2Seing,  raerben  anempfol^Ien,  raie  aud^  bag  fufiraafdE)en,  rao  eg  be= 
gel^ret  roirb. 

3 


•Hun  Hn  iie  JRegeln  Her  S^crctnigtcn  ©tiiiicr  in  ^5nN. 


21  r  t.  1.  3'Jur  fold^e  b^iiber,  follen  t)on  ben  oereinigten  Sriiber  in  (Sl^rijlo, 
al§  il^re  prebiger  anerfant  rcerben,  rcclc^e  fid)  511  bem  enbe  beg  i[)rer  Gon^ 
ferenj,  ober  einer  gro^en  cerfamlung  angemelbet  finben,  Beg  berfelbigen,  orbent- 
l\6),  ©jamenirt  rcerben,  unb  folgenbeS  beantroortet,  ob  er  an  S^riftum  (^laube 
ob  er  bie  oergebung  f einer  fiinben  (gmpfangen,  ob  er  bem  frieben  unb  ber 
f)eiligung  nacf)iage,  ob  i^nt  fein  eigen  fjeil,  mit  bem  l^eil  feiner  nebenmen= 
fd^en  am  fjerjen  liege,  ob  er  bem  rati)  ber  briiber  fid^  unterroerfen  icill,  folcfje 
joHen  eine  fd^riftlid^e  erlaubni^  eriangen. 

31  rt.  2.  ©old^e  ^rebiger  f-oHen  in  ber  ©onferenj  bijd^offe  erroSI^Ien, 
burcf)  bie  mel)rf)eit  ber  ftimmen,  auf  br''9  \ai)x. 

aSa§  finb  bie  Sifrfjoflid^e  ^flic^ten. 

21  rt.  3.  lten§.  in  ber  Gonferenj,  al§  ^reftbent  oorjufi^en,  2teg.  foQ 
er  ba§  rec^t  f)aben,  mit  beg'timung  ber  Gonfeveuj  ju  agiren.  3ten§.  burc^ 
juftimung  ber  gonferenj  ift  i^m  frei^eit  gegeben  ditefte  ju  Grioal^len. 

21  rt.  4.  ©egen  roen  finb  bie  bifrf)bfe  unb  filtefte  unb  prebiger  megen 
Titten  rcitrigem  betragen  nerantroortlid^  ?  gegen  bie  algemeine  Sonferenj,  rao 
aber  ba§  betragen  gegen  bie  bibet  ift,  ba^  jeigen  ba  finb  J^tnlangltc^,  fo  foU 
ber  bem  e^  befant  ift,  nod^  mef)r  prebiger  ?u  fid^  nel^men,  unb  eg  unters 
fuc^en,  ift  eg  gegen  bie  Sibel,  fo  foE  berfelbige  fdiioeigen  bi^  jur  (Sonferenj. 

21  rt.  5.  6in  jjeber  prebiger  foQ  alien  ficif;  aniuenben,  bie  gemeinbe 
fo  oiel  al§  moglid^  ju  erbauen  mit  le^r,  unb  leben,  mit  gebdtf)  unb  gott* 
)eeligem  roanbel,  er  foQ  fid^  beftreben,  mit  alien  glibern  feiner  gemeinbe 
hetant  |U  roerben,  fo  bag  er  biefelben  Ian  beg  namen  nennen,  unb  roo  eg 
moglid^,  oon  i^rem  feelenjuftanb  mit  il^nen  reben. 

21  rt.  6.  Z^  jeber  gemeinbe  follen  Dorgenger  errae^Iet  merben,  bcrren 
pflid^t  foil  fegn  anfang  unb  enbe  ober  befdjlu^  ju  mocf)en  in  ben  batftunben 
unb  prioatftunben,  aljo  bie  iiranfen  ju  befuri^en  unb  ein  jebeg  glieb  ber  ges 
meinbe  ju  ermaf^nen  unb  in  liebe  ^u  erl}alten  unb  auf  fid^  felbft  fel^en. 


21  r  t.  7.  ©in  jebeS  glieb  ber  gemeinbe  foU  fiefennen,  bag  e€  bie  33i6el 
fiir  ©otteS  roort  l§alte,  ba§  e§  fid|  von  nun  an  Bon  l^erjen  fceftrebe,  fein 
l^eil  |u  fud^en  in  Sl^rifto,  unb  feine  jeeligJeit  ?u  fd^affen  mit  furd^t  unb  jittern, 
unb  bem  (Sroigen  jorn  gotteg  ju  entfliel^en.. 

21  rt.  8.  ®in  jjebeS  foil  fid^  Beftrefeen,  eincn  genauen  unb  gott[eeligen 
rcanbel  ju  fii^ren,  flei^ig  fei;n  int  gebat  5efonberg  un  oerborgenen  unb  mo 
moglid^  alien  oerfamlungen  fiegbeS  offentlid^en  gotte^bienft  unb  betftunben 
lu  feiner  erbauung  bei)roof)nen. 

21  r  t.  9.  §aubter  in  familien,  foHen  e§  nid^t  werfeumen,  be§  ntorgenbS, 
unb  be§  abenbS  tnit  ben  i^rigen  ju  baten,  benfelben  ein  guteg  ©jempel  fe^en, 
in  alien  dEirifxIid^en  tugenben.  * 

21  r  t.  10.  (gin  jebeS  glieb  fott  fid^  beftreben,  genau  al§  in  ber  gegens 
maxt  gotten  ju  raanbein,  bep  feinen  gefd^aften  an  einen  genauen  umgang 
mit  gott  gerao^nen,  liebe  iiben  gegen  freunbe  unb  feinbe,  ^en  ormen  guteS 
t^un,  unb  fud^en  in  ber  t^at,  ein  9iacI)folger  ^efu  S^rifti  ju  fein. 

21  r  t.  11.  ®in  jjebeg  glieb  foil  fid^  ftar!eg  entfialten,  unb  eg  nur  ?u  notl§, 
alS  arjenet),  unb  metejin  gebraud^en. 

21  rt.  12.  (Sin  jebeg  glieb  rairb  fid^  ent^alten,  ©ontagg  gefd^afte  ju 
treiben,  ju  faufeu  unb  oerfaufen  fonbern  foil  benfelben  in  aubad^i,  mit  fingen 
geiftreidl)er  liber,  jur  unb  lob  gotteg  jubringen. 

21  rt.  13.  ®in  jebeg  biefer  gemeinbe  folte  cirtetjal^rlid^,  aug  freiem 
njiHen,  fo  oiel  bex;tragen,  alg  eg  feine  umftanbe  eriauben  unb  bie  reifenben 
prebiger  ju  unterftii^en. 

21  r  t.  14.  (gg  ift  pflid^t  eineg  ieben  glieb  biefer  gemeinbe,  ein  friebtid^eg, 
ftiHeg,  unb  gottfeeligeg  Ieben  ju  fiil^ren,  in  bem  umgang  mit  alien  menfd^en, 
raie  eg  einem  S^riften  gejimet,  im  frieben  ju  Ieben,  abfonberlid^  foU  jebeg, 
ber  Dbrigleit,  unb  tim  gefe^en  beg  lanbeg  gel^ord^en,  ben  bie  obtigfeit  ift 
Don  gott  oerorbnet. 

21  rt.  15.  2Cenn  fid^  ftreitigfeiten  ereignen  folten,  jmifd^en  jroeg  ober 
mefiren  gliber  ber  gemeinben,  con  roegen  fd^ulben,  ober  irgenb  einer  anbern 
urfad^,  unb  bie  ftreibenten  part^eien,  ?u  !einem  oertrag  fontmen  fonnen,  fo 
foE  ber  prebiger  meld^er  bie  auffid^t  iiber  bie  gemeinbe  l^at  bie  ©ad^e  unter= 
fud^en,  unb  inn  ftreibenten  partl^eien  eine  referent  anempfel^Ien,  biefelben 
foE  aug  breg  glieber  ber  gemeinbe  befte^en,  roooon  ber  Ilager  einen,  ber 
bellagte  ten  anbern,  unb  btefe  bret)  foEen  bie  jtoiftigfeiten  fd^lid^ten.  '^n 
faE  aber  eineg  ber  ftreibenten  perfonen  mit  biefem  augfpruc^  unpfrieben 
fegn  foEte,  fo  mag  eg  fic^  an  bie  ndc^fte  grofie  uerfamlung  roenben,  eg  ben 


prebigern  befant  mac^en  unb  urn  eine  jicepte  frifbenSfd^Iid^tung  anl^alten,  uub 
loenti  bie  prebtger  f)inIangUd^  urfad)  ba^u  finben  fo  follen  fie  eine  jiDcgte 
friebengfc^lid^tung  ert^eilen,  in  rceld^em  faH,  eine  jebe  ber  partt^eien  jraei) 
glieber  au§  ber  gemeinbe,  unb  biefe  tier  ben  fiinften  errcel^len  jollen,  bi^ 
foUen  ben  auofprucfi  ber  jraiftigfeiten  gan^ticf)  ent[(^eiben,  follte  aber  einev 
ber  perfonen,  niit  bicfent  au^fprud^  bod^  nidjt  jufrieben  jein,  jo  fdjiiffet  er 
fid^  bamit  au5  ber  gemeinbe  au§,  unb  rcenn  fid)  ein  glieb  ber  gentcinbe 
roeigern  fo(te,  von  inegen  fdiulben,  ober  anbere  jioiftigfeiten,  bie  ©ad)e  511 
fd^Iid^ten  ju  laffen,  nad^  bem  e§  tl^m  oon  ben  prebigern  raeld^e  bie  auffid^t 
iiBer  bie  gemeinbe  l^aben  anempfof)len  rcorben  ober  ein  glieb  ber  gemeinbe 
gerid)tUcf)  belangen  folte  el^e  bie  Dorf)erge[)enbe  ma^reglen  genommen  inorben, 
fo  foU  baffelbe  oon  biefer  gemeinbe  an^gefd^Ioffen  fet)n,  ©§  fei;e  "Qen  baf5 
ftreitigfeiten  Don  ber  art  rcaven,  ba§  fie  eine  gerid^tlic^e  entfd^eibung  erfor^ 
bere  unb  redjtfertigte. 

©i^riftofel  ©rofd^  unb  ©fjriftian  9Ieu!ommer. 


8  e  ^  r  c 


unb 


Sn^t'-Orlinttng 


hex 


^eretntdteii  aSrit^er  in  ©^ttftp* 


&zbvudt  bey  3'^^?<^"'i  ^«  ^oc^. 


1816. 


$on  bem 
U  t  f  V  r  tt  tt  g 


bcr 


SBcrcittigten  ©ruber  in  Kftrifti. 


^n  bem  le^t  ocrfloffenen  ^afirl^unbert,  fjat  e§  bent  ^errn  unferen  ©ott 
gefallen,  in  »erfc^iebenen  ©egenben  bet  31Belt  JJJanner  ju  erroecten,  bie  ben 
oerfaHenen  S[)ri[tent[;uin  raieber  auf^elfen,  unb  bie  Sel^te  G^rifti  t)om  ^reu^, 
in  if^rer  Sauterfeit  oerfiinbigen  foUten. 

(Sr  gebad)te  babet)  aud^  ber  SJeutfd^en  in  Slnterila,  roeld&e  l§in  unb  roieber, 
in  biefem  fid^  auSgebteiteten  Sanbe  lebten  ;  batjer  nur  felten  ©elegenl^eit 
l^atten,  bie  ^rebigt  beg  (S»angelium§  com  ^reu^  ju  l^oren  um  fic^  ju  er= 
bauen,  unb  nur  felten  in  ifjrer  3Jhitterfpratf)e,  unb  on  mand^en  Dertecn  nic^t 
in  ber  Sauterfeit  unb  im  Grn[t  oorgetragen  rcie  eg  follte. 

Unter  anbern  mefjr,  erroecfte  er  and)  einen  Dtterbein,  einen  So^m,  unb 
einen  ©iit^ing;  riiftete  fie  au3  mit  ©eift,  ©nabe  unb  5?raft,  in  feinem  fo 
jel^r  BernadE)Iafjigten  2Beinberge  |u  arbeiten,  uni  nud^  unter  ben  Seutfc^en 
in  Stmerifa,  ©iinber  jur  93ufie  ?u  rufen.  2)iefe  folgten  bem  3luf  ifjreg  §errn 
unb  2Keifter§,  arbeiteten  im  ©egen  unb  errid^teten  l^in  unb  raieber  ^errtic^e 
©emeinben,  unb  fiil^rteu  (S^rifto  manege  eble  Seele  ju.  9iac^  unb  nad^  er= 
roeiterte  fic^  ifjr  aBiirfungglrei^,  bafe  fie  babei)  genotf)tget  roaren,  fid^  um 
aWitarbeiter  im  SBeinberg  umjufe[)en ;  benn  bie  (Srnbte  mar  fo  giofe,  unb  ber 
2lrbeiter  nur  roenig.  ©ott  enoedtte  anbere  bie  er  aud)  loiHig  mac^te,  il^re 
5Crafte  bem  §errn  ju  rcibmen.  Sold^e  rourben  bann  von  einem  ober  bem 
anbern  alg  SKitarbeiter  angenommen  unb  von  ifjuen  ?um  ^rebigt^Slmt  be= 
ftimmt. 

8 


Sie  Slnjal^l  ber  @emcinb§=©Iteber  in  ien  oerfd^iebenen  dJegenbett  raud^g 
Don  3eit  ?u  3sit»  wnb  uerbreitete  fief)  in  ben  ©taaten  Don  SJJar^Ianb, 
'^3ennft)[Daniett  unb  S^irginien.  ®a^er  ^at  Dtterbein  auf  ben  grofien  3Ser= 
fammlungen  ?u  3eiten  ©onferenj  ge^alten,  mit  ben  ^rebtgern  bie  gegenroartig 
rcaren.  ®r  l^at  il^nen  bie  SBid^tigfeit  im  ^rebigt=2lmt  Dorgeftellt ;  rcie  not^ig 
eg  fei),  alien  ©rnft  anjuraenben,  iiin  ©eelen  ju  retten ;  fie  l^ielten  babeg  3iatl^ 
iDie  fie  am  nii^lid^ften  feyn  tonnten,  unb  nal^men  fol^e  auf  ju  3JJitar5eitern, 
Don  benen  fie  Urfad^  l^atten  ju  glaufien,  ba§  fie  baS  ©fjriftent^um  ant  ^erjen 
erfafjren  l^atten ;  bie  treu  loaren  unb  geiibte  ©innen  flatten ;  biefe  ritfteten 
fie  JU,  5um  2Berf  beg  ^errn.  S)ie  atnjafjl  ber  ©liebec  Denne^rte  fid^  immer 
mel)r  unb  mef)i-.  Urn  jje^t  rec^t  nii^Iid^  unb  gemeinfd^aftlic^  ju  arBeiten, 
fa^en  fid^  bie  ^rebtger  oerpfItcl;tet  eine  ©onferenj  ju  beftimmen,  rao  fie  jU; 
fammen  famen,  um  fid^  red)t  ?u  oereinigen;  benn  einige  rcaren  Sieformirte, 
anbere  Sutl^eraner,  anbere  SJJenoniften,  u.  f.  vo.,  balder  beftimmten  fie  ben 
25ften  ©eptember,  1800,  in  j^'i't^brirf)  ©ountt),  SRarijIanb,  im  §aufe  beg 
i^riebrid^  ^emp  jufammen  ju  !ommen.  ®g  famen  il^rer  bregje^n  |ufammen 
unb  oereinigten  fid^  in  eine  ©efellfc^aft,  bie  ben  ^Ramen  fiil^rt :  „Sie  Det= 
einigten  Sriiber  in  ©^riflo";  fie  errod^tten  SBill^elm  Dtterbein  unb  2)Jartin 
23ofjm,  JU  Dberauffe^ern  ober  Sifiioffen  ;  fie  rourben  einig  etnem  jeben  bie 
grei;()eit  ju  laffen,  ju  ^aufen,  nadf)  eineg  jeben  (Srfenntni^. 

SSon  nun  an  cerbreitete  fid^  bie  ©emeinbe  immer  mel^r  unb  mel^r;  fie 
na^men  ?Prebtger  an  bie  immer  reiften  (benn  bie  ^rebigt  ^ta^e  lonnten 
fonft  nid^t  bebient  roerben;)  ba§  2Ber!  oerBreitete  fid^  in  ben  ©taaten  »on 
D^io  unb  ft'entutft).  ®g  roar  je^t  not^ig  eine  ©onferenj  im  ©taat  D^io  |u 
l^alten,  inbem  eS  §u  befd^roerlid^  roar  ia^rlid^  fo  roeit  nad^  ber  ©onferenj  ju 
gel^en. 

2)er  Sruber  93b^m  ftarb  unterbeffen,  unb  Sruber  Dtterbein  Begel^rte 
baft  ein  93ifdE)of  follte  geiudfjtt  roerben,  roeil  er  nid^t  mel^r  felbft  nac^fefjen 
fonute,  ber  ba^  SBerf  ii5er  fid^  nefjme,  bomit  Qnd)t  uiib  Drbnung  gel^alten 
roiirbe;  be::n  eg  roar  auf  ber  erften  ©onferenj  auggemad^t,  baf(  nenn  einer 
Don  ben  Sifd^offen  fterben  roiirbe,  ba§  ein  anberer  erroafjit  roerben  foHte. 
SDa  roarb  Sruber  ©l^riftian  ?leucommer  al§  Sifd^of  auf  eine  g^it  erroa^lt, 
ber  bie  Stuff id^t  iiber  fid^  ne^me  iiber  bie  ©emeinfd^aft. 

©d^on  lange  rourbe  ber  3)Jangel  einer  3"^torbnung  in  ber  ©emeinbe 
tief  empfunben ;  eg  roar  fd^on  me^rmal  etroag  baran  getl^an  roorben ;  enblid^ 
rourbe  auf  ber  ©onferenj  im  ©taat  D^io  befd^Ioffen :  ba^  eine  §aupt  ober 
®eneral  Gonferenj  gef)0lten  roerben  foflte,  bie  eg  iiber  fic^  nef^me,  bie  3"ci^t= 
orbnung  in  etroaS  ooUftanbiger  ju  mad)en,  roie  fie  fid^  fitr  bie  ©emeinbc 
fc^idEen  roiirbe. 
16 


10 

Sie  ©lieber  ju  biefer  Gonferenj  foHten  au3  ben  '•^rebtgern,  in  ben 
unter)(f)ieblid^en  ©egenben,  burd^  bie  ©lieber  ber  ©emeiabe  geraiif^It  raev= 
ben,  burd^  bie  2)Jel^rl^eit  ber  ©tintmen ;  unb  e§  waren  bie  f olgenben  ^rebi^ 
ger  gegenraarttg  auf  ber  (Sonferenj,  nemlicl^ :  ©i^riftian  91eucommer,  2l5ra= 
f)am  »ie[tanb,  2lnbrea§  3«'^f^'^'  3)aniel  STreijer,  ©eorge  53:nebum,  2(6raf)am 
2:racf[et,  (Efjriftian  Merger,  2l5rar)am  2J?ei;er,  So[;anne3  ®d)neiber,  §einric^ 
lumler,  §einrtc^  gpiit^,  ^faac  3ieu[rf;roanber,  6f;riftian  i?rum,  unb  ^acob 
Sauhia.  S)ie  uerfamntleten  jidf)  am  6ten  Suni,  1815,  nai)e  ter)  amount 
'^sleffing,  in  SCeftmorelanb  Gountr),  ^ennfijloanien,  roo  fie  nac^  reifer  lleber= 
legung,  bie  fotgenbe  Sef)re  nnb  3^egeln  fiir  gut  unb  niil5lid^  befanben,  fie 
ber  ©emeutbe  in  Siebe  unb  Semut^  ju  iibergeben,  mit  bem  Ijerjlic^en  SOBunfd^, 
ba§  biefe  Sel^rc  unb  fold^e  S^legeln,  nebft  bem  2Dorte  ®otte§  mod^ten  beo6- 
acf)tet  rcerben.  Senn  (Sott  ift  ein  ©ott  ber  Drbnung,  unb  ino  !eine  Drb^ 
nung  unb  ilirdienjud^t  ift,  ba  t)erlief)rt  fid)  alle  2iele  unb  ©emeinfdEiaft ; 
barker  ta^t  un§  bem  "Statl)  be§  §errn  folgen  ber  un5  lef^rt,  ^a^  luir  burc^ 
Semutf)  einer  'oen  anbern  fpfjer  ad^ten  nl§  un§  feUift,  fud)en  gefinnt  ju 
fein  luie  Sefu§  (S^riftu^  aud^  roar,  ber  ilnec^tS  ©eftalt  angenommen,  rcarb 
ge^orfam  b\%  junt  2^obe  am  5?reu^,  um  \m^  bie  ©nabe  unb  i?raft  p  er; 
loerben,  bafe  mir  ung  auS  Siebe  unb  Semut^  einer  bem  anbern  unterinerfen 
fijnnten ;  roer  fid^  nid;t  unterraerfen  fan,  bem  mangelt  nod^  ©nabe,  Siebe 
unb  S)emut^;  batjer  fagt  ^efu§:  luer  unter  eurf)  ber  ©ro^te  ferin  rcitt,  ber 
fott  be§  anbern  2)iener  fetjn,  fo  mitffen  rair  einanber  lieben;  baran,  fagt 
Scfu§ :  rotrb  jebermann  eriennen,  ba§  i(;r  meine  red^te  ^linger  feijb,  fo  i^r 
Siebe  l^abt,  unb  raer  nid^t  lieb  l^at  ber  bleibt  im  2:obte.  ©o  laffet  imS 
Siebe  iiben,  auf  baf[  rair  bie  §errlid^leit  befi^en  mogen,  bie  ^efuS  feinen 
^itngern  von  feinem  33ater  erbeten  l^at,  bafj  luir  ein5  fetjn  mi3d)ten,  inie  er 
uuD  ber  93ater  eing  finb.  SDarum  ifjr  lieben  Sriiber,  laffet  un5  fuc^en  gteic^^ 
gefinnet,  einfiellig  unb  eintnigUd^  ju  fei)n,  unb  feinS  llebel  von  bem  anbern 
reben  ober  benfen,  fonbern  ben  §errn  anflc(}en,  baf3  er  uuS  feaien  ©eift  unb 
ernft  geben  mbdjte  um  ba§  ©fjriftent^um  red^t  ju  feiner  @^re  ju  fu^ren,  unb 
}n  unferem  eroigen  SBofil  2lmen. 


mux  m\^mtt 


^a3 
ilttuliens=iekemttnig 

b  er 

SBereuuBtcn  ©riiber  in  £|riftd. 


Sm  Seamen  ©otteg  befennen  mix  vox  jebermann,  ba^  toir  glauBen  an 
ben  eintgen  rcafjren  ©ott,  S3ater,  ©ol^n  itnb  Jjetligen  ©ei[t,  ba^  biefe  ©rei) 
(Str.5  ftnb,  ber  Skater  im  ©of;n,  ber  ©of^n  int  SSater  unb  ber  ^eilige  ®eift 
gteid^eg  SBefen  mit  bepben.  2)a§  biefer  bregeintge  ©ott  §tmmel  unb  (Srben 
unb  alleS  roaS  barinnen  ift,  forool^t  ftd^tbar  alg  unfid^tbar,  erfc|affert  l^at, 
tragi,  regtert,  fd^ii^t  unb  erf;alt. 

SCir  g(auben  an  ^e'inm  ©^riftum,  bafi  er  roa^rer  ©ott  unb  aJJenfd^  ift, 
ba§  er  feine  menfd^Iic|e  9?atur  burc^  ben  ^eiUgen  ©eift  in  3Jlaria  ange= 
nontmen,  unb  t)on  i^r  gebol^ren ;  ba^  er  §eilanb  unb  SJerfol^ner  beg  ganjen 
menfd^Ud^en  ©efcf)Ied^t§  ift.  SBenn  fie  bie  in  ^efu  angebotene  ©nabe  im 
©lauben  an  ifin  anne^men;  ba^  biefer  ^ej'ug  fiir  un§  gelitten  l^at,  am 
©tamme  beg  J?reu^eg  geftorben,  begraben,  am  britten  Sage  roieber  aufer: 
ftanben,  gen  §immel  gefafjren,  roeld^er  ift  jur  Sied^ten  ©otteg  unb  jjertritt 
ung ;  unb  roieber  f  ommen  rotrb,  am  jiingften  S^age,  ju  rid^ten  bie  i^ebenbigen 
unb  bie  Sobten. 

2Bir  gtauben  an  ben  §eiligen  ©eift,  ba^  er  gteid^eg  SCefeng  mit  bem 
33ater  unb  bem  ©o^n,  bafs  er  von  bet)ben  auggel^t,  iia^  mix  burd^  il^n  er* 
leud^tet,  burd^  ben  ©lauben  gered^tfertigt  unb  gef^eiliget  roerben. 

3Bir  glauben  an  eine  §eitige  ©emeinbe,  ©emeinftfjaft  ber  §eiligen,  2Uifers 
ftef)ung  beg  ^^-^eifd^eg  unb  ein  eroigeg  2ehen. 

2Btr  glauben  bag  bie  58ibel  alteg  unb  neueg  2:eftament,  ©otteg  9Bort 

ift;  ba^  fie  ben  rcaf^ren  SBeg  ju  unferer  ©eeligfeit  ent^atte,  ba^  ein  jeber 

roal^re  G^rift,  biefetbe  mit  ben  ©inflitffen  beg  ©eifteg   ©otteg  eimig   unb 

11 


12 

aEeiit  ^u  yeinec  3iidE)tfd^nur  netjinett  ^oQ,  unb  baji  ol)iie  ®Iau5en  an  Sef"'" 
6r;rti"tum,  rcafire  33ufe,  $5ergebung  ber  eiinben  unb  9Jac^folge  GJ^rifti,  nie= 
manb  ein  loafirer  6f)ri[t  fet;n  fann. 

2Bir  glauben  ba^  bie  2e[)re  loelc^e  bte  ^eiltge  ©tf)rift  entl)dlt,  ttemlid^ : 
ben  fyaU  in  2lbam  unb  bie  Sriofuug  burd^  Sefmn  Sf)rt{'tum,  ber  gaiijen 
2Celt  foUte  geprebigt  rcerbeu. 

2Cir  gtauben  bajj  bie  ciu^ere  @naben-2)Jittel  in  ben  ©emeinben  Cr^nfti 
geiibt  roerben  joUten,  nemlicf) :  bie  Xaufe  unb  bag  @ebdc{)tni^  bcj  Sobteo 
be§  §errn,  in  2lugtf)eilung  beg  33rob§  unb  2Being,  bie  foUen  nadi  bom  23efef)l 
be§  Jgerrn  ^efu,  unter  jeinen  ^inbern  geiibt  luevben ;  bie  2trt  unb  SBeife  foil 
abec  einem  jeben  narf)  fciner  ©rfenntni^  iibertaffen  loerben.  3lucf)  bag  33ei) 
fpiel  »on  gufjroafdfien  [telnet  eineui  jeben  frep. 


Stoctjtcr  9H)f4ttitt. 


9?acf)  loeld^er  2Betfe  unb  Serorbnung,  foQen  bie  SBerl^aublungen  auf  ben 
Sonferenjen  oorgenommen  iperben  ? 

®g  roirb  cerlangt,  ba^,  roaS  aud^  immer  beg  biefer  ©elegenl^eit  getl^an 
TOirb,  foil  fo  getfjan  roerben  alg  o&  eg  in  ber  ©egeniuart  (Sotteg  rciire;  rcer 
ju  reben  fjat  ber  ftefje  auf  unb  rebe  frei;,  roie  erg  in  feinem  §erjen  ^at. 

2Bie  unb  auf  roag  2lrt,  foUen  bie  ©lieber  einer  $aupt=(5onferenj  geroa^lt 
roerben  ? 

3n  einem  jeben  Siftritte  fotlen  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger,  roenn  foldfie  ba 
finb,  roenn  ntcljt,  fo  follen  bie  fcfjljaften  'J^rebiger  bie  in  benx  Sejirf  roof)nen, 
eg  ben  ©emeinben  corfteaen,  ba^  fie  jroet)  Slelteften  aug  i[}rem  SBejirl  roal^^ 
len;  e§  foQen  aber  aUe  bie  2lelteften  bie  in  bem  Se^irf  finb  bie  ouf  bie 
Sonferenj  ge^en  lonnen,  auf  bie  2Ba^l  t^un,  unb  eg  einige  3eit  corner  be- 
lannt  madden,  unb  bie  jroei;  bie  bie  2)Jel)v[)eit  ber  ©timmen  be!ommen,  fotten 
bie  ©tieber  von  ber  $aupt=Sonferenj  ferin ;  bie  ©timmen  foQen  aber  an  jebem 


13 

Drte,  fd^riftlid^  aufgejeid^net  uierben,  unb  Don  einent  anrcefenben  ^rebiger, 
ober  t)on  einem  3Sorganger  unterfcfirieben  Toerben.  Ser  2lufftcf)t§a[tefte  im 
Sejtrl  foU  eg  unterfud^en,  unb  joQten  jroei)  Don  il^nen  eine  gleid^e  2lnjaf)l 
©timmen  l^aben,  fo  foH  er  entfc^eiben  roeld^er  con  il^nen  erroa^It  ift. 

9Bie  oft  jott  bie  ^paupt^Sonferenj  gel^alten  rcerben  ? 

21116  Dter  ^a^ve. 

§at  bie  §aupt=Sonferenj  eine  anbere  ©eroalt,  bie  bie  ^afirUc^e  nid^t  i)(xt  ? 

^a,  fie  l^at  allein  bie  ©eroSit  einen  Sifd^of,  an§  "ben  2luffid^tgdUeften, 
auf  »ier  ^a^re  ju  raaf)len ;  unb  aud^  biefe  3"'^torbnung  ober  3iegeln  ju 
oercinbern  ober  ?u  cerbeffern,  nac^bem  fie  e§  fiir  gut  befinbet  unter  ben  33e= 
bingungen  unb  au§na^m.  bafi  !ein  2lrtifel  geinarf)t  rcerbe,  ber  ben  ©ircutt 
}U  bereifen  auf^ebt  ober  roegt^ut.  2)ie  ^aupt^Gonfere-nj  foU  aud^  bie  S)is 
[trifte  beftimmen,  roo  bie  jci^rlid^en  (Sonferenjen  gel^alten  roerben  foHen. 

3BeIc^eg  ftnb  bie  ©lieber  ber  jd^rlid^en  ©onferenj  ? 

aide  bie  2lelteften  unb  ^rebiger,  bie  einen  fd^rifttic^en  Grlaubnifefd^ein 
empfangen  l^aben,  unb  bte  in  bem  Sejirf  con  einer  fold^en  ©onferenj  finb, 
ober  in  folrf)en  aufgenominen  roerben. 

?JadE)  rceld^er  SOBeife  unb  Serorbnung  fotten  bie  3Serl^anbIungen  corges 
nommen  roerben  ? 

1.  ®§  roirb  juerft  ein  ©apitet  au^  ber  93i6et  cerlefen,  unb  lurje  2lns 
merlung  bariiber  gemad^t,  a[§bann  roirb  gefungen  unb  gebeten,  unb  bag  fo 
oft  al§  bie  ©onferenj  fi^t ;  unb  mit  gefang  unb  gebet  befdfitoffen. 

2.  ©ie  (Sonfercnj  foH  einen  2lufftd^t§alteften  unb  einen  ©c^reiber  rodf)= 
Icn,  urn  mit  bem  SifdEiof  ju  agiren. 

3.  SBerben  bie  ^rebiger  unterfud^t,  roie  il^r  SBetragen  gegen  ©ott,  gcgen 
einanber  unb  gegen  ifjren  3iebenmenfd)en  fei);  ob  if)r  3BanbeI  untabeU^aft, 
ob  fie  fo  Die!  3ett  roie  moglid^  anroenben  um  ba§  3Jeid^  ©otteS  auSjubreiter 

4.  2Ba§  fiir  ^rebiger  finb  auf  bie  ^robe  anjunel^men  ? . 

5.  2Cag  fiir  ^rebiger  miiffen  ferner  auf  ber  ^robe  bleiben  ? 

6.  ©inb  einige  ?u  2lelteften  ju  roal^Ien  ? 

7.  ©inb  rool^I  einige  oon  ben  ^rebigern  geftorben  ? 

8.  aCelc^eS  finb  bie  2luffic^t-galteften  ? 

9.  SBer  giebt  fid^  auf  ju  reifen  ? 

10.  3Cag  ift  gefammelt  roorben,  t^ei(g  jufdHige  2luggaben  ju  beftreiten, 
unb  ben  reifenben  ^rebigern  if^ren  ©el^att  aufjumod^en?  ift  3ted^nung  mit 
i^nen  ge^alten  roorben  ?    fiaben  fie  ba§  i^rige  befommen  ? 

11.  2Bann  unb  roo  foQ  bie  ndd^fte  ©onferenj  gel^alten'roerben  ? 

12.  ©inb  bie  2Ielteften  georbinirt  roorben  ? 


14 

13.  S"  »»ti^  fiir  Se;irte  [inb  bie  ^rebiger  biefe^  "^aljv  angefteUt  ? 

14.  ^[t  nocf)  etioaS  mef^r  ju  tf)un  ? 

15.  §at  bie  Gonferen?  bie  Siftritte  Beftimmt  in  if^rein  a3e5ir!,  tun  bie 
2Cal^l  ftir  bie  ©lieber  ber  §aupt=Sonferen5  ?"  l^alten  ? 

16.  Sft  a2e^  nin^  yer^anbelt  rcorben,  in  ba^  ^protofoU  iihex  getragen 
roorben  ? 


fritter  m^nitt 


S5on  iicr 
paljlung  unti  Orbinatioii  bes  JHrd)of0 

unb 

ijon  feincm  9lmt  unb  ^^Jf^iftt 


SBie  foU  ei'.t  SBifd^of  einge[e^t  luerben  ? 

S)ie  §aupt=6onferenj  foil  \l)n  raaf)[en,  burc§  bie  !D?el}rf;eit  ber  ©timmen, 
au§  ben  9luf[irf)t§a(te[ten,  bie  ju  ber  §aupt-(£onferenj  geiua()lt  fiub;  auc^ 
[tef)t  eg  ber  (Sonferenj  frep,  ben  33ifrf)ot  nod^  aiif  oier  '^aljre  'bex)iuhel)a[icn. 
Ser  geiud^Ite  ober  33ifdE)of  muJ5  aber  bie  unter[c!)ieblid^en  93ejirfe  unb  6on= 
ferenjen  bereifen  !i3nnen,  fonft  Jan  er  nx<i)t  gerocif^It  luevben;  ber  fo  geiuii^lte 
foE  Don  einem  Sifd^of  unb  einem  3hiffic]^t6alt;ftcn  burc^  3luf(egung  if)rer 
§anbe  orbinirt  merben;  foUte  aber  !etn  a3i[djof  ba  feijn,  fo  fotlen  eS  jioei) 
2luffid)t6dlteften  tfntn. 

aCag  finb  bem  93ifd)of  feine  ^fl^Jten  ? 

1.  33ei)  unfeven  (Sonferenjen  al6  5I"orfit^er  ju  agiren,  mit  einem  baju 
erroa^lten  2luffid;t5alteften. 

2.  Gr  r^at  mit  jiuep  3luffid^t§iilteften,  bie  er  luafjlcn  barf,  ben  reifenben 
^rebigern  if)re  uerfdjiebencn  i^ojirfe  anjuioeifon,  bod)  iitit  ber  6infd;rdnfung, 


15 

oafe  fein  ^rebi^er  longer  al§  brer)  '^ai)ve  nad)  einanber  in  einem  ge[tattet 
roerbe,  an  bem  nemlitf)en  Drte  ju  bleiben,  eg  fei;  benn,  in  ^ginftd^t  auf  "^ami- 
Uen  Umftanbe,  unb  mit  33eiDiIIigung  ber  ©onferenj,  follen  feine  Sd^ranfen 
an]  Hie  ^e\t  gefe^t  fein. 

3.  SDer  33ifd)0f  jeigt  ben  2luffid)tgatteften  i^ren  Sejirf  an,  ben  fie  ?u 
6ereifen  l^al&en. 

4.  3n  ber  jroifd^en  3eit,  oon  ber  (Eonferenj,  ^at  er  mit  ben  2luffic]|t§= 
atteften  in  feinem  Sejir!,  ©eroalt,  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger  511  oerraed^feln,  too 
fie  e3  fiir  beffer  anfe^en,  aud^  ^rebiger  auf;unel^nten,  ober  511  fu^openbiren 
big  auf  bie  ©onferenj. 

5.  ®r  l^at  bie  oerfd^iebenen  ©onferenjen,  fo  roeit  fie  fid^  erftredfen,  ?u 
bereifen,  unb  l^at  int  geifllid^en,  bie  D5eraufficf)t  iiber  aUe  (Semeinben. 

6.  Sfjnt  ftel^t  e§  ju,  bie  Drbination  ?u  coEjiei^en. 

7.  2Benn  ein  Sifd^of  auffjort  bie  oerf^iebenen  ©onferenjen  ju  bebienen 
in  ber  ©emeinfrfiaft  unb  bie  Sejirle  ju  beretfen,  lann  er  bod^  fein  bifd^oflic^eg 
2lmt  unter  un§  auSiiben  ?  3iein,  e§  fer)  benn  ba§  er  !ran!  roare  unb  roag 
bergleid^en  Umftanbe  mef;r  fepn  mod^ten. 

8.  2Benn  eg  fid^  jutragen  follte,  ba^  imfere  ©emeinfdfiaft  ?u  etner  3eit 
leinen  Sifd^of  r)atte,  raeil  er  entraeber  geftorben  ober  fugpcnbirt  roare,  ober 
roie  eg  iminer  kx)n  mag ;  roie  foK  ratf)  gefd^aft  roerben  ?  ^ebe  jci^rlidie 
©onferen?  raiifjlt  fid^  einen  33orfi^er  aug  ben  3luffid^ta(teften  ;  biefer  fed  bie 
Sifdpfg  ©lette  fo  lange  bebienen,  alg  bie  Sonferenj  roiif^rt;  biefer  fo  ge= 
roa^lte  3Sorfi^er,  foH  aud^  bie  anbere  Sonferenj  bebienen ;  er  foil  feinen  ©i^, 
mit  bent  bort  geiodfjlten  S5orfi^er  nefjmen,  um  mit  i^m  in  ber  (Sonferenj  ju 
agiren,  unb  ber  bort  geroii^Ite  Sorfi^er,  foil  ebzn  fo,  bie  anbere  ©onfereti; 
aud^  bebienen,  bamit  eine  jebe  ©onferenj  rcei§.  roie  eo  beij  ber  anberri  aug^ 
fie[)t;  unb  ba^  Siebe  unb  ©emeinfd^aft  ert)alten  roerbe,  u.  f.  ro.  big  jur 
§aupt=(Sonferen5,  bie  roieber  einen  ^ifd^of  rocil^lt. 


Sicrtcr  «fcft|Hitt 


^tn  tttn 
3luf)id)tsttltcflen, 

il^r  er 


2B;c  fotlen  bie  3lufficl^t§alte[ten  geica^lt  roerben  ? 

Ser  33ii'rf)of  foil  ber  (Eonferen}  einrge  au^  ben  3lelteften,  bic  i^re  ^tohs 
jeit  auggc^alten,  rorfc^lagen,  imb  mit  3uftimmung  ber  (Sonferen?  auf  jroet) 
^a^re  roaljlcn. 

1.  aBa'j  ftnb  bie  ^[lid^ten  be§  2luffic^tgalteften  ?  ben  if)m  angerotefenen 
Se}ir!  ?u  bereifen,  iinb  fo  oft  ?u  prebigen  alS  er  fan. 

2.  ®r  l^at  bie  Ue6erftcf)t  iiber  bie  9ieifenben  unb  fe^^aften  ^rebiger, 
in  feinem  33enr!,  baft  fte  fid^  bem  ©oangelium  gema|  betragen. 

3.  ©r  foil  bie  oierteljal^rlicfie  unb  grofse  SSetfammlung  BefteHen,  unb 
no  moglid^  bebienen;  bag  2l5enbmal^l  fjalten,  unb  oiertelia^rlid^  ©onferenj 
fallen,  mit  ben  gegenrofirtigen  ^rebigern  unb  (Srma^nern  unb  3Sorgdngern; 
eg  unterfud^en  ob  bie  reifenben  unb  fe^^aften  ^rebiger  il^re,  ^flic^t  t^un, 
befonberg  ob  bie  fe|f)aften  ^rebiger  rao  mogIic§  allc  Sonntag  prebigen,  unb 
mo  me^rere  finb  fie  ju  ^eiten  ju  Berroed^feln,  rcie  am  mcf^rften  9iu^en  ge; 
fc^aft  roirb ;  fie  ermal^nen,  baf(  bie  3"^t,  unb  Drbnung  unb  Siebe  unb  ©rnft 
beg  ben  ©emeinben  ev^alten. 

4.  ®r  fann  aud^  bie  reifenben  ^^Jrebiger  in  feinent  Sejirie  cerroed^feln ; 
er  foil  aber  bem  Sifc^of  mit  ju  3iat^  jie^en;  er  fann  aud^  ^p^ebiger  aufs 
nel^men  ober  fugpenbiren  bi§  auf  bie  Sonferenj, 

5.  6r  foil  bem  a3ifd)of  3Jad;rtd^t  geben,  mie  eg  in  feinem  33ejirl  an^' 
\ieflt,  unb  mit  bem  reifenben  ^rebiger  SRed^nung  f)alten,  um  e§  ber  ©onfes 
renj  oorjulegen.  (Sr  foE  einem  Sebigen  ad&tjig  3:f)aler  ertauben  unb  einem 
Sere^lic^ten  unb  feiner  j^J^au,  nod^  fo  t)iel.  3iur  reifenbe  ^rebiger  bie  ben 
SSejirt  bereifcn,  finb  ju  bem  bererf)tigt;  bie  fe^f)aften  befommen  nic^tg,  eg 

eg  benn,  baf;  einer  eine  B^itlang  ben  93ejirf  bebienen  raiirbe,  fo  barf  il^n 
iir  bie  ^eit  erlaubt  rocrben;  too  aber  ein  ^rebiger  in  einer  ©tabt  fte^en 
jotlte,  ba  muft  bie  ©emeinbe  il^n  werforgen. 


17  , 

6.  2Bie  lange  mag  ber  Sifd^of  einen  2lufficf)talte[ten  iiber  ben  nemlid^en 
Sejirf  fe^en  ?    ©o  lange  eg  fiir  nii^Iid^  unb  fc^idlic^  gef)a[ten  roirb. 

7.  ©ottte  eg  fid)  fo  jutrageu,  baf;  ju  einer  3eit  !ein  Stfd^of  ba  roare, 
|o  foUen  bie  2lufftci^tolte[ten,  ein  jjeber  in  feinem  93ejirl  BefonberS  auf  bie 
©emeinben  ad^t  Iiaben,  bamit  alle§  in  8ie5e  unb  (Srnft  erl^alten  roerbe,  unb 
einer  bem  anbern  DfJad^rid^t  gebe,  niie  e§  in  feinem  Sejirl  augfiel^t.  ©oUte 
eg  fid^  a6er  jutragen,  bafi  fein  2luffid^tgdltefter  in  bem  ober  jjenem  Sejir!  rodre, 
roie  foil  "Siatf)  gefdiaft  roerben?  @§  foU  bem  Sifd^of  5Rad^rid^t  baoon  gege^ 
ben  roerben;  biefer  foil  einen  oon  ben  9lelteftcn,  im  ^Bejirf,  baju  Beftimmen, 
bi 

al  (auggeriffen) 

tt 


(gfUttfter  3lbf(^ttitt.} 


!^en  titn 

Jlelteflen  unb  il|rer  iJaljl,  ^mt  unb 

^flii^t  mi  €tbtnatton. 


aJJie  foC  ein  Sleltefter  geroal^It  raerben  ? 

3la^  einer  jraeg  ja^rigen  ^ro6=3eit,  mag  er  Don  ber  jol^rlid^en  gonferenj 
angenommen  roerben,  unb  burd^  ben  Sifd^of  unb 
fic^ 
orb  (auSgeriffen.) 

en 
?Pf  unb  Diet  m 

er  !ann  unb  ju  taufen,  e^en  einjufegnen,  ^elfen  bem  3Iufftd§t§arteftett  ba§ 
2lbenbmaf)l  l^alten,  unb  rcenn  ber  SHuffid^tgaltefte  nid^t  gegenroartig  fegn  !ann, 
fo  f oE  eg  ein  ober  jroeg  2lelteften  tl&un ;  er  foil  ode  3:§eile  beg  ijffentlid^en 
©ottegbienfteg  oerrid^ten,  ©Iaffen=SSerfammtungen  fud^en  ju  errid^ten,  too  e0 
tl^unlid^  ift,  fie  aud^  l^alten,  unb  l^elfen  3Sorganger  ?u  erraa^Ien. 


18 

2.  SSiertelial^rlid^  eine  freijiuithge  (SoUectton  ju  l^eben,  fiir  bie  reijeubeii 
■iprebiger  unb  fiir  Slrme;  ein  SJerjeitfini^  baoon  ju  ne^men,  an  jjebem  Drt 
uub  Don  bent 

citt 
(auggertffen.)  on 

n, 
bent  ttg 

f^alten,  auf  Jtt» 

gefje, 

3.  2Bo  ein  fe^r^after  2lelte[ter  ober  ^rebiger  an  einem  Drt  prebigt,  ao 
fein  9teifenber  Tjin  lommt,  fo  foil  er  bie  Collection  l^eben,  nnb  ein  SJerjeid^nife 
ebenfo  boDon  ne^men,  unb  e§  bent  2Utfftcl^t^alteften  jufd^icfen,  ober  jur  (£on= 
ferenj  fd^icfen  ober  bringen. 

4.  <SoUte  ein  reifenber  ^rebiger  ober  2leltefter,  feinen  tl^m  angeroiefenen 
Sejirl  oerlaffen  rooHen,  fo  foil  er  juuor  bent  3luffid^tgalteften  fcfireiben  ;  foHte 
einer  if)n  ettoa  t)erlaffen  ober  oerfciumen,  e§  fei)  bann  burd^  5?ran!^eit  ober 
fonft  unpernteibUd^e  Umftcinbe,  fo  foil  er  ber  nad^ften  ©onferen?  DerantiDort^ 
lic^  bafilr  fet)n. 


sei^ftcr  mmm. 


Son  iicr 
lUcifc  IJrcbigcr  auf?micl)meu, 

unb 

iljvcm  9lmt  unb  ^^JflHtcn. 


2Bie  foil  ein  ?prebiger  aufgenommen  roerben,  burd^  bie  jai^rlid^e  Gonferenj? 

1,  ^n  ber  jiwiftfien  ^e'xt  von  ber  Gonferenj,  burrf)  ien  Sifdpf,  ober 
ben  2luffid[jt§alteften  beS  S3ejir!5,  ober  eineg  2lelteften,  ber  ben  ^la^  einco 
Slnffic^tSdlteften  certritt  auf  einer  ja^rlid^en  ober  gro^en  SJerfammluug,  l&i^ 
jur  ndcf)ften  ©i^jung  ber  ©onfevenj;  fetner  mirb  anberS  alg  auf  ^robe  an- 
genommen,  einer  ber  auf  ^robe  aiigenoininen  ift,  ntag  bei;bef)alten  ober  ab-- 
geiBiefen  roerben,  ol^ne  baf[  i^m  einige^  Unred^t  gefd^e[)en  loiirbe,  fonft  roare 
e5  feine  ^ro&e. 


19 

2.  (Sine  jebe  ^er^on  bie  alg  ^rebiger  Dorgefd^tagcn  rotrb,  foK  uon  bet 
©onferenj  unterfud^t  loerben,  unb  il^m  folgenbe  j^ragen  uorgetcgt  loerben : 

^at  er  ©ott  tit  Gfjrifto  aI5  eittert  Derge6enben  ®ott  erfanut  ? 
§at  er  25erge6uitg  fehter  Sihtben  erUtngt  ? 

Sft  bie  Stebe  ©otteg  biird^  bett  f)etltgett  (Seift,  itt  Sein  §erj  auggegoffen 
.lorbeit? 

§at  er  ben  ^riebett  ©otteg  erlangt  ? 
^aget  er  ber  §eiligmtg  ttad^  ? 

§at  er  eine  rid^ttge  (Srteiintntfe,  u.  ©lauBett,  oott  Siife,  oott  5ied^tferti= 
guttg,  itttb  §eiltgung,  tiitb  Grlofung  ? 

3.  Siegt  if)m  feiit  eigett  §eil,  unb  bag  §et[  betneS  Jlebentnenfd^en  tne^r 
am  ^erjen,  alg  fonft  alteg  anbere  in  ber  2Bett  ? 

i^ann  er  fid^  bem  'Siati)  feiner  Sriiber  unterioerfen  ? 

SBia  er  gel^orfam  fet;n,  ju  reben  ober  fdjtoeigen,  roie  e§  bie  33riiber  fiir 
jut  erf ennen  ? 

^[t  er  raitlig,  fo  Diel  a(g  in  feinem  33ermogen  ftel^t,  ben  reifenben  '^lan 
(ober  "Qen  SBejirl  ju  berei)'en)  fjelfen  aufred^t  ju  l^alten  unb  i[;in  fo  uiel  raie 
moglid^  unterfiii^en  ? 

4.  SBag  ift  bie  ^flic^t  etneg  ^Prebigerg  ? 

e^riftum  ben  gefreuljtgten  ju  v^ebigen,  too  fid^  nur  guprer  einfinben ; 
eiaffen  a>eriantntlung  aufrid}ten,  roo  e§  t^unlid^  i%  init  i^nen  t)on  i^rem 
©ee(en=3uft«"be  ^u  reben,  bie  angefod^tenen  fud^en  jured^t  ju  raeifen,  bie 
Sragen  fud^en  aufjuntunbern,  unb  alle  im  ©lauben  in  ber  ©nabe  unb  (Bv 
!enntni§  ^ef"  ®f)ri[tt  fud^en  ju  erfiauen,  fo  oiel  raie  inogltdf) ;  nie  unterlaffen 
bie  i^ranfen  ju  fiefud^en,  unb  ntit  feinem  2eben  unb  SCanbel  fud^en  feine 
SEBorte  ju  Befraftigen  roog  er  geprebiget. 

5.  ^M)e  2lmueifungen  loerben  ein.'n  ^rebiger  gegeben  ?  6r  fep  flei^ig, 
nie  Derliere  er  feine  3eit  an  unnot^igen  Singen,  an  eintgem  Drt,  immer 
fet)  er  ernftl^aft,  fein  ®en!|pr«d[)  fer)  bem  ^errn  gel^ei(igt,  er  meibe  alien 
Seid^tfinn,  unb  ©d^er^en,  er  rebe  Befd^eiben,  unb  l^aBe  Bef^utfamen  Utngang 
mit  bem  roeiBIid^en  ©efc^Ied^t,  uub  Betrage  fid^  alS  ein  raafjrer  6[)rift. 

6.  (Sr  fet;  imuter  aBgencigt  33efd^ulbigungen  ju  gtauBen,  e§  fet)  benn 
l^inlangli^  erttjiefen  er  lege  aKeS  fo  t)iel  e§  tnit  ber  2Baf;rl^eit  Beftel^en  mag 
;um  Beften  aug. 

®r  rebe  oon  itiemanb  nidfitS  UeBeIg,  na^  er  \e  uoit  einem  benfen  mag, 
Bel^alte  er  fold^eS  Bet;  fid^  felBft,  Big  er  eg  bemjenigen  felBft,  bem  eg  angefjt, 
fagen  !ann. 


20 

7.  ©eiit  (Sef(^aft  fct),  Beelen  ju  retten  fo  t)iel  roie  mogli^;  ?u  biefctn 
®ef d^afte  ge6e  er  ft^  auf.  ®r  befuc^e  bte  e§  bebiirftig  finb ;  in  alien  Singen 
f)anbele  er  nid^t  nad^  feinen  eigenen  (Sutbenfen,  fonbern  alS  ein  (2of)n  beg 
(SoangelhimS,  al§  ein  jolc^er  ftef)t  e§  i^m  ?u  feine  3eit,  fo  tote  biefe  3Sorjc{)n|t 
loutet:  mit  ^rebigen,  mit  §au§befucl^en,  mit  Se^ren  unb  Seten,  unb  Ses 
tracf)tung  be§  2CorteS  ©otteg  jujubringen  bamit  ge^e  er  urn,  6iS  bee  §err 
fommt. 


©iebcntcr  ^Ibfjftmtt. 


Sittenlofen  J^etragcn  bet  Prctiiger, 

IB  i  e 

mit  t^ttcn  fott  Dcrftt^rctt  tocrben. 


2Cag  foH  getfian  roerben,  roenn  von  etnem  Sifcf)of,  ober  3luf[tci^tgaltejlen, 
ober  aielteften,  ober  ^rebicjer,  bie  Siad^rid^t  eiiitommt,  al^  i)abe  er  fic^  eineS 
kJerbrec^enS  frf)ulbig  gemai^t,  ba^  im  SBorte  ®otte§,  alg  eine  auSfc^tiefeenbe 
^anblung  geboten  fex;  ? 

1.  SBenn  ein  SifdEiof  icegen  ©ittenlofen  Setragen  befd^ulbigt  reirb,  roie 
I'oU  mit  il^m  tjerfa^ren  loerbeii?  SBo  fic^  58efd}utbigung  ereignen  foEte,  bie 
bem  ©uangelium  nad^tt^eitig  roare,  fo  foQ  e^  einem  Sluffic^t^alteften  unb 
einem  2lelteften  befannt  gemac^t  roerben,  bie  fotlen  eg  unterfuc^en,  ob  etroog 
an  ber  ©ad^e  fei) ;  fie  fotlen  aber  feine  j?lage  auf;er  jroeg  ober  brei)  ^ei^m 
nnne[)men,  al5  roie  ber  2lpo[tel  fagt:  frfieint  e§  nun,  bafe  er  mit  red^t  be-- 
fc^ulbigt  roirb,  fo  foUen  fie  eg  fd)rifttid^  ne^men,  unb  bem  Stfc^of  eine  2lb= 
fc^rift  baoon  fd^iden,  unb  eine  3»;it  beftimmen  roo  fie  jufammen  fommen,  roo 
bie  ^lager  unb  ber  Sifd^of  gegenroartig  fetin  follen,  unb  foH  burc§  jroeg 
3Iuffid^tgalteften  unb  breg  2lelteften  unterfud^t  roerben ;  roirb  er  fc^utbig  ge= 
funben,  fo  foQ  er  fd^roeigen  big  jur  ja^rlic^en  (Eonferenj ;  ba  f oQen  bie  2tuf-- 
fitfltgcilteften  unb  Stelteften  eg  nod^  ein  3Jkl  unterfud^en,  roirb  er  fd^ulbig 
gefunben  fo  foU  er  Bom  2lmt  fugpenbirt  roerben. 


21 

2.  5l8enn  ein  Sluffid^t^dltefter  raegen  ©ittenlofen  SBctrageit  6e[d^ulbigt 
TDiirbe,  toaS  foH  getf)an  loerben?  aSo  ftd^  33efci^ulbigungen  ereignen  foUten 
bie  bent  (g»angeliuin  nad^t^eitig  roiiren,  fo  [oil  eg  bee  udcf)fte  Slufftd^t^altefte 
unb  ein  ^rebiger  uutecfudien ;  ?eigt  eg  fid^  nun  alg  o5  er  fd)ulbig  njare,  fo 
foHen  fie  eg  fd^riftUc^  ne^men,  unb  bem  2lufftc^tgalteften  eine  Slfifd^rift  baoon 
fd^iden,  unb  eine  3eit  beftimmen  roo  fie  follen  ^ufammen  fommen,  roo  bie 
^lager  unb  ber  2luffitf)tgaltefte  gegenroartig  feiju ;  in  3l5n)efen^eit  beg  Sifcfpfg, 
foil  ein  anberer  2Iuffid)tgalte[ter  unh  jioei)  3lelte[ten  gerufen  raerben,  bie  foHen 
eg  unterfuc^en ;  roirb  er  fd^ulbig  gefunben,  fo  foC  er  fc^raeigen  big  jur  ©on^ 
ferenj,  ba  foH  er  DeranttDortUd)  fegn. 

3.  2Benn  ein  31eltefter  ober  ^rebiger  ober  (Srmat)ner  follte  befd^ulbigt 
loerben,  rcegen  (Stttenlofen=33etragen,  toag  foil  getl^an  roerben?  2)er  ^re= 
biger  in  ber  ©egenb  bem  eg  belannt  roirb,  foil  nod^  einen  '^rebiger  ober  ®r= 
ntal)ner  ober  einen  2?organger  mit  fid^  ne^men,  unb  eg  unterfud^en;  foltte 
eg  fcfieinen  bafj  er  fd^ulbig  roare,  fo  foil  il^m  9Jacf)rid^t  baoon  gegeben  roerben, 
unb  eine  Qeit  beftimmt  roerben,  roo  fie,  bie  j?lager  unb  ber  befd^ulbigte  ge^ 
genroartig  fet)n;  in  2l6roefen^eit  beg  Stfd^ofg  ober  3(uffic^tgalteften :  fotten 
eg  bret)  2lelteften  ober  ^rebiger  unterfud^en,  roirb  er  fd^ulbig  gefunben,  fo 
foil  er  fd^roeigen  big  ^ur  Gonferenj,  roo  er  oerantroortlidti  foil  fegn. 


mttx  %mmtt 


^dit  ben 
CiJlletiern  Snsgetiiein, 


©in  jebeg  ®Iieb  ber  ©emeinbe  foUte  be!ennen,  bo^  eg  bie  Sibel  fitr 
©otteg  2Bort  l^alte ;  ba^  eg  fic^  oon  nun  an  Don  §er^en  beftrebe,  fein  §eil 
in  ©l^rifto  ^efu  ju  fucf)en,  unb  feine  ©eeligleit  p  fd^affen  ntit  j5"i^d^t  unb 
3ittern,  urn  ben  juliinftigen  eroigen  ^om  ?u  entfliel^en. 

©in  jebeg  ®Iieb  foH  fid^  beftreben  einen  genauen  unb  gottfeligen  SSanbel 
ju  fii^ren ;  fleifiig  fe^n  im  ©ebet,  befonberg  im  33erborgenen ;  unb  roo  mbgs 
lic^  aHen  SBerfammlungen  Bet)rool^nen,  begbeg  offentlid^en  ®ottegbienft  unb 
33etftunben,  ju  feiner  (grbauung. 


22 

iiiiuptcr  in  J.^.milien  follten  e§  nie  nerfaumen  be^  2Rorgeng  imb  3lbenbo 
mit  bcii  3^)rtgeii  511  beten,  unb  benfelben  eiii  gute6  (Sre»ipel  fe^en,  in  alien 
c^riftlicf)en  Jugenben. 

Gin  jebe^  foil  fief)  beftreben,  genau  alo  in  ber  gegeniuart  Sotted  511 
irianbein  ;  fidj  bei;  feinen  Oefd^dften  an  eiucn  genauen  Unxgang  ntit  ®ott 
gerabljnen;  nie  Uebel  con  feinem  9iebenmenfcf)en  reben;  i^iebe  iiben  gegen 
i^reunb  unb  ^einb,  ben  31[rmen  guteg  ju  tl^un,  unb  fud^en  in  ber  X^at  ein 
3iad^fofger  ^efu  Gfjrifti  ju  fei;n. 

Gin  jebeS  ©lieb  foHte  fid^  ent^alten,  ©onntag§  unnotI)ige  ©efc^cifte  ju 
treiben;  nic^tg  ju  !aufen  nod^  511  cerfaufen,  fonberu  foil  benfelben  in  3lnbacl)t 
mit  lofen  tinb  r)oren  be€  SBort^  ©otteg,  mit  fingen  geiftreicf)er  i^ieber  jur 
©l^re  unb  i'ob  ©otteS  ju  bringen. 

Gin  jebeg  ©lieb  in  biefer  ©emeinfc^aft  follte  ciertelial^rlic^  auo  fveijem 
ICirien  fo  uiel  bex)tragen,  rao  e6  feine  Umftcinbe  eriauben,  um  bie  reifenben 
'^rebiger  in  unterf^alten. 

GS  ift  eineni  jeben  (^Jliebe  feine  'iPfIidE)t,  ein  frieblid^eg  ftilleS  unb  gott= 
felige^  Heben  ju  fiif)ren,  im  Umgang  mit  alien  SJJeitfc^en,  loie  e'j  einem  Gljriften 
gejiemt,  im  ^-rieben  ju  leben ;  abfonberlicf)  foil  jebe^  ber  Dbrigteit  unter; 
tl}an  foi)n,  fo  mie  @otte§  2Bort  eg  forbert. 

Set;  folc^en  ©liebern  ber  ©emeinbe,  follen  bie  ^rebiger  eine  ober  mef^rere 
Glaffen^iBerfammlungen  errid}ten  luo  e5  tijunlii)  ift ;  bafelbft  follen  fid)  bie 
©lieber,  roo  e6  fet)n  fann,  ein  3JJaI  in  jebcr  SCod^e  Derfammeln,  an  bem  baju 
beftimmten  Drt,  um  Setftunben  mit  einanber  ju  I^alten,  um  fic^  ju  erbauen 
in  ber  gegenmart  ©otte^  unb  in  ^iebe  ju  guten  SCerfen  in  Gl^rifto  ^efu. 

5n  jeber  Glaffe  foUten  iBorgdnger  in  gegenamrt  be3  ^rebiger^  geunif)It 
roerben,  beren  ^f(td)t  foil  fei;ii,  bie  betftunben  beftellen,  anjufangen,  unb  §u 
befd)lie^en,  aud^  ju  Qeiten  ©laffen^Unterrebungen  ju  [;alten,  ein  jebeg  ©lieb 
}n  ermaljnen  unb  in  ^iebe  er^alteu,  unb  auf  fid)  felbft  fef)en. 

SlBenn  ©lieber  fic^  an  einaitber  uerfiinbigeu  al5  Sriiber  ober  odjioeftern, 
fo  ftrafe  eS  juerft  jroifd^en  2)ir  unb  '^Ijm  aHetn,  l^ovet  er  bid)  fo  f;aft  bu 
il)  I  geioonncn,  prt  er  bic^  nid^t,  fo  nimm  noc^  einen  ober  imex)  ?u  bir,  auf 
bap  alte  Qad)Q  beftc^e  au^  jioeijer  ober  brei^er  3*-'i{^eninunbe ;  [)oret  er  bie 
nid)t,  fo  fage  e6  ber  ©emeinbe,  I)oret  er  bie  ©emeinbe  nic^t,  fo  I)altc  if)n  al'j 
einen  §eiben  unb  3ollner. 

SBenn  ftd^  Streitigteiten  ereignen  fotlten,  poifdjen  5it)ei)  ober  ntefjreven 
©liebern  ber  ©emeinbe,  uon  megen  Sdjulben  ober  irgenb  einer  anbern  Uc- 
fad)e,  unb  bie  ftreitenben  '^artl)eien  in  feinem  JiJertrag  fommen  fbnnen,  fo 


23 

fott  ber  ^rebiger  rcelt^ei*  bie  Slufftd^t  iiber  bie  ©emeinbe  i)at,  ober  ber  ^re= 
biger  ber  in  ber  ©egenb  rool^nt,  bie  ©ad^e  unterfud^en,  unb  ben  ©treitenben 
eine  Sleferen^  anempfe[)[en ;  biefelbe  foil  aug  brep  ©liebern  ber  ©enteinbe 
beftel^en,  raonon  ber  J?lager  einen,  ber  Seflagte  ben  anbern,  itnb  biefe  jroep 
ben  britten  erroafilen  follen,  biefe  breg  foHen  bann  bie  3iDiftig!eiten  f(f)lid^ten. 
^m  %aU  abex  eine  ber  [treitenben  ^erfonen  mit  biefem  2lu§fprud^  un^ufrieben 
fepn  foCte,  fo  mag  fie  fid^  an  bie  nad^fte  oierteljal^rlid^e  ober  grofje  33er= 
fammlung  roenben  e§  bem  2luffi(^t§alteften  ober  2lelteften  Be!annt  madden, 
um  eine  jroetjte  griebenSfd^litf)tung  an^alten,  unb  raenn  bie  ^rebiger  l^in= 
langlid^  Urfac^  baju  finben,  fo  follen  fie  eine  jraegte  ^^rieben^fd^lid^tung  er= 
tl^eiten;  in  raelrfiem  %aU  eine  jebe  ber  ^art^e:;en  jroet)  ©lieber  aug  bee  ®e= 
meinbe,  unb  biefe  niere,  ben  fiinften  erroa^len  foQen;  biefe  follen  ben  2lug= 
fprud^  ber  3roifti9^eiten  ganjlid^  entfd^eiben;  follte  aber  eine  ber  ^erfonen 
mit  biefem  Slu^fprud^  borf)  nid^t  jufrieben  fo  fd^lie^t  er  fid^  bamit 

aug ;  ein  (Slieb  ber  ©emeinbe  fid^  loeig  fon  , 

roegen  ©d^ulben  ober  anbern  S'^iftiS^eiten,  bie  <E>a<i)e  fd^lid^ten  ju  laffen, 
nad^bem  e§  il^m  oon  einem  ^rebiger  ober  35organger,  roeltfie  bie  Stuffiest 
l^afjen,  anempfo^ten  roorben,  ober  ein  ©lieb  oon  ber  ©emeinbe  cor  ©erid^t 
jie^en  follte  efie  bie  nor^erge^enbe  SJiaafiregeln  genommen  raorben,  fo  foil 
baffelbe  con  biefer  ©emeinbe  auSgefd^loffen  fer)n,  e§  feg  benn,  ba^  ©treitigj 
!eiten  Don  ber  2lrt  roaren,  "oa^  fie  eine  gerid^tlid^e  ©ntfd^eibung  erforbern 
unb  redfitfertige,  alg :    ©gecutoren  ober  Slbminiftratoren. 


8  c|i  r  e 


unb 


^ttt^t--£)rittttng 


ber 


^etettitdtcn  95tit^etiti  ©^rtftp* 


Dtcfcs  gebrutft  auf  JInorbnung  etncr  ^aupt=(£onferen3,  geljalten  ben  3n)ct= 

ten  Cag  3""Y^  "t^  Z<^h^  unfers  ^crrn,  ^8^7,  in  JTIountpleafant, 

IPeftmorelanb  County,  Penn. 


©f bruifet  betjSoljannfs  Urmbruft  u.  (do. 

17  1817.  25 


Ur f p  t  un  g 

ber 

Sercittigtctt  Sriibcr  in  KJrifto. 


Sn  bem  le^t  oerflofjeneit  ^al^r^unbert,  l^at  e^  bem  $errn  unfernt  ®ott 
gefallen,  in  nerjcfiiebenen  ©egenben  ber  2BeIt  DJMnner  }n  erroecfen,  bie  bem 
oerfallenen  ©l^riftentl^um  raieber  aufl^elfen,  unb  bie  ^e^re  com  ^reu^,  in  i^rer 
^auterJeit  oerfiinbigen  foKten. 

(Sr  gebarf)te  babe^  aurf)  ber  ®eutfc]§en  in  ^Imerifa,  tt)etc|e  l^in  unb  raieber 
in  biefem  fid)  au^gebreiteten  Sanbe  lebten ;  ba^er  nur  felten  ©elegen^eit  l^atten, 
bie  ^rebigt  oonx  ^xeu^  ju  fjoron  uni  fid^  ju  erbauen,  unb  nur  felten  in  il^rer 
ajJutterfpraci^e,  unb  an  mand^en  Dertern  nid^t  in  ber  Sauterleit  unb  im  (Srnft 
corgetragen  itie  e§  fotlte, 

Unter  anbern  mel^r  erroecEte  er  aud^  einen  DtterBein,  einen  33i3l^nt,  unb 
einen  ©titling ;  riiftete  fie  au^  tnit  @eift,  ©nabe  unb  5?raft,  in  feinem  fo 
fel^r  oernac^Iaffigten  SBeinberge  ?u  arbeiten,  urn  aud^  unter  ben  Seutfd^en  in 
2lmeri{a,  ©iinber  jur  33u^e  ju  rufen.  Siefe  folgten  bem  9iuf  il^reS  §errn 
unb  SUeifterg,  arbeiteten  im  ©egen,  unb,  fo  errid)teten  fie,  l^in  unb  roieber 
^errlic^e  ©emeinben,  unb  fii^rten  (Sl^riflo  mand^e  eble  ©eele  ju.  ?Jad^  unb 
nadE)  enueiterte  fid^  i^r  3Biirfung§freig,  bafe  fie  babep  genot^iget  roaren,  fic^ 
urn  DJJitarbetter  im  2Ceinberg  umjufe^en ;  benn  bie  ®rnbte  mar  fo  gro^,  unb 
oer  2lrbeiter  nur  roenig.  ©ott  errcedEte  onbere  bie  aud^  roiEig  raurben,  il^re 
^rafte  bem  §errn  ju  roibmen.  ©old^c  raurben  bann  oon  einem  ober  "bem 
anbern  al§  SWitarbeiter  angenommen. 

S)ie  Slnjal^I  ber  ©emeinb§:©lieber  in  ben  oerfd^iebenen  ©egenben  mud§§ 

oon  3eit  ju  ^dt,  unb  oerbreitete  fid^  in  ben  ©taaten  Don  Sirginien.    Salter 

l^at  Dtterbein  auf  ben  gro^en  3SerfammIungen  ju  S^xten  ©onferenj  ge^atten, 

27 


28 

mit  ben  ^rebigern  bie  gegeniDartig  roaren.  ®r  l^at  Ujnen  bic  aBic^tigfeit 
im  ^rebtgt=2lmt  oorgeftellt ;  rote  not^ig  e^  fet),  alien  @rni"t  anutrcenben,  um 
©eelen  ?u  retten ;  fie  Ijielten  bobep  diat^  rcie  fie  am  nU^lict)[ten  fet;n  fbnnten, 
unb  na^men  folci^e  auf  ?u  3!}Jitar5ettern,  oon  benen  fie  Urfad)  fatten  ?u  glou- 
6en,  baf(  fie  ba^  G^riftent^um  am  ^erjen  erfar^ren  flatten.  2)ie  Slnja^l  bet 
©lieber  cerme^rte  fid^  immer  mel^r  unb  mef;r.  Um  je^t  red)t  nii^lic^  unb 
gemeinfc^aftlicf)  ju  orbeiten,  fallen  fid^  bie  ^^Jrebtger  Derpflicf)tet  eine  (Sonferenj 
ju  beftimmen,  roo  fie  jufammen  !amen,  um  fid;  recl)t  ?u  oereintgen ;  benn 
e;n;ge  rcaren  Sieformitte,  anbere  2utr)eraner,  anbere  9JJennoniften  u.  f.  id., 
bn[)er  beftimmten  fie  ben  25ften  (September  1800  in  griebtic^  Gountp, 
a)Javx)lanb,  in  bem  §aufe  beg  jyriebricf)  j^emp  jufammen  §u  fommen.  ©^ 
lamen  i^rer  bretjjel^n  jufammen,  nemlid^  : 

SB.  Dtterbein,  6.  ©void), 

3.  mi)m,  2).  ©tricfler, 

S.  ©ut^ing,  6.  Srum, 

(5.  9leucommer,  §.  Srum, 

?p.  Sei^man,  21.  ^erfc^et), 

@.  ^trimmer, 

^.  j?emp, 
fie  oeretnigten  ftd^  in  eine  ©efeHfd^aft,  bie  ben  3iamen  fiil^rt:    „2)ie  vet-- 
einigten  Sriiber  in  G^rifto"  ;  fie  errodl^lten  2Bil^etm  Dtterbein  unb  3Wartin 
33of)m,  p  Dberauffefjern  ober  iMfd^offen ;  fie  rourben  einig  einem  jeben  bie 
{5ret)^eit  ju  laffen,  ju  taufen  nad£)  eineg  jeben  (Srfenntni^. 

3Son  nun  an  nerbreitete  fic^  bie  ©emeinbe  immer  mef)r  unb  mel^r ;  fie 
naf)men  ?Prebiger  an  bie  immer  reiften  (benn  bie  ^rebigt  ^Id^e  fonnten 
fonft  nicf)t  bebient  roerben) ;  ha^  2Cer!  oerbreitete  fid^  in  ben  ©taaten  uon 
Df)io  unb  H'entudtg,  ©^  roar  je^t  nbt^ig  eine  ©onferenj  im  (Staat  D^io  ju 
l^alten,  tnbem  e§  ju  befd^roerlid^  roar,  fiir  jene  ^rebiger  jdi^rlid^  fo  roeit  nad^ 
ber  Sonferen?  ju  gefjen. 

3}er  Sruber  33o^m  ftarb  unterbeffen,  unb  33ruber  Dtterbein  bege[)rte, 
ba^  ein  93ticf)of  follte  gerodf;lt  roerben,  (roeil  er  mct)t  metjr  felbft  nadt)fel^en 
fonnte,)  ber  bag  aSerf  iiber  fid^  nef)me,  bamit  3"^*  unb  Drbnung  ge^alten 
roiirbe ;  benn  eg  roar  auf  ber  erften  Gonferem  auggemad)t,  ta^  roenn  einer 
Don  ben  33ifdt)bffen  fterben  roiirbe,  boJ5  ein  auberer  errod[)lt  roerben  follte. 
3)a  roarb  33ruber  G^riftian  DJeucommer  alg  33ifcl)of  auf  eine  Qe\t  eriDaf)lt, 
ber  bie  2(uffid^t  Uber  fic^  nel^me  iiber  bie  ©emeinfc^oft. 

Sd^on  tange  rcurbe  ber  9J?anget  einer  3i"i'torbnung  in  ber  ©emeinbe 
tief  empfunben ;  eg  roar  fd;ou  iiu'ljrmat  etroao  baran  getljan  roorben ;  enblic^ 


29 

rcurbe  auf  ber  ©onferenj  im  ©taat  Dl^io  befd^Ioffen :  baf;  eine  ."oaupt  ober 
®eneral  Sonferenj  ge^atten  roerben  joEte,  bie  eg  iiber  ftd^  nel^men,  bie 
.^ud^torbnung  in  etroag  coQftanbiger  ju  tnac^en,  fo  rcie  fie  bem  2Corte  (Sotted 
gemafe  finb. 

3)ie  ©lieber  ?u  biefer  ©onferenj  foUten  axi^  ben  ^rebigern,  in  ben 
unterfdjieblic^en  ©egenben,  burc^  bie  ©lieber  ber  ©emeinbe  geiuaf^lt  joerben 
burc^  bie  SJJel^r^eit  ber  ©tintmen ;  unb  e§  raaren  bie  fotgeuben  ''^rebiger 
gegenracirtig  an^  ber  ©onferenj,  nemlid) :  Sfjriftian  9Jeucoiumer,  2(6raf;am 
§ieftanb,  3tnbrea§  QeUev,  Saniel  Srei;er,  ©eorge  Se:  ebum,  2lt)ra[)am 
Sracffel,  ©r^riftian  33erger,  9l&raf)am  Weijex,  ^o^anneS  ©cf)neiber,  §einricl^ 
5?umler,  §einrid^  ©pdt^,  '^iaat  ^leufd^roanber,  S^riftian  ^rum,  unb  ^atob 
SauluS,  2)ie  oerfamleten  fid)  am  61en  '^xmx),  1815,  nal^e  6ei  2){ountpIeafant, 
in  S05eftinorelanb  Sountt),  ^ennfqtoanien,  rao  fie  nad)  reifer  Ueberlegung, 
bie  folgenbe  Sefire  unb  3tege(n  fiir  gut  unb  nii^Iid^  befanben,  fie  ber  ©e= 
meinbe  in  2ie6e  unb  ®emutf)  ju  iibergeben  mit  bem  l^erjlidien  SBunfd),  ta^ 
biefe  Sel^re  unb  fo(c|e  Stegeln,  nebft  bem  9Borte  ©otteg  mod^ten  beobad^tet 
roerben.  2)enn  ©ott  ift  ein  ©ott  ber  Drbnung,  unb  roo  leine  Drbnung  unb 
^irc^enjudit  ift,  ba  uertie^rt  fid^  alle  Sie&e  unb  ©emeinfd^aft ;  bafjer  la^t  ung 
bem  3tat§  be§  §errn  folgen  ber  un^  lefirt,  bag  loir  burd)  ©eiuutf;  einer  ben 
anbern  ^ol^er  adEiten  alg  ung  felbft,  fud^en  gefinnt  ju  fe^n  loie  3efu§  S^riftug 
aud^  roar,  ber  ^ned^tS  ©eftaHt  angenommen,  rcarb  gel^orfam  big  jum  Xobe 
am  i?reu^,  unb  ung  bie  ©rabe  unb  j?raft  ju  erroerben,  ba^  rair  ung  aug 
Siefie  unb  SDemut^  einer  bem  anbern  unterroerfen  fonnten ;  roer  fid^  nid^t 
unterinerfen  lann,  bem  mangelt  noc^  ©nabe,  Siebe  unb  Semut^ ;  bafje? 
fagt  S^fii^  •  roer  unter  e::d)  ber  ®ro|te  fei^n  wxii,  ber  foQ  be§  anbern  2)iener 
fepn;  foil  einer  beg  anbern  Siener  fei;n,  fo  mitten  rair  einanber  lieben; 
^efug  fagt :  alfo  rairb  jebermann  erfennen,  ba^  i^r  meine  red^te  ^linger 
feijb,  fo  i^r  Siebe  fiabt,  unb  tcer  nid;t  lieb  l^at  ber  bleibt  im  2:obte.  ©o 
laffet  ung  2ie6e  iiben,  auf  ba^  luir  bie  §errltd;leit  befi^en  mogen,  bie  ^e\u^ 
feinen  ^iingern  ron  feinem  3?ater  erbeten  l)zt,  bafi  rcir  eing  fet)n  mod^ten, 
icie  er  unb  ber  3Sater  eing  finb.  Sarum  ifir  Iteben  33riiber,  laffet  ung 
fud^en  gleid)  gefinnet,  einljellig  unb  eintrad;ttg  §u  feijn,  unb  feinS  Uebel  uon 
bem  anbern  reben  ober  benfen,  fonbern  ben  §errn  anfle^en,  bafi  er  ung 
fc-nen  ©eift  unb  ©rnft  geben  mod^ten  um  bag  S^riftentl^um  red)t  ju  feiner 
©l^re  jn  fii^ren,  unb  ju  unferem  eroigen  SBol^l  2lmen. 


mtx  9lhfj|ttitt. 


§laubcn5=15ckcnutnif| 

ber 

SBcrclttigtctt  Sriibcr  in  g^tifto. 


Sm  9iamen  ®otte§  befennen  xv'iv  cor  jebennann,  ba§  i»ir  glauben  an 
ben  einigen  raaf^ren  @ott,  abater,  ©o^n  unb  §etUgen  ©eift,  bafe  bieiV  S)rei) 
®ing  finb,  ber  33ater  im  ©ofjn,  ber  ®of)n  im  aSater  imb  ber  £»eilige  ©etft 
gleid^eg  SCefeu  init  bei;ben.  Snfj  biefer  breijeinige  ®ott  loimmel  imb  Grben 
unb  aEeg  luag  barinnen  i[t,  joraof^l  ftcf)lbar  al§  unfid^tbar,  erfcfiaffen  l)at, 
trcigt,  regiert,  frf)u^t  unb  erJ^cilt. 

SBir  glauben  an  ^e[dm  Gi^riftunt,  ba^  er  roal^rer  ®ott  unb  Wien\^  ift, 
ba^  er  feine  9JJenfd^f)eit  burd^  ben  §eiUgen  ®ei[t  in  SOJaria  angenommeii, 
unb  oon  if;r  geborcn ;  ba^  er  §eilanb  unb  a3erfbf)ner  beg  gan^en  menfd^ltc^en 
0efcl^led)t§  i[t.  SBenn  fie  bie  in  Seju  angebotene  ©nabe  int  ©lauben  an 
ifjn  anne^nten;  ba|  biefer  ^efug  fiir  un^  gelitten  ^at,  am  ©tanune  bee 
5lreut5e§  geftovbcn,  begraben,  am  britten  Xage  loieber  auferftanben,  gen 
§immel  gefaf)ren,  iveldier  ift  jur  redjten  ®otteg  unb  certritt  un5 ;  unb 
rcieber  fommen  loirb,  am  iiingften  3^age,  ju  ricf)ten  bie  Sebenbigen  unb  bie 
2;obten. 

3Cir  glauben  an  ben  <oetUgen  ®eift,  bafe  er  gleid^eS  2Befeng  mit  bem 
aSater  unb  ©ol}n,  ba^  er  bie  ©Uiubige  trijfle  unb  fie  in  alle  ai'af)rI)oit  loite. 

aCir  glauben  an  etne  §eiltge  d^riftlic^e  ©emeinbe,  ®emeinfc§aft  ber  5peili= 
gen,  2luferfter)ung  be§  gleifcfieg  unb  ein  eioige^  ileben. 

SBir  glauben  bag  bie  Sibel  altcS  unb  ueue5  Seftament,  ©otteS  SBort  ift ; 

ba^  fie  ben  iDarjven  Sl'eg  ju  unfcrer  ©eeligfeit  entljalte,  bnf5  ein  jeber  mar^re 

(Sfjrift,  biefelbe  ntit  ben  Ginfliifjen  beS  ©eifteg  ©otteg  einng  unb  alloin  ju 

feiner  9iid}tfdjnur  nerjiiten  foil,  unb  ba{3  oljue  ©lauben  an  oofum  Gl^riftum, 

rear^re  SBujje,  aSergebung  ber  ©iinbeu  unb  SJad^folge  Gljrifti,  niemanb  ein 

n)af)rer  Cf)rift  fei)n  fann. 

30 


31 

3Bir  glauben  bafi  bie  ^eilige  ©d^rift  entl^alt,  nemtid^:  ben  %a\l  in 
2lbam  unb  bie  Grlo[ung  burc^  S^fw"  S^riftum,  ber  ganjen  SBelt  joCe  ge^ 
prebiget  rcerben. 

2Bir  glauben  ba§  bie  au^ere  3)lxttel  in  ben  (Semeinben  ©i^rifti  geuBt 
roerben  fofiten,  nemlid^ :  bie  2;aufe  unb  bag  @ebdcf)tni^  beg  '^obteg  be§  §errn 
^efu,  unter  feinen  ^inbern  geiibt  rcerben  ;  bie  3trt  unb  SBeife  foil  aber  einem 
jeben  nadE)  feiner  (grfenntnife  iiberlaffen  raerben.  2tudE)  ba§  33e9[piel  »on 
j^u^roafc^en,  ftel^et  einem  jeben  fret). 


3)Dc5ter  ?lifi|ttttt. 


iaupt=  unb  Jnljrlidjcn^tonferen?, 


%x.  3Iad^  lueldjer  SPeife  unb  SSerorbnung,  follen  bie  SBerl^anblungcn 
auf  \)en  Sonferenjen  uorgenommen  rcerben  ? 

Slntro.  ®g  rcirb  uerlangt,  bajj,  rcag  aud^  immer  bet)  biefer  ©elegen^eit 
getl^an  rcirb,  foil  fo  getf;an  roerben,  alg  06  eg  in  ber  ©egenrcart  ©otteg 
rcare;  roer  ?u  reben  l^at  ber  fte^e  auf  unb  rebe  fret),  roie  erg  in  feinem 
§erjen  l^at. 

%v.  2Bie  unb  auf  roaS  2lrt,  foCen  bie  (Slieber  einer  §aiipt--Gonferen5 
geroal^lt  tuerben  ? 

2lntro.  ^n  einem  jeben  2)iftri!te  foUen  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger,  njenn 
fold^e  bo  finb,  rcenn  nid^t,  fo  foUen  bie  fe^f)aften  ^rebiger,  bie  in  bem  33e5irt 
roof)nen  eg  ben  ©emeinben  oorftelten,  bafs  fie  jioei)  Stelteften  aug  if;rem  33e= 
jir!  rca^Ien;  eg  fotlen  aber  alte  bie  Slelteften  bie  in  bem  33enr!  finb  bie 
auf  bie  Sonferenj  gel^en  fonnen,  auf  bie  2Ba^I  tl^un,  unb  eg  einige  3eit 
Dorl^er  be!annt  madden ;  unb  bie  jrcet)  bie  bie  SDJel^r^eit  ber  ©timmen  befom= 
men,  foHen  bie  ©lieber  von  ber  ^aupt^Gonferenj  fetjn;  bie  ©timmen 
foUen  aber  an  jebem  Drte,  fd^riftlid^  aufgejeidEjnet  roerben  unb  tjon  einem 
anroefenben  ^rebiger,  ober  oon  einem  33organger  unterfd^rieben  roerben. 
Ser  Sluffid^tgaltefte  im  Sejir!  foEC  eg  unterfud^en,  unb  foOten  jroet)  con  i^nen 
eine  gleid^e  Slnjal^l  ©timmen  l^aben,  fo  foil  er  entfd^eiben  roelc^er  Don  il^nen 
erroa^lt  ift. 


32 

jjr.    SCte  often  foU  bie  ^aupt^Gonferenj  ge^alten  toerben  ? 

2lntro.    3tIIe  vxev  ^af)te. 

%x.  §at  bie  <Qaupt:(Sonferenj  eine  anbere  ©eroalt,  bie  bie  ^a^rlid^e 
mc^tf)at? 

2lntn).  3«/  fie  l^at  ollein  bie  ©eroalt  jroep  93ifcl^offe  au§  ben  Slelteften, 
auf  t)ier  ^a^re  ju  rcd[)Ien ;  unb  and)  bie  3wc^t''rbnung  ober  3iegeln  ?n  oer^ 
cinbern  ober  ?u  oerbeffern,  nad^bem  fie  e§  fUr  gut  befinbet;  unter  ben  Se: 
bingungen  unb  2luSna^m,  ba^  fein  Slrtilel  gemacttt  roerbe,  ber  ben  Circuit 
ju  beioetfen  auffiebt  ober  raegtl^ut.  S)ie  <0aupt:6onferenj  foil  au6)  bie  2)iftrifte 
beftimmen,  ido  bie  jdfjrtid^en  ©onferenjen  gef)alten  loerben  foUen. 

%x.    2Belcf)e§  finb  bie  ©(ieber  ber  jd^rlid^en  Sonferenj  ? 

2lntn).  2ine  bie  3lelteften  unb  ^rebiger,  bie  einen  fd^riftlid^en  ®rlau5» 
nifjfd^ein  empfangen  l^aben,  unb  in  bem  Sejirf  oon  einer  fold^en  (Sonferenj 
finb,  ober  in  fold^en  aufgenomuten  rcevben. 

%v.  3la{i)  raeldier  2Beife  unb  SSerorbnung  foUen  bie  SSerl^anblungen 
oorgenommen  loerben  ? 

2Intn).  1.  (g§  rairb  ein  (Sapitel  au^  ber  Sibel  oerlefen,  unb  hirje 
2lnmertung  bariiber  gentad^t,  al^bann  roirb  gefungen  unb  gebeten,  unb  baS 
fo  oft  alg  bie  Gonfcrenj  fi|t ;  unb  mit  ®efang  unb  @ebet  befd^loffen, 

2.  ©ie  ©onferenj  foil  einen  ©d^reiber  unb  foHte  einer  ber  ^Bifd^bffe 
abroefenb  fet)n,  aud)  einen  ber  2Uiffi^t§=2letteften  ?um  mit  agteren  rcat)len. 

3.  aSerben  bie  ^rebiger  unterfucE)t,  roie  i[)r  Setragen  gegen  il^ren  9feben= 
menfd^en  fei) ;  ob  i^r  SBanbel  untabelf)aft,  ob  fie  fo  t)iel  ^eit  roie  ntoglid^ 
amoenben  urn  bag  SJeic^  ®otteg  auSjubreiten. 

4.  2Sa§  fiir  ^rebiger  finb  auf  bie  ^robe  anjunel^men  ? 

5.  5l'a§  fiir  ^rebiger  ntiiffen  ferner  auf  bie  ^robe  bleiben  ? 

6.  Sinb  einige  ju  3telteften  ju  iual)len  ? 

7.  ©inb  rDot)l  einige  oon  ben  'iprebiger  geftorben  ? 

8.  5Celcf)e5  finb  bie  2lufficf)tg=3lelteften  ? 

9.  SBer  giebt  fief)  auf  ju  reifen  ? 

10.  2Bag  ift  gefamntelt  rcorben,  tf)eil6  jufallige  3(u§gaben  ju  beftreiten, 
unb  ben  reifenben  ^rebigern  if^ren  ®el)alt  aufjuniad^en  ?  ift  Jied^nung  mit 
i^nen  gel^altcn  inorben  ?  f)aben  fie  ba§  il)rige  betommen  ? 

11.  2Bann  unb  luo  foil  bie  nacf)fte  (Sonferen?  ge^alten  rcerben  ? 

12.  ©inb  bie  3lelteften  georbinirt  morben  ? 

13.  3n  luag  fiir  ^e^irfe  finb  bie  'i^rebiger  biefeS  '^a'^t  angefteQt  ? 

14.  3ft  '"-ic^  etiua6  me^r  ju  tl)un  ? 

15.  ^at  bie  (Sonferenj  bie  2)iftrifte  beftimmt  in  il^rem  33ejir!,  wm  bie 
SCBa^l  fiir  bie  ©lieber  ber  ,*oaupt:(Sonferenj  ?u  l^alten  ? 

16.  5>ft  f*Qe§  roas  Der()anbelt  morben,  in  bag  ^rotofoll  iibertragen 
roorben  ? 


fritter  9lbfr(|ttitt 


ISon  Her 
If  filjlung  xnib  #rMnation  kr  iifdjiiffc 

unb 

Hon  l^rem  91  mt  nni  ^flii^t 


%t.    2Cie  foUen  bie  Sifd^offe  eingefe^t  tcerben  ? 

2tntn).  2)te  §aupt:(Sonferen?  foil  fie  roafjlen,  burd^  bie  99?e^rl^eit  ber 
©timmen,  Slelteften,  bie  ju  ber  ^aupt^Sonferenj  geroafjit  finb ;  aud^  fte[)t  e5 
ber  ©onferenj  frei),  fie  bie  Sifc£)offe  noc^  auf  Dier  ^a^re  be^jube^alten.  2)ie 
©eioal^lte  ober  Sifd^offe  miiffen  a6er  bie  unterfc^ieblic^en  58ejirte  unb  (£on= 
ferenjen  bereifen  !onn!n,  fonft  !onnen  fie  nic^t  geioa^It  raerben ;  bie  fo  ge; 
iDttl^lte  fotlen  oon  einem  Sifd^of  unb  einem  2telteften  burd^  2luflegung  il^rer 
§anbe  orbinirt  roerben ;  follte  aber  !ein  Sifd^of  ba  fet)n,  fo  follen  eg  jrae^ 
2leltefte  t^un. 

%t.    aSag  finb  ber  Sifc^offe  i^re  ^flic^ten  ? 

2lntn).    1.    33ei)  unfern  ©onferenjen  alg  SJorfi^er  ju  agieren. 

2.  ®ie  l^aben  mit  einem  2lelteften,  ben  loa^Ien  fie,  ben  reifenben  ^re= 
bigern  il^re  oerfc^iebenen  Sejirfe  anjurceifen,  boc^  tmt  ber  @infcf)ran!ung, 
bafi  fein  reifenber  ^rebiger  longer  alg  breg  ^al^re  nad^  einanber  in  einem 
geftattet  roerbe,  an  bem  nemlid^en  Drte  ju  bleiben,  e§  fer)  benn,  in  §infid^t 
auf  befonbern  Umftanbe,  unb  mit  SeraiCigung  ber  Sifd^offe. 

3.  3)ie  Sifc^offe  ^eigen  ben  2luffic^tgalteften  i^ren  Sejirt  on,  tien  fie 
?U  bereifen  fiaben. 

4.  ^n  ber  jroifd^en  ,3eit,  uon  ben  ©onferenjen  l^aben  fie  mit  ben  31(uf= 
fid^tScilteften  ©eroalt,  bie  reifenoen  '^rebiger  ju  cerraed^feln,  roo  fie  eg  fiir 
Beffer  anfefien,  au^  ^rebiger  aufjune^men  ober  ju  fugpenbiren  big  auf  bie 
©onferen?. 

5.  ®ie  ^aben  bie  oerf^iebenen  ©onferenjen,  fo  roeit  fie  fid^  erftredEen, 
ju  bereifen,  unb  ^aben  im  geiftlid^en,  bie  Dberauffid^t  iiber  alle  ©ememben. 

6.  3^"en  ftef)t  eg  ju,  bie  Drbination  ju  noHjiel^en. 

7.  SBenn  ein  33ifcf)of  auf^ort  bie  oerfcf)iebenen  Sonferenjen  ju  bebienen 

in  ber  ®emeinfd^aft  unb  bie  Sejirle  ?u  bereifen,  fann  er  bod^  fein  bifd^iifj 

33 


34 

lid^eS  Slnit  unter  uu5  au^iiben  ?    Wm,  e^j  fei;  benn,  bafi  er  Irani  rciive  unb 
rca§  bergleid^en  Umftanbe  mel^r  fer)n  nuigten. 

8.  22enn  e5  fic^  jutragtn  foUte,  bajj  unfere  (Semeinfd^aft  ?u  einer  3eit 
leinen  a3ifrf)of  l^atte,  raetl  fie  entiueber  geftorben  ober  ju^penbirt  luaren,  obcr 
loie  e§  tmmer  jet)n  mag ;  rcie  foil  3ktf)  gefdjaft  luerben  ?  Ser  Sleltefte, 
loeld^er  in  3l5iuefen^eit  ciueS  23tid&of3  geiuiifjlt  loirb,  jum  mit  agteren  an  ber 
Sonferenj,  foU  bie  Sifd^ofS  Stelle  fo  lang  bebienen,  alg  bie  ©onfevenj  raaf^rt; 
Oiefer  fo  geiuiif^lte  a>orft|er,  foil  audi)  bie  anbece  (Eonferenj  bcbi.nen ;  er  foil 
feinen  ©i^,  mit  bem  bort  geiDa[)Iten  3Sorfil5er  net)nien,  um  mit  i^m  in  bee 
Sonferen?  ?u  agieren,  unb  ber  bort  geaiatjlte  Sorfi^er,  foH  eben  fo,  bie 
anbere  Sonferen?  and)  bebienen,  baniit  eine  jebe  Gonfereni  wei^,  rcie  e§  bet) 
ber  anbern  ougfiel^t ;  unb  bafj  Siebe  unb  ®emeinfd)aft  er^alten  rcerbe,  u.  f.  lo. 
bi§  jur  §aupt:6onferen5,  bie  roieber  Sifd^offe  lud^It. 

9.  ©^  foil  ber  58ifcl)bffe  ^flicl)t  fei^n,  bafe  eine  fdjicflid^e  ^rebigt  an  bie 
anroefenbe  'prebiger  ber)  ©d^Iu^  jeber  ©onferenj  gel^alteu  roirb. 


mtxitx  m\t^n\tt 


S^on  tien 
3lufrid)t0  =  aelteftcn, 

il^r  er 


%x.    2Bie  fotten  bie  Stuffid^tScilteften  geioal)!!  luerben  ? 

Slntro.    Sie  a3ifc^ijffe  follen  ber  tionteren?  einige  au^   ben    Sleltcften, 
Die  i^re  ^robejeit  au^geljalten,  Dorfd)Iagen,  unb  mit  3uftimmung  ber  Son; 
ferem  auf  oier  "^aljxe  lud^len. 
^r.    Iften^.    ffias  finb  bie  ^vf'i<i)ten  be5  2luf fid^tsalteften  ? 

2(ntra.    3)en  i^m  oon  ben  ^-ytfd)bffen  angeioiefenen  Se?irl  p  tereifen, 
unb  fo  oft  ni  prebigen  alS  er  fann 


35 

2.  Gr  f)at  bie  Ueberfid^t  iiber  bie  reifenben  unb  fepaften  ^Prebigcr,  in 
fetnem  SBejirf,  ha^  fie  fid^  bem  ©oangeltum  gemafi  betragen. 

3.  (Sr  foil  bie  Dierteljaf^rUd^e  unb  gro^e  33erfammlung  beftellen,  unb 
TOO  moglid^  bebienen;  ba§  2lbenbma[jt  l^alten,  unb  oiertelja^rlid^  ©onferen? 
l^alten  tnit  ben  gegenroartigen  ^cebigern  unb  ®rmaf)nern  unb  SSorgangecn  ; 
eg  unterfud^en  oh  bie  reifenben  unb  fe^^aften  ^rebiger  il^re  ^flid^t  t^un, 
befonberS  ob  bie  fefj^aften  ^rebiger  rao  moglid)  alle  ©ontag  prebigen,  unb 
TOO  nief)rere  fiub  fie  ju  g^iten  ju  Derroed^felu,  rcie  am  me[)rften  ?fu^en  ge= 
fd^aft  roirb ;  fie  erma^nen,  bafi  bie  ^ud^t  unb  Drbnung  unb  iiiebe  unb  (Srnft 
be^  ben  ©emeinben  erfjalten. 

4.  @r  fann  aud^  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger  in  feinem  Sejirle  oerraed^feln ; 
er  foE  aber  einen  33ifd^of  tnit  }u  dtati)  jie^en ;  er  fann  aurf)  ^^rebiger  aufnel^= 
men  ober  fu^peubiren  big  auf  bie  ©onferenj. 

5.  @r  foQ  bem  Sifd^of  3iad^rid^t  geben,  raie  e§  in  feinem  Sejirl  au^-- 
ftel^t,  unb  nad^fel^en,  bafs  bie  reifenbe  ^rebiger  BierteliaJ^cig  eine  rierf)a(tni|!- 
maffige  Unterftii^ung  er^atten :  inbem  i^nen  i^r  ©efjatt  aug  bem  ©elb  bas 
fie  auf  if)rem  33ejirl  fammlen  mogen  gegebeu  toirb ;  etn  lebiger  foU  aber 
bodf)  nid^t  iiber  ad^jig  2:f}a(er,  unb  einem  gee^lic^ten  ein  fjunbert  unb  fed^jig 
Xfialer  ertaubt  fet)n ;  foUte  aber  e§  nid^t  jureicfien,  raaS  auf  einem  ober  auf 
bem  anbern  Se^irf  gefammelt  loirb,  fo  foU  eg  einer  ©omittie  aug  ber  ©on; 
ferenj  iibergeben  toerben,  bie  nad^  gut  SSefinben  aug  ober  Don  anberen  il^rem 
gefammelten  ©elb  bem  manglenben  ju  tf)uu,  too  aber  ein  ^rebiger  in  einer 
©tabt'ftel^en  foUte,  ba  mufe  bie  ©emeinbe  il^n  oerforgen. 

6.  ©oUte  eg  fid^  fo  jutragen,  bafi  ju  einer  Qeit  lein  SBifd^of  ba  mare, 
fo  follen  bie  Stuffid^tgalteften,  ein  jeber  in  feinem  ^Bejirf  befonberg  auf  bie 
©emeinben  ad^t  ^aben,  bamit  alleg  in  Siebe  unb  ©rnft  erl^alten  raerbe,  unh 
einer  bem  anbern  Siarfiridit  gebe,  roie  eg  in  feinem  '-Bejir!  augfie^t.  ©ollte 
eg  fid^  aber  jutragen,  'Da'^  fein  SUiffid^tgciltefter  in  bem  ober  jenem  Sejirt 
mare,  roie  foil  9Jat^  gefd&aft  rcerben  ?  ®g  foH  bem  33ifd^of  9?ac^rid^t  baoon 
gegeben  roerben;  biefer  foil  einen  ton  ben  2lelteften,  im  Sejirf,  ba?u  be= 
ftimmen,  big  jur  Sonferen?  roo  eg  ju  tl^un  ift;  follte  aber  fein  33ifc{)of  ba 
fet)n,  fo  foil  ber  nactifte  2luffid^tgaltefte  einen  roal^len,  roenn  er  eg  nid^t  felber 
tt}un  fann. 


giinftcr  m\mtt 


S^on  Hen 

unb 

Crbitttttlott. 


%x.    2Cie  foU  em  Sleltefter  geroafilt  rcerben  ? 

2lntra.  9Zacf)  einer  pDei)iaf)ngen  ^ro()=3eit,  mag  er  ber  ial^rlirf)en  Son= 
feren?  uorgeftellt  roerben  xmt)  con  ben  iBifc^offen  mit  3luflegung  ii)vev  S^iinbe 
orbimrt  roerben ;  mit  biefem  aSorbef)alt  |o  fid)  bie  ©onferenj  iiberjeugt  fiif)lt, 
bafe  bee  ^nljalt  beg  6,  7,  8,  imb  9te  ScrS  "pnuluS  an  2:itum  im  erften 
Gapitel :  ftc^  in  unb  an  i[)m  befinben ! ! !  eg  foU  einem  ieben  bei)  feiuer 
Drbination  oorgelefcn  luerben  ! ! ! 

1.  aCa§  ift  eineg  2lelte[ten  2lmt  unb  ^:^fad)t?  3u  prebigen  \o  oft  unb 
cielmal  er  fann  unb  ju  taufen,  6^en  einjufegnen,  ^etfen  bem  3tuffidE)tsalteften 
bog  Slbenbma^l  ^alten,  unb  rcenn  ber  2htfftrf)tgdltefte  nic^t  gegeniuiirttg  feijn 
lann,  fo  foil  esS  ein  ober  imex)  2lelteften  tt)un ;  er  foU  alle  2;i)eile  bes  offent= 
lid^en  ©ottegbienfteg  cerriditen,  ®[affen:5>erfammlungen  fuc^en  ju  ernc^ten, 
mo  eg  bie  9Jte^rl)eit  ber  ©lieber  fUr  gut  erfennt,  fie  aucf)  Ijalten,  unb  Ijelfen 
:i>organger  ju  erioatjlen. 

2.  :isiertelial)rlidE)  eine  freijioittige  Collection  ju  l^eben,  fiir  bie  reifenben 
^rebiger  unb  fiir  Slrme;  ein  i^erjeidjui^  bauon  ^u  nel)men,  an  jebem  Ort, 
unb  oon  bem  3Sorganger  unterfrf)rieben,  unb  roenn  fein  SSorganger  gegens 
roartig  rocire,  eg  bann  oon  einem  anbern  ®lieb  unterfcfireiben  laffcn,  um  mit 
bem  Sluffid^tgalteften  9ied)nung  }u  Ijalten,  auf  bafj  aUeo  orbentlic^  5"9e^e. 

3.  2Bo  ein  fef5l)after  2leltefter  ober  'i}3rebiger  ber  felber  nic^tg  mangelt, 
on  einem  Drt  prebigt,  rao  fein  S'ieifenber  l)in  fonimt,  fo  foil  er  bie  (£oUection 
l)eben,  unb  ein  ifierjeid^nife  ebenfo  booon  nef)men,  unb  eg  bem  2lufftrf;tgalteften, 
ober  jur  Sonferen?  fcf)icten,  ober  bringen,  jur  Unterftii^ung  ber  33ebiirftigen 
fefefioften  ^rebiger  bie  orm  finb,  unb  unter  ormen  prebigen. 

4.  ©oUte  ein  reifenber  ^rebiger  ober  3leltefter,  feinen  il^m  ongeioiefes 
nen  ^Sejirf  nerlaffcn  rootlen,  fo  foQ  er  juoor  bem  'Jhiffic^tgalte'ien  jctjreiben  — 


37 

joEte  einer  i^n  etioa  cerlaffeix  ober  Derfdumen,  e§  fei  bann  burdi  ^ranti^eit 
ober  fonft  unDermetblid^e  Umftciube,  fo  foil  er  ber  nad^ften  Sotr^renj  oer^ 
antroortlid^  bafiir  fepn. 

5.  SQBo  fid)  fe^fiafte  befinben,  toeld^e  arm  unb  fiebiirftig  ftnb,  unb  oer= 
langt  rairb  Don  il^rten  ju  prebigen ;  fo  ift  e§  bittig,  bafe  bie  2lelteften  in  ben 
©emeinben  ©otection  madden,  um  fold^e  ^rebiger  nad^  Derf)altm^e  ber  3eit 
bie  fie  baju  anroenben  511  unterftii^en,  bod^  nid^t  iiber  bag,  raag  fiir  bie 
reifenbe  ^rebiger  »eftgefe|t  ift. 


©ci^fter  9lifi|ttitt. 


peife  Prebiger  auf|uueljmen, 

unb 

i^tcm  9lmt  unb  ^flirfitcn 


i5r.  2Bie  foC  ein  ^rebiger  aufgenommen  roerben,  burd^  bie  jal^rUd^e 
©onferenj  ? 

1.  ^n  ber  jroifd^en  3^^^  ^on  ber  ©onferenj,  burd^  ben  Sifd^of,  ober 
ben  Sluffid^tSdlteften  beg  SejirfS,  ober  eineg  2lelteften,  ber  ben  ^la^  eineg 
2luffid^tgalteften,  certritt  auf  einer  jal^rlic^en  ober  gro^en  3>erfantmlung, 
big  jur  nad^ften  ©i^ung  ber  (Sonferenj ;  leiner  rairb  anberg  alg  auf  ^robe 
angenommen,  einer  ber  auf  ^robe  angenommen  ift,  mag  be^bel^alten  ober 
abgeroiefen  roerben,  o|ne  ha^  i^m  einigeg  Unred^t  gefdEie^en  roiirbe,  fonft 
roare  eg  feine  ^robe. 

2.  ©ine  jebe  ^erfon  bie  alg  ?Prebiger  corgefc^Iagen  rairb,  foil  t)on  ber 
©onferenj  unterfudEit  unb  i^m  folgenbe  ^"i^age  oorgelegt  raerben : 

|5r.    §at  er  ®ott  in  S^rifto  alg  einen  oergebenben  ®ott  eriannt  ? 
§at  er  SSergebung  feiner  ©iinben  erlangt  ? 

3ft  bie  Siebe  ©otteg  burd^  ben  f)eiligen  ©eift,  in  bein  ^erj  auggegoffen 
rcorben  ? 

^at  er  ben  j5i^ieben  ©otteg  erlangt  ? 


38 

^aget  er  ber  ^eiligung  nad^  ? 

§at  er  eine  rid^tige  ©rfenntni^,  Don  ©lauben,  con  33ufe,  oou  3led^t: 
fertigung,  ^eiligung  imb  ©riofung  ? 

3.  Siegt  i^m  fein  eigen  ^eil,  unb  ba§  §eil  beineS  9ie5enmenycl^en  me^r 
om  §erjen,  alg  fonft  alle§  anbere  in  ber  SGSelt  ? 

5?ann  er  fid^  bem  3iatl^  feiner  Sriiber  unterraerfen  ? 

2BiU  er  ger^orfam  ferin,  ju  reben  ober  fc^ioeigen,  tote  e§  bie  SBriiber  fiir 
gut  eriennen  ? 

3ft  er  xoxUxQ,  jo  oiel  aB  in  feinem  3Serinbgen  ftef)t,  ben  reifenben  ^lan 
(ober  ben  Sejirf  ?u  bereifen)  l^elfen  aufredit  ju  t)alten  unb  i^m  fo  oiel  voie 
mbglid)  unterftii^en  ? 

4.  23a§  ift  bie  ^flic^t  eineg  ^rebiger^  ? 

3(ntn).  G^riftum  ben  ®e!reu§igten  ju  prebigen,  too  fid^  nur  3"'&orer 
einfinben;  ©laffen  SBerfammlungen  aufrid^ten,  luo  e§  nii^lid)  ift,  mit  i^nen 
Don  il^rem  ©eelen:3»ftflnbe  ju  reben,  bie  angefodE)tenen  fuc^en  jured^t  ju 
lueifen,  bie  2;rdgen  iud)en  aufjumuntern,  unb  alle  im  @Iauben  in  ber  ©nabe 
unb  ©rfanntnife  3ef»  S^rifti  furfien  ju  erbauen,  fo  Diel  rcie  moglirf) ;  nie 
unterlaffen  bie  Hranfen  ju  befud^en,  unb  mit  feinem  Seben  unb  2Banbel 
futfieii  feine  SBorte  ju  belraftigen  loag  er  prebiget. 

5.  JCeld^e  2lniDeifungen  uierben  einem  ''^rebiger  gegeben  ? 

2lntnj.  ®r  feg  fleifig,  nie  Derliere  er  feine  geit  an  unnotl^igen  Singen, 
an  einigem  Drt,  immer  fet)  er  ernftfiaft,  fein  SDenlfprucf)  fet)  bem  §errn  ge= 
^eiliget,  er  meibe  alien  Seid^tfinn,  unb  ©tfjerjen,  er  rebe  befd)eiben,  unb  ^abe 
bel^utfamen  Umgang  mit  bem  roeiblid^en  ®efrf)Ied^te,  unb  betrage  ftd^  alg  ein 
loatirer  6 thrift. 

6.  6r  fei;  immer  abgeneigt  Sefd^ulbigungen  }U  glauben,  e§  fei;  benn 
()in(dngUc^  erraiefen  er  lege  aUeg  fo  oiel  e6  mit  ber  2Cal^rl^eit  beftef)cn  mag 
jum  be  ft  en  au§. 

(Sr  rebe  Don  ntemanb  nidE)tg  Uebelg,  ma^  er  \e  Don  einem  ben!en  mag, 
befjalte  er  foIdE)t^  bey  ftdE)  fclbft,  bi§  er  e5  bemjenigen  felbft,  bem  e5  ange^t, 
fagen  fann. 

7.  ©ein  ©efdjcift  fei;,  ©eelen  ?u  retten  fo  Dtel  rate  mbglid^ ;  ju  biefem 
©efd^afte  gebe  er  fid^  auf.  6r  befuc^e  bie  eg  bebiirftig  finb  ;  in  alien  Singen 
l^anbele  er  nid)t  nacf)  feinem  eigenen  QJutbenfen,  fonbern  alg  ein  ©ol^n  be§ 
(Soangeliumg,  alS  ein  foIrf)er  ftef)t  eg  if)m  ju  feme  ^ext,  fo  rcie  biefe  SBor^ 
fd^rift  lautet :  mit  ^rebigen,  ntit  ^augbefud^en,  mit  I'ebren  unb  23eten, 
unb  58etrad^tung  be§  SCBorteg  ©otteg  jujubringen,  bamit  gel)e  er  um  biS 
ber  foerr  fommt. 


©icbcttter  ?llifr^nitt. 


Sittcnlofen  J^etragcn  ber  PreMger, 


n»ie 


wit  i^ttcn  fatt  Herfa^ren  toerkn. 


j5^r.  2Cag  foil  get^an  rcerben,  raenn  oon  einent  Sifd^of,  ober  2luffid^t§s 
alteften,  ober  ^rebiger,  bie  3la6)vi6)t  einfommt,  alg  f)abe  er  fid^  eine§  3Ser; 
brec^en^  fcf)ulbig  gemac^t,  bag  im  SBorte  ©otteg,  alg  eine  au§jcf)liefeenbe 
§anblung  geboten  fet)  ? 

SlntiD.  3Benn  ein  33ifc|of  raegen  ©ittenlofen  Setragen  feefd^ulbigt  roirb, 
rate  foil  ntit  il^m  oerfa^ren  rcerben  ?  aSo  fic^  Sefc{)ulbigung  ereignen  foEte, 
bie  bem  ©Dangeltum  tiad^tljetlig  raare,  fo  foQ  e§  einem  2tuffid)tgalteften  unb 
einent  2lelteften  befannt  gentad^t  raerben,  bie  foUen  eg  unterfud^en,  oB  ^tna^ 
an  ber  ©acf)e  fer) ;  fie  foUen  aber  !eine  ^lage  aufier  jroet)  ober  bret)  3eugen 
anne^men,  al§  roie  ber  2lpofteI  fagt:  fd^eint  eg  nun,  bafi  er  ntit  red^t  be: 
fd^ulbigt  rcirb,  fo  follen  fie  eg  ftfiriftlid^  nel^men,  unb  bem  33ifdE)of  eine 
Stbfd^rift  baoon  ftf)idfen,  unb  eine  3eit  beftimnten  rco  fie  jufammen  !ommen, 
rao  bie  ^lager  unb  ber  Sifd^of  gegenroartig  fet)n  follen,  unb  foH  burd^  bie 
jroe^  2luffid)tgalteften  unb  brei;  3lelteften  unterfud^t  raerben ;  rairb  er  fd^ulbig 
gefunben,  fo  foE  er  fc^roeigen  bi§  ?ur  jal^rlirfien  (Eonferenj;  ba  follen  bie 
21uffid)tgalteften  unb  Slelteften  eg  nod^  ein  SJla^I  unterfud^en,  roirb  er  fd^ulbig 
gefunben  fo  foil  er  uom  2ltnt  fugpenbirt  raerben. 

gr.  2.  SBenn  ein  2luffid^tgaltefter  raegen  ©ittenlofen  Setrogen  be= 
fd^ulbigt  roiirbe,  roag  foE  geti^an  raerben  ? 

2(ntra.    aSo  fid^  Sefd^ulbigungen  ereignen  foEten  bie  bem  (Snangelium 

nad^tt)eilig  toaren,  fo  foE  eg  ber  natfifte  2lettefte  unb  ein  ^rebiger  unters 

fud^en;  jeigt  eg  fid^  nun  alg  oB  er  fd^ulbig  raare,  fo  foEen  fie  eg  fc^riftlid^ 

nel^men,  unb  bem  2luffid^tgalteften  eine  2lbfrf)rift  baoon  fd^iden,  unb  eine 

3eit  beftimmen,  rao  fie  foEen  jufammen  !ommen,  rao  bie  ^lager  unb  ber 

2luffid)tgaltefte  gegenraarttg  fetm ;  in  2lbraefenl^eit  beg  Sifd^ofg,  foE  ein  anbes 

rer  Sluffid^tgaltefter  unb  jraet)  2lelteften  gerufen  raerben,  bie  foEen  eg  mit 

unterfud^en;  rairb  er  fc^ulbig  gefunben,  fo  foE  er  fd^raeigen  Big  jur  ©on* 

fereni,  ba  foE  er  neranttoortlid^  fe^n. 

39 


40 

%t.  3.  SQSenn  ein  2leltefter  ober  ^rebiger  ober  (Snna^ner  foHte  he- 
fd^ulbigt  roerben,  toegen  Sittenlofen  33etragen,  roag  foU  get^an  rcerben  ? 

Slntro.  Xex  ^rebiger  in  ber  ©egenb  bent  e^  befannt  rairb,  foU  nod^ 
einen  ^rebiger  ober  ©rmal^ner  ober  einen  Siorganger  mit  fid^  ne^men,  unb 
eg  unterfud^en ;  jollte  eg  fd^einen  ba^  er  fd^xitbig  roare,  jo  foil  i^m  5Jiac^rid^t 
baoon  gegeben  roerben,  unb  etne  ^eit  beftiinmt  roerben,  roo  fie,  bie  ^lager 
unb  ber  Sefc^ulbigte  gegenroarttg  fei;n;  in  2t6roefenl^ett  beg  Sifrfjofg  ober 
2(uffid^tgalteften :  foQen  eg  bret)  Slelteften  ober  ^rebiger  unterfuc^en,  rotrb 
er  fc^ulbig  gefunben,  fo  foU  er  fd^roeigen  big  jur  ©onferenj,  roo  er  Derant= 
roortlid)  foil  fepn. 


mttv  5l6f(ftttitt. 


^on  Hen 
§liet)ern  Susacmcin, 


(Sin  jebeg  ®tieb  ber  ©emeinbe  foUte  befennen,  bafe  eg  bie  33ibel  fiir 
®otteg  2Bort  l^alte ;  baf[  eg  fid)  pon  nun  an  uon  §er^en  beftreb',  fein  »etl  m 
g^rifto  Sefu  ju  fud^en,  unb  feine  ©eelig!eit  ju  fd^affen  mit  gurd^t  unb  Bittern, 
urn  ben  jufitnftigen  eroigen  3oi^n  |u  entfliel^en. 

©in  jebeg  ®lieb  foil  fid^  beftreben  einen  genauen  gottfeligen  SQBanbet  ju 
fiif)ren;  flei^ig  fepn  im  ®ebet,  befonberg  im  93erborgenen ;  unb  roo  moglid) 
alien  SSerfammlungen  bepjuroo^nen,  bepbeg  bffentlid^en  ©ottegbienft  unb 
33etftunben,  ju  feiner  ©rbauung. 

§dupter  in  g'^'^ili^'^  follten  eg  nie  oerfaumen  beg  SDJorgeng  unb  2lbenbg 
mit  ben  ^Ijrigen  ju  beten,  unb  benfelben  ein  guteg  ©Eempel  fe^en,  in  alien 
titjriftlid^en  ^lugenben, 

(Sin  jebeg  foil  fid^  beftreben,  genau  alg  in  ber  (Segenroart  ©otteg 
ju  roanbeln ;  fid^  bei)  feinen  (55efrf)aften  an  einen  genauen  Umgang  mit  (Sott 
geroblinen;  nie  Uebel  oon  feinem  9Jebenmenfc^en  reben;  Siebe  iiben  gegen 
greunD  unb  'geinb,  bem  2lrmen  guteg  ju  t^un,  unb  fud^en  in  ber  Xfjai  ein 
SfJacfifolger  3efu  (S^rifti  ju  feyn. 

(Sin  jebeg  ©lieb  foil  ben  Sabat^  l^alten,  fo  roie  eg  @otteg  2Bort  erforbert : 
nid)tg  }n  faufen  nod)  ?u  nertaufen,  fonbern  foil  benfelben  in  2lnbac^t  mit 
lefen  unb  f)bren  beg  aBortg  (5}otteg,  mit  fingen  geiftreid^er  Sieber  jur  (Si^re 
imb  iiob  (55otteg  ju  bringen. 


41 

@itt  iebe§  ©Iteb  in  biefer  ©emeinfd^aft  follte  ciertelia^rlid^  ou§  fret)em 
aCBillen  fo  oiel  fiegtragen,  roo  e§  feine  Um[tanbe  erlauben,  urn  bie  reifenbe 
^rebiger  ju  unterf^alteix, 

eg  t[t  einem  jeben  ©liebe  feme  ^fltd^t,  em  fribticf)e§  ftifleS  unb  gott= 
feligeS  Seben  ju  fu^ren,  iiii  Umgang  mit  aUen  9J}enfd)en,  rate  eg  einem 
6I)riften  gejiemt,  im  g-rteben  ^u  leben;  abyonberlid^  foil  jebeS  ber  D5rtg!eit 
untertfjan  \ex)n,  fo  raie  ©otteg  SBort  eg  forbert. 

Set)  folcf)en  ©Uebern  ber  ©enieinbe,  follen  bie  5|]r.  eine  ober  me^rere 
6laffen=3}erfammlungen  errid^ten,  mo  eg  bie  DJJe^v^eit  ber  ©Ueber  fiir  nii^tid^ 
[}aUen;  bafetbft  foHen  fid^  bie  ©liebev,  roo  eg  fer)n  fann,  einmal  in  jeber 
aBod)e  cerfammeln,  an  bem  ba?u  beftimmten  Drt,  urn  Setftunben  ntit  ein^ 
aiiber  ju  l^altcn,  um  fid^  ju  erbauen  in  ber  ©egenroart  ©otteg  unb  in  Siebe 
ju  guten  SBerlen  in  Sfjrifto  ^efu. 

^n  jeber  ©laffe  foEten  S5organger  in  ©egenroart  beg  ^rebigerg  geroal^It 
roerben,  beren  ^sflid^t  foil  fexjn,  bie  Setftunben  befteHen,  anjufangen,  unb 
ju  befd^Iieffen,  aud^  ju  3^'^^"  6Iaffen=Unterrebungen  ju  f^alten,  ein  jebeS 
©lieb  ju  enna[)nen  unb  in  Siebe  erl^alten,  unb  auf  fid)  felbft  fel^en. 

SBenn  ©Ueber  fid^  an  einanber  oerfiinbigen  alg  33riiber  ober  ©d^roeftem, 
fo  ftrafe  eg  juerft  ^roifd^en  Sir  unb  S^H"  allein,  l^oret  er  bid§  fo  l^aft  bu  il^n 
geroonn  n,  l^oret  er  bid^  nid^t,  fo  nimm  no(^  einen  ober  jiue^  ju  bir,  auf 
ba^  alle  Sadfie  beftel^e  aug  5roet)er  ober  breijer  ^eugenmunbe ;  l^oret  er  bie 
nidjt,  fo  fage  eg  ber  ©emeinbe,  pret  er  bie  ©emeinbe  nid^t,  fo  [)a[te  i^n  alg 
einen  §eiben  unb  3oHner. 

SSenn  fid^  ©treitigfeiten  ereignen  follten,  jroifd^en  jroei;  ober  mel^rern 
©liebern  ber  ©emeinbe,  con  roegen  ©d£)ulben  ober  irgenb  einer  anbern 
Urfadf)e,  unb  bie  ftreitenben  ^art^eien  ju  !einem  SSertrag  fommen  !onnen, 
fo  foil  ber  ?Prebiger  roeld^er  bie  2luffid^t  iiber  bie  ©emeinbe  l^at,  ober  ber 
^rebiger  ber  in  ber  ©egenb  rool^nt,  bie  ©ad^e  unterfud^en,  unb  ben  ©treiten-- 
ben  eine  3leferenj  anempfel^ten ;  biefelbe  foil  aug  bret)  ©lieber  ber  ©emeinbe 
beftel)en,  roooon  ber  illager  einen,  ber  Seftagte  ben  anbern,  unb  biefe  jroei) 
ben  britten  erroaf)len  follen,  biefe  brei)  follen  bann  bie  3toiftiS?eiie«  fd^lid^ten. 
3m  %a\i  aber  eine  ber  ftreitenten  ^erfonen  mit  biefem  2lugfprud;  unjufrieben 
fet)n  follte,  fo  mag  fie  fid^  an  bie  nad^fte  Dierteljcit^rlid^e  ober  gro^e  33er= 
fammlung  roenben  eg  bem  Sluffid^tgalteften  ober  Slelteften  befannt  madden, 
um  eine  jroegte  j^J^iebengfd^lid^tung  an^alten,  unb  roenn  bie  ^rebiger  l^in= 
langlid^  Urfad^  baju  finben,  fo  follen  [xe  eine  jroegte  ^riebengfd^lid^tung  er= 
tl^eilen ;  in  roeld^em  %a\l  eine  jebe  ber  ^artf;ei)en  jroei)  ©Ueber  au§  ber  ©e; 
meinbe,  unb  biefe  t)iere,  ben  fiinften  erroci^len  follen ;  biefe  follen  ben  2lu§= 
18 


42 

fprud^  ber  3roifti9f"t  gSnjli^  entfc^eiben ;  foQte  oBer  eine  ber  ?Perfonen  mtt 
biefem  JHusfprurf)  boc^  nicf)t  bamit  jufrieben  fei;n,  fo  fd)Ue^t  er  fid^  bamit 
au^ ;  unb  roenn  ein  ©Ueb  ber  Qiemeinbe  fid)  raeigern  foUte,  raegen  ©c^ulben 
ober  onbern  SnJiftisfe't^"'  ^^^  ©ac^e  fd^lid^ten  ju  lafjen,  nad^bem  eg  if)m  Don 
einem  ^rebiger  ober  3>orgdnger,  roeld^e  bie  2luf[tcf)t  i)aben,  anempfo^Ien 
jDorben,  ober  ein  ©lieb  von  ber  ©emeinbe  Dor  @erid)t  jie^en  foCte,  e^e  bie 
t)orf)ergef)enbe  3Waaferegeln  genommen  roorben,  jo  foil  baffelBe  oon  biefer 
©emeinbe  au^gefcfiloffen  feijn,  eg  fet)  benn,  bag  ©treitigfeiten  oon  ber  2ltt 
iDoren,  ba^  fie  eine  gerid^ttid^e  (Sntfd^eibung  erforbern  unb  red^tfertige,  als : 
(Sjecutoten  ober  2lbminiftratoren. 


^n  ^tt  9. 


iausbcfudjcn  unti  ber  (^infdjarfmtg  tints 
tptigen  e^^tiftcttt^umg ! ! ! 


%t.  3Bte  lonnen  wir  benen  bie  fief)  unferer  Dbforge  anoertrauen  ferner 
bel^iilflid^  f ei)n  ? 

2lntn).  Snbem  luir  i^nen  Unterrirf)t  ertf;eilen,  in  if^ren  §aufern,  roeld^eg 
fel^r  niJtljig  ift,  urn  bag  a>ertrauen  unb  bie  ©emeinfd^aft  mit  ©ott  ju  fees 
forbern:  ferner  fid)  in  ber  aSeltliebe  ah,  an  einen  f)immltfd^en  3Eanbel 
gercb^nen ;  fidl)  l^erjtid)er  S3ruber=iiiebe  befleifien,  auf  ba^  fein  argeg  S)enfen 
unb  9tid)ten  eineg  gegen  ben  anbern  fet)n  mag,  unb  t^un  rote  roir  roiinfc^en 
get^an  ?u  l^aben. 

2ten§,  Seber  ^rebiger  tnu§  e§  fi^  ju  feiner  ^flid^t  madden  bie  Seute 
in  i^ren  iTjaufern  befud^en,  fte  erma^nen  in  atleui  ©uten  gefd)idt  ju  fei)m 
big  bieft  getfjan  roirb,  unb  jiuar  wit  (Srnft  unb  (Sifer,  fo  roerben  roir  im 
ganjen  roenig  gebeffert  roevben,  unb  unfere  ©ottfeligleit  roirb  nid^t  tief  genug 
gegriinbet;  folglic^  roo  roir  aud^  fei^n  mbc^en  foil  fein  unnii^eg  ©efd^roa^ 
Qug  bent  Slunbe  ge^en. 


43 

Dl^ne  3n>eifel  ftni)  ^iefe  <Qau§=33efuci^e  unb  fonberlid^e  (Srma^nungen  auj 
bie  feijerlici^e  28orte  beg  2lpo[tetg  gegriinbet.  — 

1,'^^  ge6e  bir  ben  3luftrag,  cor  ©ott  unb  bem  §errn  ^efu  (S^rtfli  ber 
bep  feiner  2Bieberer[cl^einung  bie  Sebenbige  unb  bie  2;obten  ri(f)ten  icirb : 
Sitte,  prebige  bag  2Cort,  l^olte  bamit  an,  eg  fei)  ^u  recfiter  36it/  ober  jur 
Unjett,  ftrafe,  bro^e,  erma^ne,  mit  aller  ©ebult  unb  ifongmut^"  ! ! !  — 


Pon  bem  Jtuterridjt  kr  3u9enti» 


^r.    2Bag  foU  ?um  SSeften  ber  l^eranroac^fenben  jugenb  getl^an  tcerben  ? 

Slntit).  2Ber  fiir  ®ott  unb  bag  §eil  ber  ©eelen  einigen  ®ifer  f)at,  ber 
fange  bag  SBer£  oljne  S^erjug  an.  3Bo  ft'inber  fic^  fiefinben,  beren  Gltern  in 
ber  ©emeinfcfjaft  finb,  cerfamle  fie  fo  oft  eg  tl^unticf)  unb  nii^lirf)  ift :  rebe 
mit  il^nen,  unterroeife  unb  ermafine  fie  in  bem  ©uten,  bcite  mit  i^nen  ernfilitf) 
bod^  finblid^ ;  ha^  fie  i^ren  ©cfiopfer  unb  ©rlofer  mijgen  lennen  lernen  in 
il^rer  jugenb  ! ! ! 


Jlrt  unb  Jicife  PreMtjcr  \xi  (3xUnixc\h 


2ln  bem  baju  ficftimmten  Xaq  foH  eine  ^rebigt  ober  (Srma^nung  ge* 
l^alten  roerben,  barinnen  bag  2{mt  ju  prebigen,  unb  beffen  ^flic^ten  erfldrt 
loirb. 

ytad)  biefem  fpred^e  ber  Sifd^of  alfo  ju  ben  anioefenben  Sriiber :  ift 
jemanb  unter  euc^  bem  eintgeg  SSer6red)en  ober  §inbernife  beraufet  ift,  loarum 
ein  ober  bie  anbere  5perfon  unter  biefen  m<i)t  ju  bem  2tmt  eineg  (Soange^ 
lifd^en  ^rebigerg  foHte  orbinirt  roerben,  ber  trette  im  9Jamen  (Sotteg  l^eroor, 
unb  gebe  fold^eg  a^erbrec^en  an  ben  2;ag.  SCirb  einigeg  ajerbred^en  ober 
^inbernift  entbett,  fo  ^alte  ber  Sifd^of  mit  ber  Drbination  ber  5perfon  innen, 
big  ber  Sefd^ulbigte  fd^ulblog  erfunben  roerbe. 

Sllgbann  lefe  ein  2leltefter  ben  6,  7,  8  unb  9ten  SSerg  beg  erften  ©apitel 
^auli  an  S^itum  i^nen  mit  9lacf)brudE  oor :  algbann  nel^me  ber  33tfd^of  mit 
einem  ber  ba  crbi^iirt  merbcn  foti,  folgenbe  Unterfud^tmg  vox  ! ! ! 


44 

^yr.  §aft  bu  ba§  gwt^auen  ba^  bu  innerlidf)  burc§  ben  l^eiltgen  ©eift 
baju  angetrieben  roerbeft,  bag  2lmt  etne§  ^rebtgers  auf  btc^  ?u  nef)iiten ;  itm 
bartnnen  ©ott  ?u  bienen,  ?u  jeineS  9kmen§  (Sf}re,  unb  jur  ©r5auung  fetner 
Wemetnbe  ? 

3lntn).    S^^  ti^ttue  fo. 

^r.  ©taubeft  bu  ofjue  S3or5e^alt  alle  5?anonifcf;e  S3ucf)er  be6  3nten  unb 
OZeuen  2:eftanxentg  ? 

SlntiD.    Scij  glau5e  fie. 

j5r.  SBtUft  bu  beinen  ^ylei^  baf)in  roenben,  beinen  eigenen  aCanbet  nad) 
ber  Sef^re  6f)ri[ti  eur>uricf)ti'n,  unb  fo  Diet  in  bir  ift  —  bid;  bev  ,v>eerbe  Gfjrifti 
}n  einein  DJhifter  bcS  6f)vti"tlid)en  iiebei^  Dorjuftcllcn  ? 

3lntra.    3^^  wilt,  ioo;u  mix  ©ott  uerfjetfen  luotle ! 

^r.  SBittft  bu  benen  wetdjen  etraa  bie  Ue6erfid^t  iitjev  bid)  anuertraut 
loerben  mng  niit  Gf)rertitetung  gefiorjamen,  unb  itjren  guten  Srniaf}nungen 
niit  eiueni  luiltigen  unb  fi-ieblid)en  §erjen  nadjfonmten  ? 

2lntn).    3d;  luill  mid;  burc^  ©nabe  bal^m  fieftreben  ! 

9hin  tegen  bie  23ifd)i3ffe  (ober  58ifc^of  unb  ein  2leltefter)  einem  jjeben 
befonbers  it)re  Jodube  auf  bag  S^aupt ;  uno  ber  SBifd^of  fpred;e  alfo  :  — 

„9Iintnt  anniit  [)in,  bie  SSotlniad^t  bag  2tmt  eineg  ®oangetifd)en  ^rebi: 
gerg  in  ber  ©emeinbe  ©otteg  ju  uertretten.  ^m  Diamen  ©otteg  beg  2?ateig, 
beg  ©of)neg,  unb  beg  ^eitigen  ©eifteg. 

2ltgbann  gebe  ber  Sifd^of  einem  jeben  befonberg  bag  ^ibetbuc^  iiber: 
fpred^enb : 

9Jintm  anmit  l)in  bie  SBottmod^t  bag  Sffiort  ©otteg  ber  ©emeinbe  Gfjrifti 
ju  prebigen  unb  augjutegen.  — 


^rt  nut)  Peifc  eincn  ?5ifdjof  |u  orMuircn, 


dlad)  bent  ©ebet  mag  bag  20fte  (Sap.  uon  bem  17ten  Serg  an  in  ber 
2lpoftet  ©efc^id^te  getefen  iDerben. 

3((gbann  fpred^e  ber  58ifd)of  ju  bem  ber  orbiuirt  luerben  folt. 

„5yrubcr,  bieioeil  bie  fjcitige  ©d)rift  befieblt,  bi§  loir  niemanb  jueilig 
bie  pube  auftegen,  unb  jnr  3legierung  ber  ©emeinbe  Gf^rifti  annet^men,  fo 
bcant;uorte  folgenbe  {yragcn"  : 


45 

%v.  3ft  e§  beine  Ueberjeugung  bafi  in  ber  gottUdien  ©d)rift  alle§  ju 
imferer  ©eltgfeit  burc^  ©^rifto  ent^atten  tft,  unb  6ift  bu  entf^Ioffen  baS 
SSotf  baraug  ju  unterricf)ten  ? 

Slntra.    3a. 

^t.  2Bia[t  bu  ^flid^tma^ig  in  orbiniren,  §anbe  auflegen  unb  SluSfens 
bung  anbcrer  getreu  l^anbeln  ? 

2lntro.    3a! 

2n§bann  lege  ber  $8ifd^of  unb  ein  ober  ivoet)  Slelteften  il^re  §onbe  auf 
bie  erioai^Ite  ^erfon  !nienb  vox  i§nen,  ber  Sifd)of  fage  bonn : 

„@mpfange  bie  ®nabe  @otte§  jum  Sl-nt  unb  Stenft  eineS  Sifd^ofg  in 
ber  ©emeinbe  GJotteg  ba§  bir  nun  burd^  3luflegung  unferer  §anbe  iiberge: 
ben  roirb,  im  Siamen  beg  3Sater§,  beg  ©of)neg,  unb  beg  l^eitigen  ®ei[teg 
Slmen." 

2lBbann  iibergebe  ber  93i[d^of  bie  Si6el  fprec^enb  : 

Seflei^ge  bid)  beg  Sefeng,  Sefjre  unb  ®rmaf)nen,  bebenfc  bie  Singe 
rool^I  bie  in  biefem  33uc^  ent^alten  finb  ;  jeg  ein  §irte  ber  §eerbe  3eju  (Ef)rifti, 
roeibe  fie,  fomm  ben  ©d^road^en  ju  JQiilfe,  fud^e  bag  3SerIorne,  fei)  mitleib  g 
auf  ba^  raenn  ber  o6erfte  §irte  ber  ©d^aafe  erfd^einen  roirb,  bu  bie  un»ei-= 
roelltid^e  ©rone  beg  eroigen  Sebeng  empfangen  mogeft  21  m  e  n. 


S^nretic  an  Jlcunerlolite. 


aSiel  ©eliebte! 

2Cir  finb  ^ier  »or  bent  3lngefirf)t  @otteg,  unb  in  ©egenroart 
biefer  Bei'Sen  uerfammlet,  biefe  6et)be  ^erfonen,  alg  Wtann  unb  2Bei6  e^elid^ 
jufammen  ju  geben : 

3.  2:a6er! 

aCiUft  bu  biefe  2Bei5g=^erfon  fiir  bein  ©l^eroeib  annel^men,  um 
in  bem  (S^eftanb  bein  8e6en  mit  ^l)x  nad^  ©otteg  Drbnung  jujubringen  ? 
roillft  bu  3  ^  1^  £ie5e,  S^roft  unb  Sf^re  erjeigen,  ©ie  in  ilranfl^eit  unb  ©es 
funbfjeit  l^alten  unb  pflegen  unb  mit  33erlaffung  afier  anbern,  bid^  ju  il^r 
aHein  l^alten,  unb'ba^  fo  lange  bir  ©ott  bag  2e6en  fd^enten  mag?  raann 
ba^  bein  (Sntfdglu^  ift,  fo  antroorte,  3a  ! 

(Sann  roenbe  fidE)  ber  ^rebiger  jum  2Ceib.) 


46 

33.  ©at^ar! 

SBiUft  bu  biefe  2Kann§=^erfon  filr  beinen  (S^emanti  annel^men, 
um  in  bent  ©l^eftaub  bein  Se&en  nut  t[;m  nac^  (Sotted  Drbmmg  jumbringen  ? 
roiEfi  bu  ifim  ©e^orfam,  3)tenftioiIlig!ett,  Siebe  unb  Sf)re  erjeigen,  in  (Se; 
funbfjeit  unb  ^ran!()eit  feiner  pfl^gen,  unb  mit  S>erlaffung  aller  anbern, 
bid^  ju  ifjm  atlein  l^alten,  fo  lang  bir  ©ott  bag  2eben  fd^enlen  mag :  roann 
ba§  bein  (Sntfd^luf;  i[t,  fo  antroorte,  ^a  ! 

„3teid}t  einanber  bic  red^te  §anb." 

^e^t  fa^t  ber  '^rebiger  i[)re  bepbe  §anbe  jufammen,  unb  fpred^e:  tDa§ 
®ott  jufammen  gefiigt  f)at,  fott  ber  3Ken[d)  nicfit  fc^eiben ;  alfo  ertlare  id^ 
(gu^  al^  3Wann  unb  3Seib;  tin  3lamen  ©otte^  beg  Sl5ater§,  beg  ©u^neg, 
unb  beg  §eiligen  ©eifteg. 

©ott  bee  Skater  ©ol^n  unb  Seilger  ©eift,  ber  fegne  er^olte  unb  be; 
roal^re  (S  u  c^  in  b.'m  <0errn,  er  fet)e  mit  ©rbaruten  auf  ®  u  d),  unb  erfiille 
6  u  (f)  mit  feinen  ®eiftUcf)en  &abm  unb  ©nabe,  ba^  3  ^  i^  f o  &»-'9  einanber 
leben  moget  in  biefer  2Belt,  ba^  ^  1^  r  in  bem  3"fii"fti3en  i>a^  ewiqe  2ebm 
l^aben  moget,  2t  m  e  n. 


S  c  5  r  c 


unb 


3tt^t--£)rlinttng 


bey 


^eteiiitgteti  aStit^et  in  ®^ttftp* 


^eiicutkt  bei)  (Sruber  unD  Pag. 


47  1819. 


Itrfprung 

b  er 

Sercittigten  Sriikr  in  (JJrifto. 


Sn  bem  le^t  oerftojjenen  ^"^'^^"ni'ei^t,  ^at  e^  bent  §etrn  unfecm  ®ott 
gefallen,  in  werfd^iebeneit  ©egenben  ber  SBelt  aJJiinner  ju  erroetfen,  bie  bent 
tierfaUenen  (S[}rifteittf)unt  raieccr  auf()e[fett,  unb  bie  Se^re  Dont  Greuj  itt  il^rer 
Sauter!eit  uerfiinbigen  foKten. 

Sr  gebac^te  babet;  and)  ber  S)eutfci^en  in  Sltnerifa,  ttjeld^e  l^in  unb  roieber 
in  biefem  roeit  auSgebreiteten  Sanbe  lebten,  unb  ba^er  itur  felten  ©elegenl^eit 
[patten,  ba§  ©oangelium  tjont  (Freuj,  in  ii^rer  SJJutterfprad^e,  ?u  i^rer  ©r* 
bauung  cerfunbigen  ju  pren. 

Unter  anbern  erioedte  er  and)  einen  Dtterbein,  einen  SoJ^ni,  unb 
etiten  ©iitf^ing,  riiftete  fie  au§  mit  ©eift,  ©uabe  unb  i^raft,  in  feinem  jo 
fel^r  oernac^Iaffigt.n  SBeinberge  ju  arbeiten  unb  audE)  unter  ben  Seutfd^en  in 
2tnterifa,  ©iinber  jur  Sufie  ju  rufen.  S)ie[e  3JJaitner  folgten  bem  dlu\  i^reg 
§errn  unb  9J?eifterS,  arbeiteten  im  ©egen,  erridE)teten  l^in  unb  icieber 
l^errlid^e  ©enteinben,  unb  fiUjrten  6^ri[to  mand^e  eble  ©eele  ju.  9?aci^  unb 
wad)  errceiterte  fid)  i^r  9Birfungg!ret§,  ba§  fie  baberi  genot^iget  raaren  fid^ 
urn  3)Jitarbetter  im  SBeinberge  umjufe^eit;  benn  bie  ©rnbte  roar  gro§  unb 
ber  2lrbeiter  nur  roenige.  ©ott  erroectte  anbere,  bie  aud^  tcilUg  iDurben  ti^re 
Krafte  be.n  ^errn  ju  roibmen ;  foldie  rourben  bann  won  einem  ober  bem 
anbern  a[§  ajiitarbeiter  angenomnten. 

2;ie  Slnjal^I  ber  ®emeinbs=®tieber  in  ben  oerfd^iebenen  ©egenben  roud§§ 
won  3sit  511  B^it/  wnb  ba§  SBer!  cerbreitete  fic^  in  ben  ©taaten  t)on  ^eitn= 
ftjioanien,  aJJarglanb  unb  SSirginien.  ®^  lourben  jaJ^rlid)  einige  grofie  SSec^ 
fammlungen  ge^aiten;  beij  roelc^en  ©elegeufjeiten  ftd^  Dtterbein  mit  ben 
bafelbft  gegenroartigen  ^rebigern  unterrebete,  i^nen  bie  3Bicf)tigfeit  be§  ^re= 
bigt=2lmt§  worfteQte,  unb  bie  9lotl^tt)enbig!eit  aEen  Srnft  anjuroenben,  urn 
(Seelen  ^u  retten,  einfd^arfte.  Set)  einer  biefer  Unterrebungen,  rourbe  6es 
fd^Ioffen  ba^  aUe  ^rebiger  eine  3iif''i""^enf^i"tt  ^ilten  foEten,  urn  fid^  §u 
berat^frf)Iagen,  roie  fie  am  nii^lirf)ften  feijn  fonnten. 

49 


50 

SHe  erftc  3ufa»n"tcnlunft  rourbe  gel^alten  in  Baltimore,  im  Sol^re  1789. 
©§  xmxen  jugegen : 

SBill^elm  Dtterbetn,  2lbam  2ef)mann, 

afiartiu  $5b[)m,  ^oi^anne^  Grnft, 

©eorge  2lbam  cyittijiiig,        Jjeinrid^  SBeibener. 

(S^riftian  SReufommec, 

2)ie  jroegte  3"ffl'^'"6"f""tt  raurbe  ge^alten  in  ^orl  ©ouniij,  ^arabie^ 
2'oronfd^ip,  im  §aiife  beg  58ruber  Spangler^,  im  ^af)t  1791,  aOtvo  folgenbe 
^erfoneu  gegenioiirtig  roaren,  nemlid} : 

SOBil^elm  Dtterbein,  So^tt""^^  ©rnft, 

Tlattin  Sofjnt,  3.  ®.  ^Pfrimmer, 

©eorge  2tbam  ©iit^iug,         ^ofjanneg  9Jeibig, 

©^riftian  9ceufommer,  $8enebict  ©anber, 

2lbam  ilel^mann, 
unb  3]ad)  retfer  Ueberlegung  toie  fie  mit  bem  gro^ten  9iu^eu  in  bem  3Sein> 
5erge  beg  §errn  art)eiten  fonnten,  rcurben  luieber  focf)e  alg  5Kitarbeiter  aw- 
genommeu,  Bon  raelc^en  fie  Urfac^e  ju  glauben   l^atten,    ba^   fie   wal^reS 
©^riftentl^um  an  il^rem  eigenen  §erjen  erfal^ren  l^atten. 

^nbeffen  rermel^rte  fid^  bie  Stnjal^l  ber  ©lieber  immer  mel^r  unb  mel^r ; 
bie  ^prebiger  fallen  fid)  ba^er  Derpflid^tet  alle  ^afjr  eine  3uffli"men!tunft  ober 
(Sonferenj  ?u  beftimmen,  itm  fid^  nailer  ju  oereinigen  unb  recfit  nii^lic^  ju 
einem  gemeinfd^aftUcf)en  ^med  ju  arbeiten ;  benn  einige  roaren  3ieformirte, 
anbere  Sutfieraner,  aubere  3)?enoniften,  unb  nodE)  anbere  3[)?etf)obiften.  6te 
beftimmten  ba[}er  ben  25ften  (September,  1800,  in  ^ri^berid^  Sounti),  Tlau)- 
lanb,  im  ^aufe  bes  33ruberg  g'J^ieberid^  5^emp,  jufammen  ju  lommen.  %oh 
genbe  roaren  gegenroiirtig  : 

2BiI^eIm  Dtterbein,  ©l^riftian  Jl'rum, 

SOJartin  So^m,  §einrid^  ifrum, 

©eorge  2lbam  ©iit^ing,        ^o^anneg  ^errfd^c, 

G^riftian  9Ieu!ommer,  ^acob  ©eifinger, 

2(bam  £e{)mann,  £»einric^  58o{)m, 

2lbra^am  3)radtfel,  2)ietrid^  2lurauf, 

©eorge  ^frimmer, 

©ie  Dereinigten  fidE)  bafelbft  in  eine  ©efettfd^aft,  bie  ben  Seamen  fiil^rt : 
„2)ie  SSereinigten  Sritber  in  (Sfjrifto"  ;  unb  eriud^Iten  3Cil^elm  Dtterbein 
unb  Wartin  W6i)m  ju  Dberauffet^ern  ober  23tfd^ofen,  unb  rcurben  einig 
einem  jeben  bie  gr^i^O'^it  ju  erlauben  auf  bie  2lrt  unb  SDBeife  ju  taufen,  roie 
et  eg  nad^  feiner  Ueberjeugung  fiir  redE)t  befanbe. 


51 

SSon  mm  an  oerbreitete  fid|  bte  ®emetnbe  iiumer  tne^r  unb  itiefjr  e6 
rourben  ^vebiger  aufi;enommen,  bie  beftattbtg  reifeten  (benn  bie  oieten  ^re: 
bigtplci^e  lonnten  auf  feine  anbere  SSeife  fiebtent  roerben) ;  unb  bag  2Bert 
oerbreitete  ftc§  in  ben  ©taaten  Df)io  unb  ^entudi).  ©g  rcurbe  baf)er  notl^ig 
eine  Gonferenj  im  ©taat  Dl^io  |U  l^alten,  inbem  e§  ju  Befd^roerlicf)  gead^tet 
raurbe,  fiir  bie  bortigen  ^rebiger  jjal^rUcI^  fo  raeit  ju  ber  (Sonferenj  ju  reifen. 

^nbeffen  [tarben  bie  35ruber  S3o^m  unb  ©titling,  unb  Sruber  Dtterbein 
fiege^rte,  bafi  ein  anberer  jum  58ifcl^of  joHte  erroiifilt  raerben  (ineit  er  felbft, 
SUterg  unb  ©c^iodd^e  l^alben,  nid)t  mef)r  nad)i'e^en  !onnte),  ber  bag  SBerf 
iibevnal^me,  bamit  3"*^^  unb  Drbnung  erf)alten  roiirbe;  benn  e§  roar  6et) 
einer  ber  Sonferenjen  fiefd^Ioffen  roorben,  roenn  einer  Don  ben  S3if(jE)ofen 
fter&en  fotlte,  einen  anbern  an  feine  SteUe  ju  erroa^Ien.  65  rourbe  alio  ber 
$8ruber  ©f^riftian  3?eufommer  ali  33i[d^of  errcal^lt,  weld)er  bie  3Uiffid^t 
iiber  bie  ©emeinbe  iiber  fid^  ne^men  foKte. 

©d^on  lange  rourbe  ber  2)?angel  einer  3"^to.rbnung  in  ber  ©emeinbe 
tief  empfunben;  e§  roar  fcfion  inef;rmat  etroag  baran  getl^an  roorben ;  enblid^ 
rourbe  auf  ber  (Sonferenj  im  ©taat  D^io  fiefc^Ioffen,  iia^  eine  §aupt=  ober 
©enerat  Sonferen?  ge^alten  roerben  foUte,  bie  e§  iiber  fiti)  netjinen  foHte, 
bie  ^itd^torbnung  in  etroag  DoHftanbiger  ju  ntad^en,  fo  roie  fie  bem  9Borte 
©otteg  gemdg  fet). 

2)ie  ©lieber  ju  biefer  (Sonferen?  foUten  an^  ben  ^rebigern,  in  ben 
unterfd^ieblid^en  ©egenben,  bur(^  bie  ©lieber  ber  ©emeinbe  gerodf^lt  roerben, 
burd^  bie  2)Je[)r^eit  ber  ©timmen ;  unb  e§  roaren  bie  folgenben  ^rebiger, 
bie  geprig  ecrodt)It  roaren,  gegenroartig  auf  ber  Sonferenj,  nemlidE) :  €^riftian 
Jieufontmer,  2(6ra^ant  £>ieftanb,  3(nbreag  QeUev,  Saniel  S^reper,  ©eorge 
33enebum,  Slbraf^am  Xrad'fel,  G^riftian  Merger,  2l5raf}ant  dJlexjev,  ^ol^anneS 
©d^neiber,  §einrid^  Sumter,  ^einric^  ©pdt^,  ^faa!  9Jeufd^roanber,  ©^riftian 
i?rum  unb  ^alofi  Saulug. 

Siefe  uerfammetten  fief)  atn  6ten  ^""9/  1815/  ^la^e  6ei)  9J}ount='ip[eafant, 
in  3Beftmorelanb  Gounti),  ^^eiinji)tuamen,  roo  fie  nad^  reifer  Ueberlegung, 
bie  folgenbe  Sef^re  unb  Siegetn  fiir  gut  unb  nii^lirf)  befanben,  fie  ber  ©e^ 
meinbe  in  Sie5e  unb  3)enmt^  ju  iibergeben  mit  bem  l^erjUc^en  3Bunfc|,  "aa^ 
biefe  Sel^re  unb  foIdEie  Stegein,  nebft  bem  aSorte  ©otteg  mod^ten  beobacfitet 
roerben.  S)enn  ©ott  ift  ein  ©ott  ber  Drbnung,  unb  roo  !eine  Drbnung  unb 
^irdEienjuc^t  ift,  ba  certie^rt  fid^  alle  2\ebe  unb  ©emeinfd^aft ;  bather  k^t  ung 
bem  3?atl^  be§  Sterrn  fodjen,  ber  un^  le^rt,  bag  roir  burd^  2)emutl^  einer  ben 
anbern  [jbf)er  aditen  alg  ung  felbft,  fud^en  gefinnt  ju  ferm  roie  ^efug  ®l^riftug 
aud^  roar,  ber  ^nec^tg=©eftalt  angenommen,  roarb  gel^orfam  big  jum  SEobe 
am  5?reu?,  urn  ung  bie  ©nabe  unb  ilYaft  ^u  erroerben,  ba§  roir  ung  aug 


52 

2\ehe  unb  3)eniut§  eiuer  bem  anbecn  uiUerwerfen  fbnnku;  itier  fid^  tiic^t 
iinteriDerfen  lonn,  bem  mangelt  noc^  iJnabe,  Sie&«  unb  Seinutl^  ;  ba^er 
fagt  SefuS :  3Ber  unter  eud^  ber  ©rbpte  fei;n  wiK,  ber  foH  beg  anbern  Wiener 
fet)n;  foil  etner  beS  anbern  Siener  feyn,  jo  Hiftfjen  wir  eiHonber  Iie5en. 
3efu§  fagt :  alfo  loirb  jebermann  erfennen,  brt^  i^r  metne  recite  ^iinger 
fei)b,  fo  iE)r  Siebe  untereinanber  'ijait,  unb  reer  m^t  Siebe  l^at  ber  bleibt 
int  2;ob.  ©0  kffet  un§  Siebe  iiben,  auf  b«|  wk  bie  i^crrlic^feit  beft^en 
mogen,  bie  ^efuS  jeinen  ^""S^i^tt  ^o"  feinem  S8«tec  erb»tert  l^ot,  ba|  roir 
em§  fet)n  modfitert,  roie  er  unb  ber  SSater  ein^  ftnb.  ;jarum  tf)r  lieben 
Sriiber,  lafjet  unS  ^u6)en  gleidigefinnet,  einl^ellig  unb  etntriiditig  ju  \e\)n, 
imb  !eing  Uebel  oon  bem  anbern  reben  ober  benfen,  fsnbern  ben  §erru 
onfle^en,  ba§  er  ung  feinen  ®ei[t  unb  ©rnft  geben  Mibi^k,  \¥m  bag  6f)riften= 
t[)um  rec^t  jur  6"f)re  feineg  l^eUigen  ?Jameng  m  fii^w,  unb  ju  unferem 
eigenen  eroigen  3Bo()l.    2tmen. 


(^rjtcr  m^^nitt 


€>laubcn5=Pekcmitutfj 

ber 

SScrcittlgtcn  Sriibcr  in  S^rifta. 


^m  9lamen  ®otte§  erflaren  unb  befennen  loir  uor  iebcvmann,  ba^  luir 
glauben  an  ben  einigen  roafjren  ®ott,  3Sater,  ©ofm  unb  §eiligen  ©eift,  bafe 
biefe  2)rer)  (Sing  ftnb,  ber  Sater  int  Sor}n,  ber  <Bol)n  im  Sater  unb  ber 
!g)eilige  ®eift  o,U\d)ci  JCefen  mit  beiiben.  Safj  biefer  brci)einige  ®ott  Simmel 
unb  ©rbe  unb  alteg  i»ag  barinnen  i[t,  foiDOf}!  fidjtbar  alg  imfid^tbar,  et* 
fc^affcn  f)at,  triigt,  regiert,  jd)ii^t  unb  erfjiitt. 

aBir  glauben  an  Z^^mn  S^riftum,  baf(  er  roal^rer  ®ott  unb  SJJenfd^  t[t, 
baf(  er  feine  3J?enfcl)f)eit  burd)  ben  §eiligcn  ®ei[t  in  Wav'ia  angenoinmen, 
unb  uon  i|r  geborcn ;  ba^  er  §eilanb  unb  3SerfbE)ner  beg  ganjen  menfd^lid^en 
®efc^lec^tg  i[t,  luenn  fie  bie  in  '^e\\i  angebotene  ®nabe  im  ®Iauben  an 
i^n  annerimen;  baf?  bicfer  ^ehtg  fitr  ung  gelitten  fjat,  am  Stamme  beg 


53 

i?reu|e§  geftorben,  begraben,  am  britten  %aQe  luteber  auferftanben,  'gen 
§immet  gefafiren,  roeld^er  x[t  jur  recfiten  ©otteS  imb  wertrttt  un§ ;  imb 
luieber  lommen  loirb  am  jiingften  S^age,  ju  rid^ten  bie  Sebenbtgen  unb  bie 
Sobten. 

2Cir  glauben  an  ben  §eiligen  ®eift,  ba^  er  gleid^es  3Befeug  mit  bem 
SJater  nub  ©of)n  ift,  ba^  er  bie  ©laubtge  trofte  unb  fie  in  alle  2Caf(rl^eit  leite. 

2Bir  glauben  an  eine  §eitige  ©f)ri[tlicf)e  ©emetnbe,  bie  ®emetnfcf)aft  ber 
^eilicjen,  bie  2luferfte^ung  be§  'gleifi^eS,  unb  ein  eroigeS  2ehen. 

9Bir  glauben  ha^  bie  Sibel  alteg  unb  neue§  SeftamentS,  ©otteg  2Bort  ift; 
ba^  fie  ben  raafjren  2Seg  ju  unferer  (»elig!eit  enlf)alte,  ba^  ein  jeber  loa^re 
©fjrift  biefelbe  mit  ben  ©iufliifeen  beg  @eifte§  ®otte§  ein^ig  unb  allein  ju 
feiner  SRid^tfd^nur  nel^meit  foil,  unb  \)a^  ol^ne  ©lauben  an  ^efum  g^riftum, 
roa^re  Su^e,  33ergebung  ber  ©iinben  unb  Sfiad^folge  S^rifti,  niemanb  ein 
itial^rer  Shrift  jeijn  fann. 

2Bir  glauben,  ba^  roag  bie  ^eilige  ©d^rift  entplt,  nemlid^ :  ben  "^aU  in 
2l(bam  unb  bie  Srlbfung  burd^  ^efum  (Ebriftum,  ber  gan^en  SBelt  joUe  ge^ 
prebiget  roerben. 

SKir  l^alten  bafiir,  ba^  bie  au^ere  3}JitteI  in  ben  ©emeinben  Gfjrifti, 
nemlid^,  bie  Saufe  unb  bag  ©ebcid^tni^  be§  S^obeg  beg  §eiTn  ^eju,  geiibt 
raerben  follten;  unb  ba^  eg  feinen  ^inbern  obtieget  biefelbe  fcefonberg  ju 
iiben.  Sie  2lrt  unb  2Beife  ober  foH  einem  jeben  nad^  jeinec  (Sr!enntni& 
iibertaffen  roerben.  2lud^  bag  33ei)fpiel  von  'j^^u^roafd^eH  ftel^at  einem  jeben 
frei). 


^toc^tcr  llifi|ttitt. 


Son  Jicr 
SaiHJt=  mxh  3til)rlidjeu=t0nferett]. 


^rage.  3tad^  n)eIdE)er  SHSeife  unb  Serorbmtng  foCen  bie  3ier^anblungen 
auf  ben  (Sonferenjen  oorgenontmen  raerben  ? 

2lntwort.  6g  rairb  rerlangt,  ba^,  loag  aud^  immer  beg  biefer  ©elegen^ 
l^eit  getfian,  foil  fo  getfjan  ran-ben,  alg  eb  eg  in  ber  ©egenraart  ©otteg 
racire ;  roer  ju  reben  [)at,  ber  ftefje  auf  un'i  rebe  frer),  roie  er  eg  in  feinem 
§erjen  ^at. 


54 

^■rage.  SBie  unb  auf  roas  9lrt  foUen  bie  ©lieber  einer  ^aupt=6onfernej 
flieiDd[)lt  icerbcii  ? 

2lntiD,  2i'i  einem  jjeben  Stftrift  joHert  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger,  luenn 
joIdE)e  ba  finb,  rcenn  nid^t,  fo  foUen  bie  je^f)aften  ^rebiger,  bie  in  bem  Sie^ir! 
iDoIjiien,  e§  ben  ©emeinben  Borftcllen,  ba^  fie  jroei;  2Ielteften  au§  i^reni  33e: 
jirf  n)af)len.  (S§  foQen  abet  alle  bie  3(elte[ten,  bie  in  bem  23e?irf  finb  nnb 
auf  bie  (Sonferenj  gel^en  fonnen,  nuf  bie  2Baf)I  getfjan  nub  eS  einige  3«it 
Dorfier  fiefannt  geniadit  icerben ;  nnb  bie  jinei),  lueldje  bie  9Jief;rf)eit  ber  etini; 
men  6e!ommen,  foHen  bie  ©lieber  uon  ber  ^aupt^Sonfcrenj  fei;n ;  bie  Stintmen 
follen  a5er  an  jebem  Drte  fc^riftlicfi  aufgejeirfmet  luerben,  nnb  won  einem 
anrcefenben  ^rebtger,  obei*  uoii  einem  ii>orgdngci'  nnterfdirieben  tcerbcn. 
S)er  2lnffici^t5ttltL')"te  im  33ejirf  foK  e^  nnterind}en,  imb  foUten  jioei)  von  iijmn 
eine  gleid^e  Slnja^l  Stimmen  Ijaben,  fo  foil  er  burets  2oo5  entfd^eiben,  voeU 
d^er  Don  ifjncn  erindfjlt  ift. 

i^-v.    SCie  oft  foil  bie  .^anpt:Gonferenj  ge^alten  roetben  ? 

3lntn).    2tIIe  cier  ^ai}xe. 

%x.  §at  bie  §aupt:Gonferenj  eine  anbere  ©eioalt,  bie  bie  ^fil^rlicl^e 
nicljt  f;at? 

2lntit).  ^a,  fie  t)at  allein  bie  ©emalt  pnev)  33ifc]^ijfe  aui  ben  3leUeften, 
anf  uier  Sa[)ve  ju  ma[;len ;  nnb  and)  bie  3i«i)torbnung  ober  3iVgeIn  ^u  Der= 
dnbern  ober  p  oerbeffern,  nad)bem  fie  eo  fiir  gnt  bcfinbet;  unter  ber  Se= 
btngung  unb  3Ui5na^me,  ba^  fein  3lrtitet  gemad;t  luerbe,  ber  ben  31eife= 
^lan  auffiebt  ober  megtfint.  3)ie  ^anpt-Gonfcrenj  foil  and)  bie  2)iftri{te 
Ibeftimmen,  ido  bie  jaf^rlid^en  (Sonferenjen  gefjniten  rcerben  follen. 

j^r.    2BeIdje§  finb  bie  Glieber  ber  idf}rlid)en  Gonfereuj  ? 

9lntiD.  3l(le  bie  3lelteftcn  nnb  'ipvebiger,  bie  einen  fd)rift(id;en  (SrIanOs 
nifefdiein  empfangen  l^aben,  nnb  in  bem  33ejirf  won  einer  folc^en  (Sonferen? 
finb,  ober  in  foldjen  aufgcuommcn  mcrben. 

j^r.  ''Mti)  luelc^er  SBeife  nnb  ilierorbnnng  follen  bie  35erl^anblungen 
oorgenommen  loerben  ? 

2(ntiD.  1.  (£g  loirb  ein  (Sapitel  aug  ber  33it)el  cerlefen,  nnb  fnrje 
2tnmerhmgen  bariiber  gemad^t,  al^bann  iwirb  gefungeu  unb  gebetet,  unb  bag 
fo  oft  alg  bie  Gonferenj  fi^t ;  unb  mit  ©efang  unb  &ebei  feefc^Ioffen. 

2.  3^ie  (Sonferen;  foil  einen  ®d)reiber  enodt^len,  unb  foUte  einer  ber 
Siid)bfe  abmejenb  fei)n,  and)  einen  ber  3(uffi(^tS:2leIteften,  um  mit  bem 
33ifd)of  }n  agicren. 

3,  3Berben  bie  'i^vebiger  unterfud^t,  mic  ifjr  58etragen  gegen  t^ren  9ieben-- 
menfc^en  fei) ;  ob  \i)v  31}anbel  untnbel[)aft,  ob  fie  fo  uiel  Qext  rcie  mbglid) 
anrocnben,  nm  bao  ^)leic^  ©otteg  auo^ubroitcn. 


55 

4.  3Ba§  fiir  ^rebiger  finb  auf  bie  ^ro6e  anjunel^men  ? 

5.  2Ba§  fiir  ^rebtger  miif jen  ferner  auf  ber  ^ro6e  bleiben  ? 

6.  ®inb  einige  ?u  Slelteften  ?u  raafilen  ? 

7.  ©tub  \x>ot)l  einige  con  ben  ^rebiger  geftorfien  ? 

8.  SBelc^eg  finb  bie  3luffic^tg=3leaeften  ? 

9.  2Ber  giebt  fid^  nuf  ju  reifen  ? 

10.  aBa§  ift  gefammelt  luorben,  tf)eil§  jufatlige  2tu§go6en  ju  Beftreiten, 
unb  tr^eilg  ben  reifenben  ^rebig^rn  if^ren  ®ef;alt  aufjuinacf)en  ?  3[t  9ied)= 
nung  mit  il^nen  ge^alten  raorben  ?    §a£)en  fie  bag  ifjrige  befomnien  ? 

11.  2Bann  unb  rco  foil  bie  ncicfifte  Gonferenj  gel^alten  rcerben  ? 

12.  ©inb  bie  2leltefteu  orbinirt  raorben  ? 

13.  3"  ii't^  jiii'*  Sejirfe  finb  bie  ^rebiger  biefeg  ^al^r  angefteQt  ? 

14.  3ft  iioc^  etioai  ntef)r  ?u  t[)un  ? 

15.  §at  bie  ©onferenj  bie  Siftrifte  Beftimmt  in  if;rem  Sejirf,  unt  bie 
2Bal^[  fiir  bie  ©lieber  ber  ^aupt^Gonferen^  ju  l^atten  ? 

16.  3ft  flUeg  rcag  Derf;anbelt  worben,  in  ia^  ^roto!oll  iibertragen 
jDorben  ? 


Srittcr  9Hfi^ttitt. 


Son  Iicr 
iUJiljUmg  unb  (DrMuation  ber  iifdjofe 

unb 

boil  i^rcm  91  mt  uub  ^fltt|t. 


%x.    2Bie  foKen  bie  Sifd^ofe  eingefe^t  roerben  ? 

2lntn).  ®ie  §aupt=(Eonferenj  foft  fie  raa^len,  burd^  bie  3Wel^rl^eit  ber 
©timnten  ber  2lelteften,  bie  ?u  ber  ^aupt^Sonferenj  gercal^It  finb ;  aud^  ftel^t  eg 
ber  (Sonferenj  frei;,  fie,  bie  Sifd^ofe,  noc^  auf  oier  '^al)ve  beyjubef^alten.  2)ie 
©eiDcifjIten  ober  58ifd^ofe  niitffen  aber  bie  unterfc^ieblicf)en  Sejirfe  unb  Sons 
ferenjen  bereifen  fonnen,  fonft  fonnen  fie  nid^t  geradf^lt  raerben ;  bie  fo  ge= 
raa^Iten  ?Perfonen  follen  Don  einem  93ifc^of  unb  einem  2lelteften  burd^  2luf= 
legung  i^rer  §anbe  orbinirt  roerben ;  foflte  aber  fein  Sifd^of  ba  fetjn,  fo 
foHen  eg  jraet)  21elteften  tfjiin. 


56 

%x.    2Ba§  finb  bie  '':pflicf)ten  ber  23ifc^ofe  ? 

2lntiD,    1.    ^ei)  unicrn  ©onferenjeii  al5  Siorfiftei-  ju  agiren. 

2.  ©ie  f)aben  mit  etnem  2(elte[ten,  ben  fte  auoiuiifilen,  ben  reifenben  ?Pres 
btgern  i^re  Devid)iebene  SBejirfe  anjuraeifen,  bod;  nut  ber  ©infd^rnnhmg, 
ba^  feinem  3iet)e:'iprebiger  geftattet  raerbe,  langer  al5  brei;  aufeinanber  fol= 
genbe  Saf)re  an  berfelben  ©teEe  ju  oerbleiben,  auogenommen  befonbere  llm= 
ftanbe  marf)en  e5  iiotf^iuenbig  imb  baiin  nur  mit  23eroi([igung  ber  Sif^ofe, 

3.  Sie  Sijd^ofe  jeigeu  ben  2(uffid)tQ=3(elte[ten  if^ren  33e5irt  an,  tfm  fie 
ju  bereifen  f;aben. 

4.  ^n  ber  ^'J^ift^^^j^'t  ^o"  ^^'"  (Sonferenjen  l^aben  fie  mit  ben  Sluf^ 
fid^tg=3lelteften  ©eiualt,  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger  ju  Derroec^feln,  ico  fie  eS  fiir 
befjer  anfe^en,  and)  ^^rebiger  aufjunefjuten  ober  ju  fuspenbiren  big  auf  bie 
Smferenj. 

5.  ©ie  f)aben  bie  cerf^iebenen  Gonferenjen,  fo  roeit  fie  fid^  erftredcit, 
ju  bereifen,  unb  [)aben  im  geiftlid)en,  bie  Dberauffid)t  iibec  alle  ©ememben. 

6.  ^I^nen  ftef;t  e5  ju,  bie  Drbination  511  ooHjief^en. 

7.  SDBenn  ein  33iid}of  auff;ort  bie  iiorid)iebenen  Gonferenjen  in  ber  ®e= 
meinjd;aft  511  bebienen  unb  bie  23e5irie  }n  bereifen,  !ann  er  bod§  fein  bifd^of= 
lidieg  2lmt  unter  un§  ausiiben  ?  3iein,  eo  jei;  benn,  ba§  er  iranf  nnire  unb 
rcaS  bergleidien  Umftctnbe  mef)r  fet)n  mod)ten. 

8.  SGBenn  e§  fief)  nttragen  foUte,  ba^  unfere  ©emeinfdiaft  ju  einer  3eit 
!einen  33ifd^of  fjdtte,  meit  fie  enticeber  geftorben  ober  fu^penbirt  jociren,  ober 
luie  eg  immer  feijn  mag ;  roie  foU  9iatl^  gefd)aft  merben  ?  2)er  9le(tefte, 
raeld^er  in  2lbioe)en[;eit  eineS  SBifd&ofg  geroaf)It  roirb  jam  9JJitagieren  an  ber 
Gonferenj,  foil  bie  33ii'cl^of'3=iSteIIe  fo  lang  bebienen,  alg  bie  ©onferenj  loafjrt; 
biefcr  fo  geanifjlte  'Borfit^er  foil  au^  bie  anbere  Gonferem  bebienen ;  er  foil 
feinen  ©i^  mit  bem  bort  geiuii^Iten  iBorfi^er  ne[)men,  um  mit  ifim  in  ber 
Gonferenj  }u  agieren  ;  unb  ber  bort  geioiitjlte  58orfi|er  foil  eben  fo  bie 
anbere  Gonferen?  aud^  bebienen,  bamit  eine  jebe  Gonferen?  luei^,  njie  eg  bei) 
ber  anbern  augfief)t ;  imb  bafs  2iebe  unb  ©emeinfdiaft  erf)a[ten  luerbe,  u.  f.  m. 
bio  inv  Saupt^Gonferen^,  bie  raicber  Sifdpfe  uidfjtt. 

9.  Gg  foil  ber  33ifc^ofe  ^sflid^t  fei;n,  ba^  eine  fc^itflidje  '^prebigt  beijm 
®d)ln§  jeber  Gonferenj  gcfjalten  loirb. 


Alerter  %b)^niU 


S^on  iien 
J^uffidjts  =  Mitfttn, 

260^1,  9lmt  uttb  *)Jfliit|te«. 


5r.    SBie  follen  bie  3tuffid^t^=3teae[ten  enoa^It  roerben  ? 

2lntn).    Sie  Sifd^ofe  foHen  ber  Sonferen?   einige   con   ben   Slelteften, 
bie  i^re  ^robejeit  au^ge^alten,  oorfc^Iagen,  unb  mtt  3"''ti"i'«"»3  ''ft:  ©on= 
ferenj  auf  nier  ^a^re  rcci^Ien. 
%v.    SBag  ftnb  bie  ^flic^teit  be^  2Iuffic^t§=5aelteften  ? 

2lntro.  1.  S)en  i^m  oon  ben  Sifd^ofen  angeraiefenen  aSejir!  ju  5ereifen, 
unb  fo  oft  ju  prebigen  at'o  er  !ann. 

2.  ®r  ^at  bie  Ueberfic^t  in  feineui  Sejirf  iiber  bie  reifenben  unb  fe^= 
l&aften  ^rebiger,  baft  fie  fid^  bem  ©oangelium  gemafi  betragen, 

3.  (Sr  foil  bie  oierteljal^rlid^e  unb  grofie  95erfammlung  befteHen,  unb 
too  miDglid^  bebienen ;  ba5  2tbenbmal^l  ert[)eilen,  unb  Diertelia^rlid|  ©onferenj 
l^alten  nxil  ben  gegenrocirtigen  ^rebigern,  ©rma^nern  unb  ^Sorjangem; 
autf)  unterfud)en  oh  bie  reifenben  unb  feB^aften  ^rebiger  i^re  ^flid^t  tl^un, 
befonberg  ob  bie  fe^fjaften  ^rebiger  loo  mbglicf)  alle  ©onnttxg  preiigen,  unb 
roo  inef}rere  ftnb,  biefelben  ju  3eiten  ju  Derined^feln,  roie  am  me^rften  5Ru^en 
gefd^afft  roirb ;  fie  erma[)nen,  ba§  fie  3"ci^t  ""^  Drbnung  unb  Siebe  unb 
®rnft  Bet)  ben  (Sentcinben  erfialten, 

4.  (Sr  !ann  and)  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger  in  feinem  Sejirfe  nerraed^feln ; 
er  foK  aber  einen  93ifc^of  mit  ju  3tat^  jiefien ;  er  !ann  and)  ^rebiger  aufne^^ 
men  ober  fuSpenbtren  bi§  ouf  bie  ©onferenj. 

5.  ®r  foil  bem  SSifc^of  3la(^x\d)t  geben,  raie  eg  in  feinem  aSejir!  au^-- 
fiel^t,  unb  nad^fel^en,  ba^  bie  reifenben  ^rebiger  Diertelja^rig  eine  Kerpltnif;= 
maftge  Unterftii^ung  er^alten:  inbem  il^nen  i^r  ®eE)alt  aug  bem  ©elb  ba§ 
fie  in  i^rem  Sejir!  fammlen  mogen  gegeben  roirb ;  einem  lebigen  foE  aber 
bod^  nid^t  iiber  ad^jig  2;^aler,  unb  einem  oere^lid^ten  nid^t  iiber  ein  l^unbert 

19  57 


58 

unb  fed^jig  %f)alev  ertaubt  feyn ;  foUte  aber  es  nic^t  jureid^en,  n)a§  in  einem 
ober  bent  anbern  Sejirf  gefammelt  toirb,  fo  foil  e§  einer  Somntittcc  au§  ber 
Sonferenj  iibergeben  roerben,  bie  nad)  ©utbefinben  au3  ober  oon  anberen 
il^rem  gefammelten  ®elb  bem  3}langetnben  ?u  t^un ;  ido  aber  ein  ^rebiger  in 
einer  ©tabt  fte{)en  joHte,  ba  mu^  bie  ©exieinbe  il^n  uerforgen. 

6.  ©oHte  e§  fid)  f«  jutragen,  ba^  ju  einer  3eit  iexn  Sifc^of  ba  racire, 
fo  foflen  bie  2luffidE)t3=2lelteften,  ein  jeber  in  feinetn  Sftejirl,  befonber^  auf  bie 
Oemeinben  Sld^t  |aben,  bamtt  aHefi  in  Siebe  mxb  ^rnft  erljalten  raerbe,  unb 
einer  beni  anbern  tflad^rid^t  gebe,  rcie  e§  in  feinem  Sejtrl  au^fie^t.  ©ollte 
eg  fic^  aber  jutragen,  bafi  fein  Shiffid^t^attefter  in  'Dem  ob»r  jenem  93ejirf 
rcare,  raie  foS  3tatl^  gefc^aft  loerben  ?  6^  foil  bem  Sifc^of  5la!l|rici^t  barton 
gegeben  raerben ;  biefer  foC  einen  Don  ben  2lelteften  im  Sejirf  baju  be= 
ftimmen  big  jur  (Sonferenj,  roo  eg  ju  tl^un  ift;  follte  aber  lein  58ifd^of  ba 
fet)n,  fo  foH  ber  nac^fte  21uffid)tg--9leltefte  einen  rvaijlen,  wenn  er  eg  nic^t 
felber  tl^un  f  onn. 


f iinftcr  ^iifr^nitt. 


Sleltcflen  il|rcr  Paljl,  J(mt,  Pflidjt 

unb 

CrbtKtttiott. 


%r.    3Cie  foil  ein  3leltefter  geioafjit  loerben  ? 

3lntro.  9{ad^  einer  jroei)ia^rigen  'iprobejeit,  mag  er  ber  ja^rlicfien  6on-- 
ferenj  worgeftetlt  roerben  unb  won  ben  Sifd^ofen  mit  2luflegung  i[)rer  §anbe 
orbinirt  luerben;  mit  biefem  3]orbef)aU  fo  fid)  bie  Gonferenj  iibcrjeugt  fii^It, 
baf5  ber  3"f)<i't  im  6t.  7t.  8t.  unb  9ten  'iscrfe  '^vuiti  an  Situm,  im  Iften 
(Sapitel,  fid^  in  unb  an  il;m  befinbc!  ^iefe  X5erfe  follen  einem  jeben,  ber 
orbinirt  roirb,  bet)  feiner  Drbination  uorgelei'en  loerben  ! 


59 

1.  aCag  ift  eineg  Slelteften  2lmt  unb  ^fUc^t  ?  3u  prebtgen  fo  oft  unb 
inelmal  er  iann;  unb  ?u  taufen,  ®l^en  einjufegnen,  bem  2lufyicl^tg=2Ie[te[ten 
[jelfen  ba§  2l6enbmafj[  l^atten,  unb  iwenn  ber  2tuf[ici^t§=9leltefte  ntc^t  gegen= 
raartig  fer^n  fann,  jo  foil  eg  ein  ober  jioeri  3lelteften  tl^un ;  er  foil  alle  S^eile 
beg  offentltd)en  ®otte§bienfteg  rerrid^ten,  ®Iaffen=3Serfammlungen  fuc^en  ?u 
errid^ten,  n)0  e§  bte  ajle^r^eit  ber  ©lieber  fiir  gut  erfennt,  fie  aufS)  l^alten, 
unb  ^elfen  SSorganger  ju  erroal^len. 

2.  SStertelia^rlid^  eine  fregroitlige  Collection  ju  l^eben  fiir  bie  reifenben 
^rebiger  unb  fiir  2lrme;  ein  SSerjeid^nifi  baoon  ju  nel^men  an  jebem  Drt, 
unb  Don  bent  SBorganger  unterfd^riefien,  unb  roenn  fein  33orgdnger  gegen^ 
roartig  iDcire,  e§  bann  con  einem  anbern  ©Iteb  unterfd^reiben  laffen,  urn  mit 
bem  2luffid|tgalteften  Siied^nung  ju  i^alten,  auf  ba^  aCeg  orbentlic^  pgei^e. 

3.  SBo  ein  fe^^after  2leltefter  ober  ^rebiger,  ber  felber  nid^tg  mangelt 
an  einem  Drt  prebigt,  too  fein  3teifenber  l^in  lommt,  fo  foil  er  bie  ©oUection 
^e6en,  unb  ein  SSerjeid^nife  ebenfo  baoon  nel^men,  unb  e§  bem  Sluffidf^tgalteften 
ober  jur  Sonferenj  fd^icEen  ober  bringen,  jur  Unterftii^ung  ber  Sebiirftigen 
fefef)aften  ^rebiger  bie  arm  finb,  unb  unter  2lrmen  prebigen. 

4.  ©ollte  ein  reifenber  ^rebiger  ober  2leltefter  feinen  il^m  angemiefe= 
mn  Sejirt  oerlaffen  rooaen,  fo  foa  er  junor  bem  2luffid^t§alteften  fd^reiben ; 
fonte  einer  il^n  etioa  oerlaffen  ober  Derfaumen,  eg  fei  bann  burd^  l£ran!l^eit 
ober  fonft  unuermeiblid^e  Umftanbe,  fo  foil  er  ber  nad^ften  ©onferenj  oer^ 
antroortlid^  bafitr  fepn. 

5.  SBo  fid^  fe^l^afte  ^rebiger  befinben,  roeld^e  arm  unb  Bebiirftig  finb, 
unb  oerlangt  rotrb  »on  i^nen  ju  prebigen,  fo  ift  eg  fiiUig,  ba^  bie  2lelteften 
in  "oen  ©emeinben  ©olection  madden,  um  fotd^e  ^rebtger  nad^  9Ser^dItnif; 
ber  3eit,  bie  fie  baju  anroenben  jn  itnterftii^en ;  borf)  nid^t  iiber  bag,  roag 
fiir  bie  reifenbe  ^rebiger  oeftgefe^t  ift. 


©crofter  5l6fj^ttttt. 


2>on  iicr 
PJeifc  Prel)i0cr  ttufiuueljmcn, 

unb 


e5r.    2Bie  foU  em  ^rebiger  aufgenoiumen  roerben  ? 
2lntra.    1.    ®urci^  bie  jja^rtid^e  ©onferenj  ? 

2.  ^tt  ber  S'l^'i^e^jeit  oon  ber  Sonferenj,  burd^  ben  Si[d^of,  ober 
ben  SluffidjtS^^Ielteftcn  beg  Sejirr^,  ober  eineg  2(e[teften,  ber  ben  ^la^  eineS 
2luf[i(l;t§=2lcUe[ten  nertritt  auf  einer  jctl^rlid^en  ober  gro^en  3>er[amm[ung, 
Big  jur  nacfiften  ©iljung  ber  6onf;renj.  Keiner  rairb  anberg  alg  auf  ^ro5e 
angenommen ;  einer  ber  auf  ^lobe  angenommen  i[t,  mag  Bei)6e^a(ten  ober 
abgeioiefen  loerben,  oI)ne  ba^  ifjin  einigeg  llnrei^t  gefc^efjen  luiirbe,  fonft 
roiire  eg  !eine  ^robe. 

3.  (Sine  jebe  ^erfon  bie  atg  ^rebiger  worgefd^lagen  loirb,  foU  oon  ber 
©onferenj  unteriud)t  nn'b  if)m  folgcnbe  tfi^agen  oorgelegt  loerben : 

§at  er  (Sott  in  6f)rifto  alg  einen  oergebenben  @ott  eriannt  ? 
§at  er  33ergebung  feiner  Siinben  eriangt  ? 

3ft  bie  iiiebe  ©otteg  bucd^  ben  ^eitigen  ®eift,  in  fein  ^erj  ouggegoffen 
toorben  ? 

&at  er  ben  grieben  ®otteg  eriangt  ? 

^aget  er  ber  §eiligung  nac^  ? 

§at  er  eine  rid)ttge  ©rfenntni^  oon  ©tauben,  oon  33ufe,  oon  3led^t= 
fertigung,  §eitigung  iinb  Srlofung  ? 

Siegt  il^m  fein  eigen  ^eil,  unb  bag  §eil  feineS  9Zebenmenfc^en  me^r 
am  .^gerjen,  alg  fonft  aKeg  anbere  in  ber  3Bc[t  ? 

£ann  er  fid^  bent  diatl)  feiner  Sriiber  unterioerfen  ? 

aSiH  er  gel^orfam  fei;n,  ju  reben  ober  fd^roeigen,  roie  eg  bie  Sriiber  fiir 

gut  er!ennen  ? 

60 


61 

^ft  er  raiCig,  fo  oiel  al§  in  feinem  33ennogert  ^ef)t,  ben  Sieifes^Ian 
(ober  ben  Sejirf  ?u  fiereifeu)  l^elfen  aufrerfit  ju  i)alten  unb  Ujn  jo  ciel  roie 
ntoglid^  ?u  unterftii^en  ? 

g=r.    2.    SOBag  ift  bie  ^flid)t  eineg  ^prebigerg  ? 

2lntn).  6^riftum  ben  ©efrcMjigten  ?u  prebigen,  roo  fid^  nur  gul^orer 
einfinbeu ;  ©lafjen=3SerfammIungen  aufjurtd^ten,  roo  e§  nii^licl^  ift,  tnit  il^nen 
von  il^rent  ©eelen=3iiftttnbe  ju  reben,  bi*e  angefotfitenen  fud^en  juredEit  ju 
raeifen,  bie  S^ragen  fud^en  aufjumuntern,  unb  alle  im  ®Iau6en  in  ber  @nabe 
unb  ©rfenntni^  S^fu  (5[)rifti  fud)en  ju  erbauen  fo  ciel  icie  tni3gUd^ ;  nie 
untertaffen  bie  ^ranfen  ju  fiefuc^en,  unb  tnit  feinem  Seben  xtnb  SBanbel 
fud^en  feine  SOBorte  jitf  befraftigen  roag  er  prebiget* 

%v.    3.    3Bc[c^e  9(uioeifungen  loerben  einein  ^rebiger  gegeben  ? 

2lntn).  1.  Gr  fet)  flei^ig ;  nie  Berliere  er  feine  3ett  an  unnot^igen  Sin^ 
gen,  an  einigem  Drt ;  immer  feg  er  ernfttjaft ;  fetn  Senfiprud^  feg  bem  §errn 
geljeiliget;  er  meibe  alten  Seid^tfinn  unb  ©c^erjen;  er  rebe  Befc^eiben,  unb 
f)0&e  Bef)utjamen  Umgang  mit  beat  raeiblic^en  ®ejdE)(ed^te,  unb  Betrage  fic^ 
in  aHen  ©tiiden  al^  ein  roal^rer  gfjrift. 

2.  @r  fei)  intmer  abgcneigt  Siefcfiutbigungen  ju  glauben,  e§  fei)  benn 
l^inldnglic^  enniefen ;  er  lege  atleg  fo  mel  eg  mit  ber  2BaE)rf)eit  befte^en  mag 
jum  a3eften  an^. 

(Sr  rebe  uon  niemanb  nid^tg  Ue6e(g ;  roag  er  je  Don  einem  ben!en  mag, 
bel^alte  er  fold^eg  bet)  fid)  felbft,  6i^  er  eg  bemjenigen  felbft,  betn  eg  angel^t, 
fagen  !ann. 

3.  ©ein  (^efc^iift  fet),  ©eelen  ju  retten  fo  t)iel  raie  moglid^ ;  ju  biefem 
©efd^Sfte  ge6e  er  fic^  auf.  @r  befudfie  bie  eg  Bebiirftig  finb.  ^n  aUen  Singen 
f)anbe(e  er  nic^t  nad;  feinem  eigenen  ©utbiinfen,  fonbern  alg  ein  ©ofin  beg 
©oangetiutng ;  olg  ein  foIrf)er  fte[;t  eg  ifjm  ju  feme  geit/  fo  i^ie  biefe  3Sor= 
fcf)rift  lautct :  tnit  ^rebtgen,  mit  §aug6efucf)en,  mit  Sel^ren  unb  Seten, 
uttb  93etrad)tung  beg  SBorteg  ©otteg  jujubringen;  bamit  gefie  er  um,  big 
ber  ^err  fommt. 


©ichetttcr  TOfi^jnitt 


^on  Hem 
fittenlofctt  l^etrageu  tier  Pretilgci:, 


^  rate 


mlt  Iftneii  foil  bcrfa^ren  toerbcn. 


^-r.  1.  SBaS  foK  getf^dn  rcerben,  mnn  von  einem  Stfd^of,  3lufftd§t§s 
SCelteften,  ober  ^rebiger  bie  3iad^rid^t  ein!otnmt,  a[§  l^abe  er  fid^  eine6  a>ev= 
l&recf)en3  fd^ulbig  gemad^t,  \)a^  tm  2Borte  ©otteg,  al§  eine  auSfd^liefienbe 
^anblung  uerBoten  fet;  ? 

2lntro.  2Beim  ein  35ifd^of  roegen  ftttenlofem  Setragen  &efdE)uIbtgt  toirb, 
roie  foU  mtt  il^m  werfa^ren  roerben  ?  2Bo  fief)  23eict)utbigung  ereignen  f oUte, 
bie  bem  ©Dangelium  naditf^eilig  loiire,  fo  joH  e§  einem  2luffid^t§=3lelteften  unb 
einem  2(elte[ten  befannt  gemad^t  roerben,  bie  follen  e§  unterfud^en,  ob  etroaS 
an  ber  ©a(^e  feij ;  fie  foHen  aber  feinc  ^lage  ouffer  jroeg  ober  bret;  3s"3^" 
annef)tnen,  aB  roie  ber  2lpo[tel  fagt.  ©d^eint  e3  nun,  ba§  er  mit  red^t  i)i= 
yd;u(bigt  rcirb,  fo  follen  fie  e§  fc^riftlid^  nef}men,  unb  bem  33ild)of  eine 
3l6fdt)rift  bauon  fd)i(fen,  itnb  eine  Qe'xt  beftimmen  roo  fie  jufantmen  fommen, 
TOO  bie  5?lager  unb  ber  33ifdf)of  gegenroartig  fei;n  follen,  imb  fott  burd^  bie 
jroeg  2luffid^t§=2lelteften  unb  brep  2lelteften  unterfud;t  roerben.  2Cirb  er  fd[;ulbig 
gefunben,  fo  fott  er  fc^ioeigen  5i3  jur  iar)rtid^en  Souferenj ;  ba  follen  bie 
2Uiffic^tg:2le[te[ten  unb  Sleltcften  eS  nod}  einmal  unterfudfien;  rcirb  er  fdjiilbig 
gefunben,  fo  fott  er  com  2lmt  fufpenbirt  roerben. 

gr.  2.  SBenn  ein  2luffidE)t§:3IeItefter  roegen  fittenlofem  58etragen  te- 
fd^ulbigt  roiirbe,  roag  fott  get[}an  roerben  ? 

2Intro.    2Bo  ftc§  93efdE)ulbigungen  ereignen  fottten,  bie  bent  (Soangelium 

nod^t^eilig  roaren,  fo  fott  eS  ber  nadE)fte  2leltefte  unb  ein  ^Prebiger  unter= 

fuc^en;  jeigt  eg  fid^  nun  al^  o5  er  fd^ulbig  rcdre,  fo  fotten  fie  eg  fd^riftlidf) 

nef)men,  imb  bem  2luffid^ts=3lelteften  eine  2lbfd)rift  bauon  fd^idEen,  nn'Q  eine 

3eit  beftimmen,  roo  fie  fotten  jufammen  lomnten,  roo  bie  iiliiger  unb  ber 

2luffidE)tQaUefte  gegenroartig  fei)n.    ^n  2l[)rcefenfjeit  bes  ^lifc^sfg  fott  ein  anbe= 

rer  2luffid)tgaltefter  unb  jroei)  2letteften  gerufen  roerben,  bie  fotten  eg  mit 

unterfud^en;  »irb  er  fd^utbig  gefunben,  fo  fott  er  fdiroeigen  biS  jur  6on= 

feren?,  ba  fott  er  BerantrcortUdj  fei;n. 

62 


63 

(5r.  3.  2Benn  ein  2teltefter  ober  ^rebiger  ober  (grmal^ner  foCte  be-- 
fc^ulbigt  toerben,  loegen  fittentofem  Setragen,  tcag  foil  getf^an  roerben  ? 

2lntn).  2)er  ^:ebiger  in  ber  ©egenb,  bem  e^  befannt  rcirb,  fott  noc^ 
einen  ^rebiger  ober  ©nna^ner  ober  einen  3Sorgartger  mit  ftd^  nefjmen,  imb 
eg  unterfud;en ;  fcltte  eg  fd^einen  ba^  er  fd^utbig  ware,  fo  foil  irjm  9Jacf)ri(^t 
bat)on  gegeknx  raerben,  unb  etne  3fit  6eflimmt  roerben,  roo  fie,  bie  ^liiger 
unb  ber  Sefijulbigte  gegemodrtig  fet)n;  in  2l6roefenf)eit  bog  Sifd)ofg  ober 
2lufftc^tgalteften,  foHen  eg  breg  9lelteften  ober  ^rebiger  unterfitd)en,  tuivb 
er  fd^ulbig  gefunben,  fo  foil  er  fd^roeigen  Big  jur  Sonferenj,  rco  er  Derant= 
rcortlidE)  fegn  foil. 


9ii^tcr  mmut 


l^on  lien 
^liebern  insgemein. 


®in  jebeg  ®lieb  ber  ©emeinbe  foftte  fielennen,  ba§  eg  bie  33i6e(  fiir 
®otteg  SCort  l^alte;  bafe  eg  fic^  oon  nun  an  Kon  gan^em  feenen  beftrebe, 
fein  feeil  in  G^rifto  ^efu  ju  fud^en,  unb  feine  ©eligiEeit  ju  fc^affen  mit  ^-urcfit 
unb  Sittern,  urn  ben  jufiinftigen  ercigen  3°^"  5«  entfliefjen. 

Gin  jebeg  ©lieb  foil  fid^  beftreben  einen  genauen  unb  gottfeligen  SBanbel 
ju  fii^ren ;  flei^ig  fei;n  im  @ebet,  befonberg  im  3Ser6orgenen ;  unb  too  mbglid^ 
aUen  SJerfammlungen  bepjuraol^nen,  bei)beg  offentlid^en  ©ottegbienft  unb 
33etftunben,  ?u  feiner  ©rbauung. 

§aupter  in  g-amilien  follten  eg  nte  uerfaumen  beg  aJJorgeng  unb  2l6enbg 
intt  ben  ^^rigen  ju  beten,  unb  benfelbeu  ein  guteg  ©Eempel  ju  fe^en,  in 
alien  G^riftlic^en  S^ugenben. 

(Sin  jebeg  foil  fid^  beftreben,  genau  alg  in  ber  ©egenroart  ©otteg 
ju  roanbeln ;  ftd^  bet)  feinen  ©efc^aften  an  einen  genauen  Umgang  mit  ©ott 
ge«ot;nen;  nie  Uebel  oon  feinem  Dlebenmenfc^en  reben;  Siebe  iiben  gegen 
greunb  unb  geinb;  bem  2lrmen  guteg  ju  tl^un,  unb  fud^en  in  ber  2;i^at  ein 
Jtad^folger  Sefu  6l;ri[ti  ju  fei)n. 

©in  jebeg  ©lieb  foil  ben  ©abbatl^  l^alten,  fo  roie  eg  ©otteg  SBort  erforbert ; 
nid^tg  ju  faufen  nod^  ju  certaufen,  fonbern  foil  benfelben  in  2lnbac^t  mit 
Sefen  unb  &oren  beg  aCortg  ©otteg,  mit  ©ingen  geiftreicf)er  Sieber  jur  ®^re 
unb  ^ob  ©otteg  jubtingen. 


64 

©in  jebeg  ®lieb  in  biefer  ©emeinjd^aft  foUte  uiertelja^rlid^  au§  frepem 
SBillen  fo  ciel  beptragen,  ido  eg  feine  Utnftanbe  erlauben,  urn  bie  reifenbe 
^rebiger  ju  unter[)alten. 

®g  ift  einem  jeben  ©liebe  feine  Wif^t/  ci"  friebtic^eS,  ftilleg  unb  gott: 
jeligeg  Seben  ?u  fii^ren  ;  iin  llmgang  mit  alien  il'ien|d)en,  luie  eg  einem 
(Sf)ri[ten  gejicmt,  im  grieben  ju  leben;  abfonberlid)  foil  jebeg  ber  Dbrigteit 
untertfian  fet)n,  jo  icie  ©otteg  SOBort  e§  forbert. 

SBep  jolrfjen  ©liebern  ber  ©emeinbe,  foUen  bie  ^rebiger  eine  ober  mel^rere 
Slaflen^SSerfammlungen  erricf)ten,  too  e§  bie  SJief^r^eit  ber  (Slieber  fiir  nii^licf) 
l^alten ;  bafelbft  follen  fief)  bie  ©lieber,  ido  eg  fegn  fann,  einmal  in  jeber 
2Bocf)e  werfammlen,  an  bem  baju  beftimmten  Drt,  urn  Setftunben  mit  ein= 
anber  ju  l^alten,  um  fic^  ju  erbauen  in  ber  ©egenioart  ©otteg  unbtnSieb. 
ju  guten  SBerfen  in  Sl^rifto  ^efu. 

55n  jeber  ©laffe  foHten  SSorganger  in  ©cgenroart  be§  ^rebiger§  geroablt 
roerben,  beren  ^flid^t  foU  feijn,  bie  Setftunben  in  befteCen,  anjufangen,  unD 
ju  fcf)Iie|en,  auc^  ju  3^'^^"  Claffenuntervebungen  ju  ijalten,  ein  jebeg 
®Iieb  ?u  erma^nen  unb  in  Siebe  ?u  er^alten,  unb  auf  fid)  felbft  ju  fel^en. 

2Benn  ©lieber  fid)  an  einanber  Derfiinbigen,  aB  SBriiber  ober  Sd^raeftern, 
fo  firafe  eg  ^ucrft  5ii)ifd)en  Sir  unb  SO'"  i^^^ein ;  l^bret  er  bid),  fo  f;aft  bu  il^ii 
ge^onnen;  f)oret  er  bid)  nid^t,  fo  nimm  nod)  einen  ober  ?ioet)  ju  bir,  auf 
ba^  alte  ©ad^e  befte^e  a\x^  }mev)ev  ober  brex)er  3eugen=9)htnbe ;  fpret  er  bie 
nid^t,  fo  fage  eg  ber  ©emeinbe ;  f)oret  er  bie  ©emeinbe  nid)t,  fo  l^alte  il^n  alo 
einen  §eiben  unb  3'^^^ner- 

aBenn  fid^  ©treitigfeiten  ereignen  follten,  jiuifd^en  jroei)  ober  ntel^rern 
©liebern  ber  ©emeinbe,  oon  toegen  ©dE)ulben  ober  irgenb  einer  anbern 
Urfad)e,  unb  bie  ©treitenben  ^^artf)even  ju  feinem  ^Sertrag  fommen  fbnnen, 
fo  foU  ber  ^rebiger  iDeId;er  bie  i)(uffid)t  iiber  bie  ©emeinbe  i)at,  ober  ber 
^rebiger,  ber  in  ber  ©egenb  loofjnt,  bie  ©ac^e  unterfudijen,  unb  ben  ©treiten= 
ben  eine  Jicferenj  anempfer^tcn ;  biefelbe  foil  aug  brei)  ©lieber  ber  ©emeinbe 
befte^en,  roouon  ber  illager  einen,  ber  Seflagte  ben  anbern,  unb  biefe  jroeg 
ben  britten  ern)at)len  follen,  biefe  brey  follen  bann  bie  3iDiftiT5!eiten  fdE)lid^ten. 

^m  %all  aber  eine  ber  ftreitenben  'Sjierfonen  mit  biefem  3lusfprud)  unjufrie^ 
ben  fei)n  fotlte,  fo  mag  fie  fid)  an  bie  nad)fte  nierteliaf)rtid^e  ober  grofie  SSer^ 
fammlung  luenben,  eg  bem  3luffid^tg:3lelteften  befannt  madden,  um  eine 
jrae^te  '5riebcnQfd)lid)tung  anf)alten,  imb  rcenn  bie  ^rebiger  l^inlanglid^ 
Urfac^  baju  finben,  fo  follen  fte  eine  jiuepte  'griebengfd^lic^tung  ertf)eilen; 
in  roeld)em  "^aU  eine  jebe  ber  5partl)ei)en  jioei)  ©lieber  aug  ber  ©emeinbe, 
unb  biefe  »iere,  ben  fiinften  emja[)len  foUen;  biefe  foCen  ben  Slugfprud^ 


65 

ber  3"''f*i9f6''t  Qfinjlit^  entfd^eiben;  foHte  ahev  eine  ber  ^erfonen  mtt 
biefem  2lu§fprucl^  boc^  nid^t  jufrieben  fegn,  fo  fd)liefet  er  ftd^  bamit  an§; 
unb  roenn  ein  ©lieb  ber  ©emeinbe  ftd^  roergern  foUte,  roeijen  ©cf)ulben 
ober  anbern  giciftigfeiten,  bie  ©acf)e  fc^Ud^ten  ^u  lafjen,  nad^bem  e5  ifjm  oon 
einem  ^rebtger  ober  33organger,  welc^e  bie  2luf[icf)t  t)aben,  anempfol^Ien 
iDorben,  ober  ein  ©lieb  von  ber  ©emetnbe  wor  ©eric^t  ^ie^en  foHte,  e§e  bie 
oorl^ergel^enbe  3}Jaa^regeIrt  genommen  niorben,  fo  foil  baffell6e  oon  biefer 
©emeinbe  au§gefcf)loffen  feijn,  e§  fei)  benn,  baft  ©treitig!eiten  oon  ber  9(vt 
raaren,  ba§  fie  eine  gerid^tlicfie  ©ntfd^eibung  erforbern  unb  red^tferlige,  al5 : 
(Sjecutoren  ober  2lbminiftratoren. 


91  n  I  a  u  9 . 


Bon  iicr 
JlotljmeuMgkeit 

ber 

Scremigung  unfrcr  feliftcn. 


Saffet  un§  (a\i^  bem,  rceld^eg  rair  fc^on  erfannt  l^aben)  bag  UeBel  ber 
©pattungen  in  @runbfd|en,  ber  Unetnigfeit  im  ©eift,  ober  in  ber  Slusiibung, 
raie  aud^  bie  fc^recflidien  t^'O'tS^"  bacon  fiir  un§  fe(6ft  unb  anbere  tief  e.n= 
pfinben.  ©inb  rcir  einig,  rcag  !ann  un§  roiberfte^en?  S:fjeilen  rair  nng, 
fo  oerberben  rair  un§  fellbft,  baS  2Ber!  ©otteg,  unb  bie  ©eelen  unferer 
2}litglieber. 

%x.  2Ba§  fann  balder  getl^an  raerben,  um  eine  genauere  2?ereinigung 
unter  un5  ju  2Bege  ju  6ringen  ? 

3lntra.  1.  So^t  ung  Bon  ber  Siiotfjraenbigleit  berfelBen  uollig  unb  lief 
ii&erjeugt  fepn. 

2.  33etet  ernftlid^  fiir,  unb  rebet  treu  unb  offen^erjig  ntit  einanber. 

3.  SBenn  rair  un§  cerfammlen,  fo  la^t  ung  niemalg  o^ne  ©ebet  au§s 
einanber  gel^en. 


66 

4.  Saltet  fe^r  barauf,  baf;  feine^  be§  anbern  ©aben  oerad^te. 

5.  9lebet  niemalg  unlauter  ober  Icid^tfinnig  von  einanber. 

6.  2a§t  un§  fu(i)en  eine§  be§  anbern  Character  in  aUen  Singen  5U 
t)ert()eibtgen,  in  jo  fern  e6  mit  ber  SEBal^rl^eit  iibereinftimmenb  fe^. 

7.  3Irbeitel  in  (S^ren,  ad^tet  einer  ben  anbern  pl^er  al§  fid^  fel6ft. 

8.  SBir  empfel^Ien  eine  ernftUd^e  Unterfuc^ung  ber  Urfarfien,  Uebeln, 
unb  ilur  beg  §er|eng,  unb  ber  jEirc^lid^en  2:rennungen. 


Jausbefudjen  nnti  ber  (Binrdjarfiing  fines 
tliatigcn  PliriftcutljuuKl 


%x.  2Bie  !bnnen  tuir  benen,  bie  i"i.l)  un[erer  Dbforge  ancertrauen,  ferner 
Beplflid^  fetjn  ? 

2lntn).  1.  Snbem  lutr  i^nen  Unterrid^t  ertl^eilen,  in  il^ren  §aufern,  loel-- 
d^eS  fe[;r  not^ig  ift,  urn  ba^  3>ertrauen  unb  bie  ©emeinfc^aft  mit  ©ott  ju  bes 
forbern :  forner  fid^  in  ber  2Belt=Stebe  ab,  an  einen  f)inunlifd^en  SBanbel 
geroijl^nen;  firf)  f^erjlid^er  33ruber=8iebe  befleifeen,  aiif  bag  fein  argeSSenfen 
unb  3iid^ten  etneg  gegen  ben  anbern  fepn  mag,  unb  tl)un  loie  rair  roiinfd^en 
getl^an  ?u  f)abeii. 

2.  '^eiet  ^rebiger  mu^  e§  fid^  ju  feiner  ^flid^t  madden  bie  :^eute 
in  il^ren  §aufern  ju  bejud^en,  fie  enna[)nen  in  aHem  ©uten  gefd^idEt  ju  feijn. 
S3i§  bie§  get^an  loivb,  unb  jioar  mit  (Scnft  unb  (Sifer,  fo  loerben  roir  im 
©anjen  rcenig  gebcfjert  loerben,  unb  unfere  GJottfeligfeit  mirb  nic^t  tief  genug 
gegriinbet :  folglid^  ido  roir  and)  feytx  mogen,  foil  fein  unnii^eg  ©efd^md^ 
aug  bem  9Jhmbe  geljen. 

D^ne  3ii^cifel  finb  bieie  s^aug=33efud£)e  unb  befonbere  (Srmafjnungen  auf 
bie  feperlicfie  2Borte  beg  2(pofte(g  gegriinbet. 

iJ^d)  gebe  bir  ben  'J(uftrag  cor  0o!t  unb  bem  .^errn  S^u  6f)rifti,  ber 
beg  feiner  2Bieberer}d)einung  bie  iiebciiDigen  uno  bie  Sobten  ridjten  loirb: 
Sitte,  prebige  ba§  aSort,  l^alte  bamit  an,  e§  fep  ju  red^ter  S^it/  ober  jur 
Unjeit,  ftrafe,  brol^e,  erma^ne,  mil  aller  ©ebulb  unb  iJangmittf)."  — 


Ilott  htm  l(ntcrrid|t  l)er  Jugenb, 


^.    2Ba§  foH  jum  Seften  ber  J^eranroad^fenben  Suseni>  getl^an  roerben? 

Slntn).  2Ber  fiir  (Sott  unb  bag  §eil  ber  ©eelen  einigen  ®ifer  i^at,  bet 
fange  bag  2Ber!  oljns  35erjug  an.  3Bo  5t'inber  fid^  fiefinben,  beren  (Sltern  in 
ber  ©emeinfd^aft  finb,  cerfammle  fie  fo  oft  eg  t[)unli(f)  unb  nu|(tcl^  ift :  rebe 
ntit  i^nen ;  unterroeife  unb  erma^ne  fie  in  bem  ©uten  ;  bete  tnit  i^nen  ernftlid^ 
t>o<i)  finblid^,  ba|  fie  i^ren  ©d^opfer  unb  (Srlofet  mogen  fennen  lernen  in 
itirer  ^ugenb 


Jlrt  unb  lieifc  jJrcMger  ]n  orMniren. 


1.  2In  bem  baju  bcftimmten  Sag  foE  eine  fd^idlid^e  ^prebigt  obet  (Sts 
tna^nung  gel^alten  toerben. 

2.  3?ad^bem  ifjre  Dkmen  laut  oorgelefen  finb,  fpred^e  ber  93ifd^of  in 
ben  2lnn)efenben,  alfo  : 

3.  (Seliebte  Sriiber  in  (S^rtfto !  ift  jemanb  unter  eud^  bem  einigeg 
SSerbrec^en  ober  §inberni^  bemu^t  ift,  roarum  ein  ober  bie  anbere  5perfon 
unter  biejen  nid^t  ju  bem  2lmt  eineg  (Slteften  (ober  Siaconug,  roie  ber 
■gall  fetjn  mag)  foUte  orbinirt  raerben,  ber  trete  im  Siamen  ©otteg  l^eroor, 
unb  gebe  fold^eg  3]erbred)en  ober  Smberni^  an  ben  %aQ. 

4.  3Birb  eine  §inberni^  eingebrad^t,  fo  l^alte  ber  SBifd^of  ein  mit  ber 
Drbination  ber  ^erfon  big  er  fd^ulbtog  ift. 

S)ann  roirb  gelefen  1.  Xim.  3,  8—13. 

SDeffelbigen  gleic^en  follen  bie  ©iener  e^rbar  fet)n;  nid^t  jroe^jungigt, 

nid^t  SBeinfaufer,  nidE)t  unef)rlidE)e  Sanbirung  treiben;  bie  bag  @e^eimnt| 

beg  ©laubeng  in  reinem  ©eroiffen  t)abe...    Unb  biefelbtgen  laffe  man  juoor 

oerfud^en ;  barnac^  laffe  man  fie  bienen,  roenn  fte  unftraflid^  finb.    S)effelbi= 

gen  gleic^en  il^re  SBeiber  foCen  e^rbar  fer)n ;  nid^t  Safterinnen,  nitd^tern,  treu 

in  alien  Singen.    3)ie  2)iener  tafe  einen  ieglid)en  fegn  eineg  2Beibeg  3D?ann, 

bie  i^ren  j^inbern  itiol^l  Dorftetien,  unb  il^ren  eigenen  jQaufern.    SCelc^e  aber 

rool^l  bienen,  bie  erroetben  il^nen  felbft  eine  gute  ©tufe,  unb  eine  grofte 

greubigfeit  im  ©lauben,  in  gl&rifto  ^efu.    * 

«7 


68 

j^r.  §aft  bu  i>a§  3"traueit,  ba^  bu  innerlic^  .burc^  ben  J^eiligen  ©eift 
boju  ongetrieben  roerbeft,  ba§  2lmt  eineg  2)iener§  auf  bid^  ?u  ne^men,  urn 
barinnen  ©ott  ju  feineg  9lamen§  ©l^re,  in  ber  ©emeinbe  6f)ri[ti  ju  bienen? 

2lntn3.    ^c^  traue,  mit  ber  ^iilfe  ©olteg. 

i5r.    ©laubeft  bu  ber  ^eitigen  ©dirift,  olteS  unb  neue§  Seftament  ? 

Slntn).    S'*  it^  gtau5e. 

i5r.  2Sinft  bu  beinen  ^leif;  ba[)tn  anraenben,  beinen  eigenen  SOBanbel 
ttod^  ber  Seljre  Sf)ri[ti  etnjuric^tcn,  unb  fo  Diet  in  bir  ift  bid)  ber  §eerbe 
©l^riftt  ju  einem  9)Jufter  beg  d^riftlic^en  i.'eben§  Dorjuftetlen  ? 

2lntn).    S*^  i^iU'  fo  ®ott  "i^i"  §elfer  ift. 

%v.  3BtlIft  bu  benen,  ir)eld)en  etioa  bte  lleberfic^t  iiber  bid^  anuertraut 
toerben  mag,  mit  ©fjrerbietung  ge^orfamen  unb  i[;ren  guten  (Srma[)nungen 
mit  einem  joilligen  unb  frieblicfien  Jgerjen  nad^fommen  ? 

2lntra.    ^df)  mill  mid^  burd^  bie  ©nabe  ©otte§  bai^in  beftreben ! 

Sann  rairb  gebetet, 

3lad)  bem  ©e6et  legen  bie  Sifd^ofe  (ober  33ifdE)of  unb  3(elteften)  einem 
jjeben  bie  §anbe  auf  ba€  §aupt  unb  fprerf)e : 

(jjiimm  anmit  f)in,  bie  3SoI(niac{)t  bag  3lmt  eineg  2(e[teften  (ober  Sies 
nerg)  in  ber  ©emeinbe  ©otte§  ju  ooH^ieOen.  ^ni  9iamen  ®otte§  be§  SSatcrS, 
be§  (Sol^neg  unb  beg  §eiligen  ©eifteg,"  3(men. 

§ierauf  iibergebe  ber  ^ifcf)of  einem  jeben  befonberg  bag  Sibelbud^, 
fpred^enb : 

^Jiimm  anmit  I}in,  bie  SSolIntac^t  bag  SBort  ©otteg  ?u  lefen  unb  ju 
prebigen  in  ber  ©emeinbe  (£[)ri[ti." 

atlgbann  lefe  ber  Sifd^of  au§  bem  12ten  ©apitel  Sucft,  il  35—38 : 

Saffet  eure  Senben  umgiirtet  fetjn,  unb  euro  2id)teY  brennen ;  unb  fet;b 
gleid^  ben  SOienfc^en,  bie  auf  if^ren  £»errn  marten,  menu  er  aufbrcdjen  loirb 
t)on  ber  §od)jeit,  auf  bafe  roenn  er  lommt,  imb  anftopft,  fie  ifjin  balb  aufs 
tl^un.  ©elig  finb  bie  i{ned)te,  bie  ber  JQerr,  menu  er  tommt,  roac^enb  finbet. 
2Baf)rIid^  tc^  fage  eud^:  6r  rairb  fid^  auffd^iirjen,  luib  rairb  fie  ju  S:ifd^e 
fe^en,  unb  Dor  if)nen  gef)cn,  unb  i^nen  bienen.  Unb  fo  er  fommt  in  ber 
anbern  2Bad)e,  unb  in  ber  brttten  3Bad^o,  unb  rairb  eg  alfo  finben,  felig 
finb  biefe  iCncc^te. 

Sann  bete  ber  23tid}of,  ober  einer  ben  er  Oeifet ;  raorauf  bann  ber  folgenbe 
Segen  uom  33i)d)of  geiprod)en  rairb. 

2)er  'Jriebe  ©otteg  er^alte  cure  §erjen  unb  ©innen  in  ber  (Srfenntnifj 
3efu  Sfirifto  unferm  ^errn.    2lmen. 


%xi  unti  Peife  ciiini  ]3ifdjof  |u  orMnlren. 


3la<!^  bem  ©e6et  lefe  ber  Sifd^of  rcie  fotget : 

§oret  be§  §errn  3Bort ! 

2«att^.  28.  S3. 18—20.  Unb  ^efuS  trat  ju  i^nen,  rebete  mit  i^nen  unb 
fprac^ :  3)liv  ift  gegeben  alk  ©eroalt  im  §immel  unb  auf  ©rben.  Sarum 
gefjet  l^in,  unb  lel^ret  afle  SSotfer,  unb  taufet  fie  im  3tamen  be^  33ater§,  unb 
beg  ©o^neg,  unb  beg  §eiligen  ©eifteg;  unb  lel^ret  fie  fatten  alleg,  loag  ict) 
euc^  befof)len  l^aftc:  Unb  fiel^e  Scf)  bin  bei)  eucf)  aCe  S^age,  6ig  an  ber 
SBelt  @nbe. 

3lpofteIgefcl^ic^te  20.  3J.  27—32.  Senn  ic^  ^abe  euc^  nid^tS  oer^alten, 
bafi  i(^  nid^t  Derliinbiget  ptte  afie  ben  3tat^  ©otteg.  ©o  fjabt  nun  ad^t 
auf  eurf)  felbft,  unb  auf  bie  ganje  §eerbe,  unter  rcelc^en  eud^  ber  Sbetlige 
@eift  gefe^et  i)at  ?u  33ifd^i3ten,  p  roeiben  bie  ©emeinbe  ©otteg,  roelc^e  er 
burd^  fein  eigeneg  SStut  enoorben  i^at. 

2)enn  ba§  raei^  id^,  ba^  nad^  meinem  2l6fd^ieb  rowben  unter  eud^  fommen 
grautidje  SBotfe,  bie  ber  §eerbe  nic^t  oerfd^onen  roerben.  2lu(f)  aug  eutf) 
felbft  roerben  aufftel^en  2Ranner,  bie  ba  cerfe^rte  Se^ren  reben,  bie  S^^ger 
an  fid^  ju  jiel^en.  25arum  fegb  roacEer,  unb  benfet  bar  an,  ba|  id^  nic^t  a6= 
gelaffen  l^abe  brei)  Sa^re,  Sag  unb  3Iad^t  einen  jjegtid^en  mit  Sil^ranen  ^u 
tjerma^nen.  Unb  nun,  liebe  Sriiber,  td^  befel^le  eudE)  ©ott,  unb  bem  2Bort 
feiner  ©nabe,  ber  ba  mcid^tig  ift  eud^  ju  erbauen,  unb  ?u  geben  baS  ®r5e, 
unter  alien,  bie  ge^eiliget  roerben. 

1  2:imotl§eum  3.  S3.  1 — 7.  2)ag  ift  je  geroi|Iid^  rcaljr,  fo  jemanb  ein 
S3ifd^ofg=2lmt  begefiret,  ber  Begel^ret  ein  fbftlicf)eg  3Berf.  —  ®f!  foQ  aber  ein 
Sifd^of  unftraflid^  fet;n,  eine§  SBeibeg  2Jiann,  niic^tern,  mafeig,  fittig,  gaftfrep, 
lel^rl^aftig ;  ntd^t  ein  SCBeinfaufer,  nid^t  pod^en,  nid^t  une^rlid^e  §anbirung 
treiben ;  fonbern  getinbe,  nid^t  l^aber^aftig,  nid^t  gei^ig ;  ber  fetnem  eigenen 
§aufe  roo^t  corftel^e,  ber  gel^orfame  ^inber  l^abe  mit  aEer  ®|rbarfeit;  (fo 
aber  jemanb  feinem  etgenen  §aufe  nid^t  roei^  oorjufte^en,  roie  roirb  er  bie 
©emeinbe  @otte§  nerforgen?  nid^t  ein  ^Reuling,  auf  ba§  er  fid^  nid^t  auf: 
Btafe,  unb  bem  Safterer  ing  Urt^eil  fade.  ®r  mufi  aber  aud§  ein  gutcg 
3eugni^  l^aben  von  benen,  bie  brauffen  finb,  auf  ba^  er  nid^t  fade  bem 
Safterer  in  bie  ©d^mad^  unb  ©tridf. 

SCBann  bie  Stblefung  beg  ©oangeUumg  unb  bet  ©piftel  gefd^e^en,  unb 

bie  barauf  fotgenbe  3tebe  gecnbet  ift,  fo  erfud^e  ber  Sifd^of  bie  erroaf)lte 

69 


70 

^Perfon  l^eroor  ju  treten,  erinnere  bie  onrcefenbe  SSerfamniUmg  jum  @e5et, 
unb  fpred^e  at§bann  ?u  bent  ber  orbinirt  rocrben  foU,  rote  folget : 

33  r  u  b  e  r  !  2Seil  bie  gottlid^e  l^eiltge  ©thrift  befie^It,  ba^  roiv  9iiemanben 
}U  etitg  bie  §anbe  auflegett,  unb  jur  Stegierung  ber  ©emeinbe  Gf)rifti,  roelc^e 
er  unt  feinen  geringern  ^rei§  alg  nttt  ®arreic^ung  iinb  SSergiefeung  feineo 
eigenen  SluteS  erfauft  l^at,  annel^men :  fo  roiU  id)  bicf),  bieferroegen,  el^e  unb 
fieoor  td^  bid^  ju  biefer  SBerroaltung  annel^me,  iiber  einige  gerotffe  ^unfte, 
biefer  ©ad^e  betreffenb,  fragen. 

2)  e  r  33  i  f  d^  0  f .  Sft  ba§  beine  Ueberjeugung,  ba^  in  bent  alten  unb 
neuen  ^e[tament,  aHe  ju  unferer,  burd^  '^e\uxn  ©^riftunt  erroorbenen,  eroigen 
©eligleit  not^igen  iie^re  ent^atten  fei) ;  unb  6i[t  bu  entfc^lofjen  bag  $8oIf,  jc 
beiner  Db^ut  anoertrauet  roerben  luag,  aug  eben  biefer  §etligen  ©thrift,  noc^ 
bent  SSerntijgen  bag  bir  ®ott  gibt,  ju  unterrtd^ten,  unb  nid^tS  ju  le^ren,  alo 
rcag  barinnen  erroiefen  roerben  fann  ? 

31  n  t  ro.  So,  id^  bin  iiberjeugt,  unb  roiC  tnit  ber  §itlfe  ®otte§  bornac^ 
tl^un. 

2)  e  r  33  i  f  d^  0  f.  33ift  bu  rotHeng  bic^  in  eben  biefer  jpeiligen  ©d^rift 
fo  ju  iiben  ntit  fier^Ud^em  ®ebet  ju  ®ott,  um  ben  red^ten  3Serftanb  berfelben 
ju  erfennen,  bamit  bu  f)eilfa«t  (ef^ren  fannft  ? 

21  n  t  ro.    3JJit  ber  ^iilfe  ©otteg  roiU  id^  fo  tl^un. 

3)  e  r  S8 1  f  d^  0  f.  3BiQt  bu,  fo  oiel  an  bir  liegen  ntag,  frieblid^  uio 
liebreic^  gegen  ^ebennann  fei;n ;  unb  fold^eg  aud^  jiuif c^en  anbere  ju  beforbern 
fudEien,  nadf)  ber  ©eroalt,  bie  bir  nac^  @otte§  3Bort  juftel^et  ? 

21  n  t  ro.    ^d)  roitt  fo  tl^un,  ber  $err  fei)  nteine  §iilfe. 

2)er  33tfd^of.  2SiQt  bu  in  Drbinirung,  2lu§fenbung  unb  §anbe=2luf: 
(egung,  ju  '\oi6)en'^\viedm,  geroiffenl^aft  unb  pflid^tmafeig  l^anbeln  ? 

21  n  t  ro.    ^di)  rciC  burc^  bie  pife  ®otte§. 

2l[§bann  fpred^e  ber  33ifcf)of : 

2)er  altmad)tige  ®ott  unb  f)iimnlifd^e  33ater  gebe  bir  bie  ^raft,  unb  bag 
iUcrmogen  jum  SSoIlbringen,  bafj  bu  alg  ein  getreuer  SDiener  mogeft  erfun= 
ben  roerben  om  2;agc  beg  ©erid^tg,  burd^  unfern  §errn  3iefii"i  S^riftum, 
2lmen. 

S  e  r  SB  t  f  d^  0  f.    2a^t  ung  beten. 

3lai^  bent  ©ebet  Iniet  ber  ber  orbinirt  roerben  foH  nieber,  unb  ber 
33ifd^of  famntt  ben  anroefenben  Slelteften  legen  i^re  J;»dnbe  auf  fein  §aupt. 
3)er  Sifd^of  fpredE)e : 

(Smpfange  ben  l^eiligen  ©eift  junt  2lmt  unb  Sienft  eineg  aSif^ofg  in 
ber  ©enteinbe  ©otteg,  bag  bir  nun  burd)  2(uflegung  unferer  ^cinbe  iiber; 


71 

geBen  toirb.    '^m  3lamen  ®otte§  beg  aSaterS,  unb  be§  ©ol^neS,  unb  beg 
^eiligen  ©eifteg,  2lmen. 

3llgbann  iibergebe  il^m  ber  Sifd^of  bie  SBibel  unb  fpred^e : 
Sefleifeige  bid^  beg  Sefeng,  2el^reng  unb  ©rma^neng.  33ebenfe  bie  2e^' 
ren  voo'i)l,  bie  in  biefem  [)eiUgen  Sud^e  entl^alten  finb ;  fet)  fleifeig  biefelben 
ju  iiben.  S^rage  ©orge  iiber  bid^  fel6[t  unb  iiber  beine  &l^re.  SBeibe  bie 
§eerbe  ^efu  S^rifti.  .Komme  ben  ©d^roarfien  ju  $iilfe.  ©eg  mitleibig. 
§alte  Qudjt  mit  Sannl^erjigfeit,  auf  ba^  bu  bie  ^rone  beg  eroigen  Sebeng 
empfangen  mogeft,  burc§  3efum  ©l^riftum  unferm  §errn,  3lmen, 

2)ann  6ete  ber  Sifd^of  jum  Sefd^Iufi,  ober  ^eifse  jon[t  jemanb  5eten. 


JForm,  Me  iljcu  einiufcgucn. 


5(n r  eii  c. 

Siel  ©eliebte! 

2Cic  finb  f)ier  nor  bem  Slngefid^te  ©otteg  unb  biefen  gegens 
rao'^tigen  B^ugen  nerfamnilet,  bte'e  beijbe  ^erjonen,  nemlid^  '^.  xv.iD  ?J.  a(g 
2JJann  unb  2Beib  ef;e[icf)  juianinien  ju  geben.  ®ie  ®l^e  i[t  ein  e^rbarer 
©t'xnb,  con  @ott  fetbft  im  6tanb  ber  Unfd^utb  ^er  erften  aRenfd^en  eingefe^t. 

j5  r  a  g  e.  ^[t  nun  jemanb  gegenroartig  bem  etroan  einigeg  ^inberni^  Be; 
fannt  ift,  joarum  biefe  &ei)be  ^erfonen  nirf)t  were^elid^t  raerben  jotlten,  ber 
jeige  eg  nun  in  geBtt^renber  Drbnung  an,  ober  fc^iceige  auf  etoig  barnad^. 

aCirb  nun  feine  §inberni^  angejeigt,  fo  frage  ber  ^rebiger  bie  90?anng; 
perfon : 

^.  31.  SBiCt  bu  biefe  SBeiBgperfon  (9t.  31.)  fiir  bein  (S^eroeib  anne^men, 
um  in  bem  (S^eftanb  mit  i^r  nad^  ©otteg  Drbnung  ju  leben?  SBillt  bu 
i^r  Siebe  unb  S^roft  erjeigen;  in  ©efunbfjeit  unb  ^ranf^eit,  in  Steid^t^um 
unb  in  2lrmutl^  i^r  pflegen ;  unb  bid^  ju  i^r  a  Heine  l^alten,  raie  eg  einem 
d^riftUdien  Sl^emann  §ufte[)t ;  fie  nic^t  ju  Derlaffen  big  eud^  ber  ^'ob  fd^eiben 
roitb  ?  fo  antroorte  ^  a. 

S)ann  frage  ber  ^rebiger  bag  ffieibgbilb. 


72 

3t.  %  SBiQt  bu  biefe  3!Kann§perfon  (^i?.  91)  fiir  beinen  S^emann  anmly 
men,  um  in  bom  Gfjeftanb  ntit  i^m  nad|  ©otteg  Drbnung  ju  leben  ?  2i5iUt 
bu  if;m  gefjorfam  unb  bienftiDiHig  fetjn,  i()m  Siebe  unb  G^rfurc^t  erjeigen, 
unb  il^n  pftegen  in  ^ranf^eit,  in  (Sefunb^e  t,  in  3tetd^tl^um  unb  2lrmut^  ;  ntit 
3SerIafjung  aUev  anbern,  Vid)  alk'me  ju  ifjin  ^alten,  rcie  e5  einem  c^rift- 
Iicf)en  ©^eroeib  jufte^t ;  i^n  nicf)t  ju  uerlaffen,  bi3  euc^  ber  Sob  f c^eiben  rcirb  ? 
fo  antroorte  5  o. 

9iun  laffe  ber  ^rebiger  bie  35erIobten  einanber  bte  red^te  §anb  geben, 
unb  bee  ^rebiger  fpred)e : 

2Ba§  ®ott  jufammen  gefiiget  l^at,  foU  ber  3Jlenfcl^  nid^t  fd^eiben. 

2Bei(  nun  31.  unb  9i.  ftc^  in  ben  (g^eftanb  begeben,  unb  foldEie^  aHl^ier 
Dor  (Sotted  3(ngefic^t  unb  'ben  gegeniDCirtigen  3^"3^"  beutlic^  be!ennt  unt) 
bejeugt  ^aben,  fo  erflare  ic^  fie  ijieniit  at§  5Jiann  unb  2Beib,  im  9lanien 
©otteg  beg  SSaterg,  beg  ®o^neg,unb  be§  ^teiligen  ©eifteg.  Ser  ©ott  2(bra= 
l^amg,  unb  Sfaac,  unb  Sacob  fegne  biefen  3)lann  unb  biefe§  3Beib,  unb  fae 
ben  Samen  beg  eicigcn  Sebeng  in  if;re  §erjen,  Slmen. 

:iJafet  ung  beten. 

SDag  ®nbe. 


Urf^jncHg,  Sc^rc,  gaHftttMtlan 


unb 


Sttftt  --  OriiHHKg 


bcr 


^cteim^tcn  VStnbcv  in  ^Wtfto 


5^  (if  tint  ore. 

®e6ru(Jt  bet  tDilltam  Katne. 
1841. 


73 
20 


Utipvnn  ^ 

ber 

Scrcinigtcn  ©riikr  in  KJrifto. 


^n  bem-  ad^tjel^nten  ^al^rl^unbert  geftel  eg  bem  §errtt  unfertn  ®ott  in  ben 
rerfc^iebenen  ©egenben  ber  2Belt  SUdnner  ju  ertoecEen,  bie  bem  nerfattenen 
G^riftentl^um  rcieber  aufl^elfen,  unb  bie  Sel^re  com  ^reuj  in  il^rer  Sauter!eit 
rerlitnbigen  jollten. 

Ungefa^r  um  bie  SKitte  beg  bcfagten  ^aJ^r^unbertS  gebad;te  ber  <perr  aud^ 
ber  ©eutfd^en  in  2lmeri!a,  roeld^e  l^in  xmb  roieber  in  biefem  raeit  auggebretteten 
i^anbe  Ie6ten,  unb  baf^er  nur  felten  ©elegenl^eit  l^atten,  ba§  (St)angelium  oom 
^reuj,  in  il^rer  SJJutlerfprad^e  ju  il^rer  ©rbauung  uerHinbigen  §u  ^oren. 

Unter  anbern  erraetfte  er  SBil^elm  Dtterbein  unb  2JJartin  So^m  in  ^enn^ 
fi)lBanien,  unb  ©eorg  31.  ©iitf)tng  in  3Kart)Ianb,  riiflete  jte  axi^  mit  ®ei[t, 
(Snabe  unb  ^raft,  in  jeinem  jo  fe^r  oernac^Iaffigten  SBeinberge  ju  arbeiten,  um 
au6)  unter  ben  2)eutfcf)en  in  SCmerila  ©i'mber  jur  Sufie  ju  rufen.  ®iefe  Win- 
ner  folgten  bem  3f{ufe  il^reg  £»errn  unb  3Keifterg,  arbeiteten  im  ©egen,  erric|te= 
ten  l^in  unb  raieber  l^errlic^e  ©emeinben,  unb  fii^rten  ©l^rifto  mand^e  eble 
©eelen  ju. 

ytad)  unb  nad^  erroeiterte  fic^  if)r  2CirIunggIrei§,  ba^  fie  balder  genot^tget 
rcaren  ftd^  na^  2JiitarBeiter  im  SSeinbergc  umjufel^en ;  benn  bie  @rnbte  wav 
grofi  unb  ber  2lrbeiter  nur  raenige.  ©ott  erroedfte  anbere,  bie  and)  inillig 
rourben,  i^re  ^rafte  bem  §errn  ju  raibmen ;  fold^e  rourben  bann  Bon  einem 
ober  bem  anbern  alg  SKitarBeiter  angenommen. 

S)ie  2lnjal^l  ber  ©emeinbgglieber  in  ben  Derfc^iebenen  ©egenben  n?ud^§ 

Don  3eit  ju  3eit,  unb  ba§  2BerI  cerbreitete  fid^  jd)nell  in  ben  ©taaten  ^eniift)!- 

canien,  2Uart)lanb  unb  3Sirginien.    ©§  lourben  jal^rlid^  einige  gro^e  3Ser[amm= 

lungen  ge^alten,  bei  roelc^en  ©elegen^eiten  ftd^  Dtterbein  mit  ben  baf  elbft  gegen^ 

rocirtigen  ?Prebigern  unterrebete,  i^nen  bie  2Bid^tig!eit  be§  ^rebigt=2lmtg  t)or» 

75 


76 

ftellte,  imb  bie  Dlotfjioenbigfeit  alien  Gi-nft  anjuraenben,  um  ©eeten  ju  retten, 
einid;arfte.  S3ei  einer  biefer  Unterrebuiujeii  lourbe  befrf)Ioffen,  ba^  alle  ^Nrebt; 
ger  eine  3"l'fl"""e»^''"ft  Ijalten  foQten,  iiiii  ftd^  ju  beratfifd^Iagen,  me  fie  am 
^Rii^Iid^ften  fein  !onnten. 

S)ie  erfte  3"f«'"iiieuiunft  max  im  ^a^re  1789  in  Baltimore,  SJiarplanb. 
@§  loaren  fotgenbe  ^rebiger  jugegen :  SCiU^elm  Dtterbein,  3lbam  Selimann, 
SJIartin  33i3f)m,  3of)anne5  ©rnft,  ©eorg  2lb.  ©iitl^ing,  £>einr.  SBeibner,  6f;ri[tian 
3?eu!ommer, 

Sie  jroeite  3"f'^""itfi"f""ft  luurbe  in  ?)orf  Gountp,  ^arabieS  Saunffjtp, 
^ennfijlcanien,  itn  §au[e  be^  Sruber^  ©pdnglerS,  inx  '^ai)te  1791  ge^alten, 
rco  folgenbe  ^rebiger  gegeniDartig  roaren : 

SBiifjcIm  Ctterbein,  ^oi^anneS  Grnft,  2)lartin  33o^m,  %  &.  ^frimer,  ©eorg 
2lb.  ©iitl^ing,  3of)ctnn  SJeibig,  (El^r.  yieufontmer,  33enebilt  ©anber,  9(bam  i'e^= 
niann. 

3la<i)  reifer  Ueberlegung,  luie  fie  ntit  bem  grij^ten  SJul^en  in  bem  3Bein6erge 
beg  §errn  arbeiten  fomiten,  luiirbcn  icieber  foldje  al6  SJiitarbeiter  angeuommeu, 
uon  j»elcf)en  fie  Urfac^e  ju  glaiiben  r}atten,  baf;  fie  maijve^  S^riftentfjum  an 
if}rent  eigenen  ^erjen  erfal^ren  flatten. 

^nbeffen  Dermel^rte  fid^  bie  Slnjal^l  ber  ©lieber  immec  ineljr  nnb  ntef)r. 
®ie  ^rebiger  fafjen  fid^  buffer  t)erpflid)tet  atle  ^afjr  eine  3iiici"inenfunft  ober 
©onferenj  ju  Beftimnien,  um  fid^  niiljer  ju  uereinigen  itnb  red^t  niihlid^  ju  einetn 
gemeinfd^aftlirfien  ^med  ju  arSeiten ;  benn  einige  toaren  3Jeformirte,  anberc 
iiutfjeraner  xinb  nod^  anbere  3J?enoniften.  ©ie  Beftimntten  balder  im  25.  ©ep; 
tember  1800,  in  jjriebrii^  (Sountt;,  SKan^Ianb,  inx  £>aufe  be§  33ruber§  ^^i^iebrid^ 
jlemp,  jufannnen  ju  !ommen.    j^olgenbe  ^rebiger  luarcn  jugegen : 

2Cilf)elm  Dtterbein,  6[;riftian  ilruut,  3JJartin  33bfjm,  Jpeinrirf)  ilrunt,  ®eorg 
21.  @iitf)ing,  ^oi^ann  ^perrfd^e,  6^r,  5teu!ommer,  "^acoh  ©eifinger,  2lbam  Sel^= 
mann,  §einrid)  SSof)m,  9lbraf)ani  ^ra^fet,  SJietrid;  2Iuvauf,  Sol^ann  ®eorg 
^frimmer. 

©ie  tjereinigten  fid^  bafelbft  in  eine  ©efcEfd^aft,  bie  ben  9^anien  fiifjrt: 
„35 1  c  35  e r  e  i n  i  g  t  e n  58 r  ii b  e r  in  G  f)  r  i  ft  o"  ;  itnb  enodf)Iten  SCilfjelm 
Dtterbein  unb  SKartin  33b[)n:  ju  Dber=2Uiffe[}ern  ober  33ifd§bfen,  nnb  luurben 
einig  einen  jeben  bie  j^rei^i-'it  ju  erianben  auf  bie  3lrt  itnb  SBeifc  ju  taufen,  loic 
er  eg  nac^  feiner  tleberjeugung  fiir  red)t  befcinbe. 

SSon  nun  an  Dcrbreitete  fid^  bie  ©enieinbc  inimer  nie^r  unb  mei^r ;  e§  tour* 
ben  ^rcbiger  aufgenonnnen,  bie  Beftiinbig  reifeten  (benn  bie  Dielen  ^rebigt= 
pldt?e  lonnten  auf  leine  anbere  SBeife  bebient  luerben),  unb  bag  3Cerf  uerbreitete 
fid)  in  bie  ©taaten  Dl^io  unb  ilentudfi).    ©g  rourbe  balder  nijti^ig,  eine  6onfe; 


77 

renj  im  ©taate  Dl^io  |u  l^alten,  inbem  e§  ju  befd^roerlid^  georfitet  rourbe,  fiir  bie 
borttgen  ^rebiger  jal^rltd^  fo  roeit  §u  ber  (Sonferenj  ju  reifen. 

^nbefjen  ftarSen  bie  SBruber  33oE)nt  unb  (Sutl^ing,  unb  33ruber  Dtterbein 
bege^rte,  ba^  ein  anberer  jum  Sifcfiof  jollte  erical^It  raerben  (toctl  er  felbft, 
2llter§  unb  ©d^road^e  l^alber,  ntcfit  mel^r  nad^jefien  fonnte,)  ber  baS  SBerl  iiber* 
nel^me,  bamit  Qu^t  unb  Drbnung  er^alten  rourbe ;  benn  e§  roar  iei  einer  ber 
©onferenjen  befd^Ioffen  rcorben,  roenn  einer  con  ben  33ifrf)ijfen  ftirbt,  foU  ein 
anberer  an  jeine  ©telle  erroal^lt  roerben,  S^  rourbe  alfo  ber  Sruber  Sl^riftian 
^eutommev  alg  SBifd^of  erroal^It,  roeld^er  bie  Sluffid^t  iiBer  bie  ©emeinbe  iiber 
ftd^  nef)men  foKte. 

6c^on  lange  rourbe  ber  3}Jangel  einer  3wc^t=C)rbnung  in  ber  ©emeinbe 
tief  empfunben ;  e§  roar  fd^on  mel^rmalS  etroag  baran  getl^an  roorben ;  enbli^ 
rourbe  auf  ber  ©onferenj  im  ©taate  D^io  fiefd^Ioffen,  ba^  eine  §aupt=  ober 
©enerahSonferenj  gel^alten  roerben  joQte,  bie  eS  iiber  ftdf)  nel^men  follte,  bie 
3ucf)t= Drbnung  in  etroag  ooHftanbtger  ju  madden,  foroie  bem  SOorte  ©otte§  ge* 
mix^  fein. 

2)ie  ©lieber  biefer  ©onferenj  foEten  au§  ben  ^rebigern,  in  ben  unterfd^ieb= 
lid^en  ©egenben,  burd^  bie  ©lieber  ber  ©emeinbe  geroal^It  roerben ;  unb  e§  rours 
ben  bie  folgenben  33riiber  erroiifilt,  namlid^  : 

gi^r.  SiJeufommer,  Slbral^.  §ieftanb,  3lnbreag  S^^^^r  2)aniel  Xtexjex,  ©eorg 
SBenebum,  2l6ra^am  ^rajel,  6f)riflian  Serger,  3l5ra^am  SJJetjer,  ^ofjnnn 
©d^neiber,  §einrid)  ft'umler,  §einrid^  ©pcitl^,  %  SfJeufd^roanber,  (S^r.  i?rum, 
Safob  aSauIuS. 

Sie[e  Berfammelten  fid^  am  6.  ^uni  1815,  naf^e  Bei  SWount^^Ieafant,  in 
SCSeftmorelanb  ©ountr),  ^ennfitoanien,  rco  fie  nad^  reifer  Xleberlegung  bie  fol* 
genbe  Sef;re  unb  Siegein  fiir  gut  unb  nii^lid^  befanben,  fie  ber  ©emeinbe  in 
Siebe  unb  S)emut§  ?u  iibergeben,  mit  bem  l^erjtid^en  2Cunfd)e,  ba^  biefe  Sel^re 
unb  fold^e  3iegeln,  nebft  iem  SBorte  ©otteg  mbd^ten  beobad^tet  roerben.  2)enn 
©ott  ift  ein  ©ott  ber  Drbnung,  unb  roo  feine  Drbnung  unb  ^ird^enjud^t  ift,  ba 
oerliert  fid^  atle  Siebe  unb  ©emeinfrfiaft ;  balder  la^t  un§  bem  3iat[)e  be§  §errn 
folgen,  ber  un§  lel^rt,  tta^  rcir  burd^  S)emut^  einer  ben  anbern  ^o^er  ad^ten, 
al§  un§  felbft,  fud^en  gefinnet  §u  fein,  roie  ^efuS  (Sl^riftug  aud^  roar,  ber 
5lnec^t§geftalt  angenommen,  roarb  ge^orfam  big  jum  2;obe  am  ^reuj,  um  un§ 
bie  ©nabe  unb  j?raft  p  erroerben,  baf;  roir  un^  au§  £iebe  unb  Semutl^  einer 
bem  anbern  unterroerfen  fonnten,  roer  fid^  nid^t  unterroerfen  lann,  bem  mangett 
nod^  ©nabe,  Siebe  unb  S)emut(; ;  baf;er  fagt  S^fw^ '  2Ber  unter  eu^  ber 
©rij^re  fein  roiti,  ber  foE  beS  anbern  Siener  fein.  ©oE  einer  be§  anbern  2)iej 
ner  fein,  fo  miiffen  rcir  einanber  lieben. 


78 

3e[u§  fagt :  baran  roirb  Sei>ermann  erfeimen,  ba§  il^r  meinc  red^te  Siinget 
feib,  fo  i^r  Siebe  unter  einanber  l^aBt,  unb  luer  nic^t  Siebc  l^at,  ber  hle'M  im 
Xob.  ©0  laffet  ung  Siebe  ilben,  auf  baf(  roir  bie  ^errlid^Ieit  5efi|en  mogen, 
bie  Sefu^  feinen  ^"ngern  won  feinem  SSater  erbeten  l^at,  ba|  roir  eing  jein 
tnod^ten,  roie  er  unb  ber  3>ater  ein§  finb.  2)arum,  i^r  lieben  Sriiber,  lafjet 
un§  fudfien  gleic^gefinnet,  ein^eHig  unb  eintrad^tig  ju  fein,  unb  leiner  Uebet  con 
bem  anbern  reben  ober  benfen,  fonbern  ben  §errn  anfle^en,  ia^  ex  una  feinen 
(Seift  unb  ©rnft  geben  mod^te,  urn  ba§  6^ri[tentl^um  rec^t  jur  e^re  feine§  l)e\lu 
gen  3tamen§  ju  fiil^ren,  unb  ju  unferem  eigencn  ercigen  SBo^l.    2lmen. 


e^rfJct  9l6fiftttitt. 


Bas  iilaubcnshekcuntni^. 


3m  Seamen  ©otteS  er!Idren  unb  be!ennen  roir  Dor  ^eberniann,  ba§  roir 
glauben  an  ben  einigen  roaf;ren  ©ott,  SSater,  So^n  unb  fjeiliger  ®eift,  ba|  biefe 
2)rei  ©ing  finb,  ber  SSater  im  ©ol^n,  ber  ©ol^n  im  3Sater  unb  ber  §eilige  ©eift 
gleid)e5  2Befen  mit  beiben.  S;a^  biefer  breieinige  ©ott  §immel  unb  ©rbe  unb 
aHeS  roaS  barinneu  ift,  jorool^t  fidE)tbar  alg  unfid}tbar,  erfd^affen  fjat,  tragt, 
regiert,  fdE)ii^t  unb  er[;dlt. 

2Sir  glauben  an  ^efum  ©^riftum,  ba^  er  roafjrer  ©ott  unb  SJJenfd^  ift,  ba^ 
er  feine  3Ken[d^^eit  burd^  ben  ^eiligeu  ©eift  in  3Jiaria  angenommen,  unb  won 
il^r  geboren,  ba^  er  §eilanb  unb  33erfof)ner  be§  ganjen  menfd^Iid^en  ©efc^Ied^t^ 
ift,  roenn  fie  bie  in  ^efu  angebotene  ©nabe  im  ©lauben  an  i[;u  annef^uten ;  ha^ 
biefer  S^f"^  1^^  ""^  gelitten  Tjat,  am  ©tamme  beS  jlreutjeg  geftorben,  begra= 
Ben,  am  britten  S^age  roieber  auferftanben,  geu  §imme[  gefa[)ren,  roeld;er  ift  jur 
3ie(f)ten  ©ottcg  unb  uertritt  un5 ;  unb  roieber  !onunen  roirb  am  jiingften  2^age, 
ju  rid^teu  bteJ2ebenbigen  unb  bie  Sobten. 

2Bir  glauben  an  ben  ^eiligen  ©eift,  baf(  er  gleic^eS  SCefen  mit  bem  SBater 
unb  ©o^n  ift,  ba^  er  bie  ©laubige  trbfte  unb  fie  in  ode  SBafjrfjeit  leite. 

2Cir  glauben  an  cine  §eilige  (Sr^rifttidie  ©emeinbe,  bie  ©emeinfd^aft  ber 
^eiligen,  bie  2luferftef)ung  beS  Scibeo,  unb  ein  eroigeg  2d)in. 


79 

ajJir  glauben,  ba§  bie  SBibel,  alte^  unb  neueg  S^cftament,  ©otteg  aSort  ift ; 
ba^  fie  ben  roa^ren  SBeg  ju  im[erer  ©eligfeit  entl^alte,  ba§  ein  jeber  toal^re 
(Shrift  biefel6e  mit  ben  (Sinfliiffen  be§  ®eifte§  ©otteS  einjig  unb  aHein  ju  feiner 
^lici^tfci^nur  nel^men  foH,  unb  ba^  ol^ne  ©lauben  an  ^efum  (S^riftum,  maf)xe 
33u^e,  33erge5ung  ber  ©iinben  unb  Stad^folge  ©l^rifti,  SJJiemanb  ein  rca^rer 
©j^riji  fein  fann. 

2Bir  glauben,  ba^  toag  bie  l^eitige  ©(^rift  entf)alt,  namlid^ :  ben  'gall  in 
2lbam  unb  bie  ©rlofung  burd^  ^efum  Sf^riftum,  ber  ganjen  SBelt  foHte  geprebigt 
roerben. 

SBir  finb  iiBerjeugt,  bafi  bie  aufieren  33erorbnungeti,  nemlid^  bie  Saufe  unb 
t>a^  @ebadf)tni§  be§  Xobeg  unfereg  §errn  ^efu  ©l^rifti,  in  aUexi  (Sfiriftlid^en  ®e- 
meinben  geiibt  njerben  foUten,  unb  ba^  e§  5linbern  ©otteg  befonberS  gejiemt, 
biefelben  ju  gebraud^en.  S)ie  3lrt  unb  SBeife  aber,  rcie  biefelbe  geiibt  roerben 
foUten,  fon  bent  Urtl^eil  unb  bem  6r!enntni§  eineg  Segtid^en  iibertaffen  jein. 
2luci^  ba§  Seifpiel  be§  f^"!""*!^^"^  f^^^t  eirtem  ^eien  frei  ju  iiben  ober  ju 
unterlaffen.  S^^O"^  ift  e§  leinem  unferer  ^rebiger  ober  ©emeinbe^gliebern  ge= 
jiemenb,  feinen  3)iitbruber,  beffen  Urtl^eil  unb  ©r!enntni§  von  bem  jeinigen  vex- 
fd&ieben  ift,  be^roegen  offentlid^  ober  in  ^ricat  |u  oerJIeinern,  ober  feine  2lrt 
unb  SBeife,  roie  er  biefelbe  iibt,  ju  uerad^ten ;  roer  [x^  Ijievxn  fd^ulbig  mad^t,  [oU 
aB  ein  SJerloumber  jeiner  Sriiber  gead^tet,  unb  begl^alB  oerontroortlid^  fein. 


Stocitet  9l6fi|ttttt. 


tottjlitutiott  ber  $ird|e. 


2Sir,  bie  ©lieber  ber  i^irc^e  ber  aSereinigten  Sriiber  in  ©firi- 
ft  0,  fe^en  in  bem  3iamen  ©otteg,  jur  aSerooHIontmnung  ber  ®otte§fiird)tigen, 
ba§  2Ser!  be3  ?prebigts2lmt§,  bie  33eforberung  ber  ^irc^e  (Sf^rifti,  jorool^I  alS 
eine  regelma^ige  Seftimmung  be;  aHen  §anblungen  im  ©lauben  unb  in  ber 
Slu^fii^rung  ju  fid^ern,  joroie  aud^  bie  3Kad^t  unb  bie  ©efd^cifte  ber  tjierteljal^r; 
lirfien,  jaJ^rlid^en  unb  ©eneraUGonferenjen  ju  beftinxmen,  roie  eg  biefe  ^ird^e  on^ 
genommen  f)at,  folgenbe  Strtifel  feft : 


80 

21  r  t  i  f  e  I  1. 

2lbfc^mtt  1.  —  2lIIe  i^ierin  beiuilligte  getftUdie  ©eroalt,  irgenb  einc  S^^^' 
regel  m  madden  ober  auf5uf)eben,  foil  einer  ^aupt^Sonferenj  iibertragen  fern, 
n)elcf)e  au^  3lelte[te  befte^eit  foil,  bie  ooii  ben  (Sliebern  in  jebcm  Gonferenj; 
©iftrifte,  burcf)an5  ber  ©efeHfrfiaft  gerod^lt  icerben  foUen.  j^eftgefe^t  i»irb 
jebod^,  ba^  bie  3lelteften  in  ben  (Sonferenj=2)iftriften,  con  roel(^en  fie  geroal^lt, 
brei  ^af)xe  geftanben  l^aben. 

2l6f(]^nitt  2.  —  2lHe  »ier  Sa[)re  foU  eine  ®eneral:6onferenj  ge^alten  wev 
ben,  in  roeld^er  bie  SSifd^ofe  alg  ajJitglieber  unb  priifibirenbe  33eamte  betrac^tet 
rocrben  follen. 

2lbfd)nitt  3.  —  ^ebe  jja^rlicfie  Sonferenj  foH  ber  @efellf(^aft  bie  Stamen  ber= 
jjenigen  2lelteften  oorlegen,  n)elcf)e  jur  2Ba^I,  alS  ©lieber  ber  ®eneraI:®onferenj, 

faf)ig  finb. 

2lrtitel  II. 

3lbfcf|nitt  1.  —  S)ie  (55eneral=©onferenj  foE  bie  (Sranjen  ber  jai^rtid^en  Son* 
ferenjen  beftimtnen. 

21Cbfd^nitt  2.  —  2)ie  ©eneral^Sonferenj  foQ  in  jeber  il^rer  ©i^ungen  au5 
ben  2lelteften,  rceld^e  fed^g  ^afjre  in  berfelben  geftanben  l^oben,  SBifd^ofe  erroa^s 
len, 

2lbjcf)nitt  3.  —  2)ie  ©efd^afte  jeber  jaf^clic^en  ©onferenj  foKen  ftreng  ber 
gud^torbnung  gemcip  get^an  loerben.  ^rgenb  eine  id^rlicf)e  Gonferen?,  bie  ge^ 
gen  bie  Serfiigimg  ber  Jgaupt^Sonferenj  fjanbelt,  foQ  burd^  2ln!Iage  t)on  berfel* 
ben  gerid^tet  roerben. 

2lbfdf)nitt  4.  —  ^eine  3?eget  ober  ©efe^  fott  ju  irgenb  einer  geit  paffiren, 
tDoburcf)  bag  ©laubenSbefenntnif;,  raie  e§  je^t  beftefjt,  Deriinbert  ober  ueriDor* 
fen,  unb  ber  3leifeplan  jerftort  loirb. 

2lbfdE)nitt  5.  —  5?eine  3fiegel  foK  angenommen  roerben,  bie  ben  Stec^ten 
irgenb  eineg  ajlenfd^en  (Sintrag  tf)ut,  in  Sejug  auf  bie  2lrt  unb  SCBeife  ber  2;aufe, 
ba§  ©acrament  beS  2l5enbmaf)l5  bed  £>errn,  ober  beg  'g:i^ei»afd^en§,  jc. 

2lbfd)nitt  6.  —  ©§  fott  leine  31eget  gemarf)t  loerben,  rooburd^  ben  fe^rjaften 
^Prebigern  iC)re  ©timmen  in  ben  ja^rlidEien  Sonferen^•n,  ju  benen  fie  oerfd^ie^ 
bentUd)  ge()oren,  beraubt  roerben. 

2lbfd|nitt  7.  —  i^eine  aSerbinbung  nitt  ge[}eimen  CS5e|enfdE)aften,  nod^  unfreis 
n)iaige  S)ienftbar!eit  fott  unter  irgenb  einer  Sebingung  eriaubt  rocrben. 
2trtile(  III. 

25ie  SRed^te,  bie  3lamen,  bie  ^ntereffen  unb  bie  2lnred^te  aOeg  ®igent^um§ 
in  liegenben  ®runben,  ^irdien,  aSeriniidjtniffcn  ober  Sdjentungen  irgenb  einer 
2lrt,  roeld^e  burc^  2lnlauf  ober  auf  anbere  affieife  Don  einer  ober  mcOrere  '^3erfo= 


81 

nen,  fiir  ben  ©ebraud^,  35ortl^eiI  unb  yiu^en  ber  ^ird^e  ber  SSereinigten  Sriiber 
in  ©firifto,  beftimmt  ftnb,  foU  f)iermit  oolHommen  5eruc![tcl^tiget  unb  alg  (Sigens 
tl^um  befagter  ^ird^e  betrad^tet  raerben. 

2lrttfel  IV. 
^etne  SSeranberungen  ber  norfiergefienben  ©onftitittton  fold  gemad^t  rocr* 
ben,  e^  fei  benn,  burd^  eine  ©timmenjal^l  von  jroei  S)ritt^eilen  ber  ganjen  @es 
ieUfc^oft. 


fritter  m\mtt. 


encral  =  Olottferen^, 


1.  %taqe.    SBetd^e  finb  bie  ©lieber  ber  ©eneral  ©onferenj  ? 
S&"    ©iefie  ©onftitution. 

2.  %v.    3Bie  unb  auf  raeld^e  2lrt  ftnb  bie[el&en  ju  wa^len  ? 

1.  Slntroort.  ^n  ber  SBa^l  Don  2l6georbneten  jur  jpaupt^fionferenj  foH  e5 
bie  ^flidEit  jeber  ia^rUdjen  ©onferenj  fein,  eine  Sommittee  oon  breien  in  i^ren 
unterf(^ieb(id)en  (Sonferenj^Siftriften  ju  ernennen,  urn  bie  ©timmen  511  empfan* 
gen  unb  ju  jci^ten,  unb  e^  unmittelbar  benjenigen  anjujeigen,  roeld^e  geraa^lt 
rcorben  fein  mogen,  foroie  aud^  ben  j)orftel§enben  2lelteften  eine  Sifte  aHer  mal^Is 
Baren  9le[teften  jufommen  ju  laffen. 

2.  3lntn).  3)ie  9(uffid^t§-3lelteften  foQen  ftc  jebem  beauftragten  3ieife=5pres 
biger  liefern,  bercn  'Pflid^t  eg  fein  foH,  jeben  ©la^leiter  ober  2luffe[)er  burdE)  ben 
ganjen  UmfreiS  ferf)g  SJJonate  vox  ber  @eneraI=(5onferenj  mit  einer  3l6)d^rift 
baoon  ju  DerfeEien. 

3.  2lntiD.  ©5  foH  bie  ^flid^t  eineS  jeben  (S(a§leiter§  ober  2luffef)er§  fein, 
eine  SSerfammlung  ber  2)Jitglieber  jebejc  ©laffe  anjuorbnen,  um  burd)  33aIIotiren 
ober  auf  anbere  SCeife  einen  ober  me^re  2l6georbnete  ju  roal^Ien,  biefelben  in 
ber  §aupt=6onferen5  ju  reprcifentiren. 

4.  2lntro.  @g  foQ  gteid^erroeife  bie  ^flid^t  eineS  jjeben  ©la^leiterg  ober 
Sluffel^erg  fein,  jeben  JBa[)t6erid^t  ju  unterfd^reiben,  einjufc^lie^en  unb  jugefies 
gelt  bem  beauftragten  ^rebiger  einjufianbigen  ;  biefer  r)intt)ieberum  bem  2luf= 
fid^t§=3lelteften,  beffen  ^flidfit  e§  fei,  foldfien  ber  oon  ber  jal^rlid^en  ©onferen| 
ernannten  Committee  ju  iiberfenben. 


82 

5.  2lntro.  2)ie  jum  (gmpfange  unb  jur  3S^Iung  ber  Stimntcn  ernannte 
Gommitte  foH  ein  SSerjeid^nifj  ber  ^erfonen,  fiir  roeld)e  geftimmt  toorben,  unb 
bte  Sdijafil  DOtt  ©tinimen,  bie  jjebe  er^alten,  au^fertigen.  SoHten  jioei  ober 
me^r  ber  (Sanbibateii  eine  gleid^e  2tnja[)l  ©ttmmen  Robert,  fo  foEen  bie  fo  er-- 
nannten  ^erfonen  burd^'^  2oo§  entfd^eiben,  rcer  ober  roelc^e  oon  t^nen  geroal^rt 
fmb.  ©ie  foUen  ebenfo  bie  ^amm  berer,  bie  geroa^It  finb,  an  bie  (Sonferenj^ 
33ud|brudEerei  jur  33efanntma(^ung  einfenben. 

3.  iJrage.  2Cie  oiel  Stbgeorbnete  foQen  jur  ®eneral=6onferenj  gefd^icft 
roerben  ? 

2lntn).    2)rei  won  jebem  jd^rlicfien  (Sonfereni^Siftrilte. 

4.  ^raqe.  2Cie  foQen  bie  itoften  ber  Sfbgeorbneten  jur  ®enerol:(£onferenj 
gebectt  roerben  ? 

2lntro.  SBenn  ber  ©la^leiter  ober  2luffel^er  bie  ©timmen  fiir  bie  2lbgc= 
orbneten  jur  ®eneral=(5onferenj  fammelt,  foU  eine  ©ottefte  ju  bent  Qwede  »on 
i^m  Deranftaltet  roerben,  bie  er  ber  ©ommittec,  roeld^e  mit  bem  3Si^len  ber 
©timmen  befdEiaftigt,  iibergeben  fotl,  bie  e^  on  bie  geroa^Iten  Slbgeorbneten  ju 
ja^len  i^at. 


Wmttx  5lbft^iutt. 


al)rlid|e  Confer etif. 


1.  %taQe.    aSer  finb  bie  ©licber  ber  iaJ^rlid^en  ©onferenj  ? 

3lntroort.  3nie  2lelte[te  unb  licenfirte  ^rebiger,  roeldje  ju  ber  3eit  in  bem 
5!)iftri!te  finb,  roo  bie  Gonferenj  ge[)alten  roerben  foE ;  roenn  aber  folcf)e  licen; 
ftrte  ^rebiger  jur  Drbination  »orgefrf)tagen  finb,  fo  foUen  bie  2lelteften  allein 
baffelbe  burd)  9lbftintinen  entfd^etbcn. 

2.  (jrage.  3luf  roeld^c  SBeife  finb  bie  3Serl^anbIungen  einer  (Sonfereuj  ju 
fii^ren  ? 

1.  2lntroort.  ®g  foU  bei  ber  ©roffrtung  ber  Sonferenj  {e'Den  %aQ  eine  2lb= 
tl^eilung  au§  ber  33ibel  getefen  unb  gefungen  unb  gebctet,  unb  beim  ©d)Iuffe 
gebetet  unb  gefungen  roerben. 

2,  3lnbD.  2)ie  Gonferenj  foH  jroei  ©efretaire  roci^len  roenn  eg  not^ig  ifi, 
einen  2)eutfd^eu  unb  eincn  (Snglifdjen  unb  ift  nur  eiii  IMfdjof  jugegen,  fo  foU 
bie  ©onferenj  einen  ©eOiilfen  ernennen,  um  in  3Serbinbung  mit  bem  Sifd^ofc  ju 
l^aubeln. 


83 

3.  2lnttD,  SBctbcn  bie  ^rebiger  untcrfud^t,  in  2lnfel^ung  t^reS  3}erl^alten§ 
gegen  il^re  2)iitmenfci^en,  o&  t^r  Seben^toanbel  untabel^aft,  unb  ob  fte  fo  otel 
3eit  aB  ntoglic^  anioenben,  bag  3leic^  ©otteg  ju  beforbern. 

j^otgenbe  j^^igett  foHen  bann  erlebigt  raerben : 

1.  ©inb  rod^renb  bem  oergangenen  ^al^re  ^rebiger  geftorBen  ? 

2.  SCetd^e  finb  Sanbibaten  fiir  ba§  ^IBrebtgtamt  ? 

3.  ®inb  roeld^e  ju  bem  2letteften=2lmte  ju  orbiniren  ? 

4.  2Sag  ift  fiir  jufaHige  2luggaben  unb  ben  ©e^alt  von  SJeifeprebigetn 
gefammelt  loorben  ?  ^ 

5.  3ft  Slbred^nung  mit  ben  reifenben  ^rebigern  ge^alten  roorben  ? 

6.  §aben  fie  if)re  ©ebiifjren  er^alten  ? 

7.  SBer  ift  raiHig,  ba§  lommenbe  ^a^r  ?u  reifcn,  o^nc  SJotbel^alt  ? 

8.  SDerc^e  finb  2Iuffic^t§=2leltefte  ? 

9.  SDBie  finb  bie  ^rebiger  biefeS  ^af)x  angefteHt  ? 

10.  SBann  iinb  rao  foil  unfere  nac^fte  ©onferenj  gefiatten  roerben  ? 

11.  3ft  fonft  nod^  etroag  ju  t^un  ? 

12.  Sft  SlHeg,  rcag  getl^an  roorben,  in  bag  ^rotofoH  eingetragen? 


^fiittftcr  9lbf4ttitt. 


ite  Slufnaljme  tion  PreMgern. 


1.  j^age.    2Bie  foQ  ein  ^rebiger  aufgenommen  roerben  ? 

3lntroort:  Sine  jjebe  a[§  ^rebiger  oorgefdilagene  ^erfon  foH  t)on  ber  6on= 
ferenj  ober  tjon  einer  ©ommittee  ejaminirt,  unb  il^m  folgenbe  ^^i^agen  worgelegt 
roerben : 

^aft  bu  ®ott  in  S^rifto  alg  einen  ©iinbe  nergebenben  ®ott  ertannt  unb 
felbft  SSergebung  beiner  ©iinben  eriangt  ? 

§aft  bu  nun  j^i^ieiieii  ""t  ®ott/  u"^  ift  ^ie  Siebe  ©otteS  burd^  ben  ^eiligen 
©eift  in  bein  ^erj  au€gegoffen  ? 

Sageft  bu  ber  ^eiligung  nac^  ? 

©laubeft  bu,  ba^  bie  Sibel  ©otteg  SBort  ift,  unb  bap  biefelbe  ttHein  \>tn 
roa^ren  2Seg  ju  unferer  ©eelen  Seligfeit  entl^alt  ? 

2Cel(^en  ©runb  l^aft  bu  fiir  biefen  ©lauben  ? 


84 

SlBa§  t[t  bein  Seitjcggrunb,  baf(  bu  @rlaubni^  Derlongft  bo§  @»angelium 
ju  ptebtgen  ? 

2Cag  ift  bein  ©rlenntnift  Bom  ©lauben,  t)on  ber  ©iinblid^feit  be^  DJJenfd^en, 
»on  Su^e,  won  ber  3tec^t|ertigung,  §eiUgung  imb  (grlojung  ? 

:^iegt  bir  bein  eigen  §eil  imb  bag  igeil  beineg  3]e6enmenfd^en  inef)r  am 
^erjen,  al§  jonft  alle§  aubere  in  ber  SBcIt  ? 

^annft  bu  bicf)  bem  3iatfje  beincr  33riiber  iinterroerfen  ? 

Sift  bu  mit  ber  3uc^torbnuug  unferer  Mirc^e  einnerftanben  ? 

ilBiaft  bu  gel^orjam  fein  urib  bereit,  ju  reben  ober  ^u  fc^roeigen,  roie  eg  bic 
33riiber  f iir  gut  fiuben  ? 

Sift  bu  roittig,  jo  oiel  in  beinem  3Sermogen  ift,  ben  3fleifeplan  l^elfen  ju  er* 
f)alten,  unb  i^n  fo  Dtel  alg  mogtid^  ju  unterftii^en  ? 

^'einer  fann  auf  anbere  SBetfe  roie  auf  ^robejeit  aufgenomnten  toerben, 
unb  jei  er  aufgenommen  ober  juriidEgejoiefen,  fo  foQ  if)m  lein  Unrec^t  gefd^el^en. 


©c4ftcr  m\mtt 


Pie  tiiertcljnljrlidjc  (roufctcn^ 


1.  (^rage.    SGBeld^e  finb  bie  ©lieber  ber  Diertelja^rlic^en  ©onferenj  ? 
2lntiDort.    9llle  ^rebiger,  ®rmaf}ner,  j^iifirer  unb  2luffe^er,  roeld^e  in  bem 

^reife  ober  ber  ©tation  luofjnen. 

2.  S'^age.    3Beld^eg  finb  bie  ©efd^iifte  ber  oierteljal^rlid^en  ©onferenj  ? 

1.  Slntioort.  ©inen  ©elretair  ju  crnennen,  beffen  ^flic^t  e§  fein  foil,  ein 
genaueS  3Serjeid)nifi  aller  il^rer  Hnternel^mungen  2C.  in  ein  befonberS  bnju  he- 
ftimmteS  Sud^  einjujeidjnen  unb  in  felbem  eine  £ifte  ber  ©lieber  aug  benen  bie 
Gonferenj  beftetjt,  ju  fiiljren. 

2.  3lntn).  (Sine  atlgemeine,  ober  loenn  not[)ig,  eine  befonbere  5Rac^fragc 
in  ioinfid^t  beg  moralifdjen  Serfjalteng  ber  Sonferenjgtieber  anjufteHen. 

3.  3lntn).  3ln?unel^men  unb  ju  unb  ju  unterfud^en,  alle  ^IppeKationen, 
^Jad^ioeifungen  unb  iCIagen,  roeld^e  regetntiifeig  »or  bie  (Fonferenj  gebrad^t  roer-- 
ben. 

4.  2lntiu.  9lbrerf)nungen  mit  bem  9(ufier)er  imb  reifejiben  'i^Jrebigern  ju 
mac^en. 


85 

5.  3lntn).  2)enienigeti  ^erfonen,  raeld^e  burd^  roenigftenS  jroei  2)rittl^etle 
ber  Ma'^e,  ju  toeld^er  fie  gel^oren,  empfo^Ien,  bie  ®rlau6ni&  ju  gefeen,  ju  prebi= 
gen,  ober  ju  ermal^nen.  S^^Jod^  foil  Reiner  angenommen  raerben  ber  ber  (Sons 
ferenj  nid^t  l^in(angU(f)e  33efrtebigung,  in  ^infid^t  feine§  9Jufe^ :  ©rfal^rimg, 
i^eftigleit  in  ber  Sel^re,  unb  ©incerftanbni^  trtit  unferer  J^ird^e  mib  ber  3uti^t= 
orbnung  berfelben  geBen  lann, 

3.  9Bie  foHen  ^rebiger  con  anbern  ©efettfd^aften  aufgenommen  loerben  ? 
STntn).    SBeun  fie  mit  gnten  3^"S'"fff"  ^^^'^  ^^^  Bi^i^erigeS  33er^alten 

6ei  ber  ©efeUfd^aft,  ?u  rceld^er  fie  t)orbeni  ge^orten,  ju  un§  ionnnen  itnb  ber 
t)terieljal^rlid^en  Gonferenj  Stad^rid^t  ge6en,  ba^  fie  fid^  ben  3?egeln  unferer  (3e- 
fetlfd^aft  foroie  il^ren  ©ebrciud^en  unterroerfen  rcoHen.  ©ann  mag  bie  v'xextel- 
jcii^rnd^e  ©onferenj  fie  licenftren  Bi§  jur  (Si^ung  ber  nad^ften  jal^rlidEien  Confer 
renj,  unb  follen  fie  bann,  rcenn  i^r  Setragen  nut  bent  Gnangelium  ©l^rifti  ii6ers 
einftimmt,  al§  ^Prebiger  ober  21eltefte  Betrad^tet  toerben. 

4.  %vaQe.    SSeldfie  S'Jad^roeifungen  finb  bet  einer  Stppetlation  erforbertid^  ? 
2lntn)ort.    9Senn  ein  Grmal^ner  ober  ^rebiger  utit  bent  SluSfprud^e  ber 

Bierteljal^rHd^en  (Sonferenj  nid)t  jufrieben  ift,  fott  er  iitnerl^alB  brei|ig  S^agen 
nad^  einer  fold^en  uiertelja^rtid^en  ©onferenj,  bem  ©efretair  J^ietjon  fd^riftlid^ 
Slnjeige  madden,  ntit  ber  ^iitjufiigung,  ber  il^n  baju  t)eranlaffenben  Urfad^e,  unb 
e§  foil  bann  bie  ^ftid^t  be§  ©efretair§  fein,  bie  aSer^anblung  tnit  bem  2tppeIIan= 
ten  fd^riftlid^  ber  jal^rlid^en  Sonferenj  ein?ufd^idfen. 

6§  foil  bie  ^flid^t  ber  Dierteljal^rlid^en  ©onferenj  fein,  biefelBe  mit  (Sefang 
unb  ©eBet  ju  bffnen  unb  ju  Befd^Iie^en. 


©ic6 enter  9l6fi^ttUt. 


Pitglieber  im  ^Ugemeincn. 


1.  ^rage.    2Bie  foHen  ©lieber  in  unferer  ©efeUfd^aft  aufgenommen  roer* 

2lntroort.  SBenn  fid^  5ei  irgenb  einer  SSerfammlung  eine  ^erfon  anmels 
bet,  ein  SRitgtieb  in  unferer  ©efellfd^aft  ju  merben,  fo  foil  ber  ^rebiger,  ber 
gegenroartig  ift,  il^m  folgenbe  ^^ragen  uorlegen : 

§aft  bu  SSergeBung  beiner  ©iinben  eriangt  unb  bift  bu  je^t  entfdEiIoffen 
burd^  bie  ©nabe  ©otteg  beine  ©eele  ju  retten  ? 


86 

2Benn  bie  ^erfon  biefe  ^^rage  tntt  \a  beantroortet,  unb  5JJiemanb  ntrf|t§  gegen 
fein  33etragen  einjurcenben  i)at,  fo  foH  il^m  ber  ^rebiger  bie  red)te  ^an'b  geben, 
foId)e  ^erfon  foH  alg  ein  3?(itglieb  in  imferer  ©emeinbe  gead)tct  fcin,  unb  mit 
ber  (iinroilligung  eineg  '^ehen  foH  ber  ^srebiger  befjen  9kmen  in  ba^  5£IaJ5bu(^ 
einfc^reiben  ;  aber  jo  lange  eine  ^erfon  obige  (Srage  nid)t  avfrid}tig  mit  '^a  be» 
antiDorten  lann,  fo  foH  er  nid)t  al§  ein  DoIIe§  C)Iieb  unferer  ©emeinbe  ange= 
fefien  roerben. 

Sin  jebeg  @Iieb  ber  ©emeinbe  foil  betennen,  ba^  eS  bie  Sibel  fiir  ©otteg 
SBort  i)alte,  ba^  e§  fid)  Don  nun  an  Don  ganjem  §erjen  beftrebe,  fein  §eil  in 
©Firifto  Sefu  ju  fuc^en,  unb  feine  ©eligfeit  ju  fdjaffen  mit  gurdit  unb  3ittern, 
um  ben  jufiinftigen  eroigen  Qoxn  ?u  entflief)en. 

(Sin  jebeS  ©lieb  foil  fid)  beftreben,  einen  gottfeligen  SDBanbcI  ju  ful^ren ; 
flei^ig  fein  im  ©ebet,  bcfonberg  im  SSerborgenen,  unb  mo  miiglic^  ju  fciner  eige; 
nen  ©rbauung,  aHen  3SerfammIungen  beijurooljnen,  beibeS  offentlic^en  ©otteg; 
bienft  unb  Setftunben. 

§dupter  Don  ^amilien  follen  eg  nie  Derjdumen,  beg  332orgeug  unb  9lbenbg 
mit  ben  Sf)tigen  ?u  beten,  unb  beiifelben  ein  guteg  ©jempel  ju  fd^^en  in  aHen 
(EI)riftIid)en  2:ugenben, 

©in  iebeg  foE  fid)  beftreben,  genau  alg  in  ber  ©egenioart  ©otteg  ju  man- 
beln,  fid^  bei  feinen  ©efd)aften  an  einen  genauen  Umgang  mit  ©ott  geinot;nen  ; 
nie  Uebet  Don  feinem  ?}ebenmenfd)en  reben,  :yicbe  iiben  gegen  ^reunb  unb 
^einb ;  bem  3lrmen  ©uteg  ju  tf)un,  unb  fuc^en  in  ber  Zijat  ein  9iad)foIger  ^efu 
(Ef)rifti  JU  fein. 

Sin  jebeg  ©lieb  foil  ben  ©abbatl^  l^eilig  Ijalten,  foroie  eg  ©otteg  SSort  er-- 
forbert !  nidjt  ju  !aufen  nod)  ju  Derfaufen,  fonbern  foE  benfelben  in  3lnbttd)t  mit 
Sefen  unb  §bren  beg  SBorteg  ©otteg,  mit  ©ingen  geiftreic^er  Sieber  ?ur  Gf)re 
unb  £ob  ©otteg  jubringen. 

Sin  jebeg  ©lieb  in  biefer  ©emeinfd)aft  foEte  Diertelja^rltd^  aug  freiem 
SBiEen  fo  oiel  beitragen  „ba  ber  ^^exx  Ujn  gefegnet  I)at,"  1.  6orintI)er  16,  2,  um 
bie  reijenben  ^rebiger  ju  unterl)alten. 

2;ie  Dor[)ergel^enben  Slegeln  fmb  jur  befferen  Drbnung  in  unferer  ©efeE* 
fd)aft  Dorgefc^rieben,  unb  loir  glauben,  ba^  biefelben  in  bem  2Borte  ©otteg  ge= 
griinbet  finb,  roeg^alb  ein  jebeg  ©lieb  ber  R\vd)e  fclbe,  alg  il)m  obliegenb,  genau 
}n  bcad)ten  l)at.  ©oEtcn  nield)e  fie  iibertreten,  fo  foIIen  fie  juerft  ennal)nt,  im 
3Bieber^olunggfaEe  aber  !onnen  rcir  fie  nid)t  liinger  unter  ung  bulbeiu 


9lr^tcr  Wbf^nitt. 


ffilolfen  ]n  crddjten  irnb  ?u  !|altcn. 


^nbem  eg  btc  ^flid^t  ber  ^rebiger  unb  3lelte[ten  ift,  Slaffen  ju  erric^ten, 
unb  6Ia§=3SerfammIungen  ju  l^alten,  t»eld^e§  tmmer  mit  grower  SJla^igung  unb 
©anftmutE)  geft^el^en  joUte,  fo  ift  in  Siebe  ju  i^offen,  ba^  !ein  ©lieb  ber  &e> 
meinbe  in  biefem  ^^eile  einem  ^rebiger  in  ber  SlugiiBimg  feiner  ^flic^t  anfto^ig 
ober  ^inberlid^  fein  roerbe,  ©ollte  aber  ein  SRitglieb  bagegen  l^anbeln,  fo  ift  er 
ber  nad^ften  cierteljal^rlic^en  Sonferenj  oerantnjortli^. 


9ltmUv  m^mtt. 


tlttffCU. 

1.  Sine  (Slaffe  foH  au§  brei  ober  mel^rere  ©lieber  Beftel^en,  roeld^e  jal^rlid^ 
ein  ©lieb  oug  il^rer  eigenen  ober  anbern  (Slaffe  ernennen  follen,  raeld^er  il^r 
j^iifirer  genannt  rcerben  foQ. 

grage :    2CaS  ift  bie  ^flid^t  emeg  ^u^rerg  ? 

2lntiDort :  @g  foK  bie  ^flirf)t  eineg  fold^en  fein,  raenigfteng  einmal  in  ber 
SSod^e  in  Set=  ober  ©Ia^--3SerfammIungen,  fetne  (Staff e  jufammen  §u  berufen 
urn  wit  il^nen  itber  bie  geiftlid;e  2Bof)lfal^rt  ifjrer  ©eelen  ju  fpred^en  unb  jur 
®inigfeit  unb  Siebe  unter  einanber  ju  ermal^nen.  ©obann  foH  er  bie  5Teif)eit 
unferer  33et=  unb  (Sla^=3SerfammUtngen  auf  atte  fid)  gut  auffu^renbe  ^erfonen 
augbel^nen,  bie  benfelben  beijuroofinen  roitnfd^en. 

2.  ^ebe  Slaffe  foH  ja^rlic^  etnen  erroa^len  ber  ©teroart  ober  SBerroalter 
genannt  loerbe. 

^rage :    SBag  ift  bie  ^flic^t  eineg  SSerroalterg  ?  . 

(Srfte  2lntn)ort :  (Sr  foQ  otertelidfirlid^e  GoUelten  jum  33efien  ber  reifen. 
ben  ^rebiger  l^alten ;  eine  genaue  3ied)nung  bariiber  fiil^ren,  unb  biefelbe  jeber 

Dierteljd^rlici^en  ©onferenj  iiberliefern. 

87 


88 

3n)eite  2lntn)ort :  Gr  foH  ber  oiertelja^rlid^eu  Sonferenj  fur  bte  %ts\ie 
imb  forgfaltige  ©rfuHung  feiner  ^fltd^ten  aB  S?en»alter  feiner  Glafje  Derant= 
iDortlid^  \e'm. 

i^rage :    2Ba§  foH  gefcfiel^en,  im  jyaHe  eineg  unmoralifcfieu  58ernel^men§  ? 

2lntiDort :  Siejenigen  ©lieber,  ir)eld;e  ftc^  ber  Uumoralitat  jd)ulbtg  ma: 
(i^en,  foUen  con  ber  Slaffe  ju  irielii)er  fte  gepren,  ober  einer  (Sommittee,  be- 
ftefjenb  au^  SJJitglieber  ber  Slaffe  fiir  unb  gegen  if;n,  geridE)tet  raerben,  unb  ber 
^rebiger  bor  ©tatiou  ober  SSejir!,  rconi  ber  2lngeIIagte  geprt,  foH  ber  Claffe 
ober  Sommittee  Dorfi^en  ;  unb  loenn  ber  3[iigef(agte  fd^ulbig  feefunben  intrb,  fo 
foE  er  au^  ber  ©emeiube  auSgefd^loffeu  luerben,  e§  fei  benu,  bafi  er  fein  3Ser-- 
ge!^en  burcf)  23u^  unb  23e!el^ning  rcal^rf^aft  bereue.  ^ft  inbefj  ein  Drutglieb  mit 
bem  2luGiprucE)e  ber  Glaffe  ober  Sommittee  unjufrteben,  fo  !ann  befjioegen  an 
bte  oierteljal^rltd^e  Gonferenj  appeliert  loerben,  loenn  bem  ^rebiger,  iueld;er  Bei 
ber  3iid[;tung  beS  2lngeflagteu  bie  Sluffid^t  fiif^ret,  ^uoor  Slnjctge  baoon  gomad^t 
ift,  jebod^  foU  e^  ben  ^erfonen,  bie  juDor  ben  Slngeflagten  rid^teten,  nid^t  er= 
laubt  fein,  in  ba^  Urtfjeil  ber  oiertelial^rlid^en  Gonferenj  einjufpred^en. 

^•rage :  2Bag  foU  getljan  roerben,  menn  fid)  3JUttgIieber  gegen  einanber 
Berfiinbigen  ? 

2lntrcort:  ©iinbiget  aber  bein  Sruber  an  biv,  fo  gef^e  ^itx,  unb  ftrafe  il^n 
jioifd^en  bir  unb  il^m  aHein.  Sgoret  er  bid^,  fo  l^aft  bu  beinen  33ruber  gen)on» 
nen.  §bret  er  bidf)  nid)t,  fo  nimm  nod^  einen  ober  jiceen  ju  bir,  auf  ha^  atte 
©adE)e  beftef)e  auf  jroeier  ober  breier  3f"S^"  aJhmb.  J^bret  er  bie  nidjt,  fo  fage 
e§  ber  ©emeinbe.  §bret  er  bie  ©emeinbe  nid)t,  fo  l^alte  il^n  al§  einen  ^eiben 
unb  Conner.    5Kattf)ai  18,  v.  15, 16  u.  17. 

Jrage :  2Ba§  foQ  gefdfiel^en,  roenn  jraifd^en  ©Ueber  unb  ^rebiger  Uneinig^ 
!eiten  entfter^en. 

2lntiDort :  3)er  ''-jirebtger,  ioeld)en  e§  belannt  mirb,  fott  bie  <Sad£)e  unterfu^ 
d)en  unb  foU  ben  ftreitenben  ^art[)eien  uorfdjlagen,  ba^  jebe  ein  ©lieb  ernenne, 
roeld^e  roieber  einen  britten  ernennen,'bcr  bie  '^vac,e  entfd)eiben  foU. 

©ollten  aber  bie  ©eridjteten  mit  ber  ©nfd)eibung  ber  Committee  unjufrie^ 
ben  fein,  fo  lonnen  fie  an  bie  oierte(iaf;rlid)e  Gonfereuj  appelliren,  au^  beren 
©liebern  bie  2lppel[anten  eine  Gommittee  von  uicren  erncnnen  faun,  bie  mieber 
einen  fiinften  enotiljlen,  um  bie  ©ad^e  ju  entfd^eibcn,  unb  nad^  biefem  Urtfjeile 
ift  bie  ©ac^c  befdE)loffen.  ^rgenb  eine  ^erfon,  bte  bennoc^  unjufrieben  mit  bie-- 
fem  2UiSfprud)e  ift,  unb  jebeS  ©lieb,  bag  fid)  lueigert,  in  <pinfid)t  uon  ©d)ulben 
oDer  anberen  3roifti9f2iten  bie  Sad^e  enter  Goinmtttee  ju  iibcrgeben,  nadjOem 
eg  tl)m  Bon  emem  ^rebiger  ober  {^u^Ji'^i^  geratljen  ift,  ober  rcenn  er  ein  ©lieb 
beim  ©eric^te  cerUagt,  e^e  bag  norfjec  ©efagte  oon  tfjm  befolgt  ift,  fo  foil  er 
Don  ber  ©emeinoe  auggefd)loffen  luerben,  eg  fei  benn,  bte  ©ac^e  ift  oon  folc^er 


89 

2lrt,  bafi  er  5.  S.  alg  SSenualter  ober  ©Eccutor  einen  getid^tlid^en  ^roje^  anpn* 
gig  madden  mu|,  ober  roenn  er  in  ©efal^r  ift,  einen  33erluft  ju  erleiben.  ^eber 
Sla^:^'"^'^^'^  fo^  ^'"  3iegifter  in  einem  33ud^e,  in  ^infid^t  ber  SSer^anblungen 
ber  ^ird^e,  ^rojefle,  S;obegfaIIe,  2lu§[d£)Iie§ungen  itnb  2lppeIIationen  ful^ren, 
unb  etne  Sl^fd^rift  be§  Stegifter^  ber  oiertelia^rltd^en  ©onferenj  jufd^iden. 

^rgenb  eme  ^er[on,  bie  eine  ®rlaubni§  juni  (Srmal^nen,  ober  ^srebigen  ju 
erl^alten  roiinfdfit,  mufe  Don  jtpeibrtttel  ber  ©laffe,  Don  ber  er  ein  ®Iieb  ift,  folcf)e 
biird^  ben  {^iil^rer  unterjeicfinete  ®mpfe[)Iiing  Befi^en,  bie  erforbertid^  ift,  unb 
fve  ber  uierteljaJ^rlidjen  (Sonfereni  feiner  Station  ober  Sejirlei  iibergeben. 


Seftttter  9llif^ttitt. 


Pflidjten  htx  PrcHget* 


(^rage ;    JBerd^eS  ftnb  bie  ^flidEiten  eine^  ^rebigerS  ? 

2lntroort :  (Sl^riftum  ben  ©eireujigten  ju  prebigen,  too  fid^  nur  Q\xf)oxet 
einfinben ;  (Slaffen=3Serfaminlungen  ju  errid^ten,  mit  i^nen  iiber  il^ren  ©eelen= 
juftanb  ju  reben,  unb  fie  ju  troften,  bie  2lngefotf)tenen  ju  ftarlen  unb  ^ured^t  ju 
roeifen,  bie  ^ragen  aufjumuntern  unb  alle  im  ®Iau6en,  in  ber  ©nabe  unb 
©rlenntni^  ^efu  Sf^rtfti  ^u  erbauen  fud^en,  nie  unterlaffen  bie  ^ran!en  jn  be= 
fud^eu,  unb  Bei  aHen  ©elegenl^eiten  fid;  }u  beftreben,  bie  Sel^ren  bie  er  prebigt, 
burd^  einen  orbentUd)en  unb  mufterl^aften  Se6en§roanbel  ju  feefraftigen. 

%v.    SBeld^e  2lnn)eifungen  loerben  unfern  ^rebigern  gegeBen  ? 

2lntn),  (Sr  fei  flei^ig  ;  nie  oerliere  er  fetne  Qe\t  mit  unnot^igen  Singen 
an  einigem  Drte ;  er  fei  imnter  ernftl^aft ;  fein  2Baf;tfprud^  fei :  bem  §  e  r  r  n 
gel^eiliget;  er  tneibe  alien  Seid^tfinn  unb  ©d^erjen ;  er  rebe  raenig,  fei  be-- 
I;utfain  im  Ihngange  mit  bem  raeiBIidfien  ©efd^led^t,  unb  oerl^alte  ftd^  in  alien 
©tiicfen  a{§  ein  rcal^rer  Shrift. 

1.  6r  fei  immer  abgeneigt,  u6Ie  ©eriid^tc  ju  glauben ;  glaube  »on  3lies 
manb  etroa^  2Irgeg  o^ne  gute  Seroeife,  unb  lege  aHe  biefe  2)inge  immer  fo  giin* 
ftig  au§,  fo  Dtel  e§  bie  58efd^affenl^eit  berfelben  ber  2Baf)rl^eit  gema^,  ?ulafit. 

2.  6r  rebe  oon  S^Jiemanb  nidE)t§  Ueble§  ;  raaS  er  je  con  einem  benlen  mag, 
bel^alte  er  fold)eg  bei  fid^  felbft,  bi^  er  e§  bemjenigen  felbft,  bem  e§  angel^t,. 
fagen  lann. 

21 


90 

3.  ©ein  ©efd^dft  fei,  ©eelen  ju  retten  fo  vid.  roie  mog(icf) ;  §u  biefem  ©e* 
fd^ofte  ge6e  er  ftc^  auf.  ©r  befuc^e  bie  e§  bebiirftig  finb.  3"  aHen  Stngen 
l^anble  er  nidEit  nati)  feinem  etgenem  ©utbiinfen,  jonbern  alg  em  ©ol^rt  be§ 
©oangeliumg ;  aB  ein  f old^er  ftef)t  eg  t[;m  ju  feme  3eit,  jo  inie  biefe  SSorfc^rift 
lautet :  tntt  ^rebigen,  titit  ^augbefud^en,  mit  Se^ren  unb  33eten,  unb  Setrad^s 
tung  beS  SBorteS  ©otteg  jujubringen ;  bamit  gel^e  er  urn,  big  ber  §err  !ommt. 


mntx  ^ibfj^ittitt. 


id|ten  ber  JHeifeprebiger. 


iJragc :    SBeld^eg  finb  bie  ^Pflic^teu  eineS  Steifeprebigerg  ? 

1.  Slntroort :  ©id^  frieblid^  ber  il^m  con  ber  ©onferenj  iibergebenen 
©teQe  ju  unterioerfen. 

2.  ©r  f oH  bie  Seftellungen  auf  feinem  SJejirle  regelma^ig  beforgen,  prebis 
gen  unb  ®efelIfc^aftg=3Serfamm(ungen  mit  ben  ©liebern  l^alten,  too  immer  eg 
ber  Slaffe  annef^mlid^  ift. 

3.  (Sg  foil  bie  ^flitf)t  beg  beauftragten  ^rebigerg  fein,  ju  fel^en,  bafi  pafs 
fenbe  ^erfonen  alg  2luffe[;er  ober  Setter  in  jeber  Slaffe  angeftellt  finb. 

4.  ©r  foil  alle  fed^g  2)Jonate  brei  3Ibfd()nitte  unferer  3ud^t=C)rbnung  in 
jeber  Slaffe  oorlefen,  ncimlic^  ;  ben  ©laubengsSlrtilEel,  bie  ^flid^t 
ber  SRitglieber  unb  bie  ^flid^t  ber  Seiter  unb  Sluffeljer. 

5.  33ei  bem  35erI)or  t)on  ©liebern  foH  er  alg  ^raftbent  fi^en,  unb  einen 
rid^tigen  Serid^t  bariiber  I)alten.     * 

6.  Sr  foU  bem  2luffirf)tg=3lelteften  einen  genauen  93erid^t  iiber  bie  33e; 
fd^affenl^eit  feineg  Sejirfg  bei  jeber  uierteljci^rigen  (Sonferenj  abftatten,  unb  er 
foil  DerantroortlidE)  fein,  fiir  jebe  regelma^ige  33efteIIung,  bie  er  ju  bebienen  un= 
terlaftt. 

7.  6r  foQ  alien  Unter=9lgenten  beg  3teligiofen  ^ieHegcope'g  2lufirag  ge^ 
ben,  einen  33eridE)t  iiber  alle  Unterfd)reiber  beffelben  in  il^ren  refpectinen  Slad^s 
barfd)aft  ju  l^alten. 

8.  Q,ben  fo  foil  er  einmat  beg  3af)i^eg  mit  ben  Unter=3lgenten  abred^nen, 
imb  einen  58ericf)t  bariiber  on  ben  S)iftrilt=9lgenten  abftatten. 

9.  ©r  foil  ferner  eine  Sifte  von  alien  Seftellungen  auf  feinem  Sejirlc  oug* 
fertigen,  unb  bem  2lufficl)tg:2leltefteu  bei  jeber  jal^rlid^en  ©onferenj  iiberreid^en, 
jum  33eften  begjenigen  rceldEier  biefen  33e}irl  nad^  il)m  bereifen  mag. 


Stoiilftcr  Wbfiftnitt. 


rbination  ber  Jlclte|tem 


1.  3In  bent  baju  teftimmten  Xage  foQ  eine  jd^idEIid^e  ^rebtgt  ober  Qt-- 
mal^nung  gefialten  roerben. 

2.  3lad)'oem  xi)ve  5Ramen  laut  oorgelefen  ftnb,  fo  foE  ber  Sifd^of  ober 
3[e[tefte  fotgenbe  Srrtifet  bem=  ober  benjenigen  oorlefen,  bie  jur  Drbinatton  ge^ 
njal^It  fein  mbgen : 

„2)enn  ein  3leltefter  foC  untabelid^  fein,  aB  ein  §au§^alter  ©otteg  :  nid^t 
eigenfinnig,  nid^t  jornig,  nic^t  ein  2Beinfaufer,  nic^t  pod^en,  nid^t  une^rlid^e 
§anbtf)ierung  treiben  ; 

„©onbern  gaftfrei,  gutig,  jiicfjtig,  gerec^t,  ^eilig,  feufd^. 

„Unb  ^alte  oh  bem  SCort,  ba§  getoi^  tft  unb  le^ren  fann,  auf  ba|  er  tnad^= 
tig  fei,  ju  ermal^nen  burd^  bie  l^eilfame  Sel^re,  unb  ju  ftrafen  bie  3Biberfpred^er." 
Situg  1,  7-9. 

'^x.  ^jaft  bu  bag  3utraiten,  ba|  bu  tnnerlid^  burd^  ben  l^eiligen  ©eift  baju 
angetrieBen  rcerbeft,  bag  Slmt  eineg  2lelteften  auf  bt(^  ju  nel^men,  urn  barinnen 
@ott  ju  feineg  9Jameni  ©l^re,  in  ber  (Semeinbe  ©^rifti  ju  bienen  ? 

3(ntn).    ^c^  traue,  ntit  ber  ^iilfe  @otte§. 

%x.    ©laubeft  bu  ber  §eiligen  ©d^rift  alien  unb  neuen  Seftamentg  ? 

Slntra.    ^a  td^  glaube  biefelBen. 

^r.  SBiaft  bu  beinen  %lex^  ba^in  anroenben,  beinen  eigenen  SBanbel  nac§ 
ber  Sel^re  ©l^rifti  einjurtrfiten,  unb  fo  »iel  in  bir  tft,  bid^  ber  ^eerbe  §u  einent 
2Rufter  beg  c^riftlid^en  Sebeng  oorjufteHen  ? 

2][ntra.    ^d^  raiE,  fo  ©ott  ntein  §elfer  tft. 

gr.  SBinft  bu  benen,  toeld^e  etroa  bie  Ueberftd^t  u5er  un§  anoertraut  fein 
mag,  init  (Sl^rerbtetung  gel^orfanten  unb  il^ren  guten  ©rtnal^nungen  ntit  etnem 
iDtHigen  unb  frieblid^en  ^er^en  nad^tommen  ? 

2lntro.    ^d)  rcill  ntid^  burd^  bie  ©nobe  @otte§  bal^in  Beftreben. 

3)ann  luirb  geSetet. 

3lai^  bem  ©ebete  lege  ber  Sifc^of  unb  bie  3lelteften  einem  jebett  bie  §anbe 
auf  bag  §aupt  unb  fprec^e : 

„?limm  l^iermit  l^in  bie  3SoHmac^t,  bag  Stmt  eineg  2lelteften  in  ber  ®e= 
meinbe  ©otteg  ju  DoHjie^en.  ^m  Xiamen  ©otteg,  beg  SBaterg,  beg  ©o^neg  unb 
beg  l^eiligen  ©eifteg."    2lmen. 

§ierauf  iibergebe  ber  Sifd^of  ober  2lelte[te  einem  jeben  befonberg  bag 
33ibelbuc^,  fpred^enb : 

91 


92 

„9Jimm  l^iermit  bie  3SoEmad)t,  ba^  SBort  ©otte6  ju  lefeit  unb  }u  »erlunbt= 
gen  in  ber  ©emeinbe  Gfirifti. 

Sann  foH  ber  33ifci)of  ober  Sleltefte  beten.  3la(i)  bent  ©ebete  foil  er  au^ 
bent  12.  Capitet  Suca,  a>er§  35—38  lefen  : 

£affet  eure  £enben  unigiirtet  fein,  mtb  eure  Sid^ter  brennen ;  unb  feib  gleid) 
ben  3Wenfd^en,  bie  aitf  ifjren  Serrn  roarten,  inenn  er  aufbrec^eu  luirb  Don  ber 
<^^od;jeit,  auf  ba^  tuenn  er  lomnit  unb  anflopft,  fie  i^m  balb  auftf}un.  ©elig 
finb  bie  ^ned^te,  bie  ber  §err,  tuenn  er  lommt,  toadfienb  finbet.  9Baf)rtid^,  i6) 
fage  eucf; :  6r  rcirb  fic^  auffdjiirjen,  unb  roirb  fie  ju  %i\<i)Q  fe^en,  unb  Dor 
i[;nen  gel^en,  unb  il^nen  bienen.  Unb  fo  er  fomntt  in  ber  anbern  3Bad^e  unb  in 
ber  britten  SCad^e,  unb  loirb  fie  fo  finben,  felig  finb  biefe  ^ned)te. 

S)ann  bete  ber  33ifrf)of,  ober  3leltefte ;  loorauf  bann  ber  folgenbe  ©egen 
ouSgefprod^en  icirb : 

Ser  j3-i^i'^^«  0otte§  erl^atte  eure^erjen  unb  ©innen 
in  ber  © r ! e n  n  t  n  i  |  S  e f  u  6  f)  r  i ft  o  u n  f  e r  §  § e r r n.    2tnten. 


:5)rci5cl)tttcr  9Hfii^ttitt. 


^clte(lf,  iljic  iialjl,  ©rMuntioii  nub  Pflidjt. 


(^rage.    SBoburd^  roirb  ein  ®Iieb  2lettefter  ? 

1.  9Jad^  einer  ^robejeit  uon  brei  ^a^ren  mag  ein  ^rebiger  ber  jci^rlidien 
(Sonferenj  jur  Ueberlegung  Dorgefd^Iagen,  unb  loenn  er  nad^  llnterfuc^ung  von 
berfelben  al^  ein  2teltefter  geroaf;It  roirb,  mag  er  burd^  SUiflegung  ber  ^iinbe 
Don  einem  Sifd)ofe  unb  jroei  2lelteften  orbinirt  roerben.  Sie  jcifjrlid^e  Sonfes 
renj  foU  jebod^  ba§  ^srioilegiunt  f^aben,  Sicentiaten  einen  Grlanbni^fc^ein  }xi 
ertf)etlen,  bie  SEaufe  ju  Derrid^ten,  unb  bag  ©acrament  ju  rei^en,  roo  e§  bie  Unts 
ftdnbe  notf^ig  madden. 

2.  2i$ag  ift  bie  ^pflid)!  eine§  Sttelteften  ? 

©0  oft  al§  er  fatm  ?u  prebigen,  ju  taufen,  unb  bent  9ruffid^t3=3lelteften  ba§ 
2Ibenbnmf)I  beg  £ierrn  augtfjeilen  ju  f)clfen  ;  roenn  ober  ber  9lufftd)tg:2leltefte 
nid^t  beirool^nen  lann,  bann  foTIen  ein  ober  pvei  9U'ttefte  bicfe^'f^idtitoerrid^ten; 
ebcnfo  foH  er  alle  2;^eile  beg  ©otteSbienfleg  Derrid)ten  ;  fid^  bemiif^en,  (5Iaffen= 
SSerfanunhmgen  ju  errid^ten  unb  ju  fjalten,  unb  in  ber  2Ca[)I  ber  Sluffefjer  unb 
J^eiter  beiftefjen. 


93 

3.  aSo  ein  je^l^after  2leltefter  ober  ^rebiger,  roeld^er  felBft  nid^t  2KangeI 
letbet,  an  einem  Drte  prebiget,  raof)tn  fein  3teifeprcbtger  fommt,  jo  foil  er  eine 
©ollefte  madden,  auf  gleid^e  2Set)'e  ein  SSerjeid^ni^  bariifier  aufnef^men,  imb 
fold^e  bem  9litffi(j^t§=3lelte[ten  ober  ber  ©onferenj  jur  Unterftiiljung  biirftigec 
^rebiger,  nel6)e  unter  armen  Seutetx  prebtgen,  iibergeben  ober  iiberfenbcii. 

4.  ©oUte  ein  3iei)eprebiger  ober  2(eltefter  rciinfci^en,  ben  tf;m  augeioiefes 
nen  Sejirf  ju  uerlafjen,  fo  mu§  er  juerft  bem  2liifftci^tg=2lelteften  fc!E)riftlid^  mit 
f einer  2t5[ic^t  )&efannt  madien ;  unb  foltte  einer  jeine  ©telle  oerlaffen  ober  oers 
nad^Uifftgen,  eg  fei  bemi,  roegen  jlran!f)ett  ober  anbern  uncernteibUd^en  llmftaus 
\>en,  fo  foil  er  ber  nad^ften  ja^rlidfien  ©onferenj  Derantraortticf)  fein,  unb  ju  fei^ 
nem  ©el^atte  fiir  bie  ^^it  bered^tigt  fein,  bie  er  racil^renb  bem  ^a^ve  gereifet 
fein  mag. 

5.  SBo  ^rebiger  an  einem  Drte  angefiebelt  gefunben  roerben,  raetd^e  arm 
unb  biirftig  finb,  unb  bennodl)  prebigen  foUen,  fo  ift  e5  billig  unb  red^t,  'Da^  bie 
3lelteften  fiit  il^ren  Unterfjalt  forgen,  in  SSerpltni^  ber  3eit»  ^te  fie  anioenben, 
unb  tnbem  fie  eine  €olle!te  ^u  il^rem  33e[ten  unter  ben  ©efeCfd^aften  il^reS 
SiftrifteS  madden ;  boc§  fott  biefeS  bie  fiir  bie  3ieifeprebiger  auSgefe^te  unb  6es 
ftimmte  ©umme  nirf)t  iiberfteigen. 


a>ievjc5nter  5lbf(||ttitt. 

^rage.    2Bie  foUen  bie  2luffid^tg=3letteften  geroal^lt  roerben  ? 
3(ntroort.    ©ie  foCen  »on  ber  jal^rlid^en  ©onferenj  au§  ben  2lelteften  fiir 
ein  ^ai)v  gejcal^It  rcerben. 

%x.    SBag  finb  bie  ^flic^ten  be§  2luffic^t§=3lelteften  ? 

1.  2lntro.  Sien  il^m  angeroiefenen  S5iftri!t  p  bereifen  unb  fo  oft  ?u  prebi* 
gen  al§  er  lann. 

2.  ®r  l^at  bie  llefierfid^t  in  feinem  ©iftrilte  ilBer  bie  reifenben  unb  fe^* 
l^aften  ^rebiger,  ba§  fie  fid^  bem  ©oangelium  gema|  betragen. 

3.  @r  foil  bie  Bierteljal^rlid^e  unb  gro^e  95erfammlung  fieftellen  unb  too 
moglid^  fiebienen,  bag  2(6enbma^l  ertl^eilen  unb  oiertelial^rlid^e  ©onferenj  I^al* 
ten  mit  ben  gegenrocirtigen  ^rebigern,  (Srmai^nern  unb  33organgern,  auc§ 
unterfudtien,  o5  bie  reifenben  unb  fe^l^aften  ^rebiger  il^re  ^flid^t  If^un,  befon= 
ber§  ob  bie  fe^ljaften  ^rebiger  roo  mijglid^  aUe  ©onntage  prebigen ;  unb  roo 


94 

mel^rere  finb,  biefelben  ju  3eiten  ju  Derroec^feln,  rote  am  tneiften  ^Ru^en  gefd^afft 
luirb :  fie  ermal^nen,  ba§  fie  3"^t  unb  Drbnung  unb  Siebe  unb  ©rnft  bei  ben 
©eineiuben  erf;alten. 

4.  @r  fann  glei^erroeife,  in  SSereinigung  tnit  jraei  aielteften,  ^rebigern, 
Gnua[;nern  ober  £eitern,  (einen  Don  jebem  Umfreife,)  bte  ?Prebiger  auf  feineut 
S)iftrifte  roe^felu.  ©oUte  ein  lltnfrei§  ol^ne  einen  Sieifeprebiger  gefunben 
loerben,  jo  joE  eg  feine  ^fltd^t  jein,  einen  ^rebiger  jum  Sereifen  biefeS  Urns 
IreifeS  big  jur  nadfiften  ja^rlidien  Gonferer?  anjufteHen. 

5.  ©otlte  eg  fid^  jutragen,  ia^  fein  3luf[id)tg  3(elte[ter  in  irgenb  einem 
Siftrifte  loiire,  fo  foK  bem  Sifd)of  augenblidEItd^  9Jacf;ric^t  bacon  gegeben  iDer= 
ben,  biefei*  foil  einen  2lelteften  im  2)iftrt!te  baju  beftininien,  bio  ^ur  jd^rlic^en 
©onferenj. 


lioljl  tier  Sifdjofe  nub  iljvc  |1flidjt. 

forage.    2Bie  foQeii  bie  33i}d)i3fe  geroal^lt  toerben  ? 

2lntroort.  ©ie  ^aupt^Gonferenj  folff  fie  erioa^len,  burd^  bie  3)le^r^eit  ber 
©tinimen ;  aucf)  ftef;t  eg  ber  ©onferenj  frei,  fie,  bie  Sifd^bfe,  nod^  auf  Dier  "^aijve 
beijubef^alten.  Ste  (33ejoaf;Iten  ober  33ifd^ofe  niiiffen  aber  bie  unterfd^ieblid^en 
©onferenjen  bereifen  fi3nnen,  fonft  !onnen  fie  nid^t  gerodl^It  roerben. 

%x.    aBag  finb  bie  ^flic^ten  ber  SBifc^ofe  ? 

2(ntiD.  1.  Sei  xinfern  jnl^rlidien  unb  ©eneralsGonferenjen  a(S  SSorfi^er 
ju  l^anbeln. 

2.  ©ie  l^aben  niit  ben  3(uffid)tgalteften,  bie  auf  ber  (Sonferenj  gegenroars 
tig  finb,  ben  reifenben  ^rebigern  if)re  uerfdjiebenen  Sejirfe  aniuroeifen,  bod^  mit 
ber  ©infdE)ran!ung,  ba^  !einent  3leiie:^rebiger  geftattet  luerbe,  liinger  alg  brei 
auf  einanber  folgenbe  ^afjre  an  berfelben  ©telle  ju  Berbleiben,  auggenonnnen, 
befonbere  llmftcinbe  ntad£)en  eg  notfjioenbig,  unb  bann  nur  mit  SeioiHigung  ber 
©onferenj. 

3.  2)ie  SBifd^ofe  in  SSereinigung  mit  jioei  won  ber  Sonfercnj  ernannten 
2leltefteu  jeigen  ben  2luffid^tgalteften  bie  ^Bejirfe  an,  bie  fte  ju  bereifen  l)ahen, 

4.  ©ie  Tjaben  bie  Sonferenjen  ?u  bereifen,  unb  Ijaben  im  ©eifttid^en,  bie 
Dberauffidjt  itber  aUe  ©eiueinben. 

5.  ^l)nm  fte[;t  eg  ju,  bie  Drbination  ju  uoUjiel^en. 


95 

6.  SBenn  ein  Sifd^of  aufl^ort,  bie  il^m  angeraiefenen  ©onferenjeu  in  ber  @e» 
ttieinfd^aft  ju  bebienen,  fann  er  bod^  fein  6tfc]^i3fltcf)e§  2lmt  itnter  un§  augiiben  ? 
3iein,  eg  fei  benn,  ba^  er  !ranl  ware,  xtnb  roag  berglei^en  Umftanbe  me^r  fein 
mod^ten. 

7.  SBenn  e§  fid^  jutragen  foHte,  ba^  unfere  ©emeinftfiaft  ju  einer  3eit 
leinen  93tfd)of  l^atte,  raeil  fte  enttoeber  geftorfien  ober  fugpenbirt  lodren,  obec 
n)ie  eg  immer  fein  mag  ;  me  foil  9iat^  S^f^^ifft  roerben  ?  S^er  2leltefte  raeldfjer 
in  2{bn)efenl^eit  eineg  Siftf)of§  geraal^It  rairb  jutn  ajJitagiren  an  ber  ©onferenj, 
foU  bie  Sifcfiofg^SteKe  fo  lang  bebienen  alg  bie  (Sonferenj  rcdfiret ;  biefer  foge^ 
roal^Ite  SSorfi^er  f oH  aud^  bie  anbere  ©onferenj  Bebienen ;  er  foU  feinen  ©i^  ntit 
bem  bort  gercal^lten  $8orft^er  nel^men,  urn  tnit  il^m  in  ber  Sonferenj  ju  agiren ; 
tmb  ber  bort  gerotifjtte  35orfi|er  foE  e6en  fo  bie  anbere  (Sonferenj  aud^  5ebienen, 
bamit  eine  jjebe  ©onferenj  roei^,  raie  e§  Bei  ber  anbern  auSfiefjt ;  unb  ba§  iiieBe 
unb  @eineinfdE)aft  erl^alten  roerbe,  u.  f.  m.  Bi§  jur  Jgaupt^Sonferenj,  bie  rcieber 
93ifd^bfe  xtial)lt 

8.  ®§  foU  ber  aSifd^ofe  ^flic^t  fein,  barauf  ju  fel^en,  ba§  roal^renb  jeber 
jafjrlid^en  Sonferenj  eine  fd^icElid^e  ^rebigt  gel^alten  loerbe. 


Sitteulofcs  f  etragcn  mn  IJrebigern, 

grage.  aSag  foU  gefdiel^en,  loenn  ein  S3iftf)of,  Slnffid^tgaltefter  ober  ^re* 
biger  fidE)  eineg  3Ser6red^eng  fd^itlbig  gemad^t,  ba§  im  SDSorte  ©otteg  BerBoten 
ift? 

2lntn)ort.  2Cenn  ein  Sifd^of  raegen  fittenlofem  SBetragen  befd^ulbigt  loirb, 
fo  foQ  eg  einem  2luffid^tga(teften  unb  einem  Slelteften  Be!annt  gemadbt  roerben, 
bie  follen  e§  unterfud^en,  oB  etroag  an  ber  ©ad^e  fei  —  fie  foHen  aBer  !eine 
Ullage  au^er  jraei  ober  brei  ^eugen  annel^men,  a'i^  rcie  ber  2lpoftel  fagt. 
©dEieint  eg  nun,  ba^  er  mit  3?ed)t  Befd^utbigt  toirb,  fo  foQen  fie  eg  fd^riftlid^ 
nel^men,  unb  bem  33ifd^of  eine  3l6fd^rift  baoon  fd^icEen,  unb  eine  3eit  Beftimmen 
TOO  fie  jufammen  fommen,  too  bie  illager  unb  ber  33ifcf)of  gegenroartig  fein 
foUen,  unb  foE  burd^  bie  jraei  Sluffirfitgalteften  unb  brei  2lelteften  unterfud^t 
TOerben.  2Cirb  er  fd^ulbig  Befunben,  fo  foE  er  fd^roeigen  Big  jur  ja^rlid^en 
©onferenj ;  ba  foUen  bie  2luffid^tgalteften  unb  Slelteften  eg  nod^  einmat  untecs 
fud^en ;  roirb  er  fd^ulbig  Befunben,  fo  foH  er  Bom  2lmt  fugpenbirt  TOerben. 


96 

2.  2Benn  ein  2lu|fic^t§=2lelte[ter  rcegen  fittenlofem  Setragen  6efd)ulbigt 
toirb,  fo  foE  e§  ber  niidifte  3leltefte  unb  etii  ^rebiger  imterfuc^en.  3^'';]*  ^^ 
fid)  nun  al§  ob  er  frfiulbig  loiire,  fo  foUen  fie  eS  fd^riftlicf)  net)men,  itnb  bem 
2luffi(^t§alteften  eine  2(bid)rtft  bauou  fd)tcfen,  unb  eine  3t'it  beftimineu,  rao  fic 
foUen  jufammen  lomnien,  rco  bie  Kliiger  unb  ber  2tuffid^t^altefte  gegemuartig 
fein.  S"  Slfiroefenfjeit  beg  a3ifd^of5  foK  ein  anberer  Sluffid^tgaltefter  unb  jroei 
2(eltefte  gerufen  wevben,  bie  foUen  eg  nut  unterfud;en ;  loirb  er  fd)ulbig  gefuns 
ben,  fo  foil  er  fd)n)eigen  biS  jur  Sonferenj,  ba  fott  er  cerantioortlid^  fein. 

3.  2Benn  ein  2(eltefter  ober  ^rebiger  follte  befc^ulbigt  rcerben,  raegen 
fittenlofem  Setragen,  fo  foil  ber  ^rebiger  in  ber  ©egenb,  bem  e§  belannt  rairb, 
noc^  einen  ^rebiger  ober  ©rma^ner  ober  einen  Sjorganger  mit  fid§  ne^men, 
unb  eg  unterfud;en ;  foHte  eg  fd^einen  ba^  er  fd^ulbig  racire,  fo  foU  il^m  3iacf)rid)t 
baoon  gegeben  unb  eine  3^'^  beftinintt  rcerben,  roo  fie,  bie  Hliiger  unb  ber  58e= 
fc^ulbigte  gegenroiirtig  fein.  S)rei  2(eltefte  ober  ^rebiger  foUen  biefen  'gall 
unterfurfien  unb  entfc^eiben,  roeld^e  non  ben  bie  ©ad^e  betreffenben  ^artf)eien 
evnannt  luerben  follen,  inbem  jebe  ^artl^ei  einen,  unb  biefe  beiben  ben  britten 
ernennen ;  loirb  er  iiberfiif)rt,  fo  foE  er  big  jur  ©ouferenj  fc^roeigen,  unb  ber- 
felben  oerantiDortlid^  fein. 

©ollte  aber  l^inreid)enbe  ©enugt^uimg  in  irgenb  einem  ber  uorgelienben 
§oIIe  gegeben  roerben,  entioeber  burd^  bie  2leufeerung  Bon  9Ieue  ober  auf  anbere 
2Beife,  fo  mogen  fie  beibef)alten  luerben,  raenn  eg  fiir  rat[;[am  erad^tet  mirb. 

©ollte  aber  ber  angellagte  ^rebiger,  2lelte[te  ober  35>fd)of  eg  Denoeigern, 
ju  crfd^einen,  nac^bem  er  a3enad)rid)ligung  erljalten,  roann  unb  unb  loo  er  jur 
Itnterfud^ung  unb  3?ed^tfertigung  f ommen  mufe,  fo  foU  er  fugpenbirt  loerben, 
unb  bie  Committee  foil  itjm  benad^rid;tigen,  oor  ber  t)ierteliar)rlid)en  ober 
fa()ilic^en  ©onferenj  ju  erfd^einen,  urn  fid)  joegcu  ber  gegen  iljn  anfjcingigen 
Rlagen  ?u  cerantraorten,  follte  er  aber  auc^  I)ier  nid)t  erfd^einen,  fo  foil  er 
(rocnn  et  nid)t  burd^  ^ranfl)eit  ober  fonftige  triftige  Umftanbe  abgetialten 
rairb)  foa  er  fugpenbirt  ober  auggefd&loffen  roerben,  roic  eg  bie  ©onferenj  fiir 
ratljfam  l)alt. 


©iebcttjc^ntcr  9lbf(ftnUt. 


C!5eljalt  hn  Jlrcbigcr* 


1.  ©ag  &c^ait  eineS  reifenbeu  ^^rebigerS  ober  93ifc^ofS,  toenn  er  leine 
gamilie  i)ai,  [oil  100  ©oEare  unb  feine  Steifeunfoften  fein ;  tDenn  er  eine  ^a-- 
milie  l^at,  foH  er  200  SoUare,  unb  feine  ^ietfeunfoften,  unb  ^augrente,  bie 
jjebod^  nid^t  iiber  $40  fid^  belaufen  barf,  fein. 

2.  3Benn  after  ein  3teife='iprebtger  eine  §amilie  niit  ^inbern  l^at,  foil  bie 
Diertelial^rl.  ©onferen?  feineg  iJreifeS  e§  in  Ue6erlegung  nef;men,  unb  nad^ 
i^rem  ©utbiinlen,  fold^em  ^rebiger,  nefift  oBiger  ©umme,  nod^  eine  lueitere 
Unterftii^ung  geftatten,  fo  'oa^  eg  im  ©anjen  ben  33erf)altnife  unb  Umftanb 
folc^er  jyamilie  gemd^  fein  mag. 

^rage.  SCag  foE  fiir  folcfie  ^rebiger  get^an  rcerben,  raeld^e  nid^t  mef^r 
fdfjig  finb,  il^re  ©teflen  ju  Bebienen,  ober  beren  3Bittit)en  unb  SGaifen  ? 

2lntrcort.  S)ie  ^ntereffen,  rceld^e  ben  oerfd^iebenen  (Sonferenjen  Don  bem 
„a3enet)olent  j^onb"  ju  fallen,  follen  §u  beren  Unterftii^ung  rerraanbt  jebod^ 
ftreng  barauf  gef^alten  roerben,  ba^  ber  „a3enet)olent  g^onb"  ju  leinem  anbern 
3rcecEe  oerroanbt  roerbe.  2Benn  fid^  fotc^e  %aUe,  raie  in  ber  'forage  tefagt,  nid^t 
ereignen,  fo  foUen  bie  ^ntereffen  oon  ^ai)v  ju  ^al^r  aufberoal^rt  raerben,  6ig  fid^ 
fold^e  %aUe  ereignen ;  unb  in  biefem  'gaCe  foE  eg  bie  ^flid^t  ber  ©onferenj  fein, 
eine  Committee  ju  ernennen,  oon  raeldjer  ein  9Jiitglieb  ein  Sifc^of  fein  foE,  bie 
^ntereffen  beg  '^oni^  ju  cert^eilen.  ^ebodf)  rairb  feftgefelU,  ba^  einem  unfdf)i: 
gen  ^rebiger,  roeld^er  oerfjeiratfjet,  nid)t  inefjr  raie  $150  idfjrtid^,  unb  toenn 
unDerf)eiratf;et  nid;t  mel^r  raie  $75,  einer  SBittroe  |75  unb  einem  SCaifen,  nid^t 
mef;r  rcie  120  jdf^riic^  menu  e§  unter  12  S^^r  alt  ift,  bejal^It  roerben  foE. 


©  e  f  d^  e  n  i  e.    ^eber  Jieifeprebiger  in  unferer  ©efeEfd^aft  foE  ber  ©onfes 

renj  jal^rUd^  einen  Serid^t  aftftatten  iifter  aEe  ©efd^enfe  ju  bem  Setrage  Don 

einem  Xf)aler  ober  mel^r,  bie  er  in  feinem  Sejirfe  fiir  fid^  felt) ft  ober  fiir  feine 

(^amilie  erfialten  l^aljen  mag.    Unb  foEte  bie  (Sonferenj  iiberjeugt  fein,  ba^ 

irgenb  ein  ^ejirf  ©efd[)en!e  anftatt  SoEectionen  gegeBen  l^at,  ober  ia'^  fid^ 

ber  ^rebiger  Bemiil^t  l)at,  ©efd^en!e  anfiatt  ©oEectionen  ju  er^alten,  in  fold^em 

j^aBe  foEen  bie  ©efdienle,  al§  ©oEectionen  con  ber  (Sonferenj  betrad^tet  roer^ 

ben.    ©oEte  eg  fic^  aber  nac^  Unterfud^ung  nidjt  fo  jeigen,  fo  foEen  biejenigen 

^rebiger,  bie  ©efd^enfe  erl^ielten,  biefelben  a(g  i[)r  (Sigent^um  bei^alten,  unb 

jufd^ltd^  oflcg,  roag  il^nen  bie  gucfitorbnung  eriaubt,  er^alten 

97 


Sli^tjc^tttcr  m\mtt 


leirtttlj5=(!Icrfmouic, 


21  n  r  e  b  e. 


■  2Bir  finb  l^ier  vox  bem  2lnge[tcf)tc  ©otteS  unb  biefer  gegenrodrtigen  36"9^tt 
Derfatnmelt,  biefe  fieibeii  ^erfonen,  nanUid^  31.  luib  9JJ,  al^  Wlann  unb  ^e\b 
ef)ehd^  jufamiuen  ju  geben.  Sft  ""»  jemanb  gegentudrtig,  bem  etioa  einige 
§mberni^  befannt  finb,  roarum  bie[e  beiben  ^erfonen  ni^t  oerel^elicfit  luerben 
foltten,  ber  §etge  eg  nun  in  gebiif^renber  Drbnung  an,  ober  jcfiroeige  ouf  eiDig 
barnad^. 

(2Birb  nun  leine  Sinbernifs  angejeigt,  jo  frage  ber  ^rebiger  ben  3)Jann :) 

3i.  SBiUft  bu  biefeg  g-rauenjimnter  fiir  bein  GI)eiDei6  anne^nien,  um  in 
bem  @l^e[tanb  mit  \l)x  na<i)  ©otte§  Drbnung  §u  leben  ?  SBillft  bu  t[)r  2kbz  unb 
Sroft  erjetgen,  in  ©efunbf^eit  unb  5tranlf;eit,  in  3ieicf)tr)um  unb  in  Slrmut^  ifir 
pflegen,  unb  bid)  ju  i^r  alleine  l^alten,  rcie  eg  einem  d^rtftlid^en  ®^emanne  ^xu 
fte^t ;  fie  nitf)t  ju  uerlaffen  big  euc^  ber  Xob  fd;eiben  roirb  ?    ©o  antroorte  ^a. 

(Sann  frage  ber  ^rebiger  bag  g-rauenjimmer :) 

(3K.  SBiUft  bu  biefen  3Wann  fUr  beinen  ©fjemann  annel^men,  um  in  bem 
©l^eftanb  mit  ifjm  nad^  ©otteg  Drbnung  ju  leben  ?  SBillft  bu  if)m  gefjorfam 
unb  bienftiDiUig  fein,  il^m  iliebe  unb  (Sf;rfurd}t  erjeigen,  unb  ifjn  pflegen  in 
ilran![;eit,  in  ©efunbf)eit,  in  3teid|tr;um  unb  2lrmut^  ;  mit  aSerlaffung  aCer  an= 
bem,  bid^  aUeine  ju  ifjm  flatten,  roie  eg  einem  d^riftlid)en  ©fjemeib  juftel^t ;  il^n 
nid^t  ?u  oerlaffen,  big  eud^  ber  Xob  fdieiben  loirb  ? 

©0  antroorte  ^  a. 

3Zun  laffe  ber  ^rebiger  bie  SJerlobten  einanber  bie  recite  ^anb  geben,  unb 
fprcd^e : 

2Bag  ®ott  jufammengefugt  f)at,  foil  ber  3Wenfd^  nid^t  fdieiben. 

2Beit  nun  3)1  unb  31  fid)  in  ien  ©fjeftanb  begeben,  unb  fold)eg  aCl^ier  Dor 
©otteg  aingefid^t  unb  ben  gegenroartigen  Beng*-'"  beutlid^  belannt  unb  bejeugt 
f)aben,  fo  erilare  id^  fie  f)iermit  alg  3J?ann  unb  2Beib,  im  9Jamen  ©otteg  beS 
SSaterg,  be§  ©ofineg  unb  beg  §eiligen  ©eifteg.    2lmeu. 


98 


SKemtje^tttcr  5l6fr^ttitt. 


Pott  bet  ^otljtueutiigkeit  tier  ^inigkeit 
uuter  iins  felbfl. 


Saffet  un§,  (au§  "oem  rcetd^eg  mv  jd)on  er!annt  l^aben,)  "oa^  Uebet  ber 
©paltungen  in  ©runbfa|en,  ber  Uneinigleit  im  ©eift,  ober  in  ber  2Ui§ii5ung, 
me  aud)  bte  jd^redlicf^en  S'O^S^"  bacon  filr  ung  felbft  unb  anbere  tief  entpfin= 
ben.  ©inb  toir  etuig,  raag  latm  iin§  ratberfte^en  ?  S^f^eilen  rair  un5,  fo  t)er= 
berben  joir  un^  fel5[t,  ba§  SBerf  ®otte§,  unb  bte  ©eelen  unferer  SKitgtieber. 

j^r.  3Ba§  !ann  balder  getl^au  raerben,  urn  eine  genauere  SSereinigung  unter 
«n§  §u  2Bege  311  bringen  ? 

1.  2lntro.  2a^t  un§  von  ber  iJJoti^roenbigfeit  berfelben  coUig  unb  tief 
ttberjeugt  fein, 

2.  33etet  ernftlidE)  fiir,  unb  rebet  treu  unb  offenf)erjig  mit  einanber. 

3.  2Benn  mix  ung  oerfammeln,  f 0  la^t  nn§  ntemal§  ol^ne  @ebet  auSeman* 
ber  gel^en, 

4.  §attet  fe^r  barauf,  bafi  feiner  beg  anbern  ®a5en  nerad^te. 

5.  Stebet  niemalg  unlauter  ober  Iei(f)t[tnntg  von  einanber. 

6.  Sa§t  un§  fud)en,  einer  beg  anbern  df^aratter  in  oHen  2)ingen  |u  t)er« 
t^eibigen,  in  fo  fern  eg  niit  ber  2Baf;rf)eit  iibereinflimmenb  ift. 

7.  2lrbeitet  in  ®l^ven,  ad^tet  einer  im  anbern  l^bl^er  alg  fid)  felbft. 

8.  SiBir  empfel^Ien  eine  ernftlid)e  Unterfucf)ung  ber  Urfad^en,  IXe* 
Bein,  unb  ®ur  beg  ^erjeng  unb  ber  lird^Iic^en  ^rennuns 
gen. 


99 


guittnjigftcr  9Hifrftnitt. 


Pom  Befudjeii  tjon  tjans  ?u  Hans,  null  bem 
^infdjttrfcn  praktifdjcr  Jlcligtoncn. 


{Jr.  SBie  Ibnnen  rair  benen,  bie  jtcf)  unferer  Dbjorge  miDertrauen,  ferncr 
beJ^iilflic^  fein  ? 

9rntjD.  S'lix^i"  loir  ifjneit  Unterrid)t  ertfjeileu,  in  i[)ren  ^aufern,  ioeId)e5 
fef}r  nbtfjig  ift,  iim  ba§  SSertraueu  unb  bie  ©emetnid;aft  iiitt  ©ott  ju  bcforbern  : 
feruer  fic^  in  ber  9Be[tIiel3e  ab  unb  nn  eiiten  fjinnuli)rfjen  SEanbel  geroofjnen ; 
fid)  l^erjlid^er  Sruberliebe  beflei^igen,  auf  ba^  !etn  arge§  Senfen  itnb  9iid)ten 
einer  gegen  ben  anbern  fein  mag,  unb  tl^un  luie  iwir  iwitnfd^en  getl^an  ju  l^a^ 
Ben. 

^eber  ^rebiger  mu^  es  fid;  511  feiner  ^flid)t  niad;en  bie  Seute  in  ifjren 
§aufern  ju  Befud)en,  fie  ermaf)nen,  in  atlem  ©uten  gejd)idt  ju  feiu.  S3ig  bieg 
nid^t  gettjan  luirb,  unb  imav  niit  (Srnft  unb  (Sifer,  fo  roerben  rcir  im  ©anjen 
joenig  ge&effert  luerben,  unb  unfere  ©ottfe[ig!eit  i»irb  ntdjt  lief  genug  gegriin^ 
bet:  fotglid^  iDO  loir  and)  fetn  nibgen,  foil  lein  unnii^eg  ©efd^rca^  aug  bem 
SJZunbe  ge^en. 

Di)ne  ^mei^d  ftnb  biefe  ^augbefud^e  unb  befonberS  ®rmal^nungen  auf  bie 
feicrlid^en  2Borte  be§  2lpoftelg  gegriinbet : 

„^d)  geBe  bir  ben  2luftrag  uor  ©ott  unb  bem  .*oerrn  ^efu  S^rifti,  ber  5ei 
feiner  2Biebererfc^einung  bie  Sebcubigen  unb  bie  3;obter  rid)ten  loirb.  93itte, 
prebige  ba6  2Bort,  I)alte  bamit  an,  e§  fei  jur  rec^ten  3eit  ober  jur  Unjeit,  ftrafe, 
brol^e,  erma^ne,  niit  aHer  ©ebulb  unb  iiangmutf).  —  2.  %m.  4,  2 — 2. 


100 


(litt  tt.  jtoattjigftcr  Slbft^n. 

Pon  km  Knterridjte  tier  ^ugenb. 

j^rage.  SBoS  foE  jum  93eften  ber  J^erantoad^fenben  3"9eni>  getl^an  roer* 
ben? 

SCntroort.  2Ber  filr  ©ott  unb  ba§  §ei[  ber  ©eelen  etnigen  (Sifer  l^at,  'Ser 
fange  bog  2Ber!  ofine  SSerjug  an.  2Bo  ^inber  ftd^  befinben,  Bcrfammle  fie  fo 
oft  e§  tf)uttUd^  unb  nu^Ud^  ift ;  rebe  mit  il^nen ;  unterioeije  unb  erma^ne  fie  im 
©uten ;  bete  ntit  il^nen  ernfttid^  bod^  finblic^,  ha^  fie  i^ren  ©d^opfer  unb  (Srlo* 
fer  mogen  lennen  lenien  in  il^rer  ^ugenb. 


Stoei  tt.  jtaianjigftcr  9l6f^ttitt. 


3M]n  --  irurken. 


^etnem  t)on  unfern  ^rebigern  ober  SDiitglieber  foil  e5  eriaubt  fein,  3Ser= 
faffer  eineS  So!trinal:33ud)e§  ober  ^anxp^letS  ju  roerben,  ol^ne  bie  ©ene^mis 
gung  ber  jafjrlidEien  ©onferenj  ober  einer  t)on  berfelfien  geroal^Iten  auSerlefenen 
©ommittee. 

©oCte  irgenb  ein  ^rebiger  ober  3)iitglieb  biefeg  ©efe^  iibertreten,  fo  ift  er 
ber  ©laffe,  ber  Diertelja^rlitfien  ober  jci^rlid^en  ©onferenj,  rote  bie  ©ad^e  fein 
tnag,  oerantroortlid^. 


Srci  ttttb  jUittttjtgfiter  Slbfiftttitt. 


^  dj  m  d  r  c  tt . 


2Cir  glauBen,  ba§  bie  2Irt  unb  2Beife  bie  SOBal^ri^eit  ?u  Bejeugen  burd^ 
2lffirmation,  roenn  roir  in  gefe^tid^er  ^^^orm  baju  aufgeforbert  roerben,  feierlid^, 
geroiffenl^aft  unb  tjor  ©ott  unb  2Kenfd^en  &  i  n  b  e  n  b  fur  ung  ift,  bie  2Cal^rl^eit 
?u  fagen,  bie  gan?e  2Bal^r§eit,  unb  nid^tg  alg  bie  9Baf|r[;eit. 


101 


2?icr  ttttb  jtoaujigftcr  9Hfr^nUt. 
liili^e  Cletriinke. 

Xk  !£ifttIIation  unb  ber  3SerIauf  f)i^iger  ©etranle  foil  burc^aug  ber  gan; 
jen  ©efellfd^aft  t>erboten  fein.  ©oUte  irgenb  ein  ^rebiger,  ©rniaf)ner,  gii^rer 
ober  aJlitglieb  Dor  unb  narf)  ber  niic^ften  ja^rtidien  Gonferenj  im  3nf)re  1842 
fic^  bamit  abqeben,  fo  foil  er  fiir  bag  3>erge^en  ber  Diertelia^rlid^en  ober  id^r» 
lid^en  ©onferenj,  »on  toeld^er  er  ein  3JZitglieb  ift,  DerantrcortUc^  fein.  SCenn 
ber  iiBertretenbe  33ruber  ein  6rmat)ner,  (^iifFei^  ober  3JJitglieb  ift,  fo  foQ  e^  bie 
?Pflicf)t  beg  beauftragten  ^rebigerg  fein,  i[)n  in  ©anftmutl)  ju  Dermat)nen,  roenn 
eg  ein  ^rebiger  ift,  fo  foH  eg  bie  ^flirf)t  beg  oorfte^enben  2luffe§erg  ber  »iertel= 
jjdi^rlicl^en  ober  ial)rlid)en  Gonferenj  fein,  il)n  ju  erma^nen,  oon  feinem  unljeili- 
gen  ©eroerbe  abjufte^en ;  unb  rcenn  aQe  freunblid^  3ierfuc^e  fc^eitern,  fo  foQ 
fold^'  ein  Uebertreter,  ber  ju  unferer  Sixxdje  gef)ort,  oon  berfelben  auggefd^loffen 
rcerben.  ^nbeffen  foE  biefe  9legel  nic^t  fo  in  2lnt»enbung  gebrac^t  roerben,  um 
Sruggiften  unb  anbere  in  i^rem  aSerfauf  oon  2Kebijinen,  ober  anbere  in  il)ren 
gefcf)aftlidE)en  Slrbeiten,  abju^alten. 


pttf  unb  jttiattjiBfter  9lbf(^tiitt. 
Ir  elm  ail  ere  I 


^reimauerei  in  jebem  ©inne  beg  SBorteg,  ift  gan^ltd^  con  ung  geun^= 
billiget,  unb  foE  auf  feine  SBeife  in  unferer  ©efeCfd^aft  gebulbet  loerben. 
©oaten  eitiige  unferer  3Kitglieber  fortfal)ren,  'greimauer^Sogen  ju  befuc{)en, 
ober  irgenb  einer  if)rer  ^rojeffionen  alg  ©lieber  beijurcoi^nen,  ober  fonft  fi^ 
ber  a3riiberfd£)aft  beigefeHen,  fo  fd^liefeen  fie  fid^  baburc^  ai§  ©Ueber  unferer 
jiird^e  aug. 

®erft§  unb  ^toanjigftcr  9lbf^ttitt. 

S  k  I  a  u  e  r  e  i  ♦ 

2inc  ©flaterei,  in  jebem  ©inne  beg  SBorteg,  ift  ganjiidtj  oerboten,  unb  foil 
auf  feine  2Beife  in  unferer  ^ircf)e  gebulbet  loerben.  ©oUten  einige  in  unferer 
©efeUfd^aft  gefunben  loerben,  roeld)e  ©Ilaoen  l^alten,  fo  fonnen  fie  feine  TliU 
glieber  bleiben,  au^er  fie  manuniittiren  ober  fe^en  folc^e  ©flaoen  perfonlic^ 
frei.  102 


©Icktt  mi  jtoattjigftcr  9lifrftttltt. 


Conjlitutiott  tier  Conferen?  =  l^udjbrudietei  in 
CirckuiUe,  ®l)io. 


I.  Slrtifel. 

1.  S5a§  o6ige  ®taBliffement  foil  bie  Sonferen5:93ud^brucferei  ber  Sereimg^ 
ten  Sriiber  in  Sl^rifto  genannt  rcerben. 

2.  2lIIe  pterin  berailligte  gefe^gebenbe  ©ercalt  ift  ber  ^aupt:(Sonferenj  6e= 
jagter  ^trd^e  iibertragen,  beren  ^flicf)t  e§  ift,  irgenb  einige  SfJegeln  ju  madden 
unb  ju  Berbeffern,  bie  if)rem  Urt^eite  nad)  jroedmci^ig  fd^einen  ntogen, 

3.  ©g  foil  bie  ^flidfit  ber  ^aupt-Gonferenj  fein,  alle  Dier  '^a^ve  brei 
S^ruftee'g  }n  ernennen,  ober  ju  rad^Ien,  beSglei^en  einen  §erau§ge5er  unb 
©d^a^meifter  anjunefimen. 

4.  SOBenn  fid^  eine  ©rtebigung  in  bem  Separtement  beg  §erau§ge&er§ 
ober  be§  ©d^a^meifterg  burc§  j?ran!f|eit,  Xoh  unb  auf  fonftige  SCeife  ereignet, 
fo  foQ  e§  bie  ^fIidE)t  ber  S^ruftee'g  fein,  eine  anbere  taugUcf)e  ^erfon  ober  ^er* 
fonen  jur  2lu§fuIIung  Befagter  eriebigter  ©telle  bi§  jur  ©i^ung  ber  nad§ften 
§oupt=©onferenj  anjunel^men. 

5.  ©leid^erraeife  foU  eg,  im  ^^alle  fid^  eine  ©riebigung  bei  ben  ^rufteeS 
burd^  Xo))  ober  fonft  ereignet,  bie  5PfIid)t  ber  u6rigen  beiben  fein,  eine  britte 
^erfon  ju  roaljlen,  urn  befagte  eriebigte  ©telle  bi§  jur  ©i^ung  ber  ndd^ften 
§aupt--®onferenj  ju  fiillen. 

6.  ®er  ©rtrag  beg  befagten  Stabliffementg  iiber  bie  2luggaben  fiir  reifen* 
be  unb  unfal^ige  ^rebiger,  foil  fiir  SCittinen  unb  SCaifen  oerroenbet,  unb  ju 
biefem  ®nbe  unter  bie  nerfd^iebenen  iaf)rlid§en  (Sonferenjen  oert^eilt  roerben, 
rcie  eg  bie  §aupt=Sonferenj  anraenben  nxag. 

II.  2lrti!el. 

1.  ®g  foH  bie  ^flid^t  ber  Xrufteeg  fein,  aHe  fed^g  2JJonate  mit  bem 
©dia^meifter  unb  §erauggeber  ^Jec^nungg^Slbfd^lu^  ju  l^alten  unb  ber  ©d^a|= 
tneifter  foH  einen  a3erirf)t  augfertigen  unb  biefen  ber  ja^rlid^en  (Sonferenj  beg 
©cioto=®iftri!teg,  forote  ber  ©eneral^Gonferenj  iiberfenben. 

2.  (Sg  foH  bie  ?PflidE)t  ber  ja^rlidEien  ©onferenj  fein,  in  ber  gfifd^enjeit 

ber  §aupt=(Sonferen5  barauf  ?u  fef}en,  bafi  ber  §erauggeber,  ©d)a^meifter  unb 

bie  S^ruftee'g  il^re  2lmtgpflirf)ten  tl^un,  rcie  biefe  Sonftitution  eg  tjerlangt. 

103 


104 

3.  2luf  bffentli(^e  2ln!lage  irgenb  eine§  ber  obcngenanntcn  Seamten  foil, 
e§  bie  ^Pflid^t  ber  obengenannten  jd^rlid^en  ©onferenj  fein,  bie  befagte  2lnIIagc 
ju  unterfud^cn,  iinb  loenit  fte  t()rer  3)?eimtng  nad)  fd^ulbig  finb,  fie  511  t)era6fd^tc= 
ben,  xmb  bie  erlebigte  ©telle  6i§  jur  ©i^ung  ber  ticid^ften  §aupt=Sonferenj  ju 
befe^en. 

III.  21  r  t  i  I  e  I. 

1.  eg  foil  bie  ^flid)t  be6  §erau§geber§  fein,  ftrcnge  2lufmer!fam!eit  auf 
atte  jum  ©inriidfen  eingefanbte  3[)}ittf)eilungen  ju  rid)ten,  biefelben,  roenn  e§ 
niJtl^ig  ift,  ju  reuibiren,  unb  fie  einjuriiden ;  jebocf;,  luenn  er  irgenb  einige  er= 
l^ielte,  raeld^e  feiner  SUJeinung  nad^  nid^t  niit  ber  Sef)re  unb  ien  S'legeln  imferer 
Mrd^e  iibereinfdmen,  fo  foU  er  fold^e  bem  ©d^a^meifter  ober  einem  ober  mef)' 
ren  ber  2:ruftee§  oorlegen,  unb  loenn  biefelben  fie  nerroerfen,  fie  5uriidff}alten, 
fonft  aber  einriidfen. 

2.  ©5  foil  bie  ^flid}t  beg  §erauggeber§  fein,  eigene  3Katerie  fiirjebeg 
Slatt  ?u  frfireiben,  ba§  Sefen  be§  6orrefturbogen§  genau  ju  beforgen,  Slrtiiel 
augjurod^len,  k. 

3.  ©leidierroeife  foU  e§  bie  ^flid)t  be§  §erauggeber§  fein,  eine  aUgemeine 
Sluffid^t  iiber  bie  3lrbeiten  in  ber  Sud)brudEerei  ju  l^alten,  unb  barauf  ju  fe^en, 
ba§  fie  i^re  3eit  "id^t  ini  9)?iiffiggange  jubringen. 

4.  2)ie  Xrufiee'g  foHen  eine  aUgemeine  2Iuffid^t  iiber  ben  ^erauSgeber 
unb  ©dEia|meifter  l^alten,  unb  barauf  fel^en,  ba^  fie  il^re  ^flidE)t  t^un,  unb  too 
nid^t,  mogen  fie  il^re5  2lmteg  entfe^t  roerben,  big  jur  Si^ung  ber  nad^ften  jdl^rs 
IidE)en  Gonferenj,  lueldje  bie  <S>ad)e  entfd^eiben  foH,  in  roeld^em  %aUe  bie  befag: 
ten  2;ruftee'g  bie  erlebigte  ©telle  befe^en  fotlen. 

IV.  21  b  f  c^  n  i  1 1. 

®§  foQ  bie  ^flid^t  be§  ©d^a^meiftetg  fein,  ©otge  fiir  aHe  cinftraeitigen 
2lngelegenf;eiten  ber  33ud^bruderei  ju  fjaben,  aUe  bam  geprigen  S8iidE)er  ju 
fUl^ren,  auf  2lnn)eifung  ber  Xruftee'g  fotd^e  aJJaterialien  ju  liefern,  alg  ^u  alien 
3citen  notf;ig  fein  tnbgen,  unb  unter  ber  2lnn)eifung  befagter  2;ruftce'g  alg  ein 
aOgemeiner  S8uc^:2Igent  ju  l^anbeln. 

2.  S)er  ©d^a^meifter,  roenn  er  nid^t  ntit  jetnen  amtlic^en  ^pflid^ten  be' 
fd^dftigt  ift,  foU  rcie  eine  anbere  §anb  in  ber  Sud^brudEcrei  arbeiten. 

3.  (Snblid^  foUen  bie  Sruftee'g  bag  $)led^t  Ijaben,  irgenb  einige  9?ebenge» 
fe^e  ju  tnad;en,  alg  il^nen  jur  Dlegulation  ber  ntinbern  Suc^bruderei^Slngelegen; 
l^eiten  bienlid^  fd)einen  mbgen,  tnit  bem  aSorbel^alt,  baft  fie  feine  ber  Seftim' 
mungen  biefer  Gonftitution  Derle^jen. 


Pud|  =  Jlgentfdjofi 


1.  ®g  foe  ein  33uc^=2lgent  in  jebem  jjal^rUd^en  ®onferen5=S)iftri!te  ernannt 
toerben,  beffen  ^Pfltc^t  eS  fein  foH,  aHe  Siid^er  tc.  ju  iiberne^men  bie  i^m  con 
bem  ©c^a^meifter  gefanbt  rcerben,  unb  bie  bem  6onfcren?=S8ud^bruderci--®ta6* 
Uffemeitt  in  ©ircleoiCe  jugepren. 

2.  Ser  befagte  Slgent  joE  bem  ©d^a^meifter  be^  ©onferenj^Sud^brudEereis 
©tabliffementS  in  ©ircIeDtEe  9ted^nung  abjulegen  fd^ulbig  fein. 

3.  ©g  foH  bie  ?PfIid^t  beg  SudEiagenten  fein,  fo  roeit  e§  fid^er  unb  tl^unlid^ 
fein  tnag,  aHe  il^m  con  bem  ©d^a^meifter  gefanbten  Siid^er  an  bie  ©iftrifts 
5Prebiger  jum  IRu^en  ber  ^ird^e  ju  oertl^eilen. 

4.  2)er  33ud^agent  foU  einc  rid^tige  SRed^nung  iiber  oHe  fitr  bag  befagte 
(£onferenj-33ud^brudEerei=(StaBIiffement  gemad^ten  3Sert^eilungen  unb  (SoIIef^ 
tionen  l^alten.  22enn  Siid^er  in  feinem  Siftrifte  fe^len,  foU  er  ben  Sd^a^meis 
fter  oermittelft  93riefe  bacon  benad^rid^tigen. 

5.  Ser  2lgent  foH  mit  bem  ©d^a^meifter  jebe  fed^§  SRonate  uetmittelft 
aSriefe  ober  auf  anbere  2Beife  abanbern. 


9ltm  tt.  jtottnjigfter  TOfrjnitt. 

Horn  l^aueii  mn  Perrammluu90l)aufei:n  unb  tier 
bahci  ^tt  beobadjtcnbett  C^rbnimg, 


gr.  Sft  etroag  anjuratfien  im  Setreff  beg  S3aueg  oon  2?erfammlung§= 
Pufcrn  ? 

2lnt.  Safit  aHe  unjere  $8erfammlunggl^aufer  e\n\a6)  unb  anftanbig,  mit 
freien  ©i|en,  unb  mit  nidE)t  me^r  Soften  alg  notl^ig  ift,  erbaut  loerben. 

%v.  2Bem  foUen  unfere  3]erfammlunggl^aufer,  unb  bie  baju  gel^origen 
©runbftiidEe  im  i^aufbriefe  jugefdfirieben  fein  ? 

2lntn).    (giner  33erfammlung  con  Sruftee'g  unb  il^ren  Stad^fotgern  im 

2lmte,  all  anoertrauteS  (Sigentl^um  ber  ^ird^e  ber  3?ereinigten  Sriiber  in 

e^rifto. 

105 
22 


106 

jjr.    2Bte  roirb  eine  SSerfammlung  Don  S:ruftee§  gerod^It  ? 

3(ntn).  SBo  immer  eine  ©efellfc^aft  bie  2[bftcf)t  [;at,  ein  35erfammlung§5 
I^ait5  ju  Bauen  ober  511  faufen,  fo  joE  e§  bie  ^fli(f)t  beS  £etter§  obev  9luffe[;erg 
einer  jold^en  ©efellfcfjaft  jein,  e§  ber  rierteljar^rlidjen  ^ouferenj  be§  Siejirf^ 
obev  ber  Station  511  iuelcf)er  jie  gel^oren,  anju^eigen,  beren  ^ftid^t  e5  fein  foH, 
eine  25erfammlung  von  nid;t  luenigcr  alS  brei  eiiiftdjtSDoIIen  2;ruftee§  ju  ernen* 
nen.  9)?it  bem  3Sor5ef)aIt  jebod^,  ba^  t)on  feinem  werlangt  roerbe,  longer  al§ 
t)ier  5|a^re  ?u  bienen,  e6  fei  benn  xtnumganglid^  not^inenbig, 

^eine  ^erfon  joU  a\§  aiilafjig  jur  SCa^l  aI5  ein  2;ru[tee  fiir  irgenb  ein§ 
unferer  3SerfammIung§l^aufer  fcin,  rceld^e  fein  regelma^igeg  SJiitglieb  unferer 
lirdie  ift. 

%x.  2Bie  joHen  SCrufteeS  Beim  Sauen  eineS  ^Oerfammlungg^aufeg  Ber= 
fal^ren  ? 

2lntn).  ©ie  foUen  eine  ©djal^nng  be§  33etrag§  madden,  roeld^er  notl^ig  ifi, 
eine  ©ntnblotte  511  laufen,  ?u  Baucn  xtnb  fotc^e  anbere  S>erbefferungen  311  ina= 
d^en,  alg  fiir  notl^ig  erad)tet  raerben  mogen ;  fie  foHen  jebod^  nid^t  ju  hanm  an- 
fangen,  Bi§  jinei  ®rittr)eile  beg  nac^  biefer  ©dia^ung  notf)igen  ©elbeg  gefid^ert 
ober  unterfd^rieben,  iinb  gleid^erraeife  ein  gefe^Iid^eS  3ied^t  ju  ber  Sotte  eriongt 
ift,  auf  roeld^er  fie  511  Bauen  Beabfid)tigen, 

©ie  follen  jjal^rlid^e  33erfammUmgen  !f}alten,  unb  eine  rid)tige  nnb  gered^te 
Urhmbe  in  einem  ju  biefem  ^mede  angefd^afften  33ud}e  von  alien  S5erf;anblun= 
gen  il^rer  Serfammlung  eintragen,  roeld^eS  ^nd)  ber  oierteljafirnd^en  Gonferenj 
be§  Befagten  ©iftrictS  ober  ber  Station  jeberjeit  jur  ^nfpection  offen  fein  foil. 

Sie  foKen  ©orge  fiir  iia^  (Sigentfjum  beg  9?erfanintlung§f}aufe§,  ba§ 
©runbftiidf,  ben  SSegrcibnifipIa^,  2c.  tragen. 

jyr.  SBaS  foE  getf;an  inerben,  luenn  fid^  in  ber  SSerfantntlung  ber  2:ruftee5 
eine  ©riebigung  ereignct,  baburd^,  ba§  einer  auff^brt  ein  SKitglieb  ju  fein,  burd^ 
®ntfel^itng  rom  3lmte,  2;ob,  ober  fonft  ? 

2lntir).  (S§  foU  bie  ^flid)t  ber  uiertetja^rUdjen  (Sonferen-,  fein,  eine  paffen= 
be  ?Perfon  ober  ^perfonei;  jn  ernennen,  fo[dE)e  ©riebigung  ober  Srlebignngen 
auSjufiiHen. 

%x.    2Ca§  foU  getf)an  iwerbcn,  loenn  irgenb  eineS  unferer  §dufer  leer  ift  ? 

3lntiD.  65  foil  bie  ^flid;t  einer  uiertelidl)rlid;en  Gonfereiij  beS  ndd;ften 
33ejir!5  fein,  nid)t  rceniger  nI5  brei  fd^idlid^e  ^erfonen  aI5  S^rufteeS  ju  ernennen, 
lueld^e  bie  ©eroalt  IjaBen  foKen,  roenn  fie  ba|U  t)an  jioei  2)rittl^eilen  ber  ©lieber 
biefer  ©onferen?  erntiid^tigt  roerben,  foId^eS  33erfamntlung5r)au§  unb  roaS  baju 
gelprt,  t)erpad)ten,  ju  wcrrenten  ober  ju  »erlaufen,  unb  ba5  uon  fold^ent  9?er= 
pad}ten,  SSerrenten  ober  33ertauf  entftanbene  ©elb  ju  Derroenben,  roie  bie  6on= 
ferenj  e§  anioeifen  mag. 


107 

31  n  m  e  r  f  u  n  g.  S)ie  2:rufteeg  foHen  in  alien  ^-allen  ©orge  tragen,  bie 
Uebertragg=Urfunben  gefe^md^tg  auSgefertigt  unb  in  ben  ©ountt)=Urfunben 
Sud^e,  iDO  i>a^  ©igenti^um  ift,  eingetragen  ju  l^aBen,  bag  ift,  bie  ilauf§=Urfunbe 
auf  fie  unb  il^re  S'iad^folger  im  2Inite  al§  anuertrauteS  ®igent[)um  ber  J^irc^e  ber 
SJereinigten  ^Briiber  in  ©l^rifto  ge[d^rie5en  §u  I^a6en,  unb  bafj  fie  ein  35erfamm= 
lungSfjaug  jum  (SeBraud)  ber  2)JttgIiebet  ber  Befagten  ^trd^e  ben  Jlegein  ber 
Sud^t=Drbnung  gemiil  Bauen  laffen,  bie  »on  ^eit  ju  3^it  Don  ber  ^ircf)e  ange- 
nonmien  raerben  tnogen. 


^rcijigfter  9lbHttitt. 


Jeugtiiffc 


SWitglieber  t)on  vmferer  ©efeEfd^aft  roeld^e  oon  einem  ^(a|e  nad^  bem 
anbern  uerjiel^en,  f oHen  fic^  ein  3engnif!,  roetd^eS  bnrd^  einen  ^-ii^rer  ober  ^rebi= 
ger  unterjeidinet  fein  foQ,  'nerfd^affen,  namlidf) :  „3d^  Bejeuge  l^iermit,  bafi 
21.  33.  ein  ©lieb,  con  gutem  Setragen  in  ber  ^ird^e  ber  3Sereinigten  Sriiber  in 
©l^rifto  Big[)er  geroefen  ift.    (3)atuin.) 

3Benn  ^rebiger  von  einem  6onferen5=S)iftril£t  nad^  einem  anbern  jie^en,  fo 
follen  fie  fid^  von  ber  ©onferenj,  in  roeld^er  fie  Bigger  geftanben,  ein  3eugni^ 
oerfd^affen. 


3n{)alt. 


Seite. 

Sleltefte,  il^re  SBa^t  Drbination  unb  il^re  ^fltdit 

92 

2luffid)t§=aelteite,  aBa^l  unb  ^fltc^t 

93 

a3uc^=2Igentfc^aft     .... 

.       105 

35ud)er=Srucfen               .... 

101 

Glaffen  ?u  errid^ten  unb  ju  ^olten 

87 

©laffen            ..... 

87 

©onftitution  ber  (Sonferen?=3Bnc^bnicIerei  m  GircIeoiHe,  D 

^to                .       103 

©onftitution  ber  Kircfie    .... 

79 

Sag  ®lau5en§befenntni§ 

78 

2)ie  3lufna[;me  won  ^rebigetn 

83 

2)ie  ciertelial^rlicfie  Gonferenj 

84 

{^reimauerei      ..... 

102 

(Mel^alt  ber  ^rebiger 

97 

©eneraI=6onferenj           .... 

81 

§eiratf;g=Seremonie 

98 

§t^tge  ©etranfe              .... 

102 

Sdl^rUdE)e  Gonferenj 

82 

3}Jitglieber  tm  2(IIgemeinen 

85 

Crbination  ber  2lelteften 

91 

^fUd^ten  ber  ^rebiger      .... 

89 

^flid^ten  ber  Sieifeprebiger 

90 

©(f)n)oren         ..... 

101 

©flaoerei                .... 

.       102 

©ittenlofeg  SBetragen  Don  ^rebiger 

95 

Urfprung  ber  33ereintgteu  Sriiber  in  S^rifto 

75 

3Son  ber  ?{ot^itienbtg!eit  ber  ©iiiigleit  nnter  un5  felbft    . 

99 

SSon  bcm  Unterrirf)te  ber  ^ugenb 

.      101 

SOoin  33efuc[)en  oon  ^an^  ju  §aii§,  itnb  bem  ©infd^avfe 

n  praltifc^er 

3leligtonen            .... 

100 

aSom  33auen  oon  aSerfammlunggfjdufern  unb  ber  babei  ju  6 

eobarfitenben 

Drbnung       .... 

.      105 

2Baf)l  ber  Sifc^bfe  unb  i^re  Wici)t  . 

94 

Scugnifle               .... 

.      107 

108 


CERTIFICATION. 


I  HEREBY  certify  that  the  German  Discipline  prior  to  1815,  and 
those  of  1815,  1817,  1819,  and  1841,  as  contained  in  this  volume, 
are  a  faithful  reproduction  of  the  originals,  including  errors  of 
orthography,  punctuation,  capitalization,  and  typography. 

Carl  Karstaedt. 

Dayton,  Ohio,  September  6,  1895. 


109 


Date  Due 

'^^^^fe,,^ 

is^ 

fi-f-r       .  j 

igyQ 

tCAU    -r  o 

nm  1  8 

iSyi 

nnD      ^ 

^\m 

|\PH      ^ 

f  •*' 

d 

PRINTED 

IN  U.  S.  A. 

